Skip to main content

Full text of "International Legislation A Collection Of The Texts Of Multipartite International Instruments Of General Interest Voluem VI 1932 1934"

See other formats


(Etig 




This Volume Is for 
REFERENCE USE ONLY 



Publications of the 
Carnegie Endowment for International Peace 

Division of International Law 
Washington 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 

VOLUME SIX 
1932-1934 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 

A COLLECTION OF THE TEXTS OF 

MULTIPARTITE INTERNATIONAL INSTRUMENTS 

OF GENERAL INTEREST 



EDITED BY 

MANLEY 0. HUDSON 

WITH THE COLLABORATION OF 

RUTH E. BACON 



VOLUME VI / 1932-1934 
NUMBERS 304-401 



WASHINGTON 

CARNEGIE ENDOWMENT FOR INTERNATIONAL PEACE 

700 JACKSON PLACE, N. W. 

1937 



COPYRIGHT 1937 

BY THE 
CARNEGIE ENDOWMENT FOR INTERNATIONAL PEACE 



PREFACE TO VOLUME VI 

Four volumes of this series on International Legislation, for the ten years 
from June 28, 1919, to June 30, 1929, were published in 1931; and a fifth 
volume for the period from July I, 1929, to December 31, 1931, was pub- 
lished in 1936. This sixth volume covers the period from January I, 1932, 
to December 31, 1934. Its bulk is an indication of the unceasing legislative 
activity which characterizes the current development of international law. 
So many international agencies now exist, so many changes are occurring in 
international life, and so pressing are the needs for further organization of the 
international community, that the legislative content of international law 
is being extended year by year; the year 1934 was particularly productive. 

In this volume the texts of some 150 instruments are reproduced. In 
their selection, an effort has been made to include all multipartite agreements 
which were signed or otherwise brought to a stage admitting of definitive 
governments during the period of three years. Mere drafts and 
inrtfyWcPdrafts are not included; but this does not apply to the so-called 
" draft conventions " adopted by the International Labor Conference, which 
are subject to ratification though not signed. Of the instruments included, 
all but 28 are indicated to have entered into force. As in previous volumes 
of the series, the line has not been drawn to exclude signed instruments not 
brought into force; they may have an important place in the history of legis- 
lation, and some of them may yet be made effective. When the type of the 
volume was closed, 91 of the instruments reproduced had been registered 
with the Secretariat of the League of Nations in accordance with the provi- 
sions of Article 18 of the Covenant, and, with the exception of the labor con- 
ventions, these instruments had been or will be published in the League of 
Nations Treaty Series. 

The variety of the instruments, with respect to their legal character, seems 
to merit special attention. To some extent it is indicated by the titles given 
to instruments in almost all cases the editor has endeavored to reproduce 
the titles assigned by the negotiators. This volume contains 43 so-called 
conventions, 30 protocols, 26 agreements, 21 sets of rules or regulations, 7 
declarations, 5 arrangements, 4 treaties, 2 acts (including final acts which incor- 
porate agreements), 2 pacts, 2 proc&s-verbaux, 2 statutes. Other titles em- 
ployed are measures, optional clause, provisions. Why was one of these 
titles used instead of another? Definite lines of demarcation cannot be laid 
down. The choice is sometimes dictated by a tradition prevailing in a par- 
ticular field of legislative activity, as in the work of the conferences of the 
Universal Postal Union and of the conferences on the protection of industrial 
property; some of the titles are intended to indicate the subsidiary character 
of an instrument, as in the use, on certain occasions but not on others, of the 



Viii PREFACE 

title protocol; some of the titles are intended to indicate informality; in some 
cases the title used may have a bearing on the competence of particular na- 
tional agencies to effect a final acceptance; but in some cases the choice must 
be put down to caprice. None of the names used can be said to be a term of 
art; nor is any legal hierarchy established among them. In a current pub- 
lication the Chronology of International Treaties and Legislative Measures, 
published bimonthly by the Secretariat of the League of Nations a distinc- 
tion is drawn between conventions and treaties, the former term being re- 
served for multipartite and the latter for bipartite instruments; this volume 
shows that actual usage does not altogether vindicate that distinction. 

The international agencies employed in legislative activity vary greatly. 
In many instances, they are international conferences meeting regularly 
at more or less fixed intervals: thus, the Council of the League of Nations 
meeting four times a year; the International Labor Conference meeting an- 
nually or oftener; the International Conference of American States meeting 
every five years; and the Universal Postal Conference meeting every five 
years. Many of the international conferences are convoked ad hoc, how- 
ever, and no provision is made for their reassembling. In a few iuta^ces, 
by the use of established international institutions, instruments l^rc'oeen 
drawn up and opened to signature without the intervention of any con- 
ference. The intervention of a single government, undertaking to procure 
the consent of other governments as in the case of the modification of the 
regulations annexed to the Convention on Safety of Life at Sea (No. 323) is 
perhaps more rare than in former times. 

A striking feature of the international relations of our time is the ease with 
which international conferences can now be assembled with a view to legis- 
lative action* This is in some measure due to the influence of permanent 
administrative agencies, now more numerous than in any previous period of 
history. It is due, also, to a change in the attitude of governments which 
has come about during the past seventy-five years ; with a few exceptions 
the governments of practically all states now appreciate their interest in 
welding the international community by the continuance of legislative 
activity. In certain fields, traditions have come to exist, and many are the 
separate leagues of nations from which states have ceased to contemplate 
the possibility of withdrawal. 

The subject-matter of the instruments reproduced in this volume covers a 
wide range of interests. In some instances, it may clearly be said to be of a 
political nature as for example the Pact of the Balkan Entente (No. 364) ; 
in others, it is distinctly technical the Agreement concerning Statistics of 
Causes of Death (No. 386) is an example. In the modern world, however, 
political is an expansive term, and not infrequently its connotations find ex- 
pression in formulas of a highly technical nature as in the European Broad- 
casting Convention (No. 330). The field of communications continues to 
offer the most numerous opportunities for legislative effort, and modern in- 



PREFACE IX 

ventions in that field have had great influence in extending the bounds of 
international action, as is indicated by the agreements on the use of radio 
beacons (Nos. 341, 345, 378) and those on various phases of aviation (Nos. 
326, 328, 329). Interest in social well-being creates persistent demands for 
new legislation, also, as is indicated not only by the numerous labor conven- 
tions, but also by the conventions on traffic in women (No. 348), the status 
of refugees (No. 350), and the Equal Rights Treaty (No. 363). Health and 
plagues of various sorts have long been the subject of international action 
this volume includes a Convention on Mutual Protection against Dengue 
Fever (No. 392), an Agreement concerning the Campaign against Locusts 
(No. 398), and two agreements concerning bills of health (Nos. 399, 400). 
Current efforts to order the world's economy with respect to the marketing 
of commodities are manifest in such instruments as the Silver Agreement 
(No. 343), the Final Act of the Conference of Wheat Exporting and Im- 
porting Countries (No. 344), the Agreement for the International Tin Con- 
trol Scheme (No. 349), and the Agreement for the Regulation of Production 
and Export of Rubber (No. 379). In a few cases, however, instruments in 
this volume deal with subjects rarely encountered in international legisla- 
tion fof instance, the Convention concerning the Preservation of Fauna 
and Flora in their Natural State (No. 352). 

A word may be said also concerning the parties to instruments. For the 
purposes of this series as explained in the preface to Volume I, p. xvi a 
multipartite instrument is one to which more than two states are parties. 
The Declaration by the Kingdom of Iraq (No. 308) and the so-called Agree- 
ment on Collaboration in Rumania (No. 324), may seem to be exceptions to 
this criterion, as they were signed on behalf of a single state: but in both in- 
stances, the instrument was accepted by the Council of the League of Na- 
tions and had the effect of creating relations between the signatory and the 
League of Nations or certain of its members. Nor is the so-called Ouchy 
Convention (No. 313) an exception; not only were three states signatories, 
but it was launched in an effort to enlist the economic cooperation of a larger 
number of states. A few instruments are included to which, strictly speak- 
ing, there are no parties, but which relate to the functioning of international 
institutions thus, the Rules to Facilitate the Settlement of Economic Dis- 
putes (No. 304) and the Rules of Procedure of the Council of the League of 
Nations (No. 327). It may also be noted that all of the parties are not al- 
ways states or members of the League of Nations; in some cases the parties 
include more or less dependent communities as in the case of the Agree- 
ment for the Tin Control Scheme (No. 349). 

The number of parties to some of the instruments also deserves a word of 
comment. Many of the agreements were designed for universal, or approxi- 
mately universal, acceptance. Some of them have been ratified or ac- 
ceded to by large numbers of states thus, there are 45 parties to the 
Telecommunication Convention (No. 316), and 54 to the Universal Postal 



X PREFACE 

Convention (No. 367). Such instruments have become, in a very true sense, 
part of the world's statute law. On the other hand, some of the instruments 
reproduced are local in character, regulating the relations of states which 
form for the purpose a regional community; thus, the conventions on judg- 
ments (No. 305), on bankruptcy (No. 351), and the Central American extra- 
dition convention (No. 376). Such instruments may have more than a local 
interest, however, and in some cases they may point the direction for general 
effort. 

To a considerable extent, the tendency appears to standardize the formal 
provisions of international instruments, dealing with such topics as lan- 
guages, the necessity for ratification, the deposit of ratifications, the date of 
entry into force, and the possibility of accession. Yet the present situation 
can hardly be said to be satisfactory in this respect, for in numerous cases 
difficulty will be encountered in determining the precise status of an instru- 
ment. 

In most cases, the texts of instruments have been reproduced in toto in 
two of the original languages, or in the original language and an English 
translation. Some exceptions have been made to this general rule, however. 
To save space and expense, a few of the instruments have been reproduced in 
part only: thus, the labor conventions of 1933 (Nos. 334-338), in which the 
formal articles and some of the substantive articles are identical. In the 
Telecommunication Convention and Regulations (Nos. 316-321), and the 
Postal Convention and Arrangements (Nos. 367-373), some technical, as 
distinguished from administrative, provisions have been omitted. Where 
the original languages include English and French, these versions have been 
preferred as a rule, except in the case of inter-American instruments. With 
respect to instruments in the various Scandinavian languages, translations 
have been preferred to the original versions. Wherever a translation is 
given, it is always taken from some reliable source, which is indicated, as 
the editor has assumed no responsibility for translating. 

The editor has had the valuable collaboration of Miss Ruth Bacon in the 
preparation of this volume. A grant in aid for such assistance was made by 
the Bureau of International Research of Harvard University and Radcliffe 
College. Grateful acknowledgment must also be made of the kindness of 
numerous friends in international secretariats and in the foreign offices of va- 
rious governments, who have supplied the editor both with texts and with 
information concerning them. Finally the editor must express appreciation 
of the editing work done by Miss Ruth E. Stanton of the Carnegie Endow- 
ment for International Peace, without which this volume would be far less 
usable in form and attractive in appearance. 

MANLEY O. HUDSON 
CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS 
July i, 1937 



CONTENTS 

PAGE 

PREFACE vii 

NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS xiv 

CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS xxviii 

SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS xxxiv 

TEXTS OF INSTRUMENTS i 

SUBJECT INDEX 973 



LISTS OF INSTRUMENTS 
IN VOLUME VI 



NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 

1932 

No. PAGE 

304. Rules of Procedure to Facilitate the Peaceful and Rapid Settlement of Economic 

Disputes. Adopted by the Council of the League of Nations, Geneva, 
January 28, 1932 I 

305. Convention concerning the Recognition and Enforcement of Judgments. 

Signed at Copenhagen, March 16, 1932 6 

306. Convention concerning the Protection against Accidents of Workers Employed 

in Loading and Unloading Ships (Revised 1932). Adopted at Geneva, April 

27, 1932 12 

307. Convention concerning the Age for Admission of Children to Non-Industrial 

Employment. Adopted at Geneva, April 30, 1932 30 

308. Declaration by the Kingdom of Iraq. Signed at Baghdad, May 30, 1932 39 

309. Agreement concerning the Setting-Up of Special Services at the Iron Gates. 

Signed at Semmering, June 28, 1932 47 

309a. Final Protocol to the Agreement concerning the Setting-Up of Special 

Services at the Iron Gates. Signed at Semmering, June 28, 1932 71 

310. Agreement concerning Non-German Reparations. Signed at Lausanne, July 7, 

1932 72 

311. Agreement concerning German Reparations. Opened for signature at Lau- 

sanne, July 9, 1932 73 

3lia. Transitional Measures concerning German Reparations, Signed at 

Lausanne, July 9, 1932 , 81 

3 lib. Proems-verbal relating to the Ratification of the Agreement concerning 

German Reparations. Initialled at Lausanne, July 2, 1932 83 

312. Austrian Protocol. Opened for signature at Geneva, July 15, 1932 84 

313. Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers, Signed at Geneva, July 18, 

1932 94 

3i3a. Protocol to the Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers. 

Signed at Geneva, July 18, 1932 IOI 

3i3b. Declaration annexed to the Convention for the Lowering of Economic 

Barriers. Signed at Geneva, July 18, 1932 104 

314. Declaration by American States. Signed at Washington, August 3, 1932 105 

315. Additional Act to the Convention of October 23, 1924, on the Transport of 

Goods by Rail. Opened for signature at Berne, September 2, 1932 107 

316. Telecommunication Convention. Signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932 109 

317. General Radio Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Convention. 

Signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932 133 

3i7a. Rules of Procedure of the International Consultative Committee for 
Radiocommunkations (C.C.I.R.). Appendix 14 to the General Radio 
Regulations signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932 , 178 

3i7b. Final Protocol to the General Radio Regulations. Signed at Madrid, 

December 9, 1932 182 

xiv 



LISTE NUMERIQUE DES INSTRUMENTS 

1932 

No. PAGE 

304. Reglement de procedure pour faciliter la solution pacifique et rapide des dlffe- 

rends d'ordre economique. Adopte par le Conseil de la Societe des Nations, 
Geneve, 28 Janvier 1932 ............................................. i 

305. Convention relative a la reconnaissance et a 1'execution des jugements. Signee 

a Copenhague, 16 mars 1932 ......................................... 6 

306. Convention concernant la protection des trayailleurs occupes au chargement et 

au dechargement des bateaux contre les accidents (revis6e en 1932). Adoptee 

a Geneve, 27 avril 1932 .............................................. 12 

307. Convention concernant 1'^.ge d'admission des enfants aux travaux non-indus- 

triels. Adoptee a Geneve, 30 avril 1932 ............................... 30 

308. Declaration du Royaume de Tlrak, Signee a Bagdad, 30 roai 1932 .......... 39 

309. Accord relatif a la constitution des services speciaux aux Portes-de-Fer. Signe 

au Semmering, 28 juin 1932 .......................................... 47 

309a. Protocole final a 1'Accord relatif a la constitution des services spdciaux aux 

Portes-de-Fer. Signe au Semmering, 28 juin 1932 ................. 71 

310. Accord relatif aux reparations non-allemandes. Signe a Lausanne, 7 juillet 1932 72 

311. Accord relatif aux reparations allemandes. Ouvert a la signature a Lausanne, 

9 juillet 1932 ....................................................... 73 

3iia. Mesures de transition relatives aux reparations allemandes. Signes & 

Lausanne, 9 juillet 1932 ........................................ 81 

31 ib. Prices-verbal concernant la ratification de F Accord relatif aux repara- 

tions allemandes. Paraphe a Lausanne, 2 juillet 1932 ............. 83 

312. Protocole autrichien. Ouvert a la signature a Geneve, 15 juillet 1932 ........ 84 

313. Convention pour Fabaissement des barrieres economiques. Signee a Geneve, 

18 juillet 1932 ...................................... . ............... 94 

3i3a. Protocole de la Convention pour Tabaissement des barrieres economiques. 

Signe & Geneve, 18 juillet 1932 .................................. 101 

3i3b. Declaration annex6e a la Convention pour 1'abaissement des barrieres 

economiques. Signee a Geneve, 18 juillet 1932 .................. . . 104 

314. Declaration por Estados Americanos* Firmada en Washington, 3 de agosto de 

1932 ............................................................... 105 

315. Acte additionnel a la Convention du 23 octobre 1924 concernant le transport des 

marchandises par chemins de fer. Ouvert & la signature a Berne, 2 septembre 
1932 ............................................................... 107 

316. Convention des telecommunications. Sign6e a Madrid, 9 decembre 1932 ---- 109 

317. R&glement g6neral des radiocommunications annexe a la Convention des tele- 

communications. Signe a Madrid, 9 decembre 1932 ..................... 133 

3i7a. Reglement interieur du Comite Consultatif International des Radio- 
communications (C.C.I.R.). Appendice 14 au R&glement general des 
radiocommunications signe a Madrid, 9 decembre 1932 ............. 178 



3i7b. Protocole final au Reglement general des radiocommunications. 

a Madrid, 9 decembre 1932 ..................................... 182 



xv 



XVI NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 

No. PAGE 

318. Additional Radio Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Convention. 

Signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932 185 

319. Additional Protocol (European) to the Acts of the International Radiotelegraph 

Conference of Madrid. Signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932 192 

320. Telegraph Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Convention. Signed 

at Madrid, December 10, 1932 200 

320a. Rules of Procedure of the International Telegraph Consultative Commit- 
tee (C.C.I.T.). Annex II to the Telegraph Regulations signed at 
Madrid, December 10, 1932 250 

32ob. Final Protocol of the Telegraph Regulations. Signed at Madrid, Decem- 
ber 10, 1932 255 

32 1 . Telephone Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Convention. Signed 

at Madrid, December 10, 1932 257 

32 1 a. Internal Regulations of the International Telephone Consultative Com- 
mittee (C.C.I.F.). Annex to the Telephone Regulations signed at 
Madrid, December 10, 1932 274 

322. Convention concerning the Preservation of Plaice In the Skagerak, the Kattegat 

and Sound. Signed at Stockholm, December 31, 1932 277 

322a. Final Protocol to the Convention concerning the Preservation of Plaice. 

Signed at Stockholm, December 31, 1932 280 

1933 

323. Modification of the Regulations annexed to the Convention on Safety of Life at 

Sea. Certified at London, January 17, 1933 281 

324. Agreement establishing an Advisory Technical Collaboration in Rumania. 

Signed at Geneva, January 28, 1933 282 

325. Pact of Organization of the Little Entente. Signed at Geneva, February 16, 

1933 288 

326. Sanitary Convention for Aerial Navigation. Opened for signature at The 

Hague, April 12, 1933 292 

327. Rules of Procedure of the Council of the League of Nations. Adopted at 

Geneva, May 26, 1933 321 

328. Convention for the Unification of Certain Rules relating to the Precautionary 

Attachment of Aircraft. Opened for signature at Rome, May 29, 1933 327 

329. Convention for the Unification of Certain Rules relating to Damages Caused 

by Aircraft to Third Parties on the Surface. Opened for signature at Rome, 
May 29, 1933 334 

330. European Broadcasting Convention. Signed at Lucerne, June 19, 1933 345 

33oa. Final Protocol annexed to the European Broadcasting Convention. 

Signed at Lucerne, June 19, 1933 363 

331 . Agreement concerning a Modus Vivendi relating to the Jurisdiction of the Euro- 

pean Commission of the Danube. Signed at Semmering, June 25, 1933 364 

33ia. Declaration annexed to the Modus Vivendi relating to the Jurisdiction of the 
European Commission of the Danube. Signed at Semmering, June 25, 
1933 367 

332. Convention concerning Fee-Charging Employment Agencies. Adopted at 

Geneva, June 29, 1933 368 

333. Convention concerning Compulsory Old-Age Insurance for Persons Employed 

in Industrial or Commercial Undertakings, in the Liberal Professions, and for 
Outworkers and Domestic Servants. Adopted at Geneva, June 29, 1933. , . 374 



LISTE NUMERIQUE DES INSTRUMENTS 

No. PAGE 

318. Reglement additionnel des radiocommunications annexe a la Convention des 

telecommunications. Signe Madrid, 9 decembre 1932 185 

319. Prptocole additionnel (europeen) aux Actes de la Conference radiote!6graphique 

Internationale de Madrid. Signe Madrid, 9 decembre 1932 192 

320. Reglement te!6graphique annexe a la Convention des telecommunications, 

Signe a Madrid, 10 decembre 1932 200 

32oa. Reglement int6rieur du Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique 
(C.C.I.T.). Annexe II au Reglement telegraphique signe a Madrid, 
10 decembre 1932 250 

32ob. Protocole final du Reglement telegraphique. Sign6 a Madrid, 10 de- 
cembre 1932 255 

321. Reglement telephonique annexe a la Convention des telecommunications. 

Sign6 & Madrid, 10 decembre 1932 257 

32 1 a, Reglement intrieur du Comite Consultatif International Telephonique 
(C.C.I.F.). Annexe au Reglement telephonique signe & Madrid, 
10 decembre 1932 274 

322. Convention concernant la protection de la plie dans le Skagerak, le Cattegat et 

le Sund. Signee a Stockholm, 31 decembre 1932 277 

322a. Protocole final de la Convention concernant la protection de la plie. 

Signe a Stockholm, 31 d6cembre 1932 280 

1933 

323. Modification du reglement annexe a la Convention pour la sauvegarde de la vie 

humaine en mer. Certifiee & Londres, 17 Janvier 1933 281 

324. Accord instituant une collaboration technique consultative en Roumanie. Sign6 

a Geneve, 28 Janvier 1933 282 

325. Pacte d f organisation de la Petite Entente. Signe a Geneve, 16 fevrier 1933 .... 288 

326. Convention sanitaire pour la navigation aerienne. Ouverte & la signature & La 

Haye, 12 avril 1933 292 

327. Reglement interieur du Conseil de la Soci6t6 des Nations. Adopte & Geneve, 

26 mai 1933 32* 

328. Convention pour ['unification de certaines regies relatives la saisie conserva- 

toire des a6ronefs. Ouverte a la signature a Rome, 29 mai 1933 327 

329. Convention pour ['unification de certaines regies relatives aux dommages causes 

par les aeronefs aux tiers a la surface. Ouverte & la signature a Rome, 29 mai 
1933 334 

330. Convention europeenne de radiodiffusion. Signee a Lucerne, 19 juin 1933 . 345 

330a. Protocole final annexe ^ la Convention europ6enne de radiodiffusion. 

Sign6 & Lucerne, 19 juin 1933 363 

331. Accord concernant un Modus Vivendi relatif la juridiction de la Commission 

Europeenne du Danube, Sign6 au Semmering, 25 juin 1933 364 

33 1 a. Declaration annexee au Modus Vivendi relatif a la juridiction de la Com- 
mission Europeenne du Danube. Signee au Semmering, 25 juin 1933 . . 367 

332. Convention concernant les bureaux de placement payants. Adoptee & Geneve, 

29 juin 1933 368 

333- Convention concernant 1'assurance-vieillesse obligatoire des salaries des entre- 
prises industrielles et commerciales, des professions liberales, ainsi que des 
travailleurs a domicile et des gens de maison. Adoptee & Greneve, 29 juin 
1933 * 374 



XViii NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 

No. 

334. Convention concerning Compulsory Old- Age Insurance for Persons Employed in 

Agricultural Undertakings. Adopted at Geneva, June 29, 1933 385 

335. Convention concerning Compulsory Invalidity Insurance for Persons Employed 

in Industrial or Commercial Undertakings, in the Liberal Professions, and for 
Outworkers and Domestic Servants. Adopted at Geneva, June 29, 1933. . . 387 

336. Convention concerning Compulsory Invalidity Insurance for Persons Employed 

' in Agricultural Undertakings. Adopted at Geneva, June 29, 1933 392 

337. Draft Convention concerning Compulsory Widows' and Orphans' Insurance for 

Persons Employed in Industrial or Commercial Undertakings, in the Liberal 
Professions, and for Outworkers and Domestic Servants. Adopted at 
Geneva, June 29, 1933 398 

338. Draft Convention concerning Compulsory Widows' and Orphans' Insurance for 

Persons Employed in Agricultural Undertakings. Adopted at Geneva, June 

29, 1933 409 

339. Convention defining Aggression. Signed at London, July 3, 1933 410 

339a. Declaration annexed to Article 3 of the Convention defining Aggression, 

Signed at London, July 3, 1933 414 

339b. Protocol of Signature of the Convention defining Aggression. Signed at 

London, July 3, 1933 4*5 

340. Convention defining Aggression. Signed at London, July 4, 1933 416 

341. Regional Arrangement concerning Maritime Radio Beacons. Signed at Paris, 

July 8, 1933 419 

342. Agreement of Understanding and Cooperation. Signed at Rome, July 15, 1933 426 

343. Memorandum of Heads of Agreement between Holders of Large Stocks or Users 

of Silver and Principal Producers of Silver. Signed at London, July 22, 1933 430 

343a. Undertakings Supplementary to the Silver Agreement. London, July 24, 

26, 1933 435 

344. Final Act of the Conference of Wheat Exporting and Importing Countries. 

Opened for signature at London, August 25, 1933 437 

345. Regional Arrangement concerning Maritime Radio Beacons. Stockholm, 

September 20, 1933 446 

346. Anti-War Treaty of Non-Aggression and Conciliation. Signed at Rio de 

Janeiro, October 10, 1933 448 

347. Convention for Facilitating the International Circulation of Films of an Educa- 

tional Character. Opened for signature at Geneva, October II, 1933 456 

347a. Proems-verbal concerning the Deposit of Ratifications of or Accessions to 
the Convention for Facilitating the International Circulation of Films 
of an Educational Character. Done at Geneva, October 17, 1934 468 

348. Convention for the Suppression of the Traffic in Women of Full Age. Opened 

for signature at Geneva, October II, 1933 , 469 

349. Agreement for the International Tin Control Scheme. Signed at London, Octo- 

ber 27, 1933 47 <5 

349a. Supplementary Agreement to the Agreement for the International Tin 

Control Scheme. Signed at London, October 27, 1933 480 

349b. Agreement for the Tin Buffer Stock Scheme. Signed at The Hague, July 

io> 1934 481 

350. Convention concerning the International Status of Refugees. Opened for sig- 

nature at Geneva, October 28, 1933 , 483 



LISTE NUMERIQUE DES INSTRUMENTS xix 

No. PAGE 

334. Convention concernant 1'assurance-vieillesse obligatoire des salaries des entre- 

prises agricoles. Adoptee a Geneve, 29 juin 1933 385 

335. Convention concernant rassurance-invalidite obligatoire des salaries des entre- 

prises industrielles et commerciales, des professions liberates, ainsi que des 
travailleurs a domicile et des gens de maison. Adoptee a Geneve, 29 juin 1933 387 

336. Convention concernant 1'assurance-invalidite obligatoire des salaries des entre- 

prises agricoles. Adopted & Geneve, 29 juin 1933 392 

337. Projet de convention concernant Tassurance-deces obligatoire des salaries des en- 

treprises industrielles et commerciales, des professions liberates, ainsi que des 
travailleurs a domicile et des gens de maison. Adopte a Geneve, 29 juin 1933 398 

338. Projet de^ convention concernant I'assurance-de'ces obligatoire des salaries des 

entreprises agricoles. Adopte a Geneve, 29 juin 1933 409 

339. Convention de definition de 1'agression. Signe"e a Londres, 3 juillet 1933 410 

339a, Declaration annexee a Tarticle 3 de la Convention de definition de 

Tagression. Signee a Londres, 3 juillet 1933 414 

339b. Protocole de signature de la Convention de definition de 1'agression. 

Signe a Londres, 3 juillet 1933 415 

340. Convention de definition de 1'agression. Signee a Londres, 4 juillet 1933. .... 416 

341. Arrangement regional concernant les radiophares maritimes. Signe a Paris, 

8 juillet 1933 419 

342. Pacte d'entente et de collaboration. Signe a Rome, 15 juillet 1933 : 4 2 ^ 

343. Accord entre les pays qui detiennent d'importants stocks d'argent ou qui font 

usage de ce metal et les principaux pays producteurs d'argent. Signe a 
Londres, 22 juillet 1933 430 

343a. Engagements supplementaires & F Accord relatif a 1'argent. Londres, 24, 

26 juillet 1933 435 

344. Acte final de la Conference des pays exportateurs et importateurs de bie. Ouvert 

a la signature a Londres, 25 aoflt 1933 437 

345. Arrangement regional concernant les radiophares maritimes. Stockholm, 

20 septembre 1933 446 

346. Tratadp antibeiico de no-agresi6n y de conciliaci6n. Firmado en Rio de 

Janeiro, 10 de octubre de 1933 448 

347. Convention pour faciliter la circulation internationale des films ayant un carac- 

tere educatif. Ouverte a la signature a Geneve, n octobre 1933 456 

347a. Proces-verbal constatant le dep6t des ratifications ou adhesions de la Con- 
vention pour faciliter la circulation internationale des films ayant un 
caractere educatif. Fait a Geneve, 17 octobre 1934 468 

348. Convention relative a la repression de la traite des femmes majeures. Ouverte 

a la signature a Geneve, II octobre 1933 469 

349. Arrangement concernant le projet pour le contrdle international de retain. 

Signe a Londres, 27 octobre 1933 476 

349a. Arrangement suppiementaire a TArrangement concernant le projet pour 

le contrdle international de 1'etain. Signe a Londres, 27 octobre 1933 480 

349b. Arrangement concernant le projet d T un fonds de reserve detain. Signe a 

La Haye, 10 juillet 1934 481 

350. Convention relative au statut international des refugies. Ouverte a la signature 

a Geneve, 28 octobre 1933 4 8 3 



XX NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 

No. 

351. Convention on Bankruptcy. Signed at Copenhagen, November 7, 1933 496 

352. Convention concerning the Preservation of Fauna and Flora in Their Natural 

State. Opened for signature at London, November 8, 1933 504 

352a. Protocol concerning the Holding of Future Conferences for the Preserva- 
tion of Fauna and Flora in Their Natural State. Opened for signature 
at London, November 8, 1933 5 2 ^ 

353. Convention on the Transport of Goods by Rail. Opened for signature at Rome, 

November 23, 1933 527 

353a. Regulations concerning the Transport of Private Cars. Annex VII of the 

Convention on the Transport of Goods by Rail of November 23, 1933. . 563 

353b. Regulations concerning the Transport of Express Parcels. Annex VIII 
of the Convention on the Transport of Goods by Rail of November 23, 
1933 567 

354. Convention on the Transport of Passengers and Luggage by Rail. Opened for 

signature at Rome, November 23, 1933 568 

355. Convention on the Nationality of Women. Signed at Montevideo, December 

26, 1933 589 

356. Convention on Nationality. Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 593 

357. Convention on Extradition. Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 597 

357a. Optional Clause of the Convention on Extradition. Opened for signature 

at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 607 

358* Convention on Political Asylum. Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 . . 607 

359. Convention on the Teaching of History. Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 

1933 612 

360. Additional Protocol to the General Convention of Inter- American Conciliation. 

Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 618 

361. Convention on Rights and Duties of States. Signed at Montevideo, December 

26, 1933 620 

36ia. Additional Protocol relative to Non-intervention. Signed at Buenos 

Aires, December 23, 1936 626 

362. Declaration concerning the Signature of Pacts for the Settlement of Interna- 

tional Conflicts by Pacific Means. Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 630 

363. Equal Rights Treaty. Signed at Montevideo, December 26, 1933 632 



1934 
364. Pact of the Balkan Entente. Signed at Athens, February 9, 1934 634 

364a. Protocol-Annex of the Pact of the Balkan Entente. Signed at Athens, 

February 9, 1934 6 3 6 

364b. Statute of the Balkan Entente. Signed at Ankara, November 2, 1934. . . 639 

3640. Statute of the Economic Advisory Council of the Balkan Entente. Signed 

at Ankara, November 2, 1934 640 



LISTE NUM&RIQUE DBS INSTRUMENTS xxi 

No. PAGE 

351. Convention relative aux faillites. Signee a Copenhague, 7 novembre 1933 496 

352. Convention relative a la conservation de la faune et de la flore a l*6tat naturel. 

Ouverte a la signature & Londres, 8 novembre 1933 504 

352a. Protocole concernant la convocation des conferences ulteVieures pour la 
conservation de la faune et de la flore a 1'etat naturel. Ouvert la sig- 
nature a Londres, 8 novembre 1933 526 

353. Convention concernant le transport des marchandises par chemins de fer 

(C.I.M.). Ouverte a la signature a Rome, 23 novembre 1933 527 

353a. R&glement concernant le transport des wagons de particuliers. Annexe 
VII de la Convention concernant le transport des marchandises par 
chemins de fer du 23 novembre 1933 563 

353b. R&glement concernant le transport des colis express* Annexe VIII de la 
Convention concernant le transport des marchandises par chemins de 
fer du 23 novembre 1933 567 

354. Convention concernant le transport des voyageurs et des bagages par chemins 

de fer (C.I.V.). Ouverte a la signature a Rome, 23 novembre 1933 568 

355. Convenci6n sobre nacionalidad de la mujer. Firmada en Montevideo, 26 de 

diciembre de 1933 589 

356. Convenci6n sobre nacionalidad. Firmada en Montevideo, 26 de diciembre de 

1933 593 

357- Convenci6n sobre extradici6n. Firmada en Montevideo, 26 de diciembre de 

1933 597 

357a. Clausula opcipnal de la Convenci6n sobre extradici6n. Abierta a la firma 

en Montevideo, 26 de diciembre de 1933 607 

358. Convention sobre asilo politico. Firmada en Montevideo, 26 de diciembre de 

1933 <5c-7 

359. Convenci6n sobre la ensenanza de la historia. Firmada en Montevideo, 26 de 

diciembre de 1933 612 

360. Protocol adicional a la Convenci6n general de conciliation interamericana. 

Firmado en Montevideo, 26 de diciembre de 1933 618 

361. Convention sobre derechos y deberes de los Estados. Firmada en Montevideo, 

26 de diciembre de 1933 620 

36ia. Protocolo adicional relativo a no-intervenci6n. Firmado en Buenos 

Aires, 23 de diciembre de 1936 626 

362. Acta declaratoria relativa a la firma de los pactos tendientes a la soluci6n por 

medios pacificos de los conflictos internacionales. Firmada en Montevideo, 

26 de diciembre de 1933 630 

363. Tratado sobre derechos iguales. Firmado en Montevideo, 26 de diciembre de 

1933 6 32 

1934 

364. Pacte d'Entente balkanique. Sign6 a Athenes, 9 feVrier 1934 634 

364a. Protocole annexe du Pacte d'Entente balkanique. Signd a Ath&nes, 

9 fevrier 1934 636 

364b. Statuts de 1'organisation de TEntente balkanique. Signed a Ankara, 

2 novembre 1934 639 

3640. Statuts du Conseil economique consultatif de 1'Entente balkanique. 

Signes a Ankara, 2 novembre 1934 640 



XXli NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 

No. 

365. Protocol of Good Understanding and Collaboration. Signed at Rome, March 

iy 1934 6 4* 

365a. Protocols Additional to the Rome Protocols of 1934. Signed at Rome, 

March 23, 1936 643 

366. Protocol for the Development of Economic Relations, Signed at Rome, March 

17, 1934 6 44 

367. Universal Postal Convention. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 646 

367a. Final Protocol of the Universal Postal Convention. Opened for signature 

at Cairo, March 20, 1934 690 

367!). Regulations for the Execution of the Universal Postal Convention. 

Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 695 

367c, Provisions concerning the Transport of Regular Mails by Air. Signed at 

Cairo, March 20, 1934 7 2 5 

367c(i). Final Protocol of the Provisions concerning the Transport of Reg- 
ular Mails by Air. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 742 

368. Agreement concerning Letters and Boxes of Declared Value. Signed at Cairo, 

March 20, 1934 743 

368a. Final Protocol of the Agreement concerning Letters and Boxes of De- 
clared Value. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 757 

368b. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Letters and 

Boxes of Declared Value. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 758 

369. Agreement concerning Parcel Post. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 758 

369a. Final^ Protocol of the Agreement concerning Parcel Post. Signed at 

Cairo, March 20, 1934 ...,,,. 780 

369b. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Parcel Post. 

Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 785 

3690. Provisions concerning the Transport of Parcel Post by Air. Signed at 

Cairo, March 20, 1934 791 

3690 (i). Final Protocol of the Provisions concerning the Transport of 

Parcel Post by Air. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 797 

370. Agreement concerning Money Orders. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 797 

37oa. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Money 

Orders. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 806 

371. Agreement concerning Postal Checks. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 806 

37ia. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Postal Checks. 

Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 8n 

372. Agreement concerning Payments on Delivery. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 8l I 

372a. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Payments on 

Delivery. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 814 

373. Agreement concerning Subscriptions to Newspapers. Signed at Cairo, March 

20, 1934 815 

373a. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Subscriptions 

to Newspapers. Signed at Cairo, March 20, 1934 817 



818 



374. Agreement concerning the Transport of Goods by Rail under Way-Bill to Order. 

Signed at Rome, March 31, 1934 

375. Treaty of Central American Confraternity. Signed at the City of Guatemala 

April 12, 1934 824 



LISTE NUMERIQUE DES INSTRUMENTS xxiii 

No. PAGE 

365. Protocollo d'intesa cordiale e di collaborazione. Firmato a Roma, il 17 marzo 

1934 641 

365a. Protocolli addizionali ai Protocolli di Roma di 1934. Firmati a Roma, il 

23 marzo 1936 643 

366. Protocollo per lo sviluppo dei rapporti economic*. Firmato a Roma, il 17 marzo 

1934 644 

367. Convention postale universelle. Sign6e au Caire, 20 mars 1934 646 

367a. Protocole final de la Convention postale universelle. Ouvert a la signa- 
ture au Caire, 20 mars 1934 690 

367!}. Reglement d'execution de la Convention postale universelle. Signe" au 

Caire, 20 mars 1934 695 

3670. Dispositions concernant le transport de la poste aux lettres par voie 

aerienne. Signers au Caire, 20 mars 1934 725 

3670(1) . Protocole final des dispositions concernant le transport de la poste 

aux lettres par voie aerienne. Signe au Caire, 20 mars 1934. . 742 

368. Arrangement concernant les lettres et les boites avec valeur declaree. Sign6 au 

Caire, 20 mars 1934 743 

368a. Protocole final de 1' Arrangement concernant les lettres et les boites avec 

valeur declaree. Signe" au Caire, 20 mars 1934 757 

368b. Reglement d'execution de 1'Arrangement concernant les lettres et les 

boites avec valeur declaree. Sign6 au Caire, 20 mars 1934 758 

369. Arrangement concernant les colis postaux. Signe" au Caire, 20 mars 1934 758 

369a. Protocole final de rArrangement concernant les colis postaux. Signe" au 

Caire, 20 mars 1934 780 

369b. Reglement d'execution de 1'Arrangement concernant les colis postaux. 

Signe au Caire, 20 mars 1934 785 

3690. Dispositions concernant le transport des colis postaux par voie aerienne. 

Signees au Caire, 20 mars 1934 791 

3690(1). Protocole final des Dispositions concernant le transport des colis 

postaux par voie aerienne. Sign au Caire, 20 mars 1934. 797 

370. Arrangement concernant les mandats de poste. Signe au Caire, 20 mars 1934, . 797 

37oa. Reglement d'execution de 1'Arrangement concernant les mandats de poste. 

Signe au Caire, 20 mars 1934 , .' 806 

371. Arrangement concernant les virements postaux. Signe" au Caire, 20 mars 1934 806 

37ia. Reglement d'execution de 1'Arrangement concernant les virements pos- 
taux. Signe au Caire, 20 mars 1934 81 1 

372. Arrangement concernant les recouvrements. Signe" au Caire, 20 mars 1934. . . 811 

372a. Reglement d'execution de 1'Arrangement concernant les recouvrements. 

Sign6 au Caire, 20 mars 1934 814 

373. Arrangement concernant les abonnements aux journaux. Sign6 au Caire, 20 

mars 1934 815 

373a. Reglement d'exe"cution de 1'Arrangement concernant les abonnements 

aux journaux. Signe au Caire, 20 mars 1934 817 

374. Accord concernant le transport des marchandises par chemins de f er avec lettre 

de voiture a ordre. Signe & Rome, 31 mars 1934 818 

375. Tratado de confraternidad centroamericana. Firmado en la ciudad de Guate- 

mala, 12 de abrii de 1934 824 



NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 

No. *>AGE 

376. Central American Convention on Extradition. Signed at the City of Guate- 

mala, April 12, 1934 &33 

377. Convention for the Unification of the Methods of Sampling and Analysing 

Cheeses. Signed at Rome, April 26, 1934 840 

377a. Protocol of Signature of the Convention for the Unification of the Meth- 
ods of Sampling and Analysing Cheeses. Signed at Rome, April 26, 
1934 8 5<> 

378. Regional Arrangement concerning Maritime Radio Beacons. Signed at Bor- 

deaux, April 28, 1934 851 

379. Agreement for the Regulation of Production and Export of Rubber. Signed at 

London, May 7, 1934 856 

379a. Protocol Amending the Agreement of May 7, 1934. Signed at London, 

June 27, 1935 865 

379b. Protocol Amending the Agreement of May 7, 1934. Signed at London, 

May 22, 1936 866 

3790. Protocol Amending the Agreement of May 7, 1934. Signed at London, 

February 5, 1937 867 

380. Additional Protocol to the Convention of April 10, 1926, concerning the Immu- 

nity of State-Owned Vessels. Signed at Brussels, May 24, 1934 868 

381. Convention of the Union for the Protection of Industrial Property. Signed at 

London, June 2, 1934 870 

382. Agreement on the Suppression of False Indications of Origin of Goods. Signed 

at London, June 2, 1934 886 

383. Agreement concerning the International Registration of Trade-Marks. Signed 

at London, June 2, 1934 888 

3$3a. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning the Interna- 
tional Registration of Trade-Marks. Adopted at London, June 2, 1934 890 

384. Agreement concerning the International Registration of Industrial Designs or 

Models. Signed at London, June 2, 1934 894 

384a. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning the Interna- 
tional Registration of Industrial Designs or Models. Adopted at Lon- 
don, June 2, 1934 895 

385. Convention concerning the Salvage of Torpedoes. Signed at Paris, June 12, 

1934 896 

386. Agreement concerning Statistics of Causes of Death. Signed at London, June 

I9> 1934 899 

386a. Protocol of Signature of the Agreement concerning Statistics of Causes of 

Death. Signed at London, June 19, 1934 904 

387. Convention concerning the Employment of Women at Night (Revised 1934). 

Adopted at Geneva, June 19, 1934 907 

388. Convention concerning Workmen's Compensation for Occupational Diseases 

(Revised 1934). Adopted at Geneva, June 21, 1934 913 

389. Convention for the Regulation of Hours of Work in Automatic Sheet-Glass 

Works. Adopted at Geneva, June 21, 1934 9*7 

390. Convention Ensuring Benefit or Allowances to the Involuntarily Unemployed. 

Adopted at Geneva, June 23, 1934 920 

391- Agreement for the Non-Application of the Most-Favored-Nation Clause to 
Certain Multilateral Economic Conventions. Opened for signature at Wash- 
ington, July 15, 1934 927 



LISTE NUM&RIQUE DBS INSTRUMENTS XXV 

No. PAGE 

376. Convenci6n centroamericana de extradici6n. Firmada en la ciudad de Guate- 

mala, 12 de abril de 1934 833 

377. Convention pour Punification des m6thodes de pr61vement des 6chantillons et 

d'analyse des fromages. Signee a Rome, 26 avril 1934 840 

377a. Protocole de signature de la Convention pour I'unification des methodes 
de prelevement des 6chantillons et d'analyse des fromages. Sign a 
Rome, 26 avril 1934 850 

378. Arrangement regional concernant les radiophares maritimes. Sign & B ordeaux, 

28 avril 1934 851 

379. Arrangement pour la reglementation de la production et de Pexportation du 

caoutchouc. Signe a Londres, 7 mai 1934 856 

379a. Protocole con tenant des amendements de 1' Arrangement du 7 mai 1934. 

Signe a Londres, 27 juin 1935 865 

379b. Protocole contenant des amendements de 1'Arrangement du 7 mai 1934. 

Sign6 a Londres, 22 mai 1936 866 

379C. Protocole contenant des amendements de TArrangement du 7 mai 1934. 

Sign6 a Londres, 5 fevrier 1937 867 

380. Protocole additionnel a la Convention du 10 avril 1926 concernant les immunites 

des navires d'Etat. Signe a Bruxelles, 24 mai 1934 868 

381. Convention d'Union pour la Protection de la Proprit6 Industrielle. Sign6e a 

Londres, 2 juin 1934 870 

382. Arrangement concernant la repression des fausses indications de provenance sur 

les marchandises. Signe & Londres, 2 juin 1934 886 

383. Arrangement concernant 1'enregistrement des marques de fabrique ou de com- 

merce. Signe a Londres, 2 juin 1934 888 

383a. Reglement pour I'ex6cution de 1'Arrangement concernant 1'enregistrement 
international ^ des marques de fabrique ou de commerce. Adopte a 
Londres, 2 juin 1934 890 

384. Arrangement concernant le d6p6t international des dessins ou modeles indus- 

triels. Sign6 a Londres, 2 juin 1934 894 

384a. R&glement pour l f execution de TArrangement concernant le dep6t interna- 
tional des dessins ou modeles industriels. Adopt6 a Londres, 2 juin 
1934 895 

385. Convention concernant les regies adoptees en matiere de sauvetage de torpilles 

automobiles. Signee a Paris, 12 juin 1934 896 

386. Arrangement relatif aux statistiques des causes de d6c&s. Sign6 a Londres, 

19 juin 1934 899 

386a. Protocole de signature de TArrangement relatif aux statistiques des causes 

de deces. Signe a Londres, 19 juin 1934 904 

387. Convention concernant le travail de nuit des f emmes (revisee en 1934) * Adoptee 

a Geneve, 19 juin 1934 907 

388. Convention concernant la reparation des maladies professionnelles (revis6e en 

1934). Adoptee It Gen&ve, 21 juin 1934 913 

389. Convention concernant la^duree du travail dans les verreries a vitres automa- 

tiques. Adoptee a Geneve, 21 juin 1934 917 

390. Convention assurant aux chdmeurs involontaires des indemnites ou des alloca- 

tions. Adoptee a Geneve, 23 juin 1934 920 

391. Convenio para no aplicar la clausula de la nacion mas favorecida a algunas con- 

yenciones economicas multilaterales. Abierto a la fijrma a Washington, 15 de 
julio de 1934 927 



XXvi NUMERICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 

No, PAGE 

392. Convention for Mutual Protection against Dengue Fever. Signed at Athens, 

July 25, 1934 930 

393 . Treaty of Entente and Collaboration between the Baltic States. Signed at 

Geneva, September 12, 1934 93$ 

393a. Declaration relating to the Treaty of Entente and Collaboration between 

the Baltic States. Signed at Geneva, September 12, 1934 940 

394. Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to Posts and Telecommunica- 

tions. Signed at Belgrade, September 24, 1934 940 

394a. Amendment to the Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to 

Posts and Telecommunications. Signed at Prague, February 20, 1935 . 943 

395. Regional Arrangement concerning Radiotelephone Service of Ships Operating 

in the North Sea. Signed at Lisbon, October 8, 1934 943 

396. Protocol on Monetary Stability. Signed at Brussels, October 20, 1934 945 

397. Convention concerning Inheritance and Succession. Signed at Copenhagen, 

November 19, 1934 947 

397a. Final Protocol of the Convention concerning Inheritance and Succession. 

Signed at Copenhagen, November 19, 1934 953 

398. Agreement concerning the Campaign against Locusts. Opened for signature at 

Montevideo, December 13, 1934 954 

399. Agreement for Dispensing with Bills of Health. Signed at Paris, December 22, 

1934 958 

400. Agreement for Dispensing with Consular Visas on Bills of Health. Signed at 

Paris, December 22, 1934 962 

401 . Agreement concerning Postal Exchanges. Signed at Copenhagen, Helsingfors, 

Reykjavik, Oslo, and Stockholm, December 31, 1934 ,. 965 

40 1 a. Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Postal Ex- 
changes. Signed at Copenhagen, Helsingfors, Reykjavik, Oslo, and 
Stockholm, December 31, 1934 971 



LISTE NUM&RIQUE DBS INSTRUMENTS XXvii 

No. PAGE 

392. Convention sur la protection mutuelle contre la fievre dengue. Signe a 

Athenes, 25 juillet 1934 930 

393. Traite d'entente et de collaboration entre les Etats baltiques. Sign6 a Geneve, 

12 septembre 1934 936 

393a. Declaration relative au Traite d'entente et de collaboration entre les 

Etats baltiques. Signe a Geneve, 12 septembre 1934 940 

394. Arrangement particulier pour la cooperation dans le domaine des postes et 

telecommunications. Sign6 a Beograd, 24 septembre 1934 940 

394a. Amendement a 1'Arrangement particulier pour la cooperation dans le 
domaine des postes et telecommunications. Signe Praha, 20 fevrier 
1935 943 

395. Arrangement regional relatif au service radiote!6phonique des navires op6rant 

dans la Mer du Nord. Signe Lisbonne, 8 octobre 1934 943 

396. Protocole concernant la politique mon6taire. Signe a Bruxelles, 20 octobre 

1934 945 

397. Convention relative a I'hSritage et a la succession. Signe"e a Copenhague, 

19 novembre 1934 947 

397a. Protocole final de la Convention relative a I'heritage et a la succession. 

Sign6 & Copenhague, 19 novembre 1934 953 

398. Convenio sobre la lucha contra la langosta. Abierto a la firma a Montevideo, 

13 de diciembre de 1934 954 

399. Arrangement concernant la suppression des patentes de sante\ Sign6 a Paris, 

22 decembre 1934 958 

400. Arrangement concernant la suppression des visas consulaires sur les patentes de 

sant6. Sign6 a Paris, 22 decembre 1934 962 

401. Arrangement concernant les ^changes postaux. Signe a Copenhague, Helsinki, 

Reikjavik, Oslo, et Stockholm, 31 decembre 1934 965 

401 a. Reglement d'exScution de TArrangement concernant les ^changes postaux. 
Sign a Copenhague, Helsinki, Reikjavik, Oslo, et Stockholm, 
31 decembre 1934 971 



CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 

[This list includes all of the instruments reproduced in Volume VI, and certain subsidiary 
instruments falling within the period from January I, 1932, to December 31, 1934, which 
were reproduced in Volume V,] 

193* 

PAGE 

Jan. 21 Protocol on Suspension of Certain Payments by Bulgaria. London. 
(See Volume V, p. 289.) 

Jan. 21 Protocol on Suspension of Certain Payments by Hungary. London. 
(See Volume V, p. 431.) 

Jan. 28 Rules of Procedure to facilitate the Settlement of Economic Disputes. 

Geneva I 

March 16 Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Judgments. 

Copenhagen 6 

April 27 Convention for the Protection against Accidents of Workers Employed 

in Loading Ships (Revised 1932). Geneva 12 

April 30 Convention on the Age for Admission of Children to Non-Industrial 

Employment. Geneva 30 

May 1 8 Regulations under Article 4 of the Convention of September 26, 1931, 
to Improve the Means of Preventing War. Geneva. (See Volume 
V, p. 1098.) 

May 30 Declaration by the Kingdom of Iraq. Baghdad 39 

June 6 Supplementary Protocol on Suspension of Payments by Germany. 
Berlin, (See Volume V, p. 259.) 

June 28 Agreement for the Setting-Up of Special Services at the Iron Gates. 

Semmering 47 

June 28 Final Protocol to the Agreement for the Setting-Up of Special Services 

at the Iron Gates. Semmering 71 

June 29 Supplementary Protocol on Suspension of Payments by Czechoslovakia. 
Lausanne. (See Volume V, p. 302.) 

July 2 Proems-verbal relating to the Ratification of the Agreement concerning 

German Reparations. Lausanne 83 

July 7 Agreement concerning Non-German Reparations. Lausanne 72 

July 7 Supplementary Protocol on Suspension of Payments by Bulgaria. 
Lausanne. (See Volume V, p. 294.) 

July 7 Supplementary Protocol on Suspension of Payments by Hungary. 



upplementary Protocol on Suspension of 
Lausanne. (See Volume V, p. 434.) 



July 9 Agreement concerning German Reparations. Lausanne 73 

July 9 Transitional Measures concerning German Reparations. Lausanne... 81 

July 15 Austrian Protocol. Geneva 84 

July 1 8 Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers* Geneva 94 

July 1 8 Protocol to the Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers. 

Geneva 101 

July 1 8 Declaration annexed to the Convention for the Lowering of Economic 

Barriers. Geneva 104 

xxviii 



CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS XXIX 

PAGE 

Aug. 3 Declaration by American States. Washington 105 

Sept. 2 Additional Act to the Convention of October 23, 1924, on the Transport 

of Goods by Rail. Berne 107 

Dec. 9 Telecommunication Convention. Madrid 109 

Dec. 9 General Radio Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Conven- 
tion. Madrid 133 

Dec. 9 Final Protocol to the General Radio Regulations. Madrid 182 

Dec. 9 Additional Radio Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Con- 
vention. Madrid 185 

Dec. 9 Additional Protocol (European) to the Acts of the International Radio- 

telegraph Conference. Madrid 192 

Dec. 10 Telegraph Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Convention. 

Madrid 200 

Dec. 10 Final Protocol of the Telegraph Regulations. Madrid 255 

Dec. 10 Telephone Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication Convention. 

Madrid 257 

Dec. 31 Convention for the Preservation of Plaice in the Skagerak, the Kattegat 

and Sound. Stockholm 277 

Dec. 31 Final Protocol to the Convention for the Preservation of Plaice. 

Stockholm 280 

1933 

Jan. 17 Modification of the Regulations annexed to the Convention on Safety 

of Lifeat Sea. London 281 

Jan. 28 Agreement establishing an Advisory Technical Collaboration in 

Rumania. Geneva 282 

Feb. 1 6 Pact of Organization of the Little Entente. Geneva 288 

April 12 Sanitary Convention for Aerial Navigation. The Hague 292 

May 26 Rules of Procedure of the Council of the League of Nations. Geneva. 321 

May 29 Convention on the Precautionary Attachment of Aircraft. Rome. ... 327 

May 29 Convention concerning Damages by Aircraft to Third Parties on the 

Surface. Rome 334 

June 19 European Broadcasting Convention. Lucerne 345 

June 19 Final Protocol annexed to the European Broadcasting Convention. 

Lucerne 3^3 

June 25 Agreement concerning a Modus Vivendi on the Jurisdiction of the Euro- 
pean Commission of the Danube. Semmering 364 

June 25 Declaration annexed to the Modus Vivendi on the Jurisdiction of the 

European Commission of the Danube. Semmering 367 

June 29 Convention on Fee-Charging Employment Agencies. Geneva 368 

June 29 Convention on Old- Age Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva 374 

June 29 Convention on Old- Age Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva 385 

June 29 Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva 387 

June 29 Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Agriculture), Geneva 39 2 



XXX CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 

1933 PAGE 

June 29 Draft Convention on Survivors' Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva. . 39^ 

June 29 Draft Convention on Survivors* Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva. . . 409 

July 3 Convention defining Aggression. London 4 10 

July 3 Protocol of Signature of the Convention denning Aggression. London 415 

July 4 Convention defining Aggression. London 4 l6 

July 8 Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Paris 4*9 

July 15 Agreement of Understanding and Cooperation. Rome 4 2 ^ 

July 22 Agreement between Holders of Large Stocks or Users of Silver and 

Principal Producers of Silver. London 43 

July 2 i } Undertakings Supplementary to the Silver Agreement. London 435 

Aug. 25 Final Act of the Conference of Wheat Exporting and Importing Coun- 
tries. London - 437 

Sept. 20 Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Stockholm 446 

Oct. 10 Anti-War Treaty of Non-Aggression and Conciliation. Rio de Janeiro 448 

Oct. II Convention for Facilitating the Circulation of Films of an Educational 

Character. Geneva 45 

Oct. ii Convention for the Suppression of the Traffic in Women of Full Age. 

Geneva 4&9 

Oct. 27 Agreement for the International Tin Control Scheme. London 476 

Oct. 27 Supplementary Agreement to the Agreement for the International Tin 

Control Scheme. London 4&> 

Oct. 28 Convention on the Status of Refugees. Geneva 4^3 

Nov. 7 Convention on Bankruptcy. Copenhagen 496 

Nov. 8 Convention for the Preservation of Fauna and Flora in Their Natural 

State. London 54 

Nov. 8 Protocol on Future Conferences for the Preservation of Fauna and 

Flora in Their Natural State. London 5^6 

Nov. 23 Convention on the Transport of Goods by Rail. Rome 527 

Nov. 23 Convention on the Transport of Passengers and Luggage by Rail. 

Rome 568 

Dec. 26 Convention on the Nationality of Women. Montevideo 5 8 9 

Dec. 26 Convention on Nationality. Montevideo 593 

Dec. 26 Convention on Extradition. Montevideo 597 

Dec. 26 Optional Clause of the Convention on Extradition. Montevideo 607 

Dec. 26 Convention on Political Asylum. Montevideo 607 

Dec. 26 Convention on the Teaching of History. Montevideo 612 

Dec. 26 Additional Protocol to the General Convention of Inter-American 

Conciliation. Montevideo 618 

Dec. 26 Convention on Rights and Duties of States. Montevideo 620 

Dec. 26 Declaration concerning Pacts for the Settlement of International Con- 
flicts by Pacific Means. Montevideo 630 

Dec. 26 Equal Rights Treaty. Montevideo 632 



CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 



XXXI 



1934 PAGE 

Feb. 9 Pact of the Balkan Entente. Athens 634 

Feb. 9 Protocol- Annex of the Pact of the Balkan Entente. Athens 636 

March 17 Protocol of Good Understanding and Collaboration. Rome 641 

March 17 Protocol on Economic Relations. Rome . 644 

March 20 Universal Postal Convention. Cairo 646 

March 20 Final Protocol of the Universal Postal Convention. Cairo 690 

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Universal Postal Convention. 

Cairo 695 

March 20 Provisions on the Transport of Regular Mails by Air. Cairo 725 

March 20 Final Protocol of the Provisions on the Transport of Regular Mails by 

Air. Cairo 742 

March 20 Agreement on Letters and Boxes of Declared Value. Cairo 743 

March 20 Final Protocol of the Agreement on Letters and Boxes of Declared 

Value. Cairo 757 

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on Letters and Boxes 

of Declared Value. Cairo 758 

March 20 Agreement on Parcel Post. Cairo 758 

March 20 Final Protocol of the Agreement on Parcel Post. Cairo 780 

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on Parcel Post. Cairo 785 

March 20 Provisions on the Transport of Parcel Post by Air. Cairo 791 

March 20 Final Protocol of the Provisions on the Transport of Parcel Post by Air. 

Cairo 797 

March 20 Agreement on Money Orders. Cairo 797 

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on Money Orders. 

Cairo 806 

March 20 Agreement on Postal Checks. Cairo 806 

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on Postal Checks. 

Cairo 811 

March 20 Agreement concerning Payments on Delivery. Cairo 811 

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement concerning Payments on 

Delivery. Cairo 814 

March 20 Agreement on Subscriptions to Newspapers. Cairo 815 

March 20 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on Subscriptions to 

Newspapers. Cairo 817 

March 31 Agreement on the Transport of Goods by Rail under Way-Bill to Order. 

Rome 8x8 

April 12 Treaty of Central American Confraternity. City of Guatemala 824 

April 12 Central American Convention on Extradition. City of Guatemala. .. 833 

April 26 Convention for the Unification of the Methods of Sampling and Analys- 
ing Cheeses. Rome , * 84 

April 26 Protocol of Signature of the Convention for the Unification of the 

Methods of Sampling and Analysing Cheeses. Rome 850 



XXX11 



CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 



1934 

April 28 

May 7 

May 24 

June 2 

June 2 

June 2 

June 2 

June 2 

June 2 

June 12 

June 19 

June 19 

June 19 

June 21 

June 21 

June 23 

July 10 

July 15 

July 25 

Sept. 12 

Sept. 12 

Sept. 24 

Oct. 8 

Oct. 17 

Oct. 20 

Nov. 2 

Nov. 2 



PAGE 

Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Bordeaux 851 

Agreement for the Regulation of Production and Export of Rubber. 
London 856 

Additional Protocol to the Convention of April 10, 1926, on the Im- 
munity of State-Owned Vessels. Brussels 868 

Convention for the. Protection of Industrial Property. London 870 

Agreement on the Suppression of False Indications of Origin of Goods. 
London 886 

Agreement on the International Registration of Trade-Marks. London 888 

Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on the International 
Registration of Trade-Marks. London 890 

Agreement on the International Registration of Industrial Designs. 
London 894 

Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on the International 
Registration of Industrial Designs. London 895 

Convention on the Salvage of Torpedoes. Paris 896 

Agreement on Statistics of Causes of Death. London 899 

Protocol of Signature of the Agreement on Statistics of Causes of 
Death. London 904 

Convention on the Employment of Women at Night (Revised 1934). 
Geneva 907 

Convention on Workmen's Compensation for Occupational Diseases 
(Revised 1934). Geneva 913 

Convention on Hours of Work in Automatic Sheet-Glass Works. 
Geneva 917 

Convention Ensuring Benefit or Allowances to the Involuntarily Unem- 
ployed. Geneva 920 

Agreement for the Tin Buffer Stock Scheme. The Hague 481 

Agreement for the Non-Application of the Most-Favored-Nation 
Clause to Multilateral Economic Conventions. Washington 927 

Convention for Mutual Protection against Dengue Fever. Athens. . . 930 

Treaty of Entente and Collaboration between the Baltic States. 
Geneva 



936 



Declaration relating to the Treaty of Entente and Collaboration. 
Geneva 940 

Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to Posts and Tele- 
communications. Belgrade 940 

Regional Arrangement on Radiotelephone Service of Ships in the 
North Sea. Lisbon 943 

Proems-verbal concerning Ratifications of the Convention on the Circula- 
tion of Educational Films. Geneva 468 

Protocol on Monetary Stability. Brussels 945 

Statute of the Balkan Entente. Ankara 639 

Statute of the Economic Advisory Council of the Balkan Entente. 
Ankara 640 



CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF INSTRUMENTS XXX111 

PAGE 

Nov. 19 Convention on Inheritance and Succession. Copenhagen 947 

Nov. 19 Final Protocol of the Convention on Inheritance and Succession. 

Copenhagen 953 

Dec. 13 Agreement on the Campaign against Locusts. Montevideo 954 

Dec. 22 Agreement for Dispensing with Bills of Health. Paris 958 

Dec. 22 Agreement for Dispensing with Consular Visas on Bills of Health. 

Paris 962 

Dec. 31 Agreement on Postal Exchanges. Copenhagen, etc 965 

Dec. 31 Regulations for the Execution of the Agreement on Postal Exchanges. 

Copenhagen, etc 971 

I93S 

Feb. 20 Amendment to the Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to 

Posts and Telecommunications. Prague 943 

June 27 Protocol Amending the Agreement of May 7, 1934, on the Production 

and Export of Rubber. London 865 

1936 

March 23 Protocols Additional to the Rome Protocols of March 17, 1934. Rome 643 

May 22 Protocol Amending the Agreement of May 7, 1934, on the Production 

and Export of Rubber. London 866 

Dec. 23 Additional Protocol relative to Non-intervention. Buenos Aires 626 

1937 

Feb. 5 Protocol Amending the Agreement of May 7, 1934, on the Production 

and Export of Rubber. London 867 



SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 

No. PAGE 

Aggression 

314. Declaration by American States. Washington, August 3, 1932 105 

339. Convention defining Aggression. London, July 3, 1933 410 

340. Convention defining Aggression. London, July 4, 1933 416 

346. Anti-War Treaty of Non-Aggression and Conciliation. Rio de Janeiro, 

October 10, 1933 448 

Agriculture 

334. Convention on Old-Age Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 29, 1933. 385 
336. Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 29, 1933. 392 

338. Draft Convention on Survivors' Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 

29, 1933 409 

344. Final Act of the Conference of Wheat Exporting and Importing Countries. 

London, August 25, 1933 437 

352. Convention for the Preservation of Fauna and Flora in Their Natural State. 

London, November 8, 1933 504 

352a. Protocol on Future Conferences for the Preservation of Fauna and Flora in 

Their Natural State. London, November 8, 1933 526 

377. Convention on the Methods of Sampling and Analysing Cheeses. Rome, 

April 26, 1934 840 

379. Agreement for the Regulation of Production and Export of Rubber. 

London, May 7, 1934 856 

398. Agreement on the Campaign against Locusts. Montevideo, December 13, 

1934 954 

Air Transport 

326. Sanitary Convention for Aerial Navigation. The Hague, April 12, 1933. . 292 

328. Convention on the Precautionary Attachment of Aircraft. Rome, May 29, 

1933 327 

329. Convention on Damages by Aircraft to Third Parties on the Surface. 

Rome, May 29, 1933 334 

3670. Provisions on the Transport of Regular Mails by Air. Cairo, March 20, 

1934 725 

3690. Provisions on the Transport of Parcel Post by Air. Cairo, March 20, 1934 791 

Arbitration and Conciliation 

304. Rules of Procedure for the Peaceful Settlement of Economic Disputes. 

Geneva, January 28, 1932 I 

346. Anti-War Treaty of Non-Aggression and Conciliation. Rio de Janeiro, 

October 10, 1933 448 

360. Additional Protocol to the General Convention of Inter-American Concilia- 
tion. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 618 

362. Declaration concerning Pacts for the Settlement of International Conflicts 

by Pacific Means. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 630 

xxxiv 



SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS XXXV 

No. PAGE 
Armaments 

385. Convention on the Salvage of Torpedoes. Paris, June 12, 1934 896 

Communications and Transit 

309. Agreement on the Setting-Up of Special Services at the Iron Gates. Sem- 

mering, June 28, 1932 47 

315. Additional Act to the Convention of October 23, 1924, on the Transport of 

Goods by Rail. Berne, September 2, 1932 107 

316. Telecommunication Convention. Madrid, December 9, 1932 109 

317. General Radio Regulations. Madrid, December 9, 1932 133 

318. Additional Radio Regulations. Madrid, December 9, 1932 185 

319. Additional Protocol (European) to the Acts of the International Radio- 

telegraph Conference of Madrid. Madrid, December 9, 1932 192 

320. Telegraph Regulations. Madrid, December 10, 1932 200 

321. Telephone Regulations. Madrid, December 10, 1932 257 

326. Sanitary Convention for Aerial Navigation. The Hague, April 12, 1933 . . 292 

328. Convention on the Precautionary Attachment of Aircraft. Rome, May 29, 

1933 327 

329. Convention on Damages by Aircraft to Third Parties on the Surface. 

Rome, May 29, 1933 334 

330. European Broadcasting Convention. Lucerne, June 19, 1933 345 

33 1 . Agreement concerning a Modus Vivendi on the Jurisdiction of the European 

Commission of the Danube. Semmering, June 25, 1933 364 

341. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Paris, July 8, 1933 . 419 

345. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Stockholm, Septem- 
ber 20, 1933 446 

347. Convention for Facilitating the Circulation of Films of an Educational 

Character. Geneva, October 1 1, 1933 456 

353- Convention on the Transport of Goods by Rail. Rome, November 23, 1933 527 

354. Convention on the Transport of Passengers by Rail. Rome, November 23, 

1933 568 

367. Universal Postal Convention. Cairo, March 20, 1934 646 

3670. Provisions on the Transport of Regular Mails by Air. Cairo, March 20, 

1934 725 

368. Agreement on Letters and Boxes of Declared Value. Cairo, March 20, 1934 743 

369. Agreement on Parcel Post. Cairo, March 20, 1934 758 

3690. Provisions on the Transport of Parcel Post by Air. Cairo, March 20, 1934 791 

370. Agreement on Money Orders. Cairo, March 20, 1934 797 

371. Agreement on Postal Checks. Cairo, March 20, 1934 806 

372. Agreement concerning Payments on Delivery. Cairo, March 20, 1934. - . 8n 

373. Arrangement on Subscriptions to Newspapers. Cairo, March 20, 1934. . . 815 

374. Agreement on the Transport of Goods by Rail under Way-Bill to Order. 

Rome, March 31, 1934 818 



XXXvi SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 

No. PAGE 

Communications and Transit Continued 

378. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Bordeaux, April 28, 

1934 8 5i 

394. Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to Posts and Telecom- 

munications. Belgrade, September 24, 1934 94 

395. Regional Arrangement on Radiotelephone Service of Ships in the North 

Sea. Lisbon, October 8, 1934 943 

401. Agreement on Postal Exchanges. Copenhagen, etc., December 31, 1934. . 965 

Customs and Tariffs 

313. Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers. Geneva, July 18, 1932 94 

347. Convention for Facilitating the Circulation of Films of an Educational 

Character. Geneva, October n, 1933 456 

391. Agreement for the Non-Application of the Most-Favored-Nation Clause to 

Multilateral Economic Conventions. Washington, July 15, 1934 927 

Economic and Financial Relations 

304. Rules of Procedure for the Peaceful Settlement of Economic Disputes. 

Geneva, January 28, 1932 I 

310. Agreement concerning Non-German Reparations. Lausanne, July 7, 1932 72 

311. Agreement concerning German Reparations. Lausanne, July 9, 1932 73 

312. Austrian Protocol. Geneva, July 15, 1932 84 

313. Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers. Geneva, July 18, 1932 94 

324. Agreement Establishing an Advisory Technical Collaboration in Rumania. 

Geneva, January 28, 1933 , 282 

343. Agreement between Holders of Large Stocks or Users of Silver and Principal 

Producers of Silver. London, July 22, 1933 430 

344. Final Act of the Conference of Wheat Exporting and Importing Countries. 

London, August 25, 1933 , 437 

349* Agreement for the International Tin Control Scheme. London, October 

27, 1933 476 

349b. Agreement for the Tin Buffer Stock Scheme. The Hague, July 10, 1934. . 481 

351. Convention on Bankruptcy. Copenhagen, November 7, 1933 496 

366. Protocol on Economic Relations. Rome, March 17, 1934 644 

379. Agreement for the Regulation of Production and Export of Rubber. 

London, May 7, 1934 , 856 

391. Agreement for the Non- Application of the Most-Favored-Nation Clause to 

Multilateral Economic Conventions. Washington, July 15, 1934 927 

396. Protocol on Monetary Stability. Brussels, October 20, 1934 945 

Education 

347. Convention for Facilitating the Circulation of Films of an Educational 

Character. Geneva, October II, 1933 456 

359. Convention on the Teaching of History. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 612 



SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS XXXVii 

No. PAGE 

Extradition 

357. Convention on Extradition. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 597 

376. Central American Convention on Extradition. City of Guatemala, April 

12, 1934 833 

Fisheries 

322. Convention for the Preservation of Plaice in the Skagerak, the Kattegat 

and Sound. Stockholm, December 31, 1932 277 

Food 

344. Final Act of the Conference of Wheat Exporting and Importing Countries. 

London, August 25, 1933 437 

377. Convention for the Unification of the Methods of Sampling and Analysing 

Cheeses. Rome, April 26, 1934 840 

Health 

326. Sanitary Convention for Aerial Navigation. The Hague, April 12, 1933. . 292 

386. Agreement concerning Statistics of Causes of Death. London, June 19, 

1934 899 

392. Convention for Mutual Protection against Dengue Fever. Athens, July 

25, 1934 930 

399. Agreement for Dispensing with Bills of Health. Paris, December 22, 1934 95 8 

400. Agreement for Dispensing with Consular Visas on Bills of Health. Paris, 

December 22, 1934 962 

Industrial Property 

381. Convention for Protection of Industrial Property. London, June 2, 1934 870 

382. Agreement on the Suppression of False Indications of Origin of Goods. 

London, June 2, 1934 886 

383. Agreement on the International Registration of Trade-Marks. London, 

June 2, 1934 888 

384. Agreement on the International Registration of Industrial Designs. 

London, June 2, 1934 894 

International Organization 

304. Rules of Procedure for the Peaceful Settlement of Economic Disputes. 

Geneva, January 28, 1932 I 

3i7a. Rules of Procedure of the International Consultative Committee for 

Radiocommunications (C.C.I. R.). Madrid, December 9, 1932 178 

32oa. Rules of Procedure of the International Telegraph Consultative Committee 

(C.C.I.T.). Madrid, December 10, 1932 250 

32 la. Internal Regulations of the International Telephone Consultative Com- 
mittee (C.C.I.F.). Madrid, December 10, 1932 274 

324. Agreement Establishing an Advisory Technical Collaboration in Rumania. 

Geneva, January 28, 1933 282 

325. Pact of Organization of the Little Entente. Geneva, February 16, 1933 . , . 288 

327. Rules of Procedure of the Council of the League of Nations. Geneva, 

May 26, 1933 321 

364. Pact of the Balkan Entente. Athens, February 9, 1934 634 



XXXVU1 SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 

No. PAGE 

International Organization Continued 

393. Treaty of Entente and Collaboration between the Baltic States. Geneva, 

September 12, 1934 936 

International Rivers 

309. Agreement on the Setting-Up of Special Services at the Iron Gates. Sem- 

mering, June 28, 1932 47 

33 1 . Agreement concerning a Modus Vivendi on the Jurisdiction of the European 

Commission of the Danube. Semmering, June 25, 1933 364 

Labor Conventions 

306. Convention for the Protection against Accidents of Workers Employed in 

Loading Ships (Revised 1932). Geneva, April 27, 1932 12 

307. Convention on the Age for Admission of Children to Non-Industrial Em- 

ployment. Geneva, April 30, 1932 30 

332. Convention on Fee-Charging Employment Agencies. Geneva, June 29, 

1933 368 

333* Convention on Old-Age Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva, June 29, 1933 374 
334. Convention on Old-Age Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 29, 1933. 385 

335* Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva, June 29, 

1933 387 

336. Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 29, 1933 392 

337. Draft Convention on Survivors' Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva, June 

29, 1933 398 

338. Draft Convention on Survivors' Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 

29, 1933 409 

387. Convention on the Employment of Women at Night (Revised 1934). 

Geneva, June 19, 1934 907 

388. Convention on Workmen's Compensation for Occupational Diseases. 

Geneva, June 21, 1934 913 

389. Convention on Hours of Work in Automatic Sheet-Glass Works. Geneva, 

June 21, 1934. 917 

390. Convention ensuring Benefit or Allowances to the Involuntarily Unem- 

ployed. Geneva, June 23, 1934 920 

Legal Relations (Special) 

305. Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Judgments. Copen- 

hagen, March 16, 1932 6 

351. Convention on Bankruptcy. Copenhagen, November 7, 1933 496 

358. Convention on Political Asylum. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 607 

363. Equal Rights Treaty. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 632 

397. Convention on Inheritance and Succession. Copenhagen, November 19, 

1934 947 

Maritime Law and Regulations 

306. Convention for the Protection against Accidents of Workers Employed in 

Loading Ships (Revised 1932). Geneva, April 27, 1932 12 

323. Modification of the Regulations annexed to the Convention on Safety of 

Life at Sea. London, January 17, 1933 281 



SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS XXxix 

No. PAGE 

Maritime Law and Regulations Continued 

341. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Paris, July 8, 1933. . 419 

345. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Stockholm, Septem- 
ber 20, 1933 446 

378. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Bordeaux, April 28, 

1934 851 

380. Additional Protocol to the Convention of April 10, 1926, on the Immunity 

of State-Owned Vessels. Brussels, May 24, 1934 868 

395. Regional Agreement on Radiotelephone Service of Ships in the North Sea. 

Lisbon, October 8, 1934 943 

Minorities 

308. Declaration by the Kingdom of Iraq. Baghdad, May 30, 1932 39 

Nationality 

355. Convention on Nationality of Women. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 589 

356. Convention on Nationality. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 593 

Political Relations 

314. Declaration by American States. Washington, August 3, 1932 105 

325. Pact of Organization of the Little Entente. Geneva, February 1 6, 1933. . 288 

342. Agreement of Understanding and Cooperation. Rome, July 15, 1933 426 

361. Convention on Rights and Duties of States. Montevideo, December 26, 

1933 * 620 

36ia. Additional Protocol relative to Non-intervention. Buenos Aires, Decem- 
ber 23, 1936 626 

364. Pact of the Balkan Entente. Athens, February 9, 1934 634 

365. Protocol of Good Understanding and Collaboration. Rome, March 1 7, 1934 641 

375. Treaty of Central American Confraternity. City of Guatemala, April 12, 

1934 82 4 

393. Treaty of Entente and Collaboration between the Baltic States. Geneva, 

September 12, 1934 93^ 

Postal Exchanges 

367. Universal Postal Convention. Cairo, March 20, 1934. 646 

367c. Provisions on the Transport of Regular Mails by Air. Cairo, March 20, 

1934 725 

368. Agreement on Letters and Boxes of Declared Value. Cairo, March 20, 1934 743 

369. Agreement on Parcel Post. Cairo, March 20, 1934 75 s 

369C. Provisions on the Transport of Parcel Post by Air. Cairo, March 20, 1934 791 

" 370. Agreement on Money Orders. Cairo, March 20, 1934 797 

371. Agreement on Postal Checks. Cairo, March 20, 1934 806 

372. Agreement concerning Payments on Delivery. Cairo, March 20, 1934 811 

373. Agreement on Subscriptions to Newspapers. Cairo, March 20, 1934 815 



Xl SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS 

No. PAGE 

Postal Exchanges Continued 

394. Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to Posts and Telecom- 
munications. Belgrade, September 24, 1934 940 

401. Agreement on Postal Exchanges. Copenhagen, etc., December 31, 1934. . 965 
Radio 

316. Telecommunication Convention. Madrid, December 9, 1932 109 

317. General Radio Regulations. Madrid, December 9, 1932 133 

318. Additional Radio Regulations. Madrid, December 9, 1932 185 

319. Additional Protocol (European) to the Acts of the International Radio- 



telegraph Conference of Madrid. Madrid, December 9, 1932 192 

330. European Broadcasting Convention. Lucerne, June 19, 1933 345 

341. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons, Paris, July 8, 1933. . 419 

345. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Stockholm, Septem- 
ber 20, 1933 446 

378. Regional Arrangement on Maritime Radio Beacons. Bordeaux, April 28, 

1934 851 

394. Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to Posts and Telecom- 

munications. Belgrade, September 24, 1934 940 

395. Regional Agreement on Radiotelephone Service of Ships in the North Sea. 

Lisbon, October 8, 1934 943 

Railroads 

315. Additional Act to the Convention of October 23, 1924, on the Transport of 

Goods by Rail. Berne, September 2, 1932 107 

3 53 - Convention on the Transport of Goods by Rail. Rome, November 23, 1 933 527 
354. Convention on the Transport of Passengers by Rail. Rome, November 23, 

1933 568 

374. Agreement on the Transport of Goods by Rail under Way-Bill to Order. 

Rome, March 31, 1934 818 

Refugees 

350. Convention on the International Status of Refugees. Geneva, October 

2 8, 1933 483 

Reparations and International Payments 

310. Agreement concerning Non-German Reparations. Lausanne, July 7, 1932 72 

311. Agreement concerning German Reparations. Lausanne, July 9, 1932 73 

31 ib. Proems-verbal relating to the Agreement concerning German Reparations. 

Lausanne, July 2, 1932 83 

Social and Humanitarian 

306. Convention for the Protection against Accidents of Workers Employed in 

Loading Ships (Revised 1932). Geneva, April 27, 1932 12 

307. Convention on the Age for Admission of Children to Non-Industrial Em- 

ployment. Geneva, April 30, 1932 30 

323. Modification of the Regulations annexed to the Convention on Safety of 

Life at Sea. London, January 17, 1933. 281 

326. Sanitary Convention for Aerial Navigation. The Hague, April 12, 1933, . 292 
332. Convention on Fee-Charging Employment Agencies. Geneva, June 29, 

1933 368 



SUBJECT LIST OF INSTRUMENTS xll 

No. PAGE 

333. Convention on Old-Age Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva, June 29, 1933 374 

334. Convention on Old- Age Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 29, 1933 385 

335. Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva, June 29, 

1933 387 

336. Convention on Invalidity Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 29, 1933 392 

337. Draft Convention on Survivors' Insurance (Industry, etc.). Geneva, June 

29, 1933 398 

338. Draft Convention on Survivors' Insurance (Agriculture). Geneva, June 

29, 1933 409 

348. Convention for the Suppression of the Traffic in Women of Full Age. 

Geneva, October II, 1933 469 

350. Convention on the International Status of Refugees. Geneva, October 28, 

1933 483 

352. Convention for the Preservation of Fauna and Flora in Their Natural State. 

London, November 8, 1933 504 

352a. Protocol on Future Conferences for the Preservation of Fauna and Flora in 

Their Natural State. London, November 8, 1933 526 

358. Convention on Political Asylum. Montevideo, December 26, 1933 607 

386. Agreement concerning Statistics of Causes of Death. London, June 19, 

1934 899 

387. Convention on the Employment of Women at Night (Revised 1934). 

Geneva, June 19, 1934 907 

388. Convention on Workmen's Compensation for Occupational Diseases. 

Geneva, June 21, 1934 913 

389. Convention on Hours of Work in Automatic Sheet-Glass Works. Geneva, 

June 21, 1934 917 

390. Convention Ensuring Benefit or Allowances to the Involuntarily Unem- 

ployed. Geneva, June 23, 1934 920 

392. Convention for Mutual Protection against Dengue Fever. Athens, July 25, 

1934 - 930 

399. Agreement for Dispensing with Bills of Health. Paris, December 22, 1934 958 

400. Agreement for Dispensing with Consular Visas on Bills of Health. Paris, 

December 22, 1934 962 

Telephone and Telegraph 

316. Telecommunication Convention. Madrid, December 9, 1932 109 

320. Telegraph Regulations. Madrid, December 10, 1932 200 

321. Telephone Regulations. Madrid, December 10, 1932 257 

394. Special Arrangement for Cooperation with regard to Posts and Telecom- 

munications. Belgrade, September 24, 1934 940 

395. Regional Arrangement on Radiotelephone Service of Ships in the North 

Sea. Lisbon, October 8, 1934 943 

War 

339. Convention defining Aggression. London, July 3, 1933 4 IQ 

340. Convention defining Aggression. London, July 4, 1933 4*6 

346. Anti-War Treaty of Non- Aggression and Conciliation. Rio de Janeiro, 

October 10, 1933 1 44$ 



No. 304 

RULES OF PROCEDURE to facilitate the Peaceful and Rapid Set- 
tlement of Economic Disputes. Adopted by the Council of the 
League of Nations, Geneva, January 28, 1932. 

REGLEMENT DE PROCEDURE pour faciliter la solution pacifique 
et rapide des differends d'ordre economique* Adopte par le 
Conseil de la Societ6 des Nations, Geneve, 28 Janvier 1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE. These rules were due to the initiative of the French delegation at the 
Preliminary Conference with a View to Concerted Economic Action in 1930. The Protocol 
concerning the Program of Future Negotiations, of March 24, 1930 (No. 248!), ante), referred 
to the French proposal (Article 2, paragraph 2). By a resolution of October 2, 1930, the 
Assembly of the League of Nations instructed the Economic Committee to draw up concrete 
proposals (Records of Eleventh Assembly, Plenary Meetings, p. 195) ; and these rules of proce- 
dure were the result. On September 23, 1932, the Council appointed the experts provided 
for in Article 4 of the rules, to function as from January I, 1933. League of Nations Official 
Journal, 1932, pp. 1718-19; idem, 1933, p. 194. See also the protocol on arbitration clauses, 
of September 24, 1923 (No. 98, ante), and the convention on the execution of foreign arbi- 
tral awards, of September 26, 1927 (No. 183, ante). The explanatory notes to the text, 
reproduced here, were drawn up by the Economic Committee of the League of Nations* 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. League of Nations Document, E.666 (1931); Proceedings of the Confer- 
ences with a View to Concerted Economic Action, idem, C.222.M.l09.i930.II; C 149^48.1931. 
II.B; C.269.M.I24.I93I.II.B. The text of the rules is also published in League of Nations 
Official Journal, 1932, p. 596. 

M. 0. Hudson, "The Friendly Settlement of Economic Disputes between States/' 26 
Am. Jour. Int. Law (1932), pp. 35$-"7 

Text from League of Nations Document, C.57.M.32J932 JLB. 

CHAPTER I CHAPITRE I 

JURISDICTION COMPETENCE 

Article i. 1 Only Members of the Article I. 1 Seuls les Membres de 
League and States non-members la Soci6t6 des Nations et les Etats 
may apply to the Experts for the non membres ont qualit6 pour re- 
peaceful settlement of an economic courir aux experts en vue du rgle- 
dispute arising between them. ment pacifique d'un diflferend d'ordre 

Economique surgi entre eux. 

Art. 2. A dispute can only be Art. 2. Les experts ne sont val- 
validly brought before the Experts ablement saisis que par une requite 
by a joint application from the commune des parties en cause. 
Parties to the case. 

1 This means that only Governments can apply, and not individuals. 

1 La redaction adopted a pour but d'indiquer que le recours a la procedure envisaged est 
reserve" aux gouvernements, i Texclusion des particuliers. 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 304 



Art. 3. 1 The jurisdiction of the 
Experts shall extend to all disputes 
concerned with matters of an eco- 
nomic nature. 

CHAPTER II 

APPOINTMENT OF THE EXPERTS 

Art. 4. 2 The Experts, to the num- 
ber of fourteen, shall be appointed by 
the Council on the proposal of the 
Economic Committee of the League. 

The Experts must: 
(a) Be of different nationalities; 
(6) Be persons enjoying the high- 
est esteem; 

(c) Be of recognised competence 
in economic questions in the widest 
sense of the term ; 

(d) Be familiar with the problems 
involved in the regulation of eco- 
nomic relations between countries, 
and in particular with matters 
usually forming the subject of com- 
mercial treaties and other economic 
agreements. 

Art, 5. The Experts shall be ap- 
pointed for a period of five years. 
Their appointment may be renewed. 



Art. 3. 1 La competence des ex- 
perts s'tend & tous les differends 
portant sur des matures d'ordre 
6conornique. 

CHAPITRE II 

NOMINATION DES EXPERTS 

Art. 4. 2 Les experts, au nombre 
de quatorze, sont nomm6s par le 
Conseil, sur les propositions du 
Comit6 6conomique de la Soci6te 
des Nations. 

Les experts devront: 

a) Etre de nationality differente; 

&) Jouir de la plus haute con- 
sideration morale; 

c) Poss6der une competence no- 
toire en matiere economique au sens 
le plus large; 

d) Etre familiarises avec les pro- 
blemes que pose 1 'ajustement des rela- 
tions economiques entre les pays et 
en particulier avec les matieres 
faisant habituellement 1'objet des 
trait6s de commerce et autres ac- 
cords economiques. 

Art. 5. Les experts sont nommes 
pour une periode de cinq ans. Leur 
mandat peut gtre renouve!6. 



1 The Experts are given the widest jurisdiction, as their consultation is optional. 

2 The Economic Committee experienced some difficulty in deciding the number of 
Experts. 

The Experts must not be too numerous, so that there may be a sort of continuity and uni- 
formity in their doctrine. 

The Economic Committee thought that the case-law built up by the Experts might be a 
useful guide for future decisions, recommendations and opinions, though it would not neces- 
sarily form a precedent in the legal sense given to the term "precedent" in Anglo-Saxon 
countries. 

On the other hand, the Experts must not be too few, so that they may include persons 
versed in the economic conditions of the principal countries and the various branches of 
national economy. States, too, should be allowed a certain latitude of choice. 

1 La competence des experts est etablie de la maniere la plus large, en tenant compte du 
fait que le recours aux experts est purement facultatif . 

2 Le Comit& economique a eprouv& quelques difficultes dans la determination du nombre 
d'experts & nommer. 

II convenait que ce nombre ne nit pas trop grand, afin de pouvoir compter sur une sorte de 
continuite et d'uniformite de doctrine de la part de ces experts. 

Dans la pensee du Comite economique, la jurisprudence qu'ils pourront, par leur action, 
arriver a constituer, pourra servir utilement de guide pour les futures d6cisions, recomman- 
dations et avis, sans que 1'on doive toutefois y attacher la yaleur d'un precedent, au sens 
juridique que donnent les pays anglo-saxons a cette expression. 

D'autre part, le nombre de ces experts ne doit pas non plus etre trpp restfeint, afin cju'il 
puisse comprendre des personnes au courant des conditions economiques des pays princi- 
paux, ainsi que des differentes branches de Teconomie. Enfin, il importe que les Etats 
aient une certaine latitude pour exercer leur choix. 



Jan. 28, 1932 PEACEFUL SETTLEMENT OF ECONOMIC DISPUTES 



They shall personally perform 
their duties. 

If an Expert dies or resigns, he 
shall be replaced for the remainder 
of his term of office by a person 
appointed in accordance with the 
provisions of Article 4. 

On the expiry of their term of 
office, the Experts shall continue to 
deal with any cases that may pre- 
viously have been submitted to 
them and are not concluded. 

CHAPTER III 
PROCEDURE 

Art. 6. The application provided 
for in Article 2 above shall be ad- 
dressed to the Secretary-General of 
the League of Nations. 

It shall be drawn up by common 
agreement between the Parties to 
the case, and must bear their signa- 
tures. 

The application shall state : 

(a) The subject of the dispute and 
the Parties to the case ; 

(J) The number of Experts to be 
selected; 

(c) The nature of the decision the 
Expert or Experts are requested to 
give (advisory opinion, conciliation 
or arbitration) ; 

(d) The names of the Experts 
chosen or the request to apply Arti- 
cles 7 and 8. 

Art. 7. If the Parties have chosen 
the Experts themselves, the Experts 
shall in turn themselves appoint 
their President. 

Art. 8. If the Parties themselves 
have not chosen the Experts in their 
application, the choice shall be made 
by the Chairman of the Economic 
Committee. For this purpose the 
Secretary-General shall send him a 
copy of the application. 

Art. 9. Should the Chairman of 
the Economic Committee be pre- 
vented from making a choice, or be 
a national of one of the Parties, the 



Us doivent exercer personnelle- 
ment leurs fonctions. 

En cas de dcs ou de demission 
d'un expert, celui-ci est, pour la 
dur6e du mandat inachev6, remplac 
par une personne nomm6e conform6- 
ment aux dispositions de Tarticle 4. 

A Texpiration de leur mandat, les 
experts continueront & singer dans les 
affaires dont ils pourraient tre 
saisis. 



CHAPITRE III 

PROCEDURE 

Art. 6. La requite prvue & Far- 
ticle 2 ci-dessus sera adress6e au 
Secretaire g6n6ral de la Soci6t6 des 
Nations. 

Elle doit tre rdig6e de commun 
accord entre les parties en cause et 
porter leur signature. 

La requite doit obligatoirement 
indiquer: 

a) L'objet du difKrend et les 
parties en cause; 

b) Le nombre des experts & 
choisir; 

c) La t&che du ou des experts 
(avis consultatif, conciliation ou 
arbitrage) ; 

d) Les noms des experts choisis ou 
la demande d'appliquer les articles 7 
et8. 

Art. 7. Lorsque les parties ont 
choisi elles-m^mes les experts, ceux- 
ci dsignent parmi eux leur president. 

Art. 8. Lorsque les parties n'ont 
pas elles-rnmes fait choix des ex- 
perts dans leur requite, ce choix est 
effectu6 par le president du Comit6 
6conomique. A cet effet, le Secr6- 
taire gnral adresse & ce dernier 
copie de la requite. 

Art. 9. Lorsque le president du 
Comit6 6conomique est enipch6 ou 
qu'il est ressortissant de Tune des 
parties, le choix sera fait par son 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 304 



choice shall be made by his predeces- 
sor, provided the latter is still a 
member of the Committee. 

Should the predecessor of the 
Chairman also be unable, for one of 
the above reasons, to make a choice, 
the choice shall be made by the oldest 
member who is not a national of any 
Party to the case. 

Art. lo. 1 The person called upon 
to make the choice in accordance 
with Articles 7 and 8 shall do so 
within 15 days after receiving the 
communication from the Secretary- 
General of the League of Nations. 
If several Experts have to be chosen, 
he shall also appoint their President. 

The choice shall be made exclu- 
sively from among the persons re- 
ferred to in Article 4. 

Moreover, the Experts must be of 
a different nationality from that of 
the Parties. 

Art. u. Any recourse to the Ex- 
perts shall imply that the Parties 
accept the provisions of the present 
Rules. 

If the Parties have requested an 
arbitral award, that fact shall in- 
volve the obligation on their part to 
submit to the award to be given and 
to carry it out in good faith. 

Art. 12. The Experts shall be 
entirely free to follow the procedure 
they deem best in each particular 
case. 

Art. 13.2 ^ The Parties shall be 
informed without delay of the re- 
sults of the Experts' work. 

These results shall be published by 
the Secretary-General of the League 
of Nations, if the Parties consent. 



predecesseur, pour autant que ce 
dernier soit encore membre du 
Comite. 

Si le predecesseur du president ne 
peut, son tour, et pour Tun de ces 
motifs, proceder au choix, ce soin 
incombera au membre le plus &g6 
qui n'est ressortissant d'aucune par- 
tie en cause. 

Art. lo. 1 La personne appe!6e & 
faire le choix, conform6ment aux 
articles 7 et 8, devra s'acquitter de 
cette t&che dans un delai de quinze 
jours aprs avoir regu la communica- 
tion du Secretaire general de la So- 
ciete des Nations. Si le choix doit 
porter sur plusieurs experts, elle 
designera egalement leur president. 

Le choix doit Itre fait exclusive- 
ment parmi les personnes vises 
1'article 4. 

Les experts choisis devront tre 
d'une nationality differente de celle 
des parties. 

Art. ii Tout recours aux ex- 
perts implique Tacceptation par les 
parties des dispositions du present 
reglement. 

Le fait que les parties ont demand^ 
une sentence arbitrale entratne de 
leur part 1'obligation de se soumettre 
ladite sentence et de l'excuter de 
bonne foi. 

Art. 12. Les experts sont enti&re- 
ment libres de determiner la proce- 
dure qu'ils estiment la mieux ap- 
propriee & chaque cas particulier. 

Art. 13. 2 Les rsultats des tra- 
vaux des experts seront port6s sans 
delai la connaissance des parties. 

Us seront publics par le Secretaire 
general de la Soci6te des Nations, si 
les parties y consentent. 



1 The last provision of Article 10 naturally does not exclude the right of the Parties to have 
themselves represented by agents instructed to defend their interests. 

2 In principle, the Economic Committee favours the publication of such results, but the 
results can only be published when the Parties agree, because, if publication were compulsory 
in every instance, Governments might hesitate to resort to the proposed procedure. 

*La derniere disposition de 1'article 10 n'exclut naturellement pas le droit des parties de 
se faire representer par des agents charges de d6fendre leurs interns. 

2 En principe, le Comite" economique est favorable a la publication des r6sultats des tra- 
vaux des experts^ mais cette publication ne peut etre envisagee que lorsque les parties y 
consentent, car si elle etait obligatoire dans tous les cas, les gouvernements pourraient 
hesiter a utiliser la procedure prevue. 



Jan. 28, 1932 PEACEFUL SETTLEMENT OF ECONOMIC DISPUTES 



CHAPTER IV 

GENERAL PROVISIONS 

A. Secretariat 

Art. 14. The Secretariat shall be 
provided by the Secretary-General 
of the League of Nations. 

B. Expenses 

Art 15. Each of the Parties shall 
bear its own expenses for procedure. 
The joint expenditure decided upon 
by the President of the Experts shall 
be borne by the Parties in equal 
parts. 

Art. 16. The expenses referred to 
in the above article shall include 
remuneration to be granted to the 
Experts, witnesses and other per- 
sons whose co-operation is required. 

Art. I7. 1 At the beginning of the 
procedure the President of the Ex- 
perts shall fix the amount to be ad- 
vanced by each of the Parties in 
order to cover the above-mentioned 
expenses, and shall draw up an ac- 
count on the conclusion of the work. 



C Seat 

Art. 18. In principle, the Experts 
shall sit at Geneva in the Secretariat 
of the League of Nations. Their 
President may, however, decide that 
they shall sit elsewhere. 



CHAPITRE IV 

DISPOSITIONS GENERATES 

A. Secretariat 

Art. 14. Le Secretariat est assur6 
par le Secretaire general de la So- 
cit6 des Nations. 

R. Frais 

Art, 15. Chacune des parties sup- 
porte ses propres frais de procedure. 
Les frais communs determines par le 
president des experts sont, en parties 
egales, supports par les parties. 

Art. 16. Dans les frais communs 
dont il est question Particle pre- 
cedent sont comprises les indemnitfe 
allouer aux experts, aux t&noins et 
autres personnes dont la collabora- 
tion serait requise. 

Art. I7. 1 Au debut de la proc6- 
dure, le president des experts d6- 
terminera le montant de la somme 
dont 1'avance devra 6tre faite par 
chacune des parties, de maniere & 
couvrir les frais ci-dessus vises et 
pour lesquels le compte sera arrSte 
par lui & la conclusion des travaux. 

C. Silge 

Art. 18. Les experts sigent en 
principe & Geneve, au Secretariat de 
la Societe des Nations. Leur presi- 
dent peut toutefois decider qu'ils 
siegeront en un autre lieu. 



1 This rule is intended to ensure that the League shall not incur expenditure for which no 
provision has been made in its budget, and which ought, after all, to be borne by the Parties. 
It also ensures that there shall be no delay in the procedure. 

1 La regie posee a cet article a pour but d'eviter de faire engager par la Societe des Nations 
des depenses qui ne seraient pas prevues a son budget et qu'en fin de compte il est normal de 
faire supporter par les parties. Elle permet egalement de ne pas apporter de retard a 
raccomplissement des difT6rents actes de procedure. 



6 INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION No. 305 

No. 305 

CONVENTION concerning the Recognition and Enforcement of 
Judgments. Signed at Copenhagen, March 16, 1932. 

CONVENTION relative la reconnaissance et a P execution des jtige- 
ments. Signee a Copenhague, 16 mars 1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE. A draft convention on this subject was drawn up by the Conference on 
Private International Law, at its fifth session at The Hague, October 12-November 7, 1925 
(Actes de la Cinguieme Session, p. 344) ; but it seems to have exercised little influence on the 
drafting of this convention. See also the convention between Norway and Sweden, and 
Denmark, of April 25, 1861 (i I Sverges Traktater med frammande Magter p. 396) ; and Articles 
423-437 of the Bustamante Code annexed to the Habana Convention of February 20, 1928 
(No. i86a, ante}. The text of this convention consists of versions in the language of each of 
the five states. 

RATIFICATIONS. Ratifications of this convention were deposited by all the signatories 
at Copenhagen, March. 18, 1933. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. The text of this convention is also published in Lovtidende for Kongeriget 
Danmark, 1933, p. 868; the Danish and Swedish versions are published in 27 Martens, N.R.G. 
(3d ser.), p. 352. 

V. Bentzon, "Fern Nordiske Rets-Konventioner," 47 Tidsskrift for Rettsvidenskap (1934), 
pp. 336-83; Bentzon and K. Hammerich, "La recente Union scandinave de droit interna- 
tional prive/' 29 Revue critique de droit international (1934), pp. 855-72; L. Uddgren, " Die 
nordische Konvention iiber Anerkennung und Vollstrechung von Urteilen/' 9 Zeitschrift fur 
auslandisches und international Privatrecht (1935), pp. 513-5. 

Entered into force July i, IQ33. 1 

Translations from 139 League of Nations Treaty Series, p. 181. 

[Translation] [Traduction] 

His Majesty the King of Denmark Sa Majest6 le Roi de Danemark et 
and Iceland, the President of the d'Islande, le President de la Re- 
Republic of Finland, His Majesty publique de Finlande, Sa Majest6 
the King of Norway and His Majesty le Roi de Norvege et sa Majest6 le 
the King of Sweden, having agreed Roi de Sude, ayant decid6 de con- 
to conclude a convention relating to clure une convention relative a la 
the recognition and enforcement of reconnaissance et & l'excution des 
judgments, have appointed as their decisions judiciaires, ont nomm6 pour 
Plenipotentiaries: 2 leurs plnipotentiaires, savoir: 2 

His Majesty the King of Denmark Sa Majest6 le Roi de Danemark 

and Iceland: et d'Islande: 

For Denmark: Peter Rochegune Pour le Danemark: Peter Roche- 
Munch ; gune Munch ; 

For Iceland: Sveinn Bjdrnsson; Pour Tlslande: Sveinn Bjornsson; 

The President of the Republic of Le President de la Republique de 

Finland : Onni Talas ; Finlande : Onni Talas ; 

His Majesty the King of Norway: Sa Majest6 le Roi de Norv&ge: 

Hans Emil Huitfeldt; Hans Emil Huitfeldt; 

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3209, July I, 1933. 

2 The titles of plenipotentiaries are omitted. ED. 



March 16, 1932 



RECOGNITION OF JUDGMENTS 



His Majesty the King of Sweden : 
Oskar Anton Herman Ewerlof; 

Who, being duly authorised for 
the purpose, have agreed on the 
following articles: 

Article i. Valid judgments ren- 
dered in civil matters in one of the 
Contracting States shall have bind- 
ing effect also in the other States. 
The same shall apply to judgments 
in criminal matters in so far as they 
relate to compensation or damages 
for injury sustained. 



The term "judgment" shall be 
understood to mean the Court's de- 
cision in respect of the claim or legal 
position which forms the subject of 
the case. 

Art. 2. The following shall be 
assimilated to valid judgments for 
the purpose of the present Con- 
vention : 

(1) Decisions by which the Over- 
exekutor in Finland or in Sweden has 
fixed a time-limit for payment in 
actions for the recovery of debt 
(lagsokningsm&l) when the period of 
appeal (besvar) against the decisions 
has expired ; 

(2) Compromises reached before 
a conciliation commission or a court 
of justice; 

(3) Valid decisions reached in 
civil matters either by means of the 
judgment or out of court with regard 
to compensation for legal costs or 
payments to witnesses or experts. 



Art. 3. Judgments by default 
rendered in Denmark, Iceland or 
Norway in first instance against a 
defendant and judgments by default 
(Tredskodom) or other judgments 
rendered in Finland or Sweden in 
first instance against a defaulting 
defendant shall not have binding 
effect in the other States unless: 



Sa Majest6 le Roi de Suede: Oskar 
Anton Herman Ewerlof; 

Lesquels, dfiment habilites a cet 
effet, sont convenus des dispositions 
suivantes : 

Article i. Les decisions judiciaires 
ayant Tautorite de la chose jug6e, 
qui seront rendues en mati&re civile 
dans Tun des Etats contractants, 
auront aussi effet obligatoire dans 
les autres Etats. II en sera de mme 
pour les decisions rendues en matire 
p&nale, s'il s'agit de dommages- 
inter^ts ou de reparations con- 
cernant un acte prejudiciable. 

Le terme "decisions judiciaires" 
s'entend de la decision par laquelle 
le tribunal r&gle la demande ou la 
situation de droit qui forme Fobjet 
de Taffaire. 

Art. 2. Aux fins de la pr6sente 
convention sont assimiles aux d6- 
cisions judiciaires ayant Tautorit6 
de la chose jug6e : 

1 Les decisions par lesquelles 
I* Over exekutor, en Finlande ou en 
Su&de, a fix6 un d61ai de paiement 
dans les actions en recouvrement de 
cr6ances, lorsque le d61ai de recours 
contre la decision est expir& ; 

2 Les transactions conclues de- 
vant une commission de conciliation 
ou un tribunal; 

3 Les decisions ayant force de 
chose juge qui, en mati&re civile, 
soit par la voie du jugement, soit au 
cours de la proc6dure sont inter- 
venues au sujet du remboursement 
des d6pens ou de Tindemnit^ verse 
& des t6moins ou experts. 

Art. 3. Les jugements par dfaut 
qui, en Danemark, en Islande ou en 
Norvge auront 6t6 rendus en pre- 
mi&re instance contre le dfendeur, 
ainsi que les jugements par d6faut 
(Tredskodom) et les autres jugements 
qui, en Finlande ou en Suede, auront 
et6 rendus en premiere instance 
contre un defendeur d6faillant, n'au- 
ront pas effet obligatoire dans les 
autres Etats, sauf : 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 305 



(1) The defendant at the time 
when the writ or the summons to a 
conciliation commission or to the 
overexekutor was issued had his 
domicile or his registered business 
address in the State in which the 
judgment was rendered or unless 
the Board of Directors which 
represented the defendant had its 
seat in that State or the notice 
was given to a representative 
whom the defendant was com- 
pelled by law to have in that 
State; or 

(2) A binding agreement has 
been reached to the effect that 
the case be dealt with by the 
Court which rendered the judg- 
ment; or 

(3) The judgment relates to 
compensation or damages for in- 
jury done in the State in which the 
judgment is rendered and the 
summons has been notified to the 
defendant personally during his 
stay in that State. 

The same rules shall apply to 
judgments by default rendered in 
appeal cases against the defendant 
when the judgment in the first in- 
stance, was also given by default. 

Art. 4. Decisions and compro- 
mises which, in accordance with 
Articles I to 3, have a binding effect 
outside the State in which the deci- 
sion has been rendered or the com- 
promise has been entered into and are 
enforceable in that State, shall, on de- 
mand, be enforced in the other States. 

Art. 5. The request for enforce- 
ment shall be addressed: 

In Denmark and Iceland, to the 
Sheriff (Foged) ; 

In Finland and Sweden, to the 
Overexekutor; 

In Norway, to the competent 
Court for enforcement (Namsret). 

Art. 6. The request for enforce- 
ment of a decision shall be accom- 
panied by: 



i Lorsque le defendeur, au 
moment OTJL a t6 signifie Tassig- 
nation, la citation en conciliation 
ou la citation devant I' Overexe- 
kutor, avait son domicile ou sa 
raison sociale declare dans 1'Etat 
oft a 6t6 rendu le jugement, ou bien 
lorsque le conseil d 'administration 
qui representait le d6fendeur avait 
son siege dans cet Etat, ou encore 
lorsque la signification a 6te faite 
& un representant que le defendeur 
6tait tenu, en vertu de la loi, d 'avoir 
dans cet Etat ; ou 

2 Lorsqu'est intervenu un ar- 
rangement obligatoire par lequel 
Taffaire devait tre porte devant 
le tribunal qui a rendu le juge- 
ment; ou 

3 a Lorsque le jugement a trait 
des dommages-interSts ou 
des reparations concernant un acte 
prjudiciable commis dans 1'Etat 
oil il a t6 rendu, et que 1'assigna- 
tion a 6t6 signifie personnellement 
au defendeur, pendant son sejour 
dans cet Etat. 

Les m&nes regies sont applicables 
aux arrSts par defaut rendus en appel 
contre le defendeur, lorsque le juge- 
ment prononc6 en premiere instance 
1'avait 6galement t6 par d6faut. 

Art. 4. S'il s'agit de decisions ou 
de transactions qui, en vertu des 
articles 1-3, ont effet obligatoire en 
dehors de 1'Etat ou elles sont inter- 
venues, et qui sont susceptiblesd'ex6- 
cution dans cet Etat, Tex6cution 
pourra en gtre demand6e dans les 
autres Etats contractants. 

Art. 5. La demande d 'exequatur 
sera adress6e: 

En Danemark et en Islande, 
Thuissier public (Foged) ; 

En Finlande et en SuMe, d 
V Overexekutor; 

En Norv&ge, au tribunal comp- 
tent en mati&re d'ex6cution (Nams- 
ref). 

Art. 6. La demande d'ex6cution 
d'une decision devra tre accom- 
pagn6e: 



March 16, 1932 



RECOGNITION OF JUDGMENTS 



(1) The decision in the original 
or a copy certified correct by the 
competent authority; 

(2) A certificate to the effect 
that the decision is of the kind 
mentioned in Article I or 2 and 
that it has acquired force of law 
and is enforceable in the State in 
which it is rendered ; 

(3) In the case of judgments of 
the kind mentioned in Article 3, 
a certificate to the effect that the 
judgment is valid in accordance 
with that article. 

The request for enforcement of a 
compromise shall be accompanied by 
a copy of the text of the compromise 
certified correct by the competent 
authority and a certificate to the 
effect that the compromise has been 
rendered before a conciliation com- 
mission or a court of justice and is 
enforceable in the State in which it 
has been reached. 

Documents drawn up in Finnish 
or Icelandic shall be accompanied by 
a certified translation into Danish, 
Norwegian or Swedish. 

Art. 7. The certificates men- 
tioned in Article 6 shall be drawn up : 

In Denmark, Finland and Iceland, 
by the Ministry of Justice; 

In Norway, by the Department of 
Justice; 

In Sweden, by the Administration 
of a province. 

Art. 8. The decision relating to 
enforcement under the present Con- 
vention shall be taken without 
consultation of the other Party. 
Nevertheless in special circum- 
stances that Party may be allowed 
to express its opinions. 

Art. 9. The enforcement shall 
take place in each State in accord- 
ance with the laws in force therein 
without regard to any coercive 
measures which may be provided for 
in the decision or compromise. 



i De I'original de la decision 
ou d'une expedition certifi6e con- 
forme par I'autorit6 comp6tente; 

2 D'une piece attestant que la 
decision rentre dans la cat6gorie 
mentionne aux articles I ou 2, 
qu'elle a l'autorit de la chose j ug6e, 
et qu'elle est susceptible d'ex<cu- 
tion dans TEtatou ellea6te rendue ; 

3 Pour les jugements de la 
catgorie vis6e & Particle 3, d'une 
pice attestant que le jugement 
est valide, conformement audit 
article. 

La demande d 'execution visant 
une transaction devra tre accom- 
pagnee d'une expedition du proces- 
verbal de transaction, certifi6e con- 
forme par Tautorite competente, et 
d'une pice attestant que la trans- 
action est intervenue devant une 
commission de conciliation ou un 
tribunal, et qu'elle est susceptible 
d'excution dans TEtat ou elle est 
intervenue. 

Les actes redigs en finnois ou en 
islandais devront 6tre accompagn6s 
d'une traduction danoise, norvegi- 
enne ou su6doise, certifie conforme. 

Art. 7. Les attestations mention- 
nes 1'article 6 seront <tablies: 

En Danemark, en Finlande et en 
Islande, par le Minis t^re de la Justice ; 

En Norvege, par le d&partement 
de la justice; 

En Su&de, par une prefecture. 

Art. 8. La decision relative & 
Tex^cution d'une decision, conform6- 
ment & la prsente convention, sera 
prise sans que la Partie adverse ait 
6t6 entendue; dans des cas sp&ciaux, 
cependant, cette Partie aura la 
possibility de dposer. 

Art. 9. L'ex6cution s'effectuera, 
dans chaque Etat, d'apres la 16gis- 
lation en vigueur dans cet Etat, 
quelles que soient les dispositions 
eventuellement nonces dans la 
decision ou dans le proems-verbal de 
transaction, au sujet de mesures de 
contrainte. 



10 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 305 



Art. 10. The provisions of the 
present Convention regarding the 
binding effect of judgments shall not 
affect Article 22 of the Convention of 
February 6, 1931, containing rules 
of international private law regard- 
ing marriage, adoption and guardian- 
ship, 1 nor shall they have the effect 
of rendering a decision in such mat- 
ters valid in circumstances other 
than those provided for in that 
article. The enforcement of judg- 
ments which are valid under that 
article may be demanded under 
Articles 4-9 of the present Conven- 
tion. 

If a judgment has been given in 
Denmark, Iceland or Norway in 
application of the laws regarding 
marriage settlements, the present 
Convention shall not apply to such 
judgment in Finland or Sweden in 
cases where the dispute has been 
judged in accordance with the for- 
mer marriage laws of the country. 

Further, the present Convention 
shall not apply to decisions or com- 
promises regarding the duty of 
maintenance in accordance with the 
law relating to families and shall not 
affect the Convention of February 
10, 1931, regarding the collection of 
maintenance contributions. 2 

The present Convention shall also 
not affect the provisions contained 
in other conventions regarding the 
validity or enforcement of judg- 
ments or other decisions. 

Art. ir. The present Convention 
shall not apply to decisions and 
compromises relating to: 

(i) Relationship, the right of 
succession, the responsibility of 
heirs for debts, death settlements, 
bankruptcies, compulsory com- 
position without bankruptcy 
(Tvangsakkord tidenfor Konkurs) 
or the invalidity of judicial acts 
or other measures in case of 
bankruptcy. 

1 No. 281, ante. ED. 



Art. 10. Les stipulations de la 
presente convention concernant 1'ef- 
fet obligatoire des decisions judi- 
ciaires n'opreront pas derogation a 
1'article 22 de la Convention du 6 
fevrier 1931 institnant des regies 
de droit international prive con- 
cernant le manage, 1'adoption et la 
tutelle; 1 elles n'auront pas pour effet 
de rendre une decision en cette 
matiere valable dans d 'autres cas que 
ceux qui sont prevus au susdit article. 
L 'execution de decisions judiciaires 
valables d'apres ledit article pourra 
tre demandee, en vertu des articles 
4-9 de la presente convention. 

Lorsqu'une decision judiciaire aura 
et6 rendue en Danemark, en Islande 
ou en Norvege, en application de la 
legislation sur le regime des biens 
matrimoniaux, la presente conven- 
tion ne sera pas applicable a cette 
decision en Finlande ou en Su&de, si, 
dans ces derniers pays, le litige efit dft 
tre juge d'apres Tancienne legisla- 
tion du pays sur le mariage. 

La presente convention ne s'ap- 
pliquera pas aux decisions ou tran- 
sactions relatives a Tobligation ali- 
mentaire institute par le droit de 
famille et n'operera pas derogation a 
la Convention du 10 fevrier 1931 sur 
le recouvrement des pensions ali- 
mentaires. 2 

La presente convention n'operera 
pas non plus derogation aux dis- 
positions d'autres conventions con- 
cernant rautorite ou Texecution de 
decisions judiciaires et autres. 

Art. ii. La presente convention 
ne sera pas applicable aux decisions 
et transactions concernant les ma- 
tieres suivantes : 

i La parente, le droit de suc- 
c6der, la responsabilit6 des heri- 
tiers a l'6gard des dettes du de- 
funt, la devolution des successions, 
radministration des faillites, le con- 
cordat sans faillite (Tvangsakkord 
udenfor Konkurs) ou Tin validation 
d'actes judiciaires ou d 'autres 
mesures, en cas de faillite. 
2 No. 282, ante. ED. 



March 16, 1932 



RECOGNITION OF JUDGMENTS 



II 



(2) Property rights or other 
rights relating to immovable prop- 
erty in one of the other States, the 
obligation to take steps relating 
to such rights or the consequences 
of neglecting such obligation; 

(3) Taxes or dues to the State 
or commune or other questions of 
public law, even if the decision 
has been rendered in the forms 
applicable to civil matters. 

The Convention shall also not 
apply to awards of the special courts 
for labour disputes. 

Art. 12. The Convention shall 
not involve any obligation to recog- 
nise or enforce a decision or a 
compromise which would manifestly 
be incompatible with the laws of the 
country. 

Art. 13. The Convention shall 
not apply to decisions rendered or 
compromises reached before the 
coming into force of the Convention. 

Art. 14. The Convention shall be 
ratified and the instruments of ratifi- 
cation shall be deposited in the 
archives of the Danish Ministry of 
Foreign Affairs as soon as possible. 

The Convention shall come into 
force between the ratifying States on 
January ist or July ist following the 
expiry of a period of three months 
after at least three of the States have 
deposited their instruments of ratifi- 
cation. As regards States deposit- 
ing their ratifications at a later date, 
the Convention shall come into force 
on January ist or on July ist fol- 
lowing the expiry of a period of 
three months after the deposit of 
the instrument of ratification. 

Any of the States may denounce 
the Convention to any of the other 
States at one year's notice terminat- 
ing on January ist or July 1st. 

IN FAITH WHEREOF the respective 
Plenipotentiaries have signed the 



2 Le droit de propriete, ou 
tout autre droit sur des imnieubles 
dans Tun des autres Etats, 1'obli- 
gation de prendre des dispositions 
relatives & ces droits, ou les con- 
squences resultant de la n6gli- 
gence de cette obligation ; 

3 Les impdts ou droits pergus 
par TEtat ou la commune, ou 
toutes autres questions de droit 
public, lors mme que la decision 
aurait ete rendue dans les formes 
applicables en matiere civile. 

La convention ne sera pas appli- 
cable aux decisions rendues par les 
tribunaux sp6ciaux comptents en 
matiere de confiits du travail. 

Art. 12. La convention n'en- 
trainera pas Fobligation de recon- 
naitre ou d'excuter une decision ou 
une transaction qui serait 6videm- 
ment incompatible avec Tordre pu- 
blic du pays. 

Art. 13. La convention ne sera 
pas applicable aux decisions rendues 
ou aux transactions intervenues 
avant son entr6e en vigueur. 

Art. 14. La convention devra tre 
ratifiee et les instruments de ratifica- 
tion seront dposs aux archives du 
Ministere des Affaires trang6res 
danois aussitdt que possible. 

La convention entrera en vigueur 
entre les Etats qui 1'aurpnt ratifiee le 
i er Janvier ou le i er juillet qui suivra 
Texpiration d'un d&lai de trois mois 
& partir du dp6t des instruments de 
ratification par trois des Etats, au 
moins. Pour les Etats qui la rati- 
fieront ulterieurement, la convention 
entrera en vigueur le i er Janvier ou 
le i er juillet qui suivra 1'expiration 
d'un dlai de trois mois & partir du 
d6p6t de Tinstrument de ratification. 

Chacun des Etats pourra d6- 
noncer la convention avec effet pour 
chacun des autres Etats, moyennant 
pr6avis d'un an prenant fin tin I OT 
Janvier ou un i er juillet. 

EN FOI DE QUOI les p!6nipoten- 
tiaires des divers Etats ont sign6 



12 INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION No. 306 

present Convention and have thereto la presente convention et Font 

affixed their seals. revltue de leurs cachets. 

Done at Copenhagen in one copy Fait & Copenhague, en un exem- 

in each of the following languages: plaire rdig dans chacune des 

Danish, Finnish, Icelandic, Nor- langues suivantes: danois, finnois, 

wegian and Swedish, there being islandais, norvegien et sudois, avec 

two texts in Swedish, one for Finland deux textes pour la langue su&Ioise 

and one for Sweden, on March 16, dont un pour la Finlande et un pour 

1932. la SuMe, le 16 mars 1932. 

[Signed:] P. MUNCH, ONNI TALAS, SVEINN BJORNSSON, EMIL HUITFELDT, 
O. EWERLOF (Subject to the ratification of His Majesty with the consent of 
the Riksdag). 



No. 306 

CONVENTION concerning the Protection against Accidents of 
Workers Employed in Loading and Unloading Ships (Revised 
1932). Adopted at Geneva, April 27, 1932. 

CONVENTION concernant la protection des travaiUeurs occupes au 
chargement et au dechargement des bateaux centre les acci- 
dents (revisee en 1932). Adoptee H Geneve, 27 avril 1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE. A draft convention on this subject was adopted at Geneva, June 21, 1929 
(No. 220, ante), and came into force as a convention, April I, 1932; it provided (Article 23) 
that it might be superseded by a revising convention. To facilitate action by Germany and 
Great Britain, the 1929 convention was revised by this convention in 1932. The short title 
of this convention is " Protection against Accidents (Dockers) Convention (Revised), 1932," 

RATIFICATIONS. Ratifications of this convention were communicated to the Secretary- 
General of the League of Nations by Uruguay, June 6, 1933 ; Italy, October 30, 1933 ; Mexico, 
May 12, 1934; Spain, July 28, 1934; Great Britain, January 10, 1935; Chile, October 18, 
1935; China, November 30, 1935. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. International Labour Conference, Sixteenth Session, Geneva, 1932, Record 
of Proceedings (Geneva: International Labour Office, 1932). See also the preparatory docu- 
ments of the sixteenth session of the conference. 

Anon., "The Sixteenth Session of the International Labour Conference," 26 Int. Labour 
Rev. (1932), pp. 151-98. 

Entered into force October 30, I934- 1 

Text from the collection of authentic texts published by the Secretariat of the 
League of Nations. 

The General Conference of the In- La Conference gnrale de TOr-. 
ternational Labour Organisation of ganisation Internationale du Travail 
the League of Nations, de la Soci6t6 des Nations, 

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, in a separate register of labor 
conventions, October 30, 1934. 



April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS 



Having been convened at Ge- 
neva by the Governing Body of the 
International Labour Office, and 
having met in its Sixteenth Ses- 
sion on 12 April 1932, and 

Having decided upon the adop- 
tion of certain proposals with 
regard to the partial revision of the 
Convention concerning the protec- 
tion against accidents of workers 
employed in loading or unloading 
ships adopted by the Conference 
at its Twelfth Session, which is the 
fourth item on the Agenda of the 
Session, and 

< Considering that these proposals 
*V must take the form of a Draft 
L International Convention, 

adopts, this twenty-seventh day of 

O April of the year one thousand nine 

^hundred and thirty-two, the following 

^ Draft Convention for ratification by 

the Members of the International 

Labour Organisation, in accordance 

with the provisions of Part XIII of 

the Treaty of Versailles and of the 

corresponding Parts of the other 

Treaties of Peace: 

V Article i. For the purpose of this 

* Convention: 

V (i) the term "processes" means 

and includes all or any part of the 

work performed on shore or on board 

ship of loading or unloading any 

COship whether engaged in maritime or 

w\ inland navigation, excluding ships of 

^ war, in, on, or at any maritime or 

^inland port, harbour, dock, wharf, 

quay or similar place at which such 

work is carried on; and 

(2) the term "worker" means any 
person employed in the processes. 

* Art. 2. Any regular approach 
-pover a dock, wharf, quay or similar 
'sHpremises which workers have to use 
My for going to or from a working place 

at which the processes are carried on 
and every such working place on 



Convoquee & Geneve par le 
Conseil d 'administration du Bu- 
reau international du Travail, et 
s'y 6tant reunie le 12 avril 1932 en 
sa seizieme session, 

Aprs avoir decide d 'adopter 
diverses propositions relatives & 
la revision partielle de la conven- 
tion concernant la protection des 
travailleurs occupes au charge- 
ment et au dchargement des 
bateaux contre les accidents 
adopt6e par la Conference sa 
douzi&me session, question qui 
constitue le quatrieme point de 
Fordre du jour de la session, et 

Considrant que ces proposi- 
tions doivent prendre la forme 
d'un projet de convention inter- 
nationale, 

adopte, ce vingt-septime jour d'a- 
vril mil neuf cent trente deux, le 
projet de convention ci-aprs, & rati- 
fier par les Membres de {'Organisa- 
tion internationale du Travail, con- 
formement aux dispositions de la 
Partie XIII du Traite de Versailles 
et des Parties correspondantes des 
autres Trait6s de Paix: 

Article i. Aux fins de la pr6sente 
convention: 

1) le terme "operations" signifie 
et comprend tout ou partie du 
travail effectu6, terre ou & bord, 
pour le chargement ou le decharge- 
ment de tout bateau affecte i la 
navigation maritime ou interieure, 
& 1'exclusion des bitiments de guerre, 
dans tout port maritime ou interieur, 
sur tout dock, wharf, quai ou autre 
endroit analogue ou ce travail est 
effectu6; et 

2) le terme "travailleur" com- 
prend toute personne employee aux 
dites operations. 

Art. 2. Toutes voies d'accs r6- 
gulteres passant par un bassin, wharf, 
quai ou autre lieu semblable et que 
les travailleurs ont & utiliser pour se 
rendre Femplacement de travail 
oil sont effectu6es les operations ou 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 306 



shore shall be maintained with due 

regard to the safety of the workers 
using them. 



In particular, 

(1) every said working place on 
shore and any dangerous parts of any 
said approach thereto from the 
nearest highway shall be safely and 
efficiently lighted; 

(2) wharves and quays shall be 
kept sufficiently clear of goods to 
maintain a clear passage to the 
means of access referred to in Arti- 
cle 3 ; 

(3) where any space is left along 
the edge of any wharf or quay, it 
shall be at least 3 feet (90 cm.) wide 
and clear of all obstructions other 
than fixed structures, plant and ap- 
pliances in use; and 

(4) so far as is practicable having 
regard to the traffic and working, 

(a) all dangerous parts of the said 
approaches and working places (e.g. 
dangerous breaks, corners and edges) 
shall be adequately fenced to a 
height of not less than 2 feet 6 inches 
(75 cm.) ; 

(b) dangerous footways over 
bridges, caissons and dock gates shall 
be fenced to a height of not less than 
2 feet 6 inches (75 cm.) on each side, 
and the said fencing shall be con- 
tinued at both ends to a sufficient 
distance which shall not be required 
to exceed 5 yards (4 m. 50) . 

(5) The measurement require- 
ments of paragraph (4) of this Ar- 
ticle shall be deemed to be complied 
with, in respect of appliances in use 
at the date of the ratification of this 
Convention, if the actual measure- 
ments are not more than 10 per cent, 
less than the measurements specified 
in the said paragraph (4), 

Art 3. (i) When a ship is lying 



pour en revenir, ainsi que tons em- 
placements de travail situes ;\ terre, 
devront fitre main ten us clans un 

6 tat propre & assurer la securitr dt\s 
travailleurs qui les utilisent. 
En par lieu Her, 

1) tous lieux do travail & terre et 
toutes parties dangereuses des voitw 
d'acc&s prtcitees y conduisunt ft 
partir du cheinin public le phis 
proche, devront fitre pourvus d'un 
6clairage efficace et sans danger; 

2) les wharfs et les quab seront 
suffisamment dbarrasss de mar- 
chandises pour maintenir un lihre 
passage vers les moycns d'accds 
vis&s i 1'article 3; 

3) lorsqu'un passage est Iaiss6 le 
long du bard du quai ou du wharf, il 
devra avoir au inoins 90 centimetres 
de large (3 pieds) et fitre libre de 
tous obstacles autres que les con- 
structions fixes, les appareils et les 
engins en usage; 

4) dans la mesure o& ce sera prati- 
cable, eu 6gard au trafic et au service, 

a) toutes parties dangereuses de 
ces voies d'aecte et lieux de travail 
(par exemple: ouvertures, tournants 
et bords dangereux) devront ?tre 
munis de garde-corps appropri^s 
d'une hauteur d'au mo ins 75 centi- 
metres (2 pieds 6 pouces) ; 

b) les passages dangereux sur les 
ponts, caissons et vannes de bassist 
devront 6tre munis de chaque cAt6, 
jusqu'i une hauteur d'au moins 75 
centimetres (2 pieds 6 pouces) de 
garde-corps continues 4 chaque ex- 
trdmitfi, sur une longueur suffisante 
qui n'aura pas d6passer 4 m. 50 
(5 yards). 

5) Les conditions de dimensions 
prlvues par le paragraphe 4 du pr feetit 
article seront oonsidres commc i- 
tisfaites, en ce qui concerne les engins 
en usage 4 la date de la ratification 
de^ la prfeente convention, I les 
chiffres des mesures effectivenient 
r6alis6es ne sont pas inftVIeurs de 
plus de 10 pour cent aux chiffres 
mentionn^s dans ledit paragraphe 4* 

Art. 3. i) Lorsqu*un bateau est 



April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS 



alongside a quay or some other ves- 
sel for the purpose of the processes, 
there shall be safe means of access for 
the use of the workers at such times 
as they have to pass to or from the 
ship, unless the conditions are such 
that they would not be exposed to 
undue risk if no special appliance 
were provided. 



(2) The said means of access shall 
be: 

(a) where reasonably practicable, 
the ship's accommodation ladder, a 
gangway or a similar construction ; 

(b) in other cases a ladder. 

(3) The appliances specified in 
paragraph (2) (a) of this article 
shall be at least 22 inches (55 cm.) 
wide, properly secured to prevent 
their displacement, not inclined at 
too steep an angle, constructed of 
materials of good quality and in 
good condition, and securely fenced 
throughout to a clear height of not 
less than 2 feet 9 inches (82 cm.) on 
both sides, or in the case of the 
ship's accommodation ladder se- 
curely fenced to the same height on 
one side, provided that the other 
side is properly protected by the 
ship's side. 



Provided that any appliances as 
aforesaid in use at the date of the 
ratification of this Convention shall 
be allowed to remain in use; 

(a) until the fencing is renewed if 
they are fenced on both sides to a 
clear height of at least 2 feet 6 inches 
(80 cm*) ; 

(b) for two years from the date of 

ratification if they are fenced on both 

sides to a clear height of at least 2 
feet 6 inches (75 cm.)- 



mouill pr&s d'un quai on d'un autre 
b&timent en vue des operations & 
effectuer, des moyens d'accs off rant 
des garanties de s6curit6 devront 
Ctre & la disposition des travailleurs 
pour se rendre sur le bateau ou en 
reyenir, 4 moins que les circonstances 
soient telles qu'ils puissent le faire, 
en 1'absence de dispositifs sp^ciaux, 
sans gtre exposes inutilement & des 
risques d 'accidents. 

2) Ces moyens d*accs devront 
consister: 

a) lorsque ce sera raisonnablement 
praticable, en P6chelle de couple du 
bateau, en une passerelle ou un 
dispositif analogue; 

b) dans les autres cas, en une 6chelle. 

3) Les dispositifs sp6cifi6s & la 
lettre a) du paragraphe 2) du present 
article devront avoir une largeur d'au 
moins 55 centimetres (22 pouces) ; ils 
devront 8tre solidement fix$ de 
fagon & ne pouvoir se d&placer; leur 
inclinaison ne devra pas 8tre trop 
forte et les mat6riaux employes pour 
leur construction devront Stre de 
bonne qualit6 et en bon 6tat; ils 
devront gtre munis des deux c6t6s 
sur toute leur longueur d'un garde- 
corps efficace d'une hauteur nette 
d'au moins 82 centimetres (2 pieds 
9 pouces) ou, s'il s'agit de l'6chelle 
de couple, munis d'un garde-corps 
efficace de la mme hauteur d'un 
seul c6t6 & la condition que 1 'autre 
cdt6 soit efficacement prot6g& par le 
flanc du bateau. 

Toutefois, tous dispositifs de cette 
nature en usage 4 la date de la ratifi- 
cation de la pr6sente convention 
pourront rester en service: 

a) pour ceux qui sont munis sur 
les deux c6ts de garde-corps d'une 
hauteur nette d'au moins 80 centi- 
litres (2 pieds 8 pouces), jusqu'& 
ce que ceux-ci soient renouve!6s ; 

6) pour ceux qui sont munis sur 
les deux cdt^s de garde-corps d'une 
hauteur nette d'au moins 75 centi- 
m&tres (2 pieds 6 pouces), pendant 
deux anuses & dater de la ratification 
de la pr6sente convention. 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No- 306 



(4) The ladders specified in para- 
graph (2) (6) of this Article shall be 

of adequate length and strength, and 
properly secured. 

(5) 00 Exceptions to the provi- 
sions of this Article may be allowed 
by the competent authorities when 
they are satisfied that the appliances 
specified in the Article are not re- 
quired for the safety of the workers. 

(6) The provisions of this Article 
shall not apply to cargo stages or 
cargo gangways when exclusively 
used for the processes. 

(6) Workers shall not use, or be 
required to use, any other means of 
access than the means specified or 
allowed by this Article. 

Art. 4. When the workers have to 
proceed to or from a ship by water 
for the processes, appropriate meas- 
ures shall be prescribed to ensure 
their safe transport, including the 
conditions to be complied with by 
the vessels used for this purpose. 



Art. 5. (i) When the workers 
have to carry on the processes in a 
hold the depth of which from the 
level of the deck to the bottom of the 
hold exceeds 5 feet (i m. 50), there 
shall be safe means of access from the 
deck to the hold for their use. 

(2) The said means of access shall 
ordinarily be by ladder, which shall 
not be deemed to be safe unless it 
complies with the following condi- 
tions : 

(a) provides foothold of a 
depth, including any space behind 
the ladder, of not less than 4^ 
inches (n^ cm.) for a width of 
not less than 10 inches (25 cm.) 
and a firm handhold; 

(V) is not recessed under the 
deck more than is reasonably 



4) Les 6chelles sptcifii^es A la 
lettre b) du paragraphe 2) du present 
article seront d r une longueur et 
d'une solklit6 suffisantes et con* 
venablement assu jetties, 

5) a) Des derogations aux dis- 
positions du present article pourront 
Itre accordtes par les autoritfts 
comp6tentes chaque fois^ qu'elies 
estimeront que les dispositifs sp&~ 
cifife ne sont pas indispensables & 
la s^curite des travailleurs* 

b) Les dispositions du present 
article ne s'appliqueront pas aux 
plate-formes ou passerelles de manu- 
tentlon lorsqu'elles sont exclusive- 
ment employees pour les operations. 

6) Les travailleurs ne dcvront 
pas utiliser et ne pourront litre ten us 
d'utiliser d'autres moyens d'acc&s 
que ceux qui sont specifics ou au- 
toris^s par le present article. 

Art. 4* Pour le cas ofi les travail- 
leurs doivent se rendre par eau sur 
un bateau ou en revenir & Foccaslon 
des operations, des mesures ap- 
propriles devront fitre pr6vues pour 
assurer la s6curite de leur tiransport 
y compris la determination des 
conditions auxquelles doivent satis- 
faire les embarcations utilis6es pour 
ce transport. 

Art, 5. i) Lorsque les travail- 
leurs ont & effectuer les operations 
dans des cales dont le fond est 
situ6 4 plus de l m. 50 (5 pieds) du 
niveau du pont, des moyens d*accfes 
offrant des garanties de s^curit^ 
devront 6tre mis i leur disposition* 

2) Ces moyens d*acc^s consiste- 
ront ordinairement en une 6chelle et 
celle-ci ne sera consid6r6e comme 
pr6sentant des garanties de s6curit6 
que: 

a) si elle offre aux pieds un 
appui dont la profondeur augmen- 
tie de Tespace derridre F6chelle 
est d'au moins n cm* }4 (4 pouces 
,K) pour une largeur d'au moins 
25 cm. (10 pouces) et aux mains 
un apjHii solide; 

i) si elle n*est pas plac^e en 
retrait sous le pont plus qu'il n'est 



April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS 



necessary to keep it clear of the 
hatchway; 

(c) is continued by and Is in line 
with arrangements for secure 
handhold and foothold on the 

coamings (e*g* cleats or cups) ; 



(d) the said arrangements on 
the coamings provide foothold of a 
depth, including any space behind 
the said arrangements, of not less 
than 4}4 inches (n^4 cm.) for a 
width of not less than 10 inches 
(25 cm.) ; 

(e) if separate ladders are pro- 
vided between the lower decks, the 
said ladders are as far as prac- 
ticable in line with the ladder from 
the top deck. 

Where, however, owing to the con- 
struction of the ship, the provision 
of a ladder would not be reasonably 
practicable, it shall be open to the 
competent authorities to allow other 
means of access, provided that they 
comply with the conditions laid 
down in this Article for ladders so 
far as they are applicable. 



In the case of ships existing at the 
date of the ratification of this Con- 
vention the measurement require- 
ments of subparagraphs (a) and (d) 
of this paragraph shall be deemed to 
be complied with f until the ladders 
and arrangements are replaced, if the 
actual measurements are not more 
than 10 per cent less than the meas- 
urements specified in the said sub- 
paragraphs (a) and (d). 



(3) Sufficient free passage to the 
means of access shall be left at the 
coamings. 

(4) Shaft tunnels shall be equipped 
with adequate handhold and foot- 
hold on both sides. 



raisonnablement n6cessaire pour 
qu'elle n'empi^te pas sur les 
&coutilles; 

c) si elle est continu^e par et 
est dans la m8me ligne que des 
dispositifs offrant un appui solide 
aux pieds et aux mains, places sur 
les surbaux des 6coutilles (par 
exemple des taquets ou tasseaux) ; 

d) si les dispositifs vis^s & 
Falin^a prc6dent off rent aux pieds 
un appui dont la profondeur 
augment^e de Fespace derri&re ces 
dispositifs est d'au moms n cm. 
}4 (4 pouces >) pour une largeur 
d'au moins 25 cm. (10 pouces) ; 

e) si, au cas oft il existe des 
6chelles distinctes entre les ponts 
inf^rieurs, ces 6chelles sont, dans 
la mesure du possible, dans la 
m6nie ligne que F&chelle partant 
du pont sup6rieur. 

Toutefois, lorsqu'en raison de la 
construction du bateau, on ne pour- 
rait raisonnablement exiger I'instal- 
lation d'une chelle, les autorit6s 
comp^tentes auront la facult6 d'au- 
toriser d'autres moyens d'acc&s, & 
la condition que ces moyens d'acc&s 
remplissent, dans la mesure oft elles 
sont applicables, les conditions pres- 
crites pour les 6chelles par le present 
article. 

Dans le cas des bateaux existant 
i la date de la ratification de la 
pr6sente convention et jusqu'au 
reinplacement des chelles et dis- 
positifs, les conditions de dimensions 
pr&vues par les alin6as a) et d) du 
present paragraphs seront consi- 
d6r6es comine satisfaites si les 
chiffres des mesures effectivement 
r6alis6es ne sont pas inf^rieurs de 
plus de 10 pour cent aux chiffres 
mentionn6s dans lesdits alinfeas a) 
etd). 

3) Un espace suffisant pour per- 
mettre d'atteindre les moyens d'ac- 
cfes devra fetre Iaiss6 libre prfes des 
surbaux des 6coutilks. 

4) Les tunnels des arbres devront 
Stre munis des deux c6t6s de poi- 
gntes et d^ppuie-pieds appropri6s. 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 306 



(5) When a ladder is to he used in 
the hold of a vessel which is not 
decked it shall be the duty of the 
contractor undertaking the proc- 
esses to provide such ladder. It 
shall be equipped at the top with 
hooks or with other means for firmly 
securing it. 

(6) The workers shall not use, or 
be required to use, other means of 
access than the means specified or 
allowed by this Article, 

(7) Ships existing at the date of 
ratification of this Convention shall 
be exempt from compliance with the 
measurements in paragraph (2) (a) 
and (d) and from the provisions of 
paragraph (4) of this Article for a 
period not exceeding four years from 
the date of ratification of this 
Convention. 

Art. 6. (i) While the workers 
are on a ship for the purpose of the 
processes, every hatchway of a cargo 
hold accessible to the workers which 
exceeds 5 feet (i m. 50) in depth 
from the level of the deck to the bot- 
tom of the hold, and which is not 
protected to a clear height of 2 feet 6 
inches (75 cm.) by the coamings, 
shall, when not in use for the passage 
of goods, coal or other material, 
either be securely fenced to a height 
of 3 feet (90 cm.) or be securely cov- 
ered. National laws or regulations 
shall determine whether the require- 
ments of this paragraph shall be 
enforced during meal times and other 
short interruptions of work. 



(2) Similar measures shall be 
taken when necessary to protect all 
other openings in a deck which 
might be dangerous to the workers. 

Art. 7- When the processes have 
to be carried on on a ship, the means 
of access thereto and all places on 



5) Lorsqu'une fechelle devra (ft re 

utilises dans la cale d'un bateau non 
pont6, il appartienclra *\ 1 'entre- 
preneur des operations de fournir 
cette 6chelle. Kile devra Stre munie 
k sa partie supferieure de crochets <>u 
d'autres dispositifs permettant de la 
fixer solidement. 

6) Les travailleurs ne pourront 
utiliser ni 8tre tenus d'utiliser des 
moyens d'acc&s autres que ceux qui 
sont sp6cifi6s ou autori$s dans le 
present article* 

7) Les bateaux existant 4 la date 
de la ratification de la pr^sentc con- 
vention seront exempts des condi- 
tions de dimensions imposf es par les 
dispositions du paragraphs 2 (alintfas 
a et d) et des prescriptions du 
paragraphe 4 du present article, 
pendant un d61ai n'excMant pas 
quatre ans & partir de la date de 
cette ratification. 

Art* 6.' i) Pendant que les tra- 
vailleurs sont & bord du bateau pour 
effectuer les op6rations, toute 6cou- 
tille de cale de marchandises acces- 
sible aux travailleurs, dont la pro- 
fondeur, mesurfie depuis le niveau 
du pent jusqu'au fond de la cale, 
d^passe i m. 50 (5 pieds) et qui n'est 
pas prot6ge jusqu'ci une hauteur 
nette d'au moins 75 cm. (2 pieds 6 
pouces) par les surbaux, devra, 
lorsqu'elle n'est pas utilisfie pour le 
passage de marchandises, de charbon 
ou d'autres mat6riaux, tre entoure 
d'un garde-corps efficace jusqu'4 une 
hauteur de 90 cm. (3 pieds) pu fitre 
efficacement ferm6e. La legislation 
nationale d^cidera si les dispositions 
du present paragraphe doivent 6tre 
appliqu^es pendant la dur^e des 
repas et d'autres courtes interrup- 
tions de travail. 

2) Des mesures semblables seront 
prises en cas de besoin pour prot^ger 
toutes autres ouvertures dans le 
pont qui pourraient presenter un 
danger pour les travailleurs. 

Art. 7. Lorsque les op6rations 
doivent gtre effectives k bord d'un 
bateau, les moyens d'acc^s k ce 



April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS 



board at which the workers are em- 
ployed or to which they may be re- 
quired to proceed in the course of 
their employment shall be efficiently 
lighted. 

The means of lighting shall be 
such as not to endanger the safety of 
the workers nor to interfere with the 
navigation of other vessels, 

Art. 8* In order to ensure the 
safety of the workers when engaged 
in removing or replacing hatch cov- 
erings and beams used for hatch 
coverings, 

(1) hatch coverings and beams 
used for hatch coverings shall be 
maintained in good condition; 

(2) hatch coverings shall be fitted 
with adequate hand grips, having 
regard to their size and weight, un- 
less the construction of the hatch or 
the hatch coverings is of a character 
rendering the provision of hand grips 
unnecessary; 

(3) beams used for hatch cover- 
ings shall have suitable gear for re- 
moving and replacing them of such a 
character as to render it unnecessary 
for workers to go upon them for the 
purpose of adjusting such gear; 



(4) all hatch coverings and fore 
and aft and thwart-ship beams shall, 
in so far as they are not interchange- 
able, be kept plainly marked to in- 
dicate the deck and hatch to which 
they belong and their position 
therein ; 

(5) hatch coverings shall not be 
used in the construction of cargo 
stages or for any other purpose 
which may expose them to damage. 



Art. 9. Appropriate measures 
shall be prescribed to ensure that no 
hoisting machine, or gear, whether 
fixed or loose, used in connection 
therewith, is employed in the proc- 



bateau ainsi que tous les endroits 
du bord oil les travailleurs sont 
occup6s ou peuvent 6tre appel^s & 
se rendre au cours de leur occupation 
devront gtre efficacement 6clair6s. 

Les moyens d'^clairage utilises 
devront Stre tels qu'ils ne puissent 
mettre en danger la s<curit6 des 
travailleurs, ni g^ner la navigation 
d'autres bateaux. 

Art 8, En vue d 'assurer la s6- 
curit6 des travailleurs lorsqu'ils sont 
occup6s & en lever ou & mettre en 
place les panneaux d'&coutilles ainsi 
que les barrots et galiotes servant 
& couvrir les 6coutilles, 

1) les panneaux d'<coutilles ainsi 
que les barrots et galiotes servant & 
couvrir les 6coutilles seront entre- 
tenus en bon &tat; 

2) les panneaux d'coutilles se- 
ront munis de poign^es appropri^es 
& leur dimension et & leur poids, & 
moins que la construction de T6cou- 
tille ou des panneaux d'6coutilles 
soit telle qu'elle rende des poign6es 
inutiles; 

3) les barrots et galiotes servant 
couvrir les 6coutilles seront munis, 
pour leur enl&vement et remise en 
place, de dispositifs tels que les 
travailleurs n'aient pas besoin de 
monter sur ces barrots et galiotes 
pour y fixer les dispositifs dont il 
s'agit; 

4) tous les panneaux d'6coutilles, 
barrots et galiotes devront, pour 
autant qu'ils ne sont pas inter- 
changeables, tre marques claire- 
ment pour indiquer le pont et 
Tteoutille auxquels ils appartiennent 
ainsi que leur position sur ceux-ci; 

5) les panneaux d'6coutilles ne 
pourront Stre employes pour la 
construction de plate-formes servant 
i la manutention de la cargaison, 
ni pour tout autre but qui les ex- 
poserait & gtre endommag^s. 

Art. 9. Des mesures appropri&es 
seront prises pour que les appareils 
de levage ainsi que tous engins ac- 
cessoires, fixes ou mobiles, ne soient 
employes pour les operations, terre 



20 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 306 



esses on shore or on board ship unless 
it Is in a safe xvorking condition. 

In particular, 

(i) before being taken into use, 
the said machines, fixed gear on 
board ship accessory thereto as de- 
fined by national laws or regulations, 
and chains and wire ropes used in 
connection therewith, shall be ade- 
quately examined and tested, and 
the safe working load thereof certi- 
fied, in the manner prescribed and by 
a competent person acceptable to the 
national authorities; 



(2) after being taken into use, 
every hoisting machine, whether 
used on shore or on board ship, and 
all fixed gear on board ship accessory 
thereto as defined by national laws 
or regulations shall be thoroughly 
examined or inspected as follows: 

(a) to be thoroughly examined 
every four years and inspected 
every twelve months: derricks, 
goose necks, mast bands, derrick 
bands, eyebolts, spans and any 
other fixed gear the dismantling of 
which is specially difficult; 

(b) to be thoroughly examined 
every twelve months: all hoisting 
machines (e.g. cranes, winches), 
blocks, shackles and all other 
accessory gear not included in (a). 

All loose gear (e.g. chains, wire 
ropes, rings, hooks) shall be inspected 
on each occasion before use unless 
they have been inspected within the 
previous three months. 



Chains shall not be shortened by 
tying knots in them and precautions 
shall be taken to prevent injury to 
them from sharp edges. 

A thimble or loop splice made in 



ou & bord d'un bateau, que s'ils se 
trouvent en fetat de fonctionner sans 
danger. 

En particulier, 

1) avant leur mise en service, 
lesdits appareils et les engins fixes i 
bord consid6r&s comme leurs acces- 
soires par les legislations nationales 
ainsi que les chatnes et c&bles 
m6talliques dont 1 'usage est H6 i 
leur fonctionnement, devront, par 
les spins d'une personne compdtente 
admise par les autorit6s nationales 
et dans les conditions prescrites, 
litre dftment v6rifi6s et essayfo et 
leur maximum de charge etre attestC* 
par un certificat; 

2) apr&s sa mise en service, tout 
appareil de levage utilisfi i terre ou 
& bord, et tous engins fixes i bord 
consid6r6s comme ses accessoires par 
les legislations nationales, sera ex- 
amin6 4 fond ou inspect! dans les 
conditions suivantes: 

a) seront examin6s & fond> tons 
les quatre ans et inspects tous 
les douze mois: les mUts de 
charge, pivots et colliers de m&ts 
et de rn^ts de charge, oeillets, 
pantoires, et tous autres engins 
fixes dont le d^montage est par- 
ticuli&rement difficile; 

b) seront examines 4 fond tons 
les douze mois; tous appareils de 
levage (tels que les grues, treuils), 
moufles, manilles et tous autres 
engins accessoires qui ne seront 
pas vis6s sous la lettre a). 

Tous engins mobiles (par exemple 
les chaJnes, cables m6talliques an- 
neaux, crochets) feront Fobjet d f une 
inspection pr6alable, chaque fois 
qu'ils seront mis en usage, sauf 
dans le cas oil ils auraient 4t6 in- 
spects depuis moins de trois rnois. 

Les chafnes ne devront pas 6tre 
raccourcies au moyen de noeuds, et 
des precautions seront prises pour 
viter qu'elles ne soient endom- 
mag^es par frottement contre des 
aretes vives. 

Les oeillets ou ^pissures des cables 



April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS 



21 



any wire rope shall have at least 
three tucks with a whole strand of 
rope and two tucks with one half of 
the wires cut out of each strand; 
provided that this requirement shall 
not operate to prevent the use of 
another form of splice which can be 
shown to be as efficient as the form 
hereby prescribed. 

(3) Chains and such similar gear 
as is specified by national laws or 
regulations (e.g. hooks, rings, shack- 
les, swivels) shall, unless they have 
been subjected to such other suffi- 
cient treatment as may be pre- 
scribed by national laws or regula- 
tions, be annealed as follows under 
the supervision of a competent per- 
son acceptable to the national au- 
thorities: 

(a) In the case of chains and the 
said gear carried on board ship: 

(i) half inch (i2$4 mm.) and 
smaller chains or gear in general 
use once at least in every six 
months; 

(ii) all other chains or gear 
(including span chains but exclud- 
ing bridle chains attached to der- 
ricks or masts) in general use once 
at least in every twelve months; 



Provided that in the case of such 
gear used solely on cranes and other 
hoisting appliances worked by hand, 
twelve months shall be substituted 
for six months in sub-paragraph (i) 
and two years for twelve months in 
sub-paragraph (ii); 

Provided also that, if the compe- 
tent authority is of opinion that 
owing to the size, design, material 
or infrequency of use of any of the 
said gear the requirements of this 
paragraph as to annealing are not 
necessary for the protection of the 
workers, it may, by certificate in 
writing (which it may at its discre- 
tion revoke), exempt such gear from 



m<talliques devront comporter au 
moins trois tours avec un toron 
entier du cable et deux tours avec 
la moiti6 des fils coupes dans chaque 
toron, Toutefois, cette prescription 
ne devra pas avoir pour effet d'em- 
p&cher Tusage d'une autre forme 
d'6pissure d'une efficacit6 aussi 6vi- 
dente que celle qui est stipu!6e par 
la pr^sente disposition. 

3) Les chaines et tels engins simi- 
laires que sp&ifient les legislations 
nationales (par exemple les crochets, 
anneaux, boucles, Imerillons) de- 
vront, & moins qu'ils n'aient t 
soumis tel autre traitement suffi- 
sant que peuvent prescrire ces 16gis- 
lations nationales, tre recuits dans 
les conditions ci-apr&s, sous le con- 
tr61e d'une personne comp6tente 
admise par les autorit6s nationales: 

a) Chaines et engins pr6cit6s qui 
sont & bord du bateau : 

1 chaines et engins r6guli&re- 
ment utilises de 12 millimetres et 
demi (un demi-pouce) ou moins, 
une f ois tous les six mois ; 

2 tous autres chafnes et engins 
(y compris les chaines de pantoire, 
mais & Texclusion des chalnes- 
brides attaches aux mlits de 
charge ou aux milts) r6gulire- 
ment utilises, une fois tous les 
douze mois; 

Toutefois, dans le cas des engins 
de cette nature utilises exclusive- 
ment sur les grues et autres appareils 
de levage & main, Tintervalle pr6vu 
au sous-paragraphe i sera de douze 
mois au lieu de six et I'intervalle 
pr6vu au sous-paragraphe 2 sera de 
deux ans au lieu de douze mois; 

De m&rne, dans le cas oil 1'au- 
torit6 comp6tente estime, en raison 
des dimensions, de la structure, des 
matriaux ou de la raret6 d'utilisa- 
tion de tous engins pr6cit6s, que 
1'observation des prescriptions du 
present paragraphe concernant les 
recuissons n'est pas n6cessaire pour 
la protection des travailleurs, cette 
autorit6 peut, au moyen d'un certi- 



22 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 306 



the said requirements subject to such 
conditions as may be specified in the 

said certificate* 



(6) In the case of chains and the 
said gear not carried on board ship : 

Measures shall be prescribed to se- 
cure the annealing of the said chains 
and gear. 

(c) In the case of the said chains 
and gear whether carried on board 
ship or not, which have been length- 
ened, altered or repaired by weld- 
ing, they shall thereupon be tested 
and re-examined. 

(4) Such duly authenticated rec- 
ords as will provide sufficient prima 
facie evidence of the safe condition 
of the machines and gear concerned 
shall be kept, on shore or on the ship 
as the case may be, specifying the 
safe working load and the dates and 
results of the tests and examinations 
referred to in paragraphs (i) and (2) 
of this Article and of the annealings 
or other treatment referred to in 
paragraph (3), 

Such records shall, on the appli- 
cation of any person authorised for 
the purpose, be produced by the 
person in charge thereof. 

(5) The safe working load shall 
be kept plainly marked on all cranes, 
derricks and chain slings and on any 
similar hoisting gear used on board 
ship as specified by national laws or 
regulations, The safe working load 
marked on chain slings shall either 
be in plain figures or letters upon the 
chains or upon a tablet or ring of 
durable material attached securely 
thereto. 



(6) All motors, cogwheels, chain 
and friction gearing, shafting, live 
electric conductors and steam pipes 
shall (unless it can be shown that by 
their position and construction they 
are equally safe to every worker em- 



ficat ecrit (qu'elle peut revoquer & 
son gr6), exempter ces engins de 
Tapplication desdites^ prescriptions, 
sous reserve des conditions qui peu- 
vent &tre fixfies dans le certihcat. 

b) Chaines et engins pr6cits qui 
ne sont pas & bord ; 

Des mesures seront prtvues pour 
assurer la recuisson de ces chalnes 
et engins. 

c) Chaines et engins prficitfs qui 
sont ou non , bord : 

Les chafnes et engins qui auront 
6t6 rallongfis, modifies ou rfiparfis par 
soudure devront 6tre essays et 
v6rifi6s de nouveau. 

4) On censer vera & terre ou 4 bord , 
suivant les cas des proc&s-verbaux 
ddment authentiques qui constitu- 
eront une pr&somption suffisante 
de la s6curit6 du fonctionnement des 
appareils et des engins dont il s'agit; 
ces procds-verbaux devront indiquer 
le maximum de charge autoris6, ainsi 
que la date et le r&sultat des essais et 
verifications vis6s aux paragraphes 
i) et 2) du present article et des 
recuissons ou autres traitements 
vis6s au paragraphe 3). 

Ces proems- verbaux devront 6tre 
pr6sent6s par la personne qui en est 
charg^e & la demande de toute per- 
sonne qualifi^e & cet effet, 

5) On devra marquer et maintenir 
sur toutes les grues, milts de charge 
et chaines d^lingues, ainsi que sur 
tous engins de levage similaires uti~ 
Iis6s ^ bord, tels qu'ils sont spcij&6s 
par les legislations nationales, I'm* 
dication distincte du maximum de 
charge autoris6, Le maximum de 
charge indiqu6 sur les chaines d f 61in** 
gues sera marqu6 en chiffres ou en 
lettres apparents sur les chalnes 
elles-mtotes ou bien sur une plaque 
ou anneau en mati&re durable solide- 
ment attach6 ^ ces dtialnes. 

6) Tous les moteurs, roues den- 
t&es, appareils de transmission 4 
chafne ou k frottement, conducteurs 
dectriques sous tension et tuyaujc de 
vapeur devront (i moins qu T il ne 
soit prouv6 que par leur position ou 



April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS 



ployed as they would be if securely 
fenced) be securely fenced so far as 
is practicable without impeding the 
safe working of the ship. 



(7) Cranes and winches shall be 
provided with such means as will 
reduce to a minimum the risk of the 
accidental descent of a load while in 
process of being lifted or lowered. 

(8) Appropriate measures shall be 
taken to prevent exhaust steam from 
and, so far as practicable, live steam 
to any crane or winch obscuring any 
part of the working place at which a 
worker is employed. 

(9) Appropriate measures shall be 
taken to prevent the foot of a derrick 
being accidentally lifted out of its 
socket or support, 

Art 10. Only sufficiently com- 
petent and reliable persons shall be 
employed to operate lifting or trans- 
porting machinery whether driven 
by mechanical power or otherwise, 
or to give signals to a driver of such 
machinery, or to attend to cargo 
falls on winch ends or winch drums. 



Art ii. (i) No load shall be left 
suspended from any hoisting ma- 
chine unless there is a competent 
person actually in charge of the 
machine while the load is so left. 

(2) Appropriate measures shall be 
prescribed to provide for the em- 
ployment of a signaller where this 
is necessary for the safety of the 
workers, 

(3) Appropriate measures shall be 
prescribed with the object of pre- 
venting dangerous methods of work- 
ing in the stacking, unstacking, 
stowing and unstowing of cargo, or 
handling in connection therewith. 



leur construction ils presentent, du 
point de vue de la scurite de tous 
les travailieurs employes, les mgmes 
garanties que s'ils <taient efficace- 
ment proteges) etre munis de dispo- 
sitifs de protection dans la mesure 
oil cela est pratiquement realisable 
sans nuire & la securit6 de la ma- 
noeuvre du bateau. 

7) Les grues et les treuils devront 
Stre pourvus de moyens propres & r- 
duire au minimum le risque de la chute 
accidentelle de la charge pendant 
qu'ils Fenl&ventou qu'ils Tabaissent. 

8) Des mesures appropriates de- 
vront Stre prises pour emp^cher la 
vapeur d'6chappement et, dans la 
mesure du possible, la vapeur vive 
de tout treuil ou grue de g&ner la 
visibility en tout lieu de travail oil 
un travailleur est occup6. 

9) Des mesures appropri6s de- 
vront 8tre prises pour empgcher Fen- 
l&vement involontaire du pied d'un 
melt de charge de son support. 

Art. 10. Seules les personnes 
suffisamment comp^tentes et dignes 
de confiance devront Stre employees 
& la conduite des appareils de levage 
ou de transport, qu'ils soient mus 
m^caniquement ou d'une autre fagon, 
ou & faire des signaux aux conduc- 
teurs de ces appareils, ou encore 
surveiller le cartahu actionn6 par 
les tambours ou poup^es de treuils. 

Art. n. i) Aucune charge ne 
devra rester suspendue & un appareil 
de levage si la marche de cet appareil 
n'est pas sous le contrdle effectif 
d'une personne comp&tente pendant 
que la charge est ainsi suspendue. 

2) Des mesures appropri6es de- 
vront Stre pr^vues pour qu'une per- 
sonne soit charg&e de faire des 
signaux si sa presence est n^cessaire 
& la s&curit& des travailieurs. 

3) Des mesures appropri6es de- 
vront 6tre prfrvues pour 6viter qu'on 
emploie des m6thodes de travail 
dangereuses dans Tempilement ou 
le d^sentassement, Farrimage ou le 
d6sarrimage de la cargaison, ou la 
manutention qui s'y rapporte. 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 306 



(4) Before work is begun at a hatch 
the beams thereof shall either be 
removed or be securely fastened to 
prevent their displacement. 

(5) Precautions shall be taken to 
facilitate the escape of the workers 
when employed in a hold or on 'tween 
decks in dealing with coal or other 
bulk cargo. 



(6) No stage shall be used in the 
processes unless it is substantially 
and firmly constructed, adequately 
supported and where necessary se- 
curely fastened. 

No truck shall be used for carry- 
ing cargo between ship and shore 
on a stage so steep as to be unsafe. 



Stages shall where necessary be 
treated with suitable material to 
prevent the workers slipping. 

(7) When the working space in a 
hold is confined to the square of the 
hatch, and except for the purpose of 
breaking out or making up slings. 



(a) hooks shall not be made fast 
in the bands or fastenings of bales of 
cotton, wool, cork, gunny-bags, or 
other similar goods; 

(6) can-hooks shall not be used for 
raising or lowering a barrel when, 
owing to the construction or condi- 
tion of the barrel or of the hooks, 
their use is likely to be unsafe. 



(8) No gear of any description 
shall be loaded beyond the safe 
working load save in exceptional 
cases and then only in so far as may 
be allowed by national laws or 
regulations. 



4) Avan t de mettre en usage une 
coutille, on devra en lever tous les 

barrots et galiotes ou les assujettir 
solidement pour 6viler qu'ils se 
tleplaeent. 

5) Toutes precautions devront 
Ctre prises pour que les travailleurs 
puissent facilement fivacuer les cales 
ou les entreponts lorsqu'ils y sont 
occup6s & charger ou d6charger du 
charbon ou d'autres cargaisons en 
vrac. 

6) Aucune plate-forme ne sera 
utilisfie pour les operations si elle 
n'est pas fortement et solidement 
construite, convenablement $tayee 
et, dans les cas oft c'est n6cessaire, 
solidement fixtfe. 

-Pour le transport de la charge 
entre le navire et la terre, on ne 
pourra faire usage d'un charriot & 
bras dans le cas oft la plate-forme 
est incline au point de presenter un 
clanger. 

Les plate-formes devront, si cela 
est n6cessaire, 6tre recouvertes d'une 
mati&re approprie pour empccher 
les travailleurs de glisser. 

7) Lorsque Tespace de travail 
dans une cale est Iimit6 au carr6 de 
l'6coutille, on ne devra pas, sauf 
dans le but d'amorcer le dfisarrimage 
ou pour rassembler la charge dans 



a) fixer des crochets aux liens ou 
autres attaches entourant les balles 
de coton, laine, U6ge, sacs de jute ou 
autres marchandises similaires; 

b) employer des griffes 4 tonneaux 
lors du chargement et du dteharge- 
ment des tonneaux, It moms que la 
construction et la nature des ton- 
neaux ainsi que la disposition et 
1'fitat des griffes permettent de le 
faire sans danger probable. 

8) Aucun engin de levage quel 
qu'il soit ne devra Stre chargd au 
deli du maximum de charge autoris6, 
sauf dans des cas exceptionnels et, 
dans ces cas, seulement dans la 
mesure autoris^e par la 16gislation 
nationale. 



April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS 



(9) In the case of shore cranes 
with varying capacity (e.g. raising 
and lowering jib with load capacity 
varying according to the angle) an 
automatic indicator or a table show- 
ing the safe working loads at the 
corresponding inclinations of the jib 
shall be provided on the crane. 

Art 12. National laws or regula- 
tions shall prescribe such precau- 
tions as may be deemed necessary 
to ensure the proper protection of 
the workers, having regard to the cir- 
cumstances of each case, when they 
have to deal with or work in proxim- 
ity to goods which are in themselves 
dangerous to life or health by reason 
either of their inherent nature or of 
their condition at the time, or work 
where such goods have been stowed. 



Art, 13. At docks, wharves, quays 
and similar places which are in fre- 
quent use for the processes, such 
facilities as having regard to local 
circumstances shall be prescribed 
by national laws or regulations shall 
be available for rapidly securing the 
rendering of first-aid and in serious 
cases of accident removal to the 
nearest place of treatment. Suffi- 
cient supplies of first-aid equipment 
shall be kept permanently on the 
premises in such a condition and in 
such positions as to be fit and readily 
accessible for immediate use during 
working hours. The said supplies 
shall be in charge of a responsible 
person or persons, who shall include 
one or more persons competent to 
render first-aid, and whose services 
shall also be readily available during 
working hours. 



9) Les grues utilises & terre et & 
puissance variable (par exemple par 
rel&vernent ou abaissement de la 
fl&che, la capacite de charge variant 
suivant Tangle) devront 8tre munies 
d'un indicateur automatique ou d'un 
tableau indiquant les maximums de 
charge correspondant aux inclinai- 
sons de la fl&che. 

Art. 12. Les legislations natio- 
nales devront pr6voir les precautions 
consid6r6es comme indispensables 
pour assurer convenablement la pro- 
tection des travailleurs, en tenant 
compte des circonstances de chaque 
cas particulier, quand ils ont & tra- 
vailler au contact ou & proximit6 de 
mati&res qui sont dangereuses pour 
leur vie ou leur sant6, soit par leur 
nature mme, soit cause de l'6tat 
dans lequel elles se trouvent & ce 
moment, ou quand ils ont & travailler 
dans des endroits oil de telles ma- 
ti&res ont s6journ6. 

Art. 13. Sur les docks, wharfs, 
quais et autres lieux semblables fr6- 
quemment utilises pour les op6ra- 
tions, les moyens de secours que 
les legislations nationales devront 
pr6voir, en tenant compte des cir- 
constances locales, seront am6nag6s 
de telle fagon que les premiers soins 
puissent Stre rapidement assures 
et pour que, dans les cas d'accident 
s6rieux, rint6ress6 puisse tre rapide- 
ment transport^ I'hdpital le plus 
proche. Une provision suffisante de 
materiel de premier secours devra 
tre conserve en permanence sur 
les lieux dont il s'agit, dans un 6tat et 
dans des endroits tels qu'elle soit 
facilement accessible et puisse tre 
utilis6e imm&liatement au cours des 
heures de travail Ces provisions de 
mat6riel de premier secours devront 
Stre plac6es sous la surveillance 
d'une ou de plusieurs personnes re- 
sponsables, comprenant une ou plu- 
sieurs personnes aptes & donner les 
premiers soins et prStes & assurer 
imm6diatement leur service pendant 
les heures de travail. 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 306 



At such docks, wharves, quays 
and similar places as aforesaid ap- 
propriate provision shall also be 
made for the rescue of immersed 
workers from drowning. 

Art. 14. An}?* fencing, gangway, 
gear, ladder, lifesaving means or 
appliance, light, mark, stage or other 
thing whatsoever required to be 
provided under this Convention shall 
not be removed or interfered with 
by any person except when duly 
authorised or in case of necessity, 
and if removed shall be restored at 
the end of the period for which its 
removal was necessary. 



Art 15. It shall be open to each 
Member to grant exemptions from or 
exceptions to the provisions of this 
Convention in respect of any dock, 
wharf, quay or similar place at which 
the processes are only occasionally 
carried on or the traffic is small and 
confined to small ships, or in respect 
of certain special ships or special 
classes of ships or ships below a 
certain small tonnage, or in cases 
where as a result of climatic con- 
ditions it would be impracticable to 
require the provisions of this Conven- 
tion to be carried out. 



The International Labour Office 
shall be kept informed of the provi- 
sions in virtue of which any exemp- 
tions and exceptions as aforesaid are 
allowed. 

Art. 1 6. Except as herein other- 
wise provided, the provisions of this 
Convention which affect the con- 
struction or permanent equipment 
of the ship shall apply to ships the 
building of which is commenced after 
the date of ratification of the Con- 
vention, and to all other ships within 
four years after that date, provided 
that in the meantime the said provi- 
sions shall be applied so far as rea- 



Des mesures appropriates dcvront 

galement 6tre prises sur les docks, 
wharfs, quais et autres lieux sem- 
blables, ci-dessus mentionn6s, pour 
porter secours aux travailleurs qui 
tomberaient *t 1'eau. 

Art. 14. Aucune personne n'aura 
le droit d'enlever ni de dplacer des 
garde-corps, passerelles, dispositifs, 
6chelles, appareils ou xnoyens de 
sauvetage, lumi&res, inscriptions, 
plate-formes ou tous autres objets 
pr^vus par les dispositions de la 
prfeente convention, sauf si elle y 
est dflment autorise ou en cas de 
n6cessit6; les objets dont il s'agit 
devront etre remis en place & Fex- 
piration du delai pour lequel leur 
enlfcvement a et nficessaire. 

Art. 15, Chaque Membre pourra 
accorder des derogations to tales ou 
partielles aux dispositions de la 
prcisente convention en ce qui con- 
cerne tout dock, wharf, quai ou autre 
lieu semblable oH les operations nt 
sont effectu6es qu'occasionnellement, 
ou dans lequel le trafic est restraint 
et Hmit6 & de petits bateaux, ou bien 
en ce qui concerne certains bateaux 
sp^ciaux ou certaines categories spfr- 
ciales de bateaux, ou les bateaux 
n'atteignant pas un certain tonnage, 
de mSme que dans les cas oil, par 
suite des conditions climatiques, on 
ne pourrait exiger pratiquement 
Tobservation des dispositions de la 
pr&sente convention. 

Le Bureau international du Tra- 
vail devra &tre informd des disposi- 
tions en vertu desqucllcs les d6roga* 
tions totalcs ou partielles mention- 
n6es ci-dessus seront accordes. 

Art. 16. Sous reserve des excep- 
tions stipules dans d'autres articles, 
les mesures pr&vues par la prfesente 
convention qui affectent la construc- 
tion ou l^quipement permanent du 
bateau devront s'appliquer sans 
d^lai aux bateaux dont la construc- 
tion aura 6t6 commenc^e apr^s la 
date de la ratification de la prdsente 
convention et elles devront s'ap- 
pliquer 4 tous les autres bateaux 



April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS 



sonable and practicable to such other 
ships. 



Art. 17. In order to ensure the 
due enforcement of any regulations 
prescribed for the protection of the 

workers against accidents, 

(1) The regulations shall clearly 
define the persons or bodies who are 
to be responsible for compliance 

with the respective regulations; 

(2) Provision shall be made for an 
efficient system of inspection and for 
penalties for breaches of the regula- 
tions; 

(3) Copies or summaries of the 
regulations shall be posted up in 
prominent positions at docks, 
wharves, quays and similar places 
which are in frequent use for the 
processes. 

Art. 1 8, Each Member under- 
takes to enter into reciprocal ar- 
rangements on the basis of this Con- 
vention with the otJier Members 
which have ratified this Convention, 
including more particularly the mu- 
tual recognition of the arrangements 
made in their respective countries 
for testing, exaniining and annealing 
and of certificates and records relat- 
ing thereto ; 

Provided that, as regards the con- 
struction of ships and as regards 
plant used on ships and the records 
and other matters to be observed on 
board under the terms of this Con- 
vention, each Member is satisfied 
that the arrangements adopted by 
the other Member secure a general 
standard of safety for the workers 
equally effective as the standard 
required under its own laws and 
regulations ; 



dans un d6Iai de quatre ans H partir 
de cette date, Toutefois, avant 
Texpiration de ce delai les dites 
mesures devront etre appliques 
& ces autres bateaux pour autant 
que cela sera raisonnable et pratique- 
ment realisable. 

Art. 17. Afin d'assurer Fapplica- 
tion effective de tous r&glements 
^tablis en vue de la protection des 
travailleurs contre les accidents, 

1) les dits rdglements devront 
determiner clairement les personnes 
ou prganismes auxquels incombe 
Pobligation d'en observer les pre- 
scriptions; 

2) des dispositions devront gtre 
prises pour instituer un syst^me d 'in- 
spection efficace et pour fixer les sanc- 
tions applicables en cas de violation 
des r^glements; 

3) les textes ou des r6sum<s des 
r&glements devront tre affich^s & 
des endroits bien visibles des docks, 
wharfs, quais et autres lieux sem- 
blables fr^quernment utilises pour 
les op6rations. 

Art. 18. Chaque Membre s'en- 
gage & conclure avec les autres 
Membres ayant ratifi6 la pr&sente 
convention des accords de r6cipro- 
cit6 sur la base de cette convention, 
en comprenant plus particuli&rement 
dans ces accords la reconnaissance 
mutuelle des dispositions prises dans 
leurs pays respectifs pour les essais, 
v6rifications et recuissons et la re- 
connaissance mutuelle des certificats 
et procs-verbaux y relatifs. 

Cet engagement est pris sous 
reserve que, pour ce qui concerne la 
construction des bateaux et Toutil- 
lage utilis6 & bord et pour ce qui 
concerne les proc^s-verbaux ainsi 
que les diverses prescriptions qui 
doivent 6tre observes & bord aux 
termes de la pr6sente convention, 
chaque Membre soit assur6 que les 
dispositions adoptees par Tautre 
Membre garantissent, pour les tra- 
vailleurs, un niveau g6n6ral de s6- 
curit d'une efficacit& gale au niveau 
prescrit par sa propre legislation. 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 306 



Provided also that the Govern- 
ments shall have due regard to the 
obligations of paragraph (n) of 
Article 405 of the Treaty of Ver- 
sailles and of the corresponding Arti- 
cles of the other Treaties of Peace. 

Art. 19. The formal ratifications 
of this Convention under the condi- 
tions set forth in Part XIII of the 
Treaty of Versailles and in the cor- 
responding Parts of the other Treaties 
of Peace shall be communicated to 
the Secretary-General of the League 
of Nations for registration. 

Art, 20. This Convention shall 
be binding only upon those Mem- 
bers whose ratifications have been 
registered with the Secretariat. 

It shall come into force twelve 
months after the date on which the 
ratifications of two Members of the 
International Labour Organisation 
have been registered with the Secre- 
tary-General. 

Thereafter, this Convention shall 
come into force for any Member 
twelve months after the date on which 
its ratification has been registered. 

Art* 21. As soon as the ratifica- 
tions of two Members of the Inter- 
national Labour Organisation have 
been registered with the Secretariat, 
the Secretary-General of the League 
of Nations shall so notify all the 
Members of the International La- 
bour Organisation. He shall like** 
wise notify them of the registration 
of ratifications which may be com* 
municated subsequently by other 
Members of the Organisation* 

Art. 22. A Member which has 
ratified this Convention may de- 
nounce it after the expiration of ten 
years from the date on which the 
Convention first comes into force, by 
an act communicated to the Secre- 
tary-General of the League of Na- 
tions for registration* Such denun- 
ciation shall not take effect until 
one year after the date on which it 
is registered with the Secretariat. 

Each Member which has ratified 



En outre, les Gouvernements tien- 
dront dflment compte cles obliga- 
tions qui rfsultent du paragraphs 1 1 
tie Tarticle 405 du Traite cle Ver- 
sailles et des articles correspondants 
des autres Trait.es cle Puix. 

Art. 19. Les ratifications oflicielles 
de la prfisente convention dans les 
conditions pr^vues & la Partie XIII 
du Trait6 de Versailles et aux Parties 
correspondantes des autres Trait6s 
de Paix seront communiques au 
Secretaire g6n6ral de la Soci6t6 des 
Nations et par lui enregistrtfes. 

Art, 20, La pr6sente convention 
ne Hera que les Membres de TOr- 
ganisation Internationale du Travail , 
dont la ratification aura tfi en- 
registrde au Secretariat. 

Elle entrera en vigueur douze mois 
aprds que les ratifications de deux 
Membres auront 6t6 enregistrtfes par 
le Secr6taire 



Par la suite, cette convention en- 
trera en vigueur pour chaque Mem- 
bra douze mois aprfes la date oii sa 
ratification aura 6t6 enregistrte. 

Art. 21. Aussitdt que les ratifi- 
cations de deux Membres de 1 'Or- 
ganisation Internationale du Travail 
auront 6t6 enregistr&es au Secr6* 
tariat, le Secretaire g(mral de la 
Soci6t des Nations notifiera ce fait 
& tous les Membres de reorganisation 
Internationale du Travail. II leur 
notifiera 6galement Tenregistrement 
des ratifications qui lui seront ult(> 
rieurement communiques par tons 
autres Membres de FOrganisation* 

Art 22* Tout Membre ayant 
ratifi6 la praente convention pent 
la ^d6noncer 4 Fexpiration d f une 
pMode de dix annte aprds la date 
de la mise en vigueur initiale de la 
convention, par un acte communique 
au Secretaire g6n6ral de la Sociit6 
des Nations, et par lui enregistrt* 
La d6nonciation ne prendra effet 
qu*une ann6e apr^s avoir 6t6 en- 
registr6e au Secretariat. 

Tout Membre ayant ratifi^ la 



April 27, 1932 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS TO DOCKERS 



this Convention and which does not, 
within the year following the expira- 
tion of the period of ten years men- 
tioned in the preceding paragraph, 
exercise the right of denunciation 
provided for in this Article, will be 
bound for another period of five 
years and, thereafter, may denounce 
this Convention at the expiration of 
each period of five years under the 
terms provided for in this Article. 

Art. 23, At the expiration of each 
period of ten years after the coming 
Into force of this Convention, the 
Governing Body of the International 
Labour Office shall present to the 
General Conference a report on the 
working of this Convention and shall 
consider the desirability of placing 
on the Agenda of the Conference the 
question of its revision in whole or 
in part. 

Art. 24. Should the Conference 
adopt a new Convention revising this 
Convention in whole or in part, the 
ratification by a Member of the new 
revising Convention shall ipso jure 
involve denunciation of this Con- 
vention without any requirement of 
delay , notwithstanding the provisions 
of Article 22 above, if and when the 
new revising Convention shall have 
come into force. 



As from the date of the coming into 
force of the new revising Conven- 
tion, the present Convention shall 
cease to be open to ratification by 
the Members. 

Nevertheless, this Convention shall 
remain in force in its actual form and 
content for those Members which 
have ratified it but have not ratified 
the revising Convention. 

Art. 25. The French and English 
texts of this Convention shall both 
be authentic. 

The foregoing is the authentic 
text of the Draft Convention duly 
adopted by the General Conference 



prfisente convention qui, dans le 
dlai d'une ann&e aprds F expiration 
de la p6riode de dix ann<es me'n- 
tionn^e au paragraphs pr6c6dent, 
ne fera pas usage de la facult< de 
d^nonciation pr<vue par le present 
article, sera H6 pour une nouvelle 
p6riode de cinq ann6es et, par la suite, 
pourra ddnoncer la prsente con- 
vention & 1'expiration de chaque 
p^riode de cinq annes dans les con- 
ditions pr6vues au present article. 

Art. 23* A Texpiration de chaque 
p6riode de dix annes compter de 
rentrfe en vigueur de la pr<sente 
convention, le Conseil d'adminis- 
tration du Bureau international du 
Travail devra presenter & la Conf6- 
rence g6n6rale un rapport sur Tap- 
plication de la pr&sente convention et 
d6cidera s'il y a lieu d'inscrire & 1'ordre 
du jour de la Conference la question 
de sa revision totale ou partielle. 

Art. 24. Au cas oft la Conference 
internationale adopterait une nou- 
velle convention portant revision 
totale ou partielle de la pr6sente 
convention, la ratification par un 
Membre de la nouvelle convention 
portant revision entratnerait de plein 
droit d^nonciation de la pr^sente 
convention sans condition de d61ai 
nonobstant Particle 22 ci-dessus, 
sous reserve que la nouvelle conven- 
tion portant revision soit entree en 
vigueur, 

A partir de la date de Tentr^e en 
vigueur de la nouvelle convention 
portant revision, la pr6sente con- 
vention cesserait d'etre ouverte & 
la ratification des Membres. 

La prfeente convention demeure- 
rait toutefois en vigueur dans sa 
forme et teneur pour les Membres 
qui Tauraient ratifi^e et qui ne 
ratifieraient pas la nouvelle con- 
vention portant revision. 

Art. 25. Les textes frangais^et 
anglais de la pr6sente convention 
feront foi Tun et 1'autre. 

Le texte qui prc&de est le texte 
authentique du projet de convention 
dftment adopt6 par la Conf6rence 



30 INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION No. 3C>7 

of the International Labour Organisa- gtfnfrale de 1 Organisation intema- 

tion during its Sixteenth Session tionale du Travail dans sa seiz&mc 

which was held at Geneva and de- session qui s'est tenue & Genfeve et 

clared closed the joth day of April qui a 6t6 dclar6e close le 30 avril 

1932. 1932. 

IN FAITH WHEREOF we have ap- EN FOI DE QUOI ont apposfi leurs 

pended our signatures this fifth clay signatures, le cinq mai 1932, 

of May 1932. 

For the President of the Conference, Bo HAMMARSKJOLD, Vice-president 
The Director of the International Labour Office, ALBERT THOMAS 



No. 307 

CONVENTION concerning the Age for Admission of Children to 
Non-Industrial Employment. Adopted at Geneva, April 30, 
1932. 

CONVENTION concernant Page d'adrnission des enfants atu; 
travatix non-indtistriels. Adoptee a Geneve, 30 avril 1932, 

EDITOR'S NOTE. A draft convention on the minimum age for admission of children to 
industrial employment was adopted by the International Labor Conference at Washington, 
November 28, 1919 (No. 14, ante)*, a draft convention on the minimum age for admission of 
children to employment at sea was adopted at Genoa, July 9, 1920 (No. 23, ante)*, and a 
draft convention on the age for admission of children to employment in agriculture was 
adopted at Geneva, November 16, 1921 (No. 60, ante). This convention was adopted as a 
draft convention by the International Labor Conference at its sixteenth session ; its short 
title is "Minimum Age (Non-Industrial Employment) Convention, 1932," 

RATIFICATIONS, Ratifications of this convention were communicated to the Secretary- 
General of the League of Nations by Uruguay, June 6, 1933; Belgium, June 6, 1934; Spain, 
June 22, 1934; Netherlands, July 12, 1935; Cuba, February 24, 1936; Austria, February 
26, 1936. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. International Labour Conference, Fifteenth Session, Geneva, zp^jr ( Rec- 
ords) t 2 vols, (Geneva: International Labour Office, 1931); idem, sixteenth session, Geneva, 
1932 (1932). See also the preparatory documents of the fifteenth and sixteenth sessions of 
the conference. 

Anon., "The Fifteenth Session of the International Labour Conference," 24 InL Labour 
Rev, (1931), pp. 135-75; "The Sixteenth Session of the International Labour Conference/' 
26 idem (1932), pp. 151-98. 

Entered into force June 6, 1935.* 

Text from the collection of authentic texts published by the Secretariat of the 

League of Nations, 

The General Conference of the La Conference g6n^rale de rOr- 
International Labour Organisation ganisation Internationale du Travail 
of the League of Nations, de la Society des Nations, 

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, in a separate register of labor 
conventions, June 6, 1935. 



April SO, 1932 MINIMUM AGE (NON-INDUSTRIAL EMPLOYMENT) 



Having been convened at Ge- 
neva by the Governing Body of 
the International Labour Office, 
and having met in its Sixteenth 
Session on 12 April 1932, and 

Having decided upon the adop- 
tion of certain proposals with re- 
gard to the age for admission of 
children to employment in non- 
industrial occupations, which is 
the third item on the Agenda of 
the Session, and 

Having determined that these 
proposals shall take the form of a 
draft international convention, 

adopts, this thirtieth day of April 
of the year one thousand nine 
hundred and thirty-two the follow- 
ing Draft Convention for ratification 
by the Members of the International 
Labour Organisation, in accordance 
with the provisions of Part XIII 
of the Treaty of Versailles and of the 
corresponding Parts of the other 
Treaties of Peace: 

Article I. (i) This Convention 
shall apply to any employment not 
dealt with in the following Con- 
ventions adopted by the Interna- 
tional Labour Conference at its First, 
Second and Third Sessions respec- 
tively: 

Convention fixing the minimum 
age for admission of children to in- 
dustrial employment (Washington, 
1919); 

Convention fixing the minimum 
age for admission of children to em- 
ployment at sea (Genoa, 1920) ; 

Convention concerning the age for 
admission of children to employment 
in agriculture (Geneva, 1921). 

The competent authority in each 
country shall, after consultation 
with the principal organisations of 
employers and workers concerned, 
define the line of division which 
separates the employments covered 
by this Convention from those dealt 
with in the three aforesaid Conven- 
tions, 



Convoqu6e & Geneve par le 
Conseil d 'administration du Bu- 
reau international du Travail, et 
s'y 6tant r6unie le 12 avril 1932, 
en sa seizi&me session, 

Aprds avoir d6cid6 d 'adopter 
diverses propositions relatives & 
I'&ge d 'admission des enfants au 
travail dans les professions non 
industrielles, question qui con- 
stitue le troisifeme point de 1'ordre 
du jour de la session, et 

Apr&s avoir d6cid6 que ces 
propositions prendraient la forme 
d'un projet de convention inter- 
nationale, 

adopte, ce trenti&me jour d'avril mil 
neuf cent trente deux, le projet de 
convention ci-apr&s & ratifier par 
les Membres de 1 'Organisation Inter- 
nationale du Travail conform6ment 
aux dispositions de la Partie XIII 
du Trait6 de Versailles et des Parties 
correspondantes des autres Trait6s 
de Paix: 

Article i. i) La pr6sente con- 
vention s'applique & tout travail ne 
faisant pas 1'objet de la r6glementa- 
tion pr^vue par les conventions 
suivantes adopt6es respectivement 
par la Conf6rence Internationale du 
Travail & ses premiere, deuxi^me et 
troisi&me sessions : 

Convention fixant I'&ge minimum 
d'admission des enfants aux travaux 
industriels (Washington, 1919); 

Convention fixant I'&ge minimum 
d'admission des enfants au travail 
maritime (G6nes, 1920) ; 

Convention concernant F&ge d'ad- 
mission des enfants au travail dans 
1'agriculture (Gen&ve, 1921). 

Dans chaque pays, l'autorit com- 
pos ten te, apr&s consultation des 
principales organisations patroriales 
et ouvri&res int<resses, dlterminera 
la ligne de demarcation entre le 
champ d'application de la pr6sente 
convention et celui des trois con- 
ventions susmentionn6es. 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 307 



(2) This Convention shall not 
apply to : 

(a) employment in sea-fishing; 

(b) work clone In technical and 
professional schools, provided that 
such work is essentially of an educa- 
tive character, is not intended for 
commercial profit, and is restricted, 
approved and supervised by public 
authority, 

(3) It shall be open to the com- 
petent authority in each country to 
exempt from the application of this 
Convention : 

(a) employment in establishments 
in which only members of the em- 
ployer's family are employed, except 
employment which is harmful, preju- 
dicial or dangerous within the 
meaning of Articles 3 and 5 of this 
Convention ; 

(&) domestic work in the family 
performed by members of that 
family. 

Art. 2. Children under four- 
teen years of age, or children over 
fourteen years who are still required 
by national laws or regulations to 
attend primary school, shall not be 
employed in any employment to 
which this Convention applies except 
as hereinafter otherwise provided. 

Art. 3. (i) Children over twelve 
years of age may, outside the hours 
fixed for school attendance, be em- 
ployed on light work: 



(a) which is not harmful to their 
health or normal development; 

(b) which is not such as to preju- 
dice their attendance at school or 
their capacity to benefit from the 
instruction there given ; and 

(c) the duration of which does not 
exceed two hours per day on either 
school days or holidays, the total 
number of hours spent at school and 
on light work in no case to exceed 
seven per day. 

(2) Light work shall be pro- 
hibited : 



2) La prfisente convention ne 
s'appliquera pas : 

a) <L la pfiche maritime; 

b) au travail dans les 6coles tech- 
niques et prof essionnel les, & la 
condition qu'il pr6sente un caractfrre 
essentiellement fiducatif, n'ait pas 
pour objet un bfinfifice commercial 
et qu'il soit Iimit6, approuv6 et con- 
tr616 par I'autoritfi publique, 

3) Dans chaque pays, Tautorit6 
comptente aura la facult6 d'exclure 
de 1'application de la pr6sente con- 
vention ; 

a) Temploi dans les 6tablissements 
o& sont seuls occup6s les membres 
de la famille de Temployeur, 4 la 
condition que cet emploi ne soit pas 
nuisible, pr^judiciable ou dangereux 
au sens des articles 3 et 5 ci-dessous ; 

b) le travail domestique dans la 
famille par les membres de cette 
famille. 

Art. 2. Les enfants de moins de 
quatorze ans ou ceux qui, ayant 
depassfi cet Hge, sont encore sounus 
& 1'obligation scolaire primaire en 
vertu de la legislation nationale, ne 
pourront Stre occup6s & aucun des 
travaux auxquels s'applique la pr6- 
sente convention, sous reserve des 
dispositions ci-apr&s. 

Art. 3.!) Les enfants igfe de 
douze ans accomplis pourront, en 
dehors des heures fix6es pour la 
fr^quentation scolaire, litre occup^s 
& des travaux 16gers, sous reserve 
que ces travaux; 

a) ne soient pas nuisibles JSi leur 
sant6 ou & leur d6veloppement 
normal ; 

b) ne soient pas de nature 4 porter 
prejudice ^t leur assiduit6 &, 1'^cole 
ou & leur facult6 de b6n6ficier de 
Tinstruction qui y est donn^e; 

c) n'excfedent pas deux heures par 
jour, aussi bien les jours de classe 
que les jours de vacances, le nombre 
total quotidien des heures consacr^es 
& l'<cole et aux travaux 16gers ne 
devant en aucun cas d6passer sept, 

2) Les travaux 16gers seront pro- 
hib6s: 



April 30, 1932 MINIMUM AGE (NON-INDUSTRIAL EMPLOYMENT) 



33 



(a) on Sundays and legal public 
holidays ; 

(b) during the night, that is to 
say during a period of at least twelve 
consecutive hours comprising the 
interval between 8 p.m. and 8 a.m. 

(3) After the principal organisa- 
tions of employers and workers 
concerned have been consulted, na- 
tional laws or regulations shall: 

(a) specify what forms of employ- 
ment may be considered to be light 
work for the purpose of this article; 

(b) prescribe the preliminary con- 
ditions to be complied with as safe- 
guards before children may be em- 
ployed in light work. 

(4) Subject to the provisions of 
sub-paragraph (a) of paragraph (i) 
above, 

(a) national laws or regulations 
may determine work to be allowed 
and the number of hours per day to 
be worked during the holiday time 
of children referred to in Article 2 
who are over fourteen years of age; 

(b) in countries where no provi- 
sion exists relating to compulsory 
school attendance, the time spent on 
light work shall not exceed four and 
a half hours per day* 

Art. 4. In the interests of art, 
science or education, national laws 
or regulations may, by permits 
granted in individual cases, allow 
exceptions to the provisions of Arti- 
cles 2 and 3 of this Convention in 
order to enable children to appear in 
any public entertainment or as 
actors or supernumeraries in the 
making of cinematographic films; 



Provided that: 

(a) no such exception, shall be 
allowed in respect of employment 
which is dangerous within the mean- 
ing of Article 5, such as employment 
in circuses, variety shows or cab- 
arets ; 

(>) strict safeguards shall be pre- 



a) les dimanches et jours de ftte 
publique 16gale ; 

b) pendant la nuit, c'est~&-dire 
pendant un intervalle d'au moins 
douze heures conscutives compre- 
nant la periode entre huit heures du 
soir et huit heures du matin. 

3) Apr&s consultation des prin- 
cipales organisations patronales et 
ouvri^res intress6es, la legislation 
nationale: 

a) determinera quels sont les 
genres de travaux qui peuvent tre 
considers comme travaux legers au 
sens du present article; 

b) prescrira les garanties preiimi- 
naires remplir avant que les 
enfants ne puissent gtre employes & 
des travaux legers. 

4) Sous reserve des dispositions 
de raiinea a) du paragraphe I ci- 
dessus : 

a) la legislation nationale pourra 
determiner les travaux permis et 
leur dur6e journali&re, pour la p6riode 
des vacances des enfants ayant 
depasse quatorze ans, vises & Parti- 
cle 2; 

6) dans les pays ou n'existe au- 
cune disposition relative la fr6- 
quentation scolaire obligatoire, la 
duree des travaux lagers ne devra 
pas depasser quatre heures et demie 
par jour. 

Art. 4. Dans rint&rfit de Tart, 
de la science ou de Fenseignement, 
la legislation nationale pourra, par 
le moyen d'autorisations individu- 
elles, accorder des derogations aux 
dispositions des articles 2 et 3 de la 
pr6sente convention, afin de per- 
mettre 4 des enfants de paraitre dans 
tous spectacles publics, ainsi que 
de participer comme acteurs ou 
figurants dans des prises de vue 
cinematographiques. 

Toutefois, 

a) aucune derogation ne sera ac- 
cord6e dans le cas d'un emploi 
dangereux au sens de Tarticle 5 ci- 
dessous, notamment pour des spec-' 
tacles de cirque, varietes et caba- 
rets; 

&) des garanties strictes seront 



34 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 307 



scribed for the health, physical 
development and morals of the 
children , for ensuring kind treatment 
of them, adequate rest, and the 

continuation of their education ; 

(c) children to whom permits are 
granted in accordance with this 
Article shall not be employed after 
midnight* 

Art. 5. A higher age or ages than 
those referred to in Article 2 of this 
Convention shall be fixed by na- 
tional laws or regulations for admis- 
sion of young persons and adolescents 
to any employment which, by its 
nature, or the circumstances in 
which it is to be carried on, is 
dangerous to the life, health or 
morals of the persons employed in it. 

Art. 6. A higher age or ages than 
those referred to in Article 2 of this 
Convention shall be fixed by national 
laws or regulations for admission of 
young persons and adolescents to 
employment for purposes of itiner- 
ant trading in the streets or in places 
to which the public have access, to 
regular employment at stalls outside 
shops or to employment in itinerant 
occupations, in cases where the con- 
ditions of such employment require 
that a higher age should be fixed. 

Art. 7. In order to ensure the due 
enforcement of the provisions of this 
Convention, national laws or regu- 
lations shall : 

(a) provide for an adequate sys- 
tem of public inspection and super- 
vision ; 

(&) provide suitable means for 
facilitating the identification and 
supervision of persons under a 
specified age engaged in the em- 
ployments and occupations covered 
by Article 6 ; 

(s) provide penalties for breaches 
of the laws or regulations by which 
effect is given to the provisions of 
this Convention. 

Art. 8. There shall be included in 
the annual reports to be submitted 



6tablies en vue de sauvegarder la 
sant6, le d6veloppement physique et 

la moralitfi des enfants, de leur as- 
surer de bons traitements, un repos 
convenable et la continuation de leur 
instruction ; 

c) les enfants autorisfis i travailler 
dans les conditions pr6vues au pre- 
sent article ne devront pas travailler 
aprds minuit. 

Art. 5* La legislation nationale 
fixera un &ge ou des %es sup6rieurs & 
ceux qui sent mentionnds & 1 'article 
2 de la prfisente convention pour 
radmission des jeunes gens et adoles- 
cents & tout emplpi qui, par sa 
nature ou les conditions clans les- 
quelles il est rempli, est dangereux 
pour la vie, la sant6 ou la moralit6 
des personnes qui y sont affect6es. 

Art. 6. La legislation nationale 
fixera un &ge ou des %es superieurs 
4 ceux qui sont mentionntfs & Particle 
2 de la prison te convention pour 
radmission des jeunes gens et adoles- 
cents aux emplois dans le commerce 
ambulant sur la voie publique ou 
dans les 6tablissements et lieux 
publics, aux emplois permanents 
des <talages ext6rieurs, ou aux em- 
plois dans les professions ambulantes, 
lorsque ces emplois sont exerc( x s dans 
des conditions qui justifient qu'un 
&ge plus 61ev6 soit fix6. 

Art. 7. En vue d 'assurer 1 'appli- 
cation effective des dispositions de la 
pr6sente convention, la legislation 
nationale: 

a) pr^voira un systfeme appropri6 
d 'inspection et cle contrOle officials; 

6) pr6voira des mesures appro- 
prides pour faciliter Tidentification 
et le contrdle des personnes au- 
dessous d'un &ge d6termin6 occupies 
dans les emplois et professions visfes 
il'article6; 

c) 6tablira des p6nalit6s pour r6~ 
primer les infractions & la 16gislation 
donnant effet aux dispositions de la 
pr<sente convention. 

Art 8, Les rapports annuels pr^- 
vus par Particle 408 du Trait6 de 



April 30, X932 MINIMUM AGE (NON-INDUSTRIAL EMPLOYMENT) 



35 



under Article 408 of the Treaty of 
Versailles and the corresponding 
Articles of the other Treaties of Peace 
full information concerning all laws 
and regulations by which effect is 
given to the provisions of this Con- 
vention, including: 

(a) a list of the forms of em- 
ployment which national laws or 
regulations specify to be light work 
for the purpose of Article 3 ; 

(&) a list of the forms of em- 
ployment for which, in accordance 
with Articles 5 and 6, national laws 
or regulations have fixed ages for 
admission higher than those laid 
down in Article 2 ; 

(c) full information concerning the 
circumstances in which exceptions to 
the provisions of Articles 2 and 3 
are permitted in accordance with 
the provisions of Article 4. 

Art, 9. The provisions of Articles 
2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 of this Convention 
shall not apply to India, but in 
India: 

(1) the employment of children 
under ten shall be prohibited : 

Provided that in the interests of 
art, science or education, national 
laws or regulations may, by per- 
mits, granted in individual cases, 
allow exceptions to the above 
provision in order to enable chil- 
dren to appear in any public enter- 
tainment or as actors or super- 
numeraries in the making of 
cinematographic films. 

Provided also that should the 
age for the admission of children 
to factories not using power 
which are not subject to the 
Indian Factories Act be fixed by 
national laws or regulations at an 
age exceeding ten, the age so pre- 
scribed for admission to such 
factories shall be substituted for 
the age of ten for the purpose of 
this paragraph. 

(2) Persons under fourteen 
years of age shall not be employed 



Versailles et les articles corres- 
pondants des autres Traites de Paix 
donneront des renseignements com- 
plets sur la legislation donnant 
effet aux dispositions de la pr6sente 
convention. Ces renseignements 
contiendront notamment : 

a) une liste des genres d'emplois 
que la legislation nationale qualifie 
de travaux legers au sens de I 1 article 

3; 

b) une liste des genres d'emplois 
pour lesquels, conformement aux 
articles 5 et 6, la legislation nationale 
a fix6 des <iges d 'admission plus 
eieves que ceux etablis par Particle 
2; 

c) des renseignements complets 
sur les conditions dans lesquelles les 
derogations aux articles 2 et 3sont 
autorisees en vertu de Tarticle 4. 

Art. 9. Les dispositions des arti- 
cles 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 et 7 de la pr6sente 
convention ne s'appliqueront pas 
I'lnde. Mais dans 1'Inde: 

1) L'emploi des enfants de 
moins de dix ans sera interdit. 

Toutefois, dans I'int6r6t de Tart, 
de la science ou de Tenseignement, 
la legislation nationale pourra, au 
moyen d'autorisations individu- 
elles, accorder des derogations 
la disposition ci-dessus, afin de per- 
mettre & des enfants de parattre 
dans tous spectacles publics ainsi 
que de participer comme acteurs 
ou figurants dans des prises de vue 
cinematographiques. 

En outre, au cas oil I'Uge d'ad- 
mission des enfants dans les manu- 
factures n'employant pas de force 
motrice et qui ne sont pas regies 
par la loi indienne sur les manu- 
factures viendrait & tre fixe par la 
legislation nationale au-dessus de 
dix ans, I'&ge ainsi present pour 
Tadrnission au travail dans ces 
manufactures sera substitue 
rage de dix ans aux fins de Tap- 
plication du present paragraphs. 

2) Les personnes de moins de 
quatorze ans ne pourront tre 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No* 307 



In any non-industrial employment 
which the competent authority, 
after consultation with the prin- 
cipal organisations of employers 
and workers concerned, may de- 
clare to involve danger to life, 
health or morals, 

(3) An age above ten shall be 
fixed by national laws or regula- 
tions for admission of young per- 
sons and adolescents to employ- 
ment for purposes of itinerant 
trading in the streets or in places 
to which the public have access, 
to regular employment at stalls 
outside shops or to employment 
m itinerant occupations, in cases 
where the conditions of such em- 
ployment require that a higher 
age should be fixed. 

(4) National laws or regulations 
shall provide for the due enforce- 
ment of the provisions of this 
Article and in particular shall 
provide penalties for breaches of 
the laws or regulations by which 
effect is given to the provisions 
of this Article. 

(5) The competent authority 
shall, after a period of five years 
from the date of passing of legisla- 
tion giving effect to the provisions 
of this Convention, review the 
whole position with a view to 
Increasing the minimum age pre- 
scribed in this Convention* such 
review to cover the whole of the 
provisions of this Article* 

Should legislation be enacted in 
India making attendance at school 
compulsory until the age of fourteen 
this Article shall cease to apply, and 
Articles 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 shall 
thenceforth be applicable to India. 

Art. 10. The formal ratifications 
of this Convention tinder the condi- 
tions set forth in Part XIII of the 
Treaty of Versailles and in the cor- 
responding Parts of the other Trea- 
ties of Peace shall be communicated 
to the Secretary-General of the 
League of Nations for registration. 



occupies fit aucun des travaux non 
industriels que Fautorite comp6- 
tente, apris consultation des prin- 
cipales organisations d'employeum 
et de travailleurs interessees, pour- 
rait declarer dangereux pour la 
vie, la sante ou la morality* 

3) La legislation rationale fixe- 
ra un ge sup6rieur 4 dix ans pour 
{'admission des jeunes gens et 
adolescents aux emplois dans le 
commerce ambulant sur la voie 
publique ou dans les etablissements 
et lieux publics, aux emplois per- 
manents & des etalages ext6rieurs, 
ou aux emplois dans les profes- 
sions ambulantes, lorsque ces 
emplois sont exerc6s dans des 
conditions qui justifient qu'un 
ge plus 61ey6 soit fixe. 

4) La legislation nationale pr6- 
voira des mesures pour 1'applica- 
tion des dispositions du present 
article et, en particulier, etablira 
des p6nalit6s pour r6primer les 
infractions & la legislation donnant 
effet aux dispositions du present 
article. 

5) L'autoritecompetentedevra, 
apr&s une periode de cinq ans & 
compter de la promulgation des lois 
donnant effet aux dispositions de la 
pr^sente convention, rexaminer 
complement la situation en vue 
de relever les iges minima presents 
& la presents convention, nouvel 
examen qui s*appliquera & toutes 
les dispositions du present article. 

S'il 6tait 6tabli, dans 1'Inde, une 
legislation rendant la fr^quentation 
scolaire obligatoire jusqu*& 1'Sge de 
quatorze ane, le present article ces* 
serait d'etre applicable et les articles 
2 3 4 5> 6 et 7 deviendraient alors 
applicables 4 1'lAde* 

Att* xo. Les ratifications offi- 
cielles de la prtsente convention dans 
les conditions prevues It la Partie 
XIII du Traite de Versailles et aux 
Parties correspondantes des autres 
Trait^s de Paix seront communiquees 
au Secretaire general de la Soci6t6 
des Nations et par lui enregistrees. 



April 30, 1932 MINIMUM AGE (NON-INDUSTRIAL EMPLOYMENT) 



37 



Art. n. This Convention shall be 
binding only upon those Members 

whose ratifications have been regis- 
tered with the Secretariat. 

It shall come into force twelve 
months after the date on which the 
ratifications of two Members of the 
International Labour Organisation 
have been registered with the Secre- 
tary-General. 

Thereafter, this Convention shall 
come into force for any Member 
twelve months after the date on 
which its ratification has been regis- 
tered* 

Art. 12, As soon as the ratifica- 
tions of two Members of the Interna- 
tional Labour Organisation have 
been registered with the Secretariat, 
the Secretary-General of the League 
of Nations shall so notify all the 
Members of the International La- 
bour Organisation. He shall like- 
wise notify them of the registration 
of ratifications which may be com- 
municated subsequently by other 
Members of the Organisation. 

Art* 13* A Member which has 
ratified this Convention may de- 
nounce it after the expiration of ten 
years from the date on which the 
Convention first comes into force, by 
an act communicated to the Secre- 
tary-General of the League of Na- 
tions for registration. Such denun- 
ciation shall not take effect until one 
year after the date on which it is 
registered with the Secretariat, 

Each Member which has ratified 
this Convention and which does not, 
within the year following the expira- 
tion of the period of ten years 
mentioned in the preceding para- 
graph, exercise the right of denunci- 
ation provided for in this Article, 
will be bound for another period of 
five years and, thereafter, may 
denounce this Convention at the 
expiration of each period of five 
years under the terms provided for in 
this Article, 



Art ii. La presente convention 
ne Hera que les Membres de TOr- 
ganisation Internationale du Travail 
dont la ratification aura ete en- 
registre au Secretariat* 

Elle entrera en vigueur douze mois 
apr&s que les ratifications de deux 
Membres auront ete enregistr^es 
par le Secretaire general. 

Par la suite, cette convention 
entrera en vigueur pour chaque 
Membre douze mois apr&s la date 
oti sa ratification aura ete enregistr^e. 

Art. 12. Aussitdt que les ratifi- 
cations de deux Membres de 1'Or- 
ganisation Internationale du Travail 
auront ete enregistr6es au Secretariat, 
le Secretaire general de la Societe des 
Nations notifiera ce fait & tous les 
Membres de TOrganisation inter- 
nationale du Travail. II leur noti- 
fiera egalement Tenregistrement des 
ratifications qui lui seront ult6- 
rieurernent communiqu^es par tous 
les autres Membres de TOrganisa* 
tion. 

Art. 13. Tout Membre ayant 
ratifie la presente convention peut 
la denoncer & Texpiration d'une 
periode de dix annees apr&s la date 
de la mise en vigueur initiale de la 
convention, par un acte communique 
au Secretaire general de la Societe 
des Nations, et par lui enregistre. 
La denonciation ne prendra effet 
qu'une annee apr&s avoir ete enre- 
gistree au Secretariat. 

Tout Membre ayant ratifie la 
pr6sente convention qui, dans le 
delai d'une ann6e aprds Texpiration 
de la periode de dix annees men- 
tionnee au paragraphe precedent, ne 
fera pas usage de la faculte de denon- 
ciation prevue par le present article 
sera lie pour une nouvelle periode de 
cinq annees, et, par la suite, pourra 
denoncer la presente convention a 
Texpiration de chaque period^ de 
cinq annees dans les conditions 
prevues au present article. 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 307 



Art. 14, At the expiration of each 
period of ten years after the coming 
into force of this Convention, the 
(Governing Body of the International 
Labour Office shall present to the 
General Conference a report on the 
working of this Convention and shall 
consider the desirability of placing 
on the Agenda of the Conference the 
question of its revision in whole or 
in part. 

Art. 15. Should the Conference 
adopt a new Convention revising 
this Convention in whole or in part, 
the ratification by a Member of the 
new revising Convention shall ipso 
jure involve denunciation of this 
"Convention without any require- 
ment of delay, notwithstanding the 
provisions of Article 13 above if and 
when the new revising Convention 
shall have come into force. 

As from the date of the coming 
into force of the new revising Con- 
vention, the present Convention 
shall cease to be open to ratification 
by the Members. 

Nevertheless, this Convention 
shall remain in force in its actual 
form and content for those Members 
which have ratified it but have not 
ratified the revising Convention. 

Art. 16* The French and English 
texts of this Convention shall both 
be authentic. 

The foregoing is the authentic 
text of the Draft Convention duly 
adopted by the General Conference 
of the International Labour Organi- 
sation during its Sixteenth Session 
which was held at Geneva and de- 
clared closed the 30 th day of April 
1932. 

IN FAITH WHEREOF we have ap- 
pended our signatures this fifth day 
of May 1932. 



Art. 14* A Pexpiration de chaque 
p^riode de dix anntes It compter de 
Tentr6e en vigueur de la prfeente 
convention, le Conseil d*administra* 
tion du Bureau international du 
Travail devra presenter & la Conf6- 
rence g6n6rale un rapport sur Fappli- 
cation de la pr6sente convention et 
d<cidera s'il y a lieu d'inscrire 
1'ordre du jour de la Conference la 
question de sa revision totale ou 
partielle. 

Art. 15. Au cas oft la Conference 
gfinfirale adopterait une nouvelle 
convention portant revision totale ou 
partielle de la pr6sente convention, 
la ratification par un Membre de la 
nouvelle convention portant revision 
entrainerait de plcin droit d6noncia- 
tion de la prdsente convention sans 
condition de dfilai nonobstant Par- 
ticle 13 ci-dessus, sous r6serve que la 
nouvelle convention portant revision 
soit entr6e en vigueur. 

A partir de la date de I'entrfie en 
vigueur de la nouvelle convention 
portant revision, la pr6sente conven- 
tion cesserait d'fitre ouverte la 
ratification des Membres. 

La pr6sente convention demeure- 
rait toutefois en vigueur dans sa 
forme et teneur pour les Membres 
qui 1'auraient ratifife et qui ne 
ratifieraient pas la nouvelle conven- 
tion portant revision. 

Art, 1 6* Les textes fran^ais et 
anglais de la pr6sente convention 
feront foi Tun et I'autre. 

Le texte qui prtcMe est le texte 
authentique du projet de convention 
dflment adopts par la Conference 
gn6rale de TOrganlsation Interna- 
tionale du Travail dans sa seizidme 
session qui s'est tenue & Geneve et 
qui a 6t6 dclare close le 30 avril 
1932. 

EN FOI BE QUOI ont appos6 leurs 
signatures, le cinq mai 1932. 



For the President of the Conference, Bo HAMMARSKjdLD, Vice-president 
The Director of the International Labour Office, ALBERT THOMAS 



May 3D, 1932 DECLARATION BY IRAQ 39 

No. 308 

DECLARATION by the Kingdom of Iraq. Signed at Baghdad, May 

30, 1932. 

DECLARATION dti Royaume de PIrak. Signee a Bagdad, 30 mai 

1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE. The occasion of this declaration was the termination of the mandatory 
r%ime in Iraq (see No. ib xv, ante), and the request of the Kingdom of Iraq for admission to 
membership in the League of Nations. On January 28, 1932, the Council of the League of 
Nations adopted a resolution calling for such a declaration as a condition precedent to the 
termination of the mandate (League of Nations Official Journal, 1932, p. 474); and on May 
*9 *93^ it approved the text of this declaration (idem, pp. 1213, 1347). Iraq became a 
member of the League of Nations on October 3, 1932. Though it is a unilateral declaration, 
it places Iraq under various "obligations of international concern " vis-a-vis the members of 
the League of Nations, Its language is largely borrowed from the various treaties for the 
protection of minorities (Nos. 3, 4, 5, 16, 26, ante), and its form follows that of declarations 
previously made by Albania (No* 52, ante), and Lithuania (No. 73, ante). For an explana- 
tion of its terms, see the report of the committee set up by the Council of the League of 
Nations, League of Nations Official Journal, 1932, p. 1342. The Council resolution of May 
19, 1932 recommended the renunciation of the capitulations in Iraq, and such action was 
taken by various states in 1932. Idem, 1932, pp. 1850 ff. 

RATIFICATIONS. The ratification of this declaration by Iraq was deposited with the Secre- 
tariat of the League of Nations, June 29, 1932. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. Permanent Mandates Commission, Minutes of the Twenty-first Session, 
League of Nations Document, C. 830. M. 4 1 1. 193 1. VI; Minutes of the Sixty-sixth and Sixty- 
seventh Sessions of the Council, League of Nations Official Journal , 1932, pp. 47179, 60610, 
1212-16, 1342-50. 

A. H. el Gammal, La fin des mandats internationaux et I 1 experience irakienne (Dijon: Berni- 
gand, 1932), 182 pp.; E. Main, /rag; From Mandate to Independence (London: Allen and 
Unwin, 1935), Ch. V; W. H. Ritsher, Criteria of Capacity for Independence (Jerusalem: 
Syrian Orphanage Press, 1934), 152 pp.; A. J. Toynbee (Ed.) "The Admission of the King- 
dom of Iraq to Membership in the League of Nations," Survey of International Affairs, 1934 
(London: Humphrey Milford), pp. 194-211; Anon., "Die allgemeinen Voraussetzungen fur 
die Aufhebung der Mandatsordnung in einem Mandatsgebiet und die Beendigung des 
Mandats tiber Iraq," 4 Zeitschrift fUr ausldndisches offentliches Recht und Volkerrecht (1934), 
PP- 155-9* 

Entered into force June 29, 1932^ 
Text from League of Nations Document, A. 17. 1932. VII. 

CHAPTER I CHAPITRE I 

Protection of Minorities Protection des minority's 

Article I. The stipulations con- Article i. Les stipulations con- 
tained in the present chapter are tenues dans le present chapitre 
recognised as fundamental laws of seront reconnues comme lois fon- 
Iraq, and no law, regulation or offi- damentales en Irak. Aucune loi, 

1 Not registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations. (July i, 1937)- 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 308 



da! action shall conflict or interfere 

with these stipulations, nor shall 

any law, regulation or official action 
now or in the future prevail over 
them. 



Art* 2* i. Full and complete pro- 
tection of life and liberty will be 
assured to all inhabitants of Iraq 
without distinction of birth, nation- 
ality, language, race or religion. 

2. All inhabitants of Iraq will be 
entitled to the free exercise, whether 
public or private, of any creed, reli- 
gion or belief, whose practices are not 
inconsistent with public order or 
public morals, 

Art, 3, Ottoman subjects habitu- 
ally resident in the territory of Iraq 
on August 6th, 1924, shall be deemed 
to have acquired on that date Iraqi 
nationality to the exclusion of Otto- 
man nationality in accordance with 
Article 30 of the Lausanne Peace 
Treaty 1 and under the conditions laid 
down in the Iraqi Nationality Law 
of October 9th, 1924.^ 

Art, 4. i. All Iraqi nationals 
shall be equal before the law and 
shall enjoy the same civil and politi- 
cal rights without distinction as to 
race, language or religion, 

2. The electoral system shall guar- 
antee equitable representation to 
racial, religious and linguistic minor- 
ities in Iraq. 

3. Differences of race, language or 
religion shall not prejudice any Iraqi 
national in matters relating to the 
enjoyment of civil or political rights, 
as, for instance, admission to public 
employments, functions and hon- 
ours, or the exercise of professions or 
industries. 

4. No restriction will be imposed 
on the free use by any Iraqi national 
of any language, in private inter- 
course, in commerce, in religion, in 



aucun rdglement ni aucune action 
officielle ne seront en contradiction 
ou en opposition avec ces stipula- 
tions, et aucune loi, aucun rdglement 
ni aucune action officielle ne pr6- 
vaudront centre elles, ni main tenant 
ni 4 1'avenir. 

Art. 2. i. II sera accord^ & tous 
les ^ habitants de 1'Irak pleine et 
entidre protection de leur vie et de 
leur libert^, sans distinction cle 
naissance, cle nationality, de langage, 
de race ou de religion- 

2. Tous les habitants de 1*1 rak 
auront droit au libre exercice, taut 
public que priv6, de toute foi, religion 
ou croyance, dont la pratique ne sera 
pas incompatible avec 1'ordre public 
et les bonnes mceurs. 

Art. 3. Les ressortissants otto- 
mans <tablis sur le territoire de 1'Irak 
& la date du 6 aoflt 1924 seront con- 
sidfir6s comme ayant acquis, i cette 
date, la nationality irakierme, 4 Tex- 
elusion de la nationalitfi ottomane, 
sur la base de Particle 30 du Traitfi de 
paix de Lausanne, 1 et dans les condi- 
tions pr6vues dans la loi irakienne du 
9 octobre 1924 sur la nationality. 2 

Art. 4. i. Tous les ressortissants 
irakiens seront 6gaux devant la loi et 
jouirpnt des mfimes droits civils et 
politiques sans distinction de race, de 
langue ou de religion. 

2. Le syst&me Electoral assurera 
une representation Equitable aux 
minoritfis de race, de religion ou de 
langue en Irak. 

3. La difference de race, de langue 
ou de religion ne devra nuire & aucun 
ressortissant irakien en ce qui con- 
cerne la jouissance des droits civils 
et^ politiques, notamment pour Tad- 
mission aux emplois publics, fonc- 
tions et honneurs, et pour Texercke 
des diff6rentes professions et indus- 
tries. 

4. II ne sera 6dict6 aucune restric- 
tion au libre usage par tous les res- 
sortissants irakiens d'une langue 



quelconque, soit dans les relations 

1 28 League of Nations Treaty Series, p. it. -ED. 

2 Flournoy and Hudson, Nationality Laws, p. 348. En. 



May 30, 1932 



DECLARATION BY IRAQ 



the Press or in publications of any 
kind, or at public meetings. 



5. Notwithstanding the establish- 
ment by the Iraqi Government of 
Arabic as the official language, and 
notwithstanding the special arrange- 
ments to be made by the Iraqi Gov- 
ernment, under Article 9 of the 
present Declaration, regarding the 
use of the Kurdish and Turkish 
languages, adequate facilities will be 
given to all Iraqi nationals whose 
mother tongue is not the official 
language, for the use of their lan- 
guage, either orally or in writing, be- 
fore the courts, 

Art. 5. Iraqi nationals who be- 
long to racial, religious or linguistic 
minorities will enjoy the same treat- 
ment and security in law and in fact 
as other Iraqi nationals. In par- 
ticular, they shall have an equal 
right to maintain, manage and con- 
trol at their own expense, or to estab- 
lish in the future, charitable, relig- 
ious and social institutions, schools 
and other educational establish- 
ments, with the right to use their 
own language and to exercise their 
religion freely therein. 

Art. 6. The Iraqi Government 
undertakes to take, as regards non- 
Moslem minorities, in so far as con- 
cerns their family law and personal 
status, measures permitting the set- 
tlement of these questions in accord- 
ance with the customs and usage of 
the communities to which those 
minorities belong* 

The Iraqi Government will com- 
municate to the Council of the 
League of Nations information re- 
garding the manner in which these 
measures have been executed, 

Art. 7. i. The Iraqi Government 
undertakes to grant full protection, 
facilities and authorisation to the 
churches, synagogues, cemeteries and 
other religious establishments, char- 
itable works and pious foundations 



privies ou de commerce, soit en 
rnati&re de religion, de presse ou de 
publications de toute nature, soit 
dans les reunions publiques* 

5, Nonobstant l^tablissement par 
le Gouvernement irakien de la langue 
arabe comme langue officielle, et 
nonobstant les dispositions sp6ciales 
que le Gouvernement irakien prendra 
en ce qui concerne Pemploi des 
langues kurde et turque, dispositions 
pr^vues & Particle 9 de la pr^sente 
Declaration, des facilit6s appropries 
seront donn6es & tous les ressortis- 
sants irakiens de langue autre que la 
langue officielle, pour Fusage de leur 
langue, soit oralement, soit par 
6crit, devant les tribunaux. 

Art. 5. Les ressortissants irakiens 
appartenant & des minorit6s de race, 
de religion ou de langue jouiront du 
m^rne traitement et des m6mes 
garanties en droit et en fait que les 
autres ressortissants irakiens I Is 
auront notamment un droit 6gal 
maintenir, diriger et contrdler & 
leurs frais ou & cr6er Tavenir des 
institutions chari tables , religieuses 
ou spciales, des 6coles et autres 
^tablissements d Education, avec le 
droit d'y faire librement usage de 
leur propre langue et d'y exercer 
librement leur religion. 

Art. 6. Le Gouvernement irakien 
s'engage & prendre & T6gard des 
minorit6s non musulmanes, en ce qui 
concerne leur statut familial et per- 
sonnel, toutes dispositions permet- 
tant de r&gler ces questions selon le 
droit coutumier des communaut6s 
auxquelles ces minorit^s appartien- 
nent. 

Le Gouvernement irakien enverra 
au Conseil de la Soci6t6 des Nations 
des renseignertients sur la fapon dont 
ont 6t& ex6cut6es ces dispositions. 

Art. 7* I. Le Gouvernement 
irakien s'engage & accorder toutes 
protection, facilit^s et autprisations 
aux &glises, synagogues, cimeti&res, 
autres <tablissements religieux, 
ceuvres charitables et fondations 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 308 



of minority religious communities 
existing in Iraq, 

2. Each of these communities 
shall have the right of establishing 
councils, in important administra- 
tive districts, competent to adminis- 
ter pious foundations and charitable 
bequests. These councils shall be 
competent to deal with the collection 
of income derived therefrom, and the 
expenditure thereof in accordance 
with the wishes of the donor or with 
the custom in use among the com- 
munity* These communities shall 
also undertake the supervision of 
the property of orphans, in accord- 
ance with law. The councils re- 
ferred to above shall be under the 
supervision of the Government. 

3, The Iraqi Government will not 
refuse, for the formation of new reli- 
gious or charitable institutions, any 
of the necessary facilities which may 
be guaranteed to existing institutions 
of that nature. 

Art. 8, -i. In the public educa- 
tional system in towns and districts 
in which are resident a considerable 
proportion of Iraqi nationals whose 
mother tongue is not the official 
language, the Iraqi Government will 
make provision for adequate facili- 
ties for ensuring that in the primary 
schools instruction shall be given 
to the children of such nationals 
through the medium of their own 
language; it being understood that 
this provision does not prevent the 
Iraqi Government from making the 
teaching of Arabic obligatory in the 
said schools. 

2. In towns and districts where 
there is a considerable proportion of 
Iraqi nationals belonging to racial, 
religious or linguistic minorities, 
these minorities will be assured an 
equitable share in the enjoyment and 
application of sums which may be 
provided out of public funds under 
the State, municipal or other budgets 
for educational, religious or chari- 
table purposes. 



pieuses des communautte religieuses 
des minoritfe existant en Irak. 

2. Toutes ces communauttfs au- 
ront le droit de constituer, dans 
les divisions admin istratives impor- 
tantes, des conseils qui auront qualit6 
pour administrer les fondations 
pieuses ainsi que les legs charitables. 
Ces conseils auront qualit6 pour per- 
cevoir les revenue produits par ces 
biens, pour les utiliser conform6ment 
aux voeux du donateur ou 1 'usage 
6tabli dans la communautt. Ces 
communaut6s devront galement 
veiller sur les biens des orphelins, 
conform6ment 4 la loL Les conseils 
susmentionn6s seront places sous le 
contr61e du Gouvernement. 

3. Le Gouvernement irakien ne re- 
fusera, pour la creation de nouveaux 
6tablissements religieux ou charita- 
bles, aucune des facilit6s n6cessaires 
qui seront garanties aux 6tablisse- 
ments de cette nature d&fa existants. 

Art. 8. i. En matidre d 'en soigne- 
ment public, le Gouvernement irakien 
accordera, dans les villes et dis- 
tricts Q& reside une proportion con- 
sid6rable de ressortissants irakiens de 
langue autre que la langue officielle, 
des facilitfis appropriates pour assurer 
que instruction dans les coles 
primaires sera donnC 4 e f dans leur 
propre langue, aux enfants de ces res- 
sortissants irakiens. Cette stipula- 
tion n'empMiera pas le Gouverne- 
ment irakien de rendre obligatoire 
1'enseignement de la langue arabe 
dans lesdites 6coles. 

2, Dans les villes et districts oii 
reside une proportion consid6rable de 
ressortissants irakiens appar tenant 
& des mmorit&s de race, de religion ou 
de langue, ces minorit6s se verront 
assurer une part 6quitable dans le 
b6n6fice et Taffectation des sommes 
qui pourraient Stre attributes sur les 
fonds publics par le budget de 1'Etat, 
les budgets municipaux ou autres, 
dans un but d Education, de religion 
ou de charit^. 



May 30, 1932 



DECLARATION BY IRAQ 



43 



Art. 9. I, Iraq undertakes that 
in the liwas of Mosul, Arbil, Kirkuk 
and Sulairnaniya, the official lan- 
guage, side by side with Arabic, shall 
be Kurdish in the qadhas in which 
the population is predominantly of 
Kurdish race. 

In the qadhas of Kifri and Kirkuk, 
however, in the liwa of Kirkuk, 
where a considerable part of the pop- 
ulation is of Turcoman race, the 
official language, side by side with 
Arabic, shall be either Kurdish or 
Turkish. 

2. Iraq undertakes that in the 
said qadhas the officials shall, subject 
to justifiable exceptions, have a 
competent knowledge of Kurdish or 
Turkish as the case may be. 

3, Although in these qadhas the 
criterion for the choice of officials 
will be, as in the rest of Iraq, 
efficiency and knowledge of the 
language, rather than race, Iraq un- 
dertakes that the officials shall, as 
hitherto, be selected, so far as 
possible, from among Iraqis from one 
or other of these qadhas. 

Art. 10. The stipulations of the 
foregoing articles of this Declaration, 
so far as they affect persons belong- 
ing to racial, religious or linguistic 
minorities, are declared to constitute 
obligations of international concern 
and will be placed under the guaran- 
tee of the League of Nations. No 
modification will be made in them 
without the assent of a majority of 
the Council of the League of Nations. 

Any Member of the League repre- 
sented on the Council shall have the 
right to bring to the attention of the 
Council any infraction or danger of 
infraction of any of these stipula- 
tions, and the Council may there- 
upon take such measures and give 
such directions as it may deem proper 
and effective in the circumstances. 

Any difference of opinion as to 
questions of law or fact arising out of 
these articles between Iraq and any 



Art 9. i. L'Irak s'engage, en ce 
qui concerne les liwas de Mossoul, 
Arbil, Kirkuk et Soulairnani6, ce 
que la langue officielle, & c6t6 de 
1'arabe, soit le kurde dans les qadhas 
oft la population pr&dominante est de 
race kurde. 

Toutefois, dans les qadhas de 
Kifri et de Kirkuk du liwa de 
Kirkuk, oil une partie considerable 
de la population est de race tur- 
comane, la langue officielle sera, 
c6t6 de 1'arabe, soit le kurde, soit le 
turc. 

2. L'Irak prend 1'engagernent que 
dans lesdits qadhas, les fonction- 
naires devront, sauf exception justi- 
fi<e, poss^der la langue kurde ou, le 
cas ch<ant, la langue turque. 

3. Bien que dans lesdits qadhas, 
le critdre pour le choix des fonction- 
naires soit, comme dans le reste de 
1'Irak, la capacity et la connaissance 
de la langue plutdt que la race, 1'Irak 
s 'engage & ce que les fonctionnaires 
soient choisis, comme jusqu'& pr6- 
sent, autant que possible parmi les 
ressortissants irakiens originaires de 
ces qadhas. 

Art. 10. Dans la mesure oil les 
stipulations des articles precedents 
de la presente Declaration affectent 
des personnes appar tenant & des 
minorit^s de race, de religion ou de 
langue, ces stipulations constituent 
des obligations d'int6rt interna- 
tional et seront plac6es sous la 
garantie de la Societe des Nations. 
Elles ne pourront tre modifies sans 
1'assentiment de la majority du Con- 
seil de la Societe des Nations. 

Tout Membre de la Societe repr6- 
sente au Conseil aura le droit de 
signaler & Tattention du Conseil 
toute infraction ou danger d'infrac- 
tion Tune quelconque de ces obliga- 
tions, et le Conseil pourra prendre 
telles mesures et donner telles in- 
structions qui paraltront appropri6es 
et efficaces dans la circonstance. 

En cas de divergence d'opinions 
sur des questions de droit ou de fait 
concernant ces articles, entre 1'Irak 



44 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 308 



Member of the League represented 
on the Council shall be held to be a 
dispute of an international character 
under Article 14 of the Covenant of 
the League of Nations. Any such dis- 
pute shall, if the other party thereto 
demands, be referred to the Perma- 
nent Court of International Justice. 
The decision of the Permanent Court 
shall be final and shall have the 
same force and effect as an award 
under Article 13 of the Covenant. 



CHAPTER II 
Most-favoured^nation Clause 

Art. ii. i. Subject to reciproc- 
ity, Iraq undertakes to grant to 
Members of the League most-fav- 
oured-nation treatment for a period 
of ten years from the date of its ad- 
mission to membership of the League 
of Nations. 

Nevertheless, should measures 
taken by any Member of the League 
of Nations, whether such measures 
are in force at the above-mentioned 
date or are taken during the period 
contemplated in the preceding para- 
graph, be of such a nature as to dis- 
turb to the detriment of Iraq the 
balance of trade between Iraq and 
the Member of the League of Nations 
in question, by seriously affecting 
the chief exports of Iraq, the latter, 
in view of its special situation, re- 
serves to itself the right to request 
the Member of the League of Na- 
tions concerned to open negotiations 
immediately for the purpose of re- 
storing the balance. 

Should an agreement not be 
reached by negotiation within three 
months from its request, Iraq de- 
clares that it will consider itself as 
freed, w-d-w of the Member of the 
League in question, from the obliga- 
tion laid down in the first sub- 
paragraph above. 



et Fun quelconque des Mernbres de 
la Soci6t6 repr6sent6s au Conseil, 
cette divergence sera considre 
comme un diflfcrend ay ant un carae- 
tdre international selon les termes de 
Particle 14 du Pacte de la Socifite des 
Nations. Tout diff 6rend de ce gen re 
sera, si Tautre partie le demande, 
d$f6r6 & la Cour permanente de 
Justice Internationale. La decision 
de la Cour permanente sera sans 
appel et aura la mOme force et valeur 
qu'une decision rendue en vertu de 
1'article 13 du Pacte. 

CHAPITRE II 
Clause de la nation la plus fcworisee 

Art. ii. i. L'Irak s'engage i ac- 
corder, sous reserve de reciprocity 
aux Etats membres de la Soc&(t6, le 
traitement de la nation la plus 
favorisfie, pendant une periods de 
dix ans & compter de la date de son 
admission comme Membre de la 
Soci6t6 des Nations. 

Toutefois, si des mesures prises par 
Tun quelconque des Membres de la 
Soci6t6 des Nations, qu'elles soient 
en vigueur & cette date susmention- 
n6e ou qu'ellea soient prises au cours 
de la priode vis6e 4 Talin^a ci- 
dessus, ^taient de nature & com** 
promettre, au detriment de 1'Irak, 
r^quilibre des ^changes entre ce 
dernier et le Membre de la Soci6t6 
des Nations en question, en aflfectant 
s6rieusement les principales exporta- 
tions de 1'Irak, ce dernier, en con- 
sid^ration de sa situation $p6ciale, 
se r6serve la facult6 de demander au 
Membre de la Soci6t6 des Nations 
dont il s'agit 1'ouverture imm6diate 
de n^gociations en vue de r^tablir 
T6quilibre ainsi rompu, 

Au cas oii, dans un d61ai de trois 
mois 4 dater de la demande de Flrak, 
ces n^gociations n'auraient pas 
abouti i un accord, 1'Irak d6clare 
qu'il pourra se consid^rer comme 
Iib6r6, vis-i-vis du Membre de la 
Soci6t4 en question, de I'obligation 
stipu!6e au premier alin^a ci-dessus- 



May 30, 1932 



DECLARATION BY IRAQ 



45 



2, The undertaking contained in 
paragraph i above shall not apply to 
any advantages which are, or may in 
the future be, accorded by Iraq to 
any adjacent country in order to 
facilitate frontier traffic, or to those 
resulting from a Customs union con- 
cluded by Iraq. Nor shall the under- 
taking apply to any special advan- 
tages in Customs matters which 
Iraq may grant to goods the produce 
or manufacture of Turkey or of any 
country whose territory was in 1914 
wholly included in the Ottoman 
Empire in Asia. 



Judicial Organisation 

Art. 12. A uniform system of 
justice shall be applicable to all, 
Iraqis and foreigners alike. It shall 
be such as effectively to ensure the 
protection and full exercise of their 
rights both to foreigners and to 
nationals. 

The judicial system at present in 
force, and based on Articles 2, 3 and 
4 of the Agreement between the 
Mandatory Power and Iraq, 1 signed 
on March 4th, 1931, shall be main- 
tained for a period of 10 years from 
the date of the admission of Iraq to 
membership of the League of Na- 
tions. 

Appointments to the posts re* 
served for foreign jurists by Article 
2 of the said Agreement shall be 
made by the Iraqi Government. 
Their holders shall be foreigners, but 
selected without distinction of na- 
tionality; they must be fully quali- 
fied. 2 

International Conventions 

Art. 13. Iraq considers itself 
bound by all the international agree- 



2. Sont except^s de Tengagement 
formul^ au premier alinea ci-dessus 
les avantages accord^s ou qui pour- 
raient 6tre accordes ult^rieurement 
par Tlrak & un pays limitrophe pour 
faciliter le trafic-fronti^re, ainsi que 
ceux resultant d'une union douani&re 
qui pourrait 8tre conclue par 1'Irak. 
II en sera de mme en ce qui conceme 
les avantages sp6ciaux qu'en mature 
douani^re, 1'Irak pourrait consentir 
aux produits naturels ou fabriqutes, 
originaires de la Turquie ou d'un 
pays quelconque dont le territoire, 
en 1914, faisait int&gralement partie 
de 1'Empire ottoman en Asie. 

Organisation judiciaire 

Art. 12. Un syst&tne de justice 
uniforme sera applicable 6galement & 
tous les ressortissants de 1'Irak et 
tous les Strangers. Ce syst&me sera 
de nature & assurer efficacement, tant 
aux Strangers qu'aux nationaux, la 
sauvegarde et le plein exercice de 
leurs droits. 

Le syst&me judiciaire en vigueur et 
resultant des articles 2, 3 et 4 de 
TAccord entre la Puissance manda- 
taire et 1'Irak, 1 sign& Ie4mars 1931, 
sera maintenu pour une p6riode de 
dix ann^es, ^ compter de Tadmission 
de Tlrak coinme Membre de la 
Soci6t< des Nations. 

Les postes r6serv6s 4 des juristes 
Strangers en vertu de 1'article 2 dudit 
Accord sont pourvus par les soins de 
1'Irak. Les titulaires, bien qu'toan- 
gers, sont choisis sans distinction de 
nationality ils doivent r6unir les 
qualifications utiles. 2 

Conventions international 

Art 13, L'Irak se considfere 
comme H6 par tous les accords et 



1 123 League of Nations Treaty Series, p. 77. ED. 

2 On June 15, 19556, the Iraqi Government, acting under Article 16 of this declaration, re- 
quested the Council of the League of Nations to agree to a modification of this provision so 
as to allow the appointment of eight foreign jurists, instead of nine as required by the Anglo- 
Iraq Agreement. The Council gave its consent, September 25, 1936. League of Nations 
Official Journal, 1936, pp. 1161, 13?!,-*- ED. 



4 6 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 308 



ments and conventions, both general 

and special , to which it has become a 
party, whether by its own action or 
by that of the Mandatory Power 
acting on its behalf. Subject to any 
right of denunciation provided for 
therein, such agreements and con- 
ventions shall be respected by Iraq 
throughout the period for which they 
were concluded. 



Acquired Rights and Financial 
Obligations 

Art* 14. Iraq, taking note of the 
resolution of the Council of the 
League of Nations of September 
15th, 1925 : l 

1 . Declares that all rights of what- 
ever nature acquired before the 
termination of the mandatory regime 
by individuals, associations or juri- 
dical persons shall be respected. 

2. Undertakes to respect and fulfil 
all financial obligations of whatever 
nature assumed on Iraq's behalf by 
the Mandatory Power during the 
period of the Mandate, 

Freedom of Conscience 

Art* 15. Sub j ect to such measures 
as may be essential for the main- 
tenance of public order and morality, 
Iraq undertakes to ensure and guar- 
antee throughout its territory free- 
dom of conscience and worship and 
the free exercise of the religious, 
educational and medical activities of 
religious missions of all denomina- 
tions, whatever the nationality of 
those missions or of their members. 



Final Clause 

Art. 16. The provisions of the 
present chapter constitute obliga- 
tions of international concern. Any 
Member of the League of Nations 
may call the attention of the Council 
to any infraction of these provisions. 



conventions internationaux, tant g6- 
ncraux que sp6ciaux, auxquels il est 
devenu partie, soit qu'il ait agi 
lui-meme directement, soit quo la 
Puissance mandataire ait agi pour 
son compte. Sous r6serve du droit 
de d6nonciation qu'ils pourraient 
prfivoir, ces accords et conventions 
seront respectfis par 1'Irak pendant 
toute la dur6e pour laquelle ils ont 
6t< conclus, 

Drotts acquis et obligations 
financiers 

Art 14. En prenant acte de la 
r6solution du Conseil de la Soci6t6 
des Nations du 15 septembre 1925,* 
rirak: 

1. Declare que les droits de toute 
nature acquis avant I'extinction du 
regime mandataire par des particu- 
liers, des soci6t6s ou des personnes 
juridiques, seront respectfis; 

2. S'engage respecter et & ex6- 
cuter les obligations financifcres de 
toute nature assumes pour son 
compte par la Puissance mandataire 
pendant la dur<e du rnandat. 

LibertS de conscience 

Art* 15, Sous reserve des mesures 
indispensables au maintien des 
bonnes mceurs et de Tordre public, 
Flrak s'engage & assurer et 4 garan- 
tir, sur toute l'6tendue de son terri- 
toire, la libert^ de conscience et le 
libre exercice des cultes, ainsi que les 
activities des missions religieuses de 
toutes les confessions en mature 
religieuse scolaire et d'assistance 
m6dicale, quelle que soit la nationa- 
Ht6 de ces missions ou de leurs 
membres. 

Clause finale 

Art. 16* Les dispositions con- 
tenues dans le present chapitre con- 
stituent des obligations d'int^rSt 
international. Tout Membre de la 
Soci^tfi des Nations pourra signaler & 
Tattention du Conseil les infractions 



1 League of Nations Official Journal, 1925, p. 1511. ED. 



June 28, 1932 

They may not be modified except by 
agreement between Iraq and the 
Council of the League of Nations 
acting by a majority vote, 

Any difference of opinion which 
may arise between Iraq and any 
Member of the League of Nations 
represented on the Council, with re- 
gard to the interpretation or the 
execution of the said provisions, 
shall, by an application by such 
Member, be submitted for decision 
to the Permanent Court of Inter- 
national Justice. 

The undersigned, duly authorised, 
accepts on behalf of Iraq, subject to 
ratification, the above provisions, 
being the declaration provided for by 
the resolution of the Council of the 
League of Nations of May igth, 
1932. 

DONE at Baghdad on this thirtieth 
day of May 1932 in a single copy 
which shall be deposited in the 
archives of the Secretariat of the 
League of Nations. 



SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES 



47 



& ces dispositions. Ces derni&res ne 
pourront tre modifies que par 
1'accord entre 1'Irak et le Conseil de 
la Soci6t6 des Nations statuant & la 
majorit6 des voix. 

Toute divergence d'opinions qui 
viendrait & s'61ever entre 1'Irak et 
Tun quelconque des Membres de la 
Socit& des Nations repr6sent6s au 
Conseil au sujet de Tinterpr6tation 
ou de Tex6cution desdites disposi- 
tions sera, la requite de ce Membre, 
soumise pour decision & la Cour 
permanente de Justice internatio- 
nale. 

Le soussign6, dfiment autoris^, ac- 
cepte, au nom de 1'Irak et sous r6- 
serve de ratification, les dispositions 
ci-dessus, qui constituent la dclara- 
tion pr6vue par la resolution du 
Conseil de la Soci6t< des Nations en 
date du 19 mai 1932. 

FAIT & Bagdad, le 30 mai 1932, en 
un seul exemplaire qui sera d6pos6 
aux archives du Secretariat de la 
Soci6t6 des Nations. 



NOURY SA'ID, Prime Minister of Iraq 



No. 309 



AGREEMENT concerning the Setting-Up of Special Services at the 
Iron Gates. Signed at Semmering, June 28, 1932. 

ACCORD relatif & la constitution des services speciaux aux Fortes- 
de-Fer. Signe an Semmering, 28 juin 1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE, This agreement was drawn up pursuant to Article 32 of the convention 
instituting the definitive statute of the Danube of July 23, 1921 (No. 47, ante). Improve- 
ment of navigation at the Iron Gates has long been a matter of international concern. See, 
for example, Article 6 of the Treaty of London of March 13, 1871 (61 Br, and For. St. Papers, 
p. 7); Article 57 of the Treaty of Berlin of July 13, 1878 (69 idem, p. 749) ; Article 3 of the 
convention between Austria-Hungary and Serbia of June 26/July 8, 1878 (idem, p. 612); 
Article 350 of the Treaty of Versailles; Articles 288-9 of the Treaty of Trianon; Article 305 
of the Treaty of St. Germain; Article 233 of the Treaty of Neuilly. See also the agreements 
between Rumania and Yugoslavia of June 19, 1930, and June 24, 1930 (140 League of Nations 
Treaty Series, pp. 229, 235). 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 309 



RATIFICATIONS* Ratifications of this agreement were deposited at Vienna by Yugoslavia 
and Rumania, June 6, 1933. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY* L Soubbotitch t " Le nouvcau regime jurklique du sect cur du Danube," 2 
Annuaire de I* Association yougoslave de Droit international (1934), pp. 77-114, 



Entered into force July i, 1933.* 

Text and translation from 140 League of Nations Treaty Scries, p. 191. 



[Translation] 

In execution of the provisions of 
the Convention, signed at Paris on 
July 23, 1921, establishing the defin- 
itive Statute of the Danube and in 
order to set up by joint agreement 
the special technical and administra- 
tive Services provided for in Article 
32 of the said Convention, for the 
purpose of maintaining and improv- 
ing conditions of navigation on the 
Section of the Danube between 
Turnu-Severin and Moldova- Veche, 
known as the Iron Gates and 
Cataracts Section, 

Have decided to conclude an 
agreement for that purpose and have 
appointed as their Plenipotentiaries: 2 

His Majesty the King of Yugo- 
slavia: Douchan Pantitch; 

His Majesty the King of Rou- 
mania: Constantin Contzesco; 

The International Commission of 
the Danube, by unanimous decision 
of June 27, 1932: Dietrich de Sachs- 
enfels; 

Who, having exchanged their pow- 
ers, found in good and due form, 
have agreed on the following pro- 
visions: 

CHAPTER I 

SERVICES CONSTITUTING THE AD- 
MINISTRATION OF THE IRON GATES 
AND CATARACTS 

Article I, In execution of the pro- 
visions of Article 32 of the Statute 
of the Danube, the technical and 
administrative Services hereinafter 
mentioned are hereby constituted in 



En execution dcs dispositions de 
la Convention 6tablissant le Statut 
d6finitif du Danube sign^e & Paris le 
23 juillet 1921 et pour constitutor, dc 
commun accord > les Services tech- 
niques et administratifs sptViaux 
pr^vus & 1' article 32 de ladite^ con- 
vention aux fins de maintenir et 
d'am61iorer les conditions de la 
navigation dans le secteur compris 
entre Turnu-Severin et Moldova- 
Veche dit des Portes-de-Fcr et des 
Cataractes, 

Ont dficid6 de conclure un accord 

It cet effet et ont dtfsignfi pour leurs 
pl&nipotentialres, savoir: 2 

Sa Majesty le Rol de Yougo- 
slavie: Douchan Pantitch; 

Sa Majest6 le Roi de Roumanie: 
Constantin Contzesco; 

La Commission Internationale du 
Danube, par decision unanime du 
27 juin 1932: Dietrich de Sachscn- 
fels; 

Lesquels, apr&s avoir chang6 
leurs pouvoirs trouvfis en bonne et 
due forme, ont arr&tfi les stipula- 
tions suivantes : 

CHAPITRE I 

SERVICES CONSTITUANT L^ADMINIS- 
TRATION DES PORTES-DE-FKR ET 
DES CATARACTES 

Article x. En ex6cution des dis- 
positions de 1'article 32 du Statut 
du Danube, sont constitute les 
Services sp^ciaux techniques et ad- 
ministratifs ci-apr&s dfisignis, k 1'ef- 



3 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3237, August 8, 1933. 
2 The titles of oleniootentiaries are omitted. ED. 



June 28, 1932 



SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES 



49 



order to maintain and Improve con- 
ditions of navigation on the Section 
of the Danube between Turnu- 
Severin and Moldova- Veche known 
as the Iron Gates and Cataracts 
Section ; 

(1) A Public Works Service; 

(2) A Navigation Service. 
These Services shall be completed 

by: 

An Accountancy Office; 
A Treasury. 

Art. 2. This organisation shall 
be called the "Administration of the 
Iron Gates and Cataracts". It shall 
have its headquarters at Orsova, 
without prejudice to any auxiliary 
services which if necessary may be 
established at other points of the 
Section. 

Art. 3, A chief directly respon* 
sible for the affairs of his department 
shall be placed at the head of each of 
the above-mentioned four organs of 
the Administration. 

CHAPTER II 

COMPETENCE OF THE ORGANS OF THE 
ADMINISTRATION 

Art 4, The Chief of the Public 

Works Service shall be in charge of 
the management or supervision of 
conservancy work and in general, 
the management or supervision of 
all work for maintaining and im- 
proving the navigability of the 
Section, in so far as the execution of 
new public works is not provided for 
by special measures decided on by 
joint agreement between the riparian 
States of the Section and the Com- 
mission. 

The Chief of the Public Works 
Service shall further be in charge of 
the buoyage service and the techni- 
cal management of the premises and 
floating or other material placed at 
the disposal of the Administration. 

Art. 5. The Chief of the Naviga- 
tion Service shall, subject to the 
provisions of Chapter VII of the 



fet de maintenir et cTam<liorer les 
conditions de la navigation dans le 
secteur compris entre Turnu-Severin 
et Moldova- Veche, dit des Portes- 
de-Fer et des Cataractes : 

i Un Service des Travaux; 
2 Un Service de la Navigation. 

Ces services sent compl6t6s par: 

Un bureau de la comptabilit6; 
Une caisse. 

Art. 2. Cette organisation est 
d6nornm6e "Administration des 
Portes-de-Fer et des Cataractes." 
Elle a son si&ge central & Orsova, 
sans prejudice des services auxiliaires 
qui pourraient 6tre, en cas de besoin, 
instali6s sur d'autres points du 
secteur. 

Art. 3. A la t6te de chacun des 
quatre organes de I 7 administration 
6num6r6s ci-dessus, est plac6 un 
chef directement responsable des 
affaires de son ressort. 

CHAPITRE II 

COMPETENCE DES ORGANES DE 
L* ADMINISTRATION 

Art, 4, Le chef du Service des 
Travaux est charg6 de la direction 
ou du contrdle des travaux ayant 
pour but la conservation des ou- 
vrages, ainsi qu'en g<nral de la 
direction ou du contrdle de tous les 
travaux destines & 1'entretien et k 
ramfelioration de la navigabilit6 du 
secteur, pour autant que Tex6cution 
des nouveaux travaux ne fera pas 
I'objet de dispositions sp6ciales ar- 
rt6es de concert entre les Etats 
riverains du secteur et la commis- 
sion. 

II est, en outre, charg< du service 
de balisage, ainsi que de la gestion 
technique des immeubles et du mat6~ 
riel flottant ou autre mis & la disposi- 
tion de P administration. 

Art. 5. Le chef du Service de la 
Navigation est charg, sous reserve 
des dispositions du chapitre VII du 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 309 



present Agreement concerning; nav- 
igation police services, be In charge 
of the supervision of navigation and 
the management of pilotage and all 
other services intended to ensure or 
facilitate the technical exercise of 
navigation. 

Art, 6. The Chief of the Ac- 
countancy Office shall be In charge 
of the accounts of the Administra- 
tion and the movement of funds, 

Art. 7, f The Chief of the Treasury 
shall be in charge of the receipt of 
navigation dues and other revenue 
of the Administration and all other 
Treasury transactions. 

Art. 8, The Working Regulations 
shall define in detail the competence 
of the organs of the Administration 
as above defined, and any additional 
functions that may be given them. 



Art, 9. The competence of the 
organs of the Administration as 
above defined shall not cover, in 
ports and on the banks of the Sec- 
tion, any measures concerning the 
policing, In the strict sense of the 
word, of the ports and banks, or 
measures concerning the working of 
ports, or any public "works of local 
interest not concerning or affecting 
the general interests of navigation f 
or works necessary for the economic 
development of the riparian States of 
the ^ Section, as referred to In the 
Article 14, first paragraph, of the 
Statute of the Danube. 

CHAPTER III 

RELATIONS OF THE ORGANS OF THE 
ADMINISTRATION WITH THE COM- 
MISSION AND WITH EACH OTHER 

Art. 10. The Commission shall 
decide, on proposals made by the 
Chiefs of the competent organs of 
the Administration, what measures 
may be desirable for the mainte- 
nance and improvement of the nav- 
igability and for the administration 
of the Section. 



present accord relatives \ la police 
de la navigation, do la surveillance 
de la navigation, de la direction du 
service de pilotage et de tons autres 
services ayant pour but d 'assurer ou 
de faciliter I'exercice technique de la 
navigation. 

Art. 6. Le chef du Bureau de la 
comptabllit6 est charg de la comp- 
tabilit6 de Fadministration et clu 
mouvement des fonds. 

Art, 7, Le chef de la caisse est 
chargfi de I'encaissement des taxes 
de navigation et autres recettes de 
radministration, ainsi que cle toutes 
autres op6rations de caisse. 
^ Art, 8. Le R&glement de fono 
tionnement fixera les details de la 
competence des organes de radmin- 
istration telle qu'elle est dffinie 
ci-dessus, ainsi que les attributions 
supplementaires qui pourraient leur 
fitre confines. 

Art, 9. La competence des or- 
ganes de radministration telle qu'elle 
est dfifinie ci-dessus, cesse dans les 
ports et sur les rives du secteur dfrs 
qu'il s'agit de mesures concernant la 
police proprement dite des ports et 
rives ou de mesures relatives it Fex- 
plojtation des ports et, enfin, lors- 
qu'il s'agit, solt de travaux <Tint6rSt 
local ne concernant pas et n'afiectant 
pas les int6rSts g6niraux de la navi- 
gation, solt des travaux n6cessalres 
au d6veloppement ^conomlque des 
Etats riverains du secteur tels qu'ils 
sont vis6s par le premier alinfia de 
Farticle 14 du Statut du Danube. 

CHAMTRB III 

RAPPORT DES ORGANES DE L'AD- 
MINISTRATION AVEC LA COMMIS- 
SION ET ENTRK EUX 

Art. 10. La commission d6cide r 

sur les propositions des chefs des 
organes comp&ents de radministra- 
tion, les mesures utiles & Tentretien 
et 4 I'amfilioration de la navigability 
et d. radministration du secteur. 



June 28, 1932 



SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES 



The Commission may also ask the 
said Chiefs to make proposals. 

Art. n. The proposals mentioned 
in Article 10 above may be put into 
force only if previously approved 
by the Commission. Nevertheless, 
in matters in which immediate ac- 
tion is necessary, such action may 
be taken, subject to the subsequent 
approval of the Commission. 

Art, 12. The execution of the 
Commission's decisions shall devolve 
upon the competent organs of the 
Administration, the chiefs of which 
shall be directly responsible to the 
Commission for the affairs of their 
respective departments. 

The Commission shall supervise 
the carrying out of its decisions and 
the working of the Administration 
in general. For that purpose the 
Commission shall keep a representa- 
tive on the spot whenever and for 
such time as it may deem necessary. 

Such representative shall act as 
the agent through whom all com- 
munications between the Commis- 
sion and the Administration must 
be sent. 

Art. 13, The Special Regulations 
provided for in Article 33 of the 
Statute of the Danube shall govern 
the working of the organs of the 
Administration, and their relations 
with the Commission, so that: 

Their chiefs shall keep each other 
acquainted with the affairs of their 
respective departments; 

They shall communicate their 
proposals to each other before for- 
warding them to the Commission ; 

They shall ask for the competent 
opinion of the other chiefs concerned 
on the proposals which they submit 
to the Commission. 

CHAPTER IV 

STAFF OF THE ADMINISTRATION 

Art. 14. Without prejudice to 
the provisions of Article 18, the staff 
of the Administration, including the 



Elle peut aussi provoquer des 
propositions de leur part. 

Art. ii. Les propositions vis6es 
& 1' article 10 ci-dessus, ne peuvent 
6tre d'ex6cution qu'apr^s avoir ob- 
tenu Tapprobation pr6alable de la 
commission. Toutefois, pour les af- 
faires r^clamant une intervention 
immediate, il peut tre proc6d6 It 
celle-ci, sous reserve d 'approbation 
ult6rieure de la commission. 

Art. 12. L 'execution des decisions 
de la commission incombe aux or- 
ganes comp^tents de 1'administra- 
tion dont les chefs sont directement 
responsables devant la commission, 
chacun pour les affaires de son 
ressort. 

La commission contrdle Tex6cu- 
tion de ses decisions, ainsi que, en 
g6n6ral, le fonctionnement de I 1 ad- 
ministration. A cet effet, elle main- 
tient sur place quand et aussi 
longtemps qu'elle le jugera n6ces~ 
saire un reprsentant. 

Ce repr^sentant sert obligatoire- 
rnent d'agent de transmission entre 
la commission et 1' administration. 



Art. 13. Le r&glement special 
pr6vu par Tarticle 33 du Statut du 
Danube rglera le fonctionnement 
des organ es de Tadministration, ainsi 
que les rapports avec la commission, 
de f agon : 

Que leurs chefs se tiennent mutuel- 
lement au courant des affaires de 
leurs ressorts respectif s ; 

Qu'ils se communiquent leurs 
propositions avant de les adresser & 
la commission ; 

Qu'ils provoquent 1'avis comp<- 
tent des autres chefs int6ress6s pour 
les propositions qu'ils soumettent & 
la commission. 

CHAPITRE IV 

PERSONNEL DE L' ADMINISTRATION 

Art. 14. Sans prejudice des dis- 
positions de 1'article 18, le personnel 
de Tadrninistration, y compris le 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 309 



permanent staff of workshops, build- 
ing yards and other similar technical 
establishments, shall be supplied 
and appointed by the two riparian 
States of the Section, so that within 
these services the officials appointed 
by each of them are equal in number 
and equal in the importance of the 
posts which they hold. 

It is understood, however, that 
should new posts be created or 
existing posts be abolished on ac- 
count of the requirements of the 
service, the Commission shall see 
that in the application of the said 
measures the principle of equality as 
between the two riparian States of 
the Section shall only temporarily be 
disregarded. 

The chiefs of the Works and 
Navigation Services shall be placed 
on a footing of complete equality in 
respect of their rank and financial 
position. 

The same shall apply to the Chief 
of the Accountancy Office and the 
Chief of the Treasury. 

Art. 15. The Commission shall 
arrange the composition of the 
permanent staff. It shall fix the 
salaries of the said staff and shall 
determine either, on the basis of 
their length of service with the Iron 
Gates Administration, the lump 
sums to be given to employees leav- 
ing the service of that Administra- 
tion at the end of a minimum number 
of years of service or the procedure 
by which certain categories of the 
staff could be insured with a pensions 
fund, 

Art 1 6. The appointment by 
each of the two riparian States of 
the Section of the chiefs appointed 
by it as enumerated in Article 14 
above shall be subject to previous 
approval by the Commission. 

Art. 17. When choosing the hold- 
ers of the various posts on the per- 
manent staff of the Administration, 
the Governments of the two States 
shall take account solely of the per- 



personnel permanent des ateliers, 
chantiers de construction ou autres 
installations techniques semblables, 
est fourni et nomm6 par les deux 
Etats riverains du secteur, de fa^on 
que, dans les cadres de ces services, 
les agents nomm6s par chacun d*eux 
soient 6gaux en nombre et quant *\ 
1'importance des emplois qu'ils oc- 
cupent. 

II est toutefois entendu qu'en cas 
de cr6ation ou de suppression de 
postes n6cessit6es par les besoins du 
service, la commission veillera k ce 
que, dans son application, le principe 
d'6galit6 entre les deux Etats rive- 
rains du secteur ne souffre que des 
6carts temporaires. 



Les chefs des Services des Travatix 
et de la Navigation spnt mis, quant 
& leur grade et situation budgStaire, 
sur un pied de parfaite 6galit6. 

II en est de m^me en ce qui con- 
cerne le chef du Bureau de la 
comptabilitd et le chef de la caisse. 

Art. 15. La commission fitablit 
le cadre du personnel Bile fixe la 
retribution dudit personnel et d6ter- 
mine, soit en raison de leur temps de 
service prfes de F Administration des 
Portes-de-Fer les sommes forfaitaires 
& allouer aux employes quittant le 
service de cette administration au 
bout d'un nornbre minimum d'an* 
n^es de service, soit les modalit6s par 
lesquelles certaines categories de 
personnel pourraient 6ventuellement 
6tre assumes aupr^s d'une caisse de 
retraite. 

Art* 1 6. La nomination par cha- 
cun des deux Etats riverains du 
secteur des chefs fournis par lui, 
<num6r^s & 1'article 14 ci-dessue, est 
soumise Tagr^ment pr6alable de la 
commission. 

Art. 17* En proc6dant au choix 
des titulaires des diff^rents postes 
inscrits au cadre du personnel de 
radministration, les gouvernements 
des deux Etats se guideront unique- 



June 28, 1932 



SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES 



53 



sonal capacity of the candidates, en- 
suring them at the same time ail 
possible stability in their duties free 

from any influences unconnected 
with navigation* 

Once appointed by the Govern- 
ment of either of the riparian States 
of the Section, all officials without 
exception belonging to the Services 
are placed exclusively at the disposal 
of the Administration, and shall be 
free, in respect of the exercise of their 
duties under the Administration, 
from any interference, either direct 
or indirect, from the territorial 
authorities of the riparian States of 
the Section. 

The right to dismiss such employ- 
ees shall be vested in the Govern- 
ment of the riparian State of the 
Section which has appointed them. 
Dismissal shall be decided upon by 
the Government, either on its own 
initiative or in response to a reasoned 
request submitted by the Commis- 
sion, if necessary after enquiry. In 
the first case the Commission shall be 
previously notified of the reason for 
dismissal. 

Art. 1 8. Pilots on probation, and 
pilots belonging to the official pilot- 
age service, arid the chief pilot, shall 
form part of the staff of the Ad- 
ministration. 

The post of chief pilot shall be 
awarded by the Commission, after 
having examined the reasoned pro- 
posals of the Administration, without 
distinction being made on the ground 
of nationality, to the best qualified 
candidate, who shall be chosen on the 
result of a competition open both to 
official and private pilots and to 
river and maritime navigators, pref- 
erence being given as between can- 
didates with equal qualifications, to 
pilots belonging to the official pilot- 
age service, and among them to the 
senior candidate. 

The documents appointing such 
officials shall be an employment con- 
tract for pilots on probation, a pilot's 



merit d'apr&s la capacite personnelle 
des candidats, en leur assurant en 
mgme temps, dans toute la rnesure 
du possible, une stability de fonc- 
tions & 1'abri de toute influence 
etrang&re & la navigation. 

Une fois nommes par le gouverne- 
ment de Tun ou de Fautre des deux 
Etats riverains du secteur, tous les 
agents sans exception, composant 
les services, sont exclusivement mis 
& la disposition de radrninistration 
et soustraits, en ce qui concerne 
Fexercice de leurs fonctions auprfes 
d'elle, & toute inference, soit directe, 
soit indirecte, de la part des auto- 
rites territoriales des Etats riverains 
du secteur. 

Le droit de revocation de ces 
agents appartient au gouvernement 
de 1'Etat riverain du secteur qui les 
a nommes. La revocation est pro- 
nonc6e par le gouvernement, soit de 
sa propre initiative, soit sur la de- 
mande motiv^e de la commission, 
formulae, en cas de besoin, aprs 
enqugte. Dans le premier cas, la 
commission est pr6alablement in- 
formee du motif de la revocation. 

Art, 18. Les ei&ves-pilotes et les 
pilotes, pour autant qu'ils appartien- 
nent au corps officiel de pilotage, 
ainsi que le chef-pilote, font partie 
du personnel de 1'administration. 

L'emploi de chef-pilote est at- 
tribue par la commission, aprs 
examen des propositions rnotiv6es 
formuiees par T administration, sans 
distinction de nationality, au candi- 
dat le mieux qualifie choisi par voie 
de concours, ouvert en mme temps 
qu'aux pilotes officiels, aux pilotes 
particuliers et aux navigateurs flu- 
viaux et maritimes, une preference 
etant accordee, & qualifications 
egales, aux pilotes du corps officiel 
de pilotage, et, parmi ces derniers, 
aux plus anciens. 

Les certificats d 'engagement pour 
les ei&ves-pilotes, le brevet pour les 
pilotes, la lettre de service pour le 



54 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 309 



certificate for pilots and a letter of 
appointment for the chief pilot, such 
documents being issued by the Ad- 
ministration under the conditions 
laid down by the Working Regula- 
tions referred to in Article 13 above* 
Art, 19. The Working Regula- 
tions shall lay down in detail the 
qualifications to be required from 
candidates for the examination for 
appointment to posts of pilots on 
probation, to be promoted later to 
posts of certificated pilots. 

Persons of any nationality shall be 
eligible for appointment as pilots on 
probation and certified pilots. Never- 
theless the recruiting of pilots on pro- 
bation shall be so regulated that as 
far as possible half the number of 
posts of pilots, account being taken 
of the post of chief pilot, shall be re- 
served equally for nationals of each 
of the two riparian States of the 
Section. 

Ignorance of the official languages 
of the Administration shall not in- 
validate any person for admission to 
the examination either for the post 
of pilot on probation or to test his 
capacity as a pilot. No candidate 
applying for admission to the exam- 
ination for pilot on probation and 
complying with the conditions laid 
down by the Working Regulations 
may be debarred from taking the 
said examination unless a decision to 
the contrary be taken by the 
Commission. 

The Working Regulations shall lay 
down the penalties applicable for 
neglect of the duties of pilots belong- 
ing to the official pilotage service and 
shall also determine in what circum- 
stances a pilot's certificate may be 
withdrawn. 

A representative of the Commis- 
sion shall be present at the proceed- 
ings of the examining committees* 

Art. 20* Subject to the conditions 
laid down below, shipowners shall be 
allowed the option of having their 
vessels piloted by private pilots in 



chef-pilote, d61ivrs par radminis- 

tration dans les conditions pr&vues 
par le R&glement de fonctionnement 
dont 11 est fait mention & 1'article 
13 ci-dessus, constitueront Tacte de 
la nomination de ces agents. 

Art 19* Le R&glernent de fonc- 
tionnement fixera, dans leurs d6- 
tails, les conditions que doivent 
remplir les candidats pour fitre ad- 
mis, par voie de concours, aux postes 
d'616ves-pilotes pour 6tre promus 
ensuite aux postes de pilotes bre- 
vet6s. 

Les 61&ves-pilotes et pilotes seront 
choisis parmi toutes les nationality, 
Toutefois, le recrutement des 616ves- 
pilot.es devra 6tre rg!6 de fagon que, 
autant que possible, la moiti& du 
nombre des postes de pilotes, compte 
tenu du poste de chef-pilote, soit 
r6serv6e & parts figales aux ressortis- 
sants des deux Etats riverains du 
secteur. 

L' ignorance des langues officielles 
de 1' administration ne saurait con- 
stituer une raison de refus, soit au 
concours au poste d'16ve-pilote> 
soit k r admission It Texamen de 
capacit6 de pilote. Aucun candidat 
se pr6sentant au concours d'6Ive- 
pilote et remplissant les conditions 
Stabiles par le R&glement de fonc- 
tionnement ne pcut en gtre exclu, 
sauf decision contraire de la com- 
mission. 



Ce r&g!ement d6terminera les sanc- 
tions auxquelles donnera lieu rjnob- 
servation des obligations des pilotes 
appartenant au corps officiel de 
pilotage, ainsi que les conditions du 
retrait de leur brevet. 

Les operations des comitfe 
d'examen auront lieu en presence 
d'un repr6sentant de la commission. 

Art* 20* Dans les conditions fix- 
6es ci-dessous, les armateurs auront 
la facult6 de faire piloter leurs 
bateaux par des pilotes particuliers 



June 28, 1932 



SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES 



55 



their pay. Such pilots shall be al- 
lowed to pilot only the vessels of the 
undertaking or group of undertak- 
ings by which they are employed. 

Candidates for the post of private 
pilot must show that they have the 
good character and physical fitness 
and the qualifications required of 
official pilots. 

The Working Regulations shall 
prescribe by what procedure the Ad- 
ministration shall issue the certificate 
for a private pilot to persons having 
the necessary qualifications. 

The Regulations shall state the 
duties of private pilots towards the 
Administration and the penalties to 
which they are liable for neglect of 
such duties, and also the circum- 
stances in which their certificate may 
be withdrawn. 

Once they have received their cer- 
tificate, private pilots shall receive 
from the Administration all facilities 
and all information necessary for the 
exercise of pilotage in the Iron Gates 
and Cataracts Section. 

Art. 21. The Chiefs of the Navi- 
gation Service, the Public Works 
Service, the Accountancy Office and 
the Treasury shall, when entering 
their service, give in writing, in the 
terms of Form I hereto annexed, an 
undertaking on their honour to carry 
out their duties in accordance with 
the decisions of the Commission and 
in a spirit of strict impartiality. 

The Commission hereby entitles 
each of the Delegates of the riparian 
States of the Section to receive and 
transmit to the Commission the 
undertakings of such of its officials as 
his Government shall appoint. 

The same undertaking shall be 
given by all officials. Each of the 
chiefs mentioned in the first para- 
graph of the present Article shall be 
empowered to receive, in the terms 
laid down in Form II, hereto an- 
nexed, an undertaking from the offi- 
cials placed under his orders 3-nd to 
transmit it to the Commission. 



& leurs gages. Ces pilotes ne seront 
admis qu'& piloter les bateaux de 
Tentreprise ou de groupe d'entre- 
prises dont ils sont les employes. 

Les candidats & 1'emploi de pilotes 
particuliers doivent pr6senter les 
garanties morales et physiques et 
ppss^der les capacitfe exig6es des 
pilotes officiels. 

Le R&glement de fonctionnement 
fixera les modalit6s d'apr^s lesquelles 
Tadministration d<livrera le brevet 
de pilote particulier aux personnes 
poss&Iant les qualifications n6ces- 
saires. 

Ce r&glement d^terminera les ob- 
ligationg auxquelles sont soumis les 
pilotes particuliers & regard de 
P administration et les sanctions aux- 
quelles donnera lieu Finobservation 
de ces obligations, ainsi que les 
conditions du retrait de leur brevet, 

Une fois brevet6s, les pilotes 
particuliers obtiendront de 1'admin- 
istration toutes facilit6s et tous 
renseignements n^cessaires 1'exer- 
cice du pilotage dans le secteur des 
Portes-de-Fer et des Cataractes. 

Art. 21. Les chefs du Service de 
la Navigation, du Service des Tra- 
vaux, du Bureau de la comptabilit6 et 
de la caisse prennent par 6crit, lors 
de leur entree en service et dans les 
termes du formulaire I ci-annex6, 
1'engagement d'honneur d'accomplir 
leurs fonctions conform^ment aux 
decisions de la commission et dans 
un esprit de stricte impartiality 

La commission donne mandat 
chacun des d16gu6s des pays rive- 
rains du secteur de recevoir et de lui 
transmettre 1'engagement de ceux de 
ses agents que son gouvernement 
aura nomms. 

Le mgme engagement d'honneur 
est pris par tous les employes. 
Chacun des chefs mentionn6s au 
premier alin6a du present article a 
pouvoir pour recevoir, dans les termes 
du formulaire II ci~annex6, 1'engage- 
ment des employ6s places sous ses 
ordres et pour le transmettre & la 
commission. 



5 6 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 309 



Art. 12, Order and discipline 
within the Administration shall be 
maintained in accordance with the 
Working Regulations provided for In 
Article 13, 

Art. 23* During his service no 
official shall by reason of his official 
duties be exempt from the military 
obligations Imposed by the laws of 
his country. 

Art. 24. In so far as its duties 
permit, the staff of the Administra- 
tion may reside on either bank of the 
Section. 

Nevertheless, save in the case of 
service requirements, of which the 
Commission shall be sole judge, this 
privilege shall not be granted to 
officials carrying out their duties in 
the territory of the State of which 
they are nationals. 

CHAPTER V 

FLANS AND EXECUTION OF WORKS 

Art. 25. The study of the hydro- 
logical regime of the Section shall be 
carried out by the Administration 
without prejudice to the functions of 
the national hydraulic services. 

Information collected from both 
sides shall be exchanged between the 
Administration and the competent 
authorities of the riparian States of 
the Section. 

The Working Regulations shall 
determine by what procedure this 
exchange shall take place. 

Art. 26, The Administration 
shall be responsible for the technical 
study and the preparation of schemes 
of work for maintenance and current 
work for the improvement of the 
navigability of the Section. 

The technical study and the prep- 
aration of schemes of large-scale 
improvement work for the purpose 
of modifying or perfecting the pres- 
ent conservancy system of the Sec- 
tion, where such schemes require a 
fresh capital outlay, may be under- 



Art 22. L'ordre et la discipline 
de Fadministration serpnt mamtenus 
conform&nent aux dispositions du 
Reglenient de fonctionnement pr6vu 
& Farticle 13. 

Art 23. Pendant la dur6e de son 
service, aucun employ^ n'est, du fait 
de ses fonctions, exempt^ des obli- 
gations militaires imposfies par les 
lois de son pays. 

Art. 24, Autant que ses fonctions 
le permettent, le personnel de Fad- 
ministration a la faculty de rfisider 
sur Fune ou sur Fautre des deux rives 
du secteur. 

Sauf le cas de n6cessit6 de service 
dont la commission sera seule juge, 
ne pourront cependant se pr6valoir 
de cette facult6 les employes exer^ant 
leurs fonctions sur le tcrritoire de 
FEtat dont ils sont ressortissants. 



CHAPITRE V 

ETUDES PROJETS -EXECUTION 

DBS TRAVAUX 

Art, 25, L'6tude du regime hy- 
drologique du secteur incombe & 
l f administration, sans prejudice des 
attributions des services hydrau- 
liques natlonaux. 

Les donntes recueillies de part et 
d'autre sont mutuellement 6changes 
entre Fadministration et les autorit6s 
competences des Etats riverains du 
secteur. 

Le R^glement de fonctionnement 
d^terminera les modalits de cet 
^change. 

Art 26* L'^tude technique et 
F6tablissement des projets de tra* 
vaux d'entretien et des travaux 
courants d 'amelioration de la navi- 
gabilit^ du secteur incombent & 
Fadministration. 

L'6tude technique et l*6tablisse- 
ment des projets de grands travaux 
d'am^lioration ayant pour but la 
modification ou le perfectionnement 
du syst&me actuel d'amfinagernent 
du secteur et n6cessitant un apport 
de nouveaux capitaux peuvent 6tre 



June 28, 1932 



SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES 



57 



taken either by the two riparian 
States of the Section, or by the Ad- 
ministration, or on the initiative of 
the Commission. Studies under- 
taken on the initiative of the Com- 
mission or by persons not belonging 
to the Administration may be carried 
out on the spot, subject to the ob- 
servance of the general police regu- 
lations and of special provisions 
affecting the security of the countries 
concerned. 

Schemes prepared by the riparian 
States of the Section under the pre- 
vious paragraph, including plans, 
estimates and all other details con- 
nected with the technical and finan- 
cial procedure for their execution, 
shall be jointly submitted by the 
two riparian States of the Section for 
approval by the Commission. 

Should an agreement between the 
riparian States of the Section for the 
submission of joint proposals not be 
reached, each State may submit a 
separate scheme. In such cases the 
Commission, before taking a deci- 
sion, should ask the opinion of the 
other riparian State of the Section. 

The Commission shall ask the 
opinion of the two riparian States of 
the Section in the case of public 
works schemes not emanating from 
those States. In all its decisions 
concerning public works the Com- 
mission shall take into account the 
technical, economic and financial 
interests of the two riparian States 
of the Section. 

Art* 27. In cases in which, for the 
purpose of carrying out new public 
works intended either to complete or 
to modify the present system of 
public works, it is necessary to make 
use of portions of the territory of 
either or both of the riparian States 
of the Section, the Commission shall 
reach agreement with the State con- 
cerned, or with both States, as the 
case may be, on the conditions under 
which this territory will be so utilised. 

Art. 28, The execution of the 
maintenance and current iniprove- 



entrepris, soit par les deux Etats 
riverains du secteur, soit par Fad- 
ministration, solt enfin sur Finitia- 
tive de la commission. Les 6tudes 
entreprises sur Finitiative de la 
commission par des personnes n'ap- 
partenant pas F administration, ne 
peuvent 6tre poursurvies sur place 
que sous reserve de F observation des 
lois de police g6n6rale et des disposi- 
tions sp6ciales intressant la s<curit6 
des pays. 

Les pro jets 6tablis par les Etats 
riverains du secteur, conform6ment 
& Falin6a pr6c6dant, comprenant 
plans, devis et tous autres details 
relatifs aux modalit6s techniques et 
financi&res de leur execution, sont 
soumis en commun par les deux 
Etats riverains du secteur & V ap- 
probation de la commission. 

Dans le cas oft un accord ne s'6ta- 
blirait pas entre les Etats riverains du 
secteur pour presenter des proposi- 
tions communes, chacun d'eux pour- 
rait en presenter s6par6ment. Dans 
ce cas, la commission, avant de 
statuer, provoquerait Favis de Fautre 
Etat riverain du secteur. 

La commission provoque 1'avis 
des deux Etats riverains du secteur 
s'il s'agit de projets de travaux 
n'&manant pas d'eux. Dans toutes 
ses decisions relatives aux travaux, 
la commission tiendra compte des 
int6rts techniques, 6conomiques et 
financiers des deux Etats riverains 
du secteur. 

Art. 27. Lorsque pour des tra- 
vaux neufs destines, soit computer 
soit modifier le systme technique 
actuel des travaux, il est n^cessaire 
d'utiliser des portions du territoire 
de Fun ou de Fautre des deux Etats 
riverains du secteur ou des deux, la 
commission s'entend avec FEtat 
intress6 ou avec les deux sur les 
conditions dans lesquelles s'effec- 
tuera cette utilisation de territoire. 

Art. 28. L 'execution des travaux 
d'entretien et des travaux courants 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 309 



men! works referred to in Article 26, 
paragraph i above, shall devolve 
upon the Administration, Should 
the Administration not be able to 
carry out such work, the Commis- 
sion may make other arrangements. 
The execution shall then be en- 
trusted to the riparian States of the 
Section > jointly or separately as cir- 
cumstances may require, unless the 
terms they offer be less advantageous 
than any that may be offered from 
other quarters, 

In the case of large-scale improve- 
ment works, as provided for in 
Article 26, paragraph 2, the Com- 
mission shall decide in each indi- 
vidual case by whom and how such 
work shall be carried out. Never- 
theless it is hereby understood that: 

(1) The two riparian States of the 
Section shall have right of priority 
should they desire to undertake such 
work; 

(2) In such cases a special agree- 
ment shall be concluded between 
them and the Commission stipulat- 
ing the material and financial condi- 
tions for the execution of the work, 
including the procedure by which 
exemption from Customs duties may 
be granted; 

(3) Neither of the riparian States 
of the Section, nor any other State, 
may be entrusted with the execution 
of such work without the assent of 
the State in whose territory the work 
is to be carried out* 

Art. 29. The gangs of workmen 
employed on hydraulic or other work 
shall, unless otherwise specially 
agreed between the Governments of 
the two riparian States of the Sec- 
tion, be recruited In accordance with 
the laws in force in the State in whose 
territory the work in question Is 
carried out. 

Nevertheless, if such work is 
carried out on the river, simultane- 
ously in the territory of the two 
riparian States of the Section, near 
the frontier, and if for practical and 
technical reasons the work cannot be 



d 'amelioration vis&s 4 l*aHna pre- 
mier de Particle 26, incombe & Tad- 
ministration. Si celle-ci n'est pas 
4 m&me d'exficuter ces travaux, la 
commission peut prendre d'autres 
dispositions. L'ex&cution sera alors 
confine aux Etats riverains du sec- 
teur en commun ou s^parement 
sulvant le cas, & moins que les condi- 
tions qu'ils prfisentent ne soient 
moms avantageuses que d'autres 
off res ^ventuelles d 'execution. 

En ce qul concern e les grands 
travaux d 'amelioration prvus 
l'alina 2 de Tarticle 26, la commis- 
sion decide, dans chaque cas par- 
ticulier, par qui et comment ils seront 
executes. N6anmoins, il est d'ores 
et d6j entendu que: 

i Les deux Etats riverains du 
secteur bnficieront d'un droit de 
priority au cas oft Ils voudraiont se 
charger de ces travaux; 

2 Dans ce cas, un accord sp6dal 
inter vexiir entre eux et la com- 
mission stipulera les conditions ma- 
t&rielles et fmanci&res de I'ex&m- 
tion, y comprls les modalit&s par 
lesquelles la franchise douani&re 
pourrait Stre accorde; 

3 Ni Fun des Etats riverains du 
secteur, ni aucun autre Etat, ne 
pourra, le cas 6chant, &tre charg6 
de cette execution, sans Fassentl- 
ment de celui sur le territoire duquel 
les travaux doivent Stre ex6cuts. 

Art 29, Les 6quipes ouvrldres 
employees aux travaux hydrauliques 
ou autres sent, sauf accord special 
entre les gouveraements des deux 
Etats riverains du secteur, recrut^es 
conform^ment aux lois en vlgueur 
dans 1'Etat sur le territoire duquel 
s'efiectuent lesdlts travaux, 

Toutefois, dans le cas oft ces 

travaux seraient ex^cutte sur le 
fleuve, ^ la fois sur le territoire des 
deux Etats riverains du secteur, au 
voisinage de la fronti&re, et que pour 
des motifs d'ordre pratique et tech- 



June 28, 1932 



SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES 



59 



divided up according to the frontier, 
the gangs of workmen shall be re- 
cruited as far as possible equally 
from both riparian States of the 
Section. 



CHAPTER VI 

EXEMPTION FROM CUSTOMS DUTIES 
SUPPLIES 

Art 30. The two riparian States 
of the Section shall allow entry free 
of duty into their territory in respect 
of materials and plant which are 
necessary either for the requirements 
of the Administration or for the 
execution of public works or parts of 
public works which are paid for 
solely out of navigation dues. 

Should the works be carried out by 
a contractor, an agreement shall be 
concluded between the Governments 
of the riparian States of the Section 
and the Commission in order to 
determine the procedure for ^ the 
importation free of duty of machines, 
tools, materials or plant which the 
contractor may notify to the Ad- 
ministration as requiring to be im- 
ported into the territory of either 
State. 

The above provisions shall not 
affect those of Article 28. 

Art. 31* Contracts for supplies of 
all kinds necessary for the purposes 
mentioned in Article 30, first para- 
graph above, shall, as a general rule, 
be placed with the contractors who 
make the most advantageous offers 
when the contract is put up to public 
tender* 

Nevertheless, a right of preference 
shall be accorded to contractors who 
are nationals of either of the riparian 
States of the Section, on condition 
that the difference between their 
tenders and the most advantageous 
tenders does not exceed ip per cent 
for work of the same quality. 

If supplies are offered on the same 
terms by contractors nationals of 



nique le partage d'un travail suivant 
la fronti&re ne saurait intervenir, 
les 6quipes ouvri&res seront recrutees 
autant que possible, & parts 6gales, 
dans chacun des deux Etats riverains 
du secteur. 

CHAPITRE VI 

FRANCHISE BE DOUANE 
FOURNITURES 

Art. 30. Les deux Etats riverains 
du secteur accordent Tentre en 
franchise sur leur territoire respectif 
aux mat^riaux et au materiel n<ces- 
saires, soit aux besoms de F adminis- 
tration, soit & I'ex6cution de travaux 
ou parties de travaux dont les frais 
seraient converts uniquement par 
les taxes de navigation. 

Au cas oft les travaux seraient 
ex^cut^s par entreprise, un accord 
interviendra entre les gouverne- 
ments des Etats riverains du secteur 
et la commission pour fixer les 
modalit6s de Fentr6e en franchise des 
machines, outils, mat6riaux ou ma- 
t6riel que 1'entreprise indiquerait & 
Fadmmistration comme devant tre 
imports sur le territoire de Tun ou 
de Tautre Etat. 

Les dispositions ci-dessus ne por- 
tent pas prejudice aux dispositions 
de 1'article 28. 

Art. 31. Les fouraitures de tout 
genre n&cessaires aux fins indiqu6es 
au premier alin<a de Tarticle 30 ci- 
dessus, seront, en r&gle g6nrale, at- 
tributes aux fournisseurs pr^sentant 
les offres les plus avantageuses en 
adjudication rlguli&re. 

Toutefois, un droit de pr6f6rence 
est reconnu aux fournisseurs ressor- 
tissants des deux Etats riverains du 
secteur, & condition que Tdcart eatre 
leurs offres et les offres les plus avan- 
tageuses ne d^passe pas, qualit< 
<gale, 10%. 

En ce qui concerne les fournitures 
offertes & conditions 6gales par les 



6o 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 309 



either of the riparian States of the 
Section, the contracts shall as far as 
possible he divided equally between 

the contractors in question* 

CHAPTER VII 

SUPERVISION AND POLICING OF 

NAVIGATION 

Art. 32. The special provisions 
concerning navigation in the Iron 
Gates and Cataracts Section shall 
be drawn up by the Commission on 
the proposal of the Administration. 
They shall be promulgated by the 
riparian States in their respective 
territories, and shall form part of the 
Annex to the Regulations for the 
Policing of Navigation. 

Art, 33. The Administration 
which, under Article 5 of the present 
Agreement, is in charge of the super- 
vision of navigation shall notify to 
the riparian authorities in charge of 
the policing of navigation any con- 
traventions of which it may take 
cognisance through its own organs, 
placing at the disposal of the said 
authorities any information which it 
has been able to obtain. 

The Administration shall further 
report to the said authorities any 
irregularity requiring action on their 
part, and any damage caused to the 
equipment, buildings or installations 
placed at its disposal. 

The competent officials of the 
Administration shall be solely re- 
sponsible for seeing that navigators 
carry out the obligations imposed by 
the Annex to the Regulations for 
Policing of Navigation and regulat- 
ing the passage of vessels through 
the Section, and the said employees 
shall for that purpose have the right 
to take action on board vessels. 

Art* 34, The riparian authorities 
responsible for the policing of naviga- 
tion shall take action on board ves- 
sels only when they themselves find 
that a contravention has been com- 
mitted, or when they are summoned 



fournisseurs ressortissants des deux 
Etats riverains du secteur, une 
repartition, autant que possible & 
parts 6gales, en sera faite entre eux* 

CUAPZTRB VII 

SURVEILLANCE EX POLICE BE LA 

NAVIGATION 

Art. 32. Les dispositions sp6ciales 
concernant la navigation dans le 
Secteur des Portes-de-Fer et des 
Cataractes seront 6tablies par la 
commission sur la proposition de 
I'administration. Biles seront pro- 
mulgutes par les Etats riverains sur 
leurs territoires respectifs et feront 
partie de 1'annexe au R&glement de 
police de la navigation. 

Art, 33, L 'administration charg6e 
comme il est dit & 1'article 5 du 
present accord, de la surveillance de 
la navigation, signalera aux autorit^s 
riveraines chargles de la police de la 
navigation les contraventions dont 
elle pourrait prendre connaissance 
par 1'entremise de ses propres or- 
ganes, en mettant & la disposition 
desdites autorit&s tous les 616ments 
deformation qu'elle aura pu re- 
cueillir. 

L 'administration leur signalera, en 
outre, toute irr6gularit6 r6clamant 
leur intervention, ainsi que tout 
dommage caus& aux ^quipements, 
Edifices et installations mis 4 sa 
disposition* 

Le contrdle de Taccomplissement 
par les navigateurs des obligations 
impos6es par 1'annexe au Rdglement 
de police de la navigation et rfiglant 
la traversfe du secteur sera exclusive- 
ment r6serv6 aux agents compfitents 
de Padministration, lesquels auront & 
cet effet le droit d'intervention 4 
bord des bUtiments. 

Art* 34. Les autorit^s riveraines 
chargles de la police de la navigation 
n'interviendront & bord des bUti- 
ments que lorsqu'elles constateront 
elles-mgmes une contravention ou 
lorsqu'elles seront requises par les 



June 28, 1932 



SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES 



61 



by the organs of the Administration 
to note the facts and report them. 

The official instructed to do so 
shall confine himself to making out 
the report, which he shall forward to 
the competent riparian authority to 
be used for the opening of an enquiry, 

In the report he shall, before any 
other facts which may have come to 
his notice, set forth the facts ascer- 
tained by the official of the Adminis- 
tration. 

Should no report have been made 
out, the riparian authorities shall 
open the enquiry into the case as 
soon as they receive the information 
collected by the official of the Ad- 
ministration who reported the con- 
travention. 

Such official shall if necessary be 
heard by the said authorities. 

Art. 35. The enquiry into and 
prosecution In respect of contraven- 
tions reported to the competent 
riparian authorities, whether by the 
Administration or by the river police 
services or in any other manner, 
direct or indirect, and the settlement 
of legal cases, whether civil or crim- 
inal, arising out of the exercise of 
navigation, shall devolve exclusively 
upon the said authorities of the 
riparian States of the Section. 

The authorities shall communicate 
monthly to the Administration a 
table showing all legal decisions 
which have become final and cases 
dismissed by them. 

Art. 36. The competent ripa- 
rian authorities shall take action on 
their own initiative or render assist- 
ance to the organs of the Adminis- 
tration, at their request, whenever an 
irregularity has to be stopped. 

Within the limits of the sovereignty 
of the respective States, the compe- 
tent riparian authorities and the 
vessels commissioned by each of the 
riparian States of the Section for the 
policing of navigation shall take 
action in case of need, either at the 



organes de Tadministration pour 
constater les faits par un proc&s- 
verbal. 

L 'agent verbalisateur se bornera 
dresser proems-verbal qu'il trans- 
mettra & I'autorit6 riveraine compd- 
tente pour servir & 1'ouverture de 
Tinstruction. 

Dans ce proems-verbal il consig- 
nera, avant tous autres faits parvenus 
& sa connaissance, les constatations 
faites par Tagent de radministration, 

Au cas oft aucun proems-verbal ne 
serait intervenu, les autorit&s rive- 
raines ouvriront Finstruction de 1'af- 
faire d&s reception des 616ments d 'in- 
formation recueillis par 1'agent de 
Tadministration qui a signal 6 la 
contravention. 

Get agent sera entendu par lesdites 
autorits, s'il y a lieu. 

Art. 35. L 'instruction et la pour- 
suite des contraventions dont les 
autoritfe riveraines comp<tentes se- 
raient saisies, soit par radministra- 
tion, soit par les organes de la police 
fluviale, soit de toute autre manure, 
directe ou indirecte, ainsi que le 
rtglement des affaires judiciaires 
civiles ou p&nales issues de 1'exercice 
de la navigation, incombent ex- 
clusivement auxdites autorits des 
Etats riverains du secteur. 

Les autorit&s communiqueront 
mensuellement Tadministration un 
tableau indiquant tous les jugements 
demeur^s d^finitifs et les ordonnances 
de non-lieu rendues par elles. 

Art. 36. Les autorit6s riveraines 
comp^tentes interviendront de leur 
propre initiative ou prlteront leur 
assistance aux organes de Tadminis- 
tration, sur leur demande, toutes les 
fois qu'il s'agirait de faire cesser une 
irregular! t6. 

Dans la limite de la souverainet6 
de chaque Etat, les autorit6s rive- 
raines comp^tentes et les bateaux 
affect6s par chacun des Etats rive- 
rains du secteur & la police de la 
navigation interviendront, en cas de 
besoin, soit la demande de 1'admi- 



62 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 309 



request of the Administration or on 
their own initiative, should the cir- 
cumstances require immediate ac- 
tion. 

Art. 37. The officials of the Sec- 
tion shall not be vested with any of 
the powers held by the officers of the 
judicial police. 

Pilots may act only in their ca- 
pacity as officials of the river police. 

Art. 38. The two riparian States 
of the Section shall inform the Com- 
mission of the procedure by which, 
on the basis of the Commission's 
views, they will settle the allocation 
of their competence to prosecute for 
contraventions and the action to be 
taken by their authorities. 



CHAPTER VIII 

FINANCIAL CLAUSES (NAVIGATION 
DUES) 

Art. 39, The Commission shall 
prepare the yearly budget of the 
Administration. 

It shall take decisions as to any 
dues or other sources of revenue in- 
tended to provide for measures to 
promote the maintenance or im- 
provement of navigability or the 
administration of the Section, with- 
out the Governments represented 
being thereby rendered liable to 
make financial contributions. 

Art. 40. The Commission shall 
determine the method of levying dues, 
the proceeds of which shall be utilised 
first for the payment of the expenses 
of the Administration and for main- 
tenance and improvement work, and 
secondly for meeting such financial 
obligations as have been or may 
hereafter be contracted by the Com- 
mission for carrying out the said 
work, such as that resulting from the 
Agreement signed by the Commission 
at Paris on April 27, 1927. 

Art. 41. The funds of the Ad- 
ministration shall as a general rule be 
placed in the financial establishments 
of the two riparian States of the 



nistration, soit de leur propre initia- 
tive au ens ou les divon stances exi- 
geraient urn* intervention immediate. 

Art. 37. Les agents do Fa dm in is- 
tration ne sont in vest is d'aucune at- 
tribution appartenant aux officiers cle 
la police judiciaire. 

Les pilotes ne peuvent agir en 
qualit6 d 'agents cle la police fluviale. 

Art, 38. Les deux Etats riverains 
du secteur fcront connaftre i\ la com- 
mission les moduli tos suivunt les- 
quelles ils regleront, en s'inspirant 
des points de vtie do la, commission, 
la repartition cle leur competence en 
ce qui concerne la poursuite des con- 
traventions et les interventions de 
leurs autoritfis, 

CHAPITRE VIII 

DISPOSITIONS FINANCIERS (TAXES 
BE NAVIGATION) 

Art. 39* La commission 6tablit le 
budget annual de ^administration. 

Bile d6cide les taxes et 6ventuellc- 
ment toutes autres ressources des- 
tin6es k faire face aux mesures utilos 

i Tentretien et & Pametioration de la 
navigability et & F administration du 
secteur, sans qu'il puisse en rfisulter 
1'obligation d'un concours financier 
de la part des gouvernements reprfi- 
sent^s. 

Art. 40. La commission fixe le 
mode de perception des taxes dont le 
revenu est affect^, en premier lieu, 
au paiement des frais de Tadminis- 
tration et des travaux d'entretien et 
d 'amelioration, et, en second lieu, 
au service des obligations financi&res 
contract^es ou & contracter ^ven- 
tuellement par la commission en vue 
de faire face auxdits travaux, telles 
que celle rfisultant de 1'accord sign6 
^, Paris par elle le 27 avril 1927, 

Art. 41. Le placement des fonds 

de 1 'administration est fait, en r&gle 
g6n6rale, dans les institute financiers 
des deux Etats riverains du secteur, 



June 28, 1932 



SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES 



Section, shall be controlled by the 

State, and, as far as possible, equally 
in the two riparian States of the 
Section. 

Deposits shall in all cases be re- 
ceived in the currency fixed by the 
Commission, and interest shall be 
payable in the currency in which the 
deposit is made. 

CHAPTER IX 

RECOURSE TO LAW 

Art. 42. The Administration shall 
have competence to be a party to 
legal proceedings either as plaintiff 
or as defendant in all suits connected 
with movable or immovable prop- 
erty under its management. 

In the case of legal proceedings in 
connection with immovable property, 
the courts of law within whose area 
the immovable property is situated 
shall have jurisdiction. 

Legal proceedings connected with 
movable property brought against 
the Administration shall, in the 
absence of contractual provisions to 
the contrary, be brought, when the 
plaintiff is domiciled in Roumanian 
or Yugoslav territory, before the 
competent authorities of the State 
in question, and when the plaintiff is 
domiciled in another State, before 
the competent authorities of the 
headquarters of the Administration. 

Art, 43. The Commission, to 
which the Administration shall com- 
municate without delay legal deci- 
sions concerning it, shall make pro- 
vision for the financial consequences 
of the said decisions out of the 
normal budgetary resources of the 
Administration . 

Art. 44. The Administration's 
equipment, buildings and installa- 
tions, material and supplies, the 
debts due to it and its cash in hand 
or at the bank, shall not be liable to 
seizure. 

Art. 45. No legal proceedings 
may be brought against the Admin- 
istration in respect of any damage 



63 

contr616s par 1'Etat, et, autant que 
possible, & parts figales, dans les deux 

Etats riverains du secteun 

Les d6p6ts seront, en tous cas, 
re^us dans la monnaie fix6e par la 
Commission et les int6rts seront 
servis dans la monnaie du d6p6t. 



CHAPITRE IX 

RECOURS EN" JUSTICE 

Art. 42. L 'administration a qua- 
Iit6 pour ester en justice, comme de- 
manderesse ou comme d6fenderesse, 
dans toutes les actions mobilifores ou 
immobili&res se r6f6rant aux actes 
de sa gestion. 

Pour les actions immobili&res, la 
competence appartient aux juridic- 
tipns dans le ressort desquelles 
rimmeuble se trouve situ6. 

Quant aux actions mobilises di- 
rig6es contre 1'administration, elles 
sont in ten ties, sauf stipulations con- 
tractuelles contraires: lorsque le 
demandeur est dornicilie en terri- 
toire roumain ou yougoslave, devant 
les autoritfes comp6tentes de I'Etat 
respectif; lorsque le demandeur est 
domicile dans un autre Etat, devant 
les autorit^s comp6tentes du si&ge 
central de Tadministration, 

Art 43. La Commission & qui 
Tadministration communique sans 
retard les decisions de justice la con- 
cernant, fait face aux consequences 
financi&res desdites decisions au 
moyen des ressources budg^taires 
normales de 1 'administration. 

Art. 44, Les ^quipements, 6di- 
fices et installations, les mat^riaux et 
approvisionnements, les cr^ances, 
fonds en caisse ou en banque dont 
1'administration dispose, sont in- 
saisissables. 

Art, 45. Auqun recours ne peut 
8tre exerc^ contre 1 'administra- 
tion pour un dommage quelconque 



6 4 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 309 



suffered by vessels while passing 
through the Iron Gates and Cata- 
racts Section. 

Art. 46. Each of the two riparian 
States of the Section shall, through 
its authorities and in accordance 
with its laws, render assistance and 
protection to ensure the verification 
and recovery of damage caused to 
equipment, buildings or installa- 
tions, supplies, material or funds at 
the disposal of the Administration, 

The Commission shall, if neces- 
sary, take action to obtain for this 
purpose the assistance of the com- 
petent authorities of other States. 

CHAPTER X 

FACILITIES GRANTED BY THE RIPA- 
RIAN STATES OF THE SECTION 

Art. 47. Suitable measures de- 
termined by agreement between the 
Commission and the two riparian 
States of the Section shall be taken 
by each of the two riparian States 
of the Section in its own territory in 
order that both in the case of resi- 
dence and for passage and free 
movement on the river banks the 
necessary facilities shall be granted 
to the staff of the Administration 
and to private pilots in the exercise 
of their duties. 

The two riparian States of the 
Section agree to grant to the staff 
of the Administration in their ter- 
ritories any other facilities which 
may be desirable for the exercise of 
their duties. 

These facilities shall also be de- 
termined by agreement between the 
two riparian States of the Section 
and the Commission, 

Art. 48. The Governments of 
the two riparian States of the Sec- 
tion shall grant all possible facilities 
to the Administration for the use of 
their telegraph and telephone serv- 
ices for the requirements of the 
Section, each retaining control 
thereof in its own territory. 



6prouv6 par la navigation au passage 
par la Section des Portes-de-Fer et 
des Cataractes. 

Art 46. Chacun des deux Etats 
riverains du secteur prte, par Pen- 
tremise de ses autorit6s, et conformfi- 
ment & ses lois, aide et protection 
pour assurer la constatation et le 
recouvrement des dommages caus6s 
aux 6quipements, Edifices et instal- 
lations, approvisionnements, mat6- 
riaux et fonds dont Tadministration 
dispose. 

La commission, le cas 6ch6ant, 
agit pour obtenir aux m6mes fins le 
concours des autorit^s conip6tente$ 
d'autres Etats. 

CHAPITRE X 

FACILIT&S ACCGRD&ES PAR LES fiTATS 
RIVERAINS DU SECTEUR 

Art. 47. Des mesures appropri6es, 
6tablies de concert entre la commis- 
sion et les deux Etats riverains du 
secteur, sont prises par chacun des 
deux Etats riverains du secteur sur 
son territoire, afin que, tant pour le 
s^jour que pour le passage et la libre 
circulation sur la rive, les facilit^s 
n6cessaires soient accordtes au per- 
sonnel de Tadministration, ainsi 
qu'aux pilotes particuliers, pour 
1'exercice de leurs fonctions. 

Les deux Etats riverains du sec- 
teur conviennent d Recorder au per- 
sonnel de Tadministration sur leurs 
territoires respectifs, toutes autres 
facilit6s utiles pour 1'exercice de ses 
fonctions. 

Ces faciiit6s seront 6galement 
dtermin6es, de concert entre les 
deux Etats riverains du secteur de 
la commission. 

Art. 48. Les gouvernements des 
deux Etats riverains du secteur ac~ 
corderont toutes les facilit^s possibles 
& Tadministration pour I'utilisation 
de leurs rfeeaux t&lfegraphiques et 
t616phoniques en vue des besoins du 
secteur, tout en gardant le contrdle 
chacun sur son territoire respectif , 



June 28, 1932 



SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES 



6 5 



CHAPTER XI 

FLAG AND OFFICIAL LANGUAGES 

Art. 49. The Administration 
shall display on its buildings, and 
on the vessels constituting the fleet 
placed at its disposal, only a distinc- 
tive sign consisting of a rectangular 
or triangular pennant composed of 
the colours of the Commission and 
of the two riparian States of the 
Section and bearing in the centre 
the letters A P F, in accordance 
with the models hereto annexed. 

The seal of the Administration shall 
bear the inscription "Administration 
of the Iron Gates and Cataracts". 

The badge to be worn by the officials 
of the Administration and in particu- 
lar by the official pilots shall be pre- 
scribed by the Working Regulations. 

Art. 50. The official languages of 
the Administration shall be Rou- 
manian, Serb-Croat and French. 

The use of other languages shall 
not be excluded. 

The Working Regulations shall 
settle details connected with the use 
of languages. 

CHAPTER XII 

MANAGEMENT OF MATTERS CON- 
NECTED WITH THE IRON GATES 
AND CATARACTS SECTION 

Art. 51. In order to ensure the 
speedy settlement of matters falling 
within the competence of the Ad- 
ministration, there shall be set up 
within the Commission a Special 
Committee composed of three or at 
most of four delegates, among whom 
the representatives of the riparian 
States of the Section must be in- 
cluded, the other member or mem- 
bers being appointed by the Com- 
mission under the conditions laid 
down by its Rules of Procedure. 

Art 52. The duties of the Com- 
mittee provided for in Article 51 
shall be, in all matters relating to 
the management of the Iron Gates 
and Cataracts Section : 



CHAPITRE XI 

PA VILLON ET LANGUES OFFICIELLES 

Art. 49. L 'administration arbore 
sur les Edifices et les unites consti- 
tuant le pare flottant mis & sa disposi- 
tion, uniquement un signe distinctif 
consistant en un guidon rectangu- 
laire ou triangulaire compost des 
couleurs de la commission et des deux 
Etats riverains du secteur et portant 
au centre les lettres A. P. F. (con- 
form^ment aux modules ci-annex6s). 

Le cachet de radministration por- 
tera 1 'inscription : ' * Administration 
des Portes-de-Fer et des Cataractes". 

L'insigne It porter par ses agents, 
et notamment par les pilotes officiels, 
sera d6termin6 par le R&glement de 
fonctionnement. 

Art 50. Les langues officielles de 
l ? administration sont le roumain, le 
serbe-croate et le fran^ais. 

L'usage d'autres langues n'est pas 
exclu. 

Le R^glement de fonctionnement 
r6glera les details en ce qui concerne 
Fusage des langues. 

CHAPITRE XII 

GESTION DES AFFAIRES RELATIVES AU 
SECTEUR DES PORTES-DE-FER ET 
DES CATARACTES 

Art 51. Pour assurer le r&gle- 
ment rapide des affaires rentrant 
dans la competence de radministra- 
tion, il est constitu6 au sein de la 
commission, un Comit6 special com- 
post de trois ou au maximum de 
quatre d&16gu6s, dont les repr6sen- 
tants des Etats riverains du secteur 
font obligatoirement partie, le ou 
les autres rnembres 6tant d6sign6s 
par la commission dans les condi- 
tions fix6es par son R^glement 
int6rieur. 

Art 52. Le comit6 vis6 & Tarticle 
51 est charg6, dans toutes les affaires 
relatives & la gestion du Secteur des 
Portes-de-Fer et des Cataractes : 



66 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 309 



(1) To conduct an enquiry Into 
the said affairs; 

(2) To take a decision : 

(a) In matters relating to current 
administration ; 

(6) In cases requiring urgent set- 
tlement. 

Art. S3- The decisions of the 
Special Committee must be unani- 
mous. 

Should it be impossible to obtain 
unanimity, the question must be 
brought before the Executive Com- 
mittee, which, if necessary, will be 
convened for an urgent meeting. 

Art. 54, The Rules of Procedure 
of the Commission shall govern the 
working of the Special Committee 
and its relations with the Executive 
Committee. All the decisions of 
the Special Committee shall be 
communicated to the Executive Com- 
mittee. 

Art. 55- Before a decision is taken 
in the Executive Committee or in 
plenary session with regard to the 
administration of the Section and 
the work to be carried out on the 
Section, the two Delegates of the 
riparian States of the Section shall 
be given an opportunity of stating 
their views. 

CHAPTER XIII 

EMBARKATION STATIONS OF PILOTS 

Art. 56, The stations at which 
pilots embark and land shall be 
maintained, established or abolished 
by the Commission by arrangement 
with the riparian State concerned 
and in accordance with the require- 
ments of traffic, so as to afford possi- 
bilities of embarkation and landing 
on both banks. 

CHAPTER XIV 

EQUIPMENT, BUILDINGS AND 
INSTALLATIONS 

Art. 57, As soon as the present 
Agreement comes into force, the 



i De procMer Instruction 
desdites affaires; 

2 De prendre une decision : 

a) Dans les affaires d 'administra- 
tion courante ; 

6) Dans les cas qui n^cessitent 
une solution urgente. 

Art 53. Les decisions du Comit6 
sp6cial sont prises & I'unanimit6. 

Si Funanimit6 ne peut Stre r6unie 
Taffaire doit n6cessairement fitre 
port6e devant le Comit6 ex^cutif 
qui, s'il y a lieu, est convoqu6 
d'urgence. 

Art. 54. Le r&glement int6rieur 
de la commission determine le fonc- 
tionnement du Comit< special et ses 
rapports avec le Coniit6 ex6cutif. 
Toutes Iesd6cisions du Comit6 special 
seront port6es & la connaissance du 
Comit6 ex6cutif. 

Art. 55. Avant qu'une decision 
soit prise en Comit ex6cutif ou en 
session p!6nidre au sujet de Tadmi- 
nistration du secteur et des travaux 
& y exficuter, les deux d616gu6s des 
Etats riverains du secteur sont mis 
en mesure de formuler leur avis. 



CHAPITRE XIII 

POSTES D'EMBARQUEMENT DES 
PILOTES 

Art* 56. Les postes d'embarque- 
ment et de d6barquement des pilotes 
seront maintenus, ^tablis ou sup- 
primps par la commission, d 'accord 
avec TEtat riverain int6ress6, aelon 
les besoins du trafic, de mani&re i 
offrir des possibilMs d'embarque- 
ment et de d^barquement sur chaque 



ve. 



CHAPITRE XIV 

EQUIPEMENTS, ^DIFICES ET 
INSTALLATIONS 



Art* 57* D&s la mise en vlgueur 
du present accord, il est mis fin au 



June 28, 1932 



SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES 



67 



provisional control exercised by the 
International Commission of the 
Danube under Article 288 of the 
Treaty of Trianon over the use of 
equipment, buildings and installa- 
tions provided for in that Article 
shall come to an end. 

The equipment, buildings and in- 
stallations shall immediately be 
placed at the disposal of the Adminis- 
tration in accordance with Article 33 
of the Statute of the Danube. 

An official record of this operation 
shall be drawn up and there shall be 
annexed thereto a detailed inventory 
made out on the spot in three origi- 
nals in the presence of the members 
of the Special Committee provided 
for in Article 51. 

The inventory shall also indicate 
the amount of cash in hand and at 
the bank, the vouchers and books re- 
lating to financial management, and 
the archives and all furniture and 
material in the offices, workshops 
and buildings. 

Art* 58. The equipment, build- 
ings and installations placed at the 
disposal of the Administration shall 
continue as in the past to be used 
exclusively for the benefit of naviga- 
tion, and may not be diverted from 
their original purpose for the in- 
dividual use of either of the riparian 
States of the Section. They shall be 
exempt from any tax on real prop- 
erty and from all other fiscal taxes 
or dues. 

Art. 59. The new property, mov- 
able and immovable, acquired by the 
Administration from the proceeds of 
dues shall be entered in the inven- 
tory and shall be subject to the same 
legal regime as the property pre- 
viously acquired. 

Art. 60. Should any property, 
movable or immovable, placed at the 
disposal of the Administration be 
sold, it shall be struck out of the 
inventory, and the proceeds of the 
sale of such property shall be placed 
to the credit of the Administration. 



contrSle provisoire qu'exerce la Corn- 
mission internationale du Danube, 
en vertu de Particle 288 du Trait< de 
Trianon, sur Femploi des 6quipe- 
menxs, Edifices et installations viss 
par cet article. 

Les 6quipements, Minces et in- 
stallations sont mis imm&iiatement 
& la disposition de Fadministration, 
conform^ment Farticle 33 du 
Statut du Danube. 

II est dress6 un proems- verbal de 
cette operation auquel sera annex 
un inventaire d6tail!6 dress6 sur les 
lieux en trois originaux, en presence 
des membres du Cornit< special 
pr6vu & 1'article 51. 

Devront 6galement tre men- 
tionn6s dans Finventaire le nuni- 
raire en caisse et en banque, les 
pieces justificatives et les livres 
concernant la gestion financi&re, 
ainsi que les archives et tout le 
mobilier et le materiel se trouvant 
dans les bureaux, ateliers et Edifices. 

Art. 58. Les 6quipements, 6difices 
et installations mis 4 la disposition 
de 1 'administration, continueront & 
gtre utilises, comme par le pass6, ex- 
clusivement au bn6fice de la naviga- 
tion et ne pourront 6tre d6tourns 
de leur destination primitive par Tun 
ou Fautre des deux Etats riverains 
du secteur & son b6nfice personnel. 
Us seront exempts de tout irnpdt 
foncier et de tous autres impdts et 
taxes de caract&re fiscal. 

Art 59* Les nouveaux biens, 
meubles ou imrneubles, acquis par 
radministration sur le produit des 
taxes, seront passes dans Finventaire 
et soumis au m&me r6gime juridique 
que les anciens. 

Art. 60. Si Fun des biens, meubles 
ou immeubles, se trouvant & la dis- 
position de Fadmimstration, venait 
& tre vendu, il serait ray6 de Fin- 
ventaire et le montant r6alis6 en 
serait vers6 4 Factif de Fadministra- 
tion* 



68 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 309 



CHAPTER XV 

CONTROL AND SUPERVISION BY TUB: 
COMMISSION 

Art. 61. In addition to the rights 
mentioned in the present Agreement 
and acknowledged as appertaining to 
the Commission under Articles 32 
and 33 of the Statute of the Danube, 
the Commission shall exercise in the 
Iron Gates and Cataracts Section to 
the same extent as at all other points 
of the river system under its control 
all rights of supervision and control 
conferred upon it by the other 
provisions of the Statute. 

CHAPTER XVI 

TRANSITIONAL CLAUSES 

Art. 62. In so far as the existing 
staff is replaced, the new staff shall 
succeed the former staff gradually so 
as not to impair the normal working 
of the various Services of the Ad- 
ministration. This gradual replace- 
ment shall be spread over a period of 
eighteen months from the seventh 
month following the coming into 
force of the present Agreement. 
The procedure by which this opera- 
tion is to be carried out shall be de- 
termined as soon as this coming into 
force takes place by the Special 
Committee provided for in Article 51 
on the suggestions of the Govern- 
ments of the riparian States of the 
Section. 

Art. 63. The provisions of the 
previous Article shall not apply to 
pilots, who need not be replaced un- 
less they do not comply with the 
conditions laid down in the Working 
Regulations of the Administration, 

Art. 64. Any employee of the 
former Iron Gates Navigation Serv- 
ice having to resign his post shall 
be given not less than six months' 
notice to that effect by the Special 
Committee provided for in Article 51. 

Any official of the former Service 
whose replacement has not been pro- 



CHAPITRE XV 

CONTR&LB ET SURVEILLANCE PAR LA 
COMMISSION 

Art 61. Outre les droits men- 
tionnes au present Accord et qui lui 
sont reconnus en vertu des articles 
32 et 33 du Statut du Danube, la 
commission exerce sur le Secteur des 
Portes-de-Fer et des Cataractes, 
dans la mgme mesure que sur tous 
les autres points du rfiseau fluvial 
soumis & sa competence, tous les 
droits de surveillance ou de contr61e 
qui lui sont conf6r6s par les autres 
dispositions du Statut. 

CHAPITRE XVI 

DISPOSITIONS TRANSITOIRES 

Art. 62. Dans la mesure oil le 
personnel existant sera renouveI6, la 
substitution de personnel nouveau 4 
du personnel ancien se fera par 
6chelonnement, de mani&re & ne pas 
nuire au fonctionnement normal des 
diff&rents services de Fadministra- 
tion, Cet 6chelonnement s'6tendra 
sur une priode de dix-huit mois 
compt6s depuis le septi&me mois qui 
suit la mise en vigueur du present 
accord, Les modalitfe de cette op6- 
ration seront fix^es d&s cette mise 
en vigueur par le Comit6 special 
prfivu & 1 'article 51, sur les sugges- 
tions des gouvernements des Etats 
riverains du secteur. 

Art. 63, Les dispositions de Tarti- 
cle pr6c6dent ne sont pas applicables 
aux pilotes au remplacement des- 
quels il n'y aura lieu de pouryoir que 
dans le cas oil ils ne rernpliraient pas 
les conditions fixes au R&glement de 
fonctionnement de Tadministration* 

Art. 64. Tout agent de Pancien 
service de la navigation aux Portes- 
de-Fer qui devra r&igner ses fonc- 
tions, en sera pr6venu par le comit6 
special pr6vu & Particle 51, au moins 
six mois & Favance* 

Tout agent de Tancien service 
dont le remplacement ne serait pas 



June 28, 1932 



SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES 



vided for and who does not resign his 
post on the entry into force of the 
present Agreement must give at least 
two months' notice should he later 
desire to resign. 

Art. 65. The pensions system of 
officials of the former Hungarian 
State Service shall continue under 
the conditions laid down in the Com- 
mission's resolution dated June 22, 
1929, as modified on June 28, 1932. 

CHAPTER XVII 

SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES 

Art. 66. The competent juris- 
diction for the settlement of disputes 
as to the interpretation and applica- 
tion of the present Agreement shall 
be the special tribunal set up for that 
purpose by the League of Nations 
and mentioned in Article 38 of the 
Statute of the Danube. 

CHAPTER XVIII 

REVISION 

Art. 67. No change in the present 
Agreement may be made otherwise 
than under the conditions provided 
for in Article 32 of the Statute of the 
Danube providing for the conclusion 
of the present Agreement. 

Any request for a modification 
made by one of the Parties must 
specify what clauses it considers 
require revision and may not be 
examined until six months after it 
has been communicated to the other 
two Parties. 

On the expiry of a period of five 
years from the coming into force of 
the present Agreement its text must 
be reconsidered with a view to 
revision. 

CHAPTER XIX 

RATIFICATION AND COMING INTO 
FORCE 

Art. 68. The present Agreement 
shall be ratified by the two riparian 



pr<vu et qui ne r6signera pas ses 
fonctions d&s la mise en vigueur du 
present accord devra donner un 
preavis d'au moins deux mois s'il 
voulait le faire ulterieurement. 

Art 65. Le regime des pensions 
des agents de Tancien service de 
1'Etat hpngrois sera maintenu dans 
les conditions fix&es par la resolution 
de la commission en date du 22 juin 
1929 et modifiee le 28 juin 1932. 

CHAPITRE XVII 

R^GLEMENT DES DIFF&RENDS 

Art. 66. La juridiction comp6- 
tente pour le r&glement des diSi- 
rends sur Interpretation et 1'applica- 
tion du present accord est la juridic- 
tion speciale organis6e par la Societe 
des Nations, mentionn^e Tarticle 
38 du Statut du Danube. 



CHAPITRE XVIII 
REVISION 

Art. 67. Toute modification au 
present accord ne pourra gtre ap- 
portee que dans les conditions pr6- 
vues & 1'article 32 du Statut du 
Danube pour retablissement de cet 
accord. 

Toute demande de modification 
introduite par une des parties devra 
specifier les dispositions qui lui 
paraissent susceptibles de revision 
et ne pourra tre prise en considera- 
tion que six mois apr&s avoir ete 
communiquee aux deux autres Par- 
ties. 

A 1'expiration d'un deiai de cinq 
ans, & dater de la mise en vigueur 
du present accord, son texte sera 
remis obligatoirement & l'6tude en 
vue d'une revision eventuelle. 

CHAPITRE XIX 

RATIFICATION MISE EN VIGUEUR 

Art. 68. Le present accord sera 
ratifie par les deux Etats riverains 



70 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 309 



States of the Section and the ratifi- 
cations shall be deposited with the 
Office of the International Commis- 
sion of the Danube as soon as possible 
and not later than February I, 1933. 

The official record of the deposit 
of ratifications shall be forwarded to 
the Government of the French Re- 
public to be deposited in its archives. 

Art. 69, The present Agreement 
and the regulations and agreements 
provided for In Articles 8, 13, 38 and 
47 shall come into force as from 
July i, 1933. 

IN FAITH WHEREOF the under- 
mentioned Plenipotentiaries have 
signed the present Agreement, made 
out in a single original copy, which 
shall be deposited in the archives of 
the French Republic; a certified 
copy shall be given to each of the 
two signatory Powers and to the 
International Commission of the 
Danube. 

Done at Semmering, June 28, 
1932. 



du secteur et les ratifications seront 
d6poses au Bureau de la Commis- 
sion Internationale clu Danube dans 
le plus bref ellai possible et au plus 
tard le I or f6vrier 1933. 

Le procfis- verbal de d6p6t des 
ratifications sera transmis au Gou- 
vernementdela R^publique frangaise 
pour gtre conserv6 dans ses archives. 

Art. 69. Le present accord, ainsi 
que les r^glements et arrangements 
vis6s aux articles 8, 13, 38 et 47 
entreront en vigueur & la date du 
I OT juillet 1933. 

EN FOI DE QUOI les plfinipoten- 
tiaires susnomm6s ont sign^ le pr6- 
sent accord r6dig6 en un seul exem- 
plaire qui sera d6pos6 dans les 
archives de la R^publique frangaise; 
une expedition authentique sera 
remise & chacune des deux Puissances 
signataires et & la Commission Inter- 
nationale du Danube. 

Fait au Semmering, le 28 juin 
1932. 



D. PANTITCH CONST. CONTZESCO DE DIETRICH 



ANNEX I 

FORM FOR UNDERTAKING ON WORD 
OF HONOUR 

FORM I 
I, the undersigned 



ANNEXE I 

PORMULAIRES D'ENGAGEMENT 
D'HGNNBUR 

FORMULATE 1 

Je soussign6. * 



undertake on my honour, In the presence 
of M 



m'engage sur 1'honneur devant M. 



Delegate of 

on the International Commission of the 
Danube, authorised for that purpose by 
the said Commission, to carry out the 

duties of .' 

in accordance with the decisions of the 
International Commission of the Danube 
and in a spirit of strict impartiality, 

FORM II 
I, the undersigned 



de. 



a la Commission Internationale du Da- 
nube, mandate & cet effet par ellc, d'ac- 
complir les fonctions de ..... . ..... .... 



conformtoent aux decisions de la Com- 
mission Internationale du Danube et dans 
un esprit de stricte impartiality 

FORMULAIRE II 
Je soussign6 ... 



undertake on my honour, in the presence 

of M 

Chief of 



m f engage sur Thonneur devant M.. 



June 28, 1932 



SPECIAL SERVICES AT IRON GATES 



of the Iron Gates and Cataracts Adminis- 
tration, empowered for that purpose, to 
carry out the duties of 



de FAdministration des Portes-de-Fer et 
des Cataractes, ayant pouvoir a cet effet, 
cTaccomplir les fonctions de 



in accordance with the decisions of the 
Internationa! Commission of the Danube 
and In a spirit of strict impartiality. 



conform6ment aux decisions de la Com- 
mission Internationale du Danube et dans 
un esprit de stricte impartiality. 



ANNEX II 

[This annex, which sets forth two distinctive marks (flags) for the Iron Gates and Cataracts 
Administration, is not reproduced here.] 



No. 309a 



Final Protocol to the Agreement concerning the Setting-Up of 
Special Services at the Iron Gates. Signed at Semmering, June 
28, 1932. 

Protocole final & P Accord relatif a la constitution des services spe- 
ciaux aux Portes-de-Fer. Signe au Semmering, 28 juin 1932. 

Text and translation from 140 League of Nations Treaty Series, p. 226. 

[Translation] 

When proceeding to the signature 
of the present Agreement, the under- 
signed Plenipotentiaries have agreed 
on the following provisions: 

Ad Art 2. The headquarters of 
the Administration shall remain at 
Orsova, and the Public Works Serv- 
ice shall be established at Tekija 
in a building which the Yugoslav 
Government shall cause to be con- 
structed at its own expense and 
which it shall place at the disposal of 
the said Service free of charge. 

Such building shall be granted the 
same rights, privileges, and fiscal 
exemptions as those which at present 
apply or may hereafter apply to the 
Orsova premises, and it may not be 
used for any other purpose. The 
new building shall display under the 
same conditions as the Orsova build- 
ing the distinctive insignia of the 
Administration, which shall be in 
charge of the maintenance thereof. 

The Public Works Service sihall 
be established in the new building 



Au moment de proc6der & la 
signature du pr&ent accord, les 
pl&nipotentiaires soussign^s sont con- 
venus de ce qui suit: 

Ad Art. 2, Le sifege central de 
Tadministration restant fix6 & Or- 
sova, le Service des Travaux sera 
install^ <t Tekija dans Timmeuble 
que le Gouvernement yougoslave 
fera* b&tir & ses frais et mettra 
gratuitement & la disposition dudit 
service. 

Cet immeuble jouira des m&mes 
droits, prerogatives et exemptions 
fiscales dont b&n&ficie ou b6n6ficiera 
& Tavenir le local d'Orsova et ne 
pourra 6tre affect6 & un autre emploi. 
II arborera dans les m^mes condi- 
tions que ce dernier les insignes dis- 
tinctifs de Tadministration, qui en 
aura la charge de Tentretien. 



L'installation du Service des Tra- 
vaux sera effectu6e d&s que le 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 310 



as soon as the Yugoslav Govern- 
ment has notified the Administra- 
tion that the building, which shall 
be constructed as soon as possible, 
is ready for occupation. 

Ad Art 12. It is understood that 
the post of the representative pro- 
vided for in Article 12 shall be filled 
in turn by the Councillors (r&fSren- 
daires) of the General Secretariat of 
the Commission during the first 
five years after the coming into force 
of the present Agreement. The 
situation shall be examined afresh 
on the expiry of that period when 
the text of the Agreement is recon- 
sidered as provided in Article 67. 

IN FAITH WHEREOF the Under- 
signed have drawn up the present 
Protocol, which shall have the same 
force and duration as the Agreement 
to which it refers. 

Done at Semmering, June 28, 
1932. 



Gouveraement yougpslave aura fait 
connaitre &, Tadministration que 
1'immeuble dont la construction aura 
lieu aussitOt que possible, est prt 
& 6tre habit6. 

Ad Art 12. II est entendu que 
les fonctions du repr6sentant prvu 
& Tarticle 12 seront assumes &. tour 
de r61e par les r6frendaires du 
secretariat g&n6ral de la commission 
pendant les cinq premieres ann6es 
qui suivront la mise en vigueur du 
present accord. La situation sera 
examinee de nouveau 1 'expiration de 
cette p6riode & Foccasion de la remise 
& F6tude du texte de Faccord prescrite 
par les dispositions de Tarticle 67, 

EN FOI DE QUOI les soussignfe ont 
dress6 !e present protocole qui aura 
la m6me force et durfee que Taccord 
auquel il se rapporte. 

Fait au Semmering, le 28 juin 
1932. 



D. PANTITCH CONST. CONTZESCO DE DIETRICH 



No. 310 

AGREEMENT concerning Non-German Reparations. Signed at 
Lausanne, July 7, 1932. 

ACCORD relatif aux r6parations non-allemancles. Sign$ i 
Lausanne, 7 juillet 1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE* The Conference at Lausanne, at which this agreement was drawn up, 
was principally concerned with German reparations. See No, 311, post. This agreement 
applied, inter alia, to Bulgarian reparations (see No. 243, ante) and to Hungarian reparation 
(see No. 254, ante). The committee envisaged has not met. 

RATIFICATIONS. This agreement was not subject to ratification, 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. (See the bibliography under No. 311, post.) 

Entered into force July 7, 1933.* 

Text from publication by the German Ministry for Foreign Affairs. 

The undersigned Governments, Les Gouveraements soussign6s, 

Animated by the same spirit as Agissant dans Tesprit qui a inspirfe 
inspired the Declaration signed on la dlclaration signte le 16 juin par 
1 Not registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations (July I, 1937). 



July 9, 1932 



GERMAN REPARATIONS 



73 



the 1 6th June by the Five Inviting 
Creditor Powers, 1 

Are agreed and recommend to the 
Conference that a Committee con- 
sisting of one representative of each 
of the Governments concerned shall 
be set up to consider the group of 
questions known as "non -German 
Reparations" and cognate ques- 
tions viewing them within the frame- 
work of a general settlement, 



Are of opinion that, in order to 
permit the work of the said Commit- 
tee to proceed undisturbed, without 
prejudice to any question of principle 
or to the solutions which may ulti- 
mately be reached, the execution of 
the payments due in respect of the 
above-mentioned questions should 
be reserved until the 15th December 
next failing a settlement before that 
date. 

SIGNED at Lausanne the yth July, 
1932, for the Governments of 



les cinq Puissances crancires in- 
vitantes, 1 

Sont d 'accord pour recommander 
& la Conference de nomrner un 
Comit6 qui devrait 6tre compost 
d'un represent tan t de chacun des 
Gouvernements int&ress6s et qui 
serait charg6 d'examiner Tensernble 
des questions groupies sous le terme 
de 1 * Reparations non-allemandes ' ' 
et de celles qui s'y rattachent en les 
envisageant dans le cadre d'un 
r&glement universel, 

Sont d'avis, afin de permettre au 
Comit6 susmentionn& de mener 
bien sa t&che, que, sans pr^juger 
aucune question de principe, ni les 
solutions susceptibles d'etre atteintes 
ult6rieurement, Tex6cution des paie- 
ments aff6rents aux questions sus- 
mentionn^es soit r&erv^e jusqu'au 
15 d6cembre & d6faut d'un r^glernent 
ant^rieurement obtenu. 

SIGN& & Lausanne, le 7 juillet 1932, 
pour les Gouvernements de 



Australia: GRANVILLE RYRIE; Belgium: PAUL HYMANS; Bulgaria: N. 
MOUCHANOFF ; Canada : THOMAS A* STONE ; Czechoslovakia : STEFAN OSUSKY ; 
France: CHARLES RIST; Hungary: L, GAJZAGO; Italy: ANTONIO MOSCONI; 
Japan: SHIGERU YOSHIDA; New Zealand: T. M. WILFORD; Portugal: TOMAZ 
FERNANDES; Roumania: SAVEL RADULESCO; South Africa: C. T. TE WATER; 
United Kingdom: N. CHAMBERLAIN; Yugoslavia: CONSTANTIN FOTITCH; 
India: N. CHAMBERLAIN. 



No. 311 

AGREEMENT concerning German Reparations. Opened for signa- 
ture at Lausanne, July 9, 1932. 

ACCORD relatif aux reparations allemandes. Ouvert a la signature 
a Lausanne, 9 juillet 1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE. A Special Advisory Committee convoked by the Bank for Interna- 
tional Settlements in accordance with a request of the German Government made under a 
provision in the Experts' Plan of June 7, 1929, and Annex III, V, 10, of the Hague Agree- 

1 This declaration related to the suspension of payments on reparations and war debts 
falling due during the period of the Lausanne Conference. The text was incorporated m the 
Final Act of the Conference. Br. ParL Papers, Cmd. 4126 (1932); 27 Martens, N.R.G. 
(3d sen), p. 19, ED. 



74 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 311 



ment of January 20, 1930 (No, 238, ante), met at Basle, December 8-23, 1931; Its report of 
December 23, 1931, urged immediate decisions as to the general problem of reparations. 
Br. Parl. Papers, Cmd, 3995 (1932). At Geneva, on February 13, 1932, a decision was taken 
by states principally interested which led to the Lausanne Conference, June i6-July 9, 1932, 
This agreement of July 9, 1932, was designed to supersede the reparation regime provided 
for in the agreement of January 20 > 1930. 

RATIFICATIONS, While no ratification has been deposited at Paris, this agreement has 
had the result that German reparations have ceased to be the subject of active negotiations, 

BIBLIOGRAPHY, The text of this agreement is also published in Br. Parl. Papers, Misc. 
Mo. 7 (1930), Cmd. 4126; Materialien sur Reparations/rage (Lausanner Konferenz 1932) 
(Berlin: Foreign Office, 1932); 27 Martens, N.R.G. (3d ser.) P- 23. 

C de Armenteros, "La Conferencia de Lausanne sobre las reparaciones de la gran guerra," 
22 Rev. de der. int. (1932), pp. 291-326; G. W. J. Bruins, " De overeenkomst van Lausanne/' 
7 Volk&nbond (1931), pp. 357-63; M. Liais, "La Conference de Lausanne," 40 Rev. gin. d 
dr* int. pub, (1933)* pp. 71-89; Pereira da Silva, A Conferencia de Lausana (Lisboa, 1933), 
pp. 19-132; W. Rftpke, " Vor Lausanne/' 22 Zeitschriftf&rPotitife (1933), pp. 145-54; R6pke 
"Nach Lausanne/' identt pp. 297-306; K, Strupp, Der Vertrag von Lausanne (Berlin; Roth, 
1932), 67 pp.; H* Wehberg, " Die Lausanner Konferenz/' 32 Fried&nswart (1932), pp. 225-7; 
M. S. Wertheimer, "The Lausanne Reparation Settlement," 8 Foreign Policy Association 
Reports (1932), pp. 220-30; J. W. Wheeler-Bennett, The Wreck of Reparations (New York: 
Morrow, 1932), pp. 210-54. 



Not entered into force (January i, 1937). 
Text from publication by the German Ministry for Foreign Affairs. 



The Government of His Majesty 
the King of the Belgians* the Gov- 
ernment of the United Kingdom of 
Great Britain and Northern Ireland, 
the Government of Canada, the 
Government of the Commonwealth 
of Australia, the Government of New 
Zealand, the Government of the 
Union of South Africa, the Govern- 
ment of India, the Government of 
the French Republic, the Govern- 
ment of the Greek Republic, the 
Government of His Majesty the 
King of Italy, the Government of 
His Majesty the Emperor of Japan, 
the Government of the Republic of 
Poland, the Government of the Re- 
public of Portugal, the Government 
of His Majesty the King of Roumania, 
the Government of the Czecho- 
slovak Republic and the Govern- 
ment of His Majesty the King of 
Yugoslavia (hereinafter described as 
the creditor Governments), and the 
Government of the German Reich, 

Recognising that the legal validity 
of the Agreements signed at The 



Le Gouvernement de Sa Majest4 le 
Roi des Beiges, le Gouvernement du 
Royaume-Uni de Grande-Bretagne 
et de rirlande du Nord r le Gouverne- 
ment du Canada, le Gouveraement 
du Commonwealth d'Australie, le 
Gouvernement de la Nouvelle-Z6- 
lande, le Gouvernement de I 1 Union 
Sud-Africaine, le Gouvernement de 
1'Inde, le Gouvernement de la R6- 
publique frangaise, le Gouvernement 
de la R6publique grecque, le Gou- 
vernement de Sa Majest6 le Roi 
d'ltalie, le Gouvernement de Sa 
Majest6 TEmpereur du Japon, le 
Gouvernement de la R6publique de 
Pologne, le Gouvernement de la 
R6publique du Portugal , le Gouverne- 
ment de Sa Majestfe le Roi de 
Roumanie, le Gouvernement de la 
R&publique tch6coslovaque, le Gou- 
vernement de Sa Majest^ le Roi de 
Yougoslavie (ci-apr&s d6sign6s comme 
les Gouvernements cr6anciers) et le 
Gouvernement du Reich allemand, 

Reconnaissant que la validM 
juridique des accords signfe & La 



July 9, 1932 



GERMAN REPARATIONS 



75 



Hague on the 2Oth January, 1930,* is 
not in question , 

But concerned by the economic 
difficulties resulting from the present 
crisis, 

And being desirous to make, so far 
as they are concerned, the necessary 
efforts to ensure the confidence which 
is indispensable to the development 
of normal economic and financial re- 
lations between the nations, 

The undersigned, duly authorised 
to that effect by their respective 
Governments, 

Have agreed as follows: 

Declaration 

The Powers signatory of the pres- 
ent Agreement have assembled at 
Lausanne to deal with one of the 
problems resulting from the war, 
with the firm intention of helping to 
create a new order, permitting the 
establishment and development of 
confidence between the nations in a 
mutual spirit of reconciliation, col- 
laboration and justice. 

They do not claim that the task 
accomplished at Lausanne, which will 
completely put an end to Repara- 
tions, can alone assure that peace 
which all the nations desire. But 
they hope that an achievement of 
such significance and so arduously 
attained will be understood and ap- 
preciated by all the pacific elements 
in Europe and the world, and that it 
will be followed by fresh achieve- 
ments. 

These further successes will be 
more readily won if the nations will 
rally to this new effort in the cause of 
real peace, which can only be com- 
plete if it is applied both in the 
economic and in the political sphere 
and rejects all possibility of resort to 
arms or to violence. 

The signatory Powers will make 
every effort to resolve the problems 
which exist at the present moment 
or may arise subsequently ia the 



Haye le 20 Janvier 1930 * n'est pas 
en cause, 

Mais, 6tant pr6occups des diffi- 
cults 6conomiques provoqu^es par 
la crise actuelle, 

Et d^sireux, en ce qui les concerne, 
de faire les efforts n6cessaires pour 
assurer la confiance indispensable au 
d6veloppement de relations 6co- 
nomiques et financiSres normales 
entre les peuples, 

Les soussign^s, dfiment autoris6s & 
cet effet par leurs Gouvernements 
respectifs, 

Sont convenus de ce qui suit: 

Declaration 

Les Puissances signataires du pr6- 
sent accord se sont r^unies 4 Lau- 
sanne pour traiter un des probl&mes 
issus de la guerre avec le plus sincere 
d&sir de contribuer 4 la formation 
d'un ordre nouveau qui permettrait 
l^tablissement et le d<veloppement 
de la confiance entre les peuples dans 
un esprit r6ciproque de rlconcilia- 
tion, de collaboration et de justice. 

Elles ne consid^rent pas que 
Foeuvre r&alis&e & Lausanne, qui doit 
mettre fin compl&tement aux r6para~ 
tions, soit suffisante pour obtenir 
cette paix que souhaitent tous les 
peuples. Mais elles esp&rent que ce 
r^sultat, en Iui-m6me si important et 
qui a exig& de tous un rude effort, 
sera compris et apprci6 par tous les 
^Mments pacifiques de TEurope et 
du monde et qu'il sera suivi d'oeuvres 
nouvelles. 

Ces oeuvres seront d'autant plus 
faciles It r6aliser que les peuples 
soutiendront mieux cette nouvelle 
consecration d'une paix r6elle qui, 
pour gtre complete, doit s'appliquer 
4 la fois & Tordre 6conomique et & 
Tordre politique comme elle doit 
r6pudier tout appel aux armes et 
toute violence. 

Les Puissances signataires du pr6- 
sent accord s'efforceront de r6soudre 
les probl^mes actuellement pos6s ou 
qui se poseront ultrieurement dans 



1 Nos, 238-246, 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 311 



spirit which has inspired the present 
Agreement. 

Article i. The German Govern- 
ment shall deliver to the Bank for 
International Settlements German 
Government 5 per cent redeemable 
bonds, to the amount of three mil- 
Hard reichsmarks gold of the present 
standard of weight and fineness, to 
be negotiated under the following 
arrangements: 

(1) The Bank for International 
Settlements shall hold the bonds as 
trustee. 

(2) The Bonds shall not be nego- 
tiated by the Bank for International 
Settlements before the expiry of 
three years from the signature of the 
present Agreement. Fifteen years 
after the date of the said signature 
the Bonds which the Bank for Inter- 
national Settlements has not been 
able to negotiate shall be cancelled. 

(3) After the above period of 
three years the Bank for Interna- 
tional Settlements shall negotiate 
the Bonds by means of public issues 
on the markets as and when possible, 
in such amounts as it thinks fit, pro- 
vided that no issue shall be made at a 
rate below 90 per cent. 



The German Government shall 
have the right at any time to redeem 
at par, in whole or in part, the Bonds 
not yet issued by the Bank for Inter- 
national Settlements. In determin- 
ing the terms of issue of the Bonds, 
the Bank for International Settle- 
ments shall take into account the 
desirability of giving to the German 
Government the right to redeem the 
Bonds after a reasonable period. 

(4) The Bonds shall carry interest 
at 5 per cent and sinking fund at I 
per cent as from the date on which 
they are negotiated. They shall be 
free of all German taxes, present and 
future. 

(5) The proceeds of the Bonds, as 



le mSme esprit qui a inspir6 cet 
accord. 

Article i. Le Gouvernement alle- 
mand d61ivrera & la Banque des 
Rdglements Internationaux des bons 
du Gouvernement allemand 5 pour 
cent rachetables, pour un montant 
de 3 milliards de reichsmarks-or de la 
valeur, du poids et du titre actuelle- 
ment en vigueur, & n6gocier dans les 
conditions qui suivent: 

(1) La Banque des R&glements 
Inteniationaux d6tiendra les bons 
comme trustee. 

(2) Les bons ne seront pas n6- 
goci6s par la Banque des Rdglements 
Internationaux avant i 'expiration 
d'une pfiriode de trois ans & dater de 
la signature du present accord. 
Quinze ans apr&s la date de cette 
signature les bons qui n'auraient pu 
etre places par la Banque des 
R&glements Internationaux seront 
annu!6s. 

(3) Apr&s Texpiration du d61ai de 
trois ans ci-dessus vis6, la Banque 
des R&glements Internationaux n6- 
gociera les bons par voie demissions 
publiques sur les marches au fur et &. 
rnesure des possibility, en tels mon- 
tants qu'elle jugera opportun, sous 
reserve qu'aucune Emission n'aura 
lieu & un taux inf6rieur & 90 pour 
cent. 

Le Gouvernement allemand aura, 
& tout moment, le droit de racheter au 
pair tout ou partie des bons non en- 
core 6mis par la Banque des R&gle- 
ments Internationaux. En fixantles 
conditions demission des bons, la 
Banque des R&glements Internatio- 
naux devra tenir compte du fait qu'il 
est d6sirable de donner au Gouverne- 
ment allemand le droit de racheter 
les bons 6mis dans un d^lai raison- 
nable. 

(4) Les bons porteront int6rHt & 5 
pour cent avec I pour cent d'amor- 
tissement & partir de la date de leur 
Emission. Us seront exempts de 
tous impdts allemands presents et 
futurs. 

(5) Le produit des bons, au fur et 



July 9. 1932 

and when Issued, shall be placed to a 
special account, the allocation of 
which shall be settled by a further 
agreement in due course between the 
Governments, other than Germany, 
signatory to the present Agreement. 

(6) If any foreign loan is issued by 
the German Government, or with its 
guarantee, at any time after the 
coming into force of the present 
Agreement, the German Govern- 
ment shall offer to apply up to the 
equivalent of one-third of the net 
cash proceeds of the loan raised to 
the purchase of Bonds held by the 
Bank for International Settlements, 
The purchase price shall be such that 
the net yield on the Bonds so pur- 
chased would be the same as the net 
yield of the loan so raised. This para- 
graph does not refer to loans for a 
period of not more than twelve 
months. 

(7) If, after five years from the 
signature of the present Agreement, 
the Bank for International Settle- 
ments considers that the credit of the 
German Government is restored, but 
the quotations of its loans remain 
none the less below the minimum 
price of issue fixed under paragraph 
(3) above, the minimum price may 
be varied by a decision of the Board 
of the Bank for International Settle- 
ments, which decision shall require a 
two-thirds majority. 

Further, at the request of the 
German Government, the rate of 
interest may be reduced below 5 per 
cent if issues can be made at par. 



(8) The Bank for International 
Settlements shall have power to 
settle all questions as to the currency 
and denomination of bonds issued, 
and also all questions as to charges 
and costs of issue, which it shall have 
the right to deduct from the pro- 
ceeds of the issue. In considering 
any questions relating to the issue of 



GERMAN REPARATIONS 



77 



& mesure de leur 6mission, sera plac6 
& un compte special, dont 1'affecta- 
tion sera r6gle par un accord ul- 
t6rieur, le moment venu, entre les 
Gouvernements, autres que FAlle- 
magne, signataires du present Ac- 
cord. 

(6) Au cas oil, i tout moment 
apr6s la mise en vigueur du present 
accord, des emprunts seraient 6mis & 
l'6tranger par le Gouvernernentalle- 
mand, ou avec sa garantie, ledit 
Gouvernement offrira d'appliquer, & 
concurrence d'un tiers, le produitnet 
effectif en esp&ces des emprunts 6mis 
au rachat de bons d6tenus par la 
Banque des R&glements Interna- 
tionaux. Le prix du rachat sera tel 
que le rendement net des bons 
rachet6s soit le m6me que le rende- 
ment net de Temprunt 6mis. Ne 
sont pas vis<es par le present para- 
graphe les avances consenties pour 
une dur^e 6gale ou inf^rieure & un an. 

(7) Si, cinq ann6es <cou!6es aprds 
la signature du present accord, la 
Banque des R^glements Interna- 
tionaux consid^re que le credit du 
Gouvernement allemand est restaur, 
mais si les cours de ses emprunts 
demeurent n6anmois au-dessous du 
prix minimum d Emission fix6 en 
vertu du paragraphs 3 ci-dessus, le 
prix minimum pourra 6tre modifi6 
par une decision du Conseil de la 
Banque des R^glements Interna- 
tionaux prise & une majorit6 des 
deux tiers. 

D'autre part, & la demande du 
Gouvernement allemand, le taux 
d'intrt des bons pourra litre abaiss6 
au-dessous de 5 pour cent si des 
Emissions & un nouveau taux peuvent 
gtre faites au pair. 

(8) La Banque des R&glements 
Internationaux aura le pouvoir de 
r6gler toutes questions relatives & la 
monnaie et aux denominations des 
bons &mis, ainsi que les questions 
relatives aux charges et frais d'<mis- 
sion qu r elle aura le droit de d6duire 
des produits de remission. Pour 
toutes questions relatives 4 remission 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 31 1 



Bonds, the Board of the Bank for 
International Settlements shall take 
the advice of the President of the 
Reichsbank, but decisions may be 
made by a majority vote. 

Art* 2. On its coming into force 
the present Agreement will put to an 
end and be substituted for the 
reparation regime provided for in the 
agreement with Germany, signed at 
The Hague on the 2Oth January, 
1930, and the agreements signed at 
London on the nth August, 1931,* 
and at Berlin on the 6th June, 1932 ; 2 
the obligations resulting from the 
present Agreement will completely 
replace the former obligations of 
Germany comprised in the annuities 
of the "New Plan." 

Art. 3* Consequently, Articles I, 
2 4 5 7 & 9 Md 12 and Annexes I, 
III, IV, V, Va, VI, Via, VII, IX, X 
and Xa of the said agreement with 
Germany are definitely abrogated. 

Art. 4. The Protocol signed at 
London on the nth August, 1931, 
and the Protocol supplementary 
thereto signed at Berlin on the 6th 
June, 1932, are abrogated. Conse- 
quently, the provisional receipts 
handed to the Bank for International 
Settlements by the German Railway 
Company under the said Protocol of 
the nth August, 1931, will be re- 
turned to it. 

Art, 5. The debt certificate of the 
German Government and the certif- 
icate of the German Railway Com- 
pany referred to in Article 7 and in 
Annexes III and IV of the Hague 
Agreement shall, with the coupons 
attached, be returned to the German 
Government and to the German 

Company respectively, 
6. Nothing in the present 
ent alters or affects Article 3 
uidation of the past), Article 6 
far as concerns the corporate 
Ustence of the Bank for Interna- 
jfonal Settlements), or Article 10 
(Immunities of the Bank for Inter- 

1 No. 238a f antesEv. 




des bons, le Conseil d* Administration 
de la Banque des Rfcglements Inter- 
nationaux prendra 1'avis du Prisi- 
dent de la Reichsbank, mais les 
d6cisions seront prises & la majority. 
Art, 2- D6s sa mise en vigueur le 
pr6sent accord mettra fin et se sub- 
stituera au regime des reparations 
pr^vu & 1 'accord avec TAllemagne 
sign& & La Haye le 20 Janvier 1930 
et aux accords sign6s Londres le 
ii aotit 1931 3 et & Berlin le 6 juin 
*93^ 2 les obligations du present ac- 
cord rempla^ant complement les 
obligations ant^rieures de I'AUe- 
magne comprises dans les annuitte 
du "Nouveau Plan", 



Art. 3* En consequence, les Ar- 
ticles i% 2, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9 et 12 ainsi 
que les Annexes I, II I , IV, V, V bis, 
VI, VI Ms, VII, IX, X et X &w de 
1'accord de La Haye avec TAlle- 
magne sont dfifinitivement abrogfis. 

Art. 4. Le Protocole sign6 
Londres le II aoflt 1931 et le Proto- 
cole compl^mentaire sign6 4 Berlin le 
6 juin 1932 sont abrogfe. En cons6-* 
quence, lea re^us provisoires d61ivr6s 
^L la Banque des R^glements Inter- 
nationaux par la Reichsbahngesell- 
schaft en execution du premier 
d*entre eux lui seront restituls. 



Art. 5* Le certificat de dette du 
Gouvernement allemand et le cer- 
tificat de la Reichsbahngeseltechafty 
tous deux vis6s It 1* Article 7 de 
1'accord de La Haye et aux Annexes 
III et IV, ainsi que les coupons 
attaches, seront restitu6s respective- 
ment au Gouvernement allemand et 
& la Reichsbahngesellschaft. 

Art* 6 Rien dans le present ac- 
cord ne modifie ou n'affecte I' Article 
3 (Liquidation du pass6) r Article 6, 
pour autant qull vise la personnalit6 
juridique de la Banque des R^gle- 
ments Internationaux, et FArticle 10 
(Iramunit6a de la Banque des 

2 No. 



July 9, 1932 



GERMAN REPARATIONS 



79 



national Settlements) of the Hague 
Agreement. 

Art. 7. The Signatory Govern- 
ments declare that nothing in the 
present Agreement diminishes or 
varies or shall be deemed to diminish 
or vary the rights of the bondholders 
of the German External Loan, 1924, 
or of the German Government Inter- 
national 5^4 per cent Loan, 1930,* 

Any necessary adaptation of the 
machinery relating to the manner in 
which the obligations of the German 
Government with respect to the Ger- 
man External Loan, 1924, and with 
respect to the German Government 
International s}4 per cent Loan, 
1930, will be discharged will be sub- 
ject to mutual arrangement be- 
tween the German Government, on 
the one hand, and the Bank for Inter- 
national Settlements, Fiscal Agent 
of the Trustees of the German Ex- 
ternal Loan, 1924, and Trustee of the 
German Government International 
55^ per cent Loan, 1930, on the 
other hand. 

Art. 8. The present Agreement 
will, on Its coming into force, be 
notified by the Government of the 
French Republic to the Bank for 
International Settlements with a 
view to the application by the Bank 
of the provisions which affect it; the 
said Government will also inform the 
Bank, for the purposes of its Stat- 
utes, that the "New Plan" is no 
longer in effect. 

Art, 9* Any disputes, whether 
between the Governments signatory 
of the present Agreement, or between 
one or more of those Governments 
and the Bank for International 
Settlements, as to the interpretation 
or application of this Agreement 
shall be referred to the Arbitration 
Tribunal set up under Article 15 of 
the Hague Agreement with Germany. 
The relevant provisions of that Arti- 
cle and of Annex XII of the said 



ments Internationaux) de 1 'accord de 
La Haye. 

Art* 7. Les Gouvernements sig- 
nataires declarent que rien dans le 
present accord ne rMuit, ou ne modi- 
fie, ou ne pourra Otre consid6r6 
comma rMuisant ou modifiant les 
droits des porteurs d 'obligations de 
FEmprunt ext6rieur allemand 1924 
ou de FEmprunt international s}4 
1930 du Gouvernement allemand. 1 

Toute adaptation n6cessaire des 
modalits d'ex6cution des obligations 
du Gouvernement allemand con- 
cemant FEmprunt exttrieur alle- 
mand 1924 et FEmprunt interna- 
tional 5)4 1930 du Gouvernement 
allemand fera Fob jet d'un arrange- 
ment entre ce Gouvernement, d'une 
part, et, d'autre part, la Banque des 
R&glements Internationaux, agent 
financier des trustees de FEmprunt 
ext&rieur allemand 1924 et trustee de 
FEmprunt international 5}4 1930 
du Gouvernement allemand. 



Art. 8. D&s sa mise en vigueur, le 
present accord sera notifi6 par les 
soins du Gouvernement de la R6- 
publique fran^aise & la Banque des 
Rdglements Internationaux en yue 
de Fapplication par cette derni&re 
des dispositions qui la concernent; 
ledit Gouvernernent signifiera 6gale- 
ment &, la Banque des R&glements 
Internationaux, aux fins de ses 
statuts, que le "Nouveau Plan" a 
cess6 d'etre en vigueur. 

Art g. Tout diff6rend, soit entre 
les Gouvernements signataires du 
present accord, soit entre un ou 
plusieurs d 'entre eux et la Banque 
des R^glements Internationaux, au 
sujet de Interpretation et de Fap- 
plication du present accord, sera 
soumis au Tribunal Arbitral con- 
stitu6 en vertu de V Article 15 de 
Faccord de La Haye avec FAlle- 
magne, Toutes dispositions appro- 
prides de cet Article et de F Annexe 



* No. 261, ante. ED. 



So 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 311 



Agreement will for this purpose be 
applicable, 

Art. 10. The present Agreement, 
of which the English and French 
texts are both authentic, shall be 
ratified, and the ratifications shall 
be deposited at Paris. 

The Governments whose seat is 
outside Europe will be entitled 
merely to notify the French Govern- 
ment, through their diplomatic rep- 
resentatives in Paris, that their 
ratification has been given; in that 
case they must transmit the instru- 
ment of ratification as soon as pos- 
sible. 

As soon as the present Agreement 
has been ratified by the Govern- 
ments of Germany, Belgium, France, 
Great Britain and Northern Ireland, 
Italy and Japan, it shall come into 
force between those Governments 
whose ratifications have been de- 
posited or notified at that date. It 
shall come into force in respect of 
every other signatory Government 
on the date of notification or deposit 
of ratification. 

The French Government will 
transmit to all the signatory Govern- 
ments and to the Bank for Inter- 
national Settlements a certified copy 
of the Proems-verbal of the deposit of 
each ratification, and a certified copy 
of each notification. 

Art. ii. The present Agreement 
may be signed at any time up to the 
date on which it first comes into 
force in accordance with Article 10, 
by any Government signatory to the 
Agreement signed at The Hague on 
the 20th January, 1930. 

After that date any of the said 
Governments may accede to the 
present Agreement by means of a 
notification addressed to the Gov- 
ernment of the French Republic, 
which will transmit to the other 
Contracting Governments and to the 
Bank for International Settlements a 
certified copy of such notification. 
In that case the Agreement will come 



XII de 1' accord recevront cet 
effet application. 

Art. 10. Le prdsent accord, dont 
les textes frangais et anglais feront 
6galement foi, sera ratifi6, et le d6pdt 
des ratifications sera fait & Paris, 

Les Gouvernernents qui ont leur 
si&ge hors d'Europe pourront se 
contenter de notifier au Gouveme- 
ment frangais leur ratification par 
leurs repr6sentants diplomatiques & 
Paris; en pareil cas, ils transmettront 
le plus t6t possible rinstrument de 
leur ratification. 

Ds que le present accord aura 
6t6 ratifi6 par les Gouvernements 
d'Allernagne, de Belgique, de France, 
de Grande-Bretagne et de Tlrlande 
du Nord, d'ltalie et du Japon, ii 
entrera en vigueur entre les Gou- 
vernements dont les ratifications 
auront 6t6 d6pos6es ou notifies & 
cette date. II entrera en vigueur 
pour chacun des autres Gouverne- 
rnents signataires & la date de la 
notification ou du d6p6t de sa 
ratification. 

Le Gouvernement fran^ais remet- 
tra 4 tous les Gouvernements signa- 
taires et & la Banque des Rfeglements 
Internatkmaux une copie certififie 
con forme des proc&s-verbaux du 
d6p6t de chaque ratification, ainsi 
que de chaque notification. 

Art. ii. A tout moment avant la 
date de sa mise en vigueur initiate, 
telle qu'elle est pr^vue & F Article io 
le present accord pourra gtre sign! 
par tel des Gouvernements signa- 
taires de Taccord de La Haye avec 
TAllemagne du 20 Janvier 1930, 

Postincrement & cette date, cha* 
cun desdits Gouvernements pourra 
adherer au present accord par voie 
d'une notification faite au Gouverne- 
ment de la R^publique franchise, qui 
communiquera aux autres Gouverne- 
ments contractants et & la Banque 
des R^glements Internationaux copie 
certifi6e conforme de cette notifica- 
tion. En ce cas, Taccord entrera en 



July 9, 1932 GERMAN REPARATIONS 8 1 

into force for the Government con- vigueur, pour le Gouvernement in- 
cerned on the date of such acces- t6ress6, & la date de cette adhesion, 
sion. 

DONE at Lausanne, the 9th day of FAIT & Lausanne, le 9 julllet 1932, 
July, 1932, In a single copy which will en un seul exemplaire qui sera d6- 
remain deposited in the archives of pos6 aux archives du Gouvernement 
the Government of the French Re* de la R&publique frangaise, qui en 
public, which will transmit certified remettra une copie certifi^e con- 
copies to each of the signatory forme & chacun des autres Gouverne- 
Governments. ments signataires. 

[Signed :] For the Belgian Government; RENKIN, PAUL HYMANS, E. FRANC- 
QUI ; for the Government of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and North- 
ern Ireland: J. RAMSAY MACDQNALD, N. CHAMBERLAIN, JOHN SIMON, 
WALTER RUNCIMAN; for the Government of Canada: G. H. FERGUSON; for 
the Government of the Commonwealth of Australia: GRANVILLE RYRIE; for 
the Government of New Zealand: THOMAS M. WILFORD; for the Govern- 
ment of the Union of South Africa: C. T. TE WATER; for the Government of 
India: JOHN SIMON; for the French Government: E. HERRIOT, GERMAIN 
MARTIN, JULIEN DURAND, JOSEPH PAGANON, GEORGES BONNET; for the 
Italian Government: ANTONIO MOSCONI, ALBERTO BENEDUCE; for the 
Japanese Government: SHIGERU YOSHIDA, S. KURIYAMA, J. TSUSHIMA; for 
the Polish Government: AUGUSTE ZALESKI, JAN MROZOWSKI; for the Ger- 
man Government: F. VON PAPEN, C. VON NEURATH, Graf SCHWERIN VON 
KROSIGK, WARMBOLD. 



No. 311a 

Transitional Measures concerning German Reparations. Signed 
at Lausanne, July 9, 1932* 

Mesures de transition relatives aux reparations allemandes. Signes 
3. Lausanne, 9 juiilet 1932, 

EDITOR'S NOTE. The declaration of June 16, 1932, which is referred to in Article i of this 
instrument, provided that " the execution of the payments due to the Powers participating 
in the Conference in respect of reparations and war debts should be reserved during the 
period of the [Lausanne) Conference"; it did not affect the service of market loans however. 
Br* ParL Papers, Misc. No. 7 (1932), Cmd. 4126, p, 3. 

RATIFICATIONS. This instrument was not subject to ratification. 

Entered into force July 9, X932. 1 

Text from publication by the German Ministry for Foreign Affairs. 

The duly authorised representa- Les repr^sentants dflment auto- 
tives of the Governments signatories ris6s des Gouvernements signataires 
of the Agreement concluded this day de 1'accord conclu ce jour avec 1'Alle- 

1 Not registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations (July I, 1937). 



82 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 31 ia 



with Germany have agreed as fol- 
lows: 

Article I. As from to-day's date 
the effects of the Declaration of the 
i6th June, 1932, will be prolonged 
as regards the payments due by 
Germany under the Hague Agree- 
ment of the 2Oth January, 1930, the 
London Protocol of the nth Au- 
gust, 1931, and the Berlin Protocol of 
the 6th June, 1932. 

This prolongation will terminate 
on the coming into force of the 
Agreement with Germany signed to- 
day at Lausanne, or, failing this, 
on any one of the Governments of 
the following countries, Germany, 
Belgium, United Kingdom, France, 
Italy and Japan, notifying the Gov- 
ernments concerned that it has de- 
cided not to ratify. 

Art, 2. Negotiations will be en- 
tered into without delay between the 
German Government and the Bank 
for International Settlements in or- 
der that the arrangements contem- 
plated in Article 7 (2) of the Agree- 
ment with Germany signed to-day 
may be prepared before its coming 
into force. 

Art* 3, As regards the execution, 
by means of deliveries In kind, of 
contracts and works in course of 
execution, a Committee, consisting 
of representatives of the German 
Government and the Governments 
concerned, shall be appointed to 
draw up such proposals as may be 
desirable in regard to such contracts 
and works. 

SIGNED at Lausanne, the 9th day 
of July, 1932. 

For the Belgian Government: RENKIN, PAUL HYMANS, E. FRANCQUI; for 
the Government of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ire- 
land; J. RAMSAY MACDONALD, N. CHAMBERLAIN, JOHN SIMON, WALTER 
RUNCIMAN; for the Government of Canada: G. H. FERGUSON; for the Gov~ 
ernment of the Commonwealth of Australia: GRANVILLE RYRIE; for the 
Government of New Zealand: THOMAS M. WJLFOED; for the Government of 
the Union of South Africa: C T. TE WALTER; for the Government of India: 
JOHN SIMON; for the French Government: E. Herriot, GERMAIN MARTIN, 
JULIEN DURAND, JOSEPH PAGANON, GEORGES BONNET; for the Italian 
Government: ANTONIO MOSCONI, ALBERTO BENEDXJCE; for the Japanese 



magne, sont convenus de ce qui 
suit: 

Article i, A dater de ce jour, les 
effets de la declaration du 16 juin 
1932 seront prorog6s en ce qui con- 
cerne les paiements dus par TAlle- 
magne en vertu de Faccord de La 
Haye du 20 Janvier 1930, du proto- 
cole de Londres du II aoflt 1931 et 
du protocole de Berlin du 6 juin 

1932. 

Cette prorogation prendra fin par 
la mise en vigueur de Taccord avec 
TAllemagne conclu t Lausanne en 
date de ce jour, pu, & d6faut, par une 
declaration notifi6e aux Puissances 
int6ress&es par Tun quelconque des 
six Gouvernements suivants: Alle- 
magne, Belgique, Royaume-Uni, 
France, Italie et Japon, qu'il a d6- 
cid6 de ne pas ratifier. 

Art. 2. Des negotiations seront 
entam6es sans d^lai entre le Gou- 
vernement allemand et la Banque 
des R&glements Internationaux afin 
que les adaptations pr6vues 4 TAr- 
ticle 7 (2) de Taccord avec FAile- 
magne, sign 6 en date de ce jour, 
puissent Stre pr6par6es avant son 
entrfe en vigueur. 

Art. 3. Concernant rex6cution 
au moyen des prestations en nature, 
de contrats et de travaux en cours, 
il sera procM6 & la nomination d'un 
Comlt6 comprenant des repr6sen- 
tants du Gouvernement allemand et 
des Gouvernements intferessfis, Ce 
Comit6 pr6sentera toutes proposi- 
tions utiles relatives & ces contrats et 
& ces travaux, 

SIGN& It Lausanne le 9 juillet 1932. 



July 2, 1932 GERMAN REPARATIONS 83 

Government: SHIGERU YOSHIDA, S. KURIYAMA (ad referendum), J. TSU- 
SHIMA; for the Polish Government: AUGUSTE ZALESKI, JAN MROZOWSKI; 
for the German Government: F. VON PAPBN, C, VON NEURATH, Graf 

SCHWERIN VON KROSIGK, WARMBOLD. 



No. 311b 

Proces-verbal relating to the Ratification of the Agreement concern- 
ing German Reparations. Initialled at Lausanne^ Jtdy 2, 1932. 

Proces-verbal concemant la ratification de PAccord relatif atut repara- 
tions aHemandes. Paraph6 & Lausanne, 2 juillet 1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE. This prods-herbal is frequently referred to as a "Gentlemen's Agree- 
ment." 27 Martens, N.R.G* (sd ser.)> p. 41, The text was communicated to the German 
Chancellor at Lausanne, July 9, 1932. On the previous day, the President of the Lausanne 
Conference had stated, in reply to a question by the German representative, that "in the 
event of any inability to fulfil this [the Lausanne] Agreement and its Annexes, a further 
Conference will be held." The text of the proems-verbal is in English only. 

Text from Br. Parl. Papers, Misc. No. 8 (1932), Cmd. 4129. 

The Lausanne Agreement will not Into full effect. But if no such 

come into final effect until after rati- settlement can be obtained, the 

fication as provided for in the Agree- agreement with Germany will not 

ment. So far as the Creditor Gov- be ratified; a new situation will 

ernments on whose behalf this have arisen and the Governments 

Proces- Verbal is initialled are con- interested will have to consult to- 

cerned, ratification will not be ef- gether as to what should be done, 

fected until a satisfactory settlement In that event, the legal position, as 

has been reached between them and between all the Governments, would 

their own creditors. It will be open revert to that which existed before 

to them to explain the position to the Hoover Moratorium, 

their respective Parliaments, but no The German Government will be 

specific reference to it will appear in notified of this arrangement, 

the text of the agreement with Ger- On behalf of Belgium: j. R. 

many. Subsequently, if a . satis- Qn behalf of Great Britain . N c 

factory settlement about their own Qn behalf of France: E , H . 

debts is reached, the aforesaid Cred- Qn behalf f Jtal A M 
itor Governments will ratify and the 

agreement with Germany will come July 2, 1932* 



84 INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION No. 312 

No. 312 

AUSTRIAN Protocol. Opened for signature at Geneva, Jtily 15, 

1932, 

PROTOCOLE autrichien. Ouvert a la signature a Geneve, 15 

juillet 1932, 

EDITOR'S NOTE. The adoption of an earlier plan for the financial and economic recon- 
struction of Austria led to the signature of three protocols at Geneva, October 4, 1922 (No. 
76, ante). This protocol was approved by the Council of the League of Nations, July 15, 
1932. League of Nations Official Journal, 1932, p. 1280. It is to be noted that the preamble 
incorporates by reference Protocol No. I of October 4, 1922, which was interpreted by the 
Permanent Court of International Justice in an opinion given on September 5, 1931. Publi- 
cations of the Court, Series A/B, No. 41. 

RATIFICATIONS. Ratifications of this protocol were deposited on or before December 31, 
I 93 2 by Austria, France, Great Britain, and Italy; ratifications were later deposited by 
Belgium (September 23, 1933) and the Netherlands (February 20, 1934). 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. The text of this protocol is also published in British Treaty Series, No. 5 
( I 933)i Cmd. 4247; Bundesgesetsblatt, 1933, p. 29; 27 Martens, N.R.G. (3d ser,) p. 643. 

A. Antonucci, La liguidation financiere de la guerre et la reconstruction en Europe central 
(Paris: Giard, 1933), 463 pp.; J. Basdevant, La condition international de VAutriche (Paris: 
Sirey, 1935), 299 pp.; C. Cosoiu, Le rdle de la SociM des Nations en mature d'emprunts d'Etat 
(Paris: Domat-Montchrestien, 1934)* 430 pp.; A. A. Poortenaar, L'muvre de la restauration 
financier e sous les auspices de la SociU& des Nations (Amsterdam, 1933), pp. 118-27. 

Entered into force December 31, 1932.* 

Text from 135 League of Nations Treaty Series, p. 285. 

PREAMBLE PR^AMBULE 

Considering Consid^rant 

That the Government of the Aus- Que le Gouvernement de la R6- 

trian Federal Republic has addressed publique 6d6rale d'Autriche a 

to the League of Nations a request adress6 une demande de secours &. la 

to be assisted in maintaining the Soci6t6 des Nations, & Teffet d'fitre 

work of economic and financial re- aid6&mamtenirl r Geuvrede restaura- 

construction undertaken in conse- tion 6conomique et finanoi&re entre- 

quence of the decision of the Council prise & la suite de la decision du Con- 

of the League of Nations of October seil de la Soci6t6 des Nations du 4 

4th, I922, 2 and of the signature of octobre 1922 2 et de la signature des 

the three Protocols of the same date; trois protocoles de la mUnie date; 

That the Austrian Government Que le Gouvernement autrichien 

reaffirms its intention of meeting affirme 4 nouveau sa volontfi de faire 

punctually all its foreign obligations; face ppnctuellement & toutes ses 

obligations ext^rieures; 

That the Governments of Belgium, Que les Gouvernements de la 

the United Kingdom of Great Brit- Belgique, du Royaume-Uni de 

ain and Northern Ireland, France, Grande-Bretagne et d'Irlande du 

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3118, December 31, 1932. 
* League of Nations Official Journal, 1922, p. 1455.- ED. 



July 15* 1932 

Italy, are ready to grant further as- 
sistance to Austria for this purpose; 

That the above Governments, in- 
cluding the Austrian Government, 
declare that such assistance is given 
on the basis of Protocol No. I signed 
at Geneva on October 4th, 1922, a.nd 
of all the undertakings resulting 
therefrom; the provisions of which 
Protocol are to be considered as here 
reproduced; 

The Governments of Belgium, the 
United Kingdom of Great Britain 
and Northern Ireland, France, Italy, 
the Netherlands, on the one hand, 
and the Government of the Austrian 
Federal Republic, on the other, 

Have by common consent drawn 
up the following provisions: 

Article i In order to assist the 
Austrian Government to borrow a 
sum in foreign currencies, freely and 
immediately ^available, the net 
amount of which shall be equivalent 
to a maximum of approximately 
three hundred million Austrian schill- 
ings, at the present legal gold parity, 
the Governments of Belgium, the 
United Kingdom of Great Britain 
and Northern Ireland, France, Italy, 
the Netherlands, undertake to apply 
without delay for such authority 
as may be required under their 
municipal law to enable them either 
to guarantee, as hereinafter pro- 
vided, the principal and interest of 
part of such loan or to furnish the 
amount to the Austrian Government 
in another manner. In case of an 
issue on their markets, they will 
grant facilities for the issue of the 
amount which they have guaranteed. 

Art. 2. (i) There will be no 
joint guarantee as between the Gov- 
ernments. Each Government shall 
be responsible solely for the share in 
the total operation which it is to 
guarantee or to provide. No guar- 
antor Government will be liable for 
the service or the repayment of a 



AUSTRIAN PROTOCOL 



Nord, de la France, de 1'Italie sont 
prSts & apporter une nouvelle aide 
& TAutriche k cet effet; 

Que les Gouvernements susdits, y 
compris le Gouvernement autrichien, 
d&clarent fonder cette aide sur le 
Protocole N I, sign 6 & Geneve le 4 
octobre 1922, avec tous les engage- 
ments qu'il comporte; Protocole 
dont les dispositions sont consid6- 
r6es comme 6tant reproduites ici; 

Les Gouvernements de la Bel- 
gique, du Royaume-Uni de Grande- 
Bretagne et d'Irlande du Nord, de la 
France, de PItalie, des Pays-Bas, 
d'une part, et le Gouvernement de 
la R&publique frkl^rale d'Autriche, 
d'autre part, 

Ont arr8t6 d'un commun accord 
les dispositions suivantes: 

Article i. Afin de faciliter au 
Gouvernement autrichien Fobten- 
tion & F6tranger d'une sonime en 
monnaies 6trang6res librement et 
imm<diatement disponibles, dont le 
montant net pourra atteindre la 
contre-valeur de trois cents millions 
de schillings autrichiens, calculus 
la parit6-or 16gale actuelle, les Gou- 
vernements de la Belgique, du 
Royaurne-Uni de Grande-Bretagne 
et dlrlande du Nord, de la France, 
de Tltalie, des Pays-Bas, s'engagent 
& demander sans d61ai les autorisa- 
tions exig6es 6ventuellement par leur 
droit interne, soit pour pouvoir 
garantir, dans les conditions ci-apr&s 
denies, en principal ou en int6rgts, 
une part de cet emprunt, soit pour 
en fournir le montant au Gouverne- 
ment autrichien par une autre m6- 
thode. En cas demission sur leur 
marchfe, ils faciliteront remission 
du montant qu'ils auront garanti. 

Art. 2. i) Aucune solidarity ne 
Hera les gouvernements garants. 
L/engagement de chacun d'eux por- 
tera exclusivement sur la part i 
garantir ou 4 fournir par lui sur le 
total de Top6ration. Aucun gou- 
vernement garant ne pourra tre 
actionn^ pour le service ou le rem- 



86 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 312 



bond of the loan not included in the 
portion guaranteed by it. 

As regards the public issues, the 
Austrian Government will prepare 
separate bonds for the portions of 
the loan issued in each country, 
specifically stating which Govern- 
ment is the guarantor. 

The various national issues shall, 
however, form parts of one single 
loan. No discrimination may be 
made by the Austrian Government 
in carrying out its obligations as re- 
gards these different issues of the 
loan. The service and the repay- 
ment of the whole of the loan shall be 
carried out on conditions to be laid 
down in the General Bond, under the 
control of one or more trustees ap- 
pointed by the Council of the League 
of Nations, acting jointly. 1 



(li) The participating Govern- 
ments shall, at the moment of sign- 
ing, state the amounts which they 
undertake to guarantee or to provide, 

(m) The expenses of issue, nego- 
tiation and delivery of each issue 
shall be added to the capital of the 
issue, 

(iv) The loan shall be for a term 
of twenty years. The Austrian Gov* 
emment reserves the right to repay 
the loan before the expiration of that 
period, after ten years, on conditions 
which will be fixed by the Commit- 
tee of Guarantor States at the time 
the operation is concluded. Subject 
to the priorities attached to the Loan 
of 1923-1943, the Relief Credits and 
the 1930 Loan, the system of pledged 
assets by which the 1923-1943 Loan 
is secured shall be made to apply to 
the present loan. The manner in 
which this shall be done shall be set- 
tled in detail in the General Bond. 
The service of the interest and the 



boursement d'un titre de 1'emprunt 
non cornpris dans la tranche garantie 
par lui. 

En ce qui concerne les tranches 
6mises dans le public, le Gouverne- 
ment autrichien sera tenu d'6tablir, 
en representation de chaque tranche 
nationale, des titres distincts por- 
tant nomm^ment la mention du 
gouvernement garant. 

Toutefois, les diff&rentes tranches 
nationales ne constituent que les 
parties d'un seul et m6me emprunt, 
II ne saurait y avoir aucune dis- 
crimination de la part du Gouverne- 
ment autrichien dans 1 'execution de 
ses obligations au titre des diverses 
tranches. Le service et le rembourse- 
ment de Fensenible de Femprunt 
devront &tre effectus dans des condi- 
tions & d6terminer par Fobligation 
g&n6rale entre les mains d f un ou 
plusieurs mandataires d6sign6s par 
le Conseil de la Soci6t6 des Nations, 
et agissant solidairement. 1 

n) Les gouvernements partici- 
pants ddclareront, au moment de 
signer le present protocole, les mon* 
tants qu'ils s'engagent & garantir ou 
i founiir. 

in) Les frais affrents & F&nission, 
4 la nfigociation et & la remise de 
chaque emprunt seront ajout6s au 
capital de cet emprunt. 

iv) L'emprunt sera conclu pour 
vingt annles. Le Gouvernement 
autrichien se reserve la facult de 
rembourser cet emprunt par antici- 
pation, apr&s dix ans aux conditions 
qui seront d^termin^es par le Comit6 
des Etats garants au moment de la 
conclusion de Fop^ration. Abstrac- 
tion faite des rangs de priority at- 
tribu^s & remprunt de 19^3-1943, 
aux credits de rel&vement et & Fem- 
prunt de 1930, le syst&me de gages 
affect^s & Femprunt de 1923-1943 
est 6tendu au present emprunt. Les 
rnodalit^s de cette extension seront 
rgles dans Fobligation gfe^rale, 
Le service des int6rts du present 



1 The trustees were appointed on July 8 r 1933. League of Nations Official Journal, 1933, 
p. looo. ED. 



July 15, 1932 



AUSTRIAN PROTOCOL 



8 7 



repayment of the present loan shall 
be free of all taxes, dues or charges, 
present or future, for the benefit of 
the Austrian State or of any other 
Austrian authority. 

(v) The terms of issue (rates of 
interest, expenses, issue prices, the 
form of guarantee, etc.) shall be 
submitted for approval to the Com- 
mittee of Guarantor States created 
by the Austrian Protocol No. II of 
October 4th, 1922, or to persons ap- 
pointed by that Committee; and any 
reference to the League of Nations 
in the prospectus of issue shall simi- 
larly be approved by the Chairman 
of the Financial Committee. Those 
Governments which have signed the 
present Protocol without being par- 
ties to the Austrian Protocol No. II 
of October 4th, 1922, shall be invited 
to send representatives to the Com- 
mittee of the Guarantor States. 

Art. 3. The proceeds of the oper- 
ation shall be utilised by the Aus- 
trian Government for the objects set 
out in Annex I, in agreement, as the 
case may be, with the representative 
of the League of Nations or the 
Adviser to the National Bank re- 
ferred to in Article 7. 

Art. 4. The Austrian Govern- 
ment undertakes to take the neces- 
sary steps to restore without delay 
and to maintain complete equilibrium 
between the revenue and expenditure 
of the State ; it similarly undertakes 
to take all steps necessary to re- 
establish without delay the financial 
equilibrium of the Austrian State 
Railways and, in particular, to carry 
out the programme of budgetary and 
financial reforms set out in Annex II. 

Art. 5* Austrian monetary policy 
will aim at the abolition as soon as 
possible, subject to the necessary 
safeguards, of the difference between 
the internal and external value of 
the schilling, and, in consequence, 
at the progressive removal of the 
existing control over exchange trans- 



emprunt et son remboursement en 
principal seront exempts de tous 
imp6ts, droits ou charges, presents 
ou futurs, institu6s au profit de 
PEtat autrichien ou de toute autre 
autorit6 autrichienne. 

v) Les conditions de remission 
(taux d'intfirfit, frais, prix d Emission, 
la forme que rev^tira la garantie, etc.) 
seront soumises, pour approbation, 
au Comit6 des Etats garants institu6 
par le Protocole autrichien N II 
du 4 octobre 1922 ou aux personnes 
dsign6es par ce Cpmit6; le president 
du Comit6 financier approuvera de 
mme les termes de toute r6frence 
& la Soci6t6 des Nations dans les 
prospectus demission. Les gouver- 
nements qui ont sign 6 le present 
protocole sans 6tre parties au Proto- 
cole autrichien N II du 4 octobre 
1922 seront invites & envoyer des 
repr<sentants au Comit6 des Etats 
garants. 

Art 3. Le produit de Pop6ration 
sera utilis6 par le Gouvernement 
autrichien aux fins d6finies & Pan- 
nexe I, d 'accord, suivant le cas, 
avec le repr6sentant de la Soci6t6 
des Nations ou le conseiller aupr^s 
de la Banque nationale vis^s & 
Particle 7. 

Art* 4. Le Gouvernement au- 
trichien s'engage prendre les me- 
sures n6cessaires pour r^tablir sans 
d<lai et maintenir un coinplet &qui- 
libre entre les recettes et les d6penses 
de PEtat; il s'engage de m6me & 
prendre toutes les mesures n6ces- 
saires pour r<tablir sans d^lai P6qui- 
libre financier des Chemins de fer 
de PEtat autrichien et, notamment, 
& ex^cuter le programme de reformes 
budg^taires et financi&res arrt6 & 
Pannexe II. 

Art. 5. La politique mon6taire 
de PAutriche se proposera d'abolir, 
dans un d61ai aussi bref que possible 
et sous les sauvegardes n^cessaires, 
P6cart existaxit entre la valeur du 
schilling & Pint&ieur et & P6tranger 
et sera, par consequent, oriente vers 
la suppression progressive du con- 



88 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 312 



actions and the resulting obstruc- 
tions to international trade. 



Art. 6. (i) It is agreed that the 
settlement of the question of the 
Creditanstalt must form part of the 
programme of financial reforms which 
are the object of the present Protocol. 

(n) The Austrian Government 
will take all possible steps without 
delay to conclude an agreement with 
the foreign creditors of the Credit- 
anstalt, This agreement will take 
account of the necessity for avoiding 
excessive pressure on the schilling. 

(in) The Austrian Government 
undertakes to effect a settlement of 
the debt of the Creditanstalt to the 
National Bank and to issue as soon 
as possible one or more internal loans 
of a total amount of not less than 200 
million schillings for the partial 
reimbursement of the debt due by 
the State to the National Bank. 

Art. 7. The Austrian Government 
will request the Council of the League 
of Nations to appoint a representa- 
tive of the League of Nations, and to 
nominate an Adviser to the National 
Bank of Austria, 1 with the object of 
continuing the collaboration con- 
templated in the declarations made 
in September 1931 by the Austrian 
Federal Chancellor and in the pro- 
visions of the present Protocol and 
its Annexes. 

Art. 8. The Committee of Guar- 
antor States shall continue to per- 
form its functions until the loan 
provided for in the present Protocol 
has been entirely repaid. 

Art 9. (i) All decisions to be 
taken by the Council of the League 
of Nations in virtue of the present 
Protocol shall be taken by a majority 
vote. 

(IT) Any dispute as to the interpre- 
tation of the present Protocol shall 



trOleactuellement impose aux opera- 
tions de change et, partunl, des 
entraves aux ^changes internatio- 
naux. 

Art. 6. i) II est convenu quo le 
r&glement de la question de la Credit- 
anstalt doit faire parlie du pro- 
gramme de r6formes rinancieres qui 
font Tobjet du present protocole. 

li) Le Gouvernement autrichien 
fera sans dfilai tous ses efforts pour 
conclure un accord avec les crean- 
ciers etrangers de la Creditanstalt, 
accord qui devra tenir compte de la 
necessity d'eviter qu'une pression 
excessive ne s'exerce sur le schilling. 

nr) Le Gouvernement autrichien 
s'engage & r6gler la dettc de la Credit- 
anstalt envers la Banque nationnle 
et & 6mettre dans un d&lai aussi bref 
que possible un ou plusicurs em- 
prunts int6rieurs dont le procluit 
total ne sera pas inf6rieur & 200 mil- 
lions de schillings et sera affect6 
au remboursement partiel de la dette 
de TEtat & la Banque nationale. 

Art. 7. Le Gouvernement au- 
trichien demandera au Con soil cle la 
Socitfte des Nations de nommer un 
reprc'vsentant de la Soci6te des Na- 
tions et de cosigner un conseiller 
auprtis de la Banque nationale d'Au- 
triche, 1 en vue de continuer la collabo- 
ration envisagfie par les declarations 
que le chancelier fM6ral d'Autriche 
a faites en septernbre 1931, ainsi 
que par les dispositions du present 
protocole et de ses annexes, 

Art 8. Le Comitfi des Etats 
garants continuera 4 exercer ses 
fonctions jusqu'au remboursement 
integral de Pemprunt pr6vu par le 
present protocole. 

Art. 9. i) Toutes les decisions 
que le Conseil de la Sociotfi des 
Nations pourrait avoir & prendre en 
vertu du prfisent protocole seront 
prises & la majorit6 des voix. 

11) Tout diff^rend portant sur 1'in- 
terpr^tation du present protocole sera 



1 On the* appointment of those officials, sec League of Nations Official Journal, 1932, 
p. 1280. On the termination of these posts as from November r, 1936, see idem, 1936, 
p. 1171. Eo. 



July 15, 



AUSTRIAN PROTOCOL 



be settled by the Council by a 
majority vote. 

Art io. (i) The present Protocol, 
of which the English and French 
texts are equally authentic, shall 
remain open to signature by all Gov- 
ernments which desire to accede 
thereto. The Protocol shall be rati- 
fied, and the ratifications shall be 
deposited with the Secretariat of the 
League of Nations. 

(n) The present Protocol shall be 
approved by the Council of the 
League of Nations. It shall enter 
into force as regards the Govern- 
ments which have ratified it as soon 
as the ratifications of Austria, the 
United Kingdom, France and Italy 
have been deposited. In order to 
enable the Protocol to enter into 
force, the ratifications of the above- 
mentioned States must be deposited 
not later than December 3ist, 1932. 
The Protocol shall enter into force 
as regards each of the other signatory 
Governments on the date of deposit 
of that Government's ratification. 

IN FAITH WHEREOF, the under- 
signed, duly authorised, have signed 
the present Protocol. 

Done at Geneva, the fifteenth day 
of July, nineteen hundred and thirty- 
two, in a single copy, which shall be 
deposited at the Secretariat of the 
League of Nations. 



rg!6 par le Conseil statuant & la 
majorit6 des voix. 

Art. 10. i) Le pr6sent protocole, 
dont le texte frangais et le texte 
anglais font figalement foi, restera 
ouvert A la signature de tous les 
gouvernements qui voudront y ad- 
h6rer. Le protocole sera ratifi6, 
et les instruments de ratification 
seront d6posfis au Secr6tariat de la 
Soci6t des Nations. 

n) Le prisent protocole sera ap- 
prouv6 par le Conseil de la Soci6t6 
des Nations. II entrera en vigueur 
pour les gouvernements qui 1'auront 
ratifi6 ds que les instruments de 
ratification de FAutriche, du Roy- 
aume-Uni, de la France et de Tltalie 
auront 6t6 dposs. Pour que le 
pr6sent protocole puisse entrer en 
vigueur, les ratifications des Etats 
ci-dessus mentionn6s devront ^tre 
d6pos6es au plus tard le 31 d<cembre 
1932. II entrera en vigueur pour 
chacun des autres gouvernements 
signataires & la date du d6p6t de la 
ratification, 

EN FOI DE QUOI les soussign^s, 
dfiment autoris^s & cet effet, ont 
sign6 le present protocole. 

Fait & Geneve, le quinze juillet mil 
neuf cent trente-deux, en un seul 
exemplaire, qui sera d6pos6 au 
Secretariat de la Soci6t6 des Nations. 



[Signed:] Austria (Pour le Gouvernement autridbien:), E. PFLtteL; Belgium 
(Pour le Gouvernement beige: Cinq millons de schillings autrichiens,), JULES LE 
JEUNE DE M toss ACH; United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern 
Ireland (For the Government of Great Britain and Northern Ireland: One hundred 
million [100,000,000] schillings), JOHN SlMON; France (Pour le Gouvernement de 
la R^publique fran^aise et en me r6f6rant & la declaration faite par moi au Conseil le 
15 juillet 1932: Cent millions [100,000.000] de schillings. R. M.)> R* MASSIGLT; 
Italy (Pour le Gouvernement d'ltalie: Trente millions [30.000.000] de schillings), 
VlTTQWQ SCIALOJA; The Netherlands (Pour le Gouvernement des Pays-Bas: 
Trois millions de schillings autrichiens), W. DOUDE VAN TROOSTWIJK. [The pro- 
tocol was signed on behalf of Czechoslovakia on January 20, 1934, for four million 
Austrian schillings.] 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 312 



ANNEX I 

UTILISATION OP THE PROCEEDS OF THE 

OPERATION PROVIDED FOR BY THE 

PROTOCOL 

1. The proceeds in foreign exchange 
shall be credited to a special account or 
accounts as directed by the Austrian 
Government in agreement with the repre- 
sentative of the League of Nations. 

2. The advance of 100 million schillings 
made by the Bank of England to the 
Austrian Government shall be repaid out 
of the proceeds of the loan. 

3. The Austrian Government shall sell 
the remaining foreign exchange to the 
Austrian National Bank on conditions to 
be fixed in agreement with the representa- 
tive of the League of Nations. 

4. The use to be made of the foreign 
exchange thus sold by the Austrian Gov- 
ernment to the Austrian National Bank 
shall be decided in agreement with the 
Adviser to the Bank. 

5. The amount in schillings resulting 
from such sales shall be credited to a 
special account of the Austrian Govern- 
ment at the National Bank; this amount 
in schillings- with the exception, if neces- 
sary, of a sum to be determined in agree- 
ment with the representative of the 
League of Nations shall be used to repay 
part of the internal floating debt of the 
State and of the Railways, on condition 
that the creditors who thus obtain repay- 
ment shall simultaneously reduce their 
indebtedness to the Austrian National 
Bank by corresponding amounts. The 
Government may only draw on the sums 
standing to the credit of this account in 
agreement with the representative of the 
League of Nations. 



ANNEXE I 

UTILISATION DU PRODUIT DBS OPERATIONS 
PR&VTJBS PAR LE PROTOCOLE 

1 . Le produit en devises 6trangeres sera 
verse" au credit d'un ou plusieurs comptes 
sp6ciaux suivant les^ instructions du 
Gouvernement autrichien donnfe? avec 
1'accord du repr&sentant de la Social 6 
des Nations. 

2. L'avance de 100 millions cle schil- 
lings, consentie par la Banque d'Angle- 
terre au Gouvernement autrichien, sera 
remboursee sur le produit de Top6ration, 

3. Le Gouvernement autrichien vcndra 
& la Banque nationale d'Autriche le re- 
liquat des devises e'trangeres dans des 
conditions qui seront fix6es d'accord avec 
le repre"sentant cle la Soci&te' des Nations. 

4. L'utilisation des devises 6trangeres 
que le Gouvernement autrichien aura ainsi 
vendues a la Banque nationale d'Autriche 
sera dtermin6e en accord avec le con- 
seiller aupr&s de la Banque. 

5. La contre-valeur en schillings sera 
port6e au credit d'un compte special ou- 
vert par la Banque nationale au Gouverne- 
ment autrichien; sauf, dventuellcmcnt, un 
montant a determiner d'accord avec le 
repr6sentant cle la Soci6t6 des Nations, 
ces schillings serviront au rembourcemcnt 
d'une partie de la dette flottante inte'rieure 
de I'Etat et des Chemins de fer, et ce, 
a la condition que les cr6anciers, ainsi 
rembourseX r6duisent en m$me temps et 
pour un montant Equivalent, leur dettc 
envers la Banque nationale d'Autriche. 
Le Gouvernement ne pourra disposer des 
sommes inscrites a ce compte qu'en accord 
avec le reprfeentant de la Socit des 
Nations. 



ANNEX II 

PROGRAMME OF BUDGETARY AND 
FINANCIAL REFORMS 

i. In conformity with the declaration 
made before the Financial Committee by 
the Austrian Chancellor in September 
I93i>* the Austrian Government will take 
every step necessary to restore without 
delay and to maintain equilibrium be- 
tween its revenue and expenditure. 

In order to ensure the application of Aim d'assurer Implication cle ce prin- 
this principle from 1932 onwards, further cipe dfcs 1932, de nou voiles Economies 
* See League of Nations Official Journal, 1931, p. 2408. ED. 



ANNEXE II 
PROGRAMME BE RJ-CFORMBS BUDGET AIRES 

ET FlNANCI&RKS 

I. Conformenient a la declaration que 
le Chancelier de la Confederation au- 
trichienne a faite en septembre 1931 de- 
vant le comlte" financier, 3 - le Gouvernement 
autrichien prendra toutes mesures n6ces- 
saires pour re"tablir sans d6Iai et pour 
niaintenir r6quilibre de ses recettcs et ses 



July 15, 1932 



AUSTRIAN PROTOCOL 



permanent economies sufficient to secure 
the balancing of the budget for the current 
financial year, estimated on the basis of 
present figures at: 45 million schillings, 
must be made during the second half of 
the current year, in addition to those 
provided for in the supplementary budget 
which has been submitted to the Council 
of Ministers. 

In view of the special circumstances 
and having regard to the arrangements 
contemplated in Annex I for reducing the 
short-term debt of the State, the roo- 
million-schilling surplus provided in the 
present budget for the repayment of short- 
term obligations may be applied to cur- 
rent needs such as the deficit on the 
Railways. 

2, The Austrian Government under- 
takes to carry out without delay the 
general programme of economies and re- 
organisation contained in the report of 
Dr. Herold, the railway expert who was 
entrusted with the enquiry into the ad- 
ministration and policy of the Railway 
system, in conformity with the declara- 
tion made by the Chancellor last Septem- 
ber. 

An expert appointed by the Council of 
the League of Nations shall be invited by 
the Austrian Government to decide to 
what extent the capital outlays ("Investi- 
tionen") of the Railways are really indis- 
pensable and to what extent they could , in 
view of the present financial difficulties, 
be postponed. 

3* All borrowing operations of the 
Austrian State, whether external or in- 
ternal (other than those under the stand- 
ing authority to issue Treasury Bills up to 
75 million schillings), remain subject to 
the approval of the Committee of Guar- 
antor States. The Austrian State Rail- 
ways shall for this purpose be regarded as 
a part of the Austrian State and shall not 
be authorised to contract any loan unless 
the Minister of Finance certifies that the 
approval of the Committee of Guarantor 
States has been duly obtained. 



As regards contracts on a credit basis 
for supplies or works which involve a 
substantial charge on future budgets, in- 
cluding the budget of the Railways, the 
representative of the League of Nations 
shall determine whether these operations 
present an exceptional character warrant- 



durables, suffisantes pour pbtenir l'qui- 
libre du budget de Fexercice courant et 
dont le montant sur la base des chiffres 
actuels est 6valu6 a. 45 millions de schil- 
lings, devront tre realisees pendant le 
second semestre de Fannee cpurante, in- 
dependamment des economies preVues 
par le budget supplementaire, qui a 6t6 
soumis au Conseil des ministres. 

Vu les circonstances speaales et compte 
tenu des arrangements envisages & 1 'an- 
nexe I pour la reduction de la dette 4 
court ternie de 1'Etat, la marge de 100 
millions de schillings qui avait 6t6 
rn6nag6e dans le present budget en vue du 
remboursement des obligations 4 court 
terme, pourra 8tre aflectee a des besoins 
courants tels que la couverture du deficit 
des Chemins de fer. 

2. Le Gouvernement autrichien s'en- 
gage a mettre a execution sans delai le 
programme general d 'economies et de 
reorganisation contenu dans le rapport du 
D r Herold, Fexpert ferroviaire qui a 6t6 
charg6 de proceder a une enqueue sur 
1 'administration et la politique des 
chemins de fer, conformement a la decla- 
ration faite par le chancelier en septembre 
dernier. 

tin expert design^ par le Conseil de la 
Societ6 des Nations sera invit& par le 
Gouvernement autrichien a d6terminer 
dans quelle mesure les d6penses d'eta- 
blissement ("Investitionen") des chemins 
de fer sont reellement indispensables et 
dans quelle mesure elles pourraient @tre 
ajournees, 6tant donn6 les difficult6s 
fmancieres du moment. 

3. Toutes les operations d'emprunt de 
1'Etat autrichien, tant exterieures qu'in- 
teiieures (a 1'exception des op6rations 
visees par 1'autorisation permanente 
d'emettre des bons du Tresor jusqu'& con- 
currence de 75 millions de schillings) 
demeurent subordonnees a Fapprobation 
du Comit6 des Etats garants, Les chemins 
de fer de 1'Etat autrichien seront & cet 
eflfet consid&res comme faisant partie de 
1'Etat autrichien et ne devront tee 
autorises a contracter aucun emprunt que 
si le ministre des Finances certifie que 
I'op^ration a 6t^ dument approuvee par 
le Comit6 des Etats garants. 

En ce qui concerne les marches & credit 
de fournitures ou de travaux comportant 
une charge importante pour les budgets 
futurs, y compris les budgets des chemins 
de fer, le repr6sentant de la Societ6 des 
Nations jugera si ces operations pr6sen- 
tent un caractere exceptionnel justifiant 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 312 



ing recourse to the procedure provided for 
in the preceding paragraph. 

Having regard to the provisions of 
Annex I, no issue of Treasury Bills or 
other similar short-term operation shall be 
carried out by the Austrian Government 
on the home market unless the prior con- 
sent of the representative of the League 
has been given, 

4. In conformity with the declaration 
of the Chancellor made last September, 
the Austrian Government will use its ex- 
isting powers in order to secure that the 
budgets of the "Lander" and of the Com- 
munes are balanced. It will come to an 
agreement with these local authorities 
with a view to obtaining such extension of 
its powers of control as may be necessary, 
particularly as regards borrowing; all such 
borrowing operations must in future be 
approved by the Austrian Government, 
which will give its consent on the motion 
of the Minister of Finance after previous 
consultation with the National Bank and 
the representative of the League of 
Nations. 

5. Every proposed credit operation, 
either by a private individual or by a 
public or private corporation, which in- 
volves foreign indebtedness of more than 
one million schillings, must be brought to 
the knowledge of the Austrian National 
Bank before being carried out. 

6. The Austrian Government will revise 
the general legislation on banks in con- 
formity with the September declaration, 

7. In conformity with the declaration 
made in September, and in view of the 
responsibility assumed by the Austrian 
Government in regard to the Creditan- 
stalt, the Government will take the neces- 
sary steps to secure a reduction in the 
administrative expenses of that bank and 
of the other banks operating in Austria. 



le recours a la procedure prevue <\ 
1'alinea pr6c6dent. 

Vu les dispositions cle {'annexe I Io 
Gouvernement autrichien ne procederu <\ 
aucune emission de bons du Trcsor ni ;\ 
d'autres operations analogues a court 
terme sur le marche mterieur sans s'etro 
assurd au prealable Fassentiment du repre- 
sentant de la Societ6 des Nations. 

4. Conforniement a la declaration faite 
en septembre dernier par le chancelier, le 
Gouvernement autrichien fera usage des 
pouvoirs qu'il possede pour assurer 
requilibre ties budgets des "Lander" et 
des communes. II conclura avec cos 
autorites locales un arrangement en vue 
de toute extension de ses pouvoirs de 
contrCle qui pourra 8tre nccessaire, not am- 
ment en ce qui concerne les emprunts; 
toutes ces operations d'emprunt devront 
& 1'avenir toe approuvees par le Gouverne- 
ment autrichien, qui donnera son assenli- 
nient sur la proposition du ministre des 
Finances, qui aura consult^ au prealable 
la Banque nationale et le reprfeentant de 
la Society des Nations. 

5. Toute opdration de credit projetee, 
soit par un particulier, soit par une per- 
sonne morale de droit public ou de droit 
prive, devra, avant d'etre rcalisee, etre 
portee a la connaissance de la Banque 
nationale d'Autriche, si elle comport e 
vis-tVvis de I f 6tranger un endettement 
sup6rieur a un million de schillings. 

6. Le Gouvernement revisera la legisla- 
tion generale sur les banquesconform6ment 
a la declaration faite en septembre dernier. 

7. Conform6ment & la declaration faite 
en septembre dernier, le gouvernement , 
6tant donn6 la responsabilit6 <iu*il a 
assumee pour la Creditanstalt, prendra les 
mesures necessaires pour obtenir une 
reduction des frais gn6raux de cette 
banque et des autres banquos travaillant 
en Autriche. 



ANNEX III 

LEAGUE OF NATIONS REPRESENTATIVE 
AND BANK ADVISER 



i. The representative of the League of 
Nations and the Adviser to the Austrian 
National Bank appointed under Article 7 
of the Protocol shall carry out the func- 
tions assigned to them in the present 
Protocol and its Annexes, They shall be 
responsible to the Council and removable 
by it 



ANNEXE III 

REPRllSBNTANT DE LA SocrtT DES NA- 
TIONS ET CONSEILLE& AUPR&S DE LA 
BANQUE 

i. Le reprsentant de la Soci6t6 des 
Nations et le conseiller aupres de la 
Banque nationale d'Autriche, nommes 
aux termes de 1 'article 7 du ptotocole, 
s'acquitteront des fonctions qui leur sont 
attributes par le present protocole et ses 
annexes. Ils seront responsables vis-a- 
vis du Conseil et revocables par lui 



July 15, 1932 



AUSTRIAN PROTOCOL 



93 



2. The Austrian Government under- 
takes to collaborate with the representa- 
tive of the League of Nations with regard 
to the execution of the programme of 
reforms contained in the declaration of 
September 1931 and in the present Proto- 
col, and further to furnish him with all 
the information which he may require for 
the execution of his mission, 

3. The representative of the League of 
Nations will report to the League of 
Nations every three months on the execu- 
tion of the programme of reforms* He 
will further address supplementary reports 
to the League of Nations whenever he 
thinks it desirable to bring any fact as a 
matter of urgency to the knowledge of the 
League. 

4. The provisions concerning the func- 
tions of the Adviser, which formerly con- 
stituted Articles 124 to 129 of the Statutes 
of the Austrian National Bank as enacted 
by the Federal Law of November I4th, 
1922 ("Bundesgcsetzblatt" No. 823), 
shall be re-incorporated in the Statutes, 
except that the words "Commissioner- 
General of the League of Nations*' shall 
be replaced by the words ** Council of the 
League of Nations", 

5. The representative of the League of 
Nations shall provide himself with the 
necessary staff. His expenses and those 
of his office shall be approved by the 
Council and defrayed by Austria. The 
representative of the League of Nations 
shall enjoy diplomatic privileges; he and 
his staff shall enjoy fiscal immunities. 

6. The Adviser to the Austrian Na- 
tional Bank shall enjoy fiscal immunities. 

7. If the Austrian Government consid- 
ers that the representative of the League 
of Nations, or the Adviser to the National 
Bank, has abused his authority, it may 
appeal to the Council of the League of 
Nations. 

8. The Council shall terminate the 
appointment of the representative of the 
League of Nations and of the Adviser to 
the Bank when it decides that their 
services are no longer required. 1 

9. The Council shall have the right, if it 
considers it necessary having regard to the 
financial situation, to reappoint the repre- 
sentative of the League of Nations or the 
Bank Adviser, or both; but such a measure 



2. Le Gouvernement autrichien s'en- 
gage a collaborer avec le repr6sentant de 
la Societ6 des Nations en ce qui concerne 
Pexecution du programme de reformes 
contenu dans la declaration faite en 
septembre 1931 et dans le present proto- 
cole; il s'engage, en outre, a fournir & ce 
repr6sentant toutes les informations dont il 
pourra avoir besom pour remplir sa mission. 

3. Le representant de la Soclet des 
Nations adressera tous les trois mois un 
rapport la Societ6 des Nations sur Tap- 
plication du programme de reformes, II 
adressera, en outre, & la Societe, des 
Nations des rapports supplementaires 
chaque fois qu'il jugera utile de porter 
d'urgence un fait a la connaissance de 
cette derniere. 

4. Les dispositions concernant les fonc- 
tions du conseiller qui constituaient au- 
trefois les articles 124 jusqu'a 129 des 
Statuts de la Banque nationale autri- 
chienne tels qu'ils etaient arr&tes par la loi 
fed6rale du 14 novembre 1922 ("Bundes- 
gesetzblatt" n 823), seront reincorporees 
a ces Statuts, sauf toutefois qu'aux mots 
"Commissaire general de la Society des 
Nations" il faudra substituer les mots 
"Conseil de la Societ6 des Nations". 

5 % Le representant de la Societ& des 
Nations s'adjoindra le personnel neces- 
saire. Ces depenses, ainsi que celles de 
son service, seront approuvees par le 
Conseil et seront & la charge de FAutriche. 
Le representant de la Societ6 des Nations 
jouira des privileges diplomatiques ; il 
jouira en outre de rimmunit6 fiscale, 
ainsi que son personnel. 

6. Le conseiller auprds de la Banque 
nationale d'Autriche jouira de I'immunit6 
fiscale. 

7. Si le Gouvernement autrichien es- 
time que le repr6sentant de la Societ6 des 
Nations ou le conseiller aupres de la 
Banque nationale ont abuse, de leur 
autorit^, il pourra adresser un recours au 
Conseil de la Spciet6 des Nations. 

8. Le Conseil mettra fin aux fonctions 
du representant de la Societe. des Nations et 
du conseiller aupres de la Banque lorsqu'il 
jugera qu'il n'est plus necessaire de con- 
server les services de ces fonctionnaires, * 

9. Le Conseil aura le droit, s'il le juge 
n6cessaire, en egard a la situation finan- 
ciere, de retablir les fonctions, soit du 
repr6sentant de la Societe. des Nations, 
soit du conseiller aupres de la Banque, soit 
de ces deux fonctionnaires; toutefois, une 



may only be taken if the funds borrowed 

i By a resolution of the Council of September 25, 1936, these posts were terminated as from 
November i, 1936. League of Nations Official Journal, 1936, p. 1171. ED. 



94 INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION No. 313 

either in virtue of the present Protocol or telle mesure ne pourra tre prise que si les 

through the Guaranteed Loan of 1923- fonds emprunte's, soit en vertu du present 

1943 have not been entirely repaid. protocole, soit au moyen de 1'emprunt 

garanti 1923-1943, n'ont pas et6 intgrale- 

ment rembourses. 

10. After the termination of the ap- 10. Apres la cessation des fonctions du 

pointment of the representative of the reprsentant de la Societe des Nations, un 

League of Nations, contact shall be main- contact sera maintenu entre le Gouverne- 

tained between the Austrian Government mentautrichienetrOrgamsationfinanci&re 

and the Financial Organisation of the de la Societe" des Nations, en ce sens que 

League of Nations by the preparation and 1'Organisation financi&re de la Soci6t6 des 

publication of periodical statements on Nations preparera priodiquement et 

Austrian public finances by the Financial publiera des releves de la situation des 

Organisation of the League of Nations, finances publiques autrichiennes. Le 

The Austrian Government agrees to send Gouvernement autrichien convient d'en- 

a Treasury representative to discuss the voyer un repre*sentant du Ministere des 

statements so prepared with the Financial Finances pour discuter les relev6s ainsi 

Organisation. pr6par6s avec 1'Organisation financire. 



No. 313 

CONVENTION for the Lowering of Economic Barriers. Signed at 

Geneva, July 18, 1932. 

CONVENTION pour Fabaissement des barrieres economiques. 
Signee a Geneve, 18 juillet 1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE. This convention, commonly known as the "Ouchy Convention," was 
opened for the accession of all states. It is in line with recommendations made by the World 
Economic Conference of 1927. League of Nations Document, C.356.M. 129.1927. II, pp. 
39-43. See also the commercial convention of March 24, 1930 (No. 248, ante), and the con- 
vention of economic rapprochement of December 22, 1930 (No. 279, ante). 

RATIFICATIONS. On January I, 1937, no ratification of this convention had been de- 
posited at The Hague. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. H. Bech, "Ouchy-konventionen," 3 Nor disk Tidsskrift for international 
Ret (1932), pp. 212-15; H. V. Hodson, "The Belgo-Dutch Convention," Survey of Inter- 
national Affairs, 1932, pp. 34-40; J. Hostie, "Du libre echange & la rationalisation des 
echanges," 25 Revue iconomigue inter nationale (1933), II, pp. 219-58; S. de Meeus, "La clause 
de la nation la plus favoris6e et la crise economique," 25 idem (1933), IV, pp. 61-80; J. A. 
Nederbragt, " Autour de la Convention d'Ouchy," Grotius Annuaire ipjj, pp. 55-92; Anon., 
"La convention belgo-hollandaise d'Ouchy et la clause de la nation la plus favorisee," 3 
Affaires etrangeres (1933), pp. 490-5. 

Not entered into force (January i, 1937). 

Text supplied by the Netherlands Ministry for Foreign Affairs; translation from U. S. 
Treaty Information Bulletin, No. 37. 

[Translation] 

His Majesty the King of the Bel- Sa Majest6 le Roi des Beiges, Son 
gians, Her Royal Highness the Altesse Royale la Grande-Duchesse 



July 1 8, 1932 OUCHY CONVENTION ON ECONOMIC BARRIERS 



95 



Grand Duchess of Luxembourg and 
Her Majesty the Queen of the 
Netherlands, 

Taking their inspiration from the 
resolutions of the Assembly of the 
League of Nations and the concor- 
dant recommendations of the best 
qualified economic experts as to the 
necessity for ameliorating the re- 
gime of production and exchanges 
and expanding markets ; 

Convinced that economic activity 
is seriously endangered by the more 
and more numerous obstacles en- 
countered by international com- 
merce; 

Considering that it is urgent that 
the states renounce a policy which 
is injurious both to their private in- 
terest and the general interest; 

Persuaded that the progressive 
realization of a greater liberty of ex- 
changes is one of the essential con- 
ditions for the restoration of world 
prosperity; 

Desirous of undertaking in this 
sense a concerted action, in which all 
states will have the privilege of par- 
ticipating, and of contributing, by 
this means, to the correction of the 
general economic situation ; 

Have resolved to conclude a con- 
vention for the lowering of economic 
barriers and to this end have desig- 
nated as their Plenipotentiaries the 
following, namely: 1 

His Majesty the King of the Bel- 
gians, Paul Hymans ; 

Her Royal Highness the Grand 
Duchess of Luxembourg, Joseph 
Bech; 

Her Majesty the Queen of the 
Netherlands, Frans Beelaerts van 
Blokland; 

Who, after having communicated 
to each other their full powers, found 
in good and due form, have agreed 
upon the following articles: 

Article I. The High Contracting 
Parties undertake, in their reciprocal 
relations, not to make any increases 



de Luxembourg et Sa Majest6 la 
Reine des Pays-Bas, 

S'inspirant des resolutions de TAs- 
semblee de la Societ< des Nations et 
des recommandations concordantes 
des experts 6conomiques les plus 
qualifies sur la n6cessit6 d'amliorer 
le regime de la production et des 
^changes et d'elargir les marches; 

Convaincus que Tactivit6 6co- 
nomique est gravement mise en peril 
par les obstacles de plus en plus 
nombreux que rencontre le com- 
merce international ; 

Consid6rant qu'il est urgent que 
les Etats renoncent a une politique 
nuisible aussi bien a leur int6rgt 
particulier qu'a rint<rt g6n6ral; 

Persuades que la realisation pro- 
gressive d'une plus grande Hbert6 des 
echanges est Tune des conditions es- 
sentielles du r6tablissement de la 
prosp6rit6 mondiale; 

D6sireux d'entreprendre dans ce 
sens une action concertee, a laquelle 
tous les Etats auront la facult de 
participer, et de contribuer, par ce 
moyen, au redressement de la situa- 
tion 6conomique gn6rale; 

Ont r6solu de conclure une conven- 
tion pour 1'abaissement des barrieres 
6conomiques et ont d6sign6 a cette 
fin pour Leurs P16nipotentiaires, 
savoir : l 

Sa Majest6 le Roi des Beiges, 
Paul Hymans; 

Son Altesse Royale la Grande- 
Duchesse de Luxembourg, Joseph 
Bech; 

Sa Majest6 la Reine des Pays-Bas, 
Frans Beelaerts van Blokland ; 

lesquels, apres s'gtre communiqu6 
leurs pleins pouvoirs, trouv6s en 
bonne et due forme, sont convenus 
des articles suivants: 

Article i. Les Hautes Parties 
Contractantes s'engagent a ne pro- 
c6der, dans leurs relations r6ci- 



1 The titles of plenipotentiaries are omitted. ED. 



9 6 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 313 



in customs duties above the level of 
the duties existing at the date of the 
signature of the present convention, 
nor establish any duties not existing 
on that date. 

The High Contracting Parties 
agree not to make any increase of a 
protective character in their customs 
duties nor establish any new pro- 
tective duties with respect to the 
merchandise of third states to which 
they are bound by commercial con- 
ventions, unless in the case that the 
said states, by a new increase of the 
customs barriers or of obstacles to 
commerce, should cause grave prej- 
udice to the High Contracting 
Parties. 

Art. 2. The High Contracting 
Parties undertake to reduce pro- 
gressively, in their reciprocal rela- 
tions, their customs duties in accord- 
ance with the following provisions. 

The customs duties shall be re- 
duced at the moment of the putting 
into effect of the present convention 
by 10 per cent of the rate existing on 
the date of the signature of the pres- 
ent convention; the reduction shall 
be carried one year afterward to 20 
per cent of such rate, two years after- 
ward to 30 per cent, three years after- 
ward to 40 per cent, and four years 
afterward to 50 per cent of such rate. 

The customs duties shall not be 
reduced below 50 per cent of the rate 
existing on the date of the signature 
of the present convention, nor below 
a level corresponding to 4 per cent 
ad valorem for semimanufactures 
and 8 per cent ad valorem for fin- 
ished manufactures. 

Art. 3. The High Contracting 
Parties undertake not to apply 
among themselves any new prohi- 
bition or restriction on importation 
or exportation or any new regulatory 
measure which would have the effect 
of hindering their reciprocal ex- 
changes. 



proques, & des augmentations des 
droits de douane au-dessus du niveau 
des droits existants la date de la 
signature de la prsente Convention, 
ou I'^tablissement de droits non 
existants & la date de ce jour. 

Les Hautes Parties Contractantes 
conviennent de ne proc<der aucune 
augmentation de caract&re protec- 
teur de leurs droits de douane ni 
aucun 6tablissement de droits pro- 
tecteurs nouveaux i l'6gard des 
marchandises d'Etats tiers auxquels 
elles sont lies par des conventions 
commerciales, si ce n'est dans le cas 
ou ces Etats, par un nouvel accroisse- 
ment des barri^res douanires ou 
d'entraves au commerce, causeraient 
un grave prejudice aux Hautes Par- 
ties Contractantes. 

Art. 2. Les Hautes Parties Con- 
tractantes s'engagent r6duire pro- 
gressivement, dans leurs relations 
r6ciproques, leurs droits de douane 
conform^ment aux dispositions sui- 
vantes. 

Les droits de douane seront rduits 
au moment de la mise en vigueur de 
la presente Convention de 10% du 
taux existant 4 la date de la signature 
de la pr6sente Convention ; la rduc- 
tion sera porte un an aprds & 20% 
de ce taux, deux ans apr^s & 30%, 
trois ans aprs & 40%, et quatre ans 
apr&s 50% de ce taux. 



Les droits de douane ne devront 
pas tre r<duits au-dessous de 50% 
du taux existant & la date de la signa- 
ture de la pr<sente Convention, ni au- 
dessous d'un niveau correspondant 
4% ad valorem pour les produits 
demi~ouvr<s et 8% ad valorem pour 
les produits enti&rement ouvr6s. 

Art. 3. Les Hautes Parties Con- 
tractantes s'engagent n'appliquer 
entre elles aucune nouvelle prohibi- 
tion ou restriction & Timportation ou 
& Texportation ou aucune nouvelle 
mesure de rglementation qui aurait 
pour effet d'entraver leurs ^changes 
r6ciproques. 



July 1 8, 1932 OUCHY CONVENTION ON ECONOMIC BARRIERS 



97 



They reserve the right, however, 
to note exceptions to this principle, 
for the reasons enumerated below 
and in so far as the said prohibitions 
or restrictions are applicable at the 
same time to all other countries 
which are in the same conditions: 

1. Prohibitions or restrictions 
relating to public safety; 

2. Prohibitions or restrictions 
enacted for moral or humanitarian 
reasons ; 

3. Prohibitions or restrictions 
concerning traffic in arms, am- 
munition and war material, or un- 
der exceptional circumstances, in 
other war supplies; 

4. Prohibitions or restrictions 
enacted with a view to protecting 
the public health or providing for 
the food supply of the people, as 
well as the protection of animals or 
plants against the danger of com- 
plete destruction, diseases, injuri- 
ous insects and injurious parasites; 

5. Prohibitions or restrictions 
on exportation having as their ob- 
ject the protection of the national 
artistic, historical or archeological 
patrimony; 

6. Prohibitions or restrictions 
applicable to gold, silver, specie, 
paper money and securities, with 
the exception of measures of con- 
trol of exchange; 

7. Prohibitions or restrictions 
the object of which is the extension 
to foreign products of the r6gime 
established for similar national 
products, with reference to produc- 
tion, commerce, transportation 
and commerce; 

8. Prohibitions or restrictions 
applied to products which consti- 
tute or shall constitute, as far as 
production or commerce is con- 
cerned, the subject of state monop- 
olies or monopolies exercised under 
the control of the state; 

9. Prohibitions or restrictions 
the object of which is to protect 



Elles se reservent toutefois le 
droit d'apporter des exceptions & ce 
principe, pour les raisons ci-apres 
enumerees et pour autant que ces 
prohibitions ou restrictions soient 
en m^me temps applicables tous les 
autres pays se trouvant dans les 
mmes conditions : 

1. prohibitions pu restrictions 
relatives & la securit6 publique; 

2. prohibitions ou restrictions 
6dict6es pour des raisons morales 
ou humanitaires ; 

3. prohibitions ou restrictions 
concernant le trafic des armes, des 
munitions et du materiel de guerre, 
ou, dans des circonstances excep- 
tionnelles, de tous autres appro vi- 
sionnernents de guerre; 

4. prohibitions ou restrictions 
edictles en vue de proteger la 
sant publique ou d 'assurer Tali- 
mentation populaire, ainsi que la 
protection des animaux ou des 
plantes contre le danger d'une de- 
struction complete, les maladies, les 
insectes et les parasites nuisibles; 

5. prohibitions ou restrictions 
& Fexportation ayant pour but la 
protection du patrimoine national 
artistique, historique ou archeo- 
logique; 

6. prohibitions ou restrictions 
applicables 1'or, Targent, aux 
especes, au papier-monnaie et aux 
titres, & Texception des mesures 
de contrdle des devises; 

7. prohibitions ou restrictions 
ayant pour but d'6tendre aux 
produits 6trangers le regime 6tabli 
pour les produits nationaux simi- 
laires, en ce qui concerae la pro- 
duction, le commerce, le transport 
et la consommation ; 

8. prohibitions ou restrictions 
appliqu6es & des produits qui font 
ou feront, en ce qui concerne la 
production ou le commerce, Tobjet 
de monopoles d'Etat ou de mono- 
poles exerces sous le contrdle de 
1'Etat; 

9. prohibitions ou restrictions 
ayant pour but de proteger le droit 



9 8 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 313 



the property right on the results of 
scientific works. 

On the other hand, in case the ex- 
changes between the High Contract- 
ing Parties should be gravely dis- 
turbed by abnormal circumstances, 
each of the parties shall have the 
privilege of limiting its importations 
or its exportations, on the condition, 
however, of determining a contin- 
gent which, in principle, and except 
in exceptional cases, can not be less 
than 100 per cent of the average of 
the quantities imported or exported 
during normal years. 

The High Contracting Parties un- 
dertake to eliminate as soon as cir- 
cumstances shall permit, in their 
reciprocal relations, prohibitive, re- 
strictive, or regulatory measures 
existing at the date of the signature 
of the present convention, with reser- 
vation of the exceptions indicated 
above. 

Art. 4. In order to facilitate as 
much as possible the application of 
the present convention, the High 
Contracting Parties reserve the right 
to require certificates of origin or of 
destination upon importation or ex- 
portation. They will come to an 
understanding beforehand on the 
modalities of the regime which they 
shall institute in this respect. 

With the same object, they shall 
reach an agreement with a view to 
the adoption of a common customs 
nomenclature. 

Art. 5. The High Contracting 
Parties undertake to apply to their 
reciprocal exchanges the uncondi- 
tional and unlimited regime of the 
most favored nation. 

Art. 6. If a difference should arise 
between two or more of the High 
Contracting Parties on the subject 
of the interpretation or application 
of the present convention and if the 
parties involved should not succeed 
in settling it among themselves by 
diplomatic means, the question shall 



de propri6t6 sur les resultats de 
travaux scientifiques. 

D'autre part, au cas oil les 
^changes entre les Hautes Parties 
Contractantes seraient gravement 
troubles par des circonstances anor- 
males, chacune des Parties aura la 
facult6 de limiter ses importations 
ou ses exportations, la condition 
toutefois de fixer un contingent qui, 
en principe, et sauf dans des cas 
exceptionnels, ne pourra tre inf<- 
rieur 100% de la moyenne des 
quantit^s importes ou export6es 
pendant les annes nor males. 

Les Hautes Parties Contractantes 
s'engagent & faire disparaitre, aussi- 
t6t que les circonstances le per- 
mettront, dans leurs relations r6~ 
ciproques, les mesures de prohibition, 
de restriction ou de r6glementation 
existant la date de la signature 
de la pr6sente Convention, sous r<- 
serve des exceptions indiqu<es ci- 
dessus. 

Art 4. Pour faciliter autant que 
possible Tapplication de la prsente 
Convention les Hautes Parties Con- 
tractantes se r6servent d'exiger & 
Timportation ou Texportation des 
certificats d'origine ou de destination. 
Elles s'entendront au pr^alable sur 
les modalit6s du regime qu f elles 
institueront & cet 6gard. 

Dans le mme but, elles se mettront 
d 'accord en vue de Tadoption d'une 
nomenclature douanire commune. 

Art 5. Les Hautes Parties Con- 
tractantes s'engagent appliquer 
leurs ^changes r6ciproques le regime 
inconditionnel et illimit6 de la nation 
la plus favoris6e. 

Art 6. Si un diff&rend surgissait 
entre deux ou plusieurs des Hautes 
Parties Contractantes au sujet de 
Interpretation ou de Tapplication de 
la pr6sente Convention et si les 
Parties en cause ne r6ussissaient pas 
4 le r6gler entre elles par la voie 
diplomatique, la question sera sou- 



July 18, 1932 OUCHY CONVENTION ON ECONOMIC BARRIERS 



99 



be submitted at the instance of one 
of the interested parties for an opin- 
ion by a permanent committee of 
experts to be established by the 
High Contracting Parties. 

If the party concerned should be 
unable to agree to this opinion or if 
the committee should be unable to 
render a unanimous opinion, the 
difference shall be submitted to the 
Permanent Court of International 
Justice. 

Art. 7. The present convention is 
concluded for a period of five years. 

Six months before the expiration 
of the said period, each of the High 
Contracting Parties will have the 
right to notify the Government of 
the Netherlands of its intention 
to denounce the convention. The 
Government of the Netherlands shall 
give notice thereof to the other High 
Contracting Parties, who may not 
have denounced it. 

For the High Contracting Parties 
who have not denounced the con- 
vention, the latter shall remain in 
force on the same conditions for an- 
other period of one year, and so on 
from year to year. 

In case of denunciation after the 
first period of five years, the proce- 
dure contemplated in the second 
paragraph shall likewise be followed. 

Art. 8. Any other state shall have 
the privilege of adhering to the pres- 
ent convention on an equal footing 
with the signatory states. 

The state which desires to adhere 
thereto shall give notice of its inten- 
tion by an act which shall be depos- 
ited in the archives of the Govern- 
ment of the Netherlands. The latter 
shall send a certified true copy 
thereof by diplomatic channels to 
each of the High Contracting Parties. 

As long as the other states, with- 
out adhering to the convention, shall 
nevertheless observe, in fact, the pro- 
visions, they shall be admitted to the 
benefit of the conventional regime. 

Art. 9. The present convention 



mise pour avis a la diligence d'une 
des Parties int6ress6es a un Comit6 
permanent d 'experts a cr6er par les 
Hautes Parties Contractantes. 

Si la Partie interess6e ne pouvait se 
conformer a cet avis ou si le Comit6 
ne pouvait rendre un avis unanime, 
le diff6rend sera soumis a la Cour 
permanente de Justice Internationale. 



Art. 7. La presente Convention 
est conclue pour une dure de cinq 
annes. 

Six mois avant Pexpiration de 
cette p^riode, chacune des Hautes 
Parties Contractantes aura le droit 
de notifier au Gouvernement des 
Pays-Bas son intention de d6noncer 
la Convention. Le Gouvernement 
des Pays-Bas en informera les autres 
Hautes Parties Contractantes, qui 
n'auraient pas d6nonc. 

Pour les Hautes Parties Contrac- 
tantes, qui n'ont pas d6nonce la Con- 
vention, celle-ci restera en vigueur, 
aux mSmes conditions, pour une 
nouvelle periode d'une anne, et 
ainsi de suite d'ann6e en anne. 

Dans le cas de d6nonciation aprs 
la fin de la premiere periode de cinq 
ann6es, la procedure pr6vue au se- 
cond alina sera 6galement suivie. 

Art. 8. Tout Etat tiers aura la 
facult^ d 'adherer a la presente Con- 
vention, sur un pied d'<galit avec 
les Etats signataires. 

L'Etat qui desire y adherer noti- 
fiera son intention par un acte 
qui sera dpos6 dans les archives 
du Gouvernement des Pays-Bas. 
Celui-ci en enverra une copie, certi- 
fie conforme, par la voie diplo- 
matique a chacune des Hautes Par- 
ties Contractantes. 

Aussi longtemps que les Etats 
tiers, sans adherer a la Convention, 
en observeraient cependant, en fait, 
les dispositions, ils seront admis au 
b6n6fice du regime conventionnel. 

Art. g. La presente Convention 



IOO 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 313 



shall be ratified. The instruments 
of ratification shall be deposited with 
the Government of the Netherlands. 
It will become effective 15 days after 
two of the High Contracting Parties 
shall have deposited their instru- 
ments of ratification. 

Art. 10. At the time of the signa- 
ture of the present convention or of 
the deposit of the instruments of 
ratification, each High Contracting 
Party may declare that it does not 
bind itself except for its territories in 
Europe. 

The High Contracting Party which 
avails itself of this privilege, has the 
right to declare subsequently to the 
Government of the Netherlands that 
it desires to have the convention 
extended to its overseas territories, 
colonies or mandated territories. 
The latter Government shall trans- 
mit such declaration immediately to 
the other High Contracting Parties. 
The convention shall become effec- 
tive with reference to the overseas 
territories, colonies or mandated ter- 
ritories, 15 days after the transmis- 
sion of the above declaration by the 
Government of the Netherlands. 

The High Contracting Party 
which has made this declaration has 
likewise the right to declare subse- 
quently that it desires to have the 
effects of the convention cease for 
the territories in question. In this 
case, such denunciation shall be made 
six months before the expiration of 
the current annual period. 

IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the 

above-named plenipotentiaries have 
signed the present convention and 
have thereunto affixed their seals. 

Done at Geneva, July 18, 1932, in 
a single copy, which shall be de- 
posited in the archives of the Gov- 
ernment of the Netherlands and of 
which a certified true copy shall be 
sent by diplomatic channels to each 
of the High Contracting Parties. 



sera ratifie. Les instruments de 
ratification seront dpos6s aupr&s du 
Gouvernement des Pays-Bas. Elle 
entrera en vigueur quinze jours aprs 
que deux des Hautes Parties Con- 
tractantes auront d6pos< leurs in- 
struments de ratification. 

Art. 10. Lors de la signature de 
la pr6sente Convention ou du d6p6t 
des instruments de ratification, 
chaque Haute Partie Contractante 
peut d6clarer qu'elle ne se lie que 
pour ses territoires en Europe. 

La Haute Partie Contractante qui 
fait usage de cette facult<, a le droit 
de declarer ult6rieurement au Gou- 
vernement des Pays-Bas qu'elle d- 
sire voir tendre la Convention & ses 
territoires d'outre-mer, colonies ou 
territoires sous mandat. Ce Gou- 
vernement transmettra cette d6cla- 
ration imm^diatement aux autres 
Hautes Parties Contractantes. La 
Convention entrera en vigueur pour 
ce qui concerne les territoires d'outre- 
mer, colonies ou territoires sous 
mandat, quinze jours aprds la trans- 
mission de la declaration susvise par 
le Gouvernement des Pays-Bas. 

La Haute Partie Contractante qui 
a fait cette declaration, a 6galement 
le droit de declarer ult6rieurement 
qu'elle desire voir cesser les effets de 
la Convention pour les territoires en 
cause. Dans ce cas, cette d<noncia- 
tion devra tre faite six mois avant 
1'expiration de la priode annuelle en 
cours. 

EN FOI DE QUOI, les Plnipoten- 
tiaires susnomm6s ont sign6 la pr- 
sente Convention et y ont appos6 
leurs cachets. 

Fait & Gen&ve, le 18 juillet 1932, 
en un seul exemplaire, qui sera 
dpos6 dans les archives du Gou- 
vernement des Pays-Bas et dont une 
copie, certifie'e conforme, sera remise 
par la voie diplomatique & chacune 
des Hautes Parties Contractantes. 



[Signed :] For Belgium : (In signing the present convention I declare that the 
Belgian Government binds itself only for the Belgian territory in Europe.), PAUL 



July 1 8, 1932 OUCHY CONVENTION ON ECONOMIC BARRIERS 



101 



H YMANS ; for Luxembourg : BECH ; for the Netherlands : (In signing the pres- 
ent convention I declare that the Government of the Netherlands binds itself only for 
the Kingdom in Europe.), BEELAERTS VAN BLOKLAND. 



No. 313a 



Protocol to the Convention for the Lowering of Economic Barriers. 
Signed at Geneva, July 18, 1932. 

Protocole de la Convention pour Pabaissement des barrieres econo- 
rniques. Signe a Geneve, 18 juillet 1932. 

[Translation] 

Ad Articles i and 2. i. Notwith- 
standing the provisions of articles I 
and 2, each High Contracting Party 
retains the right to increase, for fiscal 
reasons, its tariff duties applicable to 
goods not produced on its territory. 
Subject to the favorable opinion of 
the committee of experts contem- 
plated in article 6, it has, moreover, 
the option, in exceptional circum- 
stances, of taking any other customs 
measure of a fiscal character which 
may appear necessary to it. In case 
the committee should not render a 
favorable opinion on this subject, the 
party in question could denounce the 
present convention upon giving pre- 
vious notice of three months. 

2. The High Contracting Parties 
retain the option of adapting their 
customs tariff to any changes which 
may take place in industrial tech- 
nique, it being understood that the 
new duties which would thus be 
established shall follow the general 
regime of the present convention. 

3. In case one of the High Con- 
tracting Parties should denounce one 
of its commercial treaties, it has the 
option, if need be, of restoring the 
duty to the rate provided in the 
autonomous tariff, with respect to 
the titles of its customs tariff on 
which it has agreed to reductions. 
However, if it avails itself of this 
option, it must apply to this rate the 
reductions which should have been 



Ad articles i et 2. i. Nonobstant 
les dispositions des articles i et 2, 
chaque Haute Partie Contractante 
garde le droit de majorer, pour des 
raisons fiscales, les droits de son tarif 
affrents a des marchandises non 
produites sur son territoire. Sous 
reserve de 1'avis favorable du Comit 
d 'experts prevu a 1'article 6, elle a, en 
outre, la faculty, dans des circon- 
stances exceptionnelles, de prendre 
toute autre mesure douaniere de 
caractere fiscal qui lui paraitrait 
ncessaire. Au cas ou le Comit6 ne 
rendrait pas a ce sujet un avis favo- 
rable, la Partie en cause pourrait 
d^noncer la pr<sente Convention, 
moyennant un preavis de trois mois. 

2. Les Hautes Parties Contrac- 
tantes garden t la facult6 d 'adapter 
leur tarif douanier aux modifications 
qui pourraient intervenir dans la 
technique industrielle, 6tant entendu 
que les nouveaux droits qui seraient 
ainsi institu<s suivront le regime 
g6n6ral de la pr6sente Convention. 

3. Au cas ou une des Hautes 
Parties Contractantes viendrait a 
d6noncer un de ses trait6s de com- 
merce, elle a la facult6, le cas che- 
ant, de ramener, pour les rubriques 
de son tarif douanier sur lesquelles 
elle a consent! des reductions, le 
droit au taux prevu dans le tarif 
autonome. Toutefois si elle fait 
usage de cette facult<, elle devra 
apporter a ce taux les reductions qui 



IO2 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 



made in accordance with the present 
convention if, at the moment of the 
signature of this act, the duty in 
force had been that of the autono- 
mous tariff. 

Ad Art. 2. i. It is to be under- 
stood that whenever there is an 
internal duty in force, the rates of 
reduction of the duty shall be calcu- 
lated, as a rule, on the difference 
existing between the entry duty and 
the internal duty. 

2. The High Contracting Parties 
shall determine, as rapidly as possible 
and before the putting into effect of 
the present convention, the products 
which, in the meaning of the said 
convention, must be considered as 
raw materials, semimanufactures or 
manufactures. 

3. When the tariff listing is spe- 
cific, the ad valorem percentages 
treated of in paragraph 3 of article 2 
must be understood as of the inci- 
dence of the duties applicable to the 
titles such as they exist in the cus- 
toms tariff of the party concerned at 
the date of the signature of the pres- 
ent convention. As soon as the 
High Contracting Parties shall have 
adopted the common customs no- 
menclature treated of in article 4 the 
ad valorem percentages just spoken 
of must be understood as of the inci- 
dence of the duties applicable to the 
titles such as they shall be estab- 
lished in this common nomenclature. 

4. In each country and in so far as 
specific duties are involved, the an- 
nual rate of reduction of 10 per cent 
of the amount of the basic duties 
may be diminished by the rate of the 
rise in the wholesale price index exist- 
ing in the said country, or inversely 
should be increased by the rate of 
reduction of the said index. More- 
over each state, in case of variation 
in values, retains the privilege of 
adjusting the specific duties of its 
tariff to the incidences contemplated 
in paragraph 3. 



auraient dfi tre faites conform&tnent 
la prsente Convention si, au 
moment de la signature de cet acte, 
le droit en vigueur avait 6t celui du 
tarif autonome, 

Ad art. 2. I. II doit tre entendu 
que chaque fois qu'il existe un droit 
intrieur, les taux de reduction du 
droit se calculeront en principe sur 
la difference existant entre le droit 
d'entre et le droit int6rieur. 

2. Les Hautes Parties Contrac- 
tantes dtermineront, le plus rapide- 
ment possible et avant la mise en 
vigueur de la pr6sente Convention, 
les produits qui, au sens de ladite 
Convention, doivent Stre consid6rs 
comme mati&res premieres, produits 
demi-ouvr6s ou produits enticement 
ouvrs. 

3. Lorsque la tarification est sp- 
cifique, les pourcentages ad valorem 
dont il est question dans le para- 
graphe 3 de Tart. 2, doivent s'en- 
tendre de Tincidence des droits 
aff brents aux rubriques telles qu'elles 
existent dans le tarif douanier de la 
Partie int6resse la date de la signa- 
ture de la pr6sente Convention. 
Aussit6t que les Hautes Parties Con- 
tractantes auront adopt6 la nomen- 
clature douani&re commune, dont il 
est question & Tart. 4, les pourcentages 
ad valorem dont il vient d'dtre par!6 
devront s 'entendre de 1'incidence des 
droits aff6rents aux rubriques telles 
qu'elles seront 6tablies dans cette 
nomenclature commune. 

4. Dans chaque pays et pour au- 
tant qu'il s'agisse de droits sp6ci- 
fiques, le taux annuel de reduction 
de 10% du montant des droits de base 
pourra tre diminu6 du taux d'16va~ 
tion de 1'indice des prix de gros 
existant dans ce pays, ou inverse- 
ment devra 6tre augment^ du taux 
de diminution de cet indice. En 
outre, chaque Etat, en cas de varia- 
tion des valeurs, garde la facult 
d'ajuster les droits sp6cifiques de 
son tarif aux incidences pr6vues & 
l'alina 3. 



July 1 8, 1932 OUCHY CONVENTION ON ECONOMIC BARRIERS 



103 



5. The High Contracting Parties 
shall determine, as soon as possible 
and before the putting into effect of 
the present convention, the mini- 
mum rates below which the duties 
applicable to agricultural products 
must not be reduced. 

6. The High Contracting Parties 
shall come to an agreement, as 
rapidly as possible and before the 
putting into effect of the present con- 
vention, on the products to which, by 
reason of exceptional circumstances, 
the said convention can not be 
applied except with certain delays 
and with certain reservations. 

Ad Art. 3. i. The expression 
" regulatory measure " which ap- 
pears in the first and last paragraphs 
of article 3 contemplates especially 
the control of bills of exchange. 

2. The expression " abnormal cir- 
cumstance" which appears in the 
next to the last paragraph of article 
3 contemplates especially: 

(a) The case in which the currency 
of one of the contracting countries 
should depreciate without the level 
of prices existing in that country 
adjusting itself to the new currency 
rates; 

(&) The case in which prohibitive 
or restrictive measures should have 
the effect of turning certain com- 
mercial currents toward the market 
of one of the High Contracting Par- 
ties and thus increase the importa- 
tions on that market to an abnormal 
and dangerous degree. 

IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the pleni- 
potentiaries have signed the present 
protocol. 

Done at Geneva, July 18, 1932. 



5. Les Hautes Parties Contrac- 
tantes d6termineront, le plus rapide- 
ment possible et avant la mise en 
vigueur de la pr6sente Convention, 
les taux minima en-dessous desquels 
ne devront pas tre r6duits les droits 
afferents aux produits agricoles. 

6. Les Hautes Parties Contrac- 
tantes se mettront d'accord, le plus 
rapidement possible et avant la mise 
en vigueur de la pr^sente Conven- 
tion, sur les produits auxquels, a 
raison de circonstances exception- 
nelles, ladite Convention ne pourrait 
s'appliquer qu'avec certains dlais et 
sous certaines reserves. 

Ad art. 3. i. L'expression "me- 
sure de rglementation " qui figure au 
premier et au dernier paragraphes de 
Tarticle 3 vise notamment le con- 
trdle des devises. 

2 . L 'expression ' ' circonstance anor- 
male" qui figure a 1'avant dernier 
paragraphe de Tar tide 3 vise notam- 
ment: 

a. le cas oft la monnaie d'un pays 
contractant viendrait a se d6pr6cier 
sans que le niveau des prix existant 
dans ce pays s'ajuste au nouveau 
taux de la monnaie; 

b. le cas oil des mesures de prohibi- 
tion ou de restriction auraient pour 
effet de d6tourner certains courants 
commerciaux vers le march6 d'une 
des Hautes Parties Contractantes et 
ainsi d'augmenter les importations 
sur ce march.6 dans une mesure 
anormale et dangereuse. 

EN FOI DE QUOI, les P16nipoten- 
tiaires ont sign6 le present Protocole. 

Fait a Gen&ve, le 18 juillet 1932. 



[Signed:] For Belgium: PAUL HYMANS; for Luxembourg: BECH; for the 
Netherlands: BEELAERTS VAN BLOKXAND. 



In signing the protocol annexed to the 
international convention for the lowering 
of economic barriers, we declare that, in 
the interval between the signature and 
the putting into effect of the said conven- 
tion, during which period the commit- 



En signant le Protocole annex6 i la 
Convention internationale pour 1'abaisse- 
ment des barrieres 6conomiques, nous 
declarons que, dans rintervalle entre la 
signature et Tentr6e en vigueur de ladite 
Convention, p&riode pendant laquelle le 



104 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 



tee contemplated in article 6 will not 
yet exist, the Belgian-Luxembourg Eco- 
nomic Union will consider itself free to 
take, if necessary, any customs measures 
of a fiscal character, as is provided for in 
the second sentence of the first paragraph 
ad articles i and 2. 
Geneva, July 18, 1932. 

PAUL HYMANS 
BECH 

In signing the protocol annexed to the 
international convention for the lowering 
of economic barriers, signed on this date at 
Geneva, I declare that, between the signa- 
ture and the putting into effect of the said 
convention, during which period the com- 
mittee contemplated in article 6 will not 
exist, my Government will consider itself 
free to take, if necessary, the measures 
provided for in the second sentence ad 
articles i and 2 of the protocol. 

Geneva, July 18, 1932. 

BEELAERTS VAN BLOKLAND 



Comit6 preVu 1'article 6 n'existera pas 
encore, 1'Union e'conomique belgo- 
luxembourgeoise se considerera libre de 
prendre eVentuellement toutes mesures 
douanieres de caractere fiscal, ainsi qu'il 
est prevu a la deuxieme phrase du premier 
paragraphe ad articles r et 2. 
Geneve, le 18 juillet 1932. 

PAUL HYMANS 
BECH 

En signant le protocole annex6 la 
convention internationale pour 1'abaisse- 
ment des barri&res economiques, sign6e & 
la date de ce jour & Geneve, je declare 
que, entre la signature et^ Tentr6e en 
vigueur de ladite convention, p<riode 
pendant laquelle le comit< pr6vu a Tarticle 
6 n'existera pas encore, mon gouverne- 
ment se consid6rera libre de prendre 
eVentuellement les mesures prvues a la 
seconde phrase ad art. i et 2 du protocole. 

Geneve, le 18 juillet 1932. 

BEELAERTS VAN BLOKLAND 



No. 313b 

Declaration annexed to the Convention for the Lowering of Economic 
Barriers. Signed at Geneva, July 18, 1932. 

Declaration annexee a la Convention pour Pabaissement des bar- 
rieres economiques. Signee a Geneve, 18 juillet 1932. 



[Translation] 

The High Contracting Parties re- 
serve the privilege of reducing among 
themselves pursuant to private ac- 
cords, open to all states, their entry 
duties on certain goods, .in accord- 
ance with other modalities than those 
provided in article 2 of the present 
convention. Such reductions would 
be extended to all other states who 
have adhered to the private accords 
in question, whether or not they are 
parties to the present convention. 

DONE at Geneva, July 18, 1932. 



Les Hautes Parties Contractantes 
se r6servent la facult6 de r<duire 
entre elles & la suite d 'accords par- 
ticuliers, ouverts 4 tous les Etats, 
leurs droits d'entr6e sur certaines 
marchandises, suivant d'autres 
modalits que celles pr6vues & Parti- 
cle 2 de la pr6sente Convention. 
Ces reductions seraient 6tendues i 
tous Etats tiers qui ont adh6r aux 
accords particuliers dont il s'agit, 
qu'ils soient ou non Parties & la 
pr6sente Convention. 

FAIT i Geneve, le 18 juillet 1932. 



[Signed:] For Belgium: PAUL HYMANS; for Luxembourg; BECH; for the 
Netherlands: BEELAERTS VAN BLOKLAND. 



Aug. 3, 1932 DECLARATION BY AMERICAN STATES 

No. 314 



105 



DECLARATION by American States. Signed at Washington, 

August 3, 1932. 

DECLARACION por Estados Americanos. Firmada en Washington, 

3 de agosto de 1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE. This declaration was signed as a telegram to the Governments of Bolivia 
and Paraguay, parties to the Chaco dispute, on the suggestion of the neutral members of a 
commission of conciliation created under a protocol of January 3, 1929. It was frequently 
referred to in the course of later efforts to end the Chaco War, and it was recognized by 
Bolivia and Paraguay in the protocol signed at Buenos Aires on June 12, 1935. League of 
Nations Official Journal, 1935, p. 901. The basic principle of the declaration had been 
adopted by the Assembly of the League of Nations in its resolution of March n, 1932. 
Idem, Special Supplement No. 101, p. 87. This principle was also incorporated in Article 3 
of the anti-war treaty of October 10, 1933 (No. 346, post) and in Article II of the convention 
on rights and duties of states, of December 26, 1933 (No. 361, post), and the declaration was 
mentioned in the League of Nations Assembly recommendation of July 4, 1936. Records of 
the Sixteenth Assembly, Plenary Meetings, Part II, p. 65. 

RATIFICATIONS. This declaration was not subject to ratification. 



Entered into force August 3, IQ32. 1 

Text and translation from Press Releases of the United States Department 
of State, No. 149, pp. 98, 100. 



[Translation] 

The representatives of all the 
American Republics, meeting in 
Washington, the seat of the Neutral 
Commission, having been duly au- 
thorized by their respective Govern- 
ments, have the honor to make the 
following declaration to the Govern- 
ments of Bolivia and Paraguay: 

"Respect for law is a tradition 
among the American nations, who 
are opposed to force and renounce it 
both for the solution of their con- 
troversies and as an instrument of 
national policy in their reciprocal 
relations. They have long been the 
proponents of the doctrine that the 
arrangement of all disputes and con- 
flicts of whatever nature or origin 
that may arise between them can 
only be sought by peaceful means. 
The history of the American nations 



Los Representantes de todas las 
Repiiblicas Americanas, reunidos en 
Washington en donde reside la 
Comisi6n de Neutrales, habiendo 
sido debidamente autorizados por 
sus respectivos Gobiernos, tienen el 
honor de hacer la siguiente declara- 
ci6n a los Gobiernos de Bolivia y 
Paraguay: 

"El respeto al derecho es una 
tradici6n entre las naciones ameri- 
canas, las cuales se oponen a la 
fuerza y renuncian a ella tanto para 
la soluci6n de sus controversias 
cuanto para utilizarla comp un in- 
strumento de politica nacional en 
sus relaciones recfprocas. Ellas ban 
sido por mucho tiempo los lideres de 
la doctrina de que el arreglo de todas 
las disputas y conflictos de cualquier 
naturaleza u origen que se puedan 
suscitar entre ellas, s61o sera pro- 



1 Not registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations (July I, 1937)- 



106 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 314 



shows that all their boundary and 
territorial controversies have been 
arranged by such means. There- 
fore, the nations of America declare 
that the Chaco dispute is susceptible 
of a peaceful solution, and they 
earnestly request Bolivia and Para- 
guay to submit immediately the 
solution of this controversy to an 
arrangement by arbitration or by 
such other peaceful means as may 
be acceptable to both. 



"As regards the responsibilities 
which may arise from the various 
encounters which have occurred 
from June 15 to date, they consider 
that the countries in conflict should 
present to the Neutral Commission 
all the documentation which they 
may consider pertinent, and which 
will be examined by it. They do not 
doubt that the country which this 
investigation shows to be the aggres- 
sor will desire to give satisfaction to 
the one attacked, thus eliminating 
all misunderstanding between them. 

"They furthermore invite the 
Governments of Bolivia and Para- 
guay to make a solemn declaration to 
the effect that they will stop the 
movement of troops in the disputed 
territory, which should clear up the 
atmosphere and make easy the road 
to the solution of good understanding 
which America hopes for in the name 
of the permanent interests of all the 
countries of this hemisphere. 

"The American nations further 
declare that they will not recognize 
any territorial arrangement of this 
controversy which has not been ob- 
tained by peaceful means nor the 
validity of territorial acquisitions 
which may be obtained through oc- 
cupation or conquest by force of 
arms." 



curado por medios pacificos. La 
historia de las naciones americanas 
demuestra que todas sus controver- 
sias territoriales y de limites ban sido 
arregladas por tales medios. Por 
esto, las naciones de America de- 
claran que la disputa del Chaco es 
susceptible de una soluci6n pacifica 
y piden encarecidamente a Bolivia y 
Paraguay que sometan inmediata- 
mente la de esta controversia a un 
arreglo por arbitraje u otro medio 
amistoso que fuere aceptable para 
ambos. 

" En cuanto a las responsabilidades 
que puedan derivarse de los diversos 
encuentros ocurridos desde el 15 de 
Junio hasta la fecha, consideran que 
los paises en conflicto deberian 
presentar a la Comisi6n de Neutrales 
toda la documentation que con- 
cepttien pertinente, la cual seria 
examinada por ella. No dudan de 
que, el pais que de esa investigation 
resulte agresor, habrd de querer dar 
satisfacci6n al agredido, elimin&n- 
dose asi toda desavenencia entre 
ellos. 

"Invitan, ademds, a los Gobiernos 
de Bolivia y Paraguay a hacer una 
declaration solemne en el sentido de 
paralizar movimientos de tropas en 
el territorio disputado, lo cual sere- 
narfa el ambiente y haria fdcil el 
camino a la soluci6n de concordia 
que America espera en nombre de los 
intereses permanentes de todos los 
paises de este hemisferio. 

"Las naciones de America de- 
claran tambi<n que no reconocer&n 
arreglo territorial alguno de esta 
controversia que no sea obtenido por 
medios pacificos ni la validez de 
adquisiciones territoriales que sean 
obtenidas mediante ocupacI6n o 
conquista por la fuerza de las armas." 



[Signed:] FRANCIS WHITE, for the Secretary of State of the United 
States; FABIO LOZANO T., Minister of Colombia; Josfe RICHLING, Charg6 
d 'Affaires of Uruguay; Josi T. BAR6N, Charg d'Affaires of Cuba; P. 
HERRERA DE HUERTA, Charg6 d'Affaires of Mexico; M. DE FREYRE Y S., 



Sept. 2, 1932 TRANSPORT OF GOODS BY RAIL IO7 

Ambassador of Peru; R. DE LIMA E SILVA, Ambassador of Brazil; FELIPE A. 
ESPIL, Ambassador of Argentina; MIGUEL CRUCHAGA, Ambassador of Chile; 
ADRIAN RECINOS, Minister of Guatemala; PEDRO M. ARCAYA, Minister of 
Venezuela; DANTES BELLEGARDE, Minister of Haiti; ROBERTO DESPRADEL, 
Minister of the Dominican Republic; C&LEO DAviLA, Minister of Honduras; 
GONZALO ZALDUMBIDE, Minister of Ecuador; HORATIO F. ALFARO, Minister 
of Panama; Luis M. DEBAYLE, Charg d 'Affaires of Nicaragua; MANUEL 
GONZALEZ-ZELEDON, Charg& d'Affaires of Costa Rica; ROBERTO D. MELEN- 
DEZ, Special Representative of the Republic of El Salvador in the Board of 
Directors of the Pan American Union. 



No. 315 

ADDITIONAL ACT to the Convention of October 23, 1924, on the 
Transport of Goods by Rail. Opened for signature at Berne, 
September 2, 1932. 

ACTE ADDITIONNEL a la Convention du 23 octobre 1924 concer- 
nant le transport des marchandises par chemins de f er. Ouvert 
a la signature . Berne, 2 septembre 1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE. By a protocol to the convention on the transport of goods by rail, 
signed at Berne, October 23, 1924 (No. 1290, ante), provision was made for exceptions, during 
a period of four years, to certain articles of the convention relating to charges. The period, 
which was to expire in October, 1932, is extended by this Additional Act until the coming 
into force of a new convention. The new convention was signed at Rome, November 23, 
1933 (No. 353, post). 

RATIFICATIONS. Ratifications of this act were deposited at Berne by Czechoslovakia, 
September 21, 1932, and by Switzerland, September 30, 1932. On October 30, 1934, ratifi- 
cations had been deposited by all of the signatories except Bulgaria and France; and acces- 
sions had been deposited by Finland, Greece, and Spain. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. The text of this act is also published in 154 League of Nations Treaty 
Series, p. 123; Reichsgesetzblatt, 1933, II, p. 703; 40 Bulletin des transports international par 
chemins defer (1932), annexe, p. 145. 

Anon., " Prolongation de la duree de validite des dispositions transitoires actuelles du 
Protocole de signature du 23 octobre 1924," 40 Bulletin des transports international par 
chemins defer (1932), pp. 451-2. 

Entered into force October 10, I932. 1 
Text supplied by the Political Department of the Swiss Government. 

L'Allemagne, TAutriche, la Bel- Pologne, la Roumanie, la Suede, la 

gique, la Bulgarie, le Danemark, la Suisse, la Tch<coslovaquie, la Tur- 

Ville libre de Dantzig, TEstonie, la quie et la Yougpslavie, consid6- 

France, la Hongrie, 1'Italie, la Let- rant que la situation mon6taire et 

tonie, le Liechtenstein, le Luxem- conomique actuelle est de nature & 

bourg, la Norvge, les Pays-Bas, la rendre necessaire le maintien des 

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3543, November 14, 1934- 



io8 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 315 



Dispositions transitoires, objet du 
chapitre II du Protocole de signa- 
ture de la Convention Internationale 
du 23 octobre 1924 concernant le 
transport des marchandises par 
chemins de fer (C. I. M.), 

qu'en vertu dudit Protocole, ces 
Dispositions transitoires doivent 
prendre fin le i er octobre 1932, 

qu'il est par consequent n^cessaire 
de maintenir lesdites Dispositions 
transitoires jusqu' Tentr6e en vi- 
gueur du texte qui resultera de la 
prochaine Conference de revision de 
la C. L M., 

ont nomme pour leurs Pienipo- 
tentiaires, savoir: 1 

L'Allemagne: W. Dankwort; 

L'Autriche: M. Hoffinger, F. Je- 
linek; 

La Belgique: E. du Bois; 

La Bulgarie: D. Mikoff; 

Le Danemark: E. H. Schack; 

La Ville Libre de Dantzig: J. de 
Modzelewski ; 

L'Estonie: A. Schmidt; 

La France: H. de Marcilly; 

La Hongrie ; A. N4n4ssy ; 

LltalierG. Marchi; 

La Lettonie: J. Klavin-Ellansky; 

Le Liechtenstein: E. Beck; 

Le Luxembourg: J. Elter; 

La Norv&ge: H. Birkeland; 

Les Pays-Bas: W. L Doude van 
Troostwijk; 

La Pologne: J. de Modzelewski; 

La Roumanie: V. Statesco; 

La Suede: K. A. Belfrage; 

La Suisse: H, Hunziker; 

La Tchecoslovaquie : Z.Prochcizka ; 

La Turquie: Nedim Veysel Bey; 

La Yougoslavie: D. Markovi6; 

lesquels, en presence et avec la 
participation du D16gu de la Com- 
mission de Gouveraement du Terri- 
toire du Bassin de la Sarre, apr&s 
s'gtre communique leurs pleins pou- 



voirs, trouv6s en bonne et due forme, 
sont convenus de ce qui suit: 

I 

Le delai de quatre ans fixe par les 
Dispositions transitoires qui font 
1'objet du chapitre II du Protocole 
de signature de la Convention inter- 
national du 23 octobre 1924 con- 
cernant le transport des marchan- 
dises par chemins de fer (C. I. M.) 
est prolong^, & partir du i er octobre 
1932, jusqu'k la date de Tentr6e en 
vigueur du texte qui r6sultera de la 
prochaine Conference de revision de 
la C. I. M. 

II 

Vu Turgence et les intents im- 
portants qui sont en jeu, le present 
Acte entrera en vigueur entre les 
Etats qui Tauront ratifie, dix jours 
aprs la date & laquelle le Gouverne- 
ment 6d6ral suisse aura notifie aux 
Gouvernements interesses le dep6t 
des ratifications. 

Le present Acte demeure ouvert 
jusqu'au 15 septembre 1932 4 la sig- 
nature et, apr&s cette date, Tad- 
hesion des Etats qui participent & la 
Convention Internationale du 23 
octobre 1924.2 

Le Gouvernement suisse se charge 
de recueillir et de notifier les adhe- 
sions et les ratifications. 

EN FOI DE QUOI, les Pienipotenti- 
aires ci-dessus et le Deiegue de la 
Commission de Gouvernement du 
Territoire du Bassin de la Sarre ont 
signe le present Acte. 

Fait Berne, le deux septembre 
mil neuf cent trente-deux, en un seul 
exemplaire, qui restera depose dans 
les Archives de la Confederation 
Suisse et dont une expedition au- 
thentique sera remise & chacune des 
Parties. 



[Signe:] Pour FAllemagne: DANKWORT; pour PAutriche: HOFFINGER; 
Dr. F. JELINEK ; pour la Belgique : E. Du Bois ; pour la Bulgarie : D. MIKOFF ; 
pour le Danemark : E. H. SCHACK; pour la Ville Libre de Dantzig : J. DE MOD- 

1 The titles of plenipotentiaries are omitted. ED. 2 No, 129, ante. ED. 



Dec. 9, 1932 TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION IO9 

ZELEWSKI; pour PEstonie: A. SCHMIDT; pour la France: H. DE MARCILLY; 
pour la Hongrie: Dr. NANASSY; pour PItalie: G. MARCHI; pour la Lettonie: 
J . KLAVINS-ELLANSKY ; pour le Liechtenstein : E. BECK ; pour le Luxembourg : 
JULES ELTER; pour la Norvege: HERSLEB BIRKELAND; pour les Pays-Bas: 
W. DOUDE VAN TROOSTWIJK; pour la Pologne: J. DE MODZELEWSKI; pour la 
Roumanie : VICTOR STATESCO ; pour la Suede : KURT A. BELFRAGE ; pour la 
Suisse: HUNZIKER; pour la Tchecoslovaquie : Dr. PROCHAZKA; pour la 
Turquie: NEDIM VEYSEL; pour la Yougoslavie: Dr. D. MARKOVIC; pour la 
Commission de Gouvernement du Territoire du Bassin de la Sarre: T. 

COURTILET. 

No. 316 

TELECOMMUNICATION Convention. Signed at Madrid, Decem- 
ber 9, 1932. 

CONVENTION des telecommunications. Signee a Madrid, 9 

decembre 1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE. The International Telegraphic Union was established under a conven- 
tion signed at Paris, May 17, 1865. 56 J3r. and For. St. Papers, p. 295. That convention 
was revised at Vienna, July 21, 1868 (59 idem, p. 322), at Rome, January 14, 1872 (66 idem, 
P- 975) an d at St. Petersburg, July 10/22, 1875 (idem, p. 19). Numerous revisions were 
made of the regulations attached to the convention ; for the Paris revision of October 29, 
1925, see ante, No. 146. A radiotelegraph convention signed at Berlin, November 3, 1906 
(99 idem, p. 321), was revised at London, July 5, 1912 (105 idem, p. 219), and at Washington, 
November 25, 1927 (No. 185, ante). The International Telegraph Conference which met at 
Paris in 1925 and the International Radiotelegraph Conference which met at Washington in 
1927, both resolved in favor of combining the conventions relating to the two subjects. The 
Madrid Convention of 1932 effects such a combination; it abrogates the previous telegraphic 
and radiotelegraphic conventions, and it replaces the International Telegraphic Union with 
the International Telecommunication Union. Telegraphic and radiotelegraphic relations 
have been regulated by numerous other conventions which were less general. See also the 
convention creating the Inter- American Union of Electrical Communications (No. 116, 
ante), and the European Convention on Broadcasting (No. 330, post). A North and Central 
American Regional Radio Conference, held at Mexico City, July lo-August 9, 1933, adopted 
recommendations on allocation of frequencies. U. S. Treaty Information Bulletin, No. 47, 

P- 15- 

RATIFICATIONS. On July i, 1937, ratifications of or accessions to this convention had 
been deposited at Madrid by Afghanistan, Albania, Australia, Austria, Belgium (and de- 
pendencies), Bulgaria, Canada, China, Colombia, Czechoslovakia, Denmark, Dominican 
Republic, Egypt, Estonia, Ethiopia, Finland, Germany, Great Britain (and various British 
dependencies), Haiti, Hungary, Iceland, India, Irish Free State, Italy (and dependencies), 
Japan, Luxemburg, Mexico, Morocco, Netherlands (and dependencies), New Zealand, 
Panama, Persia, Poland, South Africa, Spain, Switzerland, Syria and Lebanon, Turkey, 
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, United States of America, Uruguay, Vatican City 
State, Venezuela, Yemen, and Yugoslavia. In addition, formal accessions were made by or 
on behalf of various dependencies and twenty-seven private companies: see U. S. Treaty 
Information Bulletin, No. 76, p. 12; Registration of Treaties, No. 165, p. u; Journal des 
telecommunications (passim). Nicaragua, which had not deposited a ratification, denounced 
the convention, November 26, 1936. 



IIO INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION No. 316 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. Propositions pour la Conference radiotelegraphigue international de 
Madrid, 1932 (Berne: Bureau international de 1'Union telegraphique, 1931) ', Documents de la 
Conference radiot&Ugraphigue internationale de Madrid, 1932 (Berne: Bureau Internationale 
de TUnion telegraphique, 1933), 2 vols.; International Radiotelegraph Conference, Madrid, 
1932, U. S. Department of State, Conference Series, No. 15, Publication No. 540. See also 
the Journal des t&Ucommunciations (formerly the Journal t&Ugraphigue), official organ of the 
Bureau de I' Union internationale des Telecommunications. The text of this convention is also 
published in 151 League of Nations Treaty Series, p. 4; Reichsgesetzblatt, 1934, p. 1063; and by 
H. M. Stationer's Office (London, 1933). 

J. C. de Fabel, " Les Conferences diplomatiques de Madrid et de Lucerne," 10 Revue inter- 
nationale de la radiolectricit (1934), pp. 5-20; de Fabel, "Le regime international de la 
radioelectricite et les conferences diplomatiques de Madrid et de Lucerne/' 12 Rev. de dr. int. 
( J 933) PP- 566-80; P. S. Gerbrandy, Het vraagstuk van den radio-omroep (Te Kampen: 
Kok, 1934), pp. 17-34; R. Homburg, "Next World Conference at Madrid and the Interna- 
tional Regulation of Electric and Radio-Electric Transmissions," I Journal of Radio Law 
( I 93 I ) PP- 220-40; O. Kucera, "Einige Rechtsprobleme der Madrider Weltfunktelegraph- 
enkonferenz," 5 Archivfur Funkrecht (1932), pp. 239-44; P de La Pradelle, " Le droit de vote 
aux Conferences des telecommunications," 9 Revue jur idigue internationale de la radMlec- 
tricite' (1933), pp. 398-424; G. Montefinale, " I problem! tecnici, marittimi ed aerei alia Con- 
ferenza radio di Madrid," 66 Rivista marittima (1933), pp. 13-20; Irvin Stewart, "The Ma- 
drid International Telecommunication Convention," 5 Air Law Review (1934), pp. 236-66. 

Entered into force January i, 1934.* 
Text and translation from U. S. Treaty Series t No. 867. 

[Translation] 

Union of South Africa; Germany; Union de FAfrique du Sud; Al- 

Republic of Argentina; Common- lemagne; R6publique Argentine; 

wealth of Australia; Austria; Bel- Fd6ration Australienne ; Autriche; 

gium; Bolivia; Brazil; Canada; Belgique; Bolivie; Bresil; Canada; 

Chile; China; Vatican City State; Chili; Chine; Etat de la Cite* du 

Republic of Colombia; French Colo- Vatican; Re"publique de Colombie; 

nies, protectorates and territories Colonies franchises, protectorats et 

under French mandate; Portuguese territoires sous mandat frangais; 

Colonies; Swiss Confederation; Bel- Colonies portugaises; Confederation 

gian Congo; Costa Rica; Cuba; suisse; Congo beige; Costa- Rica; 

Curagao and Surinam; Cirenaica; Cuba; Curasao et Surinam; Cyr6- 

Denmark; Free City of Danzig; naique; Danemark; Ville libre de 

Dominican Republic; Egypt; Re- Dantzig; R6publique Dominicaine; 

public of El Salvador; Ecuador; Egypte ; R^publique de El Salvador ; 

Eritrea ; Spain ; United States of Equateur ; Ery thr6e ; Espagne ; Etats- 

America; Empire of Ethiopia; Fin- Unis d'Am&rique; Empire d'Ethio- 

land; France; United Kingdom of pie; Finlande; France; Royaume- 

Great Britain and Northern Ireland ; Uni de la Grande-Bretagne et de 

Greece; Guatemala; Republic of 1'Irlande du Nord; Grece; Guate- 

Honduras; Hungary; Italian Islands mala; Rpublique de Honduras; 

of the Aegean Sea; British India; Hongrie; lies italiennes de TEgee; 

Dutch East Indies; Irish Free State; Indes britanniques ; Indes ne*erlan- 

Iceland; Italy; Japan, Chosen, Tai- daises; Etat libre dlrlande; Islande; 

wan, Karafuto, Kwantung Leased Italie; Japon, Chosen, Taiwan, Kara- 

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3479, August 30, 1934. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION 



III 



Territory and the South Sea Islands 
under Japanese mandate; Latvia; 
Liberia; Lithuania; Luxemburg; 
Morocco; Mexico; Nicaragua; Nor- 
way; New Zealand; Republic of 
Panama; Netherlands; Peru; Persia; 
Poland; Portugal; Rumania; Italian 
Somaliland; Sweden; Syria and Leb- 
anon; Czechoslovakia; Tripolitania; 
Tunisia; Turkey; Union of Soviet 
Socialist Republics; Uruguay; Vene- 
zuela ; Yugoslavia. 

The undersigned, plenipotentiaries 
of the governments listed above, 
having met in conference at Madrid, 
have, in common agreement and 
subject to ratification, concluded the 
following Convention : 

CHAPTER I 

ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTIONING OF 
THE UNION 



futo, le Territoire & bail du Kwan- 
tung et les lies des Mers du Sud 
sous mandat japonais; Lettonie; 
Liberia ; Lithuanie ; Luxembourg ; 
Maroc; Mexique; Nicaragua; Nor- 
vge; Nouvelle-Z61ande; Republique 
de Panama; Pays-Bas; Perou; Perse; 
Pologne; Portugal; Roumanie; 
Somalie italienne; Suede; Syrie et 
Liban ; Tchecoslovaquie ; Tripoli- 
taine; Tunisie; Turquie; Union des 
R<publiques Sovi6tistes Socialistes; 
Uruguay; V6nezu61a; Yougoslavie. 

Les soussign6s, pl<nipotentiaires 
des gouvernements ci-dessus enu- 
mrs, s J 6tant reunis en conference 
Madrid, ont, d'un commun accord 
et sous reserve de ratification, arr8t6 
la Convention suivante: 

CHAPITRE I 

ORGANISATION ET FONCTIONNEMENT 
DE L'UNION 



ARTICLE i. Constitution of the "Union ARTICLE i. Constitution de V Union 



i. The countries, parties to the 
present Convention, form the Inter- 
national Telecommunication Union 
which shall replace the Telegraph 
Union and which shall be governed 
by the following provisions. 

2. The terms used in this Con- 
vention are defined in the annex to 
the present document. 

ARTICLE 2. Regulations 

i. The provisions of the present 
Convention shall be completed by 
the following Regulations: 

the Telegraph Regulations, 
the Telephone Regulations, 
the Radio Regulations (General 
Regulations and Additional Regu- 
lations), 

which shall bind only the contracting 
governments which have under- 
taken to apply them, and solely as 
regards governments which have 
taken the same obligation. 

2. Only the signatories to the 



i. Les pays, Parties lapresente 
Convention, forment 1'Union inter- 
nation ale des t61ecommunications, 
qui remplace I'Union t61egraphique, 
et qui est r6gie par les dispositions 
suivantes. 

2. Les termes employes dans la 
pr6sente Convention sont d6finis 
dans 1'annexe ce document. 

ARTICLE 2. Kbglements 

i. Les dispositions de la pr6- 
sente Convention sont completes 
par les Rdglements, savoir: 

le R&glement t16graphique, 
le Reglement t616phonique, 
les R^glements des radiocom- 

munications (R&glement g6n6ral et 

Reglement additionnel), 

qui ne lient que les gouvernements 
contractants qui se sont engag6s 
les appliquer, et seulement vis-^L-vis 
des gouvernements qui ont pris le 
mime engagement. 

2. Seuls les signataires de la 



112 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 316 



Convention or the adherents to this 
document shall be permitted to sign 
the Regulations or to adhere thereto. 
The signing of at least one of the sets 
of Regulations shall be obligatory 
upon the signatories of the Conven- 
tion. Similarly, adherence to at 
least one of the sets of Regulations 
shall be obligatory upon the adher- 
ents to the Convention. However, 
the Additional Radio Regulations 
may not be the subject of signature 
or adherence except when the Gen- 
eral Radio Regulations have been 
signed or adhered to. 

3. The provisions of the present 
Convention shall bind the contract- 
ing governments only with respect to 
the services governed by the Regula- 
tions to which these governments are 
parties. 

ARTICLE 3. Adherence of Govern- 
ments to the Convention 

i. The government of a country, 
in the name of which the present 
Convention has not been signed, 
may adhere to it at any time. Such 
adherence must cover at least one of 
the sets of annexed Regulations, sub- 
ject to the application of 2 of article 
2 above. 

2. The act of adherence of a 
government shall be deposited in the 
archives of the government which 
received the conference of plenipo- 
tentiaries that has drawn up the 
present Convention. The govern- 
ment with which the act of adherence 
has been deposited shall communi- 
cate it to all the other contracting 
governments through diplomatic chan- 
nels. 

3. Adherence shall carry with it 
as a matter of right, all the obliga- 
tions and all the advantages stipu- 
lated by the present Convention; it 
shall, in addition, entail the obliga- 
tions and advantages stipulated by 
the particular Regulations which the 
adhering governments undertake to 
apply. 



Convention ou les adherents cet 
acte sont admis & signer les R&gle- 
ments ou It y adherer. La signature 
de Tun, au moins, des Rglernents 
est obligatoire pour les signataires 
de la Convention. De mgme, Tad- 
hesion Tun, au moins, des R&gle- 
ments est obligatoire pour les adh- 
rents & la Convention. Toutefois, 
le Rglement additionnel des ra- 
dipcommunications ne peut pas 
faire Tobjet de la signature ou de 
Tadh6sion sans que la signature ou 
I'adhdsion ait <t6 donn6e au R&gle- 
ment g6n6ral des radiocommunica- 
tions. 

3. Les prescriptions de la pr<- 
sente Convention n'engagent les 
gouvernements contractants que 
pour les services rgis par les R&gle- 
ments auxquels ces gouvernements 
sont Parties. 

ARTICLE 3. AdMsion des gouverne- 
ments ci la Convention 

i. Le gouvernement d'un pays, 
au nom duquel la pr&sente Conven- 
tion n'a pas 6t6 sign6e, peut y ad- 
h6rer en tout temps. Cette adh.6- 
sion doit porter sur un au moins des 
Rglements annexes, sous reserve de 
^application du 2 de Tarticle 2 
ci-dessus. 

2. L'acte d'adh6sion d'un gou- 
vernement sera dpos6 dans les 
archives du gouvernement qui a ac- 
cueilli la conference de pl&nipoten- 
tiaires ayant arrt6 la pr6sente Con- 
vention. Le gouvernement qui a 
reu en d6p6t Tacte d 'adhesion en 
donne connaissance, par la voie di- 
plomatique, & tous les autres gou- 
vernements contractants. 

3. L'adh6sion emporte de plein 
droit toutes les obligations et tous 
les avantages stipules par la pr6sente 
Convention; en outre, elle entraine 
les obligations et avantages stipules 
par les seuls R&glements que les 
gouvernements adherents s'engagent 
4 appliquer. 



Dec. 9, I93 2 



TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION 



113 



ARTICLE 4. Adherence of Govern- 
ments to the Regulations 
The government of a country 
signatory or adherent to the present 
Convention may at any time adhere 
to one or more of the sets of Regula- 
tions which it has not undertaken to 
observe, taking into account the pro- 
visions of article 2, 2. Such ad- 
herence shall be notified to the Bu- 
reau of the Union which shall inform 
the other governments concerned 
thereof. 

ARTICLE 5. Adherence to the Con- 
vention and to the Regulations 
by Colonies, Protectorates, Overseas 
Territories, or Territories under 
Sovereignty, Authority, or Mandate 
of the Contracting Governments 

i. Any contracting government 
may, at the time of its signature, its 
ratification, its adherence, or later, 
declare that its acceptance of the 
present Convention is valid for the 
whole or a group or a single one of its 
colonies, protectorates, overseas ter- 
ritories, or territories under sover- 
eignty, authority, or mandate. 

2. The whole or a group or a 
single one of these colonies, protec- 
torates, overseas territories, or terri- 
tories under sovereignty, authority, 
or mandate may, respectively, at any 
time, be the subject of a separate 
adherence. 

3. The present Convention shall 
not apply to colonies, protectorates, 
overseas territories, or territories 
under sovereignty, authority, or 
mandate of a contracting govern- 
ment, unless statement to this effect 
is made by virtue of I of the present 
article, or a separate adherence is 
made by virtue of 2 above. 

4. The declarations of adher- 
ence, made by virtue of I and 2 
of this article, shall be communicated 
through diplomatic channels to the 
government of the country on the 
territory of which was held the con- 



ARTICLE 4. Adhesion des gouverne- 
ments aux Reglements 

Le gouvernement d'un pays signa- 
taire ou adherent a la presente 
Convention peut adherer en tout 
temps au R&glement ou aux Regle- 
ments auxquels il ne s'est pas engag, 
en tenant compte des dispositions du 
2 de I'artide 2. Cette adh6sion 
est notifi&e au Bureau de 1'Union, 
lequel en donne connaissance aux 
autres gouvernements intress6s. 

ARTICLE 5. Adhesion a la Conven- 
tion et aux Reglements des colonies, 
protectorats, territoires d'outre-mer 
ou territoires sous souverainete, 
autorite ou mandat des gouverne- 
ments contractants 

i. Tout gouvernement contrac- 
tant peut declarer, soit au moment de 
sa signature, de sa ratification ou de 
son adhesion, soit apr&s, que son 
acceptation de la pr&sente Conven- 
tion est valable pour 1 'ensemble ou 
un groupe ou un seul de ses colonies, 
protectorats, territoires d'outre-mer 
ou territoires sous souverainet, au- 
torit< ou mandat. 

2. L 'ensemble ou un groupe ou 
un seul de ces colonies, protectorats, 
territoires d'outre-mer ou territoires 
sous souverainet6, autorit ou man- 
dat peut respectivement faire Tobjet, 
a toute 6poque, d'une adhesion 
distincte. 

3. La pr6sente Convention ne 
s'applique pas aux colonies, pro- 
tectorats, territoires d'outre-mer ou 
territoires sous souverainete, autorit6 
ou mandat d'un gouvernement con- 
tractant, a moins d'une d6clara- 
tion a cet effet faite en vertu du 
i du present article ou d'une ad- 
hsion distincte faite en vertu du 
2 ci-dessus. 

4. Les declarations d'adh6sion 
faites en vertu des i et 2 du pr6- 
sent article seront communiquees, 
par la voie diplomatique, au gou- 
vernement du pays sur le territoire 
duquel aura 6t tenue la conference 



114 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 316 



ference of plenipotentiaries, at which 
the present Convention was drawn 
up, and a copy thereof shall be 
transmitted by this government to 
each of the other contracting govern- 
ments. 

5. The provisions of I and 3 
of this article shall also apply either 
to the acceptance of one or more of 
the sets of Regulations, or to the ad- 
herence to one or more of the sets of 
Regulations, within the terms of the 
provisions contained in article 2, 2. 

Such acceptance or adherence shall 
be notified in conformity with the 
provisions of article 4. 

6. The provisions of the preced- 
ing paragraphs shall not apply to the 
colonies, protectorates, overseas ter- 
ritories, or territories under sover- 
eignty, authority, or mandate which 
appear in the preamble of the present 
Convention. 

ARTICLE 6. Ratification of the 
Convention 

i. The present Convention must 
be ratified by the signatory govern- 
ments and the ratifications thereof 
must be deposited, as soon as possi- 
ble, through diplomatic channels, in 
the archives of the government of the 
country which received the confer- 
ence of plenipotentiaries that has 
drawn up the present Convention; 
this same government shall, through 
diplomatic channels, notify the other 
signatory and adhering governments 
of the ratifications, as soon as they 
are received. 

2. In case one or more of the 
signatory governments would not 
ratify the Convention, the latter 
shall none the less be valid for the 

fovernments which shall have rati- 
ed it. 

ARTICLE 7. Approval of the 
Regulations 

I. The governments must, as 
soon as possible, submit their deci- 
sion concerning the approval of the 
Regulations drawn up by the Con- 



de pl&iipotentiaires & laquelle la 
pr<seiite Convention a et6 arr6t<e, et 
une copie en sera transmise par ce 
gouvernement & chacun des autres 
gouvernements contractants. 

5. Les dispositions des I et 
3 du present article s'appliquent 
aussi soit pour 1'acceptation d'un ou 
de plusieurs R^glements, soit pour 
Fadh6sion & un ou & plusieurs Rgle- 
ments, en tenant compte des pre- 
scriptions du 2 de Tar tide 2. 
Cette acceptation ou cette adhesion 
est notifi6e en conformite des dis- 
positions de Tarticle 4. 

6. Les dispositions des para- 
graphes pr6c6dents ne s'appliquent 
pas aux colonies, protectorate, terri- 
toires d'outre-nier ou territoires sous 
souverainet<, autorit6 ou mandat 
qui figurent dans le pr6ambule de la 
pr<sente Convention. 

ARTICLE 6. Ratification de la 
Convention 

I. La prsente Convention devra 
tre ratifiie par les gouvernements 
signataires et les ratifications en 
seront d6pos<es, par la voie diplo- 
matique, dans le plus bref d61ai 
possible, aux archives du gouverne- 
ment du pays qui a accueilli la con- 
f^rence de pl6nipotentiaires ayant 
arr6t6 la pr6sente Convention et qui 
notifiera aux autres gouvernements 
signataires et adh6rents, par la voie 
diplomatique, les ratifications au fur 
et & mesure de leur reception. 

2. Dans le cas otl un ou plusieurs 
des gouvernements signataires ne 
ratifieraient pas la Convention, 
celle-ci n'en sera pas moins valable 
pour les gouvernements qui 1'auront 
ratifie. 

ARTICLE 7. Approbation des 
Rbglements 

i. Les gouvernements doivent se 
prononcer dans le plus bref d61ai 
possible au sujet de 1'approbation des 
R6glements arr6t6s en conference. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION 



ference. This approval shall be re- 
ported to the Bureau of the Union 
which shall inform the members of 
the Union accordingly. 

2. In case one or several of the 
governments concerned would not 
report such an approval, the new 
regulatory provisions shall none the 
less be valid for the governments 
which shall have approved them. 



ARTICLE 8. Abrogation of Conven- 
tions and of Regulations Prior to 
the Present Convention 

The present Convention and the 
Regulations annexed thereto shall 
abrogate and replace, in the relations 
between the contracting govern- 
ments, the International Telegraph 
Conventions of Paris (1865), Vienna 
(1868), Rome (1872), and St. Peters- 
burg (1875), and the Regulations 
annexed thereto, as well as the Inter- 
national Radiotelegraph Conventions 
of Berlin (1906), London (1912), and 
Washington (1927), and the Regula- 
tions annexed thereto. 

ARTICLE 9. Execution of the Conven- 
tion and of the Regulations 

i. The contracting governments 
undertake to apply the provisions of 
the present Convention and of the 
Regulations accepted by them, in all 
the offices and in all the telecom- 
munication stations established or 
operated by them, and which are 
open to the international service of 
public correspondence, to the broad- 
casting service, or to the special serv- 
ices governed by the Regulations. 

2. Moreover, they agree to take 
the steps necessary to enforce the 
provisions of the present Convention 
and of the Regulations which they 
accept, upon the private operating 
agencies recognized by them and 
upon the other operating agencies 
duly authorized to establish and 
operate telecommunications of the 



Cette approbation est notifi6e au 
Bureau de 1' Union qui en fait part 
aux membres de 1'Union. 

2. Dans le cas oft un ou plusieurs 
des gouvernements int<resses ne 
notifieraient pas cette approbation, 
les nouvelles dispositions reglemen- 
taires n'en seront pas moins valable 
pour les gouvernements qui les 
auront approuv^es. 

ARTICLE 8. Abrogation des Conven- 
tions et des Reglements anterieurs a 
la prfaente Convention 

La pr6sente Convention et les 
Rglements y annexes abrogent et 
remplacent, dans les relations entre 
les gouvernements contractants, les 
Conventions t^legraphiques interna- 
tionales de Paris (1865), de Vienna 
(1868), de Rome (1872) et de St- 
P<tersbourg (1875) et les Regie- 
men ts y annexes, ainsi que les Con- 
ventions radiot61graphiques inter- 
nationales de Berlin (1906), de 
Londres (1912) et de Washington 
(1927) et les Rglements y annexes. 

ARTICLE 9. Execution de la Conven- 
tion et des Reglements 

i. Les gouvernements contrac- 
tants s'engagent a appliquer les 
dispositions de la pr6sente Conven- 
tion et des Reglements accept6s par 
eux dans tous les bureaux et dans 
toutes les stations de t61<communi- 
cations tablis ou exploites par leurs 
soins et qui sont ouverts au service 
international de la correspondance 
publique, au service de la radio- 
diffusion ou aux services sp6ciaux 
r6gis par les Reglements. 

2. Us s'engagent, en outre, a 
prendre les mesures ncessaires pour 
imposer Tobservation des disposi- 
tions de la presente Convention et 
des Reglements qu'ils acceptent, 
aux exploitations privies reconnues 
par eux et aux autres exploitations 
dtlment autoris6es a I'etablissement 
et a 1'exploitation des t16communi- 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 316 



international service whether or not 
open to public correspondence. 

ARTICLE 10. Denunciation of the 
Convention by the Governments 

I* Each contracting government 
shall have the right to denounce the 
present Convention by a notification, 
addressed, through diplomatic chan- 
nels, to the government of the coun- 
try in which was held the conference 
of plenipotentiaries that has drawn 
up the present Convention, and an- 
nounced by these governments to all 
the other contracting governments, 
likewise through diplomatic chan- 
nels. 

2. This denunciation shall take 
effect at the expiration of the period 
of one year, beginning with the day 
on which the notification was re- 
ceived by the government of the 
country in which the last conference 
of plenipotentiaries was held. This 
effect shall apply only to the author 
of the denunciation ; the Convention 
shall remain in force for the other 
contracting governments. 

ARTICLE n. Denunciation of the 
Regulations by the Governments 

I. Each government shall have 
the right to terminate the obligation 
which it has undertaken to apply one 
of the sets of Regulations, by notify- 
ing its decision to the Bureau of the 
Union which shall inform thereof the 
other governments concerned. Such 
notification shall take effect at the 
expiration of the period of one year, 
beginning with the day on which it 
was received by the Bureau of the 
Union. This effect shall apply only 
to the author of the denunciation; 
the Regulations in question shall re- 
main in force for the other govern- 
ments. 

2. The provision of I above 
shall not annul the obligation for the 
contracting governments to enforce 
at least one of the sets of Regula- 
tions, covered by article 2 of this 



cations du service international ou- 
vertes ou non ouvertes la corre- 
spondance publique. 

ARTICLE 10. Denonciation de la 
Convention par les gouvernements 
I. Chaque gouvernement con- 
tractant a le droit de denoncer^la 
presente Convention par une notifi- 
cation adressee, par la voie diplo- 
matique, au gouvernement du pays 
dans lequel a sieg6 la conference de 
pienipotentiaires qui a arrt< la 
presente Convention et annonc6e 
ensuite par ce gouvernement, 6gale- 
ment par la voie diplomatique, 
tous les autres gouvernements con- 
tractants. 

2. Cette denonciation produit 
son effet & Fexpiration du deiai d'une 
ann6e & partir du jour de la reception 
de sa notification par le gouverne- 
ment du pays oil a sieg< la derniere 
conference de pienipotentiaires. 
Cet effet ne vise que 1'auteur de la 
d6nonciation; pour les autres gou- 
vernements contractants, la Conven- 
tion reste en vigueur. 

ARTICLE 1 1 . DSnonciation des Kbgle- 
ments par les gouvernements 

I. Chaque gouvernement a le 
droit de mettre fin Fengagement 
qu'il a pris d'executer un R^glement, 
en notifiant sa decision au Bureau de 
TUnion, lequel en donne connais- 
sance aux autres gouvernements 
interesses. Cette notfication pro- 
duit son effet & Fexpiration du deiai 
d'une annee partir du jour de sa 
reception par le Bureau de 1' Union. 
Cet effet ne vise que Tauteur de la 
denonciation; pour les autres gou- 
vernements, le R&glement vis6 reste 
en vigueur. 



2. Les dispositions du I ci- 
dessus ne suppriment pas 1'obliga- 
tion pour les gouvernements con- 
tractants d'executer au moins Tun 
des Rglements, visee par 1'article 2 



Dec. 9, 1932 



TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION 



117 



Convention, taking into account the de la pr6sente Convention, et compte 
reservation contained in 2 of the tenu de la reserve mentionne au 
said article. 2 dudit article. 



ARTICLE 12. Denunciation of the 
Convention and of the Regulations 
by Colonies, Protectorates, Overseas 
Territories, or Territories under 
Sovereignty, Authority, or Mandate 
of the Contracting Governments 

i. The application of the present 
Convention to a territory, by virtue 
of the provisions of I or of 2 of 
article 5, may terminate at any time. 

2. The declarations of denuncia- 
tion provided for in I above shall 
be notified and announced according 
to the conditions stated in I of 
article 10; they shall take effect ac- 
cording to the provisions of 2 of the 
latter article. 

3. The application of one or 
more of the sets of Regulations to a 
territory, by virtue of the provisions 
of 5 of article 5, may terminate at 
any time. 

4. The declarations of denuncia- 
tion provided for in 3 above shall 
be notified and announced in accord- 
ance with the provisions of I of 
article 1 1 and shall take effect under 
the conditions set forth in the said 
paragraph. 

ARTICLE 13. Special Arrangements 

The contracting governments re- 
serve the right, for themselves, for 
the private operating agencies rec- 
ognized by them, and for other oper- 
ating agencies duly authorized to 
that effect, to conclude special ar- 
rangements on service matters which 
do not concern the governments in 
general. However, such arrange- 
ments must remain within the terms 
of the Convention and of the Regula- 
tions annexed thereto, as regards 
interference which their application 
might be likely to cause with the 
services of other countries. 



ARTICLE 12. D&nonciation de la 
Convention et des R^glements par 
les colonies, protectorats, territoires 
d'outre-m&r ou territoires sous souve- 
rainete, autoritfr ou mandat des 
gouvernements contractants 

i. L 'application de la pr6sente 
Convention & un territoire, faite en 
vertu des prescriptions du I ou du 
2 de Particle 5, peut prendre fin & 
toute &poque. 

2. Les declarations de denoncia- 
tion prevues au I ci-dessus sont 
notifiees et annonc6es dans les condi- 
tions fixees au i de 1'article 10; elles 
produisent leur effet d'aprs les 
dispositions du 2 du mme article. 

3. L'application d'un ou de plu- 
sieurs R6glements & un territoire, 
faite en vertu des dispositions du 
5 de 1'article 5, peut prendre fin & 
toute 6poque. 

4. Les declarations de d&noncia- 
tion pr6vues au 3 ci-dessus sont 
notifies et annoncees selon les pre- 
scriptions du i de Particle II et 
produisent leur effet dans les condi- 
tions fix6es audit paragraphs. 

ARTICLE 13. Arrangements 
particuliers 

Les gouvernements contractants 
se r^servent, pour eux-m6mes, pour 
les exploitations privies reconnues 
par eux et pour d'autres exploita- 
tions dfiment autoris6es cet effet, la 
facult6 de conclure des arrangements 
particuliers sur les points du service 
qui n'interessent pas la g6n6ralit6 
des gouvernements. Toutefois, ces 
arrangements devront rester dans 
les limites de la Convention et des 
R&glements y annexes, pour ce qui 
concerne les brouillages que leur mise 
execution serait susceptible de 
produire dans les services des autres 
pays. 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 316 



ARTICLE 14. Relations with Non- 
contracting Governments 

i. Each of the contracting gov- 
ernments reserves the right, for itself 
and for the private operating agen- 
cies which it recognizes, to determine 
the conditions under which it will 
admit telecommunications exchanged 
with a country which has not ad- 
hered to the present Convention or 
to the Regulations which contain the 
provisions relative to the telecom- 
munications involved. 

2. If a telecommunication origi- 
nating in a nonadhering country is 
accepted by an adhering country, it 
must be transmitted and, so far as it 
uses the channels of a country ad- 
hering to the Convention and to the 
respective Regulations, the man- 
datory provisions of the Convention 
and of the Regulations in question, 
as well as the normal rates, shall be 
applicable to it. 

ARTICLE 15. Arbitration 

i. In case of disagreement be- 
tween two or more contracting gov- 
ernments concerning the execution 
of either the present Convention or 
the Regulations contemplated in ar- 
ticle 2, the dispute, if it is not settled 
through diplomatic channels, shall 
be submitted to arbitration at the 
request of any one of the govern- 
ments in disagreement. 

2. Unless the parties in disagree- 
ment agree to adopt a procedure 
already established by treaties con- 
cluded between them for the settle- 
ment of international disputes, or the 
procedure provided for in 7 of this 
article, arbitrators shall be ap- 
pointed in the following manner: 

3. (i) The parties shall decide, 
after mutual agreement, whether the 
arbitration is to be entrusted to in- 
dividuals or to governments or ad- 
ministrations; failing an agreement 
on this matter, governments shall be 
resorted to. 



ARTICLE 14. Relations avec des Etats 
non contractants 

i. Chacun des gouvernements 
contractants se reserve, pour lui et 
pour les exploitations privies recon- 
nues par lui, la faculte de fixer ies 
conditions dans lesquelles il admet 
les telecommunications 6chang6es 
avec un pays qui n'a pas adhere la 
presente Convention ou au Rgle- 
ment dans lequel sont comprises les 
dispositions relatives aux t616com- 
munications en cause. 

2. Si une telecommunication 
originaire d'un pays non adherent 
est acceptee par un pays adherent, 
elle doit tre transmise, et, pour 
autant qu'elle emprunte les voies 
d'un pays adherent & la Convention 
et aux Rglements respectifs, les 
dispositions obligatoires de la Con- 
vention et des R&glements en ques- 
tion ainsi que les taxes normales lui 
sont appliqu6es. 

ARTICLE 15. Arbitrage 

I. En cas de disaccord entre 
deux ou plusieurs gouvernements 
contractants relativement & Tex6cu- 
tion soit d<e la pr<sente Convention, 
soit des Rglements prvus & Tarticle 
2, le difKrend, s'il n'est regie par la 
voie diplomatique, est soumis un 
jugement arbitral la demande 
d'un quelconque des gouvernements 
en disaccord. 

2. A moins que les Parties en 
disaccord ne s'entendent pour faire 
usage d'une procedure d6j& etablie 
par des trails conclus entre elles 
pour le rglement des conflits inter- 
nationaux, ou de celle pr^vue au 
7 du present article, il sera precede 
comme il suit la designation des 
arbitres: 

3. (i) Les Parties deddent, aprs 
entente redproque, si 1'arbitrage 
doit gtre confie des personnes ou & 
des gouvernements ou administra- 
tions; & defaut d 'entente, il est re- 
couru & des gouvernements. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION 



119 



(2) In case the arbitration is to be 
entrusted to individuals, the arbitra- 
tors must not be of the same nation- 
ality as any one of the parties con- 
cerned in the dispute. 

(3) In case the arbitration is to be 
entrusted to governments or ad- 
ministrations, the latter must be 
chosen from among the parties ad- 
hering to the agreement, the applica- 
tion of which caused the dispute, 

4. The party appealing to ar- 
bitration shall be considered as the 
plaintiff. This party shall designate 
an arbitrator and notify the opposing 
party thereof. The defendant must 
then appoint a second arbitrator, 
within two months after the receipt 
of plaintiff's notification. 

5. If more than two parties are 
involved, each group of plaintiffs or 
of defendants shall appoint an arbi- 
trator, observing the same procedure 
as in 4. 

6. The two arbitrators thus ap- 
pointed shall agree in designating an 
umpire who, if the arbitrators are in- 
dividuals and not governments or 
administrations, must not be of the 
same nationality as either of them or 
either of the parties involved. Fail- 
ing an agreement of the arbitrators 
as to the choice of the umpire, each 
arbitrator shall propose an umpire in 
no way concerned in the dispute. 
Lots shall then be drawn between the 
umpires proposed. The drawing of 
lots shall be done by the Bureau of 
the Union. 

7. Finally, the parties in dispute 
shall have the right to have their 
disagreement settled by a single 
arbitrator. In this case, either they 
shall agree on the choice of the arbi- 
trator, or the latter shall be desig- 
nated in conformity with the method 
indicated in 6. 

8. The arbitrators shall be free 
to decide on the procedure to be 
followed. 

9. Each party shall bear the ex- 
penses it shall have incurred in the 



(2) Dans le cas ou Tarbitrage doit 
tre confi6 des personnes, les 
arbitres ne doivent litre de la natio- 
nalite d'aucune des Parties in- 
t6ressees dans le diffrend. 

(3) Dans le cas oti 1'arbitrage doit 
tre confie h. des gouvernements ou 
administrations, ceux-ci doivent tre 
choisis parmi les Parties adh6rentes 
1'accord dont 1'application a pro- 
voqu< le differend. 

4. La Partie qui fait appel 
Tarbitrage est consid6r6e comme 
Partie demanderesse. Elle designe 
un arbitre et le notifie 4 la partie ad- 
verse. La Partie d<fenderesse doit 
alors nommer un deuxieme arbitre, 
dans un d6lai de deux mois & partir 
de la reception de la notification de 
la demanderesse. 

5. S'il s'agit de plus de deux 
Parties, chaque groupe de deman- 
deresses ou de defenderesses procede 
4 la nomination d'un arbitre en ob- 
servant le procd indique au 4. 

6. Les deux arbitres ainsi nom- 
m6s s'entendent pour designer un 
surarbitre qui, si les arbitres sont 
des personnes et non pas des gou- 
vernements ou administrations, ne 
soit de la nationality d'aucun d'eux 
et d'aucune des Parties. A defaut 
pour les arbitres de s'entendre sur le 
choix du surarbitre, chaque arbitre 
propose un surarbitre d6sint6resse 
dans le diff6rend. II est ensuite tire 
au sort entre les surarbitres proposes. 
Ce tirage au sort est effectu6 par le 
Bureau de 1'Union. 

7. Enfin, les Parties en disac- 
cord ont la facult^ de faire juger leur 
diff6rend par un seul arbitre. Dans 
ce cas, ou bien elles s'entendent sur 
le choix de Tarbitre, ou bien celui-ci 
est d6sign conformment la m- 
thode indiqu6e au 6. 

8. Les arbitres arrgtent libre- 
ment la procedure & suivre. 

9. Chaque Partie supporte les 
dpenses que lui occasionne Tinstruc- 



I2O 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 316 



investigation of the dispute. The 
cost of the arbitration shall be ap- 
portioned equally among the parties 
involved. 

ARTICLE 16. International Consult- 
ing Committees 

i. Consulting committees may 
be formed for the purpose of study- 
ing questions relating to the telecom- 
munication services. 

2. The number, composition, 
duties, and functioning of these com- 
mittees are defined in the Regulations 
annexed to the present Convention. 

ARTICLE 17. Bureau of the Union 

I. A central office, called the 
Bureau of the International Tele- 
communication Union, shall function 
under the conditions stated herein- 
after: 

2. (i) In addition to the work 
and operations provided for by the 
various other articles of the Conven- 
tion and of the Regulations, the 
Bureau of the Union shall be charged 
with: 

(a) work preparatory to and fol- 
lowing conferences, in which it shall 
be represented in an advisory ca- 
pacity; 

(b) providing, in cooperation with 
the organizing administration in- 
volved, the secretariat of conferences 
of the Union, as well as, when so re- 
quested or when so provided for by 
the Regulations annexed to the 
present Convention, the secretariat 
of meetings of committees appointed 
by the Union or placed under the 
auspices of the latter; 

(c) issuing such publications as 
will be found generally useful be- 
tween two conferences. 

(2) On the basis of the documents 
put at its disposal and of the informa- 
tion which it may gather, it shall 
publish periodically a journal of 
information and documentation con- 
cerning telecommunications. 

(3) It must also, at all times, hold 



tion du difKrend. Les frais d 'arbi- 
trage sont repartis de fagon egale 
entre les Parties en cause. 

ARTICLE 16. Comit&s consultatifs 
international 

i. Des comites consultatifs peu- 
vent tre institu6s en vue d'etudier 
des questions relatives aux services 
des telecommunications. 

2. Lenombre, la composition, les 
attributions et le fonctionnement de 
ces comites sont definis dans les R&gle- 
ments annexes a la pr6sente Conven- 
tion. 

ARTICLE 17. Bureau de V Union 

i. Un office central, d6nomm6 
Bureau de 1'Union Internationale des 
telecommunications, fonctionne dans 
les conditions fix6es ci-aprs : 

2. (i) Outre les travaux et ope- 
rations prvus par divers autres 
articles de la Convention et des 
R^glements, le Bureau de 1'Union 
est charg6 : 

a) des travaux preparatoires des 
conferences et des travaux consecu- 
tifs a ces conferences, auxquelles il 
est represente avec voix consultative ; 

b) d'assurer, d'accord avec Tad- 
ministration organisatrice interessee, 
le secretariat des conferences de 
FUnion, de mme que, lorsqu'il en 
est prie ou que les Rdglements an- 
nexes a la presente Convention en 
disposent ainsi, le secretariat des 
reunions des comites institues par 
1'Union ou places sous 1'egide de 
celle-ci; 

c) de proceder aux publications 
dont 1'utilite generale viendrait a se 
reveler entre deux conferences. 

(2) II publie periodiquement, a 
1'aide des documents qui sont mis a 
sa disposition et des renseignements 
qu'il peut recueillir, un journal 
d 'information et de documentation 
concernant les telecommunications. 

(3) II doit, d'ailleurs, se tenir en 



Dec. 9, 1932 



TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION 



121 



itself at the disposal of the contract- 
ing governments to furnish them 
with such opinions and information 
as they may need on questions con- 
cerning international telecommuni- 
cations, and which it is in a better 
position to have or to obtain than 
these governments. 

(4) It shall prepare an annual re- 
port on its activities, which shall be 
communicated to all members of the 
Union. The operating account shall 
be submitted, for examination and 
approval, to the plenipotentiary or 
administrative conferences provided 
for in article 1 8 of the present Con- 
vention. 

3. (i) The general expenses of 
the Bureau of the Union must not 
exceed, per year, the amounts speci- 
fied in the Regulations annexed to 
the present Convention. These gen- 
eral expenses shall not include: 

(a) the expenses pertaining to the 
work of plenipotentiary or adminis- 
trative conferences, 

(&) the expenses pertaining to the 
work of duly created committees. 

(2) The expenses pertaining to the 
plenipotentiary and administrative 
conferences shall be borne by all the 
governments participating therein, 
in proportion to the contribution 
which they pay for the operation of 
the Bureau of the Union, in accord- 
ance with the provisions of the fol- 
lowing subparagraph (3) . 

The expenses pertaining to the 
meetings of the committees regu- 
larly created shall be borne in ac- 
cordance with the provisions of the 
Regulations annexed to the present 
Convention. 

(3) The receipts and expenses of 
the Bureau of the Union must be 
carried in two separate accounts, one 
for the telegraph and telephone serv- 
ices, the other for the radio service. 
The expenses pertaining to each of 
these two divisions shall be borne by 
the governments adhering to the cor- 
responding Regulations. For the 



tout temps la disposition des gou- 
vernements contractants pour leur 
fournir, sur les questions qui int^res- 
sent les telecommunications interna- 
tionales, les avis et les renseigne- 
ments dont ils ppurraient avoir 
besoin, et qu'il serait mieux en me- 
sure que ces gouvernements de 
posseder ou de se procurer. 

(4) II fait, sur sa gestion, un rap- 
port annuel qui est communique & 
tous les membres de 1' Union. Le 
compte de gestion est soumis 
Texamen et 1'appreciation des con- 
ferences de pienipotentiaires ou ad- 
ministratives, prevues par I'article 
1 8 de la presente Convention, 

3. (i) Les frais communs du 
Bureau de 1' Union ne doivent pas 
depasser, par annee, les sommes 
fixees dans les Rglements annexes 
la presente Convention. Ces frais 
comrnuns ne comprennent pas: 

a) les frais afferents aux travaux 
des conferences de pienipotentiaires 
ou administratives, 

5) les frais afferents aux travaux 
de comites regulierement crees. 

(2) Les frais afferents aux confe- 
rences de pienipotentiaires et admi- 
nistratives sont supportes par tous les 
gouvernements, qui y prennent part 
proportionnellement & la contribu- 
tion qu'ils payent pour le fonctionne- 
ment du Bureau de 1'Union, suivant 
les dispositions de 1'alinea (3) ci-apr&s. 

Les frais afferents aux reunions 
des comites regulierement crees sont 
supportes suivant les dispositions 
des R&glements annexes i la presente 
Convention. 

(3) Les recettes et les depenses du 
Bureau de 1'Union doivent ^faire 
1'objet de deux comptes distincts, 
1'un pour les services teiegraphique 
et teiephonique, 1'autre pour le 
service des radio communications. 
Les frais afferents i chacune de ces 
deux divisions sont supportes par les 
gouvernements adherents aux Rgle- 



122 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 316 



apportioning of these expenses, the 
adhering governments shall be di- 
vided into six classes, each contribut- 
ing at the rate of a certain number of 
units, namely: 



ist class: 25 units 
2d class : 20 units 
3d class 
4th class 
5th class 



6th class : 



15 units 
10 units 
5 units 
3 units 



(4) Each government shall inform 
the Bureau of the Union, directly or 
through its administration, of the 
class in which its country is to be 
placed. This classification shall be 
communicated to the members of the 
Union. 

(5) The amounts advanced by the 
government supervising the Bureau 
of the Union must be refunded by 
the debtor governments with the 
briefest possible delay, and, at the 
latest, at the end of the fourth month 
following the month during which 
the account was rendered. After 
this period, the amounts due shall 
bear interest, accruing to the creditor 
government, at the rate of six per- 
cent (6%) per annum, counting from 
the date of expiration of the above- 
mentioned period. 

4. The Bureau of the Union shall 
be placed under the high supervision 
of the Government of the Swiss Con- 
federation which shall regulate its 
organization, supervise its finances, 
make the necessary advances, and 
audit the annual accounts. 

CHAPTER II 

CONFERENCES 

ARTICLE 18. Conferences of Pleni- 
potentiaries and Administrative 
Conferences 

i. The provisions of the present 
Convention shall be subject to revi- 
sion by conferences of plenipoten- 
tiaries of the contracting govern- 
ments. 



ments correspondants. Pour la r6- 
partition de ces frais, les gouverne- 
ments adherents sont divis6s en six 
classes, contribuant -chacun dans la 
proportion d'un certain nombre 
d 'unites, savoir: 

i re classe: 25 unites, 
2 e classe: 20 unites, 
3 e classe: 15 unites, 
4 e classe: 10 unites, 
5 e classe: 5 unites, 
6 e classe: 3 unites. 

(4) Chaque gouvernement fait 
connaitre au Bureau de 1'Union, soit 
directement, soit par rinterm^diaire 
de son administration, dans quelle 
classe son pays doit tre rang6. 
Cette classification est communique 
aux membres de TUnion. 

(5) Les sommes avanc6es par le 
gouvernement qui contr61e le Bureau 
de TUnion doivent tre rembours6es, 
par les gouvernements d6biteurs, 
dans le plus bref d61ai et, au plus tard, 
& Texpiration du quatrime mois 
qui suit le mois durant lequel le 
compte a 6t6 envoy<. Pass6 ce 
d61ai, les sommes dues sont pro- 
ductives d'intr6ts, au profit du 
gouvernement crMiteur, raison de 
six pour cent (6%) Tan, & compter 
du jour de 1'expiration du d61ai 
susmentionn6. 

4. Le Bureau de T Union est 
plac6 sous la haute surveillance du 
Gouvernement de la Confederation 
suisse, qui en r&gle 1'organisation, en 
contrdle les finances, fait les avances 
n6cessaires et v6rifie le compte 
annuel. 

CHAPITRE II 

CONFERENCES 

ARTICLE 18. Conferences de pleni- 
potentiaires et conferences adminis- 
tfatives 

i. Les prescriptions de la pr6- 
sente Convention sont revisables par 
des conferences de plnipotentiaires 
des gouvernements contractants. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION 



123 



2. Revision of the Convention 
shall be undertaken when it has been 
so decided by a preceding conference 
of plenipotentiaries, or when at least 
twenty contracting governments have 
so stated their desire to the govern- 
ment of the country in which the 
Bureau of the Union is located. 

3. The provisions of the Regula- 
tions annexed to this Convention 
shall be subject to revision by ad- 
ministrative conferences of delegates 
from the contracting governments 
which have approved the Regula- 
tions to be revised, each conference 
itself determining the place and time 
for the following meeting. 

4. Each administrative confer- 
ence may permit the participation, in 
an advisory capacity, of private 
operating agencies recognized by 
the respective contracting govern- 
ments. 

ARTICLE 19. Change of Date of a 
Conference 

I. The time set for the meeting 
of a conference of plenipotentiaries 
or of an administrative conference 
may be advanced or postponed if 
request to this effect is made by at 
least ten of the contracting govern- 
ments to the government of the 
country in which the Bureau of the 
Union is located, and if such proposal 
is agreed to by the majority of the 
contracting governments which shall 
have forwarded their opinion within 
the time indicated. 

2. The conference shall then be 
held in the country originally desig- 
nated, if the government of that 
country consents. Otherwise, the 
contracting governments shall be 
consulted through the government 
of the country in which the Bureau 
of the Union is located. 

ARTICLE 20. Internal Regulations of 
the Conferences 

I. Before any other deliberation, 
each conference shall establish Inter- 
nal Regulations containing the rules 



2. II est procede" la revision de 
la Convention lorsqu'il en a 6t ainsi 
decid6 par une precedente conference 
de plenipotentiaires, ou lorsque 
vingt ^ gouvernements contractants 
au nioins en ont manifeste le desir au 
gouvernement du pays oil siege le 
Bureau de T Union. 

3. Les prescriptions des Rgle- 
ments annexes & la presente Conven- 
tion sont revisables par des confe"- 
rences administratives de d61egu6s 
des gouvernements contractants qui 
ont approuv6 les Rfeglements soumis 
revision, chaque conference fixant 
elle-m^me le lieu et 1'epoque de la 
reunion suivante. 

4. Chaque conference adminis- 
trative peut permettre la participa- 
tion, & titre consultatif, des ex- 
ploitations privies reconnues par les 
gouvernements contractants re- 
spectifs. 

ARTICLE 19. Changement de la date 
d'une conference 

I. L'epoque fix6e pour la re- 
union d'une conference, soit de 
plenipotentiaires, soit administra- 
tive, peut tre avancee ou reculee si 
la demande en est faite par dix, au 
moins, des gouvernements contrac- 
tants, au gouvernement du pays ou 
le Bureau de 1* Union a son si&ge, et si 
cette proposition recoit 1'agrement 
de la majorit6 des gouvernements 
contractants qui auront fait par- 
venir leur avis dans le delai fix6. 

2. La conference a alors lieu 
dans le pays primitivement d6sign6, 
si le gouvernement de ce pays y con- 
sent. Dans le cas contraire, il est 
procd6 une consultation des gou- 
vernements contractants, par les 
soins du gouvernement du pays oil le 
Bureau de TUnion a son siege. 

ARTICLE 20. Rbglement interieur des 
conferences 

i. Avant toute autre d<lib6ra- 
tion, chaque conference etablit un 
reglement int6rieur, qui contient les 



124 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 316 



according to which the debates and 
the work shall be organized and 
conducted. 

2. For this purpose, the confer- 
ence shall take as a basis the Internal 
Regulations of the preceding confer- 
ence, which it may modify if deemed 
advisable. 

ARTICLE 21. Language 

i. The language used in drafting 
the acts of the conferences and for all 
the documents of the Union, shall be 
French. 

2, (i) In the discussions of con- 
ferences, the French and English 
languages shall be permitted. 

(2) Speeches made in French shall 
immediately be translated into Eng- 
lish, and vice versa, by official inter- 
preters of the Bureau of the Union. 

(3) Other languages may also be 
used in the discussions of the confer- 
ences, on condition that the delegates 
using them provide for the transla- 
tion of their own speeches into 
French or into English. 

(4) Likewise these delegates may, 
if they so desire, have speeches in 
French or in English translated into 
their own language. 

CHAPTER III 

GENERAL PROVISIONS 

ARTICLE 22. Telecommunication as 
a Public Service 

The contracting governments rec- 
ognize the right of the public to 
correspond by means of the interna- 
tional service of public correspond- 
ence. The service, the charges, the 
guarantees shall be the same for all 
senders, without any priority or pref- 
erence whatsoever not provided for 
by the Convention or the Regula- 
tions annexed thereto. 

ARTICLE 23. Responsibility 

The contracting governments de- 
clare that they accept no respon- 



r&gles suivant lesquelles sont or- 
ganises et conduits les debats et les 
travaux. 

2. A cet effet, la conference 
prend comme base le r&glement in- 
terieur de la pr6c6dente conference, 
qu'elle modifie si elle I'estime utile. 

ARTICLE 21. Langue 

i. La langue employee pour la 
redaction des actes des conferences et 
pour tous les documents de 1'Union 
est le frangais. 

2. (i) Dans les debats des con- 
ferences, les langues frangaise et 
anglaise sont admises. 

(2) Les discours prononc6s en 
fran^ais sont imm6diatement tra- 
duits en anglais, et r6ciproquement, 
par des traducteurs officiels du 
Bureau de TUnion. 

(3) En outre, d'autres langues 
peuvent tre utilises dans les debats 
des conferences, & la condition que les 
deiegues qui les emploient pourvoient 
eux~m6mes & la traduction de leurs 
discours en frangais ou en anglais. 

(4) De mme, ces deiegues peu- 
vent, s'ils le desirent, faire traduire 
dans leur propre langue les discours 
prononces en frangais ou en anglais. 

CHAPITRE III 
DISPOSITIONS D'ORDRE G^N^RAL 

ARTICLE 22. La telecommunication 
service public 

Les gouvernements contractants 
reconnaissent au public le droit de 
correspondre au moyen du service 
international de la correspondance 
publique. Le service, les taxes, les 
garanties seront les mmes pour tous 
les expediteurs, sans priorite ni pre- 
ference quelconques non prevues par 
la Convention ou les R&glements y 
annexes. 

ARTICLE 23. Responsabilitg 

Les gouvernements contractants 
dedarent n'accepter aucune respon- 



Dec. 9, 1932 



TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION 



125 



sibility in regard to the users of 
the international telecommunication 
service. 



ARTICLE 24. 



Secrecy of Telecommu- 
nications 



i. The contracting governments 
agree to take all the measures possi- 
ble, compatible with the system of 
telecommunication used, with a view 
to insuring the secrecy of interna- 
tional correspondence. 

2. However, they reserve the 
right to communicate international 
correspondence to the proper author- 
ities, in order to insure either the ap- 
plication of their internal legislation, 
or the execution of international 
conventions, to which the govern- 
ments concerned are parties. 

ARTICLE 25. Constitution, Opera- 
tion, and Protection of the Telecom- 
munication Installations and Chan- 
nels 

I . The contracting governments, 
in agreement with the other contract- 
ing governments concerned, shall 
establish, under the best technical 
conditions, the channels and installa- 
tions necessary to carry on the rapid 
and uninterrupted exchange of tele- 
communications in the international 
service. 

2. So far as possible, these chan- 
nels and installations must be oper- 
ated by the best methods and pro- 
cedures which the practice of the 
service shall have made known ; they 
must be maintained constantly in 
operating condition and kept abreast 
of scientific and technical progress. 

3. The contracting governments 
shall insure the protection of these 
channels and installations within the 
limits of their respective action. 

4. Unless other conditions are 
laid down by special arrangements, 
each contracting government shall, 
at its own expense, establish and 
maintain the sections of interna- 
tional conductors included within the 
limits of the territory of its country. 



sabilite & regard des usagers du 
service international de telecom- 
munication. 

ARTICLE 24. Secret des ^com- 
munications 

I. Les gouvernements contrac- 
tants s'engagent & prendre toutes les 
mesures possibles, compatibles avec 
le systeme de telecommunication 
employe, en vue d 'assurer le secret 
des correspondances Internationales. 

2. Toutefois, ils se reservent le 
droit de communiquer les correspon- 
dances internationales aux autorites 
competentes pour assurer, soit Tap- 
plication de leur legislation interieure, 
soit Texecution des conventions in- 
ternationales auxquelles les gouver- 
nements interesses sont Parties. 

ARTICLE 25. Constitution, exploita- 
tion et sauvegarde des installations 
et des voies de telecommunication 

i. Les gouvernements contrac- 
tants etablissent, en accord avec les 
autres gouvernements contractants 
interesses et dans les meilleures con- 
ditions techniques, les voies et in- 
stallations necessaires pour assurer 
Tediange rapide et ininterrompu des 
telecommunications du service in- 
ternational. 

2. Autant que possible, ces voies 
et installations doivent tre exploi- 
tees par les methodes et procedes les 
meilleurs que la pratique du service 
aura fait connaitre, entretenues en 
constant etat d'utilisation et main- 
tenues au niveau des progres scien- 
tifiques et techniques. 

3. Les gouvernements contrac- 
tants assurent la sauvegarde de ces 
voies et installations dans les limites 
de leur action respective. 

4. Chaque gouvernement con- 
tractant etablit et entretient It ses 
frais rnoins d 'arrangement par- 
ticulier fixant d'autres conditions 
les sections des conducteurs inter- 
nationaux comprises dans les limites 
du territoire de son pays. 



126 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 316 



5. In the countries where certain 
telecommunication services are oper- 
ated by private operating agencies 
recognized by the governments, the 
above-mentioned obligations shall be 
undertaken by the private operating 
agencies. 

ARTICLE 26. Stoppage of Telecom- 
munications 

i. The contracting governments 
reserve the right to stop the trans- 
mission of any private telegram or 
radiotelegram which might appear 
dangerous to the safety of the state 
or contrary to the laws of the coun- 
try, to public order, or to decency, 
provided that they immediately 
notify the office of origin of the stop- 
page of the said communication or of 
any part thereof, except when it 
might appear dangerous to the safety 
of the state to issue such notice. 

2. The contracting governments 
likewise reserve the right to interrupt 
any private telephone communica- 
tion which might appear dangerous 
to the safety of the state or contrary 
to the laws of the country, to public 
order, or to decency. 

ARTICLE 27. Suspension of Service 

Each contracting government re- 
serves the right to suspend the serv- 
ice of international telecommunica- 
tion for an indefinite time if it deems 
necessary, either generally or only as 
regards certain connections and/or 
certain classes of communications, 
provided that it immediately so ad- 
vise each of the other contracting 
governments, through the intermedi- 
ary of the Bureau of the Union. 



ARTICLE 28. Investigation of Viola- 
tions 

The contracting governments un- 
dertake to inform each other con- 
cerning violations of the provisions 



5. Dans les pays oil certains ser- 
vices de telecommunication sont as- 
sures par des exploitations privees 
reconnues par les gouvernements, les 
engagements ci-dessus sont pris par 
les exploitations privies. 



ARTICLE 26. ArrU des ^communi- 
cations 

i. Les gouvernements contrac- 
tants se r<servent le droit d'arr^ter 
la transmission de tout te!6gramme 
ou radiot616gramrne priv6 qui parai- 
trait dangereux pour la sfirete" de 
1'Etat ou contraire aux lois du pays, 
Tordre public ou aux bonnes 
mceurs, & charge d'avertir imm6di- 
atement le bureau d'origine de 1'arrgt 
de ladite communication ou d j une 
partie quelconque de celle-ci, sauf 
dans le cas oti remission de 1'avis 
peut paraitre dangereuse pour la sfir- 
et6 de 1'Etat. 

2. Les gouvernements contrac- 
tants se reservent aussi le droit de 
couper toute communication tele- 
phonique privee qui peut paraitre 
dangereuse pour la sftret6 de 1'Etat ou 
contraire aux lois du pays, & Tordre 
public ou aux bonnes mceurs. 

ARTICLE 27. Suspension du service 

Chaque gouvernement contrac- 
tant se reserve le droit de suspendre 
le service des telecommunications 
internationales pour un temps inde- 
termine, s'il le juge necessaire, soit 
d'une maniere generate, soit seule- 
ment pour certaines relations et/ou 
pour certaines natures de corre- 
spondances, & charge pour lui d'en 
aviser imm6diatement chacun des 
autres gouvernements contractants, 
par Pinterm6diaire du Bureau de 
1'Union. 

ARTICLE 28. Instruction des con- 
traventions 

Les gouvernements contractants 
s'engagent & se renseigner mutuelle- 
ment au sujet des infractions aux 



Dec. 9, 1932 



TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION 



127 



of the present Convention and of the 
Regulations which they accept, in 
order to facilitate the action to be 
taken. 

ARTICLE 29. Charges and Franking 
Privileges 

The provisions relating to the 
charges for telecommunications and 
the various cases in which the latter 
enjoy franking privileges are laid 
down in the Regulations annexed to 
the present Convention. 

ARTICLE 30. Priority of Transmis- 
sion for Government Telegrams and 
Radiotelegrams 

In transmission, government tele- 
grams and radio telegrams shall enjoy 
priority over other telegrams and 
radio telegrams, except in the case 
when the sender expressly waives 
such right of priority. 

ARTICLE 31. Secret Language 

i. Government telegrams and 
radiotelegrams as well as service 
telegrams and radiotelegrams, in all 
relations, may be written in secret 
language. 

2. Private telegrams and radio- 
telegrams may be sent in secret 
language between all the countries, 
except those which previously, through 
the intermediary of the Bureau of the 
Union, have announced that they do 
not permit such language for these 
categories of messages, 

3. Contracting governments which 
do not permit private telegrams and 
radiotelegrams in secret language 
from or to their own territory must 
permit them to pass in transit, except 
in the case of suspension of service 
provided for in article 27. 

ARTICLE 32. Monetary Unit 

The monetary unit used in the 
composition of international tele- 
communication rates and in setting 



dispositions de la presente Conven- 
tion et des Rglements qu'ils accep- 
tent, afin de faciliter les poursuites 
exercer. 

ARTICLE 29. Taxes et franchise 

Les dispositions relatives aux 
taxes des telecommunications et les 
divers cas dans lesquels celles-ci 
b efficient de la franchise sont fixes 
dans les R&glements annexes & la pre- 
sente Convention. 

ARTICLE 30. Priority de transmis- 
sion des ttUgrammes et radiotele- 
grammes d'Etat 

Dans la transmission, les tele- 
grammes et radioteiegrammes d'Etat 
jouissent de la priorite sur les autres 
teiegrammes et radioteiegrammes, 
sauf dans le cas oti Texpediteur de- 
clare renoncer ce droit de priorite. 

ARTICLE 31. Langage secret 



I. Les teiegrammes et les 
teiegrammes d'Etat ainsi que les 
teiegrammes et les radioteiegrammes 
de service peuvent tre rediges en 
langage secret dans toutes les rela- 
tions. 

2. Les teiegrammes et les radio- 
teiegrammes prives peuvent tre 
emis en langage secret entre tous les 
pays, & Texception de ceux qui auront 
prlalablement notifie, par Tinter- 
mediaire du Bureau de 1'Union, qu'ils 
n'admettent pas ce langage pour ces 
categories de correspondences. 

3. Les gouvernements contrac- 
tants qui n'admettent pas les tele- 
grammes et les radioteiegrammes 
prives en langage secret en provenance 
ou destination de leur propre ter- 
ritoire doivent les laisser circuler en 
transit, sauf le cas de suspension de 
service defini & 1'article 27. 

ARTICLE 32. Unite mon&taire 

L'unite monetaire employee la 
composition des tarifs des telecom- 
munications internationales et & 



128 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 316 



up the international accounts shall 
be the gold franc of loo centimes, 
weighing 10/31 of a gram, and of a 
fineness of 0.900. 

ARTICLE 33. Rendering of Accounts 

The contracting governments must 
account to one another for the 
charges collected by their respective 
services. 

CHAPTER IV 

SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR RADIO 

ARTICLE 34. Intercommunication 

I. Stations carrying on radio 
communications in the mobile serv- 
ice shall be bound, within the scope 
of their normal operation, to ex- 
change radio communications with 
one another irrespective of the radio 
system they have adopted. 

2. In order not to hinder scien- 
tific progress, however, the provi- 
sions of the preceding paragraph 
shall not prevent the use of a radio 
system incapable of communicating 
with other systems provided that 
this inability is due to the specific 
nature of the system and that it is 
not the result of devices adopted 
solely for the purpose of preventing 
intercommunication . 



ARTICLE 35. Interference 

i. All stations, regardless of 
their purpose, must, so far as possi- 
ble, be established and operated in 
such a manner as not to interfere 
with the radio services or communi- 
cations of either the other contract- 
ing governments, or the private 
operating agencies recognized by 
these contracting governments and 
of other duly authorized operating 
agencies which carry on radio-com- 
munication service. 

2. Each contracting government 
which does not operate the radio 
facilities itself undertakes to require 



T^tablissement des comptes inter- 
nationaux est le franc-or 4 100 cen- 
times, d'un poids de 10/31 de gramme 
et d'un titre de 0,900. 

ARTICLE 33. Reddition des comptes 

Les gouvernements contractants 
se doivent r6ciproquement compte 
des taxes percues par leurs services 
respectifs. 

CHAPITRE IV 

DISPOSITIONS SPECIALES AUX RADIO- 
COMMUNICATIONS 

ARTICLE 34. Intercommunication 

i. Les stations assuran ties radio- 
communications dans le service mo- 
bile sont tenues, dans les limites de 
leur affectation normale, d'6changer 
r6ciproquement les radiocommuni- 
cations sans distinction du syst&me 
radio&ectrique adopt6 par elles. 

2. Toutefois, afin de ne pas en- 
traver les progrs scientifiques, les 
dispositions du paragraphe pr6c6dent 
n'empgchent pas Temploi d'un sys- 
tme radio&ectrique incapable de 
communiquer avec d'autres sys- 
tmes, pourvu que cette incapacity 
soit due la nature sp6cifique de ce 
syst&me et qu'elle ne soit pas Teffet 
de dispositifs adopt&s uniquement 
en vue d'emp^cher rintercommunir 
cation. 

ARTICLE 35. Brouillages 

i. Toutes les stations, quel que 
soit leur objet, doivent, autant que 
possible, tre 6tablies et exploit6es 
de manure ne pas troubler les 
communications ou services radio- 
lctriques, soit des autres gou- 
vernements contractants, soit des 
exploitations privies reconnues par 
ces gouvernementscontractantsetdes 
autres exploitations dfiment autori- 
sees qui effectuent un service de 
radiocommunication . 

2. Chacun des gouvernements 
contractants n'exploitant pas lui- 
mme les moyens de radiocommuni- 



Dec. 9, 1932 



TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION 



129 



the private operating agencies rec- 
ognized by it and the other operating 
agencies duly authorized for this pur- 
pose, to observe the provisions of I 
above. 

ARTICLE 36. Distress Calls and 
Messages 

Stations participating in the mo- 
bile service shall be obliged to accept, 
with absolute priority, distress calls 
and messages regardless of their 
origin, to reply in the same manner 
to such messages, and immediately 
to take such action in regard thereto 
as they may require. 

ARTICLE 37. False or Deceptive Dis- 
tress Signals Irregular Use of Call 
Signals 

The contracting governments agree 
to take the steps required to prevent 
the transmission or the putting into 
circulation of false or deceptive dis- 
tress signals or distress calls, and the 
use, by a station, of call signals which 
have not been regularly assigned to 
it. 



ARTICLE 38. Limited Service 

Notwithstanding the provisions of 
I of article 34, a station may be as- 
signed to a limited international tele- 
communication service, determined 
by the purpose of such telecommuni- 
cation or by other circumstances 
independent of the system. 



ARTICLE 39. Installations of Na- 
tional Defense Services 

i. The contracting governments 
retain their full freedom in regard to 
radio installations not covered by 
article 9 and, particularly, the mili- 
tary stations of land, maritime, or air 
forces. 

2. (i) However, these installa- 
tions and stations must, so far as pos- 



cation s 'engage & exiger des exploi- 
tations privies reconnues par lui et 
des autres exploitations dtiment 
autorises cet effet Tobservation de 
la prescription du i ci-dessus. 

ARTICLE 36, Appels et messages de 
detresse 

Les stations participant au service 
mobile sont obligees d'accepter par 
priority absolue les appels et mes- 
sages de detresse, quelle qu'en soit 
la provenance, de repondre de mme 
& ces messages et d'y donner immdi- 
atement la suite qu'ils comportent. 



ARTICLE 37. Signaux de d&tresse 
faux ou trompeurs Usage irregu- 
lier d'indicatifs d'appel 

Les gouvernements contractants 
s'engagent & prendre les mesures 
utiles pour r6primer la transmission 
ou la mise en circulation de signaux 
de detresse ou d'appels de detresse 
faux ou trompeurs et 1'usage, par une 
station, d'indicatifs d'appel qui ne 
lui ont pas 6t< reguli&rement at- 
tribues. 

ARTICLE 38. Service restreint 

Nonobstant les dispositions du 
i er de 1'article 34, une station peut 
6tre affecte & un service interna- 
tional restreint de t616communication 
d6termin6 par le but de ^cette tele- 
communication ou par d'autres cir- 
constances independantes du sys- 
tme employ^. 

ARTICLE 39. Installations des ser- 
vices de defense nationale 

i. Les gouvernements contrac- 
tants conservent leur enti&re libert 
relativement aux installations radio- 
lectriques non pr&vues & Tarticle 9 
et, notamment, aux stations mili- 
taires des forces terrestres, mari- 
times ou a6riennes. 

2. (i) Toutefois, ces installa- 
tions et stations doivent, autant que 



130 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 316 



sible, comply with the regulatory 
provisions concerning aid to be ren- 
dered in case of distress and measures 
to be taken to avoid interference. 
They must also, to the extent possi- 
ble, comply with the regulatory 
provisions concerning the types of 
waves and the frequencies to be used, 
according to the nature of the service 
performed by the said services. 

(2) Moreover, when these installa- 
tions and stations exchange public 
correspondence or engage in the spe- 
cial services governed by the Regu- 
lations annexed to the present Con- 
vention, they must, in general, com- 
ply with the regulatory provisions 
for the conduct of such services. 



possible, observer les dispositions 
r<glementaires relatives aux secours 
prater en cas de d6tresse et aux 
mesures & prendre pour emp^cher le 
brouillage. Elles doivent aussi, au- 
tant que possible, observer les dis- 
positions r<glementaires en ce qui 
concerne les types d'ondes et les fr6- 
quences & utiliser, selon le genre de 
service que lesdites stations assurent. 

(2) En outre, lorsque ces instal- 
lations et stations font un ^change de 
correspondance publique ou parti- 
cipent aux services sp&iaux rgis par 
les R6glements annexes & la prfeente 
Convention, elles doivent se con- 
former, en g6nral, aux prescriptions 
rglementaires pour Pex6cution de 
ces services. 



CHAPTER V 

FINAL PROVISIONS 

ARTICLE 40. Effective Date of the 
Convention 

The present Convention shall be- 
come effective on the first day of 
January, nineteen hundred and thirty- 
four. 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the respec- 
tive plenipotentiaries have signed 
the Convention in a single copy 
which shall remain deposited in the 
archives of the Government of Spain 
and one copy of which shall be for- 
warded to each government. 

Done at Madrid, December 9, 
1932. 



CHAPITRE V 

DISPOSITION FINALE 

ARTICLE 40. Mise en vigueur de la 
Convention 

La pr6sente Convention entrera en 
vigueur le premier Janvier mil neuf 
cent trente-quatre. 

EN FOI DE QUOI, les p!6nipoten- 
tiaires respectifs ont sign la Con- 
vention en un exemplaire qui restera 
d<pos aux archives du Gouverne- 
ment de TEspagne et dont une copie 
sera remise & chaque gouvernement. 

Fait i Madrid, le 9 d6cembre 1932. 



[Signed:] For the Union of South Africa: H. J. LENTON, A. R. McLACH- 
LAN; for Germany: HERMANN GIESS, Dr. ING. HANS CARL STEIDLE, Dr. 
PAUL JAGER, Dr. HANS HARBICH, PAUL MUNCH, MARTIN FEUERHAHN, 
SIEGFRIED MEY, Dr. FRIEDRICH HERATH, RUDOLF SALZMANN, ERHARD 
MAERTENS, CURT WAGNER; for the Argentine Republic: D. GARCIA MAN- 
SILLA, R. CORREA LUNA, Luis S. CASTiNEiRAS, M. SAENZ BRIONES; for the 
Commonwealth of Australia: J. M. CRAWFORD; for Austria: RUDOLPH 
OESTREICHER, ING. H. PFEUFFER; for Belgium: B. MAUS, R. CORTEIL, Jos. 
LAMBERT, H. FOSSION; for Bolivia: GEORGES SAENZ; for Brazil: Luis Gui- 
MARAES; for Canada: ALFRED DURANLEAU, W. ARTHUR STEEL, JEAN DESY; 
for Chile: E. BERMUDEZ; for China: LINGOH WANG; for the Vatican City 



Dec. 9, 1932 TELECOMMUNICATION CONVENTION 13! 

State: GUISEPPE GIANFRANCESCHI ; for the Republic of Colombia: Jos 
JOAQUIN CASAS, ALBERTO SANCHEZ DE IRIARTE, W. MACLELLAN; for the 
French Colonies, Protectorates and Territories under French Mandate: G. 
CAROUR; for the Portuguese Colonies: ERNESTO JULIO NAVARO, ARNALDO 
DE PAIVA CARVALHO, JOSE M&NDES DE VASCONCELLOS GUIMARAES, MARIO 
CORREA BARATA DA CRUZ; for the Swiss Confederation: G. KELLER, E. 
METZLER; for Belgian Congo: G. TONDEUR; for Costa Rica: A. MARTIN 
LANUZA; for Cuba: MANUEL S. PICHARDO; for Curasao and Surinam: G. 
SCHOTEL, HOOGEWOONING; for Cyrenaica: G. GNEME, GIAN FRANCO DELLA 
PORTA; for Denmark: KAY CHRISTIANSEN, C. LERCHE, GREDSTED; for 
Danzig Free City: ING. HENRYK KOWALSKI, ZANDER; for the Dominican 
Republic: E. BRACHE (Junior), JUAN DE OL6zAGA; for Egypt: R. MURRAY, 
MOHAMED SAID; for the Republic of El Salvador: RAOUL CONTRERAS; for 
Ecuador: Hip6LiTo DE MOZONCILLO, ABEL ROMEO CASTILLO; for Eritrea: 
G. GNEME, GIAN FRANCO DELLA PORTA; for Spain: MIGUEL SASTRE, RAMON 
MIGUEL NIETO, GABRIEL HOMBRE, FRANCISCO VIDAL, J. DE ENCIO, ToMAs 
FERNANDEZ QUINTANA, LEOPOLDO CAL, TRINIDAD MATRES, CARLOS DE 
BORDONS; for the United States of America: EUGENE O. SYKES, C. B. JOL- 
LIFFE, WALTER LICHTENSTEIN, IRVIN STEWART; for the Empire of Ethiopia: 
TAGAGNE ; for Finland : NIILO ORASMAA, VILJO YLOSTALO ; for France : JULES 
GAUTIER; for the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland: 
F. W. PHILLIPS, J. LOUDEN, F. W. HOME, C. H. BOYD, J. P. G. WORLLEDGE; 
for Greece: Th. PENTHEROUDAKIS, STAM NICOLIS; for Guatemala: VIRGILIO 
RoDRfcuEz BETATA, ENRIQUE TRAUMANN, RICARDO CASTANEDA PAGANINI; 
for the Republic of Honduras: ANT* GRAINO; for Hungary: Dr. FRAN- 
gois HAVAS, Ing. JULES ERDOSS; for the Italian Islands of the Aegean: G. 
GNEME, E. MARIANI; for British India: M. L. PASRICHA, P. J. EDMUNDS; for 
the Butch East Indies : A. J. H. VAN LEEUWEN, VAN DOOREN, G. SCHOTEL, 
HOOGEWOONING; for the Irish Free State: P. S. 6H-iGEARTAiGH, E. Cui- 
SIN; for Iceland: G. HLIDDAL; for Italy: G. GNEME, G. MONTEFINALE; for 
Japan, for Chosen, Taiwan, Karafuto, the Leased Territory of Kwantung 
and the South Seas Islands under Japanese Mandate: SAICHIRO KOSHIDA, 
ZENSHICHI ISHII, SATOSHI FURIHATA, Y. YONEZAWA, T. NAKAGAMI, TAKEO 
IINO; for Latvia: B. EINBERG; for Liberia: Luis MA. SOLER; for Lithuania: 
Ing. K. GAIGALIS; for Luxemburg: JAAQUES; for Morocco: DUBEAUCLARD; 
for Mexico: G. ESTRADA, EMILIO TORRES, AUGUSTIN FLORES, JR., S. TAYA- 
BAS; for Nicaragua: Jos6 GARC!A PLAZA; for Norway: T. ENGSET, HERMOD 
PETERSEN, ANDR. HADLAND; for New Zealand: M. B. ESSON; for the Re- 
public of Panama: M. LASSO DE LA VEGA; for the Netherlands: H. J. 
BOETJE, H. C. FELSER, C. H. DE Vos, J. A. BLAND VD BERG, W. DOGTEROM; 
for Peru: JUAN DE OSMA; for Persia: MOHSEN KHAN RAIS; for Poland: Ing. 
HENRYK KOWALSKI, ST. ZUCHMANTOWICZ, KAZIMIERZ GOEBEL, K. KRULISZ, 
KAZIMIERZ SZYMANSKI; for Portugal: MIGUEL VAZ DUARTE BACELAR, JOSE 
DE Liz FERREIRA, Junior, DAVID DE SOUSA PIRES, JOAQUIM RODRIGUES 
GONCALVES; for Roumania: Ing. T. TANASESCO; for Italian Somaliland: G. 
GNEME; for Sweden: G. WOLD; for Syria and Lebanon: M. MORILLON; for 
Czechoslovakia: Ing. STRNAD, Dr. OTTO KU&RA, VACLAV KU&RA, Ing. 
JAROMIR SVOBODA; for Tripolitania: G. GNEME, D. CRETY; for Tunis: 
CROUZET; for Turkey: FAHRI, L CEMAL, MAZHAR; for the Union of Soviet 
Socialist Republics: EUGENE HIRSCHFELD, ALEXANDRE KOKADEEV; for 
Uruguay: ad referendum du Gouvernement de TUruguay, DANIEL CAS- 
TELLANOS; for Venezuela: CfesAR MARMOL CUERVO, ANTONIO REYES; for 
Jugoslavia: D. A. ZLATANOVITCH. 



132 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 316 



ANNEX 
(See article i, 2) 

DEFINITION OF TERMS USED IN THE 
INTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION 
CONVENTION 

Telecommunication: Any telegraph or 
telephone communication of signs, signals, 
writings, images, and sounds of any 
nature, by wire, radio, or other systems 
or processes of electric or visual (sema- 
phore) signaling, 

Radio communication: Any telecom- 
munication by means of Hertzian waves. 
Radiotelegram: Telegram originating in 
or intended for a mobile station, trans- 
mitted on all or part of its route over the 
radio-communication channels of the mo- 
bile service. 

Government telegrams and radiotele- 
grams: Those emanating from: 

(a) the head of a government; 
(&) a minister, member of a govern- 
ment; 

(c) the head of a colony, protector- 
ate, overseas territory, or territory un- 
der sovereignty, authority, or mandate 
of the contracting governments; 

(d) commanders in chief of land, 
naval, or air military forces; 

(e) diplomatic or consular officers of 
the contracting governments; 

(/) the secretary general of the 
League of Nations, 
as well as the replies to such messages. 

Service telegrams and radiotelegrams: 
Those emanating from the telecommuni- 
cation administrations of the contracting 
governments, or from any private operat- 
ing agency recognized by one of these gov- 
ernments, and which refer to international 
telecommunications, or to matters of pub- 
lic interest determined by agreement 
among the said administrations. 

Private telegrams and radiotelegrams: 
Those other than a service or government 
telegram and radiotelegram. 

Public^ correspondence: Any telecom- 
munication which the offices and stations, 
by reason of their being at the disposal of 
the public, must accept for transmission. 

Private operating agency: Any indi- 
vidual, company, or corporation, other 



ANNEXE 
(voir article premier, 2) 

DEFINITION DES TERMES EMPLOYES DANS 
LA CONVENTION INTERNATIONALE DES 
TELECOMMUNICATIONS 

Telecommunication: Toute communica- 
tion telegraphique ou telephonique de 
signes, de signaux, d'taits, d'images et de 
sons de toute nature, par fil, radio ou 
autres systemes ou precedes de signalisa- 
tion electriques ou visuels (semaphores). 

Radiocommunication: Toute tele" com- 
munication a Paide des ondes hertziennes. 

Radiot6legramme: T61e"gramme origi- 
naire ou a destination d'une station mobile 
transmis, sur tout ou partie de son par- 
cours, par les voies de radiocommunica- 
tion du service mobile. 

Telegrammes et radiotelegrammes d'Etat: 
Ceux qui 6manent : 

a) d'un chef d'Etat; 

b) d'un ministre membre d'un gou- 
vernement; 

c) d'un chef de colonie, protectorat, 
territoire d'outre-mer ou territoire sous 
souverainete, autorite ou mandat des 
gouvernements contractants ; 

d) des commandants en chef des 
forces militaires terrestres, navales ou 
aeriennes; 

e) des agents diplomatiques ou con- 
sulaires des gouvernements contrac- 
tants; 

/) du secretaire gn6ral de la Soci6t6 
des Nations, 

ainsi que les reponses a ces correspon- 
dances. 

Telegrammes et radiotelegrammes de 
service: Ceux qui 6manent des administra- 
tions de telecommunication des gouverne- 
ments contractants ou de toute exploita- 
tion privee reconnue par un de ces 
gouvernements et qui sont relatifs aux 
telecommunications internationales, soit 
a des objets d'inter^t public determines de 
concert par lesdites administrations. 

Telegrammes et radiotelegrammes prives: 
Les teiegrammes et radiotelegrammes 
autres que les teiegrammes et radiotele- 
grammes de service ou d'Etat. 

Correspondence publique: Toute tele- 
communication que les bureaux et sta- 
tions, par le fait de leur mise a la disposi- 
tion du public, doivent accepter pour 
transmission. 

Exploitation privee: Tout particulier ou 
toute compagnie ou corporation autre 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



133 



than a governmental institution or agency, 
which is recognized by the government 
concerned and operates telecommunica- 
tion installations for the purpose of ex- 
changing public correspondence. 

Administration: A government admin- 
istration. 

Public service: A service for the use of 
the public in general. 

International service: A telecommunica- 
tion service between offices or stations 
subject to different countries, or between 
stations of the mobile service except when 
the latter are of the same nationality and 
are within the limits of the country to 
which they belong. An internal or na- 
tional telecommunication service which is 
likely to cause interference with other 
services beyond the limits of the country 
in which it operates, shall be considered 
as an international service from the stand- 
point of interference. 

Limited service: A service which can be 
used only by specified persons or for spe- 
cial purposes. 

Mobile service: A radio-communication 
service carried on between mobile and land 
stations and by mobile stations communi- 
cating among themselves, special services 
being excluded. 



qu'une institution ou agence gouverne- 
mentale, reconnue par le gouvernement 
inte"ress et qui exploite des installations 
de telecommunication en vue de 1'e" change 
de la correspondance publique. 

Administration: Une administration 
gouvernementale. 

Service public: Un service a 1'usage du 
public en general. 

Service international: Un service de 
telecommunication entre bureaux ou 
stations relevant de pays differents ou 
entre stations du service mobile, sauf si 
celles-ci sont de m&ne nationalit6 et se 
trouvent dans les limites du pays auquel 
elles appartiennent. Un service de tele- 
communication interieur ou national, qui 
est susceptible de causer des brouillages 
avec d'autres services au dela des limites 
du pays dans lequel il opere, est consider 
comme service international au point de 
vue du brouillage. 

Service restreint: Un service ne pouvant 
tre utilise que par des personnes specifies 
ou dans des buts particuliers. 

Service mobile: Un service de radiocom- 
munication execute entre stations mobiles 
et stations terrestres et par les stations 
mobiles communiquant entre elles, a 
1 'exclusion des services speciaux. 



No. 317 

GENERAL Radio Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication 
Convention. Signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932. 

REGLEMENT general des radiocommunications annexe a la Con- 
vention des telecommunications. Signe & Madrid, 9 decembre 
1932. 



EDITOR'S NOTE. These regulations supersede the regulations annexed to the radiotele- 
graph convention of November 25, 1927 (No. i85a, ante). Several agreements relating to 
radio communications have been concluded between two or more states. See, for example, 
the convention between Peru and Brazil of December 31, 1928, 127 League of Nations Treaty 
Series, p. 455. 

ACCESSIONS. On July I, 1937, these regulations had been approved or acceded to by 
all the states which had ratified or acceded to the telecommunication convention (No. 316, 
ante), except Afghanistan, Albania, Luxemburg, and Yemen, and by Bolivia, Greece, and 
Sweden. Certain states, while not formally approving or acceding, had given notice of an 
intention to apply the provisions of the regulations. U. S. Treaty Information Bulletin, No. 
66, p. 15. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. The text of these regulations is also published in 151 League of Nations 
Treaty Series, p. 278. (See the bibliography under No. 316, ante.) 



134 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



Entered into force January i, 1934. 1 
Text and translation from U. S. Treaty Series, No. 867. 



[Translation] 
ARTICLE i. Definitions 

H 2 The following definitions shall sup- 
plement those contained in the Conven- 
tion: 

[2] Fixed station: A station not capable of 
being moved, and communicating by 
radio with one or more stations estab- 
lished in the same manner. 

[ 3 ] Land station: A station not capable of 
being moved, carrying on a mobile service. 

[*] Coast station: A land station carrying 
on a service with ship stations. This may 
be a fixed station assigned also to com- 
munication with ship stations; in this case, 
it shall be considered as a coast station 
only for the duration of its service with 
ship stations. 

[ 5 ] Aeronautical station: A land station 
carrying on a service with aircraft stations. 
This may be a fixed station assigned also 
to communication with aircraft stations; 
in this case, it shall be considered as an 
aeronautical station only for the duration 
of its service with aircraft stations. 

[ 6 ] Mobile station: A station capable of 

being moved and which ordinarily does 

move. 

[ 7 ] On-board station: A station on board 

either a ship which is not permanently 

moored, or an aircraft. 

[ 8 ] Skip station: A station on board a ship 

which is not permanently moored, 

[ 9 ] Aircraft station: A station on board 
any aerial vehicle. 

[ 10 ] Radiobeacon station: A special station 
the emissions of which are intended to 
enable an on-board station to determine 
its bearing or a direction with reference 
to the radiobeacon station, and in some 
cases also the distance which separates it 
from the latter. 

[ u ] Radio direction-finding^ station: A 
station equipped with special apparatus 
for determining; the direction of the emis- 
sions of other stations. 



ARTICLE i. Definitions 

f 1 ] Les definitions ci-apres competent 
celles qui sont mentionnees dans la Con- 
vention: 

[ 2 ] Station fixe: Station non susceptible 
de se d6placer et communiquant, par le 
moyen de radiocommunication, avec une 
ou plusieurs stations etablies de la m6me 
maniere. 

[ 3 ] Station terrestre: Une station non 
susceptible de se deplacer et effectuant un 
service mobile. 

[ 4 ] Station cdtilre: Une station terrestre 
effectuant un service avec les stations de 
navire. Ce peut Stre une station fixe 
affectee aussi aux communications avec 
les stations de navire; elle n'est alors 
consideree comme station c6tiere que 
pendant la dur6e de son service avec les 
stations de navire. 

[ 6 ] Station aeronautique: Une station 
terrestre effectuant un service avec les 
stations d'aeronef. Ce peut tre une 
station fixe afFect6e aussi aux communica- 
tions avec les stations d'aeronef; elle n'est 
alors considered comme station aero- 
nautique que pendant la duree de son 
service avec les stations d'aeronef. 
[ 6 ] Station mobile: Une station susceptible 
de se deplacer et qui habituellernent se 
deplace. 

[ 7 ] Station de lord: Une station place a 
bord, soit d'un navire qui n'est pas amarr6 
en permanence, soit d'un aeronef. 
[ 8 ] Station de navire: Une station placee a 
bord d'un navire qui n'est pas amarr& en 
permanence. 

[ 9 ] Station d'atronef: Une station plac6e 
a bord de tout v6hicule arien. 
[ 10 ] Station de radiophare: Une station 
speciale dont les Emissions sont destinies 
a permettre a une station de bord de 
determiner son relevement ou une direc- 
tion par rapport a la station de radio- 
phare, eVentuellement aussi la distance 
qui la s6pare de cette derni&re. 
[ u ] Station radiogoniometrique: Une sta- 
tion pourvue d'appareils spciaux destines 
a determiner la direction des Emissions 
d'autres stations. 



1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3479, August 30, 1934. 

2 The consecutive numbering of the paragraphs by figures in brackets was decided upon by the 
Radiotelegraph Conference of Madrid (1932), to facilitate reference. ED. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



135 



[ 12 ] Telephone "broadcasting station: A 
station carrying on a telephone broad- 
casting service. 

[is] Visual broadcasting station: A station 
carrying on a visual broadcasting service. 

[ u ] Amateur station: A station used by an 
"amateur", that is, by a duly authorized 
person interested in radio technique solely 
with a personal aim and without pecuniary 
interest. 

[is] Private experimental station: A private 
station intended for experiments looking 
to the development of radio technique or 
science. 

[isa] Private radio station: A private sta- 
tion, not open to public correspondence, 
which is authorized solely to exchange 
with other "private radio stations" com- 
munications concerning the private busi- 
ness of the license holder or holders. 

[is] Frequency assigned to a station: The 
frequency assigned to a station is the fre- 
quency occupying the center of the fre- 
quency band in which the station is 
authorized to work. In general, this fre- 
quency is that of the carrier wave. 
[17] Frequency band of an emission: The 
frequency band of an emission is the fre- 
quency band actually occupied by this 
emission for the type of transmission and 
for the signaling speed used. 

[ 18 ] Frequency tolerance: The frequency 
tolerance is the maximum permissible 
separation between the frequency as- 
signed to a station and the actual fre- 
quency of emission. 

[19] Power of a radio transmitter: The 
power of a radio transmitter shall be the 
power supplied to the antenna. 
[ 20 ] In the case of a modulated wave 
transmitter, the power in the antenna 
shall be represented by two numbers, one 
indicating the value of the carrier-wave 
power supplied to the antenna and the 
other indicating the actual maximum rate 
of modulation used. 

[ 21 ] Telegraphy: Telecommunication by 
any system of telegraph signaling. The 
word "telegram" also covers "radio- 
telegram", except when the text expressly 
precludes such a meaning. 

[ 22 ] Telephony: Telecommunication by 
any system of telephone signaling. 



[ 12 ] Station de radiodiffnsion teUphonique: 
Une station effectuant un service de radio- 
diffusion t616phonique. 
[ l3 ] Station de radiodiffusion visuelle: 
Une station effectuant un service de radio- 
diffusion visuelle. 

[ w ] Station d'amateur: Une station utili- 
see par un "amateur", c'est-a-dire par 
une personne dtiment autoris6e, s'inte"res- 
sant a la technique radioelectrique dans 
un but uniquement personnel et sans 
inte're't pe"cuniaire. 

[ 15 ] Station experimental privee: Une 
station privee destined a des experiences 
en vue du d6veloppement de la technique 
ou de la science radioelectrique. 
[ 1Sa ] Station privee de radiocommunica- 
lion: Une station priv6e, non ouverte a la 
correspondance publique, qui est autoris6e 
uniquement i 6changer avec d'autres 
"stations privies de radiocommunica- 
tion" des communications concernant les 
affaires propres du ou des licencies. 
[i6] Frequence assignee a une station: 
La frequence assignee a une station est la 
frequence qui occupe le centre de la bande 
de frequences dans laquelle la station est 
autorisee & travailler. En general, cette 
frequence est celle de 1'onde porteuse. 
[ l7 ] Bande de frequences d'une emission: 
La bande de frequences d'une Emission 
est la bande de frequences effectivement 
occupee par cette Emission, pour le type 
de transmission et pour la vitesse de sig- 
nalisation utilises. 

[ 18 ] Tolerance de frequence: La tolerance 
de frequence est le maximum de FScart 
admissible entre la frequence assign6e a 
une station et la frequence rdelle d'emis- 
sion. 

[ 19 ] Puissance d*un emetteur radioelectri- 
que: La puissance d'un ernetteur radioelec- 
trique est la puissance fournie & 1'antenne. 
[ 20 ] Dans le cas d'un 6metteur & ondes 
modu!6es, la puissance dans 1'antenne est 
caractris6e par deux nombres, indiquant, 
Tun la valeur de la puissance de 1'onde 
porteuse fournie a Tantenne et Fautre 
le taux maximum r6el de modulation 
employed 

[ 21 ] TeUgraphie: T616communicatipn par 
un syst&me quelconque de signalisation 
t61egraphique. Le mot "t616gramme" 
vise aussi le " radio tele^ramme", sauf 
lorsque le texte exclut express6ment une 
telle signification. 

[ 22 ] Telephonie: Tel6communication par 
un syst&me quelconque de signalisation 
t616phonique. 



136 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



ps] General network of telecommunication 
channels: The whole of the existing tele- 
communication channels open to public 
service, with the exception of the radio 
channels of the mobile service. 
[ 24 ] Aeronautical service: A radio service 
carried on between aircraft stations and 
land stations and by aircraft stations 
communicating among themselves. This 
term shall also apply to fixed and special 
radio services intended to insure the safety 
of aerial navigation. 

p s ] Fixed service: A service carrying on 
radio communication of any kind between 
fixed points, with the exception of the 
broadcasting services and special services. 
p 6 ] Special service: A telecommunication 
service carried on especially for the needs 
of a specific service of general interest and 
not open to public correspondence, such 
as: a service of radiobeacons, radio direc- 
tion finding, time signals, regular me- 
teorological bulletins, notices to navi- 
gators, press messages addressed to all, 
medical notices (medical consultation by 
radio), standard frequencies, emissions for 
scientific purposes, etc. 



P 7 ] Telephone broadcasting service: A 
service carrying on the broadcasting of 
radiotelephone emissions primarily in- 
tended to be received by the general 
public. 

p 8 ] Visual broadcasting service: A service 
carrying on the broadcasting of visual 
images, either fixed or moving, primarily 
intended to be received by the general 
public. 

ARTICLE 2. Secrecy of Radio 
Communications 

P 9 ] The administrations agree to take 
the necessary measures to prohibit and 
prevent: 

[ 30 ] (a) the unauthorized interception of 
radio communications not intended for 
the general use of the public; 
[ 3l ] (&) the divulging of the contents or 
of the mere existence, the publication or 
use, without authorization, of radio com- 
munications which may have been inter- 
cepted intentionally or otherwise. 

ARTICLE 3. License 

[ 32 ] I. (i) No transmitting station 
may be established or operated by any 
person or by any enterprise whatever 



p 3 ] Reseau general des votes de tSlecom- 
munication: L/ensemble des voies de 
telecommunication existantes ouvertes au 
service public, a Fexclusion des voies de 
radiocommunication du service mobile. 
p 4 ] Service aeronautique: Un service de 
radiocommunication ex6cut6 entre sta- 
tions d'aeronef et stations terrestres et 
par les stations d'a6ronef communiquant 
entre elles. Ce terme s'applique egale- 
ment aux services fixes et splciaux de 
radiocommunication destines a assurer la 
scurit6 de la navigation arienne. 
p 5 ] Service fixe: Un service assurant des 
radiocommunications de toute nature 
entre points fixes, 1'exclusion des services 
de radiodiffusion et des services speciaux. 
p 6 ] Service special: Un service de t616- 
communication op&rant sp6cialement 
pour les besoins d'un service d'inte"rt 
general determine et non ouvert a la cpr- 
respondance pubKque, tel que: un service 
de radiophare, de radiogoniometrie, de 
signaux horaires, de bulletins m6toro- 
logiques rguliers, d'avis aux navigateurs, 
de messages de presse adress6s a tous, 
d'avis medicaux (consultations radio- 
m6dicales), de frequences 6talonn6es, 
demissions destin6es a des buts scienti- 
fiques, etc. 

p 7 ] Service de radiodiffusion tSlephonique: 
Un service effectuant la diffusion d'6mis- 
sions radiophoniques essentiellement des- 
tinies a tre revues par le public en g&ne'raL 

p 8 ] Service de radiodiffusion visuelle: 
Un service effectuant la diffusion d 'images 
visuelles, fixes ou anim6es, essentiellement 
destinies a 8tre recues par le public en 
gne"ral. 

ARTICLES 2. Secret des radiocom- 
munications 

p 9 ] Les administrations s'engagent & 
prendre les mesures n6cessaires pour faire 
interdire et r6primer: 
[ 30 ] a) 1'interception, sans autorisation, 
de radiocommunications qui ne sont pas 
destinies a Tusage general du public; 
[ 31 ] b) la divulgation du contenu ou 
simplement de 1'existence, la publication 
ou 1'usage, sans autorisation, de radio- 
communications qui auraient 6t6 inter- 
ceptes d61ib6r6ment ou non. 

ARTICLE 3. Licence 

[ 32 ] i. (i) Aucune station emet trice 
ne ppurra 6tre 6tablie ou exploitee par un 
particulier, ou par une entreprise quel- 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



137 



without a special license issued by the gov- 
ernment of the country to which the sta- 
tion in question is subject. 
[] (2) Mobile stations having their port 
of registry in a colony, a territory under 
sovereignty or mandate, an overseas ter- 
ritory, or a protectorate, may be con- 
sidered as being subject to the authority 
of this colony, these territories, or this 
protectorate, so far as concerns the grant- 
ing of licenses. 

[ 34 ] 2. The holder of a license shall be 
bound to preserve the secrecy of tele- 
communications, as provided for in article 
24 of the Convention. In addition, the 
license must state that it is prohibited to 
receive radio correspondence other than 
that which the station is authorized to 
receive, and that, in case such correspond- 
ence is received involuntarily, it must 
neither be reproduced nor communicated 
to third persons, nor used for any purpose 
whatever, and that the very existence 
thereof must not be revealed. 

[ 35 ] 3. In order to facilitate the verifi- 
cation of licenses issued to mobile sta- 
tions, it is recommended that there be 
added, when necessary, to the text drafted 
in^the national language, a translation of 
this text into a language in general use in 
international relations. 
[ 36 ] 4. The government issuing the 
license to a mobile station shall mention 
therein the category to which this station 
belongs from the standpoint of interna- 
tional public correspondence. 

ARTICLE 4. Choice of Apparat^ts 

[ 37 ] I. The choice of radio apparatus 
and devices to be used in a station shall 
be unrestricted, provided that the waves 
emitted satisfy the provisions of the pres- 
sent Regulations. 

[ 38 ] ^ 2. However, within limits com- 
patible with economic requirements, the 
choice of transmitting, receiving, and 
measuring apparatus must be guided by 
the most recent technical progress as 
shown, notably, in the Opinions of the 
C.C.I.R. 

ARTICLE 5. Classification of Emissions 

[ 39 ] I. Emissions shall be divided into 
two classes: 

A. Continuous waves, 

B. Damped waves, 
defined as follows: 



conque, sans licence sp6ciale d61ivr6e par 
le gpuvernement du pays dont releve la 
station en question. 

[ 33 ] (2) Les stations mobiles qui ont 
leur port d'attache dans une colonie, un 
territoire sous souverainet6 ou mandat, un 
territoire d'outre-mer ou un protectorat 
peuvent tre cpnsid&rees comme d6pen- 
dant de Pautorit6 de cette colonie, de ces 
territoires ou de ce protectorat, en ce qui 
concerne 1'octroi des licences. 
[ 34 ] 2. Le titulaire d'une licence est 
tenu de garder le secret des tetecommuni- 
cations, comme il est preVu a Tarticle 24 
de la Convention. En outre, il doit r6- 
sulter de la licence qu'il est interdit de 
capter les ^correspondances de radio- 
communication autres que celles que la 
station est autorise"e a recevoir et que, 
dans le cas oft de telles correspondances 
sont involontairement recues, elles ne 
doivent tre ni reproduces, ni communi- 
qu6es a des tiers, ni utilises dans un but 
quelconque, et leur existence mme ne doit 
pas tre reV616e. 

M 3- Ann de faciliter la verification 
des licences d61ivr6es a des stations mo- 
biles, il est recommande" d'ajouter, s'il y a 
lieu, au texte redigd dans la langue na- 
tionale, une traduction de ce texte en une 
langue dont 1'usage est tres repandu dans 
les relations Internationales. 
[ B6 ] 4. Le gouvernement qui deliyre la 
licence a une station mobile y mentionne 
la catSgorie dans laquelle cette station est 
classee au point de vue de la correspon- 
dance publique Internationale. 

ARTICLE 4. Choix des appareils 

[ 37 ] i. Le choix des appareils et des 
dispositifs radioelectriques a employer 
dans une station est libre, a condition que 
les ondes 6mises satisfassent aux stipula- 
tions du present Reglement. 
[ 88 ] 2. Toutefois, dans les limites com- 
patibles avec les exigences 6conomiques, 
le choix des appareils d'6mission, de r- 
ception et de mesure doit s'inspirer des 
plus r6cents progres de la technique, tels 
qu'ils sont indiqu6s notamment dans les 
avis du C.C.I.R. 

ARTICLE 5. Classification des emissions 

[ 39 ] I. Les Emissions sont r6parties en 
deux classes: 

A. Ondes entretenues, 

B. Ondes amorties, 
d6finies comme suit: 



138 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



[ 40 ] Class A: Waves the successive oscil- 
lations of which are identical under fixed 
conditions. 

[ 41 ] Class B: Waves composed of suc- 
cessive series of oscillations the amplitude 
of which, after attaining a maximum, de- 
creases gradually. 

[ 42 ] 2. The following types of waves 
are derived from Class A waves: 
[ 48 ] Type Ax. Continuous waves the 
amplitude or frequency of which varies 
under the effect of telegraph keying. 
M Type A2. Continuous waves the 
amplitude or frequency of which varies 
according to a periodic audiofrequency 
law, combined with telegraph keying. 

[45] Type A$. Continuous waves the 
amplitude or frequency of which varies 
according to a complex and variable 
audiofrequency law. An example of this 
type is radiotelephony. 
[46] Type A4. Continuous waves the 
amplitude or frequency of which varies 
according to any law of frequencies 
greater than audible frequencies. An 
example of this type is television. 
[ 47 ] 3- The foregoing classification Into 
waves of types Ai, A2, A3, and A4 shall 
not prevent the use, under conditions 
fixed by the administrations concerned, 
of waves modulated or keyed by methods 
not included in the definitions of types 
Ai, As, A3, and A4. 

[ 4 *] 4. These definitions shall not re- 
late to systems of transmitting apparatus. 

M 5- Waves shall be indicated first 
by their frequency in kilocycles per second 
(kc). Following this indication there 
shall be indicated, in parentheses, the ap- 
proximate length in meters. In the 
present Regulations, the approximate 
value of the wave length in meters is the 
quotient of the number 300,000 divided 
by the frequency expressed in kilocycles 
per second. 

ARTICLE 6. Quality of Emissions 

[ 60 ] I. The waves emitted by a station 
must be kept on the authorized frequency 
as exactly as the state of the art permits, 
and their radiation must be as free as 
practically possible from all emissions not 
essential to the type of communication 
carried on. 

P 1 ] 2. (i) The administrations shall, 
for the various cases of operation, deter- 



[ 40 ] Classe A: Ondes dont les oscillations 
successives sont identiques en regime 
permanent. 

[ 41 ] Classe B: Ondes composees de series 
successives d'oscillations dont 1 'amplitude, 
apres avoir atteint un maximum, decroit 
graduellement. 

[ 42 ] 2. Des ondes de la classe A derivent 
les ondes des types ci-apres: 
[] Type Ai. Ondes entretenues dont 
1'amplitude ou la frequence varie sous 
I'effet d'une manipulation t61graphique. 
M Type A2. Ondes entretenues dont 
1'amplitude ou la frequence varie suivant 
une Ipi p6riodique de frequence audible 
combinee avec une manipulation t616- 
graphique. 

t 46 ] Type AS. Ondes entretenues dont 
I'amplitude ou la frequence varie suivant 
une loi complexe et variable de frequences 
audibles. Un exemple de ce type est la 
radioteiephonie. 

[46] Type A4. Ondes entretenues dont 
I'amplitude ou la frequence varie suivant 
une loi quelconque de frequence plus 
grande que les frequences audibles. Un 
exemple de ce type est la television. 
[ 47 ] 3. La classification qui precede, en 
ondes Ai, A2, A3 et A4, n'emp^che pas 
I'emplpi, dans des conditions fixes par les 
administrations int6ress6es, d 'ondes modu- 
les ou manipulees, par des proc6des ne 
rentrant pas dans les definitions des types 
Ai, A2, A3 et A4. 

[ 48 ] 4. Ces definitions ne sont pas 
relatives aux systemes des appareils 
d'emission. 

[ 49 ] 5- Les ondes seront dsignees, en 
premier lieu, par leur frequence en Jkilo- 
cycles par seconde (kc/s). A la suite de 
cette designation sera indiquee, entre 
parentheses, la longueur approximative en 
metres. Dans le present Rglement, la 
valeur approximative de la longueur 
d'onde en metres est le quotient de la 
division du nombre 300 ooo par la fre- 
quence exprimee en kilocycles par seconde. 

ARTICLE 6. Qualiti des emissions 
[ 50 ] i. Les ondes emises par une sta- 
tion doivent 8tre maintenues a la fre- 
quence autorisee, aussi exactement que le 
permet 1'etat de la technique, et leur 
rayonnement doit Itre aussi exempt qu'il 
est pratiquement possible, de toute emis- 
sion qui n'est pas essentielle au type de la 
communication effectuee. 
[ Sl ] 2. (i) Les administrations fixent, 
pour les differents cas d'exploitation, les 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



139 



mine the characteristics relative to the 
quality of the emissions, notably the ac- 
curacy and stability of frequency of the 
emitted wave, the level of harmonics, the 
width of the total frequency band occu- 
pied, etc., so that they will be in accord 
with technical progress. 
[] (2) The administrations agree to 
consider the tables (appendix I : Table of 
Frequency Tolerances and of Instabili- 
ties; appendix 2: Table of Frequency 
Band Widths Occupied by the Emissions) 
as a guide indicating for the various cases, 
the limits to be observed to the extent 
possible. 

["] (3) Concerning the widths of fre- 
quency bands occupied by emissions, in 
practice the following conditions must be 
taken into account: 

1. Width of the band as shown in 
appendix 2. 

2. Variation of the frequency of the 
carrier wave, 

3. Other technical conditions, such 
as the technical possibilities with 
regard to the form of filter circuit 
characteristics, both for trans- 
mitters and for receivers. 

M 3- (i) The administrations shall 
frequently check the waves emitted by the 
stations under their jurisdiction to de- 
termine whether or not they comply with 
the provisions of the present Regulations. 
[ 55 ] (2) Effort shall be made to obtain 
international cooperation in this matter. 
[ 66 ] 4. In order to reduce interference 
in the frequency bands above 6,000 kc 
(wavelengths below 50 m), the use of 
directive antenna systems is recommended 
when such use is compatible with the 
nature of the service. 

ARTICLE 7. Allocation and Use of Fre- 
quencies (Wavelengths) and of Types of 
Emission 

[ 57 ] i. Subject to the provisions of sub- 
paragraph (5) of 5 below, the adminis- 
trations of the contracting countries may 
assign any frequency and any type of wave 
to any radio station under their jurisdic- 
tion on the sole condition that no inter- 
ference with any service of another coun- 
try will result therefrom. 

[ 68 ] 2, The administrations, however, 
agree to assign to stations which by their 



caracteristiques relatives a la qualit< des 
Emissions, notamment 1'exactitude et la 
stability de la frequence de 1'onde 6mise, le 
niveau des harmoniques, la largeur de la 
bande to tale de frequences occup6e, etc., 
de maniere qu'elles repondent aux progres 
de la technique. 

[ 62 ] (2) Les administrations sont d'ac- 
cord pour considerer les tableaux (ap- 
pendice i: tableau des to!6rances de 
frequence et des instabilites, appendice 2: 
tableau des largeurs de bande de fr- 
quences occupies par les Emissions) 
comme un guide indiquant, pour les 
difTerents cas, les limites a observer dans 
la rnesure du possible. 
M (3) En ce qui concerne la largeur des 
bandes de frequences occupees par les 
Emissions, il faut tenir compte, dans la 
pratique, des conditions suivantes: 

i Largeur de la bande donnee dans 

Pappendice 2. 
2 Variation de la frequence de 

1'onde porteuse. 

3 Conditions techniques suppl- 
mentaires, telles que les possibili- 
tes techniques relatives a la 
forme des caracteristiques des 
circuits filtrants, tant pour les 
metteurs que pour les r6cepteurs. 

[ 54 ] 3- (i) Les administrations vrifie- 
ront frequemment si les ondes 6mises par 
les stations relevant de leur autorite r- 
pondent aux prescriptions du present 
R&glement. 

[ 55 ] (2) On s'efforcera d'obtenir une col- 
laboration Internationale en cette matiere. 
[ 5<J ] 4. Afin de r6duire les brouillages 
dans la bande de frequences au-dessus de 
6000 kc/s (longueurs d'onde infdirieures a 
50 m), il est recommande d'employer, 
lorsque la nature du service le perrnet, des 
syst&mes d'antennes directives. 

ARTICLE 7. Repartition et emploi des 
frequences (longueurs d'onde) et des types 
d'&mission 

[ 67 ] i. Sous reserve des dispositions de 
1'alinea (5) du 5 ci-apres, les administra- 
tions des pays contractants peuvent at- 
tribuer une frequence quelconque et un 
type d'onde quelconque a toute station 
radioelectrique sous leur autorite, la 
seule condition qu'il n'en r6sulte pas de 
brouillages avec un service quelconque 
d'un autre pays. 

[ B8 ] 2. Toutefois, les administrations 
sont d'accord pour attribuer aux stations 



140 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



very nature are capable of causing serious 
international interference, frequencies and 
types of waves in conformity with the 
rules for allocation and use of waves, as 
set forth below. 

[ 6a ] 3 The administrations also agree 
to assign frequencies to these stations, 
according to the kind of service they per- 
form, in conformity with the table of 
allocation of frequencies (see table below). 
[ 80 ] 4. In the case where bands of fre- 
quencies are assigned to a specific service, 
the stations of that service must use fre- 
quencies sufficiently separated from the 
limits of these bands so as not to produce 
harmful interference with the operation 
of stations belonging to services to which 
the frequency bands immediately ad- 
joining have been assigned. 

[ 61 ] 5- 00 The frequencies assigned 
by administrations to all fixed, land, and 
broadcasting stations, as well as the upper 
limit of power contemplated, must be 
notified to the Bureau of the Union with 
a view to their publication, when the sta- 
tions in question carry on a regular service 
and are capable of causing international 
interference. Frequencies on which a 
coast station receives in carrying on a 
particular service with ship stations using 
stabilized transmitters must also be noti- 
fied to the Bureau of the Union with a 
view to their publication. Frequencies 
must be selected in such a way as to avoid, 
so far as possible, interfering with inter- 
national services belonging to the con- 
tracting countries and operated by exist- 
ing stations, of which the frequencies have 
already been notified to the Bureau of the 
Union. The aforesaid notification must 
be made in accordance with the provi- 
sions of article 15, I (&) and appendix 6 
before the frequency is put into service 
and sufficiently in advance thereof to 
allow administrations to take any action 
which they may deem necessary to insure 
the efficient operation of their services. 



[ M ] (2) (a) However, when the fre- 
quency which an administration intends 
to assign to a station is outside the bands 
authorized by the present Regulations 
for the service involved, this administra- 
tion shall, in a special report, make the 
notification mentioned in the preceding 
subparagraph at least 6 months before 



qui, en raison de leur nature m^me, sont 
susceptibles de causer de s6rieux brouil- 
lages internationaux, des frequences et des 
types d'onde en conformity avec les regies 
de repartition et d'emploi des ondes, telles 
qu'elles sont indique'es ci~apr&s. 
[ 59 ] 3- Les administrations s'engagent 
aussi a attribuer des frequences & ces sta- 
tions, selon le genre de leur service, en se 
conformant au tableau de repartition des 
frequences (voir le tableau ci-apr&s). 
[ 60 ] 4. Dans le cas oft des bandes de 
frequences sont attribuees a un service 
determine, les stations de ce service 
doivent employer des frequences suffisam- 
ment eloignees des limites de ces bandes, 
pour ne pas prpduire de brouillage nuisible 
dans le travail des stations appartenant 
aux services auxquels sont attribuees les 
bandes de frequences immediatement 
voisines. 

[ 61 ] 5- (*) Les frequences assignees par 
les administrations a toutes stations fixes, 
terrestres et de radiodiffusion, ainsi que la 
limite superieure de la puissance prevue 
doivent tre notifies au Bureau de 
TUnion, en vue de leur publication, 
lorsque les stations en question effectue- 
ront un service regulier et qu'elles seront 
susceptibles de causer des brouillages 
internationaux. Doivent egalement 6tre 
notifiees au Bureau de 1 'Union, en vue de 
leur publication, les frequences sur les- 
quelles regoit une station c6tiere pour 
effectuer un service particulier avec les 
stations de navire utilisant des emetteurs 
stabilises. Les frequences doivent tre 
choisies de manure a eviter, autant que 
possible, de brouiller les services interna- 
tionaux appartenant aux pays contrac- 
tants et efTectuees par des stations exis- 
tantes, dont les frequences ont deja ete 
notifiees au Bureau de 1 'Union. La noti- 
fication predtee devra tre faite selon les 
dispositions de 1'article 15, I, &) et de 
1'appendice 3 avant la mise en service de 
la frequence et suffisamment a temps pour 
permettre aux administrations de prendre 
toute mesure qui leur semblerait neces- 
saire en vue d 'assurer une bonne execution 
de leurs services. 

[ fl2 ] (2) a) Toutefois, lorsque la frequence 
qu'une administration a 1'intention d'as- 
signer a une station est une frequence en 
dehors des bandes autorisees par le present 
R&glement pour le service en cause, cette 
administration fera, par avis special, la 
notification prevue a l'alinea precedent au 
moins six mois avant la mise en exploita- 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



141 



this frequency is put into service, and in 
urgent cases, at least 3 months before that 
date. 

[ 6 ] (b) The notification procedure laid 
down above shall also be observed when 
an administration intends to increase or to 
authorize the increase of the power or a 
change in the conditions of radiation of a 
station already operating outside the au- 
thorized bands, even if the frequency used 
is to remain the same. 

[* 4 ] (c) With regard to stations which, 
when the present Regulations go into 
force, are already operating outside the 
bands authorized therein, the frequency 
and the power used shall be notified im- 
mediately to the Bureau of the Union, 
with a view to their publication, if such a 
notification has not been made previously. 

[ 8S ] (3) W The administrations con- 
cerned shall conclude agreements, when 
needed, for determining the waves to be 
assigned to the stations in question, as 
well as for laying down the conditions of 
use of the waves thus assigned. 
[ M ] (b) The administrations of any re- 
gion may, in accordance with article 13 of 
the Convention, conclude regional ar- 
rangements regarding the allocation 
either of frequency bands to the services 
of the participating countries, or of fre- 
quencies to stations of these countries, and 
concerning the conditions for the use of 
the waves so assigned. The provisions of 
i and those of 5 (i) and (2) shall also 
apply to any arrangement of this nature. 

[ 67 ] (4) The administrations concerned 
shall conclude the necessary agreements 
to avoid interference and, when needed, 
shall, for this purpose, in conformity with 
the procedure which will be agreed among 
them in bilateral or regional agreements, 
call upon organs of expert investigation or 
of expert investigation and conciliation. 
If no agreement can be reached with re- 
gard to avoiding interference, the pro- 
visions of article 15 of the Convention can 
be applied. 

[ M ] (5) (?) With regard to European 
broadcasting and subject to any right to 
which the extra-European administrations 
might be entitled by virtue of the present 
Regulations, the detailed provisions be- 
low, which can be abrogated or changed 
by agreement among the European ad- 
ministrations and which in no way change 



tion de cette frequence et, dans les cas 
d'urgence, au moins trois mois avant cette 
date. 

['*] b) La procedure de notification in- 
dique"e ci-avant sera egalement observed 
lorsqu'une administration aura 1'intention 
d'augmenter ou d'autoriser Taugmenta- 
tion de la puissance ou un changement 
dans les conditions de rayonnement d'une 
station travaillant dej& en dehors des 
bandes autorisees, mime si la frequence 
utilis6e doit rester la m6me. 
[ M ] c) Pour ce qui est des stations qui, 
lors de I'entr6e en vigueur du present 
R&glement, travaillent deja en dehors des 
bandes y autorisees, la frequence utilis6e 
et la puissance employee seront imm6di- 
atement notifies au Bureau de I'Union en 
vue de leur publication, pour autant que 
pareille notification n'aura pas 6t6 faite 
auparavant. 

t 66 ] (3) #) Les administrations int6res- 
sees s'entendent, en cas de besoin, pour la 
fixation des ondes attribuer aux stations 
dont il s'agit, ainsi que pour la determina- 
tion des conditions d'emploi des ondes 
ainsi attributes. 

[ 6ft ] &) Les administrations d'une region 
quelconque peuvent conclure, conform6- 
ment 1'article 13 de la Convention, des 
arrangements rgionaux concernant Tat- 
tribution soit de bandes de frequences aux 
services des pays participants, soit de 
frequences aux stations de ces pays, et 
concernant les conditions d'emploi des 
ondes ainsi attributes. Les dispositions 
du I et celles du 5 (i) et (2) s'appli- 
quent egalement tout arrangement de 
cette nature. 

[ 8r ] (4) Les administrations int6ress6es 
prennent les accords n6cessaires pour 
eviter les brouillages et, en cas de besoin, 
feront appel, a cet effet, conformement ^, 
la procedure qui sera convenue entre elles 
par des accords bilateraux ou regionaux, 
des organes soit d'expertise, soit d'exper- 
tise et de conciliation. Si aucun arrange- 
ment en vue d'eviter les brouillages ne 
peut 6tre realise, les prescriptions de 
1'article 15 de la Convention peuvent toe 
appliquees. 

[ 68 ] (5) a) En ce qui concerne la radio- 
diffusion europeenne et sous reserve de 
tout droit qui reviendrait aux adminis- 
trations extra-europeennes en vertu du 
present R^glement, les modalites ci-apres, 
qui pourront Itre abrogees ou modifiees 
par accord entre les administrations 
europeennes et qui ne modifient en rien 



142 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



the provisions of subparagraph (2) above, 
shall be brought to bear in applying the 
principle laid down in I. 
[ 69 ] (6) Failing a preliminary agreement 
between the administrations of the Euro- 
pean contracting countries, the right con- 
templated in I cannot, within the limits 
of the European region, be used for the 
purpose of carrying on a broadcasting serv- 
ice outside the bands authorized by the 
present Regulations on frequencies be- 
low 1,500 kc (wavelengths above 200 m). 

[ 70 ] (c) An administration wishing to es- 
tablish such a service or to obtain a change 
in the conditions laid down by a previous 
agreement with regard to such a service 
(frequency, power, geographic position, 
etc.) shall submit the request to the Euro- 
pean administrations through the Bureau 
of the Union. Any administration which 
does not answer within 6 weeks after the 
receipt of the said communication shall be 
considered as having given its assent. 

[ 7l ] (d) It is fully understood that such a 
preliminary agreement shall also be neces- 
sary whenever, in a European broadcast- 
ing station, operating outside the author- 
ized frequency bands, a change is made in 
the characteristics previously reported to 
the Bureau of the Union, and when such 
change is capable of affecting the con- 
dition of international interference. 

[ 72 ] 6. (i) In principle, the power of 
broadcasting stations must not exceed the 
value necessary to insure economically an 
effective high-quality national service 
within the limits of the country consid- 
ered. 

[ 73 ] (2) In principle, the location of 
powerful broadcasting stations, and espe- 
cially of those which operate near the 
limits of the frequency bands reserved to 
broadcasting, must be chosen in such a 
way as to avoid, so far as possible, inter- 
ference caused to^the broadcasting services 
of other countries or to other services 
operating on neighboring frequencies. 

[T*] j t The following table shows the 
allocation of frequencies (approximate 
wavelengths) to the various services. 

[Table omitted. Allocation of frequency 
bands between 10 and 60,000 kc (30,000 and 
5m).} 
[ 9S ] 8. (i) The use of type-B waves 



les dispositions de 1'alinea (2) ci-avant, 
sont apportees a 1'application du principe 
<noncl au I. 

[ 69 ] V) A defaut d'accord pr6alable entre 
les administrations des pays europeens 
contractants, la facult6 pr6vue au I ne 
pourra, dans les limites de la region euro- 
peenne, 6tre utilis6e en vue d'effectuer un 
service de radiodiffusion en dehors des 
bandes autorisees par le present Regle- 
ment sur des frequences au-dessous de 
i 500 kc/s (longueurs d'onde au-dessus 
de 200 m). 

[ 70 ] c) L 'administration qui desire etablir 
un tel service ou obtenir une modification 
des conditions fixees par un accord an- 
terieur relatif un tel service (frequence, 
puissance, position g6ographique, etc.) en 
saisit les administrations europeennes par 
rinterm6diaire du Bureau de TUnion. 
Toute administration qui n'aura pas 
r6pondu dans un d61ai de 6 semaines apres 
reception de ladite communication sera 
considr6e comme ayant donn son 
assentiment. 

[ 71 ] d) II est bien entendu qu T un tel 
accord prealable sera galement nces- 
saire toutes les fois que, dans une station 
de radiodiffusion europeenne, travaillant 
hors des bandes de frequences autoris6es, 
un changement sera apport6 aux carac- 
t6ristiques precedemment notifi6es au 
Bureau de 1' Union, et que ce changement 
sera susceptible d'affecter les conditions 
de brouillages internationaux. 
[ 7Z ] 6. (i) En principe, la puissance 
des stations de radiodiffusion ne doit pas 
depasser la valeur permettant d 'assurer 
economiquement un service national 
efficace et de bonne quality dans les limites 
du pays consid6r6. 

[ 73 ] (2) En principe, remplacement des 
stations de radiodiffusion puissantes, et 
plus particulierement de celles qui travail- 
lent pres des limites des bandes de fr^- 
quences r6servees a la radiodiffusion, doit 
tre choisi de maniere & eviter, autant que 
possible, la gne causee aux services de 
radiodiffusion des autres pays ou aux 
autres services travaillant avec des fre- 
quences voisines. 

[ 74 ] 7. Le tableau ci-apres donne la 
repartition des frequences (longueurs 
d'onde approximatives) entre les divers 
services. 

[Tableau omis, Repartition des bandes 
di >, frequences entre 10 et 60 ooo kc/s (30 ooo 
et5m).} 
[ 93 ] 8. (i) L'usage des ondes du type 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS, 



143 



shall be forbidden on all frequencies, ex- 
cept the following: 

375 kc (800 m) 
410 kc (730 m) 
425 kc (705 m) 
454 kc (660 m) 
500 kc (600 m) 
1,364 kc (220 m)* 

[ 94 ] (2) No new installation of trans- 
mitters of type-B waves may be made on 
ships or aircraft, except when these trans- 
mitters, working at full power, use less 
than 300 watts measured at the input of 
the audiofrequency supply transformer. 



[ 9& ] (3) The use of type-B waves on all 
frequencies shall be forbidden, beginning 
January I, 1940, except for transmitters 
meeting the power requirements stated in 
subparagraph (2) above. 
[ 9S ] (4) No new installation of type-B- 
wave transmitters may be made in a land 
or fixed station. The waves of this type 
shall be forbidden in all land stations be- 
ginning January I, 1935. 

[ 97 ] (5) The administrations shall en- 
deavor to abandon type-B waves, other 
than the 500-kc (6oo-m) wave, as soon as 
possible. 

[ 98 ] 9. The use of type-Ai waves only 
shall be authorized between 100 and 160 
kc (3,000 and 1,875 m) ; the only exception 
to this rule shall be for type-A2 waves 
which may be used in the band 100 to 125 
kc (3,000 to 2,400 m) for time signals ex- 
clusively. 

["] 10. In the band 460 to 550 kc (652 
to 545 m) no type of emission capable of 
rendering inoperative the distress, alarm, 
safety, or urgent signals sent on 500 kc 
(600 m) shall be authorized, 

[ 10 ] 11. (i) In the band 325 to 345 kc 
(923 to 870 m), no type of emission capa- 
ble of rendering inoperative distress, 
safety, or urgent signals shall be author- 
ized. 

[ x l ] (2) This rule shall not apply to 
regions in which special agreements pro- 
vide otherwise. 

[ l02 ] 12. (i) In principle, any station 
carrying on a service between fixed points 
on a wave with a frequency below no kc 



B est interdit pour toutes les frequences a 
Fexception des frequences suivantes: 

375 kc/s (800 m) 
410 kc/s (730 m) 
425 kc/s (705 m) 
454 kc/s (660 rn) 
500 kc/s (600 m) 
1364 kc/s (220 m)* 

[ u ] (2) Aucune nouvelle installation 
d'emetteurs d'ondes du type B ne peut 
tre faite sur des navires ou des aeronefs, 
sauf quand ces emetteurs, travaillant a 
pleine puissance, depenseront moins de 
300 watts mesures a 1'entree du trans- 
formateur d 'alimentation a frequence 
audible. 

[ 96 J (3) L'usage des ondes du type B de 
toutes frequences sera interdit a partir du 
i er Janvier 1940, sauf pour les emetteurs 
remplissant les conditions de puissance 
indiquees a 1'alinea (2) ci-avant. 
[ 96 ] (4) Aucune nouvelle installation 
d'emetteurs d 'ondes du type B ne peut 
etre faite dans une station terrestre ou 
fixe. Les ondes de ce type seront inter- 
dites dans toutes les stations terrestres a 
partir du i er Janvier 1935. 
[ 97 ] (5) Les administrations s'efforceront 
d'abandonner le plus t6t possible les 
ondes du type B, autres que 1'onde de 
500 kc/s (600 m). 

[ 98 ] 9. L'emploi des ondes du type Ai 
seulement est autoris entre 100 et 160 
kc/s (3 ooo et i 875 m) ; la seule exception 
a cette regie est relative aux ondes du 
type A2 qui peuvent tre utilisees dans la 
bande de 100 & 125 kc/s (3 ooo a 2 400 
m) pour les signaux horaires exclusive- 
ment. 

["] 10. Dans la bande de 460 550 
kc/s (652 a 545 m), aucun type d'emission 
susceptible de rendre inoperant les signaux 
de detresse, d'alarme, de security ou 
d'urgence, emis sur 500 kc/s (600 m), 
n'est autoris6. 

[ 10 ] II. (i) Dans la bande de 325 a 
345 kc/s (923 a 870 m) aucun type d'emis- 
sion susceptible de rendre inoperants les 
signaux de detresse, de security ou d'ur- 
gence, n'est autorise. 
[ lw ] (2) Cette regie ne s 'applique pas 
aux regions oh des accords particuliers en 
disposent autrement. 
[ m ] 12. (i) En principe, toute station 
qui assure un service entre points fixes sur 
une onde de frequence inferieure a no 



*See footnote 10 to the allocation table [omitted here]. 

* Voir la note 10 du tableau du repartition des frequences [pas inclus ici]. 



144 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



(wavelengths above 2,727 m) must use 
only one frequency, chosen from the 
bands allocated to the said service (7 
above), for each of its transmitters capa- 
ble of simultaneous operation. 

[ 103 ] (2) A station shall not be permitted 
to use a frequency other than that allo- 
cated as stated above, for a service be- 
tween fixed points. 

[ l04 ] 13. In principle, the stations shall 
use the same frequencies and the same 
types of emission for the transmission of 
messages by the unilateral method as for 
their normal service. Regional arrange- 
ments may, however, be made for the 
purpose of exempting the stations con- 
cerned from complying with this rule. 
[ 106 ] 14. A fixed station may, as sec- 
ondary service, on its normal working 
frequency, make transmissions intended 
for mobile stations on the following condi- 
tions: 

[ 106 ] (a) that the administrations ^ con- 
cerned deem it necessary to use this ex- 
ceptional working method; 
[ m ] (ty that no increase in interference 
results therefrom. 

[ 108 ] 15. In order to facilitate the ex- 
change of synoptic meteorological mes- 
sages in the European regions, the fre- 
quencies of 41.6 kc and 89.5 kc (7,210 m 
and 3,352 m) shall be allocated to this 
service. 

[ 109 ] 1 6. To facilitate rapid transmis- 
sion and distribution of information of 
value in the detection of crime and pur- 
suit of criminals, a frequency between 
37.5 and 100 kc (between 8, poo and 3,000 
m) shall be reserved for this purpose by 
regional arrangements. 
[ uo ] 17. Each administration may al- 
locate to amateur stations frequency 
bands in accordance with the allocation 
table (7 above). 

[ m ] 1 8. In order to decrease interfer- 
ence in the frequency bands above 4,000 
kc (wavelengths below 75 m), used by the 
mobile service, and particularly in order 
to avoid interfering with the long-distance 
telephone communications of this service, 
the administrations agree to adopt the 
following rules, wherever possible, taking 
into account current engineering de- 
velopment: 

[ 1U ] 00 W In "the frequency bands 
above 5,500 kc (wavelengths below 54.55 



kc/s (longueur d'onde supeVieure a 2 727 
m) doit employer une seule frequence, 
choisie parmi les bandes attributes audit 
service (7 ci-avant), pour chactm des 
6metteurs qu'elle comporte, susceptibles 
de fonctionner simul tankmen t. 
[ l08 ] (2) II n'est pas permis & une station 
de faire usage, pour un service entre 
points fixes, d'une frequence autre que 
celle attribute comme il est dit ci- 
avant. 

[ l04 ] 13. En principe, les stations em- 
ploient les m6mes frequences et les m^mes 
types demission pour les transmissions de 
messages par la meihode unilat&rale que 
pour leur service normal. Toutefois, des 
arrangements re"gionaux peuvent tre 
realises en vue de dispenser les stations 
int&resse'es de se soumettre a cette regie. 
[ l05 ] 14. Une station fixe peut effec- 
tuer, sur sa frequence normale de travail, 
comme service secondaire, des Emissions 
destinies aux stations mobiles, a condi- 
tion: 

[ loe ] a) que les administrations inte"- 
resse"es jugent ncessaire d'utiliser cette 
mthode exceptionnelle de travail; 
[ IOT ] &) qu'il n'en resulte aucune aug- 
mentation des brouillages. 
[ l08 ] 15. Afin de faciliter l'change des 
messages me'te'orologiques synoptiques 
dans les regions europennes, les fr- 
quences 41,6 kc/s et 89,5 kc/s (7210 m 
et 3 352 m) sont attributes a ce service. 

[ los ] 1 6. Pour faciliter la transmission 
et la distribution rapides des renseigne- 
ments utiles & la d6couverte des crimes et 
a la poursuite des criminels, une frequence 
entre 37,5 et 100 kc/s (entre 8 ooo et 
3 ooo m) sera re'serv^e pour cet objet, par 
des arrangements regionaux. 
[ ll ] 17. Chaque administration peut 
attribuer aux stations d'amateur des 
bandes de frequences conformes au 
tableau de repartition (7 ci-avant). 
[ lu ] 1 8. En vue de reduire les brouil- 
lages dans les bandes de frequences su- 
p6rieures a 4 ooo kc/s (longueurs d'onde 
inferieures a 75 m), utilises par le service 
mobile, et en particulier pour eViter de 
gner les communications telephoniques 
grande distance de ce service, les admin- 
istrations sont d'accord pour adopter, 
autant que possible, les regies suivantes, 
en tenant compte du deVeloppement de 
la technique courante: 
[ 112 ] (i) a) Dans les bandes de fre- 
quences superieures a 5 500 kc/s (Ion- 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



m) allocated exclusively to the mobile 
service, the frequencies (wavelengths) 
which must be used by ship stations 
carrying on commercial service shall be on 
the low-frequency (longwave) side of the 
band, and especially in the limits of the 
harmonic bands enumerated below: 



5,500 to 5,550 kc 

6,170 to 6,250 kc 

8,230 to 8,330 kc 

11,000 to 11,100 kc 

12,340 to 12,600 kc 

16,460 to 16,660 kc 

22,000 tO 22,200 kc 



(54-55 to 54.05 m) 
(48.62 to 48.00 m) 
(36.45 to 36.01 m) 
(27.27 to 27.03 m) 
(24.31 to 24.00 m) 
(18.23 to l8 - 01 m ) 
(13.64 to 13.51 m) 



[ii 3 ] NOTE. The frequency bands 4,115 
to 4,165 kc (72.90 to 72.03 m) may also be 
used by the stations mentioned above 
[see also (2) (c) below]. 

["*] (&) However, any commercial ship 
station the emissions of which comply 
with the frequency tolerances required of 
land stations under 2 (2) of article 6, 
may transmit on the same frequency as 
the coast station with which it communi- 
cates. 

[ ll8 ] (c) When a communication for which 
no special arrangement has been made 
must be established between a ship sta- 
tion, on one hand, and another ship sta- 
tion or a coast station, on the other hand, 
the mobile station shall use one of the fol- 
lowing frequencies situated approximately 
in the middle of the bands : 

4,140 kc (72.46 m 

5,520 kc (54.35 

6,210 kc (48.31 

8,280 kc (36.23 m 
11,040 kc (27.17 m 
12,420 kc (24.15 nri 
16,560 kc (18.12 m) 
22,080 kc (13.59 m) 

pie] NOTE. The administrations agree, 
in reporting the frequency of a coast sta- 
tion, to indicate on which one of the waves 
specified in subparagraph (i) (c) listening 
will be carried on. 

[U7] ( 2 ) (a) Ship stations carrying on 
commercial service shall use the shared 
bands above 4,000 kc (wavelengths below 
75 m) only when their emissions comply 
with the frequency tolerances specified for 
land stations in 2 (2) of article 6. In 
this case, the frequencies used must be 
chosen on the higher-frequency (shorter- 
wave) side of the shared band and, more 



gueurs d'onde inferieures a 54,55 m) at- 
tribuees exclusivement au service mobile, 
les frequences (longueurs d'onde) qui 
devront tre utilisees par les stations de 
navire affectees au service commercial 
seront du c6te des basses frequences 
(ondes plus longues) et spedalement dans 
les limites des bandes harmoniques 
enumerees ci-apres: 

5 500 & 5 550 kc/s (54,55 & 54,05 m) 

6 170 6 250 kc/s (48,62 4 48,00 m) 
8 230 & 8 330 kc/s (36,45 & 36,01 m) 

11 ooo an 100 kc/s (27,27 & 27,03 m) 

12 340 & 12 500 kc/s (24,31 & 24,00 m) 
1 6 460 & 1 6 660 kc/s (18,23 & 1 8,01 m) 
22 ooo & 22 200 kc/s (13,64 & 13,51 m) 

[ U3 ] NOTE. Les bandes de frequences de 
4115 a 4165 kc/s (72,90 & 72,03 m) 
peuvent egalement tre utilisees par les 
stations susdites [voir aussi (2), c) 
ci-apres]. 

[ U4 ] b) Cependant, toute station com- 
merciale de navire dont remission satis- 
fait aux tolerances de frequence exigees 
des stations terrestres au 2, (2) de 1'ar- 
ticle 6, peut emettre sur la mme fre- 
quence que la station c6tiere avec laquelle 
elle communique. 

l ll& ] c) Quand une communication, pour 
laquelle aucun arrangement special n'a 
ete fait, doit tre etablid entre une station 
de navire, d'une part, et une autre station 
de navire ou une station cdtiere, d'autre 
part, la station mobile utilisera une des 
frequences suiyantes situees approxima- 
tivement au milieu des bandes: 

4 140 kc/s (72,46 m) 

5 520 kc/s (54,35 m; 

6 210 kc/s (48,31 m. 
8 280 kc/s (36,23 m. 

11 040 kc/s (27,17 m) 

12 420 kc/s (24,15 m) 
1 6 560 kc/s (18,12 m) 
22 080 kc/s (13,59 m) 

[ 1W ] NOTE. Les administrations sont 
d'accord pour indiquer, en notifiant la 
frequence d'une station c6tiere, sur 
laquelle des ondes spedfiees & 1'alinea (l), 
litt. c) 1'ecoute sera faite. 
[ 117 ] (2) a) Les stations de navire affec- 
tees au service commercial n'utiliseront 
les bandes communes superieures a 4 ooo 
kc/s (longueurs d'onde inferieures 75 m) 
qu'autant que leurs emissions satisferont 
aux tolerances de frequence specifics pour 
les stations terrestres au 2, (2) de 1'ar- 
ticle 6. Dans ces cas, les frequences 
employees doivent tre choisies du c6te 



146 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



especially, in the limits of the harmonic 
bands enumerated below: 



4,400 to 4,450 kc (68.18 to 67,42 m) 

8,800 to 8,900 kc (34.09 to 33.71 m) 

13,200 to 13,350 kc (22.73 to 22.47 m) 

17,600 to 17,750 kc (17.05 to 16.90 m) 

22,900 to 23,000 kc (13.10 to 13.04 m) 

[ U8 ] (&) Frequencies chosen in the por- 
tion of the band reserved to mobile services 
from 6,600 to 6,675 kc (45.45 to 44.94 m), 
in harmonic relation with the preceding 
bands, may also be used. 

[ ll9 ] (c) The provisions of subparagraph 
(2) (a) shall not apply to the portion of the 
shared band between 4,115 and 4,165 kc 
(72.90 and 72.03 m) which may be used by 
any ship station carrying on a commer- 
cial service. 

[ m ] (3) In selecting frequencies for new 
fixed and coast stations, the administra- 
tions shall avoid using the frequencies in 
the bands specified in subparagraphs (i) 
(a), (2) (a), (2) (&), and (2) (c). 

[ m ] 19- (i) It is recognized that the 
frequencies between 6,000 and 30,000 kc 
(50 and 10 m) are very efficient for long- 
distance communications. 
[ m ] (2) The administrations shall make 
the greatest possible effort to reserve the 
frequencies of this band for this purpose, 
except when their use for short- or medi- 
um-distance communication is not likely 
to interfere with long-distance communi- 
cations. 

t 123 ] 20. In Europe, Africa, and Asia, 
low-power directional radiobeacons the 
range of which does not exceed about 50 
km may use any frequency in the band 
1,500 to 3,500 kc (200 to 85.71 m) except 
the guard band of 1,630 to 1,670 kc (184 
to 1 80 m) subject to agreements with the 
countries whose services are likely to be 
interfered with. 



ARTICLE 8. Amateur Stations and Private 
Experimental Stations 

P 24 ] I. The exchange of communica- 
tions between amateur stations and be- 
tween private experimental stations of 
different countries shall be forbidden if 
the administration of one of the interested 
countries has given notice of its opposition 
to this exchange. 



des frequences les plus hautes (ondes plus 
courtes) de la bande commune et, plus 
sp6cialement, dans les limites des bandes 
harmoniques 6num6rees ci-apres: 

4 400 & 4 450 kc/s (68, 1 8 & 67,42 m) 

8 800 8 900 kc/s (34,09 a 33,71 m) 

13 200 i 13 350 kc/s (22,73 & 22,47 m) 

17 600 a 17 750 kc/s (17,05 a 16,90 m) 

22 900 & 23 ooo kc/s (13,10 a 13,04 m) 

[us] &) On peut egalement utiliser des 
frequences choisies dans la portion de la 
bande r6serv6e aux services mobiles de 
6 600 a 6 675 kc/s (4545 & 4-4,94 m), en 
relation harmonique avec les bandes 
pr6c6dentes. 

[ 119 ] c) Les prescriptions de Talinea (2), 
a) ne s'appliquent pas a la portion de la 
bande commune entre 4 115 et 4 165 
kc/s (72,90 et 72,03 m) qui peut tre 
utilisee par toute station de navire affec- 
t6e au service commercial. 
[ 12 ] (3) En choisissant les frequences 
des nouvelles stations fixes et c6tieres, les 
administrations eviteront d 'employer les 
frequences des bandes sp6cifiees dans les 
alineas (i), litt. a), (2), litt. a), (2), litt. 6) 
et (2), litt. c). 

[ 121 ] 19. (i) U est reconnu que les fr6- 
quences entre 6 ooo et 30 ooo kc/s (50 et 
10 m) sont tres efficaces pour les com- 
munications a longue distance. 
p 2 ] (2) Les administrations s'efforce- 
ront, dans toute la mesure du possible, de 
r6server les frequences de cette bande dans 
ce but, except6 quand leur emploi pour des 
communications a courte ou a moyenne 
distance n'est pas susceptible de brouiller 
les communications a grande distance. 
[123] 20. En Europe, Afrique, Asie, les 
radiophares directionnels de faible puis- 
sance et dont la portee ne depasse pas 50 
km environ peuvent faire usage de toute 
frequence dans la bande de i 500 a 3 500 
kc/s (200 a 85,71 m), a 1'exception de la 
bande de protection de i 630 & i 670 kc/s 
(184 a 180 m), sous reserve d'accord des 
pays dont les services soht susceptibles 
d^tre brouilles. 

ARTICLE 8. Stations d' amateur et stations 
experimental privees 

[ 124 ] i. L'6change de communications 
entre stations d 'amateur et entre stations 
exp6rimentales privies de pays differents 
est interdit si 1'administration de Fun des 
pays interesses a notifi6 son opposition a 
cet echange. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



147 



[ 12S ] 2. (i) When this exchange is per- 
mitted, the communications must be car- 
ried on in plain language and be limited to 
messages relating to experiments and to 
remarks of a private nature for which, by 
reason of their lack of importance, the use 
of the telegraph service could not enter 
into consideration. It shall be strictly 
forbidden for owners of amateur stations 
to transmit international communications 
emanating from third persons. 

[ 126 ] (2) The foregoing provisions may be 
modified by special arrangements between 
the interested countries. 
[ m ] 3- In amateur stations or in pri- 
vate experimental stations, authorized to 
conduct transmissions, any person operat- 
ing the apparatus on his own account or 
for third persons must have proved that he 
is able to transmit texts in Morse code 
signals and to read, by aural radiotele- 
graph reception, texts so transmitted. 
He can be replaced only by authorized 
persons possessing the same qualifications. 



[ 12S ] 4. Administrations shall take such 
measures as they judge necessary to 
verify, from a technical standpoint, the 
qualifications of any person operating the 
apparatus. 

[ 129 ] 5- (i) The maximum power which 
amateur stations and private experimental 
stations may use shall be fixed by the inter- 
ested administrations, taking account of 
the technical qualifications of the opera- 
tors and of the conditions under which the 
said stations must work. 
[ 13 ] (2) All the general rules laid down 
in the Convention and in the present 
Regulations shall apply to amateur stations 
and to private experimental stations. In 
particular, the frequency of the wave 
emitted must be as constant and as free 
from harmonics as the state of the art 
permits. 

l m ] (3) In the course of their emissions, 
these stations must, at short intervals, 
transmit their call signals or, in the case of 
experimental stations not yet provided 
with call signals, their names. 

ARTICLE 9. Conditions to be Observed by 
Mobile Stations 

A. General 

[ m ] 1 1. (i) Mobile stations must be 
established in such a way as to conform, as 



[ m ] 2. (i) Lorsque cet ^change est 
permis, les communications doivent s'ef- 
fectuer en langage clair et se limiter aux 
messages ayant trait aux experiences et a 
des remarques d'un caract&re personnel 
pour lesquelles, en raison de leur manque 
d'importance, le recours au service 
teiegraphique public ne saurait entrer en 
consideration. II est absolument interdit 
aux titulaires des stations d 'amateur de 
transmettre des communications interna- 
tionales 6manant de tierces personnes. 
[ m ] (2) Les dispositions ci-avant peu- 
vent tre modifie'es par des arrangements 
particuliers entre les pays int6resses. 
[X27] Dans les stations d'amateur ou 
dans les stations experimentales privies, 
autoris6es effectuer des emissions, toute 
personne manceuvrant les appareils, pour 
son propre compte ou pour celui de tiers, 
doit avoir prouv6 qu'elle est apte a trans- 
mettre les textes en signaux du code 
Morse et a lire, a la reception radio- 
teiegraphique auditive, les textes ainsi 
transmis. Elle ne peut se faire remplacer 
que par des personnes autorise'es poss6- 
dant les mSmes aptitudes. 
[ m ] 4. Les administrations prennent 
telles mesures qu'elles jugent n6cessaires 
pour verifier les capacitis, au point de vue 
technique, de toute personne manceuvrant 
les appareils. 

[ m ] 5- (i) La puissance maximum que 
les stations d'amateur et les stations ex- 
perimentales privies peuvent utiliser est 
fix6e par les administrations interess^es, 
en tenant compte des qualits techniques 
des operateurs et des conditions dans les- 
quelles lesdites stations doivent travailler. 
[ 18 ] (2) Toutes les regies g6nerales fixees 
dans la Convention et dans le present 
Rglement s'appliquent aux stations 
d'amateur et aux stations experimentales 
privees. En particulier, la frequence des 
ondes 6mises doit tre aussi constante et 
aussi exempte d'harmoniques que l'6tat 
de la technique le permet. 
[ m ] (3) Au cours de leurs emissions, ces 
stations doivent transmettre, a de courts 
intervalles, leur indicatif d'appel, ou leur 
nom dans le cas de stations experimentales 
non encore pourvues d'indicatif d'appel. 

ARTICLE 9. Conditions remplir par les 
stations mobiles 

A. Genemlitis 

[ 132 ] i. (i) Les stations mobiles doi- 
vent tre etablies de maniere a se con- 



148 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



regards frequencies and types of waves, to 
the general provisions forming the subject 
of article 7. 

[ 133 ] (2) In addition, no new type-B- 
wave transmitter installation shall be 
made in mobile stations, except when these 
transmitters, working at full power, use 
less than 300 watts measured at the input 
of the audiofrequency supply transformer. 



[ m ] (3) Finally, the use of type-B waves 
on all frequencies shall be forbidden, be- 
ginning with January I, 1940, except for 
transmitters fulfilling the same conditions 
as above regarding power. 
[ 135 ] 2. The frequency of emission of 
mobile stations shall be verified as often as 
possible by the inspection service to which 
they are subject. 

[ l36 ] 3- Receiving apparatus must be 
such that the current which they induce 
into the antenna shall be as low as possible 
and shall not disturb neighboring stations. 

[ l87 ] 4. Transmitting and receiving sets 
of any mobile station must permit of mak- 
ing frequency changes as rapidly as possi- 
ble. All installations must be such that, 
after the communication is established, 
the time necessary to change from trans- 
mission to reception and vice versa shall 
be as short as possible. 



B.Ship Stations 

[ 138 j 5. (i) The transmitting appara- 
tus used in ship stations working on type- 
A2 or -B waves in the authorized band be- 
tween 365 and 515 kc (822 and 583 m) 
must be provided with devices making it 
possible conveniently and appreciably to 
reduce the power thereof. 

[ 139 ] (2) This provision shall not apply to 
transmitters in which the power, as meas- 
ured at full load, does not exceed 300 watts 
on the transmitting-tube plates (type-A2 
emission) or at the input of the audio- 
frequency supply transformers (type-B 
emission). 

[ 14 ] (3) All ship stations transmitting on 
frequencies in the band 100 to 160 kc 
(3,000 to 1,875 m ) an d on frequencies 
above 4,000 kc (wavelengths below 75 m) 
must be equipped with a wave meter hav- 
ing a precision at least equal to 5/1000, or 
with an equivalent device. 



former, en ce qui concerne les frequences 
et les types d'onde, aux dispositions 
generates faisant 1'objet de Tarticle 7. 
pas] ( 2 ) En outre, aucune nouvelle in- 
stallation d'emetteurs d'ondes du type B 
ne peut tre faite, dans les stations 
mobiles, sauf quand ces emetteurs, tra- 
vaillant a pleine puissance, d6penseront 
moins de 300 watts mesur6s a 1'entree du 
transformateur d 'alimentation a fr6quence 
audible. 

f 134 ] (3) Enfin, 1'emploi des ondes du 
type B de toutes frequences sera interdit a 
partir du i er Janvier 1940, sauf pour les 
Emetteurs remplissant les mSmes condi- 
tions de puissance que ci-avant. 
[ l35 ] 2. La frequence demission des 
stations mobiles sera verified le plus 
sou vent possible par le service d 'inspec- 
tion dont elles relevent. 
[ 13G ] 3. Les appareils r6cepteurs dpi- 
vent 6tre tels que le courant qu'ils in- 
duisent dans 1'antenne soit aussi r6duit 
que possible et n'incommode pas les sta- 
tions du voisinage. 

[ 137 ] 4. Les changements de frequence 
dans les appareils emetteurs et recepteurs 
de toute station mobile doivent pouvoir 
Itre effectu6s aussi rapidernent que possi- 
ble. Toutes les installations doivent Stre 
telles, que la communication tant 
6tablie, le temps necessaire au passage de 
remission & la r6ception et vice-versa soit 
aussi recluit que possible. 

B. Stations de navire 

[ 138 ] 5. (i) Les appareils d'emission 
utilises dans les stations de navire travail- 
lant sur des ondes du type A2 ou B dans 
les bandes autorise'es entre 365 et 515 
kc/s (822 et 583 m) doivent tre pourvus 
de dispositifs permettant, d'une maniere 
facile, d'en r&iuire sensiblement la 
puissance. 

[ 139 ] (2) Cette disposition ne s'applique 
pas aux emetteurs dont la puissance, 
mesur6e a pleine charge, ne depasse pas 
300 watts a la plaque des lampes met- 
trices (emission du type A.2) ou 1'entree 
des transformateurs d 'alimentation a fr6- 
quence audible (Emission du type B). 
[ 14 ] (3) Toutes les stations de navire 
6mettant sur des frequences dans les 
bandes de 100 a 160 kc/s (3 ooo a i 875 
m) et sur des frequences supeYieures a 
4 ooo kc/s (longueurs d'onde inf6rieures & 
75 m) doivent 6tre munies d'un onde- 
metre ayant une precision au moins 6gale 
a 5/1 ooo ou d'un dispositif equivalent. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



149 



[i] 6. Any station installed on 
board a ship, compulsorily provided with 
radio apparatus as a result of an inter- 
national agreement, must be able to trans- 
mit and to receive on the wave of 500 kc 
(600 m), type-A2 or -B and, in addition, 
on at least one other type-As or -B wave, 
in the authorized band between 365 and 
485 kc (822 and 619 m). 
[ 142 ] 7- (i) In addition to the waves 
mentioned above, ship stations equipped 
to transmit type-Ai, -A2, or -A3 waves 
may use the waves authorized in article 7. 

[* 43 ] (2) The use of type-B waves shall be 
prohibited on all frequencies, except the 
following ones; 

375 kc (800 m) 
410 kc (730 m) 
425 kc (705 m) 
454 kc (660 m) 
500 kc (600 m) 
1,364 kc (220 m)* 

[ 144 ] 8. All the ship station apparatus 
installed for the transmission of type-Ai 
waves in the authorized band between 100 
and 160 kc (3,000 and 1,875 m) must per- 
mit of using at least two frequencies, 
selected in this band, in addition to the 
frequency of 143 kc (2,100 m). 

[ 14B ] 9- 00 All stations on board ships 
compulsorily provided with radiotele- 
graph apparatus must be capable of re- 
ceiving the wave of 500 kc (600 m) and, in 
addition, all the waves necessary to the 
operation of the service which they carry 
on. 

[] (2) These stations must be capable 
of receiving types Ai and A2 waves on the 
same frequencies easily and efficiently. 



C. Aircraft Stations 
[147] jo. (i) (a) Any station installed 
on board an aircraft flying over a mari- 
time route, and compulsorily provided 
with radio apparatus as the result of an 
international agreement, must be capable 
of transmitting and receiving on the wave 
of 500 kc (600 m), type A2 or B. 
[ 148 ] (&) As regards the restriction in the 
use of type-B waves, see B, 7 (2) above. 

[i*9] ( 2 ) ( a ) Any aircraft station must 



[ Ml ] 6. Toute station installee & bord 
d'un navire obligatoirement pourvu d'ap- 
pareils radioelectriques par suite d'un ac- 
cord international doit pouvoir emettre et 
recevoir sur 1 'oxide de 500 kc/s (600 m), du 
type A2 ou B et, en outre, au moins sur 
une autre onde, du type A2 ou B, dans les 
bandes autorisees entre 365 et 485 kc/s 
(822 et 619 m). 

I 142 ] 7- W En plus des ondes visees ci- 
avant, les stations de navire quipes pour 
emettre des ondes des types Ai, A2 ou A3 
peuvent employer les ondes autorisees 
1'article 7. 

[ 143 ] (2) L'usage des ondes du type B est 
interdit pour toutes les frequences 4 Tex- 
ception des frequences suivantes: 

375 kc/s (800 m) 
410 kc/s (730 m) 
425 kc/s (705 m) 
454 kc/s (660 m) 
500 kc/s (600 m) 
I 364 kc/s (220 m)* 

[ 144 ] 8. Tous les appareils de stations 
de navire etablis pour la transmission 
d'ondes du type Ai des bandes autorisees 
entre 100 et 160 kc/s (3 opo et I 875 m) 
doivent permettre 1'emploi, en plus dela 
frequence de 143 kc/s (2 100 m), dedeux 
frequences au minimum, choisies dans ces 
bandes. 

[ 145 ] 9. (i) Toutes les stations & bord 
des navires obligatoirement pourvus d 'ap- 
pareils radiotelegraphiques doivent tre 
m6me de recevoir 1'onde de 500 kc/s (600 
m) et, en outre, toutes les ondes nces- 
saires & raccomplissement du service 
qu'elles effectuent. 

[* 48 ] (2) Ces stations doivent toe & 
mme de recevoir facilement et efficace- 
rnent, sur les mSmes frequences, les ondes 
des types Ai et A2. 

C. Stations d'aSronef 

[ 147 ] 10. (i) a) Toute station installee 

bord d'un a6ronef effectuant un par- 

cours maritime, obligatoirement ^pourvu 

d 'appareils radio61ectriques par suite d'un 

accord international, doit pouvoir emettre 

et recevoir sur 1'onde de 500 kc/s (600 m) f 

du type A2 ou B. 

[ 148 ] b) En ce qui concerne la restriction 

dans Tusage des ondes du type B, voir 

sous B, 7 (2) ci-avant. 

[* 49 ] (2) a) Toute station d'aeronef doit 



* See note 10 to the frequency allocation table [omitted here]. 

* Voir la note 10 du tableau de repartition des frequences [pas inclus ici]. 



ISO 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



be capable of transmitting and receiving 
the wave of 333 kc (900 m), type A2 or 

A3- 

[ X5 ] (&) This rule shall not apply to air- 
craft stations flying over regions ^ where 
local agreements providing otherwise are 
in force. 

[Articles 10-11 omitted. Operators' 
Certificates. Authority of the Master.] 

ARTICLE 12* Inspection of Stations 
[ m ] i. (i) The competent govern- 
ments or administrations of countries 
where a mobile station calls, may demand 
the production of the license. The opera- 
tor of the mobile station or the person 
responsible for the station must submit to 
this verification. The license must be 
kept in such a way that it may be fur- 
nished without delay. However, the 
production of the license may be replaced 
by a permanent posting in the station, of 
a copy of the license certified by the 
authority which has granted it. 
[IDS] ( 2 ) When the license cannot be 
produced or when manifest irregularities 
are detected, the governments or ad- 
ministrations may proceed to the inspec- 
tion of radio installations in order to be 
assured that they satisfy the require- 
ments of the present Regulations. 

[ 194 ] (3) Moreover, the inspectors shall 
have the right to demand the production 
of the operators' certificates although no 
proof of professional qualifications may be 
demanded. 

[ 19S ] 2. (i) When a government or an 
administration has found it necessary to 
resort to the measures provided for in I 
above, or when it has not been possible to 
produce the operators' certificates, it shall 
be necessary immediately to inform 
thereof the government or the administra- 
tion to which the mobile station in ques- 
tion is subject. In addition, the pro- 
cedure specified in article 13 shall be 
followed should necessity arise. 
[196] ( 2 ) The official of the government or 
of the administration which has inspected 
the station must, before leaving the latter, 
communicate his findings to the com- 
mander or to the responsible person (art. 
n) or to their substitute. 
[i 97 ] 3. As regards the technical and 
operating conditions which mobile sta- 
tions holding a license must satisfy in the 



pouvoir dmettre et recevoir 1'onde de 333 
kc/s (900 m), du type A2 ou A3. 

[ 16 ] b) Cette regie ne s'applique pas aux 
stations d'a&ronef survolant les regions ou 
des accords locaux, qui en disposent autre- 
ment, sont en vigueur. 

[Articles 10-11 omis. Certificats des 
operateurs. Autorite du commandant.} 

ARTICLE 12. Inspection des stations 
[192] i t (!) Les gouvernements ou ad- 
ministrations comp6tents des pays ou une 
station mobile fait escale peuvent exiger 
la production de la licence. L' op<rateur 
de la station mobile, ou la personne respon- 
sable de la station, doit se prater a cette 
constatation. La licence doit 6tre con- 
serv6e de facon qu'elle puisse tre fournie 
sans d61ai. Toutefois, la production de la 
licence peut tre remplace*e par 1'affichage 
a demeure, dans la station, d'une copie de 
la licence, certifiee conforme par I'autorit6 
qui 1'a d61ivr6e. 

[ 193 ] (2) Lorsque la licence ne peut 8tre 
produite, ou que des anomalies manifestes 
sont constat6es, les gouvernements ou ad- 
ministrations peuvent faire procder a 
1'inspection des installations radio61ec- 
triques, en vue de s'assurer qu'elles re"- 
pondent aux stipulations du present 
Rglement. 

[ 194 ] (3) En outre, les inspecteurs sont en 
droit d'exiger la production des certificats 
des op&rateurs, sans qu'aucune justifica- 
tion de connaissances professionnelles 
puisse 6tre demande'e. 
[ 19B ] 2 (i) Lorsqu'ungouvernementou 
une administration s'est trouv6 dans 1'ob- 
ligation de recourir a la mesure pr6vue au 
i ci-avant ou lorsque les certificats 
d'op6rateur n'ont pu toe produits, il y a 
lieu d'en informer imm^diatement le gou- 
vernement pu Tadministration dont de*- 
pend la station mobile en cause. Pour le 
surplus, il est proce"d6, le cas ech6ant, 
ainsi que le present 1'article 13. 

[ 196 ] (2) Le d616gu6 du gouvernement ou 
de 1' administration qui a inspect^ la sta- 
tion doit, avant de quitter celle-ci, faire 
part de ses constatations au commandant 
ou a la personne responsable (article il) 
ou a leur remplagant. 
[ l97 ] 3. En ce qui concerne les condi- 
tions techniques et d'exploitation aux- 
quelles doivent satisfaire, pour le service 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



international radio-communication serv- 
ice, the contracting governments shall 
bind themselves not to impose upon for- 
eign stations which are temporarily 
located in their territorial waters, or 
which may stop temporarily in their terri- 
tory, conditions more stringent than those 
which are provided for in the present 
Regulations. These provisions shall in 
no way affect the provisions which, com- 
ing within the scope of international 
agreements relative to maritime or air 
navigation, are not determined in the 
present Regulations. 



ARTICLE 13. Reporting of Violations 

[ lfl8 ] i. Violations of the Convention or 
the Radio Regulations shall be reported 
by the stations detecting them to their 
administration by means of statements 
conforming to the model shown in ap- 
pendix 3. 

[ l99 ] 2. In case of serious violations 
committed by a station, representations 
must be made to the administration of the 
country to which this station is subject. 

[ 20 ] 3. If an administration has knowl- 
edge of a violation of the Convention or of 
the Regulations, by a station which it has 
authorized, it shall ascertain the facts, 
determine the responsibility, and take 
the necessary action. 

ARTICLE 14. Call Signals 

poi] i. (i) All^ stations open to the 
international service of public correspond- 
ence, as well as private experimental 
stations, amateur stations, and private 
radio-communication stations, must have 
call signals from the international series 
assigned to each country in the following 
table. 1 In this table, the first letter or 
the first two letters of the call signals show 
the nationality of the stations. 



[ 202 ] (2) When a fixed station in the 
international service uses more than one 
frequency, each frequency shall be 
designated by a separate call signal used 
for that frequency only. 



de radiocommunication international, les 
stations mobiles titulaires d'une licence, 
les gouvernements contractants s'en- 
gagent a ne pas imposer aux stations 
mobiles trangres qui se trouvent tern- 
porairement dans leurs eaux territoriales, 
ou s'arrtent temporairement sur leur ter- 
ritoire, des conditions plus rigoureuses que 
celles qui sont prvues dans le present 
R&glement. Ces prescriptions n'affectent 
en rien les dispositions qui, 6tant du res- 
sort d 'accords internationaux relatifs a la 
navigation maritime ou aerienne, ne sont 
pas determiners dans le present R&gle- 
ment. 

ARTICLE 13. Rapport sur les infractions 

[ 198 ] I. Les infractions la Convention 
ou aux R&glements des radiocommunica- 
tions sont signa!6es a leur administration 
par les stations qui les constatent et ce, 
au moyen d'etats cpnformes au module 
reproduit a 1'appendice 3. 
[ 199 ] 2. Dans le cas d 'infractions im- 
portantes, commises par une station, des 
representations doivent 8tre faites a 1'ad- 
ministration du pays dont depend cette 
station. 

[ 20 ] 3- Si une administration a con- 
naissance d'une infraction a la Conven- 
tion ou aux Rglements, commise dans 
une des stations qu'elle a autoris6es, elle 
constate les faits, fixe les responsabilite's 
et prend les mesures n6cessaires. 

ARTICLE 14. Indicatifs d'appel 

[ 201 ] i. (i) Toutes les stations ouvertes 
au service international de la correspon- 
dance publique, ainsi que les stations 
experimental privies, les stations d'ama- 
teur et les stations privies de radiocom- 
munication, doivent possder des indicatifs 
d'appel de la s6rie Internationale attri- 
bute a chaque pays dans le tableau de 
repartition ci-apr6s. Dans ce tableau, la 
premiere lettre ou les deux premieres let- 
tres prevues pour les indicatifs d'appel 
distinguent la nationality des stations. 
[ 202 ] (2) Lorsqu'une station fixe em- 
ploie, dans le service international, plus 
d'une frequence, chaque frequence est 
d6sign6e par un indicatif d'appel dis- 
tinct, utilise uniquement pour cette fre"- 
quence. 



i The English translation of the table is not here reproduced. ED. 



152 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 
P 03 ] TABLEAU DE REPARTITION DBS INDICATIFS D ? APPEL 



No. 317 



Pays 


Indicatifs 


Chili . . . 


CAA-CEZ 


Canada 


CFA-CKZ 


Cuba 


CLA-CMZ 


Maroc 


CNA-CNZ 


Cuba 


COA-COZ 


Bolivie 


CPA-CPZ 


Colonies portugaises 


CQA-CRZ 


Portugal 


CSA-CUZ 


Uruguay 


CVA-CXZ 


Canada 


CYA-CZZ 


Allemagne 


D 


Espagne 


EAA-EHZ 


Etat libre d'Irlande 


EIA-EIZ 


Republique de Liberia .... 


ELA-ELZ 


Perse. 


EPA-EQZ 


Estonie 


ESA-ESZ 


Ethiopie 


ETA-ETZ 


Territoire de la Sarre 


EZA-EZZ 


France et colonies et pro-, 
tectorats 


F 


Grande-Bretagne 


G 


Hongrie 


HAA-HAZ 


Confederation suisse 


HBA-HBZ 


Equateur 


HCA-HCZ 


Republique d'Ha'itL 


HHA-HHZ 


Republique Dominicaine . . . 
Republique de Colombie . . . 
Republique de Panama .... 
R6publique de Honduras , . . 
Siam 


HIA-HIZ 
HJA-HKZ 
HPA-HPZ 
HRA-HRZ 
HSA-HSZ 


Etat de la Cite du Vatican. . 
Hedjaz , 


HVA-HVZ 
HZA-HZZ 


Italic et colonies 


I 


Japon 


J 


Etats-Unis d'Amerique .... 
Norvege . ... 


K 
LAA-LNZ 


Republique Argentine 


LOA-LWZ 


Luxembourg . . , 


LXA-LXZ 


Lithuanie 


LYA-LYZ 


Bulgarie 


LZA-LZZ 


Grande-Bretagne 


M 


Etats-Unis d'Amerique .... 
Perou 


N 
OAA-OCZ 


Autriche. ..,.,,,, f 


OEA-OEZ 


Finlande. . . 


OFA-OHZ 


Tchecoslovaquie 


OKA-OKZ 


Belgique et colonies 


ONA-OTZ 


Danemark 


OUA-OZZ 







[204] j 2 . Call signals shall consist of: 

[205] ( a ) three letters, in the case of land 
stations; 

p 06 ] (6) three letters, or three letters fol- 
lowed by a single figure (other than o or 
i), in the case of fixed stations; 
[207] ( c ) f our letters, in the case of ship 
stations; 



Pays 


Indicatifs 


Pays-Bas 


PAA-PIZ 


Curasao 


PJA-PJZ 




PKA-POZ 


Bresil 


PPA-PYZ 




PZA-PZZ 


(Abr6viations) 


Q 


Union des Republiques 
Sovietistes Socialistes. . . . 
Suede 


R 

SAA-SMZ 


Pologne 


SOA-SRZ 


Eervote 


STA-SUZ 


Grece 


SVA-SZZ 


Turquie 


TAA-TCZ 


Islande . - ... 


TFA-TFZ 


Guatemala 


TGA-TGZ 


Costa- Rica 


TIA-TIZ 


France et colonies et pro-, 
tectorats 


TKA-TZZ 


Union des Republiques 
Sovietistes Socialistes. . . . 
Canada. . 


U 
VAA-VGZ 


Federation Australienne. . . . 
Terre-Neuve . 


VHA-VMZ 
VOA-VOZ 


Colonies et protectorats 
britanniques 


VPA-VSZ 


Indes britanniques 


VTA-VWZ 


Canada 


VXA-VYZ 


Etats-Unis d'Am6rique .... 
Mexique 


W 
XAA-XFZ 


Chine 


XGA-XUZ 


Indes britanniques . . . 


XYA-XZZ 


Afghanistan , 


YAA-YAZ 


Indes n^erlandaises. 


YBA-YHZ 


Iraq 


YIA-YIZ 


Nouvelles-Hebrides 


YTA-YTZ 


Lettonie 


YLAYLZ 


Ville libre de IDantzig 


YMA-YMZ 


Nicaragua 


YNA-YNZ 


Roumanie 


YOA-YRZ 


Republique de El Salvador. . 
Yougoslavie 


YSA-YSZ 
YTA-YUZ 


Venezuela 


YVA-YWZ 


Albanie 


ZAA-ZAZ 


Colonies _ et protectorats 
britanniques. 


ZBA-ZJZ 


Nouvelle-Zeiande 


ZKA-ZMZ 


Paraguay 


ZPA-ZPZ 


Union de TAfrique du Sud. . 


ZSA-ZUZ 



[ 204 ] 2. Les indicatifs d'appel sont 
formes de: 

[ 206 ] a) trois lettres, dans le cas de sta- 
tions terrestres ; 

p 06 ] 6) trois lettres, ou trois lettres sui- 
vies d'un seul chifTre (autre que o ou i), 
dans le cas de stations fixes; 
[207] c ) quatre lettres, dans le cas de 
stations de navire; 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



153 



PCS] (^) fi ve letters, in the case of air- 
craft stations; 

p 09 ] (e) five letters preceded and fol- 
lowed by the Morse code signal cor- 
responding to " underlined " ( ) , 
in the case of stations or aircraft carrying 
matter having to do with the functioning 
of the League of Nations; 
pio] (j) four letters followed by a single 
figure (other than o or i), in the case of 
other mobile stations; 
[211] (g) one or two letters and a single 
figure (other than o or i) followed by a 
group of not more than three letters, in 
the case of private experimental stations, 
amateur stations, and private radio- 
communication stations; however, the 
prohibition against the use of the figures 
o and I shall not apply to amateur stations. 
I 212 ] 3- W In the aeronautical radio 
service, after communication has been 
established by means of the complete call 
signal [see 2, (d) and (e)], the aircraft 
station may use an abbreviated call signal 
composed : 

[ 21S ] (a) in radiotelegraphy, of the first 
and last letters of the complete 5-letter 
call signal; 

[ 214 ] (b) in radiotelephony, of all or part 
of the name of the owner of the aircraft 
(company or individual) followed by the 
last two letters of the registration mark. 

[215] (2) In the case of an aircraft per- 
forming a service which concerns the 
functioning of the League of Nations, the 
words "Soci6t6 des Nations" shall replace 
the name of the owner of the aircraft. 
[*] 4. (i) The 26 letters of the alpha- 
bet, as well as the figures, in the cases pro- 
vided for in 2, may be used to form call 
signals; accented letters shall be excluded. 

[217] ( 2 ) However, the following letter 
combinations may not be used for call 
signals: 

P 18 ] (a.) combinations beginning with A 
or B, these two letters being reserved for 
the geographical part of the International 
Code of Signals; 

pis] (b) combinations used in the Inter- 
national Code of Signals, second part; 

[ 22 ] (c) combinations which might be 
confused with distress signals or with 
other signals of a similar character; 
[221] (d) combinations reserved for the 
abbreviations to be used in the radio 
service. 



[ 208 ] d) cinq lettres, dans le cas de sta- 
tions d'aeronef ; 

P 09 ] ^ e) cinq lettres, prec6d6es et suivies 
du signal du code Morse correspondant au 
"soulign6" ( ), dans le cas de 
stations & bord d'aeYonef s effectuant un 
transport int6ressant le fonctionnement de 
la Societ6 des Nations; 
[210] jf) quatre lettres, suivies d'un seul 
chiflre (autre que o ou i), dans le cas 
d'autres stations mobiles; 
P"] g) une ou deux lettres et un seul 
chiffre (autre que o ou i), suivi d'un 
groupe de trois lettres au plus dans le cas 
de stations exp6rimentales privies, de 
stations d'amateur et de stations privies 
de radiocommunication ; toutefois, 1 'in- 
terdiction d'employer les chiffres o et I 
ne s'applique pas aux stations d'amateur. 
P 12 ] 3- (i) Dans le service radioa6rien, 
apr&s que la communication a 6t6 6tablie 
au moyen de Tindicatif d'appel complet 
[voir 2, d) et e)], la station d'aeronef 
peut employer un indicatif abr6g6 con- 
stitue": 

pis] a) en radiotele"graphie, par les pre- 
miere et derniere lettres de 1'indicatif 
d'appel complet de cinq lettres; 
[ 214 ] b) en radiot616phonie, par tout ou 
partie du nom du propri6taire de I'a6ronef 
(compagnie ou particulier) suivi des 
deux dernieres lettres de la marque d'im- 
matriculation. 

pis] (2) Pour un aeronef effectuant un 
service int6ressant le fonctionnement de 
la Soci6t6 des Nations, les mots "Soci6t6 
des Nations" remplacent le nom du 
propne"taire de 1'aeronef. 
H 4- (i) Les 26 lettres de 1'alphabet, 
ainsi que les chiffres dans les cas prevus au 
2, peuvent tre employes pour former 
les indicatif s d'appel ; les lettres accentu6es 
sont exclues. 

[ 217 ] (2) Toutefois, les combinaisons de 
lettres indiqu6es ci-apres ne peuvent tre 
employees comme indicatif s d'appel: 
[ 218 ] a) combinaisons commencant par 
A ou par B, ces deux lettres 6tant r- 
serv6es pour la partie g6ographique du 
Code International de Signaux; 
p 19 ] b) combinaisons employ6es dans le 
Code International de Signaux, deuxieme 



0] c) combinaisons qui pourraient toe 
confondues avec les signaux de d6tresse 
ou avec d'autres signaux de mime nature; 
p 21 ] d) combinaisons r&servees pour^les 
abr^viations a employer dans les services 
de radiocommunication. 



154 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



[ 222 ] 5- (*) Each country shall choose 
call signals for its stations from the inter- 
national series which is allocated to it and 
shall notify the Bureau of the Union of the 
call signals which it has assigned to its 
stations. 

p23] ( 2 ) The Bureau of the Union shall 
see that the same call signal is not al- 
located more than once and that those 
call signals which might be confused with 
distress signals, or with other signals of a 
similar character, are not allocated. 



ARTICLE 15. Service Documents 

[ 224 ] I. The Bureau of the Union shall 
prepare and publish the following service 
documents: 

[ 225 j (#) The nomenclatures of all the 
land, mobile, and fixed stations having a 
call signal from the international series, 
whether or not open to public correspond- 
ence; the nomenclatures of the stations 
operating special services, broadcasting, 
and radio communications between fixed 
points. 

[ 226 ] (I) The frequency list. This list 
shall give all the frequencies assigned to 
stations intended to carry on a regular serv- 
ice and which are capable of causing 
international interference. 
p 27 ] (c) A nomenclature of the telegraph 
offices and land stations open to inter- 
national service. 

[ 228 ] (d) A chart of coast stations open 
to public correspondence. 
p 29 ] (e) A table and a chart to be an- 
nexed to the nomenclature of coast and 
ship stations indicating the zones and 
hours of service of shrps of which the sta- 
tions belong to the second category (see 
appendices 4 and 5). 

[ 23 ] (/) An alphabetical list of the call 
signals of the stations mentioned under 
(a) and provided with a call signal of the 
international series. This list shall be 
arranged without considering nationality. 
It shall be preceded by the call-signal- 
allocation table appearing in article 14. 

[ 231 J (g) General radio statistics. 

P 32 ] 2. (i) The nomenclatures of sta- 
tions [ I (a)] shall be published in sepa- 
rate volumes as follows: 

I. Nomenclature of Coast and Ship 
Stations. 



[ 222 1 5- C 1 ) Chaque pays choisit les 
indicatifs d'appel de ses stations dans la 
serie Internationale qui lui est allouee et 
notifie au Bureau de 1'Umon les indicatifs 
d'appel qu'il a attribues & ses stations. 

[ 223 ] (2) Le Bureau de 1'Union veille cL 
ce qu'un mme indicatif d'appel ne soit 
pas attribu6 plus d'une fois et & ce que 
les indicatifs d'appel qui pourraient tre 
confondus avec les signaux de d6tresse, ou 
avec d'autres signaux de mSme nature, ne 
soient pas attribues. 

ARTICLE 15. Documents de service 

p 24 ] i. Le Bureau de 1'Union dresse et 
public les documents de service suivants: 

[ 22S ] a) les nomenclatures de toutes les 
stations terrestres, mobiles, fixes ayant 
un indicatif d'appel de la serie interna- 
tionale et ouvertes ou non a la corres- 
pondance publique; les nomenclatures des 
stations effectuant des services speciaux, 
de la radiodiffusion, des radiocommunica- 
tions entre points fixes; 
p 26 ] 6) la liste des frequences. Cette 
liste indique toutes les frequences at- 
tribu6es aux stations destinees & effectuer 
un service regulier et qui sont susceptibles 
de causer des brouillages internationaux; 
p 27 ] c) une nomenclature des bureaux 
t<16graphiques et des stations terrestres 
ouverts au service international ; 
p 28 ] d) une carte des stations c6tieres 
ouvertes & la correspondance publique; 
p 29 ] e) un tableau et une carte destines 
a tre annexes & la nomenclature des sta- 
tions c6tieres et de navire, et indiquant les 
zones et les heures de service & bord des 
navires dont les stations sont classics dans 
la deuxieme cat6gorie (voir appendices 4 

et5); 

[230] y) une ii s te alphabetique des indi- 
catifs d'appel des stations mentionn6es 
sous d) et pourvues d'un indicatif d'appel 
de la serie Internationale. Cette liste est 
dressee sans consideration de nationality. 
Elle est prec6dee du tableau de repartition 
des indicatifs d'appel figurant a I'article 

H; 

P 31 ] g) une statistique generate des radio- 
communications. 

p 32 ] 2. (i) Les nomenclatures des sta- 
tions [ i,^ a] sont publics en fascicules 
s6pars, ainsi qu'il suit: 

I. Nomenclature des stations c6ti- 
eres et de navire. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



155 



II. Nomenclature of Aeronautical and 
Aircraft Stations. 

III. Nomenclature of Stations Operat- 

ing Special Services. 

IV. Nomenclature of Fixed Stations 

(Index to the List of Frequencies 
for Fixed Stations in Service). 
V. Nomenclature of Broadcasting Sta- 
tions. 

p 33 ] (2) In the nomenclatures I, II, and 
III, each class of stations shall occupy a 
special section. 

[ 234 ] 3- The form for the different 
nomenclatures and for the frequency list 
is given in appendix 6. Detailed informa- 
tion concerning the preparation of these 
documents shall be given in the prefaces, 
in the headings of columns, and in the 
notes of the said documents. 
[ 235 ] 4. Once a month, by means of 
forms similar to those given in appendix 6, 
the administrations shall notify the Bu- 
reau of the Union of the additions, 
changes, and deletions to be made in the 
above-mentioned documents. 
[ 236 ] 5 (i) The nomenclature of coast 
and ship stations as well as the nomencla- 
ture of aeronautical and aircraft stations 
shall be reedited every 6 months without 
supplements between the two reeditipns. 
As regards the nomenclature of stations 
operating special services and the nomen- 
clature of broadcasting stations, the Bu- 
reau of the Union shall decide upon the 
intervals at which they must be reedited. 

p 87 ] (2) A recapitulative supplement 
shall be published every 3 months for the 
nomenclature of stations operating special 
services, and every 6 months for the no- 
menclature of broadcasting stations, 
pas] (3) xhe frequency list and the no- 
menclature of fixed stations constituting 
an index to the frequency list, for fixed 
stations in service, shall be reedited sepa- 
rately each year. They shall be kept up 
to date by means of monthly supplements 
also edited separately. 

P 39 ] 6. (i) The names of coast and 

aeronautical stations shall be followed 

respectively by the words RADIO and 

AERADIO. 

p 40 ] (2) The names of radio direction 

finding and of radio-beacon stations 

shall be followed respectively by the 

words GONIO and PHARE. 

P 41 ] 7. Appendix 7 contains the sym- 



II. Nomenclature des stations aero- 
nautiques et d'a&ronef. 

III. Nomenclature des stations effectu- 

ant des services sp6ciaux. 

IV. Nomenclature des stations fixes 

(Index a la liste des frequences 
pour les stations fixes en service). 
V. Nomenclature des stations de 
radiodiffusion. 

pas] ( 2 ) > ans j es nomenclatures I, II et 
III, chaque categoric de stations est 
rang6e dans une section speciale. 
p 34 ] 3. La forme a donner aux diffe- 
rentes nomenclatures et & la liste des fr6- 
quences est indiquee a 1'appendice 6. 
Les renseignements d6taill6s sur 1'etablisse- 
ment de ces documents sont donnes dans 
les prefaces, dans I'en-t6te des colonnes et 
dans les annotations desdits documents. 
P 35 ] 4. Les administrations notifient 
une fois par mois au Bureau de 1'Union, au 
moyen de formules identiques a celles 
donnees par 1'appendice 6, les additions, 
modifications et suppressions a apporter 
aux documents susvises. 
P 36 ] 5. (i) La nomenclature des sta- 
tions cdtieres et de navire ainsi que la 
nomenclature des stations adronautiques 
et d'a6ronef sont r6editees tous les six 
mois sans supplement entre deux r66di- 
tions. En ce qui concerne la nomencla- 
ture des stations effectuant des services 
spedaux et la nomenclature des stations 
de radiodiffusion, le Bureau de 1'Union 
decide a quels intervalles elles doivent 
tre reeditees. 

p 37 ] (2) Un supplement recapitulatif est 
public tous les 3 mois pour la nomencla- 
ture des stations effectuant des services 
speciaux et tous les 6 mois pour la nomen- 
clature des stations de radiodiffusion. 
P 38 ] (3) La liste des frequences et la 
nomenclature des stations fixes qui con- 
stitue un index a la liste des frequences, 
pour les stations fixes mises en service, 
sont reeditees spar6ment chaque annee. 
Elles sont tenues & jour au moyen de 
supplements mensuels 6dit6s 6galement 
separement. 

p 39 ] 6. (i) Les noms des stations 
c6tieres et aeronautiques sont suivis 
respectivement des mots RADIO et 
AERADIO. 

p 40 ] (2) Les noms des stations radio- 
goniometriques et des radiophares sont 
suivis respectivement des mots GONIO et 
PHARE. 
p 41 ] 7. L'appendice 7 contient les no- 



156 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



tations employees dans les documents 
pour indiquer la nature et P6tendue du 
service des stations. 

[ 242 ] 8. Les documents de service dont 
les stations mobiles doivent tre pourvues 
sont enumeres dans Fappendice 8. 

ARTICLE 16. Procedure generale radio- 
telegraphique dans le service mobile l , 2 
p 43 ] i (l) Dans le service mobile, la 
procedure d6taille"e ci-apres est obliga- 
toire, sauf dans le cas d'appel ou de trafic 
de dtoesse auquel sont applicables les 
dispositions de 1'article 22. 
[244] ( 2 ) Pour l'change des radiocom- 
munications, les stations du service mobile 
utilisent les abr&viations vis6es 1'ap- 
pendice 9. 

[245] 2 . (i) Avant d'emettre, toute sta- 
tion doit s'assurer qu'elle ne produira pas 
un brouillage nuisible aux transmissions 
s'effectuant dans son rayon d 'action; si un 
tel brouillage est probable, la station at- 
tend le premier arrest de la transmission 
qu'elle pourrait troubler. 
[246] ( 2 ) Toutefois, mme si, en opeYant 
ainsi, 1'^mission de cette station vient & 
brouiller une transmission radio61ectrique 
d6j en cours, on appliquera les regies 
suivantes: 

[ 247 ] a) Dans la zone de communication 
(Tune station terrestre ouverte au service 
de la correspondance publique ou d'une 
station a6ronautique quelconque, la sta- 
tion dont remission produit le brouillage 
doit cesser d'6mettre 4 la premiere de- 
mande de la station terrestre ou a6ro- 
nautique pr6cit6e. 

p 48 ] 6) Dans le cas ou une transmission 
radioelectrique dj en cours entre deux 
navires vient & tre brouille par une 
Emission d'un autre navire, ce dernier doit 
cesser d'&nettre & la premiere demande de 
1'un quelconque des deux autres. 
p 49 ] c) La station qui demande cette 
cessation doit indiquer la dure approx- 
imative de 1'attente impos6e & la station 
dont elle suspend 1'emission. 
[ 2SO ] 3- Les radiotelegrammes de toute 
nature transmis par les stations de navire 
sont numerates par s6ries quotidiennes en 
donnant le numero I au premier radio- 
telegramme transmis chaque jour chaque 
station terrestre diffeYente. 

* This procedure shall be applicable to short waves so far as possible. 

* The provisions of 2 and 8 shall be applicable to radiotelephone transmissions of the mobile 
service. 

1 Cette procedure est applicable aux ondes courtes, dans la mesure du possible, 
a Les dispositions des 2 et 8 sont applicables aux transmissions radiotelephoniques du service . 
mobile. 



bols used in the documents to indicate the 

nature and the scope of the service of 

stations. 

[ 242 ] 8. The service documents with 

which mobile stations must be provided 

are listed in appendix 8. 

ARTICLE 16. General Radiotelegraph Pro- 

cedure in the Mobile Service V 
P 43 ] I- (i) In the mobile service, the 
following detailed procedure shall be 
obligatory except in the case of distress 
call or traffic to which the provisions of 
article 22 shall apply. 
[244] ( 2 ) For the exchange of radio com- 
munications, stations of the mobile service 
shall use the abbreviations given in ap- 
pendix 9. 

p 46 ] 2. (i) Before transmitting, any 
station must make sure that it will not 
produce harmful interference with the 
transmissions being made within its 
range; if such interference is likely, the 
station shall await the first stop in the 
transmission which it may disturb. 
p 46 ] (2) If however, even after taking 
these precautions, the emissions of this 
station should cause interference with a 
radio transmission already in progress, the 
following rules shall be applied: 
[247] ( o ) i n the communication zone of a 
land station open to the public corre- 
spondence service or of any aeronautical 
station, the station whose emission pro- 
duces the interference must cease trans- 
mitting at the first request of the above- 
mentioned land or aeronautical station. 

p 48 ] . (6) In the case where a radio trans- 
mission already in progress between two 
ships happens to be interfered with by an 
emission from another ship, the latter 
must cease transmitting at the first re- 
quest of either of the other two. 
P 49 ] (c) The station requesting this ces- 
sation must indicate the approximate 
length of the wait imposed upon the sta- 
tion whose emission it is suspending. 
P 50 ] 3- Radiotelegrams of all kinds 
transmitted by ship stations shall be num- 
bered in daily series, assigning number I 
to the first radiotelegram transmitted each 
day to each land station separately. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



157 



[ 2S1 ] 4. CALLING A STATION AND SIGNALS 
PREPARATORY TO TRAFFIC 

[252] (i) Method of calling 

The call shall consist of the following: 

not more than three times the call 
signal of the station called; the 
word DE; 

not more than three times the call 
signal of the calling station. 

pas] ( 2 ) Wave to be used for the call and 
for preparatory signals 

To make the call as well as to transmit 
preparatory signals the calling station 
shall use the wave on which the station 
called is listening. 

[254] (.j) Indication of the wave to be used 
for the traffic 

[ 2B5 ] The call, as indicated in subpara- 
graph (i) above, must be followed by the 
regulatory abbreviation indicating the 
frequency and/or the type of wave which 
the calling station proposes to use to 
transmit its traffic. 

[ 256 ] When, as an exception to this rule, 
the call is not followed by the indica- 
tion of the wave to be used for the 
traffic: 

[ 257 ] (a) if the calling station is a land 
station: 

it shall mean that this station proposes 
to use its normal working-wave, as in- 
dicated in the nomenclature, for the 
traffic. 

[ 268 ] (b) if the calling station is a 
mobile station: 

it shall mean that the wave to be used 
for the traffic is to be chosen by the sta- 
tion called. 

P 69 ] (4) Indication, when required, of the 
number of telegrams or of 
transmission by series 

peo] When the calling station has more 
than one telegram to transmit to the sta- 
tion called, the preceding preparatory 
signals shall be followed by the regulatory 
abbreviation and by the figure specifying 
the number of these telegrams, 
pei] Furthermore, when the calling sta- 
tion wishes to transmit these telegrams in 
series, it shall so indicate by adding the 
regulatory abbreviation requesting the 
consent of the station called. 



P 51 ] 4. APPEL D'UNE STATION ET SIG- 
NAUX PREPARATOIRES AU TRAFIC 

P 62 ] (i) Formule d'appel 

L'appel est constitud comme suit: 

trois fois, au plus, 1'mdicatif d'appel 
de la station appelee; le mot DE; 

trois fois, au plus, 1'indicatif d'appel 
de la station appelante. 

p 53 ] (2) Ond e d, utiliser pour I'appel et les 
signaux preparatoires 

Pour faire I'appel ainsi que pour trans- 
mettre les signaux preparatoires, la station 
appelante utilise I'onde sur laquelle veille 
la station appelee. 

P 54 ] (3) Indication de I'onde a utiliser 
pour le trafic 

P 55 ] L'appel, tel qu'il est indique & 
1'alinea (i) ci-avant, doit tre suivi de 
Fabreviation reglementaire indiquant la 
frequence et/ou le type d'onde que la 
station appelante se propose d 'utiliser 
pour transmettre son trafic. 
P 56 ] Lorsque, par exception a cette 
regie, Tappel n'est pas suivi de 1'indication 
de I'onde utiliser pour le trafic: 

p 57 ] a) si la station appelante est une 

station terrestre: 

c'est que cette station se propose d'utili- 
ser pour le trafic son onde normale de 
travail, indique"e dans la nomenclature; 

pss] ft) ^ la station appelante est une 

station mobile: 

c'est que Tonde & utiliser pour le trafic 
est choisir par la station appelee. 

P 59 ] (4) Indication iventuelle du nombre 
de radiotelegrammes ou de la 
transmission par serie 

p 60 ] Lorsque la station appelante a plus 
d'un radioteiegramme & transmettre & 
la station appelee, les signaux prepara- 
tpires precedents sont suivis de 1'abr Avia- 
tion reglementaire et du chiffre spedfiant 
le nombre de ces radiotelegrammes. 
p 61 ] En outre, lorsque la station ap- 
pelante desire transmettre ces radio- 
teiegrammes par serie, elle 1'indique en 
ajoutant 1'abreviation reglementaire pour 
emander le consentement de la stationd 
appelee. 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



P 62 ] 5- REPLY TO CALLS AND SIGNALS 
PREPARATORY TO TRAFFIC 

[ 2 ] (i) Method of reply to calls 

The reply to calls shall consist of the 
following: 

not more than three times the call 

signal of the calling station; 
the word DE; 
the call signal of the station called. 

[M] (2) Wave for reply 

[285] Xo transmit the reply to calls and to 
preparatory signals, the station called 
shall use the wave on which the calling 
station must listen. 

[ 2M ] As an exception to this rule, when a 
mobile station calls a coast station on the 
wave 143 kc (2,100 m), the coast station 
shall transmit the reply to the calls on its 
normal working-wave of the bands be- 
tween 100 and 160 kc (3,000 and 1,875 
m), as indicated in the nomenclature. 

per] (3) Understanding as to the wave to 
be used for the traffic 

[ 268 ] A. If the station called has an un- 
derstanding with the calling station, it 
shall transmit: 

(a) the reply to the call ; 

(&) the regulatory abbreviation indi- 
cating that from that time on it is listen- 
ing on the frequency and/or the type of 
wave announced by the calling station; 

(c) in some cases, the indications men- 
tioned in subparagraph (4) ; 

(d) the letter K, if the station called 
is ready to receive the traffic of the calling 
station; 

(e) in certain cases, if it is useful, the 
regulatory abbreviation and the figure 
indicating the strength of the signals 
received. (See appendix 10.) 

269 ] B. If the station has no preliminary 
understanding, or if it must choose the 
wave to be used for the traffic, it shall 
transmit: 

(a) the reply to the call; 

(b) the regulatory abbreviation indi- 
cating the frequency and/or the type of 
wave requested;* 



[ 282 ] 5- R&PONSE AUX APPELS ET SIG- 
NAUX PR&PARATOIRES AU TRAFIC 

[ 26S ] (i) Formule de reponse aux appels 

La reponse aux appels est constitute 
comme suit: 

trois fois, au plus, 1'indicatif d'appel 

de la station appelante ; 
le mot DE; 

Tindicatif d'appel de la station 
appe!6e. 

ps*] ( 2 ) Qnde de reponse 

[265] Pour transrnettre la rponse aux 
appels et aux signaux preparatoires, la 
station appelee emploie 1'onde sur laquelle 
doit veiller la station appelante. 
[ 266 ] Par exception & cette regie, quand 
une station mobile appelle une station 
c6ti&re sur 1'onde de 143 kc/s (2 100 m), la 
station cdtiere transmet la reponse aux 
appels sur son onde normale de travail des 
bandes de 100 & 160 kc/s (3 ooo a I 875 
m), telle qu'elle est indiqu6e dans la 
nomenclature. 

per] (3) Accord sur Vonde a utilizer pour 
le trafic 

[ 268 ] A. Si la station appelee est d'accord 
avec la station appelante, elle transmet: 

a) la reponse a Tappel ; 

6) 1'abreviation reglementaire indiquant 
qu'a partir de ce moment elle ecoute sur 
la frequence et/ou le type d'onde an- 
nonces par la station appelante; 

c) eventuellement les indications pr6- 
vues a Talinea (4) ; 

d) la lettre K si la station appelee est 
pr6te a recevoir le trafic de la station 
appelante; 

e) eventuellement, si c'est utile, I'abr6- 
viation reglementaire et le chiifre indi- 
quant la force des signaux regus (voir 
1'appendice 10). 

[ 26> ] B. Si la station n'est pas d'accord, 
ou si elle doit choisir 1'onde utiliser pour 
le trafic, elle transmet: 

a) la reponse a 1'appel ; 

b) Fabreviation reglementaire indi- 
quant la frequence et/ou le type d'onde 
demandes;* 



* In the case where the choice of the wave to be used for the traffic falls to the station called, and 
if, in exceptional cases, the latter station does not give the corresponding indication, the traffic 
shall take place on the wave used for the call. 

* Dans le cas ou le choix de 1'onde a utiliser pour le trafic revient a la station appelee, et si f ex- 
ceptionnellement, cette dernidre station ne donne pas 1'indication correspondante, le trafic a lieu 
sur 1'onde utilisee pour 1'appel. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



159 



(c) in some cases, the indications men- 
tioned in subparagraph (4), 
[270] When an agreement is reached on 
the wave which the calling station must 
use for its traffic, the station called shall 
transmit the letter K after the indications 
contained in its reply. 

p 71 ] (4) Reply to the request for transmis- 
sion by series 

p 72 ] The station called, replying to a 
calling station which has asked to trans- 
mit its telegrams in series [ 4 (4)], shall 
indicate, by means of the regulatory ab- 
breviation, whether it refuses or accepts 
and, in the latter case, if need be, shall 
specify the number of radiotelegrams 
which it is ready to receive in one series. 



P 73 ] (5) Difficulties in reception 

p 74 ] (a) If the station called is prevented 
from receiving, it shall reply to the call as 
indicated in subparagraph (3) above, but 
it shall replace the letter K by the signal 
* (wait), followed by a number 
indicating in minutes the probable dura- 
tion of the wait. If this probable dura- 
tion exceeds 10 minutes, (5 minutes in the 
aeronautical mobile service), a reason 
must be given therefor. 
[275] (j) When a station receives a call 
without being certain that this call is in- 
tended for it, it must not reply before the 
call has been repeated and understood. 
When, on the other hand, a station re- 
ceives a call which is intended for it, but is 
doubtful about the call signal of the calling 
station, it must reply immediately, using 
the regulatory abbreviation instead of the 
call signal of the latter station. 



P 78 ] 6. ROUTING OF TRAFFIC 

[277] (j) Traffic wave 

[ m ] (0) Each station of the mobile serv- 
ice shall transmit its traffic by using, in 
principle, one of its working-waves, as 
they are indicated in the nomenclature for 
the band in which the call was made. 

P 79 ] (b) Outside of its normal working- 
wave which is printed in boldface type in 
the nomenclature, each station may use 
additional waves of the same band, in ac- 
cordance with the provisions of article 19 
i do). 



c) 6ventuellement les indications pre- 
vues a Talin6a (4). 

P 70 ] Lorsque 1'accord est realise sur 
1'onde que devra employer la station 
appelante pour son trafic, la station 
appe!6e transmet la lettre K a la suite des 
indications contenues dans sa rponse. 

p 71 ] (4) Reponse a la demande de trans- 
mission par serie 

[272] ^ L a station appelee, rpondant a une 
station appelante qui a demande a trans- 
mettre ses radiot61grammes par s6rie 
[ 4, (4)], indique, au moyen de 1'abrevia- 
tion r6glementaire, son refus ou son ac- 
ceptation et, dans ce dernier cas, s'il y a 
lieu, elle specific le nombre des radioteld- 
gramrnes qu'elle est pr6te a recevoir en 
une s6rie. 

P 73 ] (5) Difficult^ de reception 

p 74 ] a) Si la station appelee est empch6e 
de recevoir, elle repond a 1'appel comme il 
est indique a 1'alinea (3) ci-avant, mais 
elle remplace la lettre K par le signal 
.. (attente), suivi d'un nombre 
indiquant en minutes la duree probable de 
1'attente. Si cette duree probable excede 
10 minutes (5 minutes dans le service 
mobile de I'a&ronautique), 1'attente doit 
tre motivee. 

P 7fi ] &) Lorsqu'une station recoit un 
appel sans tre certaine que cet appel lui 
est destin, elle ne doit pas r6pondre avant 
que 1'appel n'ait 6te r6pete et compris. 
Lorsque, par ailleurs, une station recpit 
un appel qui lui est destin, mais a des 
doutes sur 1'indicatif d 'appel de la station 
appelante, elle doit repondre immdiate- 
ment en utilisant 1'abreviation regle- 
mentaire en lieu et place de 1'indicatif 
d'appel de cette derniere station. 

P 76 ] 6. ACHEMINEMENT DU TRAFIC 

P 77 ] (i) Ondedetrafic 

p 78 ] a) Chaque station du service mobile 
transmet son trafic en employant, en 
principe, une de ses ondes de travail, 
telles qu'elles sont indiquees dans la 
nomenclature, pour la bande dans laquelle 
a eu lieu 1'appel. 

p 79 ] b) En dehors de son onde normale de 
travail, imprimee en caracteres gras dans 
la nomenclature, chaque station peut 
employer des ondes supplementaires de la 
mme bande, conform6ment aux disposi- 
tions de 1'article 19, I, (10). 



i6o 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



PSD] ( c ) T ne use of calling waves for 
traffic shall be governed by article 19. 

[ 28X ] (2) Long radiotelegrams 

p 82 ] (a) In principle, any radio telegram 
containing more than 100 words shall be 
considered as forming a series or shall end 
a series in progress. 

[ 283 ] (b) As a general rule, long radio- 
telegrams, both in plain language and in 
code or cipher language, shall be trans- 
mitted in sections, each section containing 
50 words in the case of plain language, and 
20 words or groups in the case of code or 
cipher. 

p 84 ] (c) At the end of each section the 
signal * (?) meaning "have you 
received the radiotelegram correctly up to 
this point?" shall be transmitted. If the 
section has been correctly received, the 
receiving station shall reply by the letter 
K and the transmission of the radiotele- 
gram shall be continued. 

[ 285 ] (3) Suspension of traffic 

When a station of the mobile service 
transmits on a working-wave of a land 
station and thus causes interference with 
the said land station, it must suspend its 
work at the request of the latter. 



[286] ^ END OF TRAFFIC AND OF WORK 

t 287 ] (i) Signal for the end of trans- 
mission 

pas] ( a ) The transmission of a radio* 
telegram shall be ended by the signal 
" """ (end of transmission), followed 
by the call signal of the transmitting 
station and the letter K. 
p 89 ] (b) In the case of transmission by 
series, the end of each radiotelegram shall 
be indicated by the signal - and 
the end of the series by the call signal of 
the transmitting station and the letter K. 

[290] (2) Acknowledgment of receipt 

p 91 ] (a) The acknowledgment of receipt 
of a radiotelegram shall be given by trans- 
mitting the letter R, followed by the 
number of the radiotelegram; this ac- 
knowledgment of receipt shall be preceded 
by the following formula: call signal of the 
station which has transmitted, word DE, 
call signal of the station which has re- 
ceived. 



pso] c ) L'emploi des ondes d'appel pour 
le trafic est reglement6 par 1'article 19. 

p 81 ] (2) Longs radiotelegrammes 

p 82 ] a) En principe, tout radiotele- 
gramme contenant plus de 100 mots est 
consider^ comme formant une serie, ou 
met fin a la serie en cours. 
p 83 ] b) En regie g6n6rale, les longs radio- 
telegrammes, tant ceux en langage clair 
que ceux en langage convenu ou chififr6, 
sont transmis par tranches, chaque 
tranche contenant 50 mots dans le cas du 
langage clair et 20 mots ou groupes 
lorsqu'il s'agit du langage convenu ou 
chiffre. 

p 84 ] c) A la fin de chaque tranche, le 
signal (?) signifiant "avez- 
vous bien regu le radiotelegrarnme jusqu' 
ici?" est transmis. Si la tranche a 6t6 
correctment recue, la station receptrice 
repond par la lettre K et la transmission 
du radiotelegramme est poursuivie. 



P 86 3 (3) Suspension du trafic 

Quand une station du service mobile 
transmet sur une onde de travail d'une 
station terrestre et cause ainsi du brouil- 
lage a ladite station terrestre, elle doit 
suspendre son travail a la demande de 
cette derniere. 

[286] 7. FIN DU TRAFIC ET DXJ TRAVAIL 

P 87 ] (l) Signal defin de transmission 

P 8S ] a) La transmission d'un radiotele- 
gramme se termine par le signal * 
(fin de transmission), suivi de 1'indicatif 
d'appel de la station transmettrice et de 
la lettre K. 

P 89 ] b) Dans le cas de transmission par 
serie, la fin de chaque radiotelegramme 
est indiqu^e par le signal -* et la 
fin de la serie par 1'indicatif d'appel de la 
station transmettrice et la lettre K. 

p 90 ] (2) Accuse de reception 

P 91 ]^ a) L'accus6 de reception d'un 
radiot61egramme est donn6 en transmet- 
tant la lettre R, suivie du num6ro du 
radiotelegramme; cet accus6 de reception 
est pr6c6d6 de la formule ci-apr^s: indi- 
catif d'appel de la station qui a transmis, 
mot DE, indicatif d'appel de la station 
qui a recu. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



[ 292 ] (&) The acknowledgment of receipt 
of a series of radiotelegrams shall be given 
by transmitting the letter R followed by 
the number of the last radiotelegram re- 
ceived. This acknowledgment of receipt 
shall be preceded by the above formula. 
p 93 ] (c) The acknowledgment of receipt 
shall be made by the receiving station on 
the same wave as for the reply to the call 
[see 5 (2) above]. 



[294] 



(3) End of work 



[295] (0) xhe end of work between two 
stations shall be indicated by each of 
them by means of the signal * 
(end of work), followed by its own call 
signal. 

p 96 ] (&) For these signals, the sending 
station shall continue to use the traffic 
wave and the receiving station the wave 
for the reply to the call. 
p 97 ] (c) The signal (end of 
work) shall also be used when the trans- 
mission of radiotelegrams of general in- 
formation, meteorological information, 
and general safety warnings is ended and 
the transmission ends in the long-distance 
radio-communication service with de- 
ferred acknowledgment of receipt or 
without acknowledgment of receipt. 



[ 298 ] 8. DURATION OF WORK 

[299] ( x ) (0,) i n n o case, in the maritime 

mobile service, must the work on 500 kc 

(600 m) exceed 10 minutes. 

[ 80 ] (&) In no case, in the aerial mobile 

service, must the work on 333 kc (900 m) 

exceed 5 minutes. 

[* l ] (2) On frequencies other than those 

of 500 kc (600 m) and 333 kc (900 m) the 

duration of the periods of work shall be 

determined : 

[ 302 ] (a) between a land station and a 

mobile station, by the land station, 

[ 303 ] (&) between mobile stations, by the 

receiving station. 

[ 304 ] 9. TESTS 

When it is necessary to make test sig- 
nals, either for the adjustment of a trans- 
mitter before transmitting the call, or for 
the adjustment of a receiver, these signals 
must not last more than 10 seconds, and 
they must be composed of a series of V's 
followed by the call signal of the station 
transmitting for the tests. 



P 92 ] b) L'accus6 de reception d'une 
seVie de radiote"legrammes est donn6 en 
transmettant la lettre R suivie du num6ro 
du dernier radiotelegramme recu. Get 
accus6 de reception est prc6d6 de la 
formule ci-avant. 

p 93 ] c) L'accus6 de reception est fait 
par la station receptrice sur la mme 
onde que pour la response a Tappel [voir 
5, (2) ci-avant]. 

P 94 ] (3) Fin du travail 

p 96 ] a) La fin du travail entre deux 
stations est indiquee par chacune d'elles 
au moyen du signal (fin du tra- 
vail), suivi de son propre indicatif d'appel. 

P 96 ] 5) Pour ces signaux, la station 
knettrice continue i utiliser Tonde de 
trafic et la station receptrice 1'onde de 
rponse a 1'appel. 

p 97 ] c) Le signal (fin du 
travail) est aussi utilis6 lorsque la trans- 
mission des radio t616grammes d 'informa- 
tion g6ne"rale, des informations m6teoro- 
logiques et des avis g6n&raux de s6curit6 
se termine et que la transmission se 
termine dans le service de radiocommu- 
nication grande distance avec accus6 
de reception diff6r6 ou sans accus6 de 
reception. 

P 98 ] 8. DUR&E DU TRAVAIL 

p 99 ] (i) a) En aucun cas, dans le service 
mobile maritime, le travail sur 500 kc/s 
(600 m) ne doit d6passer dix minutes. ^ 
[300] 5) En aucun cas, dans le service 
mobile aerien, le travail sur 333 kc/s 
(900 m) ne doit depasser cinq minutes. 
[301] ( 2 ) Sur les frequences autres que 
celles de 500 kc/s (600 m) et 333 kc/s 
(900 m), la dur6e des priodes de travail 
est d6terminee: 

[ 302 ] a) entre station terrestre et station 
mobile, par la station terrestre, 
[ 808 ] 6) entre stations mobiles, par la 
station receptrice. 

[ 804 ] 9. ESSAIS 

Lorsqu'il est necessaire de faire des 
signaux d'essais, soit pour le r6glage d'un 
dmetteur avant de transmettre 1'appel, 
spit pour le r6glage d'un r6cepteur, ces 
signaux ne doivent pas durer plus de 10 
secondes et ils doivent tre constitu6s 
par une srie de WV suivie de Findicatif 
d'appel de la station qui 6met pour 
essais. 



162 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



ARTICLE 17. General Call "to all 11 

[ 30B ] i. Two types of call signals "to 
all" shall be recognized: 

1. the CQ call followed by the 
letter K (see 2 and 3); 

2. the CQ call not followed by 
the letter K (see 4). 

[ 306 ] 2. Stations desiring to enter into 
communication with stations of the mobile 
service, without however, knowing the 
names of the mobile stations within their 
range, can use the inquiry signal CQ, in 
place of the call signal of the station called, 
in the calling formula, this formula being 
followed by the letter K (general call to all 
mobile stations, with request for reply). 



[ m ] 3- In regions where traffic is 
heavy, the use of the CQ call followed by 
the letter K shall be forbidden, except in 
combination with urgent signals. 
[308] 4 . The CQ call not followed^ by 
the letter K (general call to all stations 
without request for reply) shall be used 
before transmission of information of all 
kinds intended to be read or used by any- 
one who can receive it. 



ARTICLE 18. Catting 
[joj] Im ( x ) AS a general rule, it shall 
devolve upon the mobile station to estab- 
lish communication with the land station. 
It may call the land station for this pur- 
pose only after having arrived within the 
range of the latter. 

[3io] (2) However, a land station having 
traffic for a mobile station which has not 
indicated its presence may call the latter if 
it has reason to assume that the said mo- 
bile station is within its range and is 
listening. 

[ 8U ] 2. (i) Furthermore, land stations 
may transmit their calls in the form of 
"lists of calls" consisting of the call sig- 
nals of all mobile stations for which they 
have traffic on hand, at definite intervals, 
at least 2 hours apart, which have been 
established by agreements between the 
governments concerned. Land stations 
which transmit their calls on the wave of 
500 kc (600 m) shall transmit them in the 
form of "lists of calls' 1 , in alphabetical 
order, to include only the call signals of 
mobile stations for which they have traffic 
on hand and which are within their range. 



ARTICLE 17. Appel general "d tons" 

[ 305 ] i. Deux types de signaux d'appels 
"a tous" sont reconnus: 

i appel CQ suivi de la lettre K 

(voir 2et3); 
2 appel CQ non suivi de la 

lettre K (voir 4). 

[306] 2. Les stations qui d6sirent entrer 
en communication avec des stations du 
service mobile, sans toutefpis connaitre 
le nom de celles de ces stations qui sont 
dans leur rayon d'action, peuvent em- 
ployer le signal de recherche CQ, rem- 
placant 1'indicatif de la station appele*e 
dans la fprmule d'appel, cette formule 
<tant suivie de la lettre K (appel g<ne>al & 
toutes les stations du service mobile, avec 
demande de r6ponse). 
t 307 ] 3- Dans les regions ou le trafic 
est intense, 1'emploi de 1 'appel CQ suivi de 
la lettre K est interdit, sauf en combi- 
naison avec des signaux d'urgence. 
[ 308 ] 4. L'appel CQ non suivi de la 
lettre K (appel general toutes les sta- 
tions sans demande de response) est em- 
ploye* avant la transmission des informa- 
tions de tpute nature destinies a 6tre 
lues ou utilises par quiconque peut les 
capter. 

ARTICLE 18. Appels 

[ 809 ] i. (i) En regie gn6rale, il in- 
combe a la station mobile d'6tablir la 
communication avec la station terrestre. 
Elle ne peut appeler la station terrestre 
dans ce but qu'apres tre arrivee dans le 
rayon d'action de celle-ci. 
[aio] ( 2 ) Toutefois, une station terrestre 
ayant du trafic pour une station mobile 
qui ne lui a pas signale sa presence, peut 
appeler cette station si elle est en droit de 
supposer que ladite station mobile est a 
sa porte et assure 1'ecoute. 
[ 3l1 ] 2. (i) En outre, les stations ter- 
restres peuvent transmettre leurs appels 
sous forme de "listes d'appels" forme'es 
des indicatifs d'appel de toutes les stations 
mobiles pour lesquelles elles ont du trafic 
en instance, des intervalles determines, 
espace"s d'au moins deux heures, ayant 
fait Tobjet d'accords conclus entre les 
gouvernements intresss. Les stations 
terrestres qui mettent leurs appels sur 
1'onde de 500 kc/s (600 m) les trans- 
mettent sous forme de "listes d'appels", 
par ordre alphabtique, en y insurant 
seulement les indicatifs d'appel de ces 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



I6 3 



To their own call signal they shall add the 
abbreviations to indicate the working- 
wave they wish to use in the transmission. 
Land stations which use continuous waves 
outside of the band olf 365 to 515 kc (822 to 
583 rn) shall transmit the call signals in 
the order which is most convenient for 
them. 



[ 3l2 ] (2) The time at which land stations 
transmit their lists of calls, as well as the 
frequencies and types of waves which they 
use for this purpose must be indicated in 
the nomenclature. 

[ 313 ] (3) Mobile stations which, during 
this transmission, hear their call signal, 
must answer as soon as they can, follow- 
ing, so far as possible, the order in which 
they were called. 

[ 3H ] (4) When the traffic cannot be dis- 
posed of immediately, the land station 
shall inform each mobile station concerned 
of the probable time at which the work 
can begin, as well as the frequency and the 
type of wave which will be used in the 
work with it, if this is necessary. 

[ 315 ] 3- When a land station receives 
calls from several mobile stations at prac- 
tically the same time, it shall decide as to 
the order in which these stations may 
transmit their traffic to it, its decision 
being based only on the necessity for per- 
mitting each calling station to exchange 
with it the greatest possible number of 
radiotelegrams. 

[ 816 ] 4- (i) When communication is 
first established with a land station, every 
mobile station, if it deems it advisable on 
account of possible confusion, can trans- 
mit its name spelled out as it appears in 
the nomenclature. 

[an] ( 2 ) The land station can, by means 
of the abbreviation PTR, request the 
mobile station to give it the following 
information: 

(a) approximate distance in nautical 
miles and bearing with reference to the 
land station, or else the position indicated 
by latitude and longitude; 

(6) next port of call, 

[si8j (3) The information covered by 
subparagraph (2) shall be furnished by 
authorization of the commander or the 
person responsible for the vehicle carrying 



stations mobiles pour lesquelles elles ont 
du tranc en instance et qui se trouvent 
dans leur rayon d'action. Elles ajoutent 
& leur propre indicatif d'appel les abrevia- 
tions pour 1'indication de 1'onde de travail 
dont elles veulent faire usage pour la 
transmission. Les stations terrestres qui 
utilisent des ondes entretenues en dehors 
de la bande de 365 515 kc/s (822 & 583 
m) transrnettent les indicatifs d'appel dans 
1'ordre qui leur convient le mieux. 
[ 812 ] (2) L'heure & laquelle les stations 
terrestres transrnettent leur liste d'appels, 
ainsi que les frequences et les types d'onde 
qu 'elles utilisent & cette fin doivent 6tre 
mentionns dans la nomenclature. 
[ 3l3 ] (3) Les stations mobiles qui, dans 
cette transmission, pergoivent leur indi- 
catif d'appel, doivent r6pondre, aussit6t 
qu'elles le peuvent, en observant entre 
elles, autant que possible, 1'ordre dans 
lequel elles ont iti appe!6es. 
[3H] (4) Lorsque le trafic ne peut tre 
6coul6 immediatement, la station ter- 
restre fait connaitre a chaque station 
mobile intressee 1'heure probable a 
laquelle le travail pourra commencer 
ainsi que, si cela est n6cessaire, la fr6- 
quence et le type d'onde qui seront utilis6s 
pour le travail avec elle. 
t 315 ] 3' Quand une station terrestre 
recoit, pratiquement en mme temps, des 
appels de plusieurs stations mobiles, elle 
decide de 1'ordre dans lequel ces stations 
pourront lui transmettre leur trafic, sa 
decision s'inspirant uniquement de la 
n6cessite de permettre chacune des 
stations appelantes d'6changer avec elle le 
plus grand nombre possible de radio- 
tel6grammes. 

l m ] 4- (i) Lors du premier 6tablisse- 
ment de communication avec une station 
terrestre, toute station mobile peut, si elle 
le juge utile parce que des confusions sont & 
craindre, transmettre en toutes lettres son 
nom tel qu'il figure dans la nomenclature. 
[M] (2) La station terrestre peut, au 
moyen de 1'abr Aviation PTR, demander 
la station mobile de lui fournir les indica- 
tions ci-apres: 

a) distance approximative en milles ma- 
rins et relevement par rapport & la station 
terrestre ou bien position indiqu6e par la 
latitude et la longitude; 

b) prochain lieu d'escale. 

[ 318 ] (3) Les indications vis6es Talinea 
(2) sont fournies apr&s autorisation du 
commandant ou de la personne jrespon- 
sable du vhicule portant la station mo- 



1 64 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



the mobile station and only in case it is 
requested by the land station. 
[ 8l9 ] 5- In. communications between 
land stations and mobile stations, the 
mobile station shall comply with the in- 
structions given by the land station, in all 
questions relative to the order and the 
time of transmission, to the choice of fre- 
quency (wavelength) and/or of the type 
of wave and to the suspension of work. 
This provision shall not apply to cases of 
distress. 

[ 82 ] 6. In communications between 
mobile stations, and except for cases of 
distress, the station called shall control 
the work as indicated in 5 above. 
[ 35Sl ] 7. (i) When a station called does 
not answer a call sent three times, at 
intervals of 2 minutes, the call must cease 
and it may be resumed only 15 minutes 
later (5 minutes for aeronautical mobile 
service). The calling station, before re- 
suming the call, must make certain that 
the station called is not in communication 
with another station at that time. 

[322] ( 2 ) The call may be repeated at 
shorter intervals if there is no danger that 
it will interfere with communications in 
progress. 

[323] g. When the name and the ad- 
dress of the operating agency of a mobile 
station are not shown in the nomencla- 
ture or are no longer in accord with the 
data given therein, it shall devolve upon 
the mobile station, as a matter of routine, 
to furnish the land station to which it 
sends traffic with all the necessary infor- 
mation in this connection, using for this 
purpose the appropriate abbreviations. 

ARTICLE 19. Use of Waves in the Mobile 
Service 

[ 8JU ] i. (i) In the bands included be- 
tween 365 and 515 kc (822 and 583 in), the 
only type-B waves permissible shall be 
the following: 

375, 410, 425, 454, and 500 kc (800, 730, 
705, 660, and 600 m). 
[ 325 I ( 2 ) The general calling-wave which 
must be used by all ship stations and by 
all coast stations working in radioteleg- 
raphy in the authorized bands between 
365 and 515 kc (822 and 583 m), as well as 
by aircraft wishing to enter into communi- 
cation with a coast station or a ship sta- 
tion, shall be the wave 500 kc (600 m) 
(Ai, A2, or B). 



bile et seulement dans le cas oft elles sont 
demandees par la station terrestre. 
[ 8l9 ] 5- Dans les communications entre 
stations terrestres et stations mobiles, la 
station mobile se conforme aux instruc- 
tions donnes par la station terrestre, dans 
toutes les questions relatives & 1'ordre et & 
1'heure de transmission, au choix de la 
frequence (longueur d'onde) et/ou du 
type d'onde, et & la suspension du travail. 
Cette prescription ne s 'applique pas aux 
cas de d6tresse. 

[ 32 ] 6. Dans les ^changes entre stations 
mobiles, et sauf dans le cas de dtresse, 
la station appel<e a le contr61e du travail, 
comme il est indiqu6 au 5 ci-avant. 
[ 321 J 7- (*) Lorsqu'une station ap- 
pe!6e ne r6pond pas & 1'appel 6rnis trois 
fois, 4 des intervalles de deux minutes, 
1'appel doit cesser et il ne peut tre repris 
que 15 minutes plus tard (5 minutes pour 
le service mobile de Pa6ronautique). La 
station appelante, avant de recommencer 
1'appel, doit s'assurer que la station ap- 
pe!6e n'est pas, ce moment, en com- 
munication avec une autre station. 
[322] (2) L'appel peut Stre r6p6te a des 
intervalles moms longs, s'il n'est pas a 
craindre qu'il vienne brouiller des com- 
munications en cours. 
[ 323 ] 8. Lorsque le nom et Fadresse de 
1'exploitant d'une station mobile ne sont 
pas mentionne's dans la nomenclature ou 
ne sont plus en concordance avec les in- 
dications de celle-ci, il appartient & la sta- 
tion mobile de donner d'office & la station 
terrestre laquelle elle transmet du trafic, 
tous les renseignements n6cessaires, sous 
ce rapport, en utilisant, cette, fin, les 
abr6viations appropriees, 

ARTICLE 19. Emploi des ondes dans le 

service mobile 

[324] If ( r ) Dans les bandes comprises 
entre 365 et 515 kc/s (822 et 583 m), les 
seules ondes admises en type B sont les 
suivantes: 

375, 410, 425, 454 et 500 kc/s (800, 730, 
705, 660 et 600 m). 

[ 325 ] (2) L'onde generate d'appel qui 
doit tre employee par toute station de 
navire et toute station cdti&re travaillant 
en radiot616graphie dans les bandes 
autorisees entre 365 et 515 kc/s (822 et 
583 m), ainsi que par les a6ronefs qui 
d^sirent entrer en communication avec 
une station cdtiere ou une station de 
navire, est 1'onde de 500 kc/s (600 m) 
(Ai, A2 ou B). 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



165 



[ m ] (3) L'onde de 333 kc/s (900 m) est 
1'onde Internationale d'appel pour les 
services a6riens, sauf comme il est indiqu6 
dans Tarticle 9, 10 (2). 
[ 327 ] (4) L'onde de 143 kc/s (2 100 m) 
(du type A I settlement) est 1'onde Inter- 
nationale d'appel employee dans les com- 
munications du service mobile a grande 
distance dans les bandes de 100 a 160 kc/s 
(3 ooo a I 875 m). 

[ 328 ] (5) L'onde de 500 kc/s (600 m) est 
1'onde internationale de detresse; elle est 
utilisee dans ce but par les stations de 
navire et par les stations d'aeronef qui 
demandent 1'assistance des services mari- 
times. Elle ne peut 6tre utilisee d'une 
maniere gen6rale que pour 1'appel et la 
reponse ainsi que pour le trafic de de- 
tresse, les signaux et messages d'urgence 
et de s6curite. 

[ 329 ] (6) Toutefois, a condition de ne pas 
troubler les signaux de detresse, d'ur- 
gence, de s6curit&, d'appel et de reponse, 
1'onde de 500 kc/s (600 m) peut Itre 
utilisee: 

[ 33 ] a) dans les regions de trafic intense 
pour la transmission d'un radiotele- 
gramme unique et court; 1 
[ 331 ] &) dans les autres regions, pour 
d'autres buts, mais avec discretion. 
[ 332 ] (7) En dehors de 1'onde de 500 
kc/s (600 m), 1'usage des ondes de tous 
types comprises entre 485 et 515 kc/s 
(620 et 583 m) est interdit. 
[ 338 ] (8) En dehors de 1'onde de 143 kc/s 
(2 100 m), 1'usage de toutes ondes com- 
prises entre 140 et 146 kc/s (2 143 et 
2 055 m) est interdit. 
[ 334 ] (9) Les stations cdtieres et de 
navire travaillant dans les bandes au- 
toris6es entre 365 et 515 kc/s (822 et 583 
m) doivent 6tre en mesure de faire usage 
au moins d'une onde en plus de celle de 
500 kc/s (600 m) ; quand une onde addi- 
tionnelle est imprim6e en caracteres gras 
dans la nomenclature, elle est 1'onde nor- 
male de travail de la station. Les ondes 
additionnelles ainsi choisies pour les sta- 
tions c6tires peuvent tre les m^mes que 
celles des stations de bord ou peuvent 
tre differentes. En tout cas, les ondes 
de travail des stations c6tieres doivent 
tre choisies de maniere eviter les 
brouillages avec les stations voisines. 

1 The regions of heavy traffic are indicated in the nomenclature of coast stations. These regions 
consist of the service areas of the coast stations indicated as not accepting traffic on 500 kc (600 m) . 

i Les regions de trafic intense sont indiquees par la nomenclature des stations cdtieres; ces regions 
sont constitutes par les zones d 'action des stations cdtieres indiquees comme n'acceptant pas le 
trafic sur 500 kc/s (600 m) (voir 1'appendice ?) 



[328] (3) The wave of 333 kc (900 m) 
shall be the international calling- wave for 
aerial services, except as indicated in 
article 9, 10 (2). 

[ 3 * 7 ] (4) The wave of 143 kc (2,100 m) 
(Type-Ai only), shall be the interna- 
tional calling-wave for use in long-dis- 
tance communications of the mobile serv- 
ice in the band 100 to 160 kc (3,000 to 
1,875 m). 

t 328 ] (5) The wave of 500 kc (600 m) 
shall be the international distress wave; it 
shall be used for that purpose by ship sta- 
tions and aircraft stations in requesting 
help from the maritime services. It may 
be used in a general way only for calls and 
replies as well as for distress traffic, urgent 
and safety messages, and signals. 



[ 329 ] (6) However, on condition that the 
distress, urgent, safety, calling, and reply 
signals are not interfered with, the wave 
of 500 kc (600 m) may be used : 

[ 33 ] (a) in the regions of heavy traffic 
for the transmission of a single short 
radiotelegram ; x 

[331] () i n other regions, for other pur- 
poses, but with discretion. 
[332j (7) Besides the wave of 500 kc (600 
m), the use of waves of all types between 
485 and 515 kc (620 and 583 m) shall be 
forbidden. 

[ 383 ] (8) Except for the wave of 143 kc 
(2,100 m) the use of any wave between 
140 and 146 kc (2,143 and 2,055 m) shall 
be forbidden. 

[334] (Q) Coast and ship stations working 
within the authorized band between 365 
and 515 kc (822 and 583 m) must be able 
to use at least one wave besides that of 
500 kc (600 m); when an additional 
wave is printed in heavy type in the 
nomenclature, this is the normal working- 
wave of the station. The additional 
waves thus chosen for coast stations may 
or may not be the same as those of ship 
stations. In any case, the working-waves 
of coast stations must be chosen in such a 
way as to avoid interference with neigh- 
boring stations. 



166 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



[ass] ( I0 ) Besides their normal working- 
waves, printed in heavy type in the 
nomenclature, land and on-board sta- 
tions may use, in the authorized bands, 
supplementary waves which shall be men- 
tioned in the nomenclature in ordinary 
print. However, the band of frequencies 
from 365 to 385 kc (822 to 779 m) shall be 
reserved to the radio direction-finding 
service; it can be used by the mobile serv- 
ice, for radiotelegraph correspondence, 
only subject to the conditions set forth 
in article 7. 

[ 338 1 (n) (a) The wave for the reply to 
a call transmitted on the general calling- 
wave [see i (2)] shall be the wave of 500 
kc (600 m), the same as that for calling. 
[ m ] (&) The wave for the reply to a call, 
for aircraft stations and aeronautical sta- 
tions working in the band 315 to 365 kc 
(952 to 822 m) shall be the wave of 333 kc 
(900 m), the same as that for calling, 

[ 338 ] (c) The wave for the reply to a call 
transmitted on the international calling- 
wave of 143 kc (2,100 m) [see i (4)] 
shall be: 

the wave of 143 kc (2,100 m) for a 

mobile station; 
the normal working-wave, for a coast 

station. 

[ 339 ]^ 2. (i) In order to increase safety 
of ^ life at sea (ships), and over the sea 
(aircraft), all the stations of the maritime 
mobile service which normally listen on 
the waves of the authorized bands be- 
tween 365 and 515 kc (822 and 583 m) 
must, during their working hours, make 
the necessary provisions to insure the 
watch on the distress wave [500 kc (600 
m)] twice per hour, for 3 minutes, be- 
ginning at x:i5 and at x.*45 o'clock, Green- 
wich mean time. 

[ 34 ] (2) During the intervals indicated 
above, outside the transmissions men- 
tioned in article 22 ( 22 to 28) : 
[ 341 ] A. Transmissions must cease in the 
bands of 460 to 550 kc (652 to 545 m) ; 

[ 342 ] B. Outside these bands: 

(a) transmissions of type B waves shall 
be forbidden; 

(b) other transmissions of the mobile 
service stations may continue; stations of 
the maritime mobile service may listen to 
these transmissions on the express condi- 



[338] ( I0 ) En dehors de leur onde nor- 
male de travail imprime en caracteres 
gras dans la nomenclature, les stations 
terrestres et de bord peuvent employer, 
dans les bandes autorisees, des ondes sup- 
p!6mentaires qui sont mentionne'es en 
caracteres ordinaires dans la nomencla- 
ture. Toutefois, la bande de frequences 
de 365 385 kc/s (822 & 779 m) est reservd 
au service de la radiogoniometrie ; elle ne 
peut tre utilisee par le service mobile, 
pour la correspondance radio telegraphi- 
que, que sous les reserves indiqu6es a 
1'article 7. 

[ 83a ] (n) a) L'onde de reponse a un ap- 
pel 6mis sur 1'onde gen6rale d'appel [voir 
i, (2)] est 1'onde de 500 kc/s (600 m), la 
mme que celle d'appel. 
[ 337 ] b) L'onde de reponse & un appel, 
pour les stations d'aeronef et les stations 
aeronautiques travaillant dans la bande 
de 315 a 365 kc/s (952 & 822 m), est 
1'onde de 333 kc/s (900 m), la rame que 
celle d'appel. 

[ 33S ] c) L'onde de reponse & un appel 
6mis sur 1'onde Internationale d'appel de 
143 kc/s (2 100 m) [voir i, (4)] est: 

pour une station mobile, 1'onde de 143 

kc/s (2 loo m) ; 
pour une station c6tiere, son onde 

normale de travail. 

[ 339 ] ^2. (i) En vue d'augmenter la 
scurit6 de la vie humaine sur mer (na- 
vires) et au-dessus de la rner (aeronefs), 
toutes les stations du service mobile 
maritime qui ecoutent normalement les 
ondes des bandes autorisees entre 365 et 
515 kc/s (822 et 583 m) doivent, pendant 
la duree de leurs vacations, prendre les 
mesures u tiles pour assurer 1'ecoute sur 
1'onde de detresse [500 kc/s (600 m)] deux 
fois par heure, pendant trois minutes, 
commencant a x h 15 et & x h 45, temps 
moyen de Greenwich. 
[340] ( 2 ) Pendant les intervalles indiques 
ci-avant, en dehors des emissions en- 
visagees & 1'article 22 ( 22 a 28): 
[ 341 ] A. Les 6missions doivent cesser 
dans les bandes de 460 a 550 kc/s (652 i 
545m); 
[ 342 ] B. Hors de ces bandes: 

a) les emissions des ondes du type B 
sont interdites; 

b)^ les autres Emissions des stations du 
service mobile peuvent continuer; les sta- 
tions du service mobile maritime peuvent 
6couter ces emissions sous reserve ex- 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



I6 7 



tion that these stations shall first insure 
the watch on the distress wave, as pro- 
vided for in subparagraph (i) of this 
paragraph. 

[ 343 ] 3- Since calls in the authorized 
bands between 365 and 515 kc (822 and 
583 m) and from 315 to 365 kc (952 to 
822 m) are normally made on the inter- 
national calling- waves [ I (2) and (3) 
above], mobile service stations open to 
the service of public correspondence and 
using waves from these bands for their 
work must, during their hours of watch, 
remain on watch on the calling-wave of 
their service. These stations, while ob- 
serving the provisions of article 19, 2 (i) 
and (2) and 4 D, are authorized to 
abandon this watch only when they are 
engaged in a communication on other 
waves. 

[ 34 *] 4. The following rules must be 
followed in the operation of stations of the 
mobile service using type-Ai waves in the 
band 100 to 160 kc (3,000 to 1,875 m ) : 

[ 345 ] A. (a) Any coast station carrying 
on a communication on one of these 
waves must listen on the wave of 143 kc 
(2,100 m), unless otherwise indicated in 
the nomenclature. 

[S46] (j) The coast station shall transmit 
all its traffic on the wave or on the waves 
which are specifically assigned to it. 
[347] ( c ) A coast station to which one or 
more waves within the band 125 to 150 kc 
(2,400 to 2,000 m) have been allocated, 
shall have a prior right to this or these 
waves. 

[ 348 ] (f) Any other mobile service sta- 
tion transmitting public traffic on this or 
these waves and thereby causing inter- 
ference with the said coast station must 
discontinue its work at the request of 
the latter. 

[ 849 ] B. (a) When a mobile station 
wishes to establish communication on one 
of these waves with another station of the 
mobile service, it must use the wave of 
143 kc (2,100 m), unless otherwise in- 
dicated in the nomenclature. 
[350] (&) This wave, designated as a 
general calling-wave, must be used ex- 
clusively in the North Atlantic: 

1. for making individual calls and 
answering these calls; 

2. for transmitting signals prelim- 
inary to the transmission of traffic. 



presse que ces stations assurent d'abord la 
veille sur 1'onde de detresse, comme il est 
prevu Falinea (i) de ce paragraphe. 

[ 343 I 3' Les appels dans les bandes au- 
toris6es entre 365 et 515 kc/s (822 et 583 
m) et entre 315 et 365 kc/s (952 et 822 m) 
etant faits normalement sur les ondes in- 
ternationales d'appel [ I, (2) et (3) ci~ 
avant], les stations du service mobile 
ouvertes au service de la correspondance 
publique et utilisant pour leur travail des 
ondes de ces bandes doivent, pendant 
leurs heures de veille, rester & 1'ecoute sur 
Ponde d'appel de leur service. Ces sta- 
tions, tout en observant les prescriptions 
de 1'article 19, 2, (i) et (2), et 4, D, ne 
sont autorisees a abandonner cette ecoute 
que lorsqu'elles sont engagees dans une 
communication sur d'autres ondes. 
[ 344 ] 4. Les regies ci-apres doivent toe 
suivies dans 1'exploitation des stations du 
service mobile employant des ondes du 
type Ai des bandes de 100 a 160 kc/s 
(3 ooo & i 875 m) : 

[ 345 ] A. a) Toute station c6tiere assu- 
rant une communication sur une de ces 
ondes doit faire l'6coute sur 1'onde de 143 
kc/s (2 100 m), a moins qu'il n'en soit 
dispos6 autrement dans la nomenclature. 
[ 34<$ ] &) La station c6tiere transmet tout 
son trafic sur 1'onde ou sur les ondes qui 
lui sont specialement attributes. 
[ 347 ] c) Une station c6tiere, a laquelle 
une ou plusieurs ondes comprises dans la 
bande de 125 a 150 kc/s (2 400 a 2 ooo 
m) sont allouees, possede sur cette ou sur 
ces ondes un droit de preference. 
f 348 ] d) Toute autre station du service 
mobile transmettant un trafic public sur 
cette ou sur ces ondes, et causant ainsi du 
brouillage a ladite station cdtiere, doit 
suspendre son travail a la demande de 
cette derniere. 

[ 349 ] B. a) Lorsqu 'une station mobile d6- 
sire etablir la communication sur une de 
ces ondes avec une autre station du ser- 
vice mobile, elle doit employer 1'onde de 
143 kc/s (2 100 m), moins qu'il n'en soit 
dispos6 autrement dans la nomenclature. 
[ 35 ] 6) Cette onde, designee comme onde 
g6n6rale d'appel, doit toe employee ex- 
clusivement, dans 1'Atlantique Nord: 

i pour la production des appels in- 

dividuels et des reponses ces 

appels ; 
2 pour la transmission des signaux 

prealables & la transmission du 

trafic. 



r 68 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



[ 851 ] C. A mobile station, after having 
established communication with another 
station of the mobile service on the gen- 
eral calling-wave of 143 kc (2,100 m) must, 
so far as possible, transmit its traffic on 
some other wave of the authorized bands, 
provided it does not interfere with the 
work in progress of another station. 



[ 352 ] D. As a general rule, any mobile 
station equipped for service on type-Ai 
waves in the band 100 to 160 kc (3,000 to 
1,875 m ) an d which is not engaged in a 
communication on another wave, must, in 
order to permit the exchange of traffic 
with other stations of the mobile service, 
return each hour to the wave of 143 kc 
(2,100 m) for 5 minutes beginning at 
x:$5 o'clock Greenwich mean time, during 
the specified hours, according to the cate- 
gory to which the station in question 
belongs. 

[353] E. (a) Land stations must, so far 
as possible, transmit calls in the form of 
call lists; in this case, the stations shall 
transmit their call lists at specified hours 
published in the nomenclature, on the 
wave or waves allocated to them, in the 
band 100 to 160 kc (3,000 to 1,875 m )> 
but not on the wave of 143 kc (2,100 m). 



[ 354 ] (b) Land stations may, however, 
call mobile stations individually at any 
other time, outside the hours fixed for the 
transmission of call lists, according to cir- 
cumstances or according to the work 
which they have to perform. 
[ m ] (c) The wave of 143 kc (2,100 m) 
may be used for individual calls and shall 
preferably be used for this purpose during 
the period indicated in 4, D. 

[ 8M ] 5- Radio communications from 

aeronautical and aircraft stations shall, in 

principle, be exchanged in the following 

manner: 

[ 867 ] i. For aircraft stations: 

(a) In radiotelephony (calling and 
working) for aircraft of which the crew 
does not include a radiotelegraph opera- 
tor. 

(b) In radiotelegraphy on continuous 
waves for aircraft of which the crew in- 
cludes a radiotelegraph operator. 

Calling: type-A2 waves. 

Working: type-Ar waves (type-A2 

shall be permitted in the case of 

work on short waves). 



[ 361 ] C. Une station mobile, apres avoir 
tabli la communication avec une autre 
station du service mobile sur 1'onde gne- 
rale d'appel de 143 kc/s (2 100 m), doit, 
autant que possible, transmettre son 
trafic sur une autre onde quelconque des 
bandes autorisees, a condition de ne pas 
troubler le travail en cours d'une autre 
station. 

[ 85a ] D. En regie g<nerale, toute station 
mobile 6quipee pour le service sur les 
ondes du type Ai des bandes de 100 a 160 
kc/s (3 ooo a i 875 m) et qui n'est pas 
engaged dans une communication sur une 
autre onde doit, en vue de permettre 
i'6change du trafic avec d'autres stations 
du service mobile, revenir chaque heure 
sur 1'onde de 143 kc/s (2 100 m) pendant 
5 minutes & partir de x h 35, temps moyen 
de Greenwich, durant les heures prvues, 
suivant la cat6gorie a laquelle appartient 
la station envisagee. 

[ 863 ] E. a) Les stations terrestres doi- 
vent, autant que possible, transmettre les 
appels sous forme de listes d'appels ; dans 
ce cas, les stations transmettent leurs 
listes d'appels a des heures d6termin6es, 
publi6es dans la nomenclature, sur 1'onde 
ou sur les ondes qui leur sont attributes, 
dans les bandes de 100 a 160 kc/s (3 ooo 
i 875 m), mais non sur 1'onde de 143 
kc/s (2 100 m). 

[ 364 ] b) Les stations terrestres peuvent, 
toutefois, appeler individuellement les 
stations mobiles & toute autre heure, en 
dehors des heures fixees pour remission 
des listes d'appels, selon les circonstances 
ou le travail qu'elles ont a effectuer. 
[ 86B ] c) L'onde de 143 kc/s (2 100 m) 
peut tre employee pour les appels in- 
dividuels et sera, de pr6f6rence, utilisee 
dans ce but pendant la priode indiqu6e 
au 4, D. 

[ 856 ] 5- Les radiocommunications des 
stations aeronautiques et des stations 
d'aronef spnt 6changees, en principe, de 
la facon suivante: 
t 357 ] i. Pour les stations d'a6ronef: 

a) En radiot616phonie (appel et travail) 
pour les a&ronefs dont l'quipage ne com- 
porte pas d'op6rateur radiote!6graphiste. 

b) En radiot616graphie sur ondes entre- 
tenues pour les a6ronefs dont l'quipage 
comporte un op&rateur racliot616graphiste. 

Appel: ondes du type A2. 

Travail: ondes du type Ai (le type 

A2 est admis dans le cas du travail 

sur ondes courtes). 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



169 



pas] 2. For aeronautical stations: 

(a) In radiotelephony (calling and 
working) when the station must com- 
municate with an aircraft of which the 
crew does not include a radiotelegraph 
operator. 

(6) In radiotelegraphy, when the sta- 
tion must communicate with an aircraft 
of which the crew includes a radiotele- 
graph operator. 

Type- A I waves (calling and work- 
ing). 

Type-A2 waves shall be permitted 
(calling and working) in the case 
of short waves. 

ARTICLE 20. Interference 

[ 359 ] i. (i) The exchange of unneces- 
sary signals or messages shall be forbidden 
to all stations. 

[sec] ( 2 ) Tests and experiments shall be 
permitted in mobile stations if they do not 
interfere with the service of other stations. 
As for stations other than mobile stations, 
each administration shall judge, before 
authorizing them, whether or not the pro- 
posed tests or experiments are likely to 
interfere with the service of other stations. 

[ 361 ] 2. It is recommended that traffic 
relating to public correspondence be trans- 
mitted on type-Ai waves rather than on 
type-A2 waves, and on type-A2 waves 
rather than on type-B waves. 

[ 362 ] 3- All stations of the mobile serv- 
ice shall be required to exchange traffic 
with the minimum of radiated power 
necessary to insure good communication. 

[ 363 ] 4 Except in cases of distress, 
communications between on-board sta- 
tions must not interfere with the work of 
land stations. When this work is thus 
interfered with, the on-board stations 
which cause it must stop transmitting or 
change wave, upon the first request of the 
land station concerned, 
[ae*] cj. Test and adjustment signals 
must be selected in such a way that there 
will result no confusion with a signal, an 
abbreviation, etc., having a particular 
meaning defined by these Regulations or 
by the International Code of Signals. 

[ m ] 6. (i) When it is necessary to 
transmit test or adjustment signals, and 
there is danger of interfering with the 



[* 68 ] 2. Pour les stations aeYonautiques: 
a) En radiotelephonie (appel et tra- 
vail) lorsque la station doit communiquer 
avec un aeronef dont Tquipage ne com- 
porte pas d'op6rateur radiotelegraphiste, 

6) En radiotelegraphie lorsque la sta- 
tion doit communiquer avec un aeronef 
dont 1' equipage comporte un operateur 
radioteldgraphiste. 

Ondes du type Ai (appel et travail) . 

Les ondes du type A2 sont admises 
(appel et travail) dans le cas des 
ondes courtes. 

ARTICLE 20. Brouillages 
[35] If (j) L'6change de signaux ou 
correspondances superflus est interdit a 
toutes les stations. 

[sec] ( 2 ) Des essais et des experiences 
sont toleres dans les stations mobiles, s'ils 
ne troublent point le service d'autres sta- 
tions. Quant aux stations autres que les 
stations mobiles, chaque administration 
apprecie, avant de les autoriser, si les 
essais ou experiences proposes sont suscep- 
tibles ou non de troubler le service d'au- 
tres stations. 

[36i] 2. II est recommand6 de transmet- 
tre le trafic se rapportant a, la correspon- 
dance publique sur des ondes du type Ai , 
plut6t que sur des ondes du type A2, et sur 
des ondes du type A2, plut6t que sur des 
ondes du type B. 

l m ] 3- Toutes les stations du service 
mobile sont tenues d'e"changer le trafic 
avec le minimum d'6nergie rayonne 
ncessaire pour assurer une bonne com- 
munication. 

[ 363 ] 4. Sauf dans les cas de detresse, 
les communications entre stations de bord 
ne doivent pas troubler le travail des sta- 
tions terrestres. Lorsque ce travail est 
ainsi trouble, les stations de bord qui en 
sont la cause doivent cesser leurs trans- 
missions ou changer d'onde & la premiere 
demande de la station terrestre interess6e. 
[ 3<u ] 5. Les signaux d'essais et de 
rglage doivent 6tre choisis de telle ma- 
nilre qu'aucune confusion ne puisse se pro- 
duire avec un signal, une abr&viation, etc., 
d'une signification particuli&re d6fime par 
le present Rglement ou par le Code In- 
ternational de Signaux. 
[ 36B ] 6. (i) Quand il est ncessaire 
d'6mettre des signaux d'essais ou de r6- 
glage, et qu'il y a risque de troubler le 



170 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



service of the adjoining land station, per- 
mission must be obtained from that land 
station before such transmissions are 
made. 

[ 366 ] (2) Any station making transmis- 
sions for purposes of testing, adjusting, or 
experimenting, must transmit its call 
signal or, if need be, its name at frequent 
intervals in the course of these transmis- 
sions. 

[sex] 7, xhe administration or enter- 
prise which makes a complaint regarding 
interference must, to support and justify 
the complaint: 

(a) specify the characteristics of the 
interference noted (frequency, variations 
in adjustment, call signal of the interfering 
station, etc.) ; 

(&) state that the station interfered 
with actually uses the frequency assigned 
to it; 

(c) state that it regularly uses receiving 
instruments of a type equivalent to the 
best used in the current practice of the 
service concerned. 

[ 368 ] 8. The administrations shall take 
the steps which they deem advisable and 
which are in keeping with their domestic 
legislation so that electrical apparatus 
capable of serious interference with an 
authorized radio service, will be used in 
such a manner as to avoid such inter- 
ference. 

ARTICLE 21. Emergency Installations 
[389] r . xhe Convention for the Safety 
of Life at Sea shall determine which ships 
must be provided with emergency installa- 
tions and shall define the conditions to be 
fulfilled by installations of this category. 

[ 37 ] 2. In the use of emergency instal- 
lations, all the provisions of the present 
Regulations must be observed. 



ARTICLE 22. Distress Traffic and Distress 
Signals Alarm f Emergency, and Safety 
Signals 

A. General 

p 71 ] i. No provision of these Regula- 
tions shall prevent a mobile station in 
distress from using any means available to 
it for drawing attention, signaling its 
position, and obtaining help. 

[ m ] 2. (i) When distress, emergency, 



service de la station terrestre voisine, le 
consentement de cette station terrestre 
doit 6tre obtenu avant d'effectuer de telles 
Emissions. 

[36] (2) Une station quelconque effec- 
tuant des Emissions pour des essais, des 
rglages ou des experiences doit trans- 
mettre son indicatif d'appel ou,^ en cas de 
besoin, son nom, a de frequents intervalles 
au cours de ces Emissions. 
[* 87 ] 7. L'administration ou Tentre- 
prise qui formule une plainte en mati&re 
de brouillage doit, pour 6tayer et justifier 
celle-ci : 

a) prciser les caract&ristiques du brou- 
illage constat6 (frequence, variations de 
r6glage, indicatif du poste brouilleur, 

etc.); 

b) declarer que le poste brouill< utilise 
bien la frequence qui lui est attribute; 

c) faire connattre qu'elle emploie r6gu- 
lirement des appareils de reception <Tun 
type 6quivalent au type le meilleur utilis6 
dans la pratique courante du service dont 
il s'agit. 

t 368 ] 8- Les administrations prennent 
les mesures qu'elles jugent utiles et qui 
sont compatibles avec leur legislation in- 
terieure, pour que les appareils electriques 
susceptibles de troubler serieusement un 
service autoris6 de radipcommunication 
soient employes de maniere a 6viter de 
telles perturbations. 

ARTICLE 21. Installations de secours 

[ 369 ] i. La Convention pour la sauye- 
garde de la vie humaine en rner determine 
quels sont les navires qui doivent 6tre 
pouryus d'une installation de secours et 
dfinitjes conditions a remplir par les in- 
stallations de cette catgorie. 
[ 37 ] 2. Pour 1'utilisation des installa- 
tions de secours, toutes les prescriptions 
du present Rglement doivent tre 
observers. 

ARTICLE 22. Signal et traftc de detresse. 
Signaux d'alarme, d'urgence et de securite 

A. Generalites 

[ m ] I. Aucune disposition du present 
R&glement ne peut faire obstacle a 1 em- 
ploi, par une station mobile en detresse, 
de tous les moyens dont elle dispose pour 
attirer 1'attention, signaler sa situation et 
obtenir du secours. 
[ 372 ] 2. (i) La vitesse de transmission 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



171 



or safety is involved, the telegraph trans- 
mission speed in general, must not exceed 
1 6 words per minute. 
[ 373 ] (2) The transmission speed for the 
alarm signal is indicated in 21 (i). 



te!6graphique dans les cas de detresse, 
d'urgence ou de securite ne doit pas, en 
general, d6passer 16 mots a la minute. 
[ 87S ] (2) La vitesse de transmission du 
signal d'alarme est indiquee au 21, (i). 



$ m Waves to be used in case of distress B. Ondes d employer en cas de detresse 



[ 374 ] 3- (*) Ships. In case of distress, 
the wave to be used shall be the inter- 
national distress wave, that is, 500 kc (600 
m) (see art. 19) ; it must preferably be used 
in type A2 or B. Vessels which cannot 
transmit on the international distress 
wave shall use their normal calling-wave. 

[ 375 ] (2) Aircraft. Any aircraft in dis- 
tress must transmit the distress call on the 
watching-wave of the fixed or mobile 
stations likely to help it: 500 kc (600 m) 
for stations of the maritime service, 333 kc 
(900 m) for stations of the aeronautical 
service [except as indicated in art. 9, 10 
(2)]. The waves to be used are type A2 
or A3. 



C. Distress signal 

[ 376 ] 4- (i) In radiotelegraphy, the dis- 
tress signal shall consist of the group 
..__-.; in radiotelephony, the 
distress signal shall consist of the spoken 
expression MAYDAY (corresponding to 
the French pronunciation of the expres- 
sion "m'aider"). 

[377] ( 2 ) These distress signals shall an- 
nounce that the ship, aircraft, or any 
other vehicle which sends the distress sig- 
nal is threatened by serious and imminent 
danger and requests immediate assistance. 



D. Distress call 

I 378 ] 5- W The distress call, when sent 
in radiotelegraphy on 500 kc (600 m) shall, 
as a general rule, be immediately preceded 
by the alarm signal as the latter is denned 
in 21 (i), 

[379] ( 2 ) When circumstances permit, 
the transmission of the call shall be sepa- 
rated from the end of the alarm signal by a 
2 -minute silence. 
[ 38 ] (3) The distress call shall include; 

the distress signal transmitted three 

times, 

the word DE, and 
the call signal of the mobile station in 

distress transmitted three times. 



[ 374 ] 3- (i) Navires. En cas de d6- 
tresse, 1'onde a employer est 1'onde inter- 
nationale de d6tresse, c'est--dire 500 
kc/s (600 m) (voir article 19); elle doit 
tre, de pref6rence, utilisee en type A2 ou 
B. Les Mtiments qui ne peuvent met- 
tre sur 1'onde internationale de detresse 
utilisent leur onde normale d'appel. 
[ 37S ] (2) Aeronefs. Tout a&ronef en de- 
tresse doit transmettre 1'appel de d6tresse 
sur 1'onde de veille des stations fixes ou 
mobiles susceptibles de lui porter secours: 
500 kc/s (600 m) pour les stations du 
service maritime, 333 kc/s (900 m) pour 
les stations du service a6ronautique [sauf 
comme il est indiqu6 a 1'article 9, 10, 
(2)]. Les ondes a employer sont du type 
A2 ou A3. 

C. Signal de detresse 

[ 376 ] 4. (i) En radiote!6graphie, le sig- 
nal de d6tresse consiste dans le groupe 
..*__...; en radiot616phonie, le 
signal de d6tresse consiste dans 1 'ex- 
pression parlee MAYDAY (correspondant 
It la prononcjation franchise de 1'expres- 
sion "m'aider"). 

[ 377 ] (2) Ces signaux de detresse an- 
noncent que le navire, l'aronef, ou tout 
autre vehicule qui 6met le signal de de- 
tresse est sous la menace d'un danger 
grave et imminent et demande une as- 
sistance immediate. 

D. Appel de detresse 
[378] 5. (j) L'appel de detresse, lors- 
qu'il est 6mis par radiot616graphie sur 500 
kc/s (600 m), est, en r^gle gn<rale, im- 
m6diatement pr6ced6 du signal d'alarme 
tel que ce dernier est d6fini au 21, (i). 
[ 87fl ] (2) Lorsque les circonstances le per- 
mettent, remission de 1'appel est s6par6e 
de la fin du signal d'alarme par un silence 
de deux minutes. 
[380] (3) L'appel de detresse comprend: 

le signal de dtresse transmis trois 
fois, 

le mot DE, et 

1'indicatif d'appel de la station mo- 
bile en detresse, transmis trois fois. 



172 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



[ 3SI J (4) This call shall have absolute 
priority over other transmissions. All 
stations hearing it must immediately cease 
all transmission capable of interfering 
with the distress traffic, and must listen on 
the wave used for the distress call. This 
call must not be sent to any particular 
station and does not require an acknowl- 
edgment of receipt. 

E. Distress message 

[ 382 ] 6. (l) The distress call must be 
followed as soon as possible by the distress 
message. This message shall include the 
distress call followed by the name of the 
ship, aircraft, or the vehicle in distress, in- 
formation regarding the position of the 
latter, the nature of the distress and the 
nature of the help requested, and any 
other further information which might 
facilitate this assistance. 
[ass] ( 2 ) When, after having sent its 
distress message, an aircraft is unable to 
signal its position, it shall endeavor to 
send its call signal long enough so that the 
radio direction-finding stations may de- 
termine its position. 



[884] 7, ( r ) AS a general rule, a ship or 
aircraft at sea shall signal its position in 
latitude and longitude (Greenwich), using 
figures, for the degrees and minutes, ac- 
companied by one of the words NORTH 
or SOUTH and one of the words EAST or 
WEST. A period shall separate the de- 
grees from the minutes. In some cases, 
the true bearings and the distance in 
nautical miles from some known geo- 
graphical point may be given. 
[ 88B ] (2) As a general rule, an aircraft 
flying over land shall signal its position by 
the name of the nearest locality, its ap- 
proximate distance from this point, ac- 
companied according to the case, by one 
of the words NORTH, SOUTH, EAST, or 
WEST, or, in some cases, words indicating 
intermediate directions. 
[sse] 3. The distress call and message 
shall be sent only by order of the master 
or person responsible for the ship, aircraft, 
or other vehicle carrying the mobile sta- 
tion. 

t 387 ] 9- 00 The distress message must 
be repeated at intervals until an answer 
has been received, and especially during 
the periods of silence provided for in 
article 19, 2. 

[ass] ( 2 ) The alarm signal may also be 
repeated, if necessary. 



[asi] (4) Cet appel a priority absolue sur 
les autres transmissions. Toutes les sta- 
tions qui Tentendent doivent cesser im~ 
mdiatement toute transmission suscep- 
tible de troubler le trafic de d6tresse et 
couter sur Tonde d'&nission de 1'appel de 
d6tresse. Get appel ne doit pas tre 
adress6 a une station d6terminee et ne 
donne pas lieu a l'accus de reception. 

E. Message de detresse 
[382] 5. ( r ) L'appel de detresse doit 
6tre suivi aussitdt que possible du message 
de detresse. Ce message comprend 1'ap- 
pel de detresse, suivi du nom du navire, de 
I'a6ronef ou du vhicule en detresse, des 
indications relatives a la position de 
celui-ci, & la nature de la dtresse et a la 
nature du secours demand^ et, 6ventuelle- 
ment, de tout autre renseignement qui 
pourrait faciliter ce secours. 
[ 388 ] (2) Lorsque, apres avoir transmis 
son message de d6tresse, un a&ronef ne 
peut signaler sa position, il s'efforce 
d'&mettre son indicatif d'appel suffisam- 
ment longtemps pour permettre aux sta- 
tions radiogoniom&triques de determiner 
sa position. 

[384] 7. ( x ) En r&gle g6nrale, un na- 
vire ou un a6ronef a la mer signale sa posi- 
tion en latitude et longitude (Greenwich), 
en employant des chiffres pour les degres 
et les minutes, accompagnes de Tun des 
mots NORTH ou SOUTH et de Tun des 
mots EAST ou WEST; un point s&pare 
les degres des minutes. Eventuellement, 
le relevement vrai et la distance en milles 
marins par rapport & un point g6ogra- 

Phique connu peuvent toe donnes. 
186 ] (2) En regie gen6rale, un aronef en 
vpl au-dessus de la terre signale sa posi- 
tion par le nom de la locality la plus proche, 
sa distance approximative par rapport 
a celle-ci, accompagn6e, selon le cas, de 
Tun des mots NORTH, SOUTH, EAST 
ou WEST ou, 6ventuellernent, des mots 
indiquant les directions intermediaires. 
[ 38<J ] 8. L'appel et le message de de- 
tresse ne sont emis que sur ordre du com- 
mandant ou de la personne responsable 
du navire, de l'aronef ou de tout autre 
v6hicule portant la station mobile. 
[ 387 J 9 (i) Le message de dtresse 
doit tre r6pet6, par intervalles, jusqu'a ce 
qu'une reponse soit rec.ue et, notamment, 
pendant les periodes de silence prvues i 
Tarticle 19, 2. 

[ 388 ] (2) Le signal d'alarme peut gale- 
ment tre rSpete, si nScessaire. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



173 



[389] (3) Xhe intervals must, however, be 
sufficiently long so that stations preparing 
to reply may have time to put their trans- 
mitters in operation. 

[ 39 ] (4) In case the on-board station in 
distress receives no answer to a distress 
message sent on the 5OO-kc (6oo-m) wave, 
the message may be repeated on any other 
available wave by means of which atten- 
tion might be attracted. 

[391] jo. Furthermore, a mobile station 
which becomes aware that another mobile 
station is in distress, may transmit the 
distress message in either of the following 
cases: 

[392] ( a ) when the station in distress is 
not itself in a position to transmit it; 
[393] (&) w hen the master (or his relief) 
of the vessel, aircraft, or other vehicle 
carrying the station which intervenes, be- 
lieve that further help is necessary. 
[ 394 ] ii. (i) Stations which receive a 
distress message from a mobile station 
which is unquestionably in their vicinity, 
must acknowledge receipt thereof at once 
(see 1 8 and 19 below), taking care not 
to interfere with the transmission of the 
acknowledgment of receipt of the said 
message by other stations. 

[ 395 ] (2) Stations which receive a distress 
message from a mobile station which un- 
questionably is not in their vicinity, must 
wait a short period of time before ac- 
knowledging receipt thereof, in order to 
make it possible for stations nearer to the 
mobile station in distress to answer and 
acknowledge receipt without interference. 

F. Distress traffic 

[ 396 ] 12. Distress traffic shall include all 
messages relative to immediate assistance 
needed by the mobile station in distress. 

[ m ] 13. Every distress traffic radio- 
telegram must include the distress signal 
transmitted at the beginning of the pre- 
amble. 

[ 398 ] 14. The control of distress traffic 
shall devolve upon the mobile station in 
distress or upon the mobile station which, 
by application of the provisions of 10 
(a), has sent the distress call. These sta- 
tions may delegate the control of the dis- 
tress traffic to another station. 
[ 8M ] 15. (l) When it considers it in- 



[ 389 ] (3) Les intervalles doivent, toute- 
fois, tre suffisamment longs pour que les 
stations qui se pr6parent a repondre aient 
le temps de mettre leurs appareils emet- 
teurs en rnarche. 

[ 39 ] (4) Dans le cas ou la station de bord 
en detresse ne rec,oit pas de reponse a un 
message de detresse transmis sur 1'onde de 
500 kc/s (600 m), le message peut tre 
repete sur toute autre onde disponible, 
1'aide de laquelle 1'attention pourrait tre 
attiree. 

[39i] 10. De plus, une station mobile qui 
apprend qu'une autre station mobile est 
en detresse peut transmettre le message de 
detresse dans Tun des cas suivants: 

[ 392 ] a) la station en detresse n'est pas & 
m&me de le transmettre elle-m^me; 
[ 393 ] b) le commandant (ou son rempla- 
gant) du navire, aeronef ou autre vehicule 
portant la station intervenante juge que 
d'autres secours sont ncessaires. 
[ 394 ] 11. (i) Les stations qui regoivent 
un message de detresse d'une station ^mo- 
bile se trouvant, sans doute possible, 
dans leur voisinage doivent en accuser 
reception imrnediatement (voir 18 et 
19 ci-apres), en prenant soin de ne pas 
troubler la transmission de 1 'accuse de 
reception dudit message effectuee par 
d'autres stations. 

[395] ( 2 ) Les stations qui regoivent un 
message de detresse d'une station mobile 
qui, sans doute possible, n'est pas dans 
leur voisinage doivent laisser s'6couler un 
court laps de temps avant d'en accuser 
reception, afin de permettre & des stations 
plus proches de la station mobile en de- 
tresse de repondre et d'accuser reception 
sans brouillage. 

F. Trafic de detresse 
[36] I2 . Le trafic de detresse comprend 
tous les messages relatifs au secours im- 
m&iiat n6cessaire & la station mobile en 
detresse. 

[ m ] 13. Tout radiote!6gramme d'un 
trafic de d&tresse doit comprendre le sig- 
nal de detresse transmis au debut du 
preambule. 

[ 398 ] 14. La direction du trafic de de- 
tresse appartient la station mobile en 
detresse ou & la station mobile qui, par 
application des dispositions du 10, lit- 
tera a), a mis Fappel de detresse. Ces 
stations peuvent c^der la direction du 
trafic de d6tresse 4 une autre station. 
[399] I5 . (!) Lorsqu'elle le juge indis- 



174 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



dispensable, any station of the mobile 
service in the proximity of the ship, air- 
craft, or ^ vehicle in distress, may impose 
silence either to all the stations of the 
mobile service in the zone, or to any one 
station which may be causing interference 
with the distress traffic. In both cases, 
the regulatory abbreviation (QRT) shall 
be used, followed by the word DISTRESS ; 
these indications shall be addressed "to 
all " stations or to one station only, as the 
case may be. 

[ 40 ] (2) When the station in distress 
wishes to impose silence, it shall use the 
above-mentioned procedure, substituting 
the distress signal for the 
word DISTRESS. 

[ 401 ] 16. (i) Any station hearing a dis- 
tress call must conform to the provisions 
of 5 (4). 

[402] ( 2 ) Any station of the mobile serv- 
ice which becomes aware of distress 
traffic must listen to this traffic even if it 
is not taking part in it. 
[403] (3) p or t h e en tire duration of dis- 
tress traffic, it shall be prohibited for all 
stations which are aware of this traffic and 
which are not taking part in it: 
[ 4<H ] (a) to use the distress wave [500 kc 
(600 m)] or the wave on which the distress 
traffic is taking place; 
[ 406 ] (b) to use type-B waves. 

[ m ] (4) A station of the mobile service 
which, while following distress traffic of 
which it is aware, is able to continue its 
normal service, may do so, when the dis- 
tress traffic is well established, under the 
following conditions: 

[ m ] (#) the use of the waves specified in 
(3) shall be forbidden; 
[ 408 ] (&) the use of type-Ai waves, with 
the exception of those which might inter- 
fere with the distress traffic, shall be per- 
mitted; 

[409] ( c ) t ^^1 j-) e allowed to use type- 
A2 or -A3 waves only in the band or bands 
allocated to the mobile service and which 
do not include frequencies used for distress 
traffic [the band around 500 kc (600 m) 
extends from 385 to 550 kc (779 to 545 
m)]. 

[ 41 ] 17. When it is no longer necessary 
to observe silence, or when the distress 
traffic is ended, the station which has con- 
trolled this traffic shall send on the distress 
wave, and, where necessary, on the wave 
used for this distress traffic, a message ad- 
dressed "to all", indicating that the dis- 



pensable, toute station du service mobile a 
proximite du navire, de 1'aeronef ou du 
v6hicule en dtresse peut imposer silence 
soit a toutes les stations du service mobile 
dans la zone, soit & une station qui trou- 
blerait le trafic de dtoesse. Dans les 
deux cas il est fait usage de Fabreviation 
r6glementaire (QRT) suivie du mot DE- 
TRESSE; suivant le cas, les indications 
sont adresses "a tous" ou seulement & 
une station. 

[ 40 ] (2) Lorsque la station en d6tresse 

veut imposer silence, elle emploie la 

procedure qui vient d'etre indique, 

en substituant le signal de d<tresse 

au mot DETRESSE. 

[ 4 l ] 16. (i) Toute station qui entend 

un appel de detresse doit se conformer aux 

prescriptions du 5, (4). 

[ 4 2 ] (2) Toute station du service mobile 

qui a connaissance d'un trafic de detresse 

doit suivre ce trafic, mme si elle n'y 

participe pas. 

[ 403 ] (3) Pendant toute la duree d'un 

trafic de detresse, il est interdit & toutes 

les stations qui ont connaissance de ce 

trafic et qui n'y participent pas: 

[ 404 ] a) d'employer 1'onde de detresse 

[500 kc/s (600 m)] ou Fonde sur laquelle 

a lieu le trafic de ddtresse; 

[405] j) d'employer des ondes du type 

[ 406 ] (4) Une station du service mobile 

qui, tout en suivant un trafic de detresse 

dont elle a connaissance, est capable de 

continuer son service normal, peut le faire, 

lorsque le trafic de d6tresse est bien tabli, 

dans les conditions suivantes: 

[ 407 ] a) Femploi des ondes indique"es en 

(3) est interdit; 

[ 408 ] Zrn'emploi des ondes du type Ai, & 

1'exception de celles qui pourraient trou- 

bler le trafic de ddtresse, ltd est permis ; 

[ 409 ] c) 1'emploi des ondes des types A2 
ou A3 ne lui est permis que dans la ou les 
bandes affect6es au service mobile et qui 
ne comprennent pas de frequence utilised 
pour le trafic de detresse [la bande autour 
de 500 kc/s (600 m) s'6tend de 385 a 550 
kc/s (779 a 545 m)]. 

r 10 ] !/ Lorsque Tobservation du si- 
lence n'est plus n6cessaire ou que le trafic 
de detresse est termin6, la station qui a eu 
la direction de ce trafic transmet sur 
Fonde de detresse et, s'il y a lieu, sur 
1'onde utilisee pour ce trafic de dtresse, 
un message adresse u a tous" indiquant 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



175 



tress traffic is ended. This message shall 
take the following form: 

CQ call "to all" (three times), 

the word DE, 

call signal of the station transmitting 
the message, 

distress signal, 

time of filing of the message, 

name and call signal of the mobile 
station which was in distress, 

words "distress traffic ended". 

G. Acknowledgment of receipt of a distress 
message 

[ 4U ] 1 8. The acknowledgment of re- 
ceipt of a distress message shall be given 
in the following form; 

call signal of the mobile station in 
distress (three times), 

the word DE, 

call signal of the station acknowledg- 
ing receipt (three times), 

group RRR, 

distress signal. 

[ 4l2 ] *9' (0 Any mobile station ac- 
knowledging receipt of a distress message 
must, on the order of the master or his 
relief, give the following information as 
soon as possible, in the order indicated : 

its name, 

its position, in the form specified in 

7, 

the maximum speed at which it is pro- 
ceeding towards the ship (aircraft 
or other vehicle) in distress. 

[ 413 ] (2) Before transmitting this mes- 
sage the station must make sure that it is 
not interfering with the emissions of other 
stations in a better position to render im- 
mediate assistance to the station in dis- 
tress. 

H. Repetition of a distress call or message 

[ 414 ] 20. (i) Any station of the mobile 
service which is not in a position to render 
assistance and which has heard a distress 
message for which acknowledgment of 
receipt has not immediately been given, 
must take all possible steps to attract the 
attention of stations of the mobile service 
which are in a position to furnish help. 

[4i5] ( 2 ) F or this purpose, with the per- 
mission of the authority responsible for 
the station, the distress call or distress 



que le trafic de detresse est terming. Ce 
message affecte la forme suivante : 

1'appel tous CQ (trois fois), 

le mot DE, 

1'indicatif d'appel de la station qui 
transmet le message, 

le signal de detresse, 

1'heure de depdt du message, 

le nom et 1'indicatif d'appel de la 
station mobile qui etait en d6tresse, 

les mots "trafic detresse terming". 

G. Accuse de reception d'un message de 
detresse 

[4u] I g. L'accus6 de reception d'un 
message de detresse est donn sous la 
forme suivante : 

1'indicatif d'appel de la station mobile 

en detresse (trois fois), 
le mot DE, 
1'indicatif d'appel de la station qui 

accuse reception (trois fois), 
le groupe RRR, 
le signal de detresse. 

[4i2] | j<^ (j;) Toute station mobile qui 
donne I'accus6 de r6ception un message 
de d&tresse doit, sur ordre du commandant 
ou de son remplacant, faire connaitre, 
aussitdt que possible, les renseignements 
ci-apres dans 1'ordre indiqu6: 
son nom, 
sa position dans la forme indiqu6e 

au 7, 

la vitesse maximum avec laquelle elle 
se dirige vers le navire (aeVonef ou 
autre vehicule) en detresse. 

[ 4ls ] (2) Avant d'6mettre ce message, la 
station devra s'assurer qu'elle ne brouille 
pas les 6missions d'autres stations mieux 
placets pour apporter un secours imme- 
diat a la station en d6tresse. 



H. Repetition d'un appel ou d'un message 
de detresse 

[414] 20. (i) Toute station du service 
mobile, qui n'est pas & m&ne de fournir du 
secours et qui a entendu un message de 
detresse auquel il n'a pas 6t6 donne im- 
mediatement d'accuse de reception, doit 
prendre toutes les dispositions possibles 
pour attirer 1'attention des stations du 
service mobile qui sont en situation de 
fournir du secours. 

[4* 8 ] (2) Dans ce but, avec Tautorisa- 
tion de l'autorit responsable de la sta- 
tion, 1'appel de detresse ou le message de 



176 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 317 



message may be repeated; this repetition 
shall be made at full power, either on the 
distress wave or on one of the waves which 
may be used in case of distress ( 3 of this 
article); at the same time all necessary 
steps shall be taken to inform the author- 
ities whose assistance may be advanta- 
geous. 

[ m ] (3) A station which repeats a dis- 
tress call or a distress message shall trans- 
mit after it the word DE followed by its 
own call signal three times. 
[ 21-28 omitted.] 

[Articles 23-30 omitted. Working 
hours of stations of the mobile service. 
Order of priority of communications in the 
mobile service. Indication of the station of 
origin of radiotelegrams. Routing of radio- 
telegrams. Accounting for radiotelegrams. 
Aeronautical radio service of public corre- 
spondence. Service of low-power mobile 
radiotekphone stations. Special services.] 

ARTICLE 31. International Radio Con- 
sulting Committee (C.C.I.R.) 

[ B54 ] I. An International Radio Con- 
sulting Committee (C.C.I.R.) shall be 
charged with the study of technical radio 
questions and those of which the solution 
depends principally upon considerations 
of a technical character, which shall be 
submitted to it by the administrations 
and radio operating companies. 
[] 2. (i) It shall be_ formed of ex- 
perts of the administrations and radio 
operating companies or groups of radio 
operating companies recognized by their 
respective governments, which state their 
desire to participate in its work and under- 
take to contribute, in equal shares, to the 
common expenses of its meetings. The 
statement shall be addressed to the ad- 
ministration of the country in which the 
last administrative conference was held. 
[ 5M ] (2) International organizations in- 
terested in radio studies, who shall have 
been designated by the last plenipoten- 
tiary or administrative conference, and 
who undertake to contribute to the ex- 
penses of the meetings, as indicated in the 
preceding subparagraph, shall also be 
admitted. 

[ 5sr ] (3) Each administration, company, 
group of companies, or international or- 
ganization, shall defray the personal ex- 
penses of its own experts. 



d&tresse peut 6tre r6pet6; cette r6p6tition 
est faite & toute puissance soit sur Tonde 
de detresse, soit sur une des ondes qui peu- 
vent tre employees en cas de detresse 
( 3 du present article); en mme temps, 
toutes les dispositions n6cessaires seront 
prises pour aviser les autorites qui peu- 
vent intervenir utilernent 
[416] (3) Une station qui rpete un appel 
de detresse ou un message de d6tresse le 
fait suivre du mot DE et de son propre 
indicatif d'appel transmis 3 fois. 
[ 21-28 omis.] 

[Articles 23-30 omis. Vacations des 
stations du service mobile. Ordre de pri- 
orite des communications dans le service 
mobile. Indication de la station d'origine 
des radiot&Ugrammes, Direction d donner 
aux radiotelegrammes. Comptabilite des 
radiotelegrammes. Service radioaerien de 
correspondance publigue. Service des sta- 
tions radiotelephoniques mobiles de faible 
puissance. Services spedaux.] 

ARTICLE 31. Comiti consultatif interna- 
tional des radiocommunications (C. C.I.R.*) 

[ 564 ] i. Un comit6 consultatif interna- 
tional des radiocommunications (C.C.I.R.) 
est charg6 d'6tudier les questions radio- 
61ectriques techniques et celles dont la 
solution depend principalernent de con- 
sid6rations d'ordre technique et qui lui 
sont soumises par les administrations et les 
compagnies d 'exploitation radioelectrique. 
[ 5S5 ] 2. (i) II est form6 d'experts des 
administrations et des compagnies ou 
groupes de compagnies d 'exploitation 
radioelectrique reconnues par leurs gou- 
vernements respectifs, qui d6clarent vou- 
loir participer a ses travaux et qui s'en- 
gagent a contribuer, par parts egales, aux 
frais communs de ses reunions. La de- 
claration est adress6e a radministration 
du pays ou a et6 tenue la derniere con- 
f6rence administrative, 
pee] ( 2 ) Sont aussi admis des organismes 
internationaux s'intressant aux 6tudes 
radioelectriques qui sont designes par la 
derniere conference de plnipotentiaires ou 
administrative, et qui s'engagent a con- 
tribuer aux frais des reunions comme il 
est indiqu6 Talinea pr6c6dent. 

[SB?] (3) Les d6penses personnelles des 
experts de chaque administration, com- 
pagnie, groupe de compagnies ou or- 
ganisme international sont supportees par 
ceux-ci. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



177 



[ 558 ] 3- In principle, the meetings of the 
C.C.I.R. shall take place every 5 years. 
However, a meeting which has been 
scheduled may be advanced or postponed 
by the administration calling it at the 
request of 10 participating administra- 
tions, if the number and nature of the 
questions to be studied warrant it. 
[ 559 ] 4- (*) The languages and method 
of voting used in the plenary assemblies, 
committees, and subcommittees, shall be 
those adopted by the last plenipotentiary 
or administrative conference. 

peo] ( 2 ) However, when a country is not 
represented by an administration, the ex- 
perts of the recognized operating com- 
panies of that country, in one body, and 
regardless of their number shall be entitled 
to one deliberative vote only. 
[ B i] 5. The Director of the Bureau of 
the Union, or his representative, and the 
representatives of the other International 
Consulting Committees, C.C.LF. and 
C.C.I.T., shall have the right to take part 
in the meetings of the C.C.I.R. in an 
advisory capacity. 

[ 5SZ ] 6. The internal organization of the 
C.C.I.R. shall be governed by the pro- 
visions of appendix 14 to the present 
Regulations. 

ARTICLE 32. Expenses of the Bureau of 

the Union 

[ 6fl3 ] I. The ordinary expenses of the 
Bureau of the Union for the radio service 
must not exceed the amount of 200,000 

Pold francs annually. 
84 ] 2. However, if an extraordinary 
expense is incurred for printed matter or 
for various documents during a year, and 
the corresponding revenue is not col- 
lected during the same year, the Bureau 
shall be authorized, in this case only, to 
exceed the maximum credit provided for, 
with the understanding that the maxi- 
mum credit for the following year shall be 
reduced by an amount equal to the abover 
mentioned excess. 

[ 666 ] 3. The sum of 200,000 gold francs 
may be modified later, with the consent 
of all the contracting parties. 

ARTICLE 33. Effective Date of the General 

Regulations 

[58] The present General Regulations shall 
go into effect on the first day of January, 
one thousand nine hundred and thirty-four. 



[ 55S ] 3* En principe, les reunions du 
C.C.LR. ont lieu de cinq en cinq ans. 
Cependant, une reunion fixee peut tre 
avancee ou ajournee par 1'administration 
qui 1'a convoquee, sur demande de dix ad- 
ministrations participantes, si le nombre 
et la nature des questions a examiner le 
justifient. 

[ 669 ] 4- (i) Les langues et le mode de 
votation employes dans les assemblies 
plenieres, commissions et sous-commis- 
sions, sont ceux adoptes par la derniere 
conference de plenipotentiaries ou ad- 
ministrative. 

[ 56 ] (2) Toutefois, lorsqu'un pays n'est 
pas represent^ par une administration, les 
experts des compagnies d'exploitation 
reconnues de ce pays disposent, pour leur 
ensemble et quel que soit leur nombre, 
d'une seule voix deliberative. 
[ 6W ] 5. Le directeur du Bureau de 
1'Union ou son representant et les repre- 
sentants des autres comites consultatifs 
internationaux, C.C.LF. et C.C.I.T., ont 
le droit de participer, avec voix consulta- 
tive, aux reunions du C.C.I.R. 

[ B62 ] 6. L'organisation interieure du 
C.C.LR. est regie par les dispositions de 
1'appendice 14 au present Reglement. 

ARTICLE 32. Frais du Bureau de V Union 

[ 563 ] i. Les frais communs du Bureau 
de 1'Union pour le service des radio com- 
munications ne doivent pas depasser, par 
anne, la somme de 200 ooo francs-or. 
[ 564 ] 2. Toutefois, si une depense ex~ 
ceptionnellement elevee en imprimes ou 
documents divers se presente au cours 
d'une annee, sans que les recettes cor- 
respondantes soient encaiss&es pendant la 
m&ne annee, le Bureau est autorise, ex- 
clusivement dans ce cas, a depasser le 
credit maximum prevu, sous la reserve 
que le maximum du credit pour 1'annee 
suivante sera reduit d'un montant egal a 
1'excedent susvise. 

[ S6B ] 3. La somme de 200 ooo francs-or 
pourra tre modifiee ulterieurement du 
consentement de toutes les parties con- 
tractantes. 

ARTICLE 33. Mise en vigueur du Rlgle- 

ment general 

[ 56 ] Le present Reglement general en- 
trera en vigueur le premier Janvier mil 
neuf cent trente-quatre. 



I 7 8 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 



[567] I N WITNESS WHEREOF the respective 
plenipotentiaries have signed the present 
General Regulations in a single copy 
which shall remain deposited in the 
archives of the Spanish Government and a 
copy of which shall be forwarded to each 
government. 

Done at Madrid, December 9, 1932. 



pe^] EN FOI DE QUOI, les p!6nipotentiaires 
respectifs ont sign6 ce Reglement general 
en un exemplaire qui restera d6pos6 aux 
archives du Gouyernement de 1'Espagne 
et dont une copie sera remise & chaque 
gouvernement. 

Fait & Madrid, le 9 decembre 1932. 



[Signatures and Appendices 1-13 omitted; the regulations were signed on behalf of each of 
the signatories of the convention (No. 316, ante), with exceptions of Ethiopia, Luxemburg, 
Mexico, and Persia.] 



No. 317a 



Rules of Procedure of the International Consultative Committee for 
Radiocommunications (C.C.LR.)- Appendix 14 to the General 
Radio Regulations signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932. 

Reglement interieur du Comite Consultatif International des Radio- 
communications (C.C.I.R.). Appendice 14 au Reglement gene- 
ral des radiocommunications signe & Madrid, 9 decembre 1932. 

Text and translation from U. S. Treaty Series, No. 867. 



[Translation] 

Article i. By "managing administra- 
tion" shall be meant the administration 
in charge of organizing a meeting of the 
C.C.I. R. The managing administration 
shall start taking care of the work of the 
C.C.LR. five months after the closing of 
the preceding meeting; its duties shall end 
five months after the closing of the meet- 
ing it has organized. 

Art. 2. The managing administration 
shall set the place and definite date of the 
meeting which it has charge of organizing. 
At least 6 months before the aforesaid 
date, the managing administration shall 
address the invitation to this meeting to 
all the administrations of the Interna- 
tional Telecommunication Union, and, 
through the latter, to the companies, 
groups of companies, and international 
radio organizations covered in article 31 
of the General Radio Regulations. 

Art. 3. I. The first meeting of the 
plenary assembly shall be opened by the 
managing administration. This assembly 
shall appoint the necessary committees 
and shall distribute to them the questions 
to be dealt with, in classes. It shall also 
appoint the president and the vice presi- 



Article x* On entend par " administra- 
tion grante", Tadministration qui est 
chargee d 'organiser une reunion du 
C.C.LR. L'administration g&rante com- 
mence a s'occuper des travaux du C.C.LR. 
cinq mois aprs la cldture de la reunion 
pr6c<dente; son r61e expire cinq mois apr&s 
la cldture de la reunion qu'elle a organised. 

Art. 2. L'administration grante fixe 
le lieu et la date definitive de la r6union 
qu'elle est charged d'organiser. Au moins 
six mois avant la date susdite, 1'adminis- 
tration grante adresse 1'invitation pour 
cette reunion a toutes les administrations 
de rilnion internationale des tel&com- 
munications et, par 1'entremise de celles- 
ci, aux conipagnies, aux groupes des com- 
pagnies et aux organismes internationaux 
radio&ectriques vis6s & Tarticle 31 du 
Reglement g6nral des radiocommunica- 
tions. 

Art. 3. r. La premiere stance de 
I'assembl6e p!6niere est ouverte par Tad- 
ministration grante. Cette assemble 
constitue les commissions necessaires et 
rpartit entre elles, par categories, les 
questions a traiter. Elle d6signe aussi le 
president et le vice-president du C.C.LR., 



Dec. 9, 1932 

dent of the C.C.I.R. and the chairman 
and the vice chairman or vice chairmen of 
each committee. 

2. The president of the C.C.I.R. 
shall conduct the plenary assemblies; in 
addition, he shall have the general super- 
vision of the work of the meeting. ^ The 
vice chairmen shall assist the chairmen 
and replace them in case of absence. 

Art. 4. The secretariat for the meeting 
of the C.C.I.R. shall be provided by the 
managing administration, with the col- 
laboration of the Bureau of the Union. 

Art. 5. In principle, the minutes and 
reports shall give only the main points of 
the statements of the delegates. How- 
ever, each delegate shall have the right to 
require the insertion into the minutes or 
report, of any statement he has made, 
either in summary or verbatim, on condi- 
tion that he furnish the text thereof not 
later than the morning following the end 
of the meeting. 

Art. 6. i. Any delegation which 
might, for serious reasons, be prevented 
from attending meetings, shall have the 
right to entrust its vote or votes to an- 
other delegation. However, a single dele- 
gation may not, under these circumstan- 
ces, combine and use the votes of more 
than two delegations, including its own 
vote or votes. 

2. A proposal shall be adopted only if 
supported by an absolute majority of the 
votes cast; in case of a tie it shall fall. 
The minutes shall show the number of 
delegations which voted in favor of and of 
those who voted against the proposal. 

3. Voting shall be conducted either 
by raising the hands, or, at the request of 
a delegation, by roll call in the alpha- 
betical order of the French names of the 
participating countries. In the latter 
case, the minutes shall indicate the dele- 
gations who voted in favor of and those 
who voted against the proposal. 

Art. 7. I. The committees created 
by the plenary assembly may be divided 
into subcommittees and the subcom- 
mittees into sub-subcommittees. 

2. The chairmen of the committees 
shall propose the selection of the chairman 
of each subcommittee and sub-subcom- 
mittee for the ratification of the respective 
committee. The committees, subcom- 
mittees, and sub-subcommittees shall 
appoint their own reporters. 

3. The opinions expressed by the 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



179 



le president et le ou les vice-presidents de 
chaque commission. 

2. Le president du C.C.I.R. dirige 
les assemblies plenieres; il a, en outre, la 
direction generale des travaux de la re- 
union. Les vice-presidents present assis- 
tance aux presidents et les remplacent en 
cas d 'absence. 

Art. 4. Le secretariat de la r6union 
du C.C.I.R. est assur^ par radministra- 
tion g6rante, avec la collaboration du 
Bureau de 1' Union. 

Art. 5. En principe, les proces-verbaux 
et les rapports ne reproduisent les expos6s 
des delegu6s que dans leurs points princi- 
paux. Cependant, chaque delegu6 a le 
droit de demander 1'insertion analytique 
ou in extenso au proces-verbal ou au 
rapport de toute declaration qu'il a faite, 
& condition qu'il en fournisse le texte au 
plus tard le matin qui suit la fin de la 
seance. 

Art. 6. i. Une delegation qui serai t 
emp6ch6e, pour une cause grave, d'assister 
a des seances, a la facult6 de charger de sa 
ou de ses voix une autre delegation. 
Toutefois, une mme delegation ne peut 
reunir et disposer dans ces conditions des 
voix de plus de deux delegations, y com- 
pris la sienne ou les siennes. 

2. Une proposition n'est adopted que 
si elle reunit la majorit6 absolue des 
suffrages exprimes; en cas d'egalite de 
voix, elle est ecartee. Les proces-verbaux 
indiqueront le nombre des delegations qui 
ont vot6 pour et le nombre de celles qui 
ont vot6 contre la proposition. 

3. Les votations ont lieu soit mains 
levees, soit, sur demande d'une delega- 
tion, par appel nominal, dans 1'ordre 
alphabetique du nom frangais des pays 
participants. Dans ce dernier cas, les 
proces-verbaux indiqueront les deJ6ga- 
tions qui ont vote pour et celles qui ont 
vot6 contre la proposition. 

Art. 7. i. Les commissions institutes 
par Tassemblee pleniere peuvent se sub- 
diviser en sous-commissions, etles sous- 
commissions en sous-sous-commissions. 

2. Les pr6sidents des commissions 
proposent a la ratification de la commis- 
sion respective le choix du president de 
chaque sous-commission et sous-sous- 
commission. Les commissions, sous-com- 
missions et sous-sous-commissions nom- 
ment elles-mmes leurs rapporteurs. 

3. Les avis emis par les commissions 



i8o 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 



committees must be marked: "unani- 
mously" if the opinion has been expressed 
by the voters unanimously, or: "by a 
majority" if the opinion was adopted by a 
majority. 

Art. 8. The Bureau of the Union shall 
take part in the various tasks of the 
C.C.I.R. for the purpose of centralizing 
and publishing general documents for the 
use of the administrations. 

Art. 9. i. At the closing session of 
the plenary assembly, the president shall 
communicate the list of opinions and that 
of the questions left to be solved and of 
the new questions submitted by the com- 
mittees. 

2, The president shall place on record 
the final adoption, of the opinions ex- 
pressed, if any. If there is occasion for 
voting at the plenary assembly, the 
formulas "unanimously" or "by a ma- 
jority" shall apply to this vote. 

3. Unsolved and new questions shall 
be recorded by the president if the as- 
sembly is in favor of continuing their 
study. The latter shall then inquire as to 
what administrations wish to take charge 
of preparing proposals relating to these 
questions and what other administrations 
or radio operating enterprises are willing 
to collaborate in the work. On the basis 
of the replies, he shall prepare an official 
list of the questions to be included in the 
agenda of the following meeting, with the 
indication of the centralizing administra- 
tions and of the collaborating administra- 
tions and private radio operating enter- 
prises. This list shall be included in the 
minutes of the meeting. 

4. In the same session of the plenary 
assembly, the C.C.I.R., upon the offer 
or with the consent of the interested 
delegation, shall designate the adminis- 
tration which is to call the following meet- 
ing and the approximate date of that 
meeting, 

Art. 10. i. After the meeting is 
closed, the preparation of questions sub- 
mitted for study shall be entrusted to the 
administration designated to organize the 
next meeting (new managing administra- 
tion). The unfinished business shall, on 
the contrary, be entrusted to the former 
managing administration, which shall be 
in charge of completing it, in collaboration 
with the Bureau of the Union. 

2. The former managing administra- 
tion shall forward the documents to the 



doivent porter la fprmule : " & Vunanimite " 
si 1'avis a e"t e"mis a 1'unanimite des vo- 
tants, ou la formule: "d fa majorite" si 
1'avis a 6t6 adopte a la majorite. 

Art. 8. Le Bureau de T Union prend 
part aux divers travaux du C.C.I.R. en 
vue de la centralisation et de la publica- 
tion d'une documentation g6ne>ale a 
1' usage des administrations. 

Art, 9. i. A la stance de c!6ture de 
Fassembiee pieniere, le president com- 
munique la liste des avis et celle des 
questions qui restent a r6soudre et des 
questions nouvelles soumises par les 
commissions. 

2. Le president constate, le cas e'che'- 
ant, Tadoption definitive des avis ex- 
prime's. S'il y a lieu a votation a 1'as- 
sembiee p!6nire, les fprmules "& Funa- 
nimite" ou "a la majorite" s'appliquent a 
cette votation. 

3. Les questions non r6solues et les 
questions nouvelles sont enregistr6es par 
le president, si Fassemble'e est d'accord 
pour en faire poursuivre l'6tude. Celui- 
ci demande ensuite quelles administra- 
tions desirent se charger de la preparation 
des propositions se rapportant a ces ques- 
tions et quelles autres administrations 
ou entreprises d'exploitation radioelec- 
trique sont prates a collaborer aux 
travaux. D'apr&s les r&ponses, il dresse 
une liste officielle des questions a inscrire 
a 1'ordre du jour de la reunion suivante, 
avec ^'indication des administrations 
centralisatrices et des administrations et 
entreprises privies d'exploitation radio- 
eiectrique collaboratrices. Cette liste est 
inse're'e au proems- verbal de 1'assemblee. 

4. A la mme stance de Tassemble'e 
pieniere, le C.C.I.R., sur 1'offre ou le 
consenternent de la delegation int&ress6e, 
designe ^'administration qui convoquera 
la reunion suivante et la date approxi- 
mative de cette reunion. 

Art. ro. i. Apres la c!6ture de la 
reunion, la preparation des questions 
mises a 1' etude est confiee a radministra- 
tion designed pour organiser la prochaine 
reunion (administration gerante nou- 
velle). Les affaires en instance sont, 
au contraire, confines a ^administration 
gerante ancienne, laquelle est chargee de 
les terminer, en collaboration avec le 
Bureau de 1' Union. 

2. L'ancienne administration gerante 
transmet les documents a la nouvelle 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



new managing administration not later 
than five months after the closing of this 
meeting. 

Art. ii. After the end of a meeting, all 
other questions which the administrations 
and radio operating companies wish to 
submit to the committee shall be ad- 
dressed to the new managing administra- 
tion. This administration shall include 
these questions in the agenda of the next 
meeting. However, no question may be 
included in this agenda if it has not been 
forwarded to the managing administra- 
tion at least six months before the date of 
the meeting. 

Art. 12. I. All documents pertaining 
to a meeting, having been sent to the 
managing administration before this 
meeting, or submitted during the meeting, 
shall be printed and distributed by the 
Bureau of the Union in collaboration with 
the managing administration. 

2. When the study of a question has 
been entrusted to a centralizing adminis- 
tration, it shall devolve upon this admin- 
istration to take the necessary steps 
toward undertaking the study of the 
question. The collaborating adminis- 
trations and radio operating companies 
must send their report on this question 
directly to the centralizing administration, 
6 months before the date of the C.C.I.R. 
meeting, in order that the said adminis- 
tration may consider same in its general 
report and in its proposals. 

3. However, the administrations and 
radio operating companies shall be free to 
send another copy of their report to the 
Bureau of the Union, if they wish these 
reports to be communicated immediately 
and separately to all the administrations 
and companies concerned, by the said 
Bureau. 

Art. 13. The managing administration 
may correspond directly with the admin- 
istrations and radio operating companies 
recognized as being capable of collaborat- 
ing in the work of the committee. It 
shall send at least one copy of the docu- 
ments to the Bureau of the Union. 



administration g6rante, au plus tard cinq 
mois apres la cldture de cette reunion. 

Art. ii. Apr&s la fin d'une reunion, 
toutes les autres questions que les ad- 
ministrations et compagnies d 'exploitation 
radioelectrique desirent soumettre au 
comit sont adress6es & la nouvelle ad- 
ministration gdrante. Cette administra- 
tion inscrit ces questions & 1'ordre du jour 
de la prochaine reunion. Toutefois, 
aucune question ne peut y tre comprise, 
si elle n'a ete communique^ a 1 'adminis- 
tration g6rante au moins six mois avant 
la date de la reunion. 

Art. 12. i. Tous les documents affe- 
rents a une reunion, envpyes avant cette 
r6union a 1 'administration gerante, ou 
presentes pendant la r6union, sont im~ 
primes et distribues par le Bureau de 
I 1 Union en collaboration avec 1'adminis- 
tration gerante. 

2. Lorsque l'tude d'une question a 
et6 confiee une administration centra- 
lisatrice, il appartient & cette administra- 
tion de faire le n6cessaire pour proc6der a 
1' etude de la question. Les administra- 
tions et les compagnies d'exploitation 
radioelectrique collaboratrices doivent 
envoyer directement a radministration 
centralisatrice leur rapport sur cette 
question, six mois avant la date de la r- 
union du C.C.I.R., afin que ladite ad- 
ministration en puisse tenir compte dans 
son rapport general et dans ses proposi- 
tions. 

3. Toutefois, les administrations et 
les compagnies d'exploitation radioelec- 
trique sont libres d'envoyer aussi copie de 
leur rapport au Bureau de P Union, si elles 
desirent que ces rapports soient communi- 
ques imm6diatement et separement, par 
les soins dudit Bureau, toutes les ad- 
ministrations et compagnies interess6es. 

Art. 13. L 'administration gerante peut 
correspondre directement avec les ad- 
ministrations et les compagnies d'exploita- 
tion radioelectrique reconnues susceptibles 
de collaborer aux travaux du comit6. 
Elle remet au moins un exemplaire des 
documents au Bureau de FUnion. 



1 82 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 

No. 317b 



No. 



Final Protocol to the General Radio Regulations. 

December 9, 1932. 



Signed at Madrid, 



Protocole final au Rdglement general des radiocommunications. 
Signe Madrid, 9 decembre 1932. 

Entered into force January r, 1934.* 
Text and translation from U. S. Treaty Series, No. 867. 



[Translation] 

At the time of signing the General 
Radio Regulations annexed to the Inter- 
national Telecommunication Convention, 
the undersigned plenipotentiaries take 
note of the following statements: 



Au moment de proceder & la signature 
du Reglement general des radio com- 
munications annexe & la Convention in- 
ternationale des telecommunications, les 
plenipotentiaires soussignes prennent acte 
des declarations suivantes: 



The plenipotentiaries of Germany state 
formally that their Government reserves 
the right to continue using the waves of 
105 kc (2,857 m) and 117.5 kc (2,553 m) 
for some special press services carried on 
by radiotelephony. 



II 

The plenipotentiaries of the Dutch East 
Indies state formally that their Govern- 
ment reserves the right of not permitting 
the mobile stations of its country to apply 
the provisions of the last two sentences of 
article 26, I (i) of the General Regula- 
tions concerning the retransmission of 
radiotelegrams through a mobile station 
for the sole purpose of hastening or 
facilitating transmission, instead of trans- 
mitting them to the nearest land station. 



III 

The plenipotentiaries of the Union of 
Soviet Socialist Republics state formally 
that their Government reserves the right 
to use the following frequency bands for 
the services listed below: 



150 to 

285 to 
315 to 
340 to 



285 kc (2,000 to 1,053 
315 kc (1,053 to 952 m 
340 kc ( 952 to 882 m 
420 kc ( 882 to 714 m 



Les plenipotentiaires de TAllernagne 
declarent formellement que leur gouverne- 
ment se reserve le droit de rnaintenir 
V usage des ondes de 105 kc/s (2 857 m) et 
117,5 kc/s (2 553 m) pour quelques ser- 
vices de presse sp6ciaux faits par radio- 
telephonie. 

II 

Les plenipotentiaires des Indes neerlan- 
daises declarent formellement que leur 
gouvernement se reserve le droit de ne 
pas perrnettre aux stations mobiles de son 
pays d'appliquer les dispositions des deux 
dernieres phrases de 1'article 26, I, (i) 
du Reglement general concernant la re- 
transmission des radio tejegrammes par 
I'lntermediaire d'une station mobile dans 
le seul but d'acc16rer ou de faciliter la 
transmission au lieu de les transmettre & 
la station terrestre la plus proche, 

III 

Les plenipotentiaires de 1' Union des 
Republiques Sovietistes Socialistes de- 
clarent formellement que leur gouverne- 
ment se r6serve le droit d'utiliser les 
bandes de frequences suivantes pour les 
services ci-apres enumeres: 

broadcasting 

radiobeacons 

aeronautical services and radio direction finding 

broadcasting 



1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations under No. 3479, August 30, 
1934. 



Dec. 9, 1932 



GENERAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



183 



515 to 

9,600 to 

11,700 to 

I2,IOO tO 

15,350 to 
17,800 to 
21,550 to 

150 a 
285 a 
315 & 
340 & 
51531 

9 600 a 

1 1 700 & 

12 ioo a 
15 350 a 
17800 a 
21 550 & 



550 kc ( 583 to 545 m) aeronautical services 
9,700 kc (31.25 to 30.93 m) broadcasting 
11,900 kc (25.64 to 25,21 m) fixed services 
12,300 kc (24.79 to 24.39 m ) broadcasting 
15,450 kc (19.54 to 19.42 m) broadcasting 
17,850 kc (16.85 to 1 6. 8 1 m ) broadcasting 
21,750 kc (13.92 to 13.79 m ) broadcasting 



285 
315 
340 
420 

550 

9700 

ii 900 

12300 

15450 
17850 
21750 



kc/s (2000 ct 1053 m) radiodiffusion 

kc/s (1053 a 952 m) radiophares 

kc/s ( 952 & 882 m) services aeronautiques et radiogoniometrie 

kc/s ( 882 a 714 m) radiodiffusion 

kc/s ( 583 a 545 m) services aeronautiques 

kc/s (31,25 a 30,93 in) radiodiffusion 

kc/s (25,64 a 25,21 m) services fixes 

kc/s (24,79 & 24,39 m ) radiodiffusion 

kc/s (19,54 a 19,42 m) radiodiffusion 

kc/s (16,85 a 16,81 m) radiodiffusion 

kc/s (13,92 a 13,79 m) radiodiffusion. 



IV 



With reference to the statement made 
in this protocol by the plenipotentiaries of 
the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics 
concerning the use of certain frequency 
bands, the plenipotentiaries of China state 
formally that their Government reserves 
the right to take any steps which might 
become necessary with a view to protect- 
ing their radio communications against 
any interference which might be caused 
by the putting into execution of the said 
reservations of the Government of the 
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, 



IV 

Se referant a la declaration faite dans 
le present Protocole par les pienipoten- 
tiaires de TUnion des Republiques Sovie- 
tistes Socialistes relativement a rutilisa- 
tion de certaines bandes de frequences, les 
plenipotentiaires de la Chine dedarent 
formellement que leur gouvernement se 
reserve le droit de prendre toutes les 
mesures qui seraient 6ventuellement n6- 
cessaires en vue de prot6ger leurs radio- 
communications centre tout brouillage 
qui pourrait 6tre occasionne par la mise en 
execution desdites reserves du Gouverne- 
ment de 1'Union des Republiques Sovie- 
tistes Socialistes. 



The plenipotentiary of Hungary states 
formally that owing to the reservations of 
the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics 
concerning article 7 of the General Radio 
Regulations (allocations and use of fre- 
quencies), his Government reserves the 
right of not enforcing the provisions of 5 
(2) of the said article in the case where the 
emissions from the stations installed by 
the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics in 
application of its reservation, would inter- 
fere seriously with the emissions of the 
Hungarian stations. 



VI 

Referring to the statement made in this 
protocol by the plenipotentiaries of the 
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics con- 
cerning the use of certain frequency bands, 
the plenipotentiaries of Japan state for- 
mally that their Government reserves the 



Le pienipotentiaire de la Hongrie deV 
clare formellement qu'en raison de la re- 
serve de 1'Union des Republiques Sovie- 
tistes Socialistes relative & Tarticle 7 du 
R&glement g6n6ral des radiocommunica- 
tions (repartition et emploi des fre- 
quences), son gouvernement se reserve le 
droit de ne pas appliquer les dispositions 
du 5, (2) dudit article dans les cas ou les 
emissions des postes instalies par 1' Union 
des Republiques Sovietistes Socialistes, 
en execution de ses reserves, brouilleraient 
d'une maniere grave les emissions de 
stations hongroises. 

VI 

Se referant la declaration faite dans 
le present Protocole par les plenipotenti- 
aires de 1'Union des Republiques Sovie- 
tistes Socialistes relativement a Futilisa- 
tion de certaines bandes de frequences, les 
plenipotentiaires du Japon dedarent 



1 84 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 



right, for Japan, Chosen, Taiwan, Kara- 
futo, the Kwantung Leased Territory and 
the South Sea Islands under Japanese 
mandate, to take any steps which might 
become necessary with a view to protect- 
ing their radio communications against 
any interference which might be caused 
by the putting into execution of the said 
reservations of the Government of the 
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics. 



VII 

The plenipotentiaries of Poland and of 
Rumania, in view of the reservations al- 
ready made in connection with the use of 
certain frequency bands, state formally 
that in the case where no satisfactory 
regional (European conference) or special 
arrangement would be brought about, 
each of their Governments reserves the 
right to make any necessary derogations 
in regard to the use, for the aeronautical 
services, of certain frequencies outside the 
bands assigned by article 7 of the General 
Radio Regulations, in agreement with the 
adjoining countries interested, and par- 
ticularly not to await the period of time 
provided for in 5 (2) of this article, for 
the protection' of the fundamental needs 
of these services against any interference 
which might be caused by the putting into 
execution of the above-mentioned reser- 
vations. 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the plenipoten- 
tiaries listed below have drawn up this 
protocol and have signed it in one copy 
which shall remain in the archives of the 
Government of Spain and of which one 
copy shall be forwarded to each govern- 
ment signatory of the said protocol. 

Done at Madrid, December 9, 1932. 



formellement que leur gouvernement se re- 
serve pour le Japon, Chosen, Taiwan, 
Karafuto, le Territoire bail du Kwan- 
tung et les lies des Mers du Sud sous 
mandat japonais, le droit de prendre 
toutes les mesures qui seraient eventuel- 
lement n6cessaires en vue de proteger leurs 
radiocommunications centre tout brouil- 
lage qui pourrait 6tre occasionn6 par la 
mise en execution desdites reserves du 
Gouvernement de T Union des Republi- 
ques Sovietistes Socialistes. 

VII 

Les plenipotentiaires de la Pologne et 
de la Roumanie, vu les reserves dej 
formulas au sujet de Tutilisation de 
certaines bandes de frequences, declarent 
formellement que, dans le cas oti un ar- 
rangement regional (Conference europe- 
enne) ou particulier satisfaisant n'abou- 
tirait pas, chacun de leurs gouvernements 
se reserve le droit de faire eventuellement 
des derogations en ce qui concerne Tutili- 
sation pour les services a6ronautiques de 
certaines frequences en dehors des bandes 
attributes par 1'article 7 du Reglement 
general des radiocommunications, en 
accord avec les pays voisins interesses, et 
specialement de ne pas attendre le delai 
prevu au 5, (2) de cet article, pour 
sauvegarder les besoins fondamentaux 
de ces services centre tout brouillage qui 
pourrait tre occasion^ par la mise en 
execution des reserves ci-avant mention- 
nees. 

EN FOI DE QUOI les plenipotentiaires ci- 
apres ont dress6 le present Protocole et ils 
1'ont sign6 en un exemplaire qui restera 
dans les archives du Gouvernement de 
1'Espagne et dont une copie sera remise 
& chaque gouvernement signataire dudit 
Protocole. 

Fait Madrid, le 9 decembre 1932. 



[Signatures omitted; the final protocol was signed on behalf of each of the signatories of 
the general radio regulations.] 



Dec. 9, 1932 ADDITIONAL RADIO REGULATIONS 

No. 318 



185 



Additional Radio Regulations annexed to the Telecommunication 
Convention. Signed at Madrid, December 9, 1932. 

Reglement additionnel des radiocommunications annexe & la Con- 
vention des telecommunications. Signe a Madrid, 9 decembre 
1932- 

ACCESSIONS. On July I, 1937, these regulations had been approved or acceded to by all 
the states which had ratified or acceded to the telecommunication convention (No. 316, 
ante), except Afghanistan, Albania, Canada, Dominican Republic, Ethiopia, Luxemburg, 
United States of America, and Yemen, and by Bolivia, Greece, and Sweden. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. The text of these regulations is also published in 151 League of Nations 
Treaty Series, p. 448. (See the bibliography under No. 316, ante.) 

Entered into force January i, 1934. x 

Text and translation from U. S. Treaty Series, No. 867. 

[Translation] 

ARTICLE I. Application of the Telegraph 
and Telephone Regulations to Radio 
Communication 

[ 8 ] i. The provisions of the Tele- 
graph and Telephone Regulations shall be 
applicable to radio wherever the Radio 
Regulations do not provide otherwise. 

[ m ] 2. (i) Radiotelegrams shall be 
drafted and dealt with in conformity with 
the provisions set forth in the Telegraph 
Regulations for telegrams, with the ex- 
ception of the cases provided for in the 
following articles. 

[ 87 ] (2) The use of letter groups taken 
from the International Code of Signals 
shall be allowed in radiotelegrams ex- 
changed with ships. 

[ m ] 3- Since the word RADIO or 
AERADIO, respectively, is always added, 
in the nomenclature, to the name of the 
land station mentioned in the address of 
a radiptelegram, this word must not be 
given in the transmission of a radiotele- 
gram, as a service instruction before the 
preamble. 

ARTICLE 2. Charges 

[ l72 ] i. The charge for a radio telegram 
originating in or intended for a mobile 
station, or exchanged between mobile sta- 
tions shall include, as the case may be: 



ARTICLE i. Application des Rlglements 
telegraphique et telephonigue aux radio- 
communications 

[ 568 ] I. Les dispositions des Regie* 
ments te!6graphique et telephonique sont 
applicables aux radiocommunications en 
tant que les Reglements des radiocom- 
munications n'en disposent pas autrement. 
[ 669 ] 2. (i) Les radiot61egrammes sont 
rediges et trait6s conformement aux dis- 
positions fixees dans le Reglement telegra- 
phique^ pour les telegrammes, sauf^ les 
exceptions prevues dans les articles 
suivants. 

[ 67 ] (2) L'emploi de groupes de lettres 
du Code International de Signaux est per- 
mis dans les radiotelegrammes ^changes 
avec les navires. 

[ 5n ] 3. Le mot RADIO ou AERA- 
DIO, respectivement, etant toujours 
ajoute, dans la nomenclature, au nom de 
la station terrestre mentionnee dans Fad- 
resse des radiot616grammes, ce mot ne 
doit pas toe donne, comme indication de 
service, en tte du prambule, dans la 
transmission d'un radiot616gramme. 

ARTICLE 2. Taxes 

[ 872 ] i. La taxe d'un radiot&gramme 
originaire ou a destination d'une station 
mobile ou 6chang6 entre stations mobiles 
comprend, selon le cas: 



1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3479, August 30, 1934. 



186 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 318 



[ m ] (a) the on-board charge accruing to 
the mobile station of origin or destination, 
or to both these stations; 
[ m ] (b) the land charge or charges [see 
3 ( 2 )]j accruing to the land station or 
stations which participate in the trans- 
mission ; 

[five] (<;) the charge for transmission over 
the general system of telecommunication 
channels, computed in accordance with 
the usual rules; 

[ 576 ] (d) the charge pertaining to supple- 
mentary services requested by the sender. 
[ B77 ] 2. (l) The land and on-board 
charges shall be determined in accordance 
with the rate per word pure and simple, 
with no minimum charge. 
[678] ( 2 ) The maximum land charge shall 
be sixty centimes (o fr. 60) per word ; the 
maximum on-board charge shall be forty 
centimes (o fr. 40) per word. 
[579] (3) The land and on-board charges 
pertaining to radiotelegrams which con- 
cern stations not yet listed in the nomen- 
clature may be fixed by the charging 
office, as part of its duties, at the maxi- 
mum rates provided above. 
[ 58 ] (4) However, each administration 
reserves the right to fix and authorize land 
or on-board charges higher than the max- 
ima indicated above, in the case of land or 
aircraft stations where the cost of installa- 
tion or operation is exceptionally high. 



[68i] (5) The radiotelegraph charge for 
CDE radiotelegrams shall be reduced in 
the same proportion as the telegraph 
charge for these same radiotelegrams. 
[***] (6) In the traffic between on-board 
stations, whether it be direct or through 
the medium of a single coast station, the 
charge applicable to CDE telegrams shall 
always equal six tenths (f o) of the full 
charge. 

[ess] (7) The reduction granted shall al- 
ways be applicable to the radiotelegraph 
retransmission charge, if any. 
[S84] (g) i^ minimum charge equal to 
the charge for five words, as provided for 
in article 26, 3 (a) of the Telegraph Regu- 
lations, shall not be applicable to the 
radiotelegraph portions of the route of 
radiotelegrams. 

I 586 ] 3- GO When ^ a land station is 
used as an intermediary between mobile 
stations, only one land charge shall be 
collected. If the land charge applicable 
to communications with the sending mo- 



[ m ] a) la taxe de bord, revenant a la 
station mobile d'origine ou de destina- 
tion, ou a ces deux stations; 
[ B74 ] 6) la ou les taxes terrestres [voir 3, 
(2)] revenant a la station terrestre ou aux 
stations terrestres qui participent a la 
transmission ; 

[ 578 ] c) la taxe pour la transmission sur 
le r6seau g6nral des voies de telcom- 
munication, calculee d'apres les regies 
ordinaires ; 

[ 576 ] d) la taxe aff&rente aux operations 
accessoires demandees par I'exp&diteur. 
[ 677 ] 2. (i) La taxe terrestre et celle de 
bord sont fix6es suivant le tarif par mot 
pur et simple, sans perception d'un 
minimum. 

[ 678 ] (2) La taxe maximum terrestre est 
de soixante centimes (o fr. 60) par mot; la 
taxe maximum de bord est de quarante 
centimes (o fr. 40) par mot. 
t 579 ] (3) Les taxes terrestres ou de bord 
aff&rentes aux radio 1 61 ^grammes mt6res- 
sant des stations non encore inscrites a la 
nomenclature peuvent tee fixees d'office 
par le bureau taxateur aux maxima vis6s 
ci-avant. 

[ 58 ] (4) Toutefois, chaque administra- 
tion se reserve la facult6 de fixer et 
d'autoriser des taxes terrestres ou de bord 
superieures aux maxima indiqu6s ci- 
avant, dans le cas de stations terrestres 
ou d'a&ronef exceptionnellement on6- 
reuses, du fait de Installation ou de 
Texploitation. 

[ 681 ] (5) La taxe radiot616graphique des 
radiotelgrammes CDE est reduite dans 
les mSmes proportions que la taxe tel- 
graphique de ces mmes radiote!6grammes. 
[ 582 ] (6) Dans le trafic entre postes de 
bord, direct ou par Tinterm^diaire d'une 
seule station c6tiere, la taxe & appliquer 
aux radiotl6grammes CDE est toujours 
6gale aux six dixi&mes (%o) de la taxe 
pleine. 

[ B83J ] (7) La reduction accorded est tou- 
jours applicable aux taxes Sventuelles de 
retransmission radiote!6graphique. 
[ 584 ] (8) Le minimum de perception gal 
a la taxe de cinq mots, preVu a Tarticle 
26, 3, a) du R&glement t616graphique, 
n'est pas^ applicable au parcours radio- 
te!6graphique des radiotel6grammes 

[ 885 ] 3' (i) Lorsqu'une station terrestre 
est utilisee comme intermMiaire entre des 
stations mobiles, il n'est perc.u qu'une 
seule taxe terrestre. Si la taxe terrestre 
applicable aux ^changes avec la station 



Dec. 9, 1932 



ADDITIONAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



I8 7 



bile station differs from that applicable 
to communications with the receiving 
mobile station, the higher of these two 
charges shall be collected. There may be 
collected, in addition, a territorial tele- 
graph charge equal to that referred to in 
5 below, as being applicable to trans- 
mission over the telecommunication 
channels. 

[ 586 ] (2) When, upon request of the 
sender, two land stations are used as in- 
termediaries between two mobile sta- 
tions, the land charge of each station as 
well as the telegraph charge covering the 
route between the two stations shall be 
collected. 

[ 68r ] 4. Retransmission service and 
charges shall be regulated by article 7 of 
these Regulations. 

[ 588 ] 5- (i) Where radiotelegrams origi- 
nating in or addressed to a country 
are exchanged directly by or with land 
stations of that country, the telegraph 
charge applicable to the transmission over 
the internal telecommunication channels 
of that country shall, in principle, be 
computed according to the rate per word, 
pure and simple, without a minimum 
charge. This charge shall be reported in 
gold francs to the Bureau of the Union by 
the administration having jurisdiction 
over the land stations. 
[889] ( 2 ) When a country finds itself 
obliged to apply a minimum charge by 
reason of the fact that its internal tele- 
communication system is not operated by 
the government, it shall so inform the 
Bureau of the Union which shall mention 
in the nomenclature the amount of this 
minimum charge following the indication 
of the charge per word. In the absence of 
such notice the charge to be applied shall 
be the charge per word, pure and simple, 
without a minimum charge. 
[ 59 ] 6. The country on whose terri- 
tory there is established a land station 
serving as an intermediary for the ex- 
change of radiotelegrams between a 
mobile station and another country shall 
be considered, for the purpose of applying 
telegraph charges, as the country of origin 
or of destination of these radiotelegrams, 
and not as the transit country. 
[ fi91 ] 7. The total charge for radiotele- 
grams shall be collected from the sender, 
with the exception: 

[692] jg-t^ O f those special delivery charges 
which are to be collected on delivery [art. 
62 > 5 (2) of the Telegraph Regulations]; 



mobile qui transmet est diff rente de celle 
applicable aux ^changes avec la station 
mobile qui regoit, c'est la plus elevee de 
ces deux taxes qui est perdue. II peut 
8tre pergu, en outre, une taxe territoriale 
teiegraphique, 6gale & celle qui, au 5 
ci-apres, est indiqu6e comme etant ap- 
plicable a la transmission sur les voies de 
telecommunication. 

[ 586 ] (2) Lorsque, sur la demande de 
I'expediteur, deux stations terrestres sont 
utilises comme intermediates entre deux 
stations mobiles, la taxe terrestre de 
chaque station est pergue ainsi que la 
taxe teiegraphique aff&rente au parcours 
entre les deux stations. 
[ fi87 ] 4. Le service et les taxes des re- 
transmissions sont regies par Tarticle 7 
du present R&glement. 
[ 588 ] 5- (i) Dans le cas oft des radio- 
teiegrammes originaires ou & destination 
d'un pays sont 6chang6s directement par 
ou avec les stations terrestres de ce pays, 
la taxe teiegraphique applicable a la trans- 
mission sur les voies interieures de tele"- 
communication de ce pays est, en prin- 
cipe, calculee suivant le tarif par mot pur 
et simple, sans perception d'un minimum. 
Cette taxe est notified, en francs-or, au 
Bureau de 1' Union par Tadministration 
dont reinvent les stations terrestres. 

[gas] (2) Lorsqu'un pays se trouve dans 
1'obligation d'imposer un minimum de per- 
ception, en raison du fait que son syst&me 
de telecommunications interieures n'est 
pas exploite par le gouvernement, il doit 
en informer le Bureau de 1'Union, qui 
mentionne dans la nomenclature le mon- 
tant de ce minimum de perception a la 
suite de Pindication de la taxe par mot. 
A defaut d'une pareille mention, la taxe & 
appliquer est celle par mot pur et simple, 
sans perception d'un minimum. 
[ 59 ] 6. Le pays sur le territoire duquel 
est etablie une station terrestre servant 
d 'intermediate pour 1'echange de radio- 
teiegrammes entre une station mobile et 
un autre pays est consider^, en ce qui con- 
cerne 1'application des taxes tlgra- 
phiques, comme pays de provenance ou de 
destination de ces radioteiegrammes et 
non comme pays de transit. 
[ 69 *] 7. La taxe totale des radioteie- 
grammes est pergue sur 1'expediteur, 
Texception: 

[592] i c[ es fj-ais d'expres & percevoir & 
1'arrivee [article 62, 5 (2) du R&glement 
teiegraphique] ; 



188 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 318 



[ 5W ] 2d. of the charges applicable to 
combinations or alterations of words 
which are not accepted and which are 
found by the office or mobile station of 
destination (art. 23, I of the Telegraph 
Regulations); such charges shall be col- 
lected from the addressee. 
[ B9 *] 8. The word count by the office of 
origin shall be decisive in the case of radio- 
telegrams addressed to mobile stations 
and the word count by the mobile station 
of origin shall be decisive in the case of 
radio telegrams originating with mobile 
stations, both for transmission and for 
international accounts. However, when 
the radiotelegram is expressed wholly or 
partly either in one of the languages of 
the country of destination, in the case of 
radiptelegrams originating with mobile 
stations, or in one of the languages of the 
country to which the mobile station is 
subject, in the case of radiotelegrams ad- 
dressed to mobile stations, and when the 
radiotelegram contains combinations or 
alterations of words contrary to the usage 
of that language, the office or mobile 
station of destination, as the case may be, 
shall have the right to recover from the 
addressee the amount of the charge not 
collected. In the event of refusal to pay, 
the radiotelegram may be withheld. 
[ 69B ] 9. No charge accruing from radio 
transmission in the mobile service shall be 
collected for radiotekgrams of immediate 
general interest falling within the follow- 
ing classes: 

[ 59B ] (a) distress messages and replies 
thereto ; 

[ 69 *] (&) notices originating in mobile 
stations regarding the presence of icebergs, 
derelicts and mines, or reporting cyclones 
and storms; 

[ B98 ] (c) notices reporting sudden phe- 
nomena threatening aerial navigation or 
the sudden appearance of obstacles at 
airdromes; 

[ fi99 ] W notices originating in mobile 
stations advising of sudden changes in the 
location of buoys, functioning of light- 
houses, route-indicating apparatus, etc. ; 

[] (e) service notices relating to mo- 
bile services. 

[ 6fll ] 10. (i) The land and on-board 
charges shall be reduced by 50 percent for 
press radiotelegrams originating in an on- 
board station and addressed to land. 
These radiotelegrams shall be subject to 
the conditions of acceptance provided for 



[ 693 ] 2 des taxes applicables aux reunions 
ou alterations de mots non admises, con- 
statees par le bureau ou la station mobile 
de destination (article 23, I, du Regie- 
ment te!6graphique) ; ces taxes sont per- 
gues sur le destinataire. 

[ 694 ] 8. Le compte des mots par le 
bureau d'origine est dcisif au sujet des 
radiotel6grammes destination de sta- 
tions mobiles, et celui de la station mobile 
d'origine est d6cisif au sujet des radiotele"- 
grammes originaires des stations mo- 
biles, tant pour la transmission que pour 
les comptes internationaux. Toutefois, 
quand le radiotel^gramme est r<dig6 to- 
talement ou partiellement soit dans une 
des langues du pays de destination, en 
cas de radiot616grammes originaires de 
stations mobiles, soit dans une des langues 
du pays dont depend la station mobile, 
s'il s'agit de radiotel ^grammes & destina- 
tion de stations mobiles, et que le radio- 
tel6gramme contient des reunions ou des 
alterations de mots contraires 1'usage de 
cette langue, le bureau ou la station mo- 
bile de destination, suivant le cas, a la 
facult6 de recouvrer sur le destinataire le 
montant de la taxe non perdue. En cas 
de refus de paiement, le radiote!6gramme 
peut tre arrt. 

[ 595 ] 9- Aucune taxe aff6rente au par- 
cours radio&ectrique, dans le service mo- 
bile, n'est perdue pour les radiot616- 
grammes d'un intent general immediat, 
rentrant dans les categories suivantes: 
[ 69B ] a) messages de dtresse et rponses 
& ces messages; 

[ 597 ] b) avis originaires des stations mo- 
biles sur la presence de glaces, paves et 
mines, ou annongant des cyclones et 
temp^tes; 

[ 508 ] c) avis annongant des phnomenes 
brusques menac.ant la navigation a6rienne 
ou la survenue soudaine d'obstacles dans 
les aerodromes ; 

I 599 ] d) avis originaires des stations mo- 
biles, notifiant des changements soudains 
dans la position des bou6es, le fonctionne- 
ment des phares, appareils de balisage, 
etc.; 

[ 60 ] e) avis de service relatifs aux ser- 
vices mobiles. 

[ 6 l ] 10. (i) Les taxes terrestres et de 
bord sont reduites de 50% pour les radio- 
teiegrammes de presse originaires d'une 
station de bord et destin6s la terre ferme. 
Ces radiotelegrammes sont soumis aux 
conditions d'admission preVues par le 



Dec. 9, 1932 



ADDITIONAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



189 



by the International Telegraph Regula- 
tions for press telegrams. For those 
which are addressed to a destination in the 
country of the land station, the telegraph 
charge to be collected shall be one half of 
the telegraph charge applicable to an 
ordinary radiotelegram. 
[602] ( 2 ) Press radiotelegrams addressed 
to a country other than that of the land 
station shall be subject to the press rates 
in force between the country of the land 
station and the country of destination. 
[ 603 ] 11. (i) (a) The land and on- 
board charges applicable to meteorolog- 
ical radiotelegrams shall be reduced by at 
least 50 percent in all relations. 
[ 604 j (&) For land stations, the date upon 
which this provision will be put into effect 
shall be fixed by agreement between the 
administrations and operating companies 
on the one hand, and the interested official 
meteorological services on the other hand. 
[ 605 ] (2) (a) The term " meteorological 
radiotelegram" shall denote a radiotele- 
gram sent by an official meteorological 
service or by a station officially connected 
with such a service, and addressed to such 
a service or to such a station, and which 
contains exclusively meteorological ob- 
servations or meteorological forecasts. 

[ 60e ] (b) These radiotelegrams must in- 
clude before the address, the paid service 
instruction =OBS = . 
[ eor ] (3) Upon request, the sender must 
state that the text of his radiotelegram 
complies with the conditions set forth 
above. 

[GOB] 12. Mobile stations must have 
knowledge of the rates necessary for de- 
termining the charges for radiotelegrams. 
They are, however, authorized when nec- 
essary, to obtain such information from 
land stations; the amounts of the rates 
which the latter give shall be expressed 
in gold francs. 

[609] 13 (i) Any new rate, and any 
change in whole or in part relating to 
rates, shall become effective only 15 days 
after their notification by the Bureau of 
the Union (excluding the day of filing) and 
shall be applied only on the first or six- 
teenth following the last day of this period, 

[ 51 ] (2) For radiotelegrams originating 
in mobile stations, however, the changes 
in the rates shall become effective only I 
month after the periods fixed in sub- 
paragraph (i). 



Rglement tlgraphique international 
pour les tIegrammes de presse. Pour 
ceux qui sont adress6s a une destination 
dans le pays de la station terrestre, la taxe 
t6l6graphique & percevoir est la moiti de 
la taxe telgraphique applicable a un 
radioteldgramme ordinaire. 
[ 602 ] (2) Les radiotele'grammes de presse 
a destination d'un pays autre que celui 
de la station terrestre jouissent du tarif de 
presse en vigueur entre le pays de la sta- 
tion terrestre et le pays de destination. 
[ 603 ] II. (i) a) Les taxes terrestres et 
de bord applicables aux radiot616grammes 
m6torologiques sont r&iuites d'au moins 
50% dans toutes les relations. 
[604] ) Pour les stations terrestres, la 
date & laquelle cette disposition sera mise 
en vigueur sera fixde par accord entre les 
administrations et compagnies exploi- 
tantes, d'une part, et les services mlteo- 
rologiques officiels int6ress6s d'autre part. 
[ 605 ] (2) a) Le terme " radiote!6gramme 
mete'orologique" d6signe un radiotel6- 
gramme envoy par un service * rndte"- 
orologique officiel ou par une station en 
relation officielle avec un tel service, et 
adress6 & un tel service ou i une telle sta- 
tion, et qui contient exclusivement des 
observations mtorologiques ou des pre"- 
visions m6t6orologiques. 
[ 606 ] b) Ces radiotelgrammes compor- 
tent, obligatoirement, en t6te de Padresse, 
1'indication de service taxe ^OBS^. 
f 607 ] (3) Sur demande, I'exp6diteur doit 
declarer que le texte de son radiotel- 
gramme correspond aux conditions fix6es 
ci-avant. 

[ 608 ] 12. Les stations mobiles doivent 
connattre les tarifs n^cessaires pour la 
taxation des radiotelegrammes. Toute- 
fois, elles sont autorises, le cas e"ch6ant, 
& se renseigner aupr&s des stations terres- 
tres; les montants des tarifs que celles-ci 
indiquent sont donnes en francs-or. 

[ 609 ] 13- (i) Tpute taxe nouvelle, 
toutes modifications d'ensemble ou de 
detail concernant les tarifs ne sont excu- 
toires que 15 jours aprjbs leur notification 
par le Bureau de 1' Union (jour de d6p6t 
non compris) et ne sont mises en applica- 
tion qu'& partir du i er ou du 16 qui suit le 
i'our d 'expiration de ce delai. 
61 ] (2) Toutefois, pour les radiotele- 
grammes originates des stations mobiles, 
les modifications aux tarifs ne sont ex6- 
cutoires qu'un mois apres les delais fixe"s 
a 1'alinea (i). 



19 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



[en] (3) The provisions of the above sub- 
paragraphs shall admit of no exception. 

ARTICLE 3. Order of Priority of Com- 
munications in the Mobile Service 

[ 612 ] The order of priority for the radio 
communications referred to in item 6 of 
article 24 of the General Regulations shall, 
in principle, be the following: 

1 . government radiotelegrams ; 

2. radiotelegrams relating to naviga- 
tion, to the sailings and the needs of ships, 
to the safety and regularity of the aerial 
service, and weather-observation mes- 
sages intended for an official meteorolog- 
ical service; 

3. service radiotelegrams relating to 
the operation of the radiocommunication 
service, or to radiotelegrams previously 
exchanged ; 

4. public correspondence radiotele- 
grams. 

ARTICLE 4. Time of Filing of Radio- 
telegrams 

[ 61S ] I. In the transmission of radio- 
telegrams originating in a mobile station, 
the date and the time of filing in this sta- 
tion shall be indicated in the preamble. 
[ 6U ] 2, To indicate the time of filing of 
radiotelegrams accepted in mobile sta- 
tions, the clerk shall use Greenwich mean 
time, and shall use the 24-hour system. 
This time shall always be expressed and 
sent by means of 4 figures (oooi to 2400). 



[ 61B ] 3. However, the administrations 
of the countries situated outside zone 
" A" (appendix 5), may authorize stations 
on ships sailing along the coasts of their 
countries to use zone time to indicate, by 
a group of 4 figures, the time of filing, and 
in this case, the group must be followed 
by the letter F. 

ARTICLE 5. Address of Radiotelegrams 
[ 16 ] i. (i) The address of a radio- 
telegram destined to a mobile station 
must be as complete as possible; it must 
contain the following: 

[ 617 ] (a) name or designation of the ad- 
dressee, with supplementary particulars, 
if necessary; 

[eis] (p) name of the ship station or, in 
the case of another mobile station, the call 
signal as shown in the appropriate nomen- 
clature ; 



No. 318 

[ 81l l (3) Les dispositions des alinas ci~ 
avant n'admettent aucune exception. 

ARTICLE 3. Ordre de priorite des com- 
munications dans le service mobile 

[ 612 ] L'ordre de priori t6 des radiocom- 
munications vises au chiffre 6 de 1 'article 
24 du Reglement general est, en principe, 
le suivant: 

i radiotelegrammes d'Etat; 

2 radiotelegrammes relatifs a la navi- 
gation, aux mouvements et aux besoins 
des navires, a la securit6 et & la regularity 
des services aeiiens, et messages d'obser- 
vation du temps destines a un service 
m6t6orologique ofEciel ; 

3 radiotelegrammes de service rela- 
tifs au fonctionnement du service des 
radiocommunications ou a des radiot&e"- 
grammes pr6c6demment ^changes; 

4 radiotelegrarnmes de la correspon- 
dance publique. 

ARTICLE 4. Heure de depdt des radio- 
telegrammes 

[ 618 ] i. Dans la transmission des radio- 
telegrammes originaires d'une station 
mobile, la date et 1'heure du depdt & cette 
station sont indiqu^es dans le pr6arnbule. 
[ 6U ] 2. Pour indiquer 1'heure de d6p6t 
des radiotelegrammes acceptes dans les 
stations mobiles, le pr6pos6 se base sur le 
temps moyen de Greenwich et utilise la 
notation suivant le cadran de 24 heures. 
Cette heure est toujours exprime'e et 
transmise a 1'aide de quatre chiffres 
(oooi a 2400). 

t 615 ] 3- Toutefois, les administrations 
des pays situ^s en dehors de la zone "A" 
(appendice 5) peuvent autoriser les sta- 
tions des navires longeant les cdtes de leur 
pays a utiliser le temps du fuseau pour 
1'indication, en un groupe de quatre 
chiffres, de T heure de dep6t, et, dans ce 
cas, le groupe doit 6tre suivi de la lettre F. 

ARTICLE 5. Adresse des radiotelegrammes 

[ 616 ] i, (i) L'adresse des radiotele- 
grammes a destination des stations mo- 
biles doit tre aussi complete que possible ; 
elle est obligatoirement Iibell6e comme 
suit: 

[ 617 ] a) nom ou qualit6 du destinataire 
avec indication complementaire, s'il y a 
lieu; 

[sis] &) nom de la station de navire ou, 
dans le cas d'une autre station mobile, in- 
dicatif d'appel, tels qu'iis figurent dans 
la nomenclature appropri6e; 



Dec. 9, 1932 



ADDITIONAL RADIO REGULATIONS 



191 



[ 6i9 ] (c) name of the land station charged 
with the transmission, as it appears in the 
nomenclature. 

[ 62 ] (2) The name and call signal re- 
quired under I (i) (&) may, however, be 
replaced, at the sender's risk, by the indi- 
cation of the route followed by the mobile 
station, such route being indicated by 
means of the names of the ports of de- 
parture and of destination, or by any 
other equivalent indication. 
I 621 ] (3) I n tne address, the name of the 
mobile station and that of the land sta- 
tion, written as they appear in the ap- 
propriate nomenclature shall, in all cases 
and irrespective of their length, be 
counted as one word each. 

[ 622 ] 2. (i) Mobile stations not pro- 
vided with the official nomenclature of 
telegraph offices may add after the name 
of the telegraph office of destination the 
name of the territorial subdivision and, in 
some cases, the name of the country of 
destination, if they fear that, without this 
addition, the routing might not be made 
without delay. 

[ 623 ] (2) In that case, the name of the 
telegraph office and the supplementary 
particulars shall be counted and charged 
for only as a single word. The land sta- 
tion agent receiving the radiotelegram 
shall either retain or delete this informa- 
tion, or else modify the name of the office 
of destination, according as it may be 
necessary or sufficient to route the radio- 
telegram to its proper destination. 

[Articles 6-13 omitted. Doubtful re- 
ception Transmission by "Ampliation" 
Long-distance Radio Communication. 
Retransmission by stations of the mobile 
service. Notice of nondelivery. Period of 
retention of radiotelegrams at land stations. 
Radiotelegrams to be forwarded by ordinary 
mail or by air mail. Special rddiotele- 
grams. Radio communications for multi- 
ple destinations. Effective date of the addi- 
tional regulations.] 



[ 61 ] c) nom de la station terrestre 
charg6 de la transmission, tel qu'il figure 
dans la nomenclature. 
[620] ( 2 ) Toutefois, le nom et 1'indicatif 
d'appel pr6vus au i, (i) b) peuvent 6tre 
remplacs, aux risques et perils de Tex 
pditeur, par Indication du parcours 
effectu6 par la station mobile, ce parcours 
6tant d6termin6 par le nom des ports de 
depart et d'arrive ou par toute autre- 
mention 6quivalente. 
[ 621 ] (3) Dans Tadresse, le nom de la 
station mobile et celui de la station 
terrestre, Merits tels qu'ils figurant dans 
les nomenclatures appropriates, sont, dans 
tous les cas et indlpendamment de leur 
longueur, compt&s individuellement pour 
un mot, 

[ 622 ] 2. (i) Les stations mobiles non 
pourvues de la nomenclature officielle des 
bureaux t616graphiques peuvent faire 
suivre le nom du bureau tlgraphique de 
destination du nom de la subdivision terri- 
toriale et, 6yentuellement, du nom du 
pays de destination, si elles doutent que, 
sans cette adjonction, l j acheminement 
puisse 6tre assur& sans hesitation. 
[ 623 ] (2) Le nom du bureau t16graphique 
et les indications compl&nentaires ne sont, 
dans ce cas, comptds et taxs que pour un 
seul mot. L'agent de la station terrestre 
qui regoit le radiot16gramme maintient 
ou supprime ces indications, ou encore 
modifie le nom du bureau de destination, 
selon qu'il est ncessaire ou suffisant pour 
diriger le radiot616gramme sur sa veritable 
destination. 

[Articles 6-13 omis. Reception dou- 
teuse Transmission par "ampliation" 
Radio-communications d grande distance. 
Retransmission par les stations du service 
mobile. Avis de non remise. Delai de 
sejour des radiotelegrammes dans les sta- 
tions terrestres. RadiottUgrammes d re- 
expedier par voie postale ordinaire ou 
afrienne. Radiotelegrammes speciaux. 
Radiocommunications & multiples destina- 
tions. Mise en vigueur du Reglement ad- 
ditionnel.] 



[Signatures omitted; the additional regulations were signed on behalf of each of the signa- 
tories of the convention (No. 316, ante) f with exceptions of Canada, Ethiopia, Luxemburg, 
Mexico, Nicaragua, Persia, and United States of America.] 



192 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 

No. 319 



No. 319 



ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL (European) to the Acts of the Inter- 
national Radiotelegraph Conference of Madrid. Signed at 
Madrid, December 9, 1932. 

PROTOCOLE ADDITIONNEL (Europeen) aux Actes de la Confe- 
rence radiotelegraphique Internationale de Madrid. Signe 
Madrid, 9 decembre 1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE. The conference envisaged by this protocol met at Lucerne, May 15- 
June 19, 1933, and drew up the European Broadcasting Convention of June 19, 1933 (No. 
330, post). 

RATIFICATIONS. This protocol was not subject to ratification. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. (See the bibliographies under No, 316, ante, and No. 330, post.) 



Entered into force December 9, i932. x 

Text and translation from publication by the General Post Office, London. 



[Translation] 

The undersigned plenipotentiaries 
of the Governments of: Germany; 
Austria; Belgium; Vatican City 
State; Swiss Confederation ; Den- 
mark; Free City of Danzig; Egypt; 
Spain and the Spanish zone of Mo- 
rocco; Finland; France and Algeria, 
Morocco, Tunis; the United King- 
dom of Great Britain and Northern 
Ireland ; Greece ; Hungary ; Irish Free 
State; Iceland; Italy; Cyrenaica and 
Tripolitania ; Latvia; Lithuania ; Nor- 
way; the Netherlands; Poland; Por- 
tugal; Roumania; Sweden; Czecho- 
slovakia; Turkey; the Union of 
Soviet Socialist Republics; and Jugo- 
slavia, in virtue of the provisions of 
Article 14 of the International Radio- 
telegraph Convention of Washing- 
ton, 2 have, by common accord, 
drawn up the following Additional 
Protocol: 



Les soussign^s, p!6nipotentiaires 
des Gouvernements de I'Allemagne; 
de 1'Autriche; de la Belgique; de 
1'Etat de la Qt< du Vatican; de la 
Confederation suisse; du Danemark; 
de la Ville libre de Dantzig; de 
TEgypte; de TEspagne et de la zone 
espagnole du Maroc ; de la Finlande ; 
de la France et de TAlg^rie, du Ma- 
roc, de la Tunisie ; du Royaume-Uni 
de la Grande-Bretagne et de Tlr- 
lande du Nord; de la Gr&ce; de la 
Hongrie; de 1'Etat libre d'Irlande; de 
Tlslande; de 1'Italie; de la Cyr<- 
nai'que et de la Tripolitaine ; de la 
Lettonie; de la Lithuanie; de la 
Norv&ge; des Pays-Bas; de la Po- 
logne ; du Portugal ; de la Roumanie ; 
de la SuMe; de la Tch<coslovaquie ; 
de la Turquie; de 1'Union des R<- 
publiques Sovitistes Socialistes; de 
la Yougoslavie, se basant sur les 
dispositions de Farticle 14 de la 
Convention radiot616graphique in- 
ternationale de Washington, 2 ont, 
d'un commun accord, arrt6 le 
Protocole additionnel suivant: 

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations under No. 3479, August 30. 
1934- 

2 No. 185, ante. ED. 



Dec. 9, 1932 ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL (EUROPEAN) 193 

CHAPTER I CHAPITRE I 



COMPOSITION AND FUNCTIONS OF THE 
EUROPEAN CONFERENCE 

I. A Conference of the Govern- 
ments of the European region will be 
held before the entry into force of the 
General Radiocommunication Regu- 
lations of Madrid with the object of 
concluding an agreement concerning 
the allocation of frequencies to the 
various broadcasting stations of this 
region and the fixing of the methods 
of using the frequencies thus as- 
signed. This Conference will be 
composed of representatives of all 
the countries comprised in the region 
in question, which have acceded to 
the Radiotelegraph Conventions of 
Berlin (1906), London (1912), or 
Washington (1927). 

Any Government of an extra- 
European country shall have the 
right to be represented at the Euro- 
pean Conference by observers who 
shall be permitted to assist at all 
meetings of this Conference and of its 
committees and sub-committees, and 
to take part in the discussions on all 
questions which they consider affect 
the rights of the radioelectric serv- 
ices of their countries. 

The following international organ- 
isations may be admitted to the Euro- 
pean Conference, if they so request: 

U.I.R. (International Broadcast- 
ing Union) ; 

C.I.N.A. (International Commis- 
sion for Air Navigation) ; 

C.I.R. (International Radio-Mari- 
time Committee) ; 

U.R.S.I. (International Scientific 
Radioelectric Union) ; 

International Shipping Confer- 
ence. 

These organisations are consulta- 
tive only. 

2. The Conference, complying 
with the relative provisions of Article 
7 of the General Radiocommunica- 
tion Regulations of Madrid, 1 will 



COMPOSITION ET ATTRIBUTIONS DE LA 
CONFERENCE EUROPEENNE 

I. Une conference des gouverne- 
ments de la region europeenne, 
destinee & conclure un arrangement 
concernant I'attribution des fre- 
quences aux diverses stations de 
radiodiffusion de cette region et la 
fixation des modalit<s de Temploi 
des frequences ainsi attributes, sera 
tenue avant Tentr6e en vigueur du 
Reglement general des radiocom- 
munications de Madrid. Cette con- 
ference sera compos6e de represen- 
tants de tous les pays compris dans la 
region int<ress<e, adherents aux Con- 
ventions radioteiegraphiques de Ber- 
lin (1906), Londres (1912) ou Wash- 
ington (1927). 

Tout gouvernement d'un pays 
extra-europeen aura la faculte de se 
faire reprsenter & la Conference 
europeenne par des observateurs qui 
seront admis assister & toute re- 
union de cette conference et de ses 
commissions et sous-commissions et 
& y prendre la parole sur toute 
question qu'ils estiment toucher aux 
droits des services radio61ectriques 
de leurs pays. 

A la Conference europeenne peu- 
vent tre admis, sur leur demande, les 
organismes internationaux suivants: 

U.I.R. (Union Internationale de 
Radiodiff usion) ; 

C.I.N.A. (Commission Interna- 
tionale de Navigation A6rienne) ; 

C.I.R. (Comite International 
Radio-Maritime) ; 

U.R.S.I. (Union Radio-Scienti- 
fique Internationale) ; 

International Shipping Confer- 
ence. 

Ces organismes ont voix consulta- 
tive. 

2. La conference, se conformant 
aux dispositions respectives de Par- 
ticle 7 du Rfeglement general des 
radiocommunications de Madrid, 1 



1 No. 317, ante. ED. 



194 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 319 



allocate the frequencies referred to in 
the preceding paragraph, either in 
the bands authorised for broadcast- 
ing services or, by exception, outside 
these bands. 

It will deal with any connected 
questions. 

3. In taking its decisions, this 
Conference shall have regard to the 
needs of all the countries in the 
European region. 

The Conference will do its utmost 
to assign to each country in the 
European region waves permitting it 
to ensure a national service of reason- 
ably satisfactory quality, regard 
being had, so far as possible, to the 
existing situation. 

Where it is not possible to assign a 
frequency below 550 kc/s (wave- 
length above 545 m), either in the 
bands authorised for broadcasting 
services, or by exception, outside 
these bands, to certain countries of 
which the size and orographical 
structure may warrant such an allo- 
cation, these countries shall, so far as 
possible, receive a frequency from 
amongst the lowest in the band from 
550 to 1,500 kc/s (a wavelength 
amongst the longest in the band 
from 545 to 200 m). 



The undersigned Governments 
recognise that in order to attain this 
result, it may be necessary for them 
to consent to sacrifices in the 
common interest. 

CHAPTER II 

PREPARATION FOR THE EUROPEAN 
CONFERENCE 

4. The Government of the Swiss 
Confederation is charged with con- 
voking and preparing the European 
Conference. 

A plan of allocation of frequencies 
to broadcasting stations will be pre- 
sented by the International Broad- 
casting Union (U.I.R.) to the Man- 
aging Government (Government of 



attribuera les frequences vis6es au 
paragraphe precedent soit dans les 
bandes autoris<es pour les services 
de radiodiffusion, soit, en derogation, 
en dehors de ces bandes. 

Elle traitera toutes questions con- 
nexes. 

3. Cette conference prendra ses 
decisions en tenant compte des be- 
soins de tous les pays de la region 
europeenne. 

Elle s'efforcera d'attribuer chaque 
pays de la region europeenne les 
ondes lui permettant d'assurer un 
service national d'une qualite raison- 
nablement satisfaisante, en tenant 
compte, dans la mesure du possible, 
de la situation existante. 

Lorsqu'il ne lui sera pas possible 
d'attribuer soit dans les bandes 
autorisees pour les services de radio- 
diffusion, soit, en derogation, en 
dehors de ces bandes, & certains pays 
dont les dimensions et la structure 
orographique justifieraient une telle 
allocation, une frequence inferieure 
& 550 kc/s (longueur d'onde supe~ 
rieure & 545 m), ces pays devront, 
autant que possible, recevoir une 
frequence parmi les plus basses 
de la bande de 550 & I 500 kc/s 
(une longueur d'onde parmi les 
plus longues de la bande de 545 & 
200 m), 

Les gouvernements soussignes re- 
connaissent que, pour arriver ce 
resultat, il pourra leur tre necessaire 
de consentir des sacrifices dans 
Tinter^t commun. 

CHAPITRE II 

PREPARATION DE LA CONFERENCE 
EUROPEENNE 

4. Le Gouvernement de la Con- 
federation suisse est charge de con- 
voquer et de preparer la Conference 
europeenne. 

Un projet d'attribution des fre- 
quences aux stations de radiodiffu- 
sion sera presente par 1' Union Inter- 
nationale de Radiodiffusion (U.I.R.) 
au gouvernement gerant (Gouverne- 



Dec. 9, 1932 



ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL (EUROPEAN) 



195 



the Swiss Confederation) by the I5th 
of March, 1933, at the latest, and 
will be communicated by the latter to 
all the Governments of the European 
region through the medium of the 
International Bureau of the Tele- 
graph Union. 

After the distribution of the report 
of the U.I.R., each Government 
concerned shall .have the right to 
present its observations, amend- 
ments and counter-proposals to the 
Managing Government, with a view 
to their communication to the other 
Governments of the European re- 
gion, and also to the U.I.R. 

The Managing Government shall 
present to the Conference a report on 
the question as a whole. 

5. The Conference shall meet as 
soon as possible and by the 1st of 
June, 1933, at the latest. 

6. The undersigned Govern- 
ments shall furnish to the Managing 
Government, either at the request of 
the latter or of their own initiative, 
during the whole period of the pre- 
paratory work, all information ca- 
pable of assisting in the preparation 
of the European Conference. 

CHAPTER III 

SPECIAL PROVISIONS 

7. In its decisions relative to the 
allocation of frequencies to the vari- 
ous broadcasting stations, the Euro- 
pean Conference shall apply the rules 
of the General Radiocommunication 
Regulations of Madrid destined to 
regulate and to ensure the better 
working of broadcasting services. 
The Conference shall fix the upper 
limit of unmodulated power meas- 
ured in the aerial, capable of being 
used by each station for the fre- 
quency in question, and the upper 
limit of the field-strength of the 
carrier wave during daylight at the 
most remote frontier and also at the 
nearest frontier. In its decisions on 
this point, it shall take as a guide the 
particulars contained in the docu- 



ment de la Confederation suisse) 
au plus tard le 15 mars 1933 et com- 
munique par celui-ci & tous les 
gouvernements de la region euro- 
peenne par Tintermediaire du Bureau 
international de 1'Union t<16gra- 
phique. 

Apr6s la distribution du rapport 
de ril.I.R., chaque gouvernement 
interesse aura la faculte de presenter 
ses observations, amendements et 
contre-propositions au gouvernement 
gerant, en vue de leur communica- 
tion aux autres gouvernements de la 
region europeenne ainsi qu'a 1'U.I.R. 

Le gouvernement g6rant prsen- 
tera a la conference un rapport sur 
Tensemble de la question. 

5. La conference se r6unira le 
plus t6t possible et, au plus tard, le 
i er juin 1933. 

6. Les gouvernements soussign6s 
donneront au gouvernement g6rant 
soit sur la demande de celui-ci, soit 
de leur propre initiative, pendant 
toute la dur6e des travaux pr6para- 
toires, tout renseignement suscepti- 
ble d'aider a la preparation de la 
Conference europeenne. 

CHAPITRE III 

DISPOSITIONS PARTICULIERES 

7. Dans ses decisions relatives a 
Pattribution des frequences aux di- 
verses stations de radiodiffusion, la 
Conference europeenne appliquera 
les regies du R&glement general des 
radiocommunications de Madrid des- 
tinees a reglementer et a tnieux 
assurer les services de la radio- 
diffusion. Elle fixera la limite su- 
perieure de la puissance non moduiee 
mesuree dans Tantenne, susceptible 
d'etre utilisee par chaque station 
pour la frequence en question, et la 
limite superieure de la valeur du 
champ efficace de Tonde porteuse 
produit de jour a la frontire la plus 
eloignee ainsi qu'a la fronti&re la plus 
proche. Dans ses decisions y rela- 
tives elle prendra pour guide les indi- 



196 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 319 



ment annexed to the present Proto- 
col. 

The arrangement adopted at the 
Conference shall include, amongst 
the general rules to be observed in 
future, provisions similar to those 
mentioned above, and also a clause 
corresponding to sub -paragraph (5) 
of 5 of Article 7 of the General 
Radiocommunication Regulations of 
Madrid. 

Subject to plans in course of exe- 
cution, the undersigned Govern- 
ments undertake not to make, be- 
tween now and the end of the work 
of the European Conference, any 
change in their broadcasting service 
which might appreciably affect the 
general situation of the radioelectric 
services of the European region. 

8. If the European Conference 
is led to contemplate the use by a 
broadcasting station of a frequency 
in one of the bands reserved for other 
European regional services, the ar- 
rangement adopted shall stipulate 
that if this use causes interference 
which was not foreseen at the time 
of the admission of the broadcasting 
station, the Administrations con- 
cerned shall do their utmost to ob- 
tain agreements capable of eliminat- 
ing this interference and, in this case, 
the authorised services shall have the 
preference in relation to the broad- 
casting services. 

9. If the European Conference is 
led to contemplate the use by a 
broadcasting station of a frequency 
in one of the bands reserved inter- 
nationally, in the general table of 
allocation of frequencies, for the 
mobile services, it shall, before 
issuing its recommendation, make an 
exhaustive study of the technical 
conditions under .which this service 
could be carried out without preju- 
dice to the authorised international 
mobile services and shall do its ut- 
most to obtain the agreements neces- 
sary to such use. It is recognised that 



cations contenues dans le document 
annex< au present Protocole. 

L'arrangement conclu & cette con- 
ference comprendra, parmi les regies 
g6nrales a observer a 1'avemr, des 
dispositions analogues a celles ci- 
avant vis6es, ainsi qu'une clause 
correspondant & 1'alinla (5) du 5 
de 1'article 7 du R&glement g6n6ral 
des radiocommunications de Madrid. 

Sous reserve des pro jets en vole 
d'excution, les gouvernernents sous- 
sign6s s'engagent, d'ici a la con- 
clusion des travaux de la Confe- 
rence europenne, & n'appprter dans 
leur service de radiodiffusion aucun 
changement de nature a affecter 
sensiblement la situation d'ensemble 
des services radiolectriques de la 
r6gion europenne. 

8. Si la Conference europenne 
est amende a envisager 1'utilisation, 
par une station de radiodiffusion, 
d'une frequence appartenant a une 
des bandes r6servles d'autres ser- 
vices rgionaux europ6ens, 1'arrange- 
ment conclu stipulera qu'au cas oft 
cette utilisation provoquerait des 
interferences qui n'avaient pas t6 
pr6vues lors de I'admission de ladite 
station de radiodiffusion, les admin- 
istrations int6ress6es s'efforceront 
d'obtenir des accords susceptibles 
d'61iminer ces interferences et que, 
dans ces cas, les services autoris6s 
seront privilgis par rapport au 
service de radiodiffusion. 

9. Si la Conference europenne 
est amende & envisager 1'utilisation, 
par une station de radiodiffusion, 
d'une frequence appartenant a une 
des bandes r<serves internationale- 
ment, dans le tableau g6n6ral d'at- 
tribution des frequences, aux services 
mobiles, elle devra, avant d'6mettre 
son avis, proc6der, &. une 6tude tech- 
nique approfondie des conditions 
dans lesquelles ce service pourrait 
6tre effectu6 sans g&ne pour les ser- 
vices mobiles internationalement au- 
toris6s et s'efforcera d'obtenir les 
accords n6cessaires & une telle utilisa- 



Dec. 9, 1932 



ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL (EUROPEAN) 



197 



these exceptions do not prejudice in 
any way the provisions of I of 
Article 7 of the General Radiocom- 
munication Regulations of Madrid 
which remain entirely applicable. 



CHAPTER IV 

PROVISIONS RELATING TO THE SPECIAL 
POSITION OF THE UNION OF SOVIET 
SOCIALIST REPUBLICS (U.S.S.R.) 

10. The undersigned Govern- 
ments recognise the following reser- 
vations of the U.S.S.R. so far as con- 
cerns the special use, by its services, 
of the following frequencies : 

150 to 285 kc/s (2,000 to 1,053 m) broadcast- 
ing 

285 to 315 kc/s (1,053 to 952 m) radiobea- 
cons 

315 to 340 kc/s (952 to 882 m) aeronautical 
services and direction-finding 

340 to 420 kc/s (882 to 714 m) broadcasting 

515 to 550 kc/s (583 to 545 m) aeronautical 
services 

These same Governments declare 
that the above-mentioned recogni- 
tion has its origin in considerations 
of a special character, and cannot 
serve as a precedent in any other 
case. 

During the preparation for the 
European Conference and during the 
work of that Conference, the under- 
signed Governments, including the 
U.S.S.R., undertake to collaborate 
fully with the object of bringing 
about a unified organisation of the 
European radioelectric services hav- 
ing for its special aim the elimination 
of interference between stations. 



CHAPTER V 

FINAL PROVISIONS 

ii. The European Conference 
shall fix the date of the entry into 
force of the agreement concluded. 

12. The expenses of the Confer- 
ence are borne by the Governments 



tion. II est bien entendu que, par 
ces derogations, il ne peut tre porte 
atteinte aux dispositions du I de 
Tarticle 7 du R&glement g<n6ral des 
radiocommunications de Madrid, qui 
restent entierement applicables. 

CHAPITRE IV 

DISPOSITIONS RELATIVES AUX CONDI- 
TIONS SP&CIALES DE L'UNION DES 
R&PUBLIQUES SOVIETISTES SOCIA- 
LISTES (U.R.S.S.) 

10. Les gouvernements sous- 
sign6s reconnaissent les reserves 
suivantes de FU.R.S.S. en ce qui re- 
garde Tutilisation sp<ciale, par ses 
services, des frequences suivantes : 

150^ a 285 kc/s (2 ooo a I 053 m) radiodiffu- 

sion 
285 a 315 kc/s d 053 & 952 m) radiophares 

315 & 340 kc/s (952 a 882 m) services aero- 

nautiques et radiogoniometrie 
340 a 420 kc/s (882 & 714 m) radiodiffusion 
515 a 550 kc/s (583 & 545 m) services aero- 

nautiques 

Ces mmes gouvernements d- 
clarent que la reconnaissance sus- 
mentionnee, tirant son origine de 
considerations d'un caract&re parti- 
culier, ne pourra servir de prcdent 
dans aucun autre cas. 

Dans la preparation de la Confe- 
rence europeenne et pendant les 
travaux de cette conference, les 
gouvernements soussignes, y com- 
pris I'U.R.S.S., s'engagent 4 prlter 
toute leur collaboration en vue 
d'aboutir une organisation unifi6e 
des services radio^lectriques euro- 
p6ens ayant tout sp6cialement pour 
but d'eiiminer les interferences entre 
les stations. 

CHAPITRE V 

DISPOSITIONS FINALES 

ii. La Conference europ6enne 
fixera la date de Tentr6e en vigueur 
de rarrangement conclu. 

12. Les dpenses de la confe- 
rence sont & la charge des gouverne- 



198 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 319 



and the international organisations 
which take part in it. 

13. The present Protocol enters 
into force immediately ; it shall cease 
to have effect at the date of the clos- 
ing of the European Conference. 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the respec- 
tive plenipotentiaries have signed 
the present Additional Protocol in a 
single copy which will remain depos- 
ited in the archives of the Govern- 
ment of Spain and of which a copy 
will be delivered to each party. 

Done at Madrid the 9th of Decem- 
ber 1932. 



ments et des organismes interna- 
tionaux qui y prennent part. 

13. Le present Protocole entre 
en vigueur immdiatement ; il cessera 
son effet la date de cldture de la 
Conference europ6enne. 

EN FOI DE QUOI, les ptenipotenti- 
aires respectifs ont sign6 le present 
Protocole additionnel en un exem- 
plaire qui restera d6pos6 aux archives 
du Gouvernement de TEspagne et 
dont une copie sera remise & chaque 
Partie. 

Fait & Madrid, le 9 d<cembre 1932. 



[Signed:] For Germany: HERMANN GIESS, Dr. Ing. HANS CARL STEIDLE, 
Dr. PAtrL JAGER, Dr. HANS HARBICH, PAUL MUNCH, MARTIN FEUERHAHN, 
SIEGFRIED MEY, ERHARD MAERTENS; for Austria: RUDOLPH OESTREICHER, 
Ing. H. PFEUFFER; for Belgium: R. CORTEIL; for the Vatican City State: 
GUISEPPE GIANFRANCESCHI; for the Swiss Confederation: G. KELLER, 
E. METZLER; for Denmark: KAY CHRISTIANSEN, C. LERCHE, GREDSTED; for 
Danzig Free City: Ing. HENRYK KOWALSKI, ZANDER; for Egypt: R. MURRAY, 
MOHAMED SAID; for Spain and the Spanish Zone of Morocco: MIGUEL 
SASTRE, RAM6N MIGUEL NIETO, GABRIEL HOMBRE, FRANCISCO VIDAL, 
J. DE ENCIO, TonAs FERNANDEZ QUINTANA, LEOPOLDO CAL, TRINIDAD 
MATRES ; for Finland : NIILO ORASMAA, VILJO YL$STALO ; for France, Algeria, 
Morocco and Tunis: JULES GAUTIER; for the United Kingdom of Great 
Britain and Northern Ireland: F. W. PHILLIPS, J. LOUDEN, F. W. HOME, 
C. H. BOYD, J. P. G. WORLLEDGE; for Greece: TH. PENTHEROUDAKIS, STAM 
INTicoLis; for Hungary: Ing. JULES ERDOSS; for the Irish Free State: P. S. 
OH-IGEARTAIGH, E. CUISIN; for Iceland: G. HLIDDAL; for Italy, Cyrenaica 
and Tripolitania: G. GNEME, D. CRETY; for Latvia: B. EINBERG; for Lithu- 
ania: Ing. K. GAIGALIS; for Norway: T. ENGSET, HERMOD PETERSEN, 
ANDR. HADLAND ; for the Netherlands : H. J. BOETJE, J. A. BLAND VD BERG; 
for Poland: K. KRULISZ; for Portugal: MIGUEL VAZ DUARTE BACELAR, 
Josfe DE Liz FERREIRA, JUNIOR, DAVID DE SOUSA PIRES, JOAQUIM RODRIGUES 
GONCALVES; for Roumania: Ing. T. TANASESCO; for Sweden: G. WOLD; 
for Czechoslovakia: Ing. JAROMIR SVOBODA; for Turkey: FAHRI, I. CEMAL, 
MAZHAR; for the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics: EUGENE HIRSCHFELD, 
ALEXANDRE KOKADEEV; for Jugoslavia: D. A. ZLATANOVITCH. 



DOCUMENT 
annexed to the Additional Protocol 

DIRECTIVES FOR THE EUROPEAN CONFER- 
ENCE ON THE QUESTION OF LIMITATION 
OF POWER 

(See 7.) 

(i) In principle, the power of broad- 
casting stations must not exceed the value 



DOCUMENT 
annexe au Protocole additionnel 

DIRECTIVES POUR LA CONFERENCE EURO- 
P&ENNE EN MATI&RE DE LIMITATION 
DE PUISSANCE 

(Voir le 7.) 

t (i) En principe, la puissance des sta- 
tions de radiodiffusion ne doit pas d6- 



Dec. 9, 1932 



ADDITIONAL PROTOCOL (EUROPEAN) 



199 



permitting the economical provision of an 
efficient national service of good quality 
within the limits of the country in question. 

(2) The unmodulated power, measured 
in the aerial, of broadcasting stations 
shall not exceed the following values : 

1. for frequencies below 300 

kc/s (waves above 1,000 m) 150 kW; 

2. for frequencies above 300 

kc/s (waves below i ,000 m) 100 kW l . 



Nevertheless, the power may, excep- 
tionally, exceed the figures given above 
when: 1st. the geographical situation, the 
area of the territory to be served, the con- 
ditions of propagation of waves in the 
zone to be served or exceptional national 
requirements warrant it; 2nd. the techni- 
cal devices used permit it without causing 
an increase in interference with other 
services. 

(3) The power of any broadcasting 
station must not exceed that necessary to 
provide an effective national service with 
a field-strength not exceeding 2 mV/m 
(carrier wave) by day at the most remote 
frontier. 

(4) As a general rule, the value of the 
effective field-strength produced by day 
by broadcasting stations working on fre- 
quencies below 300 kc/s (wave-lengths 
above 1,000 m) must not exceed 10 mV/m 
(carrier wave) beyond the frontiers of the 
countries to which these stations belong. 
Nevertheless, other provisions permitting 
this figure to be exceeded may be adopted 
exceptionally. 



passer la valeur permettant d'assurer 
e'conomiquement un service national 
efficace et de bonne qualite dans les limites 
du pays considre. 

(2) La puissance non modu!6e mesuree 
dans Fantenne des stations de radio- 
diffusion ne depassera pas les valeurs 
suivantes : 

1. pour les frequences in- 
f^rieures a 300 kc/s (ondes 
superieures a I ooo m) 150 kW; 

2. pour les frequences su- 
perieures a 300 kc/s 
(ondes inferieures a 

1000 m) 100 kW *, 

Toutefois, la puissance pourra depasser 
exceptionnellement les chiffres donnes 
ci-avant lorsque: i la situation g&> 
graphique, l*6tendue du territoire & 
desservir, les conditions de propagation 
des ondes dans la zone a desservir pu des 
besoins nationaux exceptionnels le justifi- 
ent; 2 les dispositifs techniques utilises 
le permettent sans causer une augmenta- 
tion de gne aux autres services. 

(3) La puissance de toute station de 
radiodiffusion ne doit pas depasser celle 
qui est n6cessaire pour assurer un service 
national effectif avec un champ ne d6- 
passant pas 2 mV/m (onde porteuse) 
pendant le jour & la frontiere la plus 
eloigne. 

(4) En regie gen&rale, la valeur du 
champ efficace produit pendant le jour par 
les stations de radipdiffusion travaillant 
avec des frequences inf^rieures a 300 kc/s 
(longueurs d'onde superieures a I ooo m) 
ne devra pas depasser 10 mV/m (onde 
porteuse) en dehors des fronti&res des pays 
auxquels appartiennent ces stations. 
Toutefois, des dispositions differentes 
permettant de d6passer ce chiffre pourront 
tre preVues, exceptionnellement. 



* For the following stations: Prague, Vienna, Budapest, Paris, Toulouse, Rennes and Leipzig at 
present in use or in course of construction, the power permitted is 120 kW. 

i Pour les stations suivantes: Prague, Vienne, Budapest, Paris, Toulouse, Rennes, Leipzig, actu- 
ellement en service ou en cours de construction, la puissance admise est de 120 kW. 



2OO 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 

No. 320 



No. 320 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS annexed to the Telecommunication 
Convention. Signed at Madrid, December 10, 1932. 

BJ2GLEMENT TfiLfiGRAPHIQUE annexe let Convention des 
telecommunications. Signe & Madrid, 10 decembre 1932. 

EDITOR'S NOTE. These regulations supersede the regulations annexed to the Telegraph 
Convention of St. Petersburg as revised at Paris in 1925 (No. 146, ante), and modified at 
Brussels in 1928 (No. I46a r ante). Several bipartite agreements regulating telegraphic 
service have been concluded. 

ACCESSIONS. On July i, 1937, these regulations had been approved or acceded to by all 
the states which had ratified or acceded to the telecommunication convention (No. 316, 
ante), except Afghanistan, Canada, Panama, and United States of America, and by Bolivia, 
Greece, and Sweden. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. The text of these regulations is also published in 151 League of Nations 
Treaty Series, p. 50. (See the bibliography under No. 316, ante.) 

Entered into force January i, I934- 3 
Text and translation from publication issued by the General Post Office, London. 

[Translation] 
CHAPTER I 

RELATION TO THE WORKING OF 
RADIOCOMMUNICATION 

ARTICLE i. Application of the Telegraph 
Regulations to radio communication 

I 1 ] 2 So far as the present Regulations do 
not provide otherwise, provisions appli- 
cable to wire communication are also ap- 
plicable to wireless communication. 

CHAPTER II 

INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM 

ARTICLE 2. Composition of the system 

[ 2 ] i. Offices between which the ex- 
change of telegrams is continuous or very 
active, are, so far as practicable, connected 
by direct communication channels, pro- 
vided in sufficient number to fulfil all the 
requirements of the service. These chan- 
nels must reach the necessary mechani- 
cal, electrical and technical standards, 
regard being had, so far as practicable, to 
the recommendations of the Interna- 
tional Telegraph Consultative Committee 
(C.C.I.T.). 

1 Registered with the Secretariat of the League of Nations, No. 3479, August 30, 1934. 

2 The consecutive numbering of the paragraphs by figures in brackets was decided upon by the 
International Telegraph Conference of Madrid (1932), to facilitate reference, ED. 



CHAPITRE I 

REPERCUSSION SUR L'EXPLOITATION DES 
RAMOCOMMUNICATIONS 

ARTICLE i. Application du K&glement 
tttegraphique aux radiocommunications 

[ l ] 2 En tant que le present Reglement n'en 
dispose pas autrement, les prescriptions 
applicables aux communications par fil le 
sont aussi aux communications par sans fil. 

CHAPITRE II 

ROSEAU INTERNATIONAL 

ARTICLE 2. Constitution du reseau 

[*] i. Les bureaux entre lesquels re- 
change des telegrammes est cpntinu pu 
tres actif spnt, autant que possible, relies 
par des voies de communication directes, 
etablies en nombre suffisant pour satisfaire 
a tous les besoins du service. Celles-ci 
doivent, en outre, presenter les garanties 
mecaniques, electriques et techniques 
suffisantes, en tenant compte, autant que 
possible, des avis du Comit6 consultatif 
international telegraphique (C.C.I.T.) 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



2O I 



[ 3 ] 2. If on the whole of the route, or 
on certain sections only, trunk cables are 
available, these should, so far as prac- 
ticable, be used also for the provision of 
international channels of telegraph com- 
munication. For this purpose the Ad- 
ministrations agree together on the pro- 
cedure. As regards technical details, the 
joint recommendations of the Interna- 
tional Telegraph Consultative Committee 
(C.C.I.T.) and of the International Tele- 
phone Consultative Committee (C.C.I.F.) 
are, so far as practicable, taken as a guide. 



ARTICLE 3. Use of communication 
channels 

[ 4 ] i. The operation of international 
communication channels is the subject of 
agreement between the Administrations 
concerned. 

[ 5 ] 2. Transmissions by international 
communication channels are only effected, 
as a general rule, by terminal offices. 
Each Administration, so far as it is con- 
cerned, arranges, on every important in- 
ternational communication channel, for 
one or more intermediate offices to take 
the place of the terminal office, when di- 
rect working between the two terminal 
offices becomes impossible. 



[ 6 ] 3. International communication 
channels, which are interrupted or are not 
in use, may, on national sections, be 
wholly or partly diverted from their 
normal purpose, on condition that the 
Administrations concerned restore them 
to their normal purpose as soon as the in- 
terruption ceases or as soon as they are 
asked to do so. 

ARTICLE 4. Maintenance of 
communication channels 

[ 7 ] I. Administrations make, for each 
of the international communication chan- 
nels, arrangements adapted to secure the 
greatest benefit from it, 
[ 8 ] 2. (i) The terminal offices on busy 
international wires measure the electrical 
conditions (insulation, resistance, etc.), 
of these wires as often as they think 
necessary. They agree together as to the 
day and time of the measurements, com- 
municate the results to one another and 
proceed as quickly as possible to remove 
faults ascertained. 



[ 3 ] 2. Si, sur la totality du parcours ou 
sur certaines sections seulement, des 
cables interurbains sont disponibles, 
ceux-ci sont, autant que possible, 6gale- 
ment & utiliser pour retablissement de 
voies de communication telegraphiques 
internationales. A cet effet, les adminis- 
trations interess6es s'entendent sur la 
maniere de proceder. En ce qui concerne 
les details techniques, font regie, autant 
que possible, les recommandations com- 
munes du Comitd consul tatif international 
telegraphique (C.C.I.T.) et du Comit6 
consultatif international telephonique 
(C.C.I.F.). 

ARTICLE 3. Utilisation des voies de 

communication 

[ 4 ] i. L'exploitation des voies de com- 
munication internationales fait 1'objet 
d'un accord entre les administrations 
int6ressees. 

[ 5 ] 2. Les transmissions par les voies 
de communication internationales ne sont 
effectu6es, en regie generate, que par les 
bureaux tte de ligne. Les administra- 
tions prennent, chacune en ce qui la con- 
cerne, des dispositions pour que, sur 
chaque voie de communication interna- 
tionale importante, un ou plusieurs 
bureaux du parcours puissent se substituer 
au bureau design^ comme point extreme, 
lorsque le travail direct entre les deux 
bureaux tte de ligne devient impossible. 
[ 6 ] 3. En cas de derangement ou^ de 
non utilisation, les voies de communica- 
tion internationales peuvent, sur les sec- 
tions nationales, toe dtournees en tout 
ou partie de leur affectation normale, & 
la condition que les administrations in- 
t6ress6es les ramenent & cette affectation 
des que le derangement a cess6 ou que la 
demande en a 6t6 faite. 

ARTICLE 4. Entretien des voies de 
communication 

[ 7 ] i. Les administrations prennent, 
pour chacune des voies de communication 
internationales, les dispositions qui per- 
mettent d'en tirer le meilleur parti. 
[*] 2. (i) Les bureaux tlte de ligne des 
fils internationaux a grand trafic mesurent 
l'tat lectrique (isolement, resistance, 
etc.) de ces fils chaque fois qu'ils le jugent 
utile. Us s f entendent sur le jour et 
1'heure de ces mesures, se communiquent 
les r6sultats de celles-ci et font prpc6der 
le plus promptement possible 
tion des d6fauts constates. 



2O2 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



[ 9 ] (2) When trunk cables are used for 
the provision of busy international tele- 
graph communication channels, the meas- 
urements are taken in accordance with 
the special -provisions of the Telephone 
Regulations. 

[ 10 ] 3- I* 1 cases of interruption of inter- 
national communication channels, the 
offices concerned inform one another of 
the result of their enquiries with a view to 
fixing the place and nature of the inter- 
ruption; the Administrations concerned 
undertake to repair or, so far as prac- 
ticable, to replace the defective section in 
the shortest possible time. 



CHAPTER III 

NATURE AND HOURS OF SERVICE OF 
OFFICES 

ARTICLE 5. Opening, duration and closing 
of service. Legal time 

[ n ] I . Each Administration fixes the 
hours during which offices shall remain 
open to the public. 

[ 12 ] 2, Important offices, working di- 
rect one with another, remain open, so far 
as practicable, day and night without 
interruption. 

[ l8 ] 3. In offices open permanently, the 
closing of daily sessions takes place at a 
time fixed by agreement between the 
offices in correspondence. 
[ l4 ] 4. Offices which are not perma- 
nently open may not close before transmit- 
ting all their international telegrams to an 
office which is open longer, or before re- 
ceiving from the office in correspondence 
any international telegrams on hand at the 
time of closing. 

[ 16 ] 5. Between two offices in different 
countries which communicate directly, 
close of work is requested by the office 
closing to the one which remains open, 
and is given by the latter office. When 
the two offices close at the same time, 
close of work is requested by the office 
belonging to the country whose capital is 
more to die east, and is given by the other 
office, 

["] ^ 6. With the exception of countries 
having two or more time zones, the same 
time is used in all offices in the same coun- 
try. The legal time or times adopted by 
an Administration are notified to the 
other Administrations through the me- 
dium of the Bureau of the Union. 



[ 9 ] (2) Lorsque des cables interurbains 
sont utilises pour l'tablissement des voies 
de communication t16graphiques interna- 
tionales & grand trafic, il est proc6d6 aux 
mesures conform6ment aux dispositions 
sp6ciales du R&glement t61phonique. 
[ 10 ] 3. En cas de derangement des 
voies de communication international, 
les bureaux intress6s se communiquent 
mutuellement les rsultats de leurs re- 
cherches, dans le but de determiner Fen- 
droit et la nature de Interruption; les 
administrations int6resses s'engagent a 
r6parer ou a remplacer, dans la mesure 
du possible, et dans le plus bref d61ai, la 
section d6fectueuse. 

CHAPITRE III 

NATURE ET &TENDUE DU SERVICE DES 
BUREAUX 

ARTICLE 5. Ouverture, duree et cldture du 
service, Heure legate 

["] i. Chaque administration fixe les 
heures pendant lesquelles les bureaux 
doivent rester ouverts au public. 
[ 1Z ] 2. Les bureaux importants, tra- 
vaillant directement Tun avec 1'autre, 
restent ouverts, autant que possible, le 
jour et la nuit, sans interruption. 
t 18 ] 3* Dans les bureaux a service 
permanent, la cldture des stances jour- 
nalieres est donne & une heure 6tablie 
d'accord entre les bureaux correspondants. 
[ 14 ] 4. Les bureaux dont le service n'est 
point permanent ne peuvent prendre 
cldture avant d'avoir transmis tous leurs 
t616grammes internationaux & un bureau 
dont le service est plus prolong6 et avant 
d'avoir recju du bureau correspondant les 
t616grammes internationaux qui sont en 
instance au moment de la cldture. 
[ 16 ] 5. Entre deux bureaux de pays 
diffrents communiquant directement, 
la cldture est demand6e par celui qui se 
ferme a celui qui derneure ouvert, et 
donnee par ce dernier. Lorsque les deux 
bureaux en relation se ferment au mme 
moment, la cldture est demanded par celui 
qui appartient au pays dont la capitale a 
la position la plus orientale, et donnde par 
1'autre bureau. 

[ 16 ] 6. A 1'exception des pays ayant 
deux ou plusieurs zones horaires, la m6me 
heure est adoptee par tous les bureaux du 
me^me pays. L'heure 16gale ou les heures 
16gales adopt6es par une administration 
sont notifies aux autres administrations 
par rinterm6diaire du Bureau de 1'Union. 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



203 



ARTICLE 6. Symbols describing the kind 
and duration of the service of offices 

[ 17 ] (i) The following symbols are used 
to describe the kind of service and the 
working hours of offices: 

N office permanently open (day and 

night) ; 
R land station (radiocommunica- 

tion); 

S semaphore office; 
K office at which all kinds of tele- 
grams may be handed in and which 
delivers only to callers (telegraph 
restant) and to persons within the 
limits of a railway station ; 

VK office at which either all kinds of 
telegrams or only those of railway 
passengers or station officials may 
be handed in but no telegrams are 
delivered ; 

E office open only during the stay of 
the Head of the State or of the 
Court; 
B office open only during the bathing 

season ; 
H office open only during the winter 

season ; 

* office temporarily closed. 
[ 18 ] (2) The foregoing symbols may be 
used in combination with one another. 
[ 19 ] (3) The symbols B and H are com- 
pleted, so far as practicable, by the dates 
of opening and closing of the temporary 
office in question. 

CHAPTER IV 

GENERAL PROVISIONS RELATING TO 
CORRESPONDENCE 

ARTICLE 7. Establishing the identity of 
the sender or addressee 

[ 20 ] The sender or the addressee of a 
private telegram must prove his identity 
when requested to do so by the office of 
origin or the office of destination respec- 
tively. 

CHAPTER V 

PREPARATION AND HANDING-IN OF 
TELEGRAMS 

ARTICLE 8. Plain and secret language. 
Acceptance of these languages 

[ ai ] I. The text of telegrams may be 
expressed in plain language or in secret 



ARTICLE 6. Notations indignant la nature 
et Vetendue du service des bureaux 

[ 17 ] (i) Les notations suivantes sont 
adopters pour indiquer la nature du service 
et les heures d'ouverture des bureaux: 
N bureau a service permanent (de 

jour et de nuit) ; 
R station terrestre (de radiocom- 

munication) ; 

S bureau smaphorique; 
K bureau qui admet au d6part les 
tel^grammes de toute catgorie et 
qui n'accepte a 1'arrivee que ceux 
a remettre "telegraphe restant" 
ou a distribuer dans Tenceinte 
d'une gare; 

VK bureau qui admet au d6part les 
t61egramm.es de toute categoric ou 
seulement ceux des voyageurs ou 
du personnel r6sidant dans la gare, 
et qui n'accepte aucun tele"gramme 
a Tarrivde; 

E bureau ouvert seulement pendant 
le sejour du chef de TEtat ou de la 
cour; 
B bureau ouvert seulement pendant 

la saison des bains; 
H bureau ouvert seulement pendant 

la saison d'hiver; 

* bureau temporairement ferm6. 
[ 18 ] (2) Les notations qui precedent 
peuvent se combiner entre elles. 
t 19 ] (3) Les notations B et H sont com- 
pletes, autant que possible, par Pindica- 
tion des dates d'ouverture et de fermeture 
des bureaux temporaires dont il s'agit. 

CHAPITRE IV 

DISPOSITIONS GENERALES RELATIVES A LA 
CORRESPOND ANCE 

ARTICLE 7. Constatation de Videntite de 
Vexpediteur ou du destinataire 

[ 20 ] L'expediteur ou le destinataire d'un 
telegramme priv6 est tenu d'etablir son 
identity lorsqu'il y est invit par le bureau 
d'origine ou celui de destination, re- 
spectivement. 

CHAPITRE V 

REDACTION ET DEPOT DES TELEGRAMMES 



ARTICLE 8. Langage clair et langage 
secret. Acceptation de ces langages 

[ al ] i. Le texte des t616grammes peut 
tre r6dig en langage clair ou en langage 



204 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



language, the latter being divided into 
code language and cypher language. 
Each of these languages may be used 
alone or together with the others in the 
same telegram. 

[ 22 ] 2. All Administrations accept, in 
all their relations, telegrams in plain lan- 
guage. They may refuse to admit both 
in acceptance and in delivery private tele- 
grams wholly or partly in secret language, 
but they must allow these telegrams to 
pass in transit, except in the case of sus- 
pension defined in Article 27 of the Con- 
vention. 

ARTICLE 9. Plain language 

[ 28 ] i. Plain language is that which 
presents an intelligible meaning in one or 
more of the languages authorised for in- 
ternational telegraph correspondence, 
each word and each expression having the 
meaning normally assigned to it in the 
language to which it belongs. 

[ 24 ] 2. By telegrams in plain language 
those are meant of which the text is wholly 
in plain language. The character of a 
telegram in plain language is not, how- 
ever, changed by the presence of numbers 
expressed either in letters or in figures, 
which have not a secret meaning, arbi- 
trary addresses, commercial marks, ex- 
change quotations, letters representing the 
signals of the International Code of Sig- 
nals used in semaphore telegrams and 
radiotelegrams, abbreviations in current 
use in ordinary or commercial correspond- 
ence, such as fob, cif, caf, svp or any simi- 
lar expression, the admissibility of which 
is decided by the country despatching the 
telegram, or a check word or check num- 
ber placed at the beginning of the text in 
bank and similar telegrams. 



P 5 ] 3- Each Administration designates, 
from among the languages used on the ter- 
ritory of the country to which it belongs, 
those which it authorises for use in inter- 
national telegraph correspondence in 
plain language. The use of Latin and 
Esperanto is also authorised. 

ARTICLE 10. Code language 

[* 8 ] i. Code language is composed 
either of artificial words, or of real words 
not used with the meaning normally as- 
signed to them in the language to which 



secret, ce dernier se distinguant en Ian- 
gage convenu et en langage chiffr6. 
Chacun de ces langages peut tre employe 
seul ou conjointement avec les autres dans 
un m&ne telegramme. 
[ 22 ] 2. Toutes les administrations ac- 
ceptent, dans toutes leurs relations, les 
t616grammes en langage clair. Elles 
peuvent n'admettre ni au depart ni a 
1' arrived les telegrammes priv6s r6dig6s 
totalement ou partiellement en langage 
secret, mais elles doivent laisser ces t16- 
grammes circuler en transit, sauf le cas 
de suspension de"fini a 1'article 27 de la 
Convention. 

ARTICLE 9. Langage clair 

[ 23 ] i. Le langage clair est celui qui 
off re un sens comprehensible dans une ou 
plusieurs des langues autoris6es pour la 
correspondance telegraphique interna- 
nationale, chaque mot et chaque expres- 
sion ayant la signification qui leur est 
normalernent attribu6e dans la langue a 
laquelle ils appartiennent. 
[ 24 ] 2. On en tend par tele" grammes en 
langage clair, ceux dont le texte est en- 
ti&rernent rdig6 en langage clair. Toute- 
fois, la presence de nombres Merits, soit 
en lettres soit en chiffres, qui n'ont aucune 
signification secr&te, d'adresses conven- 
tionnelles, de marques de commerce, de 
cours de bourse, de lettres repr6sentant 
les signaux du code international de sig- 
naux, employees dans les t616grammes 
se"maphoriques et dans les radiotel- 
grammes, d' expressions abr6ges d'un 
usage courant dans la correspondance 
usuelle ou commerciale, comme fob, cif, 
caf, svp ou toute autre analogue, dont 
F appreciation appartient au pays qui 
exp6die le tele" gramme, d'un mot ou d'un 
nombre de contrdle plac en tte du texte 
dans les t16grammes de banque et ceux 
analogues, ne change pas le caract&re 
d'un tl<gramme en langage clair. 
[ 25 ] 3- Chaque administration designe, 
parmi les langues usit6es sur le territoire 
du pays auquel elle appartient, celles dont 
elle autorise 1'emploi dans la correspon- 
dance teldgraphique internationale en 
langage clair. L' usage du latin et de 
Tespeianto est e"galement autoris6. 

ARTICLE 10. Langage convenu 

p 6 ]^ i. Le langage convenu est celui 
qui se compose soit de mots artificiels, soit 
de mots rels n' ayant pas la signification 
qui leur est normalernent attribute dans 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



205 



they belong and consequently not forming 
intelligible phrases in one or more of the 
languages authorised for telegraph cor- 
respondence in plain language, or lastly of 
a mixture of real words as defined and 
artificial words. 

[ Z7 ] 2. (i) By telegrams in code lan- 
guage those are meant of which the text 
contains words belonging to this language. 
[ 28 ] (2) The code words, whether real or 
artificial, must not contain more than five 
letters; they may be formed in any way. 
They must not contain the accented 
letter 6. 

[ Z9 ] 3- The officer who accepts a tele- 
gram in code language enters on the form 
the service instruction =CDE = , which 
is transmitted to destination at the be- 
ginning of the preamble of the telegram. 
[ 30 ] 4. CDE telegrams are charged at 
6/ioths of the full rate in the case of the 
extra-European system, and at 7/ioths 
of the full rate in the case of the European 
system. 

t 31 ] 5- (*) Telegrams of which the text 
contains words in code language and 
words in plain language and/or figures 
and groups of figures, are considered, for 
the purpose of charging, as belonging to 
code language. Nevertheless: 

[32] (#) the number of figures or groups 
of figures must not exceed one-half of the 
number of chargeable words in the text 
and signature; 

[ 3JJ ] (6) for the purpose of charging, bank 
and similar telegrams expressed in plain 
language which contain a check word or 
check number placed at the beginning of 
the text (Art. 9, 2) are not considered as 
code telegrams. 

["] (2) Telegrams of which the text 
contains words in code language and 
groups of figures in excess of one-half of 
the chargeable words in the text and sig- 
nature, are considered for the purpose of 
charging, as telegrams in cypher language. 
[ 35 ] 6. The sender of a telegram in code 
language or code language mixed with 
another language must produce the code 
from which the text or part of the text of 
the telegram has been compiled, if the 
office of origin or the Administration to 
which this office is subject requests it. 

ARTICLE n. Cypher language 
[ 38 ] i. Cypher language is formed: 



la langue laquelle ils appartiennent et, 
de ce fait, ne forment pas des phrases 
compr6hensibles dans une ou plusieurs 
des langues autoris6es pour la correspond- 
ance telegraphique en langage clair, soit 
enfin^ d'un melange de mots r6els ainsi 
d6finis et de mots artificiels. 
[ 27 ] 2. (i) On en tend par t61egrammes 
en langage convenu ceux dont le texte con- 
tient des mots appartenant a ce langage. 
[ 28 ] (2) Les mots convenus, qu'ils soient 
reels ou artificiels, ne doivent pas com- 
prendre plus de cinq lettres; ils peuvent 
tre construits librement. Ces mots ne 
peuvent contenir la lettre accentuee e. 
[ 29 ] 3. L'agent qui accepte un tele- 
gramme en langage convenu inscrit sur 
la minute la mention de service "CDE" 
qui est transmise en tte du pr<ambule du 
t16gramme jusqu'a destination. 
[ 30 ] 4. Les taegrammes CDE sont 
taxes aux 6/10 du tarif plein s'il s'agit 
du regime extra-europ6en, et aux 7/10 du 
tarif plein s'il s'agit du regime europ6en. 

[ 31 ] 5- (i) Les tel6gramm.es dont le 
texte contient des mots en langage 
convenu et des mots en langage clair 
et/ou des chiffres et des groupes de chif- 
fres, sont considers, pour la taxation, 
comme appartenant au langage convenu. 
Toutefois: 

[ 32 ] (a) le nombre des chiffres ou groupes 
de chiffres ne doit pas d6passer la moitid 
du nombre des mots taxes du texte et de la 
signature ; 

I 33 ] (&) pour la taxation, ne sont pas con- 
sideres comme telegrammes convenus les 
telegrammes de banque et ceux analogues 
r6diges en langage clair contenant un mot 
ou un nombre de contrdle plac6 en tte 
du texte (art. 9, 2). 
[ 34 ] (2) Les telegrammes dont le texte 
contient des mots en langage convenu et des 
groupes de chiffres en nombre sup6rieur & 
la moitie des mots tax6s du texte et de la 
signature sont consid6res, pour la taxation, 
comme des telegrammes en langage chiff re. 
[ 35 ] 6. L'exp6diteur d'un t&egramme 
en langage convenu ou mixte convenu est 
tenu de pr6senter le code d'aprs lequel le 
texte ou par tie du texte du t616gramme a 
et6 redigi, si le bureau d'origine ou 1'ad- 
ministration dont ce bureau releve lui 
en font la demande. 

ARTICLE 11. Langage cUffre 

[ 38 ] I. Le langage chiffre est celui qui 
est forme: 



206 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



[ 8T ] 1st. of Arabic figures, groups or 
series of Arabic figures with a secret 
meaning; 

[ 88 ] 2nd. of words, names, expressions 
or combinations of letters, with the ex- 
ception of the letter , not fulfilling the 
conditions of plain language (Art. 9) or 
code language (Art. 10). 
[ 3l ] 2. The combination, in one group, 
of figures and letters with a secret mean- 
ing is not allowed. 

[ 40 ] 3 The groups indicated in Article 
9, 2 are not considered as having a 
secret meaning. 

ARTICLE 12. Preparation of telegrams. 
Characters which may be used 

[ 41 ] I. The original telegram must be 

legibly written in characters which have 

an equivalent in the table of telegraph 

signals given below and which are used in 

the country in which the telegram is 

presented. 

[ 42 ] 2. These characters are as follows: 

Letters: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, 
L, M, N, 0, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, 
Z,fi. 

Figures: i, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, o. 

Signs of punctuation: Full stop (.)> 
comma (,), colon (:), note of interrogation 
(?), apostrophe ('), hyphen or dash ( ). 

Other signs used in writing: Brackets ( ), 

fraction bar (/), underline ( ). 

M 3- Every footnote, insertion, era- 
sure, elimination or correction must be 
approved by the sender or his representa- 
tive. 

M 4. (i) Roman figures are ad- 
mitted as written, but are transmitted as 
Arabic figures. 

[ 45 ] (2) If, however, the sender of a 
telegram desires the addressee to be in- 
formed that Roman figures are intended, 
he writes the Arabic figure or figures, and 
inserts the word " Roman" in front of the 
figure or figures. 

[ 46 ] 5- The multiplication sign (X) is 
admitted, although it has no equivalent 
in the table in these Regulations. It is 
replaced in transmission by the letter X, 
which is counted as a separate word. 
[* 7 ] 6. (i) Expressions such as 30% 30 m % 
30, i, 2, <^, i' (minute), i" (second), 
etc., cannot be reproduced by the instru- 
ments ; senders must substitute an equiva- 
lent which can be telegraphed, thus for 
example, for the expressions quoted above: 
30 power a (or 30 a), trentieme, trentaine, 



[ 37 ] i de chiffres arabes, de groupes pu 
de series de chiffres arabes ayant une sig- 
nification secrete; 

[ 8S ] 2 de mots, noms, expressions ou 
reunions de lettres, & Texclusion de la let- 
tre i, ne remplissant pas les conditions du 
langage clair (art. 9) ou du langage con- 
venu (art. 10). 

[ 39 1 2. Le melange, dans un mme 
groupe, de chiffres et de lettres ayant une 
signification secrete, n'est pas admis. 
[*] 3- Ne spnt pas considers comme 
ayant une signification secrete les groupes 
vises a 1'article 9, 2. 

ARTICLE 12. Redaction des t&Ugrammes* 
Caracteres pouvant ttre employes 

[ 4l ] i. La minute du tele"gramme doit 
tre teite lisiblement en caracteres qui 
ont leur equivalent dans le tableau ci- 
dessous des signaux telegraphiques et qui 
sont en usage dans le pays ou le te!6- 
gramme est pr6sente. 
[ 42 ] 2. Ces caracteres sont les suivants: 

Lettres: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, 
L, M, N, 0, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, 
Z fi 
1 Chijfres: I, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, o. 

Signes de ponctuation: Point (.), vir- 
gule (,), deux points (:), point d'interro- 
gation (?), apostrophe ('), trait d'union ou 
tiret(-). 

Autres signes d^criture: Parentheses ( ), 
barre de fraction (/), soulign6 ( ) 
t 43 ] 3* Tout renvoi, interligne, rature, 
suppression ou surcharge doit tre ap- 
prouv6 par l'expditeur ou par son repr6- 
sentant. 

M 4- W Les chiffres romains sont 
admis tels quels, mais ils sont transmis en 
chiffres arabes. 

[ 4B ] (2) Toutefois, si 1'expediteur d'un 
telegramme desire que le destinataire soit 
inform^ qu'il s'agit de chiffres romains, il 
6crit ie ou les chiffres arabes et, devant ce 
ou ces chiffres, il intercale le mot "ro- 
main 1 '. 

[ 46 ] 5. Le signe de multiplication (X), 
quoique n'ayant pas son equivalent dans 
le tableau r6glementaire, est admis. La 
lettre X le remplace dans la transmission; 
elle est comptee pour un mot. 
[ 47 ] 6. (i) Les expressions telles que 
30% 30 me , 3o ne , i, 2, <|, i' (minute), i" 
(seconde), etc., ne peuvent tre repro- 
duites par les appareils; les exp6diteurs 
doivent leur substituer un Equivalent 
pouvant tre t616graphie, spit par ex- 
emple, pour les expressions cities d-des- 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



Dec. 10, 1932 

primo, secundo, B in diamond, I minute, 
I second, etc. 

[ 48 ] (2) If, however, the expressions 30% 
30 b , etc., 30 bis, 30 ter, etc., 30 I, 30 II, 
etc., 3O l , 30 2 , etc., indicating the number of 
a house, appear in an address, the counter 
officer separates the number from the 
letters or figures accompanying it, by an 
oblique stroke. The same rule is applied 
in transmitting house numbers such as 
30 A, 30 B, etc. The expressions in ques- 
tion are consequently transmitted in the 
following form: 3O/A, 30/6, etc., 3O/bis, 
30/ter, etc., 30/1, 30/2, etc., 30/1, 30/2, 
etc., 30/A, 30/B, etc. 



ARTICLE 13. Order of arrangement of the 
various parts of a telegram 

[ 49 ] The various parts of which a tele- 
gram may consist must be written in the 
following order: 1st, paid service indica- 
tions; 2nd, address; 3rd, text; 4th, signa- 
ture. 

ARTICLE 14. Forms of paid service 
indications 

[ 60 ] I. Paid service indications and 
forms for their transmission.* 

Urgent [Urgent] =D = 

Partiellement urgent [Partially urgent] =PU = 

Reponse payee x [Reply paid x] =RPx=~ 

Collationnement [Collation] =TC = 

Accus6 de reception telegraphique (telegramme avec) [Telegraphic 

notification of delivery (telegram with)] =PC = 

Accus^ de reception postal (telegramme avec) [Postal notification of de- 
livery (telegram with)] =PCP 

Faire suivre [To follow] =FS = 

Poste [Post] ; = S? ste== 

Poste recommande [Registered post] = PR 

Poste restante [Poste restante] =GP = 

Poste restante recommandee [Poste restante registered] =GPR = 

Poste-avion [Air mail] = PAV = 

Telegraphe restant [Telegraph restant] =TR = 

Expres [Express] . = Expres = 

Expres paye [Express paid] =XP 

Mains propres [Personal delivery] =MP=* 

Ouvert [Open] -Ouvert - 

Jour [Day (delivery)] "J? 1 ? 1 * 8 

Nuit [Night (delivery)] -Nuit- 

X adresses [X addresses] =TMx= 

Communiquer toutes les adresses [Communicate all addresses] =* CTA = 

X jours [X days] -Jx- 

Telegramme de presse [Press telegram] =Presse = 

Telegramme differe [Deferred telegram] 

Tel6gramme stoaphorique [Semaphore telegram] 

Lettre-tel6gramme du regime europeen [European letter telegram]. . . 

The French and English tables have here been combined. Er>. 



207 



sus: 30 exposant a (ou 30 a), trenti&me, 
trentaine, primo, secundo, B dans losange, 
I minute, I seconde, etc. 
[ 48 ] (2) Toutefois, si les expressions 30% 
30 b , etc,, 30 bis, 30 ter, etc., 30 I, 30 II, 
etc., 3O l , 3O 2 , etc., indiquant le numro 
d'habitation, figurent dans une adresse, 
1'agent taxateur spare le numero de son 
exposant ou des lettres ou chiffres qui 
Faccompagnent, par une barre de fraction. 
La mme regie est appliqu6e dans la 
transmission des num^ros d'habitation 
tels que 30 A, 30 B, etc. Les expressions 
envisagees seront, par consequent, trans- 
mises sous la forme ci-apres: 3O/A, 
30/B, etc., 30/bis, 3O/ter, etc., 30/1, 
30/2, etc., 30/1, 30/2, etc., 30/A, 30/6, 
etc. 

ARTICLE 13. Ordre de rangement des 
diverses parties d'un telegramme 

[ 49 ] Les diverses parties qu'un t^!6- 
gramme peut comporter doivent gtre 
libellees dans 1'ordre suivant: i les 
indications de service taxees; 2 Tadresse; 
3 le texte; 4 la signature. 

ARTICLE 14. Libeltt des indications de 
service taxees 

[ 60 ] i. Indications de service taxees et 
formules pour leur transmission. 1 



208 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



Lettre-telegramme du regime extra-europeen [Extra-European letter 

telegram] =NLT = 

ou, suivant la relation [or in certain relations] ^. . . . . =DLT~ 

Tel6gramme a remettre sur formulaire de luxe [Telegram to be delivered 

on a de luxe form] =LX 

Telegramme de felicitations [Greetings telegram] =XLT= 

Telegramme a transmettre obligatoirement par telephone [Telegram of 

which delivery by telephone is compulsory] =TF = 

Telegramme reexpedi6 sur Tordre du destinataire [Telegram redirected 

at the request of the addressee] =Rexpedie de. . = 

Telegramme meteorologique a tarif reduit [Meteorological telegram at 
reduced rate] =OBS = 

ST auquel la reponse est donnee par lettre ordinaire [ST to which the 

reply is to be given by ordinary letter] v . = Lettre =* 

ST auquel la reponse est donnee par lettre recommandee [ST to which 

the reply is to be given by registered letter] . . . . % = Lettre RCM = 

Retransmission d'un radiotelegramme par les stations de bord [Re- 
transmission of a radiotelegram by a ship or aircraft station] =RM 



[ 81 ] 2. (i) Any paid service indication 
allowed by these Regulations which the 
sender wishes to use, must be written on 
the form immediately before the address. 

[ 52 ] (2) In a multiple telegram, the 
sender must write these indications before 
each address to which they relate. In an 
urgent multiple telegram, a partially 
urgent multiple telegram, a multiple press 
telegram, a multiple deferred telegram, 
or a collated multiple telegram, however, 
it is sufficient for the corresponding indi- 
cations to be written once only, before the 
first address. 



[ 53 ] 3- Paid service indications may be 
written in any form, but they are charged 
and transmitted only in the abbreviated 
form provided in the Regulations. The 
counter officer strikes out the indication 
written by the sender in any other than 
the regulation abbreviated form and 
substitutes for it the corresponding abbre- 
viation, placed between two double 
hyphens (example: =TC=). 

ARTICLE 15. Wording of the address 

[ fi4 ] i. The address must contain all 
the particulars necessary to ensure 
delivery of the telegram to the addressee, 
without enquiry or requests for informa- 
tion. 

[ 56 J 2. (i) Every address, to be ad- 
missible, must contain at least two words, 
the first designating the addressee and the 
second the name of the telegraph office 
of the locality of destination. 
[ 56 ] (2) When this locality is not served 
by the international communication chan- 



[ 61 ] 2. (i) Toute indication de service 
taxee, prlvue par le Rglement, dont 
I'expSditeur desire faire usage, doit tre 
6crite sur la minute, imm6diatement avant 
1'adresse. 

[ 62 ] (2) En ce qui concerne les t616~ 
grammes multiples, I'exp6diteur doit 
inscrire ces indications avant F adresse de 
chaque destinataire qu'elles peuvent 
concerner. Toutefois, s'il s'agit d'un 
t616gramme multiple urgent, d'un te!6- 
gramme multiple partiellement urgent, 
d'un t616gramme multiple de presse, d'un 
t616gramme multiple diff&4 ou d'un 
tel6gramme multiple avec collationne- 
rnent, il suffit que les indications cor- 
respondantes soient inscrites une seule fois 
et avant la premiere adresse. 
[ B3 ] 3- Les indications de service taxees 
peuvent tre 6crites dans une forme quel- 
conque, mais elles ne sont taxes et 
transmises que dans la forme abreg6e 
pr^vue par le R&glement. L'agent taxa- 
teur biffe 1'indication inscrite par I'exp6- 
diteur dans une autre forme que la forme 
r6glementaire abrge et la remplace par 
1'abreviation correspondante, mise entre 
deux doubles traits (exemple: =TC~). 

ARTICLE 15. LibelU de I 1 adresse 

[ 54 ] I. L'adressedoitcomprendretoutes 
les indications ncessaires pour assurer la 
remise du t616gramme au destinataire, 
sans recherches ni demandes de ren- 
seignements. 

[ 5S ] 2. (i) Toute adresse doit, pour 
tre admise, contenir au moins deux 
mots, le premier dsignant le destinataire, 
le second indiquant le nom du bureau 
t616graphique de la Iocalit6 de destination, 
[ 56 ] (2) Lorsque cette locality n'est pas 
desservie par les voies de communication 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



209 



nels, the provisions of Article 62 are 
observed. 

[ 87 ] (3) The address must, in the case of 
large towns, include the name of the street 
and the number, or, in the absence of 
these particulars, it must state the pro- 
fession of the addressee or give any other 
useful information. 

[ 58 ] (4) Even for small localities, the 
designation of the addressee must be 
supplemented, so far as possible, by 
further particulars for the guidance of the 
office of delivery. 

[ 59 ] 3- In telegrams for China, groups 
of four figures may be used to designate 
the name and abode of the addressee. 

[ 80 ] 4. Particulars in the address must 
be written in the language of the country 
of destination or in French; surnames, 
Christian names, names of firms and 
particulars of residence are, however, 
accepted as the sender writes them. 
[ 61 ] 5- (*) The address may be com- 
posed of the name of the addressee fol- 
lowed by the word "telephone" and his 
telephone number. The address is then 
worded as in the following example " Pauli 
telephone Passy 5074 Paris", and the 
delivery of the telegram to the addressee 
by telephone is optional. 
[ 6Z ] (2) If the sender desires that the 
delivery of his telegram to the addressee 
by telephone should be obligatory, he 
writes before the address the paid service 
indication =TF= followed by the tele- 
phone number of the addressee; for 
example: =TF Passy 5074= Pauli Paris. 
The office of destination is then bound to 
forward the telegram by telephone, unless 
this is contrary to the regulations of the 
Administration to which that office is 
subject. 

[ 63 ] 6. The address may also be com- 
posed of the addressee's name and his 
post office box number. The address is 
then worded as follows: " Pauli boite 
postale 275 Paris". 

M 7. When a telegram is addressed to 
a person at the address of another, the 
address must contain, immediately after 
the name of the actual addressee, the 
expression ' ' chez ' ' , ' *aux soins de " or other 
equivalent expression. 

[ 65 ] 8. The address of telegrams ad- 
dressed "poste restante" or " telegraph 
restant" must give the name of the 
addressee; the use of initials, figures, 



internationales, on applique les disposi- 
tions de 1'article 62. 

[ B7 ] (3) L'adresse doit, pour les grandes 
villes, faire mention de la rue et du 
num6ro ou, dfaut de ces indications, 
specifier la profession du destinataire ou 
donner tous autres renseignements utiles. 

[ 58 ] (4) M6me pour les petites localitds, 
la designation du destinataire doit 6tre, 
autant que possible, accompagn6e d'une 
indication comp!6mentaire capable de 
guider le bureau d'arriv6e. 
[ 59 ] 3. Pour les t616grammes a destina- 
tion de la Chine, 1'emploi de groupes de 
quatre chiffres est admis pour designer le 
nom et le domicile du destinataire. 
[ 60 ] 4. Les indications de 1'adresse 
doivent tre crites dans la langue du 
pays de destination ou en frangais; toute- 
fois, celles relatives aux nom, pr6noms, 
raison sociale et domicile sont accepters 
telles que I'exp6diteur les a libelle'es. 
[ 61 ] 5- (i) L'adresse peut toe forme 
par le nom du destinataire suivi du mot 
"t616phone" et de I'indicatif d'appel de 
son raccordement teiephonique. Dans ce 
cas, 1'adresse est Hbell6e comme il suit: 
"Pauli telephone Passy 5074 Paris", et la 
transmission teiephonique du t616gramme 
au destinataire est facultative. 
[* z ] (2) Si 1'expediteur desire que son 
teiegramme soit obligatoirement tele- 
phone au destinataire, il inscrit avant 
1'adresse Indication de service taxee 
= TF=, suivie de 1'indicatif d'appel du 
raccordement t616phonique du destina- 
taire; par exemple: =TF Passy 5074= 
Pauli Paris. Le bureau de destination 
est alors tenu de faire parvenir le t616- 
gramme par t616phone, i moins que des 
dispositions de l'administration dont 
d6pend ce bureau ne s'y opposent. 
[ 63 ] 6. L'adresse peut aussi ttre formee 
par le nom du destinataire et le num6ro 
de sa boite postale. Dans ce cas, 1'adresse 
est libellee comme il suit: "Pauli bofte 
postale 275 Paris". 

[ 64 ] 7. Lorsqu'un t16gramme est 
adress6 a une personne chez une autre, 
1'adresse doit comprendre, imm^diate- 
ment apres la designation du veritable 
destinataire, 1'une des mentions "chez 11 , 
"aux soins de" ou toute autre 6quiva- 
lente. 

[ 66 ] 8. L'adresse des telgrammes ad- 
resses "poste restante" ou "t61graphe 
restant" doit indiquer le nom du destina- 
taire; 1'emploi d'initiales, de chiffres, de 



210 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



Christian names only and fictitious names 
is not allowed in the address of such 
messages. 

[ 66 ] 9- The address may be written in 
an arbitrary or abbreviated form. The 
right to have telegrams so addressed 
delivered is, however, subject to special 
arrangement between the addressee and 
the telegraph office of destination, 

[ 67 ] 10. If, in the locality of destina- 
tion, the delivery of telegrams is effected 
by several offices worked by different 
Administrations or private enterprises, 
their offices communicate to any one of 
their number, on request, the information 
necessary for the delivery of a telegram 
received by that office with a registered 
address unknown to it but authorised by 
an Administration or private enterprise to 
which one of the other offices is subject. 

[ 68 ] ii. The name of the telegraph 
office of destination must be placed after 
the words in the address which designate 
the addressee and his residence, when 
mentioned; it must be written as it 
appears in the first column of the Interna- 
tional List of Telegraph Offices. This 
name may only be followed by the name 
of the territorial sub-division or by the 
name of the country or by both. If both 
are used, the name of the territorial sub- 
division must come first after the name of 
the office of destination. 
[ fld ] 12. (i) When the name of the 
locality given as the destination, or that 
of the land station chosen for the trans- 
mission of a radio telegram, does not 
appear in the relative International List, 
the sender must be required to write, 
after this name, either the name of the 
territorial sub-division, or the name of the 
country of destination, or both these 
names or other particulars which he 
considers adequate for the forwarding of 
his telegram. The same course is followed 
when there are several offices of the name 
given and the sender is not in the position 
to furnish definite information from which 
the official designation of the locality can 
be traced. 

[ 70 ] (2) In either case the telegram is 
accepted only at the risk of the sender. 

[ 71 ] 13- If the address is not in con- 
formity with the provisions of 2 (i), 
8 and 12 (i) of this Article, the telegram 
is refused. 



No. 320 



simples pr6noms, de noms supposes n'est 
pas admis pour ces correspondances. 

[ 66 ] 9. L'adresse peut 8tre 6crite sous 
une forme conventionnelle ou abregee. 
Toutefois, la facult6 pour un destinataire 
de se faire remettre un tel6gramme dont 
1' adresse est ainsi form6e est subordonn6e 
a un arrangement entre ce destinataire et 
le bureau te!6graphique d'arrivee. 
[ 87 ] 10. Lorsque, dans la Iocalit6 de 
destination, la distribution des te!6- 
grammes est assuree par plusieurs bu- 
reaux exploites par des administrations ou 
exploitations privees diff6rentes, ces bu- 
reaux communiquent a celui d'entre eux 
qui leur en fait la demande, les renseigne- 
ments n6cessaires pour remettre un 
t616gramme rec.u avec une adresse enre- 
gistr6e inconnue de ce bureau, mais auto- 
risee par une administration ou exploita- 
tion prive"e autre que celle dont il depend. 
[ 6 5] ii. Le nom du bureau t61gra- 
phique de destination doit Stre plac6 & 
la suite des indications de 1'adresse qui 
servent a designer le destinataire et, le 
cas 6ch6ant, son domicile; il doit tre 6crit 
tel qu'il figure dans la premiere colonne de 
la nomenclature officielle des bureaux. 
Ce nom ne peut tre suivi que du nom de 
la subdivision territoriale ou de celui du 
pays, ou bien de ces deux noms. Dans ce 
dernier cas, c'est le nom de la subdivision 
territoriale qui doit suivre immMiate- 
ment celui du bureau destinataire. 
[ 69 ] 12. (i) Lorsque le nom de la 
3ocalit6 donn& comme destination, ou 
celui de la station terrestre d6signee pour 
la transmission d'un radiot616gramme 
n'est pas mentionn6 dans la nomenclature 
officielle y relative, 1'expediteur doit 
obligatoirement 6crire, a la suite de ce 
nom, soit le nom de la subdivision terri- 
toriale, soit celui du pays de destination, 
soit ces deux indications ou toute autre 
indication qu'il juge suffisante pour 
Tacheminement de son t616gramme. II 
en est de mme lorsqu'il existe plusieurs 
bureaux du nom indiqu6 et que I'exp6di- 
teur n'est pas en mesure de donner des 
renseignements positifs permettant de 
definir la designation officielle de la localit. 
[ 70 ] (2) Dans 1'un comme dans 1'autre 
cas, le t616gramme n'est accepte qu'aux 
risques et plrils de Texp6diteur. 
[ 71 ] 13. Les t16grammes dont F adresse 
ne satisfait pas aux conditions pr6vues 
dans les 2 (i), 8 et 12 (i) du present 
article sont refuses. 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



211 



[ 72 ] 14. In all cases of insufficient ad- 
dress, the telegram is accepted only at the 
risk of the sender, if he insists on sending 
it; in any event the sender bears the 
consequences of an insufficient address. 



ARTICLE 16. Wording of the text 

[ 73 ] i. The text of telegrams must be 

written in accordance with the provisions 

of Articles 8, 9, 10, n and 12 of these 

Regulations. 

[ 7 *j 2. Telegrams which contain only 

an address are not admitted. 

ARTICLE 17. Wording 0f the signature; 
Legal verification 

[ 7S ] i. A signature is not compulsory; 
it may be written by the sender in any 
form. 

[ 76 ] 2. The sender has the right to in- 
clude in his telegram the verification of his 
signature, if this verification has been at- 
tested by a competent authority according 
to the laws of the country of origin. He 
may have the verification transmitted 
either as it is written or in the form: " sig- 
nature verified by . . . ." The verifica- 
tion is placed after the signature of the 
telegram. 

[ 77 ] 3- The office of origin satisfies it- 
self that the verification is genuine. It 
must refuse to accept or transmit the 
verification if it has not been attested in 
accordance with the laws of the country 
of origin. 

CHAPTER VI 

COUNTING OF WORDS 

ARTICLE 18. Rules applicable to all parts 
of a telegram 

I 78 ] i. (i) Everything that the sender 
writes on his copy for transmission is 
charged and therefore included in the 
number of words, with the exception of 
the route indication. 

[ 79 ] (2) Nevertheless, dashes used only 
to separate on the sender's copy the dif- 
ferent words or groups of the telegram are 
neither charged nor transmitted, and 
signs of punctuation, apostrophes and 
hyphens are transmitted and, conse- 
quently, charged only at the special re- 
quest of the sender. 

[ 80 ] (3) When signs of punctuation, in- 
stead of being used separately, are re- 



[ 72 ] 14. Dans tous les cas d'insuffi- 
sance de 1'adresse, les t61grammes ne 
sont accepted qu'aux risques et perils de 
1'expediteur, si celui-ci persiste a en 
demander 1'expedition ; de toute maniere, 
Fexpediteur supporte les consequences de 
I'insuffisance de 1'adresse. 

ARTICLE 16. LibelU du texte 

[ 73 ] i. Le texte des teiegrammes doit 

6tre libelie conformment aux dispositions 

des articles 8, 9, 10, 11 et 12 du present 

R&glement. 

[ 74 ] 2. Les teiegrammes ne comportant 

que Tadresse ne sont pas admis. 

ARTICLE 17. Libelie de la signature; 
legalisation 

[ 75 ] i. La signature n'est pas obliga- 
toire; elle peut tre libellee par 1'expedi- 
teur sous une forme quelconque. 
[ 76 ] 2. L'expediteur a la faculte de 
comprendre dans son t616gramrne la 
legalisation de sa signature, si cette 
legalisation a 6te faite par une autorite 
competente, selon les lois du pays d'ori- 
gine. II peut faire transmettre cette 
legalisation, soit textuellement soit sous 
la formule:" signature Igalis6e par, . . ." 
La legalisation prend place apres la 
signature du teiegramme. 
[ 77 ] 3- Le bureau de d6p6t verifie 
1'authenticite de la legalisation. II doit 
refuser Facceptation et la transmission de 
la legalisation si elle n'a pas ete faite selon- 
les lois du pays d'origine. 



CHAPITRE VI 

COMPTE DES MOTS 

ARTICLE 18. Dispositions applicables a 
toutes les parties d'un teUgramme 

[ 78 ] i. (i) Tout ce que I'exp6diteur 
ecrit sur sa minute pour tre transmis est 
taxe et, en consequence, compris dans le 
nombre de mots, excepte Tindication de la 
voie. 

[ 7fl ] (2) Toutefois, les tirets qui ne 
servent qu'a separer sur la minute les 
differents mots ou groupes d'un ^ tele- 
gramme ne sont ni taxes ni transmis, et 
les signes de ponctiiation, apostrophes et 
traits d 'union ne sont transmis et, par 
suite, taxes que sur la demande formelle 
de Texpediteur. 

[*] (3) Lorsque des signes de ponctua- 
tion, au lieu d'etre employes isoiement, 



212 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



peated one after the other they are 
charged like groups of figures (7 and 8). 

[ 81 ] 2. (i) The nature of the telegram, 
the name of the office of origin, the num- 
ber of the telegram, the date and time of 
handing in, the service instructions (for 
example: "Etat", "Percevoir"), route 
indications and the words, numbers or 
signs which form the preamble are not 
charged. Such of these particulars as 
reach the office of delivery and in all cases 
the date and time of handing in, of which 
the transmission is compulsory, appear on 
the copy delivered to the addressee. 
[ 82 ] (2) The sender may include any or 
all of the said particulars in the text of his 
telegram. They are then comprised in 
the number of chargeable words. 

t 83 ] 3- The verification of the signa- 
ture, as transmitted, is comprised in the 
number of chargeable words. 
t 84 ] 4. At the time of acceptance of a 
telegram of more than fifty words, the 
counter officer marks with a cross 1 the 
last word of each section of fifty actual 
words (irrespective of the rules of charg- 
ing), the paid service indications and the 
words in the address being included in the 
first section. 

[ 8S ] 5- The following are counted as one 
word in all languages: 
I 86 ] (a) each paid service indication in 
the form in which it appears in Article 14, 
i, in the second column; 
[ 87 ] (b) in money order telegrams, the 
name of the post office of issue, the name 
of the post office of payment and the name 
of the locality in which the payee lives. 
The counter officer must observe Article 
19, 2 in so far as it is applicable to money 
order telegrams; 

[s 8 ] (c) every isolated character, letter or 
figure and every sign of punctuation, 
apostrophe, hyphen or fraction bar, 
transmitted at the request of the sender 

(i); 

[ 89 j (d) an underline, irrespective of its 

length; 

M ( e ) brackets (the two signs forming). 

[ 91 ] 6. Words separated or joined by an 
apostrophe, a hyphen or fraction bar are 
counted as separate words. 



sont rp6ts & la suite les uns des autres, 
ils sont taxes comme des groupes de 
chiffres(7et8). 

[ 81 ] 2. (i) La nature du telegramme, 
le nom du bureau d'origine, le num6ro du 
telegramme, la date et 1'heure de depdt, 
les mentions de service (par exemple: 
1 ' Etat " , " Percevoir ") , les indications de 
voie et les mots, nombres ou signes qui 
constituent le pr6ambule, ne sont pas 
tax6s. Ceux de ces renseignements qui 
parviennent au bureau d'arrivee et dans 
tous les cas la date et 1'heure de d6p6t, 
dont la transmission est obligatoire, Jfrgu- 
rent sur la copie remise au destinataire. 
[ 82 ] (2) L'expediteur peut insurer ces 
mSmes indications, en tout ou en parties, 
dans le texte de son telegramme. Elles 
entrent alors dans le compte des mots 
taxs. 

[ 83 ] 3- La legalisation de la signature, 
telle qu'elle est transmise, entre dans le 
compte des mots taxes. 
[ 84 ] 4. Lors de 1'acceptation d'un te!6- 
gramme de plus de cinquante mots, 
1'agent taxateur marque d'une croix 1 le 
dernier mot de chaque tranche de cin- 
quante mots reels (independamment des 
regies de taxation), les indications de 
service tax6es et les mots de 1'adresse 
6tant compris dans la premiere tranche. 
f 85 ] 5- Sont comptes pour un mot dans 
tous les langages: 

[ 86 ] (a) chacune des indications de ser- 
vice tax6es telles qu'elles figurent & 1'arti- 
cle 14, i, dans la seconde colonne; 
[ 87 ] (b) dans les telegrammes-mandats, 
le nom du bureau postal d'&rnission, le 
nom du bureau postal payeur et celui de la 
locality ou reside le b6neficiaire. En tant 
qu'elle est applicable aux t616grammes- 
mandats, 1'agent taxateur doit s'en tenir 
a la disposition de F article 19, 2; 
[ 88 ] (c) tout caractere, toute lettre, tout 
chiff re iso!6, ainsi que tout signe de ponc- 
tuation, apostrophe, trait d'union ou 
barre de fraction, transmis & la demande 
de I'expSditeur (i); 
[ 89 ] (d) le soulign6, sans 6gard a sa 
longueur; 

[] (e) la parenthese (les deux signes 
servant a la former) . 

[ 91 ] 6. Les mots s6par6s ou r6unis par 
une apostrophe, par un trait d'union ou 
par une barre de fraction, sont respective- 
ment comptes comme des mots iso!6s. 



1 Transmitted as "double hyphen" [Art. 37, 8 (i)]. 
i A transmettre comme "double trait" [art. 37, 8 (i)]. 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



213 



I 92 ] 7- Groups of figures, groups of 
letters, and ordinal numbers composed of 
figures and letters are counted at the rate 
of five characters to a word, plus one word 
for any excess. 

[ 93 ] 8. Full stops, commas, colons, 
dashes and fraction bars are counted as a 
figure or a letter in the group in which they 
appear. The same rule applies to letters 
or figures added to a house number in an 
address, even when the address is in the 
text or signature of a telegram. 



M 9- (i) Combinations or alterations 
of words contrary to the usage of the lan- 
guage to which they belong are not al- 
lowed. 

[ 85 ] (2) Nevertheless, family names be- 
longing to one person, the full names of 
places, squares, boulevards, streets and 
other public ways, names of ships, desig- 
nations of aircraft, compound words 
which can be justified if necessary, whole 
numbers, fractions, decimal or fractional 
numbers written in words, may be grouped 
as a single word, which is counted in ac- 
cordance with the provisions of Article 
20, i. 

[ 98 ] (3) Numbers written in words in 
which the figures are represented sepa- 
rately or in groups, for example: thirty- 
thirty instead of threethousandandthirty 
or sixfoursix instead of sixhundredand- 
fortysix, are counted in the same way. 
[ Q7 ] 10. The counting of the office or 
mobile station of origin is decisive, both 
for transmission and for the international 
accounts. 

ARTICLE 19. Counting of words in the 
address 

[ 98 ] i. The following are counted as 
one word in the address: 
["] (a) the name of the telegraph office, 
land station or mobile station of destina- 
tion written as it appears in the first 
column of the International Lists and 
completed by all the particulars given in 
that column; 

[ 10 ] (b) the name of the telegraph office 
of destination or that of the land station 
completed either by the name of the coun- 
try or smaller division of territory, or both, 
or by any other particulars, when the 
name of the office has not been pub- 



[ 92 ] 7. Les groupes de chiffres, les 
groupes de lettres, les nombres ordinaux 
composes de chiffres et de lettres sont 
comptes comme autant de mots qu'ils 
contiennent de fois cinq caracteres, plus 
un mot pour I'exc6dent. 
t 93 ] 8. Sont compts pour un chiffre ou 
une lettre, dans le groupe oti ils figurent, 
les points, les virgules, les deux points, les 
tirets et les barres de fraction. II en est 
de mime des lettres ou des chiffres ajout6s 
un numro d'habitation dans une 
adresse, me*me quand il s'agit d'une 
adresse figurant dans le texte ou dans la 
signature d'un telgramme. 
[ 94 ] 9* (i) Les reunions ou alterations 
de mots contraire & 1'usage de la langue 
laquelle ils appartiennent ne sont pas 
admises. 

[ 95 ] (2) Toutefois, les noms patrony- 
miques appartenant & une m6me personne, 
les designations completes de lieux, places, 
boulevards, rues et autres voies publiques, 
les noms de navires, les designations 
d'aeronefs, les mots compos6s dont, le cas 
echeant, Tadmission peut 6tre justifiee, les 
nombres en tiers, les fractions, les nombres 
d6cimaux ou fractionnaires ecrits en 
toutes lettres, peuvent 6tre groupes en un 
seul mot, qui est compte conformement 
aux prescriptions de 1'article 20, i. 
I 96 ] (3) II en est de m&ne pour les nom- 
bres Merits en toutes lettres, dans lesquels 
les chiffres sont indiqu6s iso!6ment ou par 
groupes, par exemple: trentetrente au lieu 
de troismilletrente ou sixquatresix au lieu 
de sixcentquarantesix. 
[ 97 ] 10. Le compte des mots du bureau 
ou de la station mobile d'origine est de- 
cisif , tant pour la transmission que pour 
les comptes internationaux. 

ARTICLE 19. Compte des mots de Vadresse 

[ 98 ] i. Sont compt6s pour un mot dans 
Tadresse: 

["] (a) le npm du bureau t&egraphique 
ou de la station terrestre, ou de la station 
mobile de destination 6crit tel qu'il figure 
dans la premiere colonne des nomencla- 
tures officielles et complete par toutes les 
indications qui figurent dans cette co- 
lonne; 

t 100 ] (&) le nom du bureau telegraphique 
de destination ou celui de la station ter- 
restre, complete soit par la designation du 
pays ou de la subdivision territoriale, ou 
par Tune et Tautre, soit par toute autre 
indication, lorsque ce nom n'est pas en- 



214 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



lished in the International Lists (Art. 15, 
12); 

[\ l ] % ( c ) the names of countries or smaller 
divisions of territory written as shown in 
the International Lists, including any al- 
ternative forms given in the prefaces to the 
Lists. 

[ l02 ] 2. If it has not already been done, 
the counter officer joins up the different 
parts of each of the expressions which are 
specified under (a), (b) and (c) of I re- 
spectively and are counted as one word. 

[ 103 ] 3- The names of streets and 
houses, composed of figures and letters, 
are counted at the rate of five figures or 
letters to a word, plus one word for any 
excess. 

[ 104 ] 4. A fraction bar is not counted 
as a character in a group of figures or of 
figures or letters forming a house number, 
even when the sender has written it upon 
his copy. [Art. 12, 6 (2).] 

[ 105 ] 5 . Every other word in the address 
is counted at the rate of fifteen characters 
to the word plus one word for any excess, 
even in the case of a telegram of which the 
text is written in secret language or a mix- 
ture of plain and secret language. 

ARTICLE 20. Counting of words in the text 

[ 106 ] i. (i) In telegrams of which the 
text is entirely in plain language, each 
single word and each authorised com- 
pound word is charged at the rate of fif- 
teen characters to the word, plus one word 
for the excess, if any. Commercial marks 
are counted at the rate of five characters 
to the word plus one word for the excess, 
if any. 



[ m ] (2) In meteorological telegrams, the 
letter x is counted as a figure in the group 
of figures in which it appears. 



me thod of counting pre- 
scribed in sub-paragraph (i) applies to 
bank telegrams and telegrams of a similar 
kind containing a check word or check 
number as the first word of a plain lan- 
guage text. The length of the check word 
or check number may not, however, ex- 
ceed five letters or five figures. 
[ wfl ] 2. Nevertheless, the names of 



core pubH6 dans les nomenclatures offt- 
cielles (art. 15, 12) ; 
[ 101 ] (c) respectivement, les noms de sub- 
divisions territoriales ou de pays s'ils sont 
ecrits en conformit6 des indications des- 
dites nomenclatures, ou de leurs autres 
denominations telles qu'elles sont don- 
nees dans la pr6face de ces nomenclatures. 
[ 10Z ] 2, Lorsque les differentes parties 
de chacune des expressions visees respec- 
tivement sous (a), (&) et (c) du i et 
compt6es pour un mot ne sont pas 
groupees, 1'agent taxateur reunit ces dif- 
f6rentes parties en un seul mot. 
[ 103 ] 3. Les designations de rues et 
d'habitations, composees de chiffres et de 
lettres, sont comptees comme autant de 
mots qu'elles contiennent de fois cinq 
chiffres ou lettres, plus un mot pour 
1'excedent. 

[i 4 ] 4, La barre de fraction n'est pas 
comptee pour un caractere dans le groupe 
de chiffres ou de chiffres et de lettres con- 
stituant un numero d'habitation, alors 
m&ne que 1'expediteur 1'aurait ecrite sur 
sa minute [art, 12, 6 (2)]. 
[ 105 ] 5- Tout autre mot de 1'adresse est 
compte pour autant de mots qu'il contient 
de fois quinze caracteres, plus un mot pour 
1'excedent, s'il y a lieu, mSme lorsqu'il 
s'agit d'un tel6gramme dont le texte est 
redige* en langage secret ou mixte clair- 
secret. 

ARTICLE 20. Compte des mots du texte 

[ l06 ] i. (i) Dans les telegrammes dont 
le texte est redigd exclusivement en lan- 
gage clair, chaque mot simple et chaque 
groupement de mots autorise* sont comptes 
respectivement pour autant de mots 
qu'ils contiennent de fois quinze carac- 
teres, plus un mot pour 1'excldent, s'il y a 
lieu. Les marques de commerce sont 
comptes pour autant de mots qu'elles 
contiennent de fois cinq caracteres, plus 
un mot pour 1'excedent 
[ l07 ] (2) Dans les telegrammes meteoro- 
logiques, la lettre x est comptee pour un 
chiffre dans le groupe de chiffres oft elle 
figure. 

[ 108 ] (3) Sont traites comme il est present 
& 1'alinea (i), les telegrammes de banque 
et ceux analogues dont le texte, redige en 
langage clair, comprend ui* mot ou un 
nombre de contr61e place* en t6te du texte. 
Toutefois, la longueur du mot ou du 
nombre de contrdle ne peut excdder cinq 
lettres ou cinq chiffres. 
[ 109 ] 2. Toutefois, les noms de bureaux 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



215 



telegraph offices and of land and mobile 
stations as defined in Article 19, I, 
names of towns, countries and smaller 
divisions of territory, may be grouped in a 
single word, which is counted in accord- 
ance with the provisions of I. 
[ no ] 3- In code language as defined in 
Article 10, the maximum length of a word 
is fixed at five letters, 
[in] (2) In a mixed telegram of which the 
text contains both plain language words 
and code words, the plain language words 
in the text are counted at the rate of five 
letters to the word plus one word for any 
excess. 

l nz ] (3) If tne mixed telegram also con- 
tains cypher language in the text, the 
cypher words are counted at the rate of 
five characters to the word plus one word 
for any excess. 



[ m ] (4) Words not fulfilling the condi- 
tions of either plain language or code lan- 
guage are counted at the rate of five let- 
ters to the word plus one word for any 
excess. 

[ 114 ] 4. If the mixed telegram contains 
only words in plain language and words in 
cypher language, the telegram is charged 
at the full rate and the words in plain 
language are counted in accordance with 
the provisions of I of this article, and 
those in cypher language in accordance 
with the provisions of Article 1 8, 7 and 8. 

ARTICLE 21. Counting of words in the 
signature 

[ U5 J i. Each word in the signature is 
counted at the rate of fifteen characters to 
the word, plus one word for any excess, 
even in the case of a telegram of which the 
text is in secret language or a mixture of 
plain and secret language. 
[ l16 ] 2. Nevertheless, the names of 
telegraph offices and land and mobile sta- 
tions as defined in Article 19, I, names of 
towns, countries and smaller divisions of 
territory may be grouped in a single word, 
which is counted in accordance with the 
provisions of Article 20, I. 

ARTICLE 22. Indication of the number of 
words in the preamble 

[ 117 ] i. In the case of difference be- 
tween the number of words reckoned ac- 



t!6graphiques et de stations terrestres et 
mobiles tels qu'ils sont d6finis a 1'article 
19, i, les noms de yilles, de pays et de 
subdivisions territoriales, peuvent tre 
groupes en un seul mot, qui est compte 
conform&nent aux prescriptions du I. 
[ uo ] 3- (i) Dans le langage convenu tel 
qu'il est d6fini & 1'article 10, le maximum de 
longueur d'un mot est fix6 a cinq lettres. 
[ m ] (2) Les mots en langage clair insures 
dans le texte d'un te!6gramme mixte, 
compost de mots en langage clair et de 
mots en langage convenu, sont competes 
pour un mot jusqu'a concurrence de cinq 
lettres, Fexc6dent etant compt6 pour un 
mot par s6rie indivisible de cinq lettres. 
[ m ] (3) Si le tel6gramme mixte com- 
prend, en outre, un texte en langage chif- 
fre, les passages en langage chiffr6 sont 
comptes pour un mot jusqu'li concurrence 
de cinq caracteres, 1'excedent 6tant compt6 
pour un mot par serie indivisible de cinq 
caracteres. 

[ 113 J (4) Les mots qui ne remplissent ni 
les conditions du langage clair ni les con- 
ditions du langage convenu sont comptes 
pour autant de mots qu'ils contiennent de 
fois cinq lettres, plus un mot pour 1'ex- 
c6dent. 

[ n4 ] 4. Si le tel&gramme mixte ne com- 
prend que des passages en langage clair 
et des passages en langage chiffre, le 
tlegramme est tax6 & plein tarif et les 
passages en langage clair sont compt6s 
suivant les prescriptions du I du present 
article, et ceux en langage chiffre suivant 
les prescriptions de 1'article 18, 7 et 8. 

ARTICLE 21. Compte des mots de la sig- 
nature 

[ ll5 ] i. Chaque mot de la signature est 
compt6 pour autant de mots qu'il contient 
de fois quinze caracteres, plus un mot 
pour l'excdent, mme lorsqu'il s'agit 
d'un t616gramme dont le texte est rdig6 
en langage secret ou mixte clair-secret. 
[ 116 ] 2. Toutefois, les noms de bureaux 
t616graphiques et de stations terrestres et 
mobiles tels qu'ils sont d6fims a 1'article 
19, i, les noms de villes, de pays et de 
subdivisions territoriales peuvent Itre 
groupds en un seul mot, qui est compt6 
conform6ment aux prescriptions de 1'arti- 
cle 20, I. 

ARTICLE 22. Indication du nombre des 

mots dans le preambule 
[ 117 ] i. En cas de difference entre le 
nombre des mots 6tabli suivant les regies 



216 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



cording to the rules of counting and the 
number of actual words (including iso- 
lated letters and figures, groups of letters 
and of figures and punctuation and other 
signs), a fraction is used, except in service 
telegrams and unpaid service advices, the 
numerator indicating the number of words 
reckoned according to the rules of count- 
ing and the denominator the number of 
actual words. 
[ 118 ] 2. This rule applies specially: 

ist. to the case of a telegram in plain 
language containing words of more than 
15 characters; 

2nd. to the case of a telegram, of which 
the^ text is in code language, containing 
plain language words of more than 5 
letters; 

3rd. to groups of figures or letters com- 
prising more than 5 characters. 

ARTICLE 23. Irregularities in the counting 
of words. Correction of errors 

[ 119 ] i. As an exception to the general 
rule laid down in Article 18, 10, when a 
telegram in plain language or the plain 
language part ^of a mixed telegram con- 
tains combinations or alterations of words 
of a language other than the language or 
languages of the country of origin, con- 
trary to the usage of that language, Ad- 
ministrations have the right to direct that 
the delivery office shall collect from the 
addressee the amount undercharged. 
When this right is exercised, the delivery 
office may decline to deliver the telegram 
if the addressee refuses to pay. 
[ 12 ] 2. Administrations which make 
use of the foregoing provision notify this 
to the other Administrations through the 
medium of the Bureau of the Union. 
[ m ] 3. In the case of refusal to pay, a 
service advice worded as follows is sent 
to the office of origin "A Wien Paris 1 8 
1710 (date and time of handing in) =456 
eighteenth Lemoine (number of tele- 
gram, date in words, name of addressee) 
. ^. . (quote the words irregularly com- 
bined or altered) . . . words; (state how 
many words should have been charged)." 
If the sender, on being duly informed of 
the reason for non-delivery, agrees to pay 
the deficiency, a service advice worded as 
follows is sent to the office of destination. 
"A Paris Wien 18 1940 (date and time of 
handing in) =456 eighteenth Lemoine 
(number of telegram, date in words, name 
of addressee) deficiency collected." On 



de la taxation et celui des mots reels (y 
compris les lettres et chiffres isoles, les 
groupes de lettres et de chiffres et les 
signes de ponctuation et autres), on em- 
ploie, sauf en ce qui concerne les tele- 
grammes de service et les avis de service 
non tax6s, une fraction dont le numera- 
teur indique le nombre des mots tabli 
suivant les regies de la taxation et le 
dnominateur celui des mots r6els. 
[ 118 ] 2. Cette disposition s' applique 
notamment: 

i au cas ou un t616gramme en langage 
clair contient des mots de plus de 15 
caracteres; 

2 au cas ou un te!6gramme dont le 
texte est en langage convenu comprend 
des mots clairs de plus de 5 lettres ; 

3 aux groupes de chiffres ou de lettres 
comportant plus de 5 caracteres. 

ARTICLE 23. Irregularites dans le compte 
des mots. Redressement eventuel derreurs 

[ U9 ] i . Par exception & la r&gle g6n6rale 
stipulee & 1'article 18, 10, lorsqu'un tel- 
gramme en langage clair ou la partie en 
langage clair d'un t.16gramme mixte con- 
tient des reunions ou des alterations de 
mots d'une langue autre que celle ou celles 
du pays d'origine, contraires & Tusage de 
cette langue, les administrations ont le 
droit de prescrire que lejbureau d'arriv^e 
recouvre sur le destinataire le montant de 
la taxe pergue en moins. Lorsqu'il est fait 
usage de ce droit T le bureau d 'arrived peut 
ne pas remettre le t616gramme si le destina- 
taire refuse de payer. 
[ m ] 2. Les administrations qui font 
usage de la disposition ci-dessus en in- 
forment les autres administrations par 
rinterm&Iiaire du Bureau de 1'Union. 
[ m ] 3 Dans le cas de refus de paye- 
ment, un avis de service ainsi concu est 
adresse au bureau de depart "A Wien 
Paris 18 1710 (date et heure de dp6t) 
^456 dixhuit Lemoine (numro du tele- 
gramme, ^date en toutes lettres, nom du 
destinataire^ . . . (reproduire les mots 
reunis abusivement ou alteres) . . . ; 
mots (indiquer pour combien de mots on 
aurait dti taxer)"^ Si 1'expMiteur, du- 
ment avis6 du motif de non remise, con- 
sent^ payer le complement, un avis de 
service ainsi conc,u est adress6 au bureau 
destinataire: "A Paris Wien 18 1940 (date 
et heure de d6p6t) =456 dixhuit Lemoine 
(numero du t616gramme, date en toutes 
lettres, nom du destinataire) complement 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



217 



receipt of this service advice, the delivery 
office delivers the telegram, if it has been 
withheld. 

[122] ^ i n t ne application of this article, 
and also Article 18, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 10, 
Article 19, 2 and Article 20, a ship is 
regarded as forming part^of the territory 
of the Government to which it is subject. 

[ m ] 5- When the Administration of 
origin ascertains that an undercharge has 
been made for a telegram, it may collect 
the deficiency from the sender, and it acts 
similarly when the irregularity is brought 
to its notice by an Administration of 
transit or the Administration of delivery. 
In the latter case, if the charges can be 
collected, their shares of the amount are 
due to the different Administrations con- 
cerned. 

[124] 6. A transit or delivery office may 
not suspend the transmission or delivery 
of a telegram except in the case provided 
for in I. 

[ m ] 7- When the office of destination 
observes that a deferred telegram, ex- 
pressed in a language other than one of 
those of the country of origiri, does not 
comply with the conditions laid down in 
2 of Article 75, or that a deferred tele- 
gram does not comply with the conditions 
laid down in 4, 5 (i) and (2) of Article 
75, it may collect from the addressee a 
supplementary charge equal to the differ- 
ence between the cost of the telegram at 
full and at deferred rate. 
[ ia6 ] 8. The same provisions are ap- 
plicable to letter telegrams and greetings 
telegrams. 

[ l27 ] 9. If the addressee refuses to pay 
this charge, the provisions of i and 3 
are applied. 

ARTICLE 24. Examples of counting of 

words 

[izs] The following examples determine 
the interpretation of the rules to be ob- 
served for counting words: 
[Examples omitted.] 

CHAPTER VII 

TARIFFS AND CHARGING 

ARTICLE 25. European and extra-Euro- 
pean systems 

[ 129 ] i. As regards the application of 
charges and certain service rules, tele- 
grams are subject either to the Euro- 



penpu." Des la reception de cet avis de 
service, le bureau d'arrivee remet le tel- 
gramme, si celui-ci a te retenu. 
[ m ] 4. Pour 1'application du present 
article ainsi que de 1'article 18, 5, 6, 7, 8 
et 10, de 1'article 19, 2 et de 1'article 20, 
un navire est consider^ comme faisant 
partie du territoire du gouvernement 
duquel il releve. 

t 123 ] 5* Lorsque radministration d'ori- 
gine constate qu'une taxe insuffisante a 
et6 pergue pour un telegramme, elle peut 
recouvrer le complement sur 1'expediteur, 
et elle opere de mrne lorsque les irrgu- 
larits lui sont signalees par une adminis- 
tration de transit ou par celle d'arrivee. 
Dans ce dernier cas, et si la perception des 
taxes peut avoir lieu, les quotes-parts de 
taxes sont dues aux differentes adminis- 
trations interessees. 

[124] 6 Aucun bureau de transit ou de 
destination ne peut surseoir a rachemine- 
ment ou a la remise du te!6gramme, sauf 
dans le cas prevu au I . 
[ l * 5 ] 7- Lorsque le bureau d'arrivee 
constate qu'un te!6gramme differ^, libell 
dans une langue autre que celle ou celles 
du pays d'origine, ne remplit pas les condi- 
tions fixees au 2 de 1'article 75, ou qu'un 
telegramme differ^ ne remplit pas les 
conditions fixees aux 4, 5 (i) et (2) de 
1'article 75, il peut percevoir sur le destina- 
taire un complement de taxe 6gal a la dif- 
ference entre le prix d'un telegramme a 
plein tarif et celui d'un telegramme diff 6r6. 

[126] g. Les mmes dispositions sont 
applicables aux lettres-telegrammes et aux 
tilegrammes de felicitations. 
[ m ] 9. Si le destinataire refuse de 
payer les taxes, il est fait application des 
dispositions des i et 3. 

ARTICLE 24. Exemples de compte des mots 

["8] Les exemples suivants d6terminent 
I'interpr6tation des regies a suivre pour 
compter les mots : 
[Exemples omis.] 

CHAPITRE VII 

TARIFS ET TAXATION 

ARTICLE 25. Regime europSen et regime 
extra-ewropeen 

[w>] i. Les tel 6gramm.es sont, en ce qui 
concerne 1'application des taxes et de 
certaines regies de service, sounds, soit au 



218 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



pean system or to the extra-European 
system. 

[ 13 ] 2. The European system includes 
all the countries of Europe, with Algeria 
and those territories outside Europe 
which are declared by the respective 
Administrations to belong to the Euro- 
pean system. 

t 131 ] 3- The extra-European system in- 
cludes all countries other than those indi- 
cated in the previous paragraph. 
[ 132 1 4. A telegram is subject to the 
rules of the European system when it 
passes exclusively over the communica- 
tions of countries belonging to that 
system. 

[ l33 ] 5. Governments which have, out- 
side Europe, channels of communication 
in respect of which they have acceded to 
the Convention, declare whether they 
mean to apply to them the European or 
the extra-European system. This decla- 
ration is implied in the relative entry, in 
the tables of rates, or is notified subse- 
quently through the medium of the 
Bureau of the Union. 

ARTICLE 26. Composition of the tariff 

[ 134 ] i. The tariff for the telegraphic 
or radioelectric transmission of interna- 
tional correspondence is made up: 
[ 13S ] (a) of the terminal rates of the 
Administrations of origin and destination ; 
[ l38 ] (b) of the transit rates of inter- 
mediate Administrations in cases where 
the territory, installations or channels of 
communication of those Administrations 
are used for the transmission of corre- 
spondence; 

[ 13T ] (c) where the case arises, of the 
transit rate of each of the two stations 
performing a radioelectric transmission or 
of cables used for submarine transmission. 

[las] ^ 2. The rates resulting from the 
application of the provisions of i to 
correspondence exchanged between the 
offices of any two countries of the Union 
must be uniform by the same route and 
in the two directions. 
[ 139 ] 3. The tariff is established by 
word pure and simple. Nevertheless: 
[wo] ^ (0) f or telegrams in code language 
a minimum charge as for five words is 
compulsorily collected ; 
[ 141 J (b) for correspondence of the Euro- 
pean system, each Administration has the 
right to impose a minimum charge which 
must not exceed one franc fifty (i fr. 50) 



regime europ6en, soit au regime extra- 
europeen. 

[ 13 ] 2. Le regime europ6en comprend 
tous les pays d'Europe, ainsi que TAlgerie 
et les contrees situees hors deTEurope 
qui sont declarees, par les administrations 
respectives, comme appartenant a ce 
regime. 

[ m ] 3- Le regime extra-europeen com- 
prend tous les pays autres que ceux vis6s 
au paragraphe prec6dent. 
[ 132 ] 4. Un t616gramme est soumis aux 
regies du regime europ6en Iprsqu'tt em- 
prunte exclusivement les voies de com- 
munication de pays appartenant a ce 
regime. 

[ 133 ] 5- Les gouvernements qui ont, en 
dehors de F Europe, des voies de com- 
munication pour lesquelles ils ont adher 
la Convention, declarent quel est, du 
regime europeen ou extra-europeen, celui 
qu'ils entendent leur appliquer. Cette 
d6claration r6sulte de I'mscription dans 
les tableaux des taxes ou est notifiee 
ulterieurement par 1'intermediaire du 
Bureau de 1'Union. 

ARTICLE 26. Composition du tarif 

[ l34 ] i. Le tarif pour la transmission 
telegraphique ou radioelectrique des cor- 
respondances Internationales se compose: 
[ 135 ] (a) des taxes terminales des admi- 
nistrations d'origine et de destination; 
[ 13fl ] (b) des taxes de transit des admi- 
nistrations intermediaires dans les cas 
ou les territoires, les installations ou les 
voies de communication de ces adminis- 
trations sont empruntes pour la trans- 
mission des correspondances; 
[ 137 ] (c) le cas echeant, de la taxe de 
transit afferente & chacune des deux 
stations assurant une transmission radio- 
electrique, ou aux cibles assurant une 
transmission sousmarine. 
[ 138 ] 2. Les tarif s r6sultant de I'appli- 
cation des dispositions du I aux corre- 
spondances echangees entre les bureaux 
de deux quelconques des pays de 1' Union 
doivent tre egaux par la mme voie et 
dans les deux sens. 

[ l39 ] 3- Le tarif est etabli par mot pur 
et simple. Toutefois: 
[ wo ] (0) pour les t61egrammes en langage 
convenu, il est obligatpirement pergu un 
minimum de taxe de cinq mots; 
[ ltt ] (&) pour la correspondance du 
regime europeen, chaque administration 
a la facult6 d'imposer un minimum de 
taxe qui ne devra pas depasser un franc 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



219 



per telegram, or to collect the charge in 
any way convenient to it, subject to the 
observance of Articles 30 and 31. 

[ 142 ] 4- Any Administration which pro- 
vides a direct transit channel for inter- 
national communication, may require the 
terminal Administrations to guarantee a 
minimum revenue from transit charges. 

ARTICLE 27. Fixing of elementary rates 
in the European system 

I 143 ] I. (i) For correspondence of the 
European system, the rates are fixed in 
accordance with Table A published by 
the Bureau of the Union. These rates 
must not, however, be greater than: 
[144] ( a ) twelve centimes (o fr. 12), 
terminal rate, and seven centimes (o fr. 
07), transit rate, for the following coun- 
tries: Germany, Spain, France, Great 
Britain, Italy; 

[ 145 ] (6) thirty-five centimes (o fr. 35), 
terminal rate, and thirty centimes (o fr. 
30), transit rate, for the Union of Soviet 
Socialist Republics ; 

[ 146 ] (c) twenty centimes (o fr. 20), 
terminal rate, and fifteen centimes (o fr. 
15), transit rate, for Turkey; 
[ u7 ] (d) nine centimes (o fr. 09), terminal 
rate, and seven centimes (o fr. 07), transit 
rate, for the other countries of Europe. 

[i^s] ( 2 ) As an exceptional and tempo- 
rary measure, in the case of Finland, Ice- 
land, Norway, Poland and Sweden, the 
terminal rate is fixed at ten centimes (o fr. 
10). The transit rate of these countries 
is fixed at seven centimes (o fr, 07). 
[ 149 ] 2. (i) For traffic exchanged radio- 
electrically between countries of the 
European system, the radioelectric rate 
contemplated in Article 26, I, (c), may 
not be less than the total of the telegraph 
rates which would be due to the transit 
Administrations for the same traffic ex- 
changed by the least expensive telegraph 
route. 

[iso] ( 2 ) When the relations are between 
two State radioelectric stations, the whole 
transit charges are shared equally be- 
tween them. When one or more inter- 
mediate State radioelectric stations, situ- 
ated on the least expensive telegraph 
route, intervene, the transit rates are 
shared in the same way for each section. 



cinquante (i fr. 50) par t616gramme ou, 
en se conformant aux articles 30 et 31, de 
percevoir la taxe dans la forme qui lui 
conviendra. 

[ 142 ] 4. Toute administration qui four- 
nit une yoie de communication Interna- 
tionale directe de transit, peut exiger des 
administrations terminales la garantie 
d'un revenu minimum des taxes de 
transit. 

ARTICLE 27. Fixation des taxes eUmen- 
taires du regime europeen 

[ 143 ] 4 I. (i) Dans la correspondance du 
r6gime europeen, les taxes sont fixees con- 
formment au tableau A publie par le 
Bureau de 1'Union. Toutefois, ces taxes 
ne doivent pas tre sup6rieures a: 
t 144 ] (&) douze centimes (o fr. 12), taxe 
terminale, et sept centimes (o fr. 07), 
taxe de transit, pour les pays suivants: 
Allemagne, Espagne, France, Grande- 
Bretagne, Italie; 

[ 145 ] (&) trente-cinq centimes (o fr. 35), 
taxe terminale, et trente centimes (o fr. 
30), taxe de transit, pour 1'Union des 
Republiques Sovi6tistes Socialistes; 
[ 146 ] (c) vingt centimes (o fr. 20), taxe 
terminale, et quinze centimes (o fr. 15), 
taxe de transit, pour la Turquie; 
[ 147 ] (d) neuf centimes (o fr. 09), taxe 
terminale, et sept centimes (o fr. 07), 
taxe de transit, pour les autres pays 
d' Europe. 

[ 148 ] (2) ExceptionnelJement et transi- 
toirement, pour la Finlande, 1'Islande, la 
Noryege, la Pologne et la Suede, la taxe 
terminale est fix6e ct dix centimes (o fr. 10) . 
La taxe de transit de ces pays est fix6e & 
sept centimes (o fr. 07). 
[ 149 ] 2. (i) Pour le trafic echange ra- 
dioelectriquement entre des pays du 
regime europ6en, la taxe radio&ectrique 
yisee a I'article 26, i, (c), ne peut toe 
inferieure au montant des taxes tele- 
graphiques qui seraient dues aux admi- 
nistrations de transit pour le mme trafic 
6chang< par la voie tel<graphique la 
moins cotiteuse. 

[ X6 ] (2) Quand les relations ont lieu 
entre deux stations radio61ectriques 
d'Etat, 1'ensemble des taxes de transit 
est partag6 entre elles par rnoitie. Quand 
une ou plusieurs stations radio&ectriques 
d'Etat interm&iiaires, situ6es sur la voie 
t616graphique la moins couteuse, inter- 
viennent, les taxes de transit sont par- 
tagees de la mtae maniere pour chaque 
section. 



22O 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



[ m ] 3- When the intermediate sta- 
tions used are not situated on the least 
expensive telegraph route, the charge to 
be collected from the sender, which may 
not be less than the charge for the least 
expensive telegraph route, is fixed and 
shared by agreement between the Admin- 
istrations concerned, provided always 
that the normal terminal rates are applied. 



[ m ] 4- 00 In the European system all 
Administrations have the right to reduce 
their terminal and transit rates. These 
modifications must, however, have as 
their aim and result, not the creation of 
competition in charges between existing 
routes, but rather the opening to the pub- 
lic, at equal rates, of as many routes as 
possible. 

[ 15S ] (2) The combinations of rates must 
be adjusted in such a way that the ter- 
minal rate of origin shall always be the 
same, whatever the route followed, and 
similarly with the terminal rate of des- 
tination. 

[ 154 ] (3) The tariffs resulting from these 
modifications must be notified to the 
Bureau of the Union with a view to their 
inclusion in Table A. 
f 155 ] 5- The charge to be collected for 
telegrams between two countries of the 
European system is always and by all 
routes the charge by the normal route in 
operation, which, by application of the 
elementary rates and the rates for the 
cable and radioelectric sections if any, as 
shown in Table A r gives the lowest figure, 
except in the case contemplated in 3 
and 6, 

[ 1B6 ] 6. If, however, the sender, taking 
advantage of the optipn allowed to him by 
Article 47, has prescribed the route to be 
followed, he must pay the charge proper 
to that route. 

ARTICLE 28. Fixing of elementary rates in 
the extra-European system 

[ 1B7 ] i. For correspondence of the ex* 
tra-European system, the terminal and 
transit rates are fixed in accordance with 
Table B published by the Bureau of the 
Union. The rates of the countries in- 
cluded in the European system, with the 
exception of the Union of Soviet Socialist 
Republics, may not, however, exceed: 

[ 158 ] (a) twenty centimes (0 fr. 20), 
terminal rate, and fifteen centimes (o fr. 



[ 15i ] 3 Quand les stations intermddi- 
aires empruntees ne sont pas situees sur 
la voie telegraphique la moins couteuse, 
la taxe & percevoir sur Texpediteur, 
laquelle ne peut 6tre inferieure & la 
taxe perdue par la voie telegraphique 
la moins couteuse, est fixee et partagee 
d'accord entre les administrations in- 
t6ress6es, 6tant entendu que les taxes 
terminales restent celles normalement ap- 
pliquees. 

t 152 ] 4- (*) Dans le regime europeen, 
toutes les administrations ont la facult 
de r&iuire leurs taxes terminales ou de 
transit. Toutefois, ces modifications doi- 
vent avoir pour but et pour effet, non 
point de creer une concurrence de taxes 
entre les voies existantes, mais bien 
d'ouvrir au public, a taxes egales, autant 
de voies que possible. 
[ 1B3 ] (2) Les combinaisons de taxes doi- 
vent tre regimes de facon que la taxe 
terminale de d6part soit toujours la mme, 
quelle que soit la voie suivie, et qu'il en 
soit de m6me pour la taxe terminale d'ar- 
riv6e, ! 

[ 1M ] (3) Les tarifs resultant de ces modi- 
fications doivent tre notifies au Bureau 
de 1' Union en vue de leur insertion dans le 
tableau A. 

[ 15S ] 5. La taxe a percevoir entre deux 
pays du regime europeen est toujours et 
par toutes les voies la taxe de la voie ac- 
tive qui, par Implication des taxes ele- 
mentaires et, le cas 6cheant, des taxes des 
parcours des cables ou des taxes radio- 
electriques, resultant du tableau A, a 
donn6 le chiffre le moins elev6, sauf les 
cas prevus aux 3 et 6. 

[ 158 ] 6. Toutefois, si Texpediteur, pro- 
fitant de la faculty qui lui est attribute 
par 1'article 47, a indiqu6 la voie a suivre, 
il doit payer la taxe correspondant a cette 
voie. 

ARTICLE 28. Fixation des taxes elemen- 
taires du regime extra-europeen 

[i 57 ] i. Dans la correspondance du 
regime extra-europ6en, les taxes termi- 
nales et de transit sont fix6es conforme- 
ment au tableau B publi6 par le Bureau 
de 1'Union. Toutefois, les taxes des pays 
compris dans le regime europeen, a Tex- 
ception de 1'Union des Republiques 
Sovietistes Socialistes, ne doivent pas 6tre 
superieures a: 

[ l58 ] ^ (a) vingt centimes (o fr. 20), taxe 
terminale, et quinze centimes (o fr. 15), 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



221 



15), transit rate, for Germany, Spain, 
France, Great Britain, Italy and Turkey. 1 

[ 159 ] (&) fifteen centimes (o fr. 15), 
terminal rate, and twelve centimes (o fr. 
12), transit rate, for all the other countries. 
[ 16 ] 2. In the extra-European system, 
all Administrations have the right (sub- 
ject in the case of European Administra- 
tions to the prescribed maxima) to modify 
their terminal and transit rates for all or 
part of their relations, on condition that 
the terminal rates thus fixed are applicable 
to all routes between the same two coun- 
tries. 

[ 161 1 3- C 1 ) I* 1 the extra-European sys- 
tem each Administration notifies to its 
own offices the routes applicable to tele- 
grams handed in by the sender without a 
route indication. When the route noti- 
fied by the Administration is not the 
cheapest, the Administration of origin is 
bound to transmit the route indication in 
the preamble of telegrams, when neces- 
sary to ensure the correct forwarding of 
the telegrams. 



[ 162 ] (2) In the case of telegrams with a 
route indication, the provisions of Article 
27, 6 are applied. 

ARTICLE 29. Interval "before application of 
new rates 

[ I63 ] I. No new rate, and no modifica- 
tion either general or of detail relative to 
tariffs, is effective until 15 days after its 
notification 2 by the Bureau of the Union, 
excluding the day of despatch, and it is not 
applied until the 1st or i6th of the month, 
whichever date next follows the expiration 
of this period. 

[ 18 *] 2. (i) The interval of 15 days is 
reduced to 10 days for modifications in- 
tended to equalise rates to those already 
notified for competing routes. 

[ 166 ] (2) Nevertheless, for radiotelegrams 



taxe de transit, pour 1'Allemagne, FEs- 
pagne, la France, la Grande-Bretagne, 
Tltalie et la Turquie; * 
t 159 ] m (b) quinze centimes (o fr. 15), taxe 
terminale, et douze centimes (o fr. 12), 
taxe de transit, pour tous les autres pays. 
[ 16 ] 2. Dans le regime extra-europ6en, 
toutes les administrations europ6ennes 
ont le droit de modifier, dans les limites 
des maxima autoris6s, et toutes les ad- 
ministrations extra-europeennes ont le 
droit de modifier leurs taxes terminales 
et de transit pour tout ou partie de leurs 
relations, condition que les taxes termi- 
nales ainsi fix6es soient appli cables & toutes 
les voies a suivre entre deux mmes pays. 
[ 161 1 3- (i) Dans le regime extra-euro- 
p6en, chaque administration d6signe 
ses propres bureaux les voies dont les 
taxes sont applicable^ aux t61egrammes 
deposes par les expediteurs sans aucune 
indication de voie. Lorsque la voie de- 
signed par 1 'administration n'est pas la 
moins couteuse, Tadministration de depart 
a Tobligation de faire mentionner Findi- 
cation de cette voie dans le pr6amtmle des 
telegrammes, quand c'est necessaire pour 
assurer racheminement regulier de ces 
telegrammes. 

[ 162 ] (2) Pour les telgrammes deposes 
avec une indication de voie, on applique 
les dispositions de Particle 27, 6. 

ARTICLE 29. Delai d' application des 
taxes nouvettes 

[ 163 ] i. Toute taxe nouvelle, toutes 
modifications d'ensemble ou de detail con- 
cernant les tarifs ne sont executoires que 
15 jours apres leur notification 2 par le 
Bureau de 1' Union, jour de d6p6t non 
cornpris, et ne sont mises en application 
qu'& partir du l er ou du 16 qui suit le jour 
d' expiration de ce delai. 
[1*4] 2 . (i) Le delai de 15 jours est 
r&duit a 10 jours pour les modifications 
ayant pour but d'6galiser des taxes aux 
taxes de voies concurrentes dj noti- 
fiees. 
[ 165 ] (2) Toutefois, pour les radiote!6- 



1 It Is agreed that Germany, France and Italy may provisionally and temporarily increase 
their terminal rate to twenty-two Centimes (o fr. 22) and that Germany and Spain may provi- 
sionally and temporarily maintain their transit charges in force at the time of signature of these 
Regulations. 

2 If there are several notifications the date of the first only is to be considered in reckoning the 
interval. 

1 tl est admis que I'Allemagne, la France et 1' Italic peuvent provisoirement et transitoirement 
elever jusqu'^ vingt-deux centimes (o fr. 22) leur taxe terminale, et que 1'Alletoagne 6t 1'Espagne 
peuvent provisoirement et transitoirement conserver leurs taxes de transit eii vigueur a la date de 
la signature du present Re"glement. 

2 S'il y a plusieurs notifications, la date de la premiere est seule a considerer pour le calcul du 
delai. 



222 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



originating with mobile stations, modi- 
fications of telegraph tariffs are not ap- 
plicable until a month after the periods 
fixed in i. 

[ i66 ] 3* The provisions of the above 
paragraphs admit of no exception. 



grammes originates des stations mobiles, 
les modifications aux tarifs te!6graphiques 
ne sont excutoires qu'un mois apres les 
delais fixes au I. 

[ 16G ] 3- Les dispositions des paragraph es 
ci-dessus n'adrnettent aucune exception. 



ARTICLE 30. Right to round off rates ARTICLE 30. Faculte d'arrondir les taxes 



[ l 7 ] i. The charges to be collected by 
virtue of Articles 25 to 29 may be rounded 
up or down, either after application of the 
normal word rates fixed according to the 
tables published by the Bureau of the 
Union, or after increasing or diminishing 
these normal rates in accordance with the 
monetary or other convenience of the 
country of origin. 

[ 168 ] 2. Modifications made by virtue 
of the previous paragraph apply only to 
the charge collected by the office of origin 
and do not involve any alteration in the 
share of rates proper to the other Adminis- 
trations concerned. They must be ar- 
ranged so that the difference between the 
charge collected for a telegram of fifteen 
words and the charge calculated exactly 
in accordance with the tables by means of 
the gold franc equivalent, fixed in con- 
formity with the provisions of the follow- 
ing article, is not more than one-fifteenth 
of the latter rate, that is, the regulation 
charge for one word. 

ARTICLE 31. Fixing of monetary equiv- 
alents 

[ 169 ] i. In order to ensure the uni- 
formity of charge prescribed by Article 
26, 2, the countries of the Union fix, for 
the collection of their charges, an equiva- 
lent in their respective currencies approxi- 
mating as nearly as possible to the value 
of the gold franc. 

[ 1TO ] 2. Each country notifies the equiv- 
alent which it has chosen direct to the 
Bureau of the Union. The Bureau of the 
Union prepares a table of equivalents and 
transmits it to all the Administrations of 
the Union. 

[ m ] 3- The equivalent of the gold 
franc may undergo in each country 
changes corresponding to the rise or fall in 
value of the currency of the country. 
The Administration which modifies its 
equivalent fixes the date from which it 
will collect charges according to the new 
equivalent; it notifies this to the Bureau 
of the Union, which informs all the Ad- 
ministrations of the Union. 



[ 167 ] i. Les taxes a percevoir en vertu 
des articles 25 a 29 peuvent Stre arrondies 
en plus ou en moins, soit apres applica- 
tion des taxes normales par mot fix6es 
d'apres les tableaux publies par le Bureau 
de TUnion, soit en augmentant ou en 
diminuant ces taxes normales d'apres 
les convenances monetaires ou autres du 
pays d'origine. 

[ 168 ] 2. Les modifications oper6es en 
execution du paragraphe pr6c6dent ne 
s'appliquent qu'a la taxe perdue par le 
bureau d'origine et ne portent point al- 
teration a la repartition des taxes revenant 
aux autres administrations interess6es. 
Elles doivent 6tre regimes de telle maniere 
que 1'ecart entre la taxe a percevoir pour 
un tel6gramme de quinze mots et la taxe 
exactement calculee d'apres les tableaux 
au moyen des equivalents du franc-or, 
fixes en conformity des dispositions de 
I* article ci-apres, ne depasse pas le 
quinzieme de cette derniere taxe, c'est-a- 
dire la taxe reglementaire d'un mot. 

ARTICLE 31. Fixation d' equivalents 
monetaires 

[ 165 ] I. A 1'effet d'assurer I'uniformite 
de taxe prescrite par 1'article 26, 2, les 
pays de 1' Union fixent, pour la perception 
de leurs taxes, un equivalent dans leur 
monnaie respective, se rapprochant aussi 
pres que possible de la valeur du franc-or. 

[ 17 ] 2. Chaque pays notifie directe- 
ment au Bureau de 1'Union 1'equivalent 
qu'il a choisi. Le Bureau de 1'Union 
dresse un tableau des equivalents et le 
transmet a toutes les administrations de 
1'Union. 

[ m ] 3- L'quivalent du franc-or peut 
subir dans chaque pays des modifications 
correspondant a la hausse ou a la baisse 
de la valeur de la monnaie de ce pays. 
L 'administration qui modifie son equiva- 
lent fixe le jour a partir duquel elle per- 
cevra les taxes d'apres son nouvel equi- 
valent; elle en donne avis au Bureau de 
1'Union, qui en informe toutes les admi- 
nistrations de 1'Union. 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



223 



CHAPTER VIII 

COLLECTION OF CHARGES 

ARTICLE 32. Collection on handing in; 
Collection on delivery 

[ m ] I. Charges are collected from the 
sender, except in the cases provided for in 
these Regulations, where they are col- 
lected from the addressee. 
[ 173 ] 2. The sender of an international 
telegram has the right to ask for a receipt 
showing the amount charged. The Ad- 
ministration of origin has the right to 
charge for this service, a fee not exceeding 
fifty centimes (o fr. 50). 
[ 174 ] 3. When a charge is due on de- 
livery, the telegram is only delivered to 
the addressee on payment of the amount 
due, except when the Regulations provide 
otherwise (Arts. 59, 60 and 62). 
[ 17S ] 4. If the charge to be paid on de- 
livery is not collected, the loss is borne by 
the Administration of delivery, in the ab- 
sence of special arrangements made in con- 
formity with Article 13 of the Convention. 
[ m ] 5- Telegraph Administrations, 
however, take measures, so far as pos- 
sible, by obtaining, when necessary, a 
deposit from the sender with a view to 
ensure that when charges payable on de- 
livery are not collected either through the 
addressee's refusal to pay or through in- 
ability to find him, they shall be recov- 
ered from the sender, except where these 
Regulations provide otherwise (Art. 60, 
4)- 

ARTICLE 33. Prohibition of the grant of 

rebates. Penalties 

[177] T h e Administrations of the Union 
reserve to themselves the right to take 
action against private enterprises which, 
either directly, or through the medium 
of their agents or sub-agents, grant to 
senders or addressees, in any way what- 
soever (per word, per telegram, by means 
of discounts, etc.) rebates having the 
effect of reducing the charges notified to 
the Bureau of the Union. Such action 
may involve the suspension of service 
with these enterprises. 

ARTICLE 34. Errors in collection 
[ 17S ] I. Amounts undercharged in error 
must be made good by the sender. 

[ 179 ] 2. Amounts overcharged in error 
and the value of excess stamps affixed to 
telegrams are refunded to the sender on 



CHAPITRE VIII 

PERCEPTION DES TAXES 

ARTICLE 32. Perception au depart; 
perception a I'arrivee 

[ 172 ] I. La perception des taxes a lieu 
au depart, sauf dans les cas pr6vus au 
present R&glement, ou elle est faite sur le 
destinataire. 

[ 173 ] 2. L'exp6diteur d'un t616gramme 
international a le droit d'en demander regu 
avec mention de la taxe pergue. L'adminis- 
tration d'origine a la facult6 de percevoir, 
de ce chef, une retribution a son profit, dans 
les limites de cinquante centimes (o fr. 50) . 
[ m ] 3- Lorsqu'il doit y avoir percep- 
tion a rarriyee, le teM6gramme n'est d6- 
livre" au destinataire que contre pavement 
de la taxe due, sauf quand le Reglement 
en dispose autrement (art. 59, 60 et 62). 
[ 175 ] 4. Si la taxe & percevoir a 1'arrivee 
n'est pas recpuvre*e, la perte est supported 
par 1 'administration d'arrivee, a moins 
d'arrangements spdciaux conclus con- 
formement a Particle 13 de la Convention. 
[ m ] 5- Les administrations tel&gra- 
phiques prennent toutef ois, autant que pos- 
sible, les mesures n6cessaires en faisant au 
besoin verser des arrhes par l'expe"diteur 
pour que les taxes a percevoir a Farriv6e et 
qui n'auraient pas it& acquittees par le 
destinataire par suite de son refus ou de 
1 'impossibility de le trouver, soient re- 
couvres sur Texpdditeur, sauf quand le 
R&glement en dispose autrement (art. 60, 
4). 

ARTICLE 33. Interdiction d'accorder des 

rabais. Sanctions 

[ m ] Les administrations de I'Union se 
r^servent le droit de prendre des sanctions 
& l'6gard des exploitations privies qui, 
directement ou par I'mtermMiaire de 
leurs agents ou sous-agents, accorderaient 
aux exp6diteurs ou aux destinataires, 
d'une maniere quelconque (par mot, par 
tele" gramme, sous forme de primes^ etc.), 
des rabais ayant pour effet de reduire les 
taxes notifies au Bureau de 1' Union. Ces 
sanctions peuvent comporter la ^ suspen- 
sion du service avec ces exploitations. 

ARTICLE 34. Erreurs de perception 
[ m ] I. Les taxes pergues en moins par 
erreur doivent 6tre comp!6tes par 1'ex- 
p6diteur. 

[i 79 ] 2. Les taxes percues en trop par 
erreur ainsi que la valeur des timbres 
d 'affranchissement appliques en trop sur 



224 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



application, if it is made during the 
period fixed in Article 82, i. 



CHAPTER IX 

TRANSMISSION SIGNALS 

ARTICLE 35. Transmission signals of the 
international telegraph alphabets Nos* I 
and 2, Morse code signals^ and signals of 
the Hughes and Siemens instruments 

[ 18 ] I. The following tables show the 
signals of the international telegraph 
alphabets Nos. i and 2, the Morse code 
signals and the signals of the Hughes and 
Siemens instruments. 
[2-7 omitted.] 

CHAPTER X 

TRANSMISSION OF TELEGRAMS 

ARTICLE 36. Or der of transmission 

[ 237 ] i. The transmission of telegrams 
takes place in the following order: 

(a) Telegrams relating to the safety of 
life at sea or in the air; l 



les telegrammes sont rembourse'es & 1'ex- 
pediteur, sur demande', si celle-ci est faite 
pendant le d61ai fix6 a 1'article 82, I. 

CHAPITRE IX 

SIGNAUX DE TRANSMISSION 

ARTICLE 35, Signaux de transmission des 
alphabets telegraphigues internationaux 
i et 2, $ignaux du code Morse, de 



Tappareil 
Siemens 



Hughes et de Vappareil 



[ 18 ] i. Les tableaux ci-dessous indi- 
quent les signaux des alphabets te"16- 
graphiques internationaux n 08 i et 2, les 
signaux du code Morse et des appareils 
Hughes et Siemens. 
[ 2-7 onus.] 

CHAPITRE X 

TRANSMISSION DES T&L&GRAMMES 

ARTICLE 36. Ordre de transmission 

[ 237 ] i. La transmission des te!6~ 
grammes a lieu dans 1'ordre suivant: 

(a) T16grammes relatjfs & la s6curite* 
de la vie humaine dans la navigation mari- 
time ou a&rienne; l 

i Examples of telegrams relative to the safety of life in air navigation, for which absolute priority 
of transmission is warranted : 

(a) SVH Bale from London** Send urgently report on upper winds Savernefor departure aeroplane 
GEABC- (signature}. 

The meteorological intelligence asked for by this telegram is indispensable to the security of the 
aeroplane, by reason of the fact that it might encounter fogs or clouds on its route, masking an 
obstacle and likely to cause an accident. 

(6) SVH Cologne from Zurich Light searchlights and aerodrome landing lights for landing 
aeroplane HCKLM. 

The object of this telegram is to illuminate ground in view of the landing of an aeroplane at 
night, in order to avoid an accident at the time of landing. 

(c) SVH Marseilles from Naples Hydroplane FAGCK in sea 50 miles Tunis awaits help. 
This telegram is consequent on a distress signal sent by a hydroplane obliged to alight in the sea 

and received by a coast station- It is at once transmitted to the addressee indicated by the 
hydroplane. 

(d) SVH Brussels from Prague** Inform aeroplane FABDQ that it lost right wheel on departure 
and should land with special caution. 

This telegram is intended to be communicated to the aeroplane by the Brussels station to warn 
it of the danger attending landing and of the need to manoeuvre so as to avoid an accident. 

1 Exemples de telegrammes relatifs la scurite de la vie humaine dans la navigation ae"rienne, 
pour lesquels la priorite* absolue de transmission se Justine: 

(a) SVH Bale de Londre$**&nvoyez d'urgence sondage $averne pour depart avion GEABC 
(signature) . 

^Les renseignements meteorologiques demandes par ce tel6grarnme sont indispensables a la 
securit6 de 1'avion, par le fait qu'il pourrait rencontrer sur sa route du brouillard, des nuages, 
rnasquant un obstacle et pouvant provoquer un accident. 

(&) SVH Cologne de Zurich =*Allumez projecteurs et feux de balisage pour atterrissage avion 
HCKLM. 

Le but de ce telegrarnme est de faire eclairer un terrain en vue de ratterrissage d'un avion de 
nuit, de manidre zl eviter un accident au moment de F atterrissage. 

(c) SVH Marseille de Naples Hydroavion FAGCK. amerri 50 milles Tunis attend secours. 

Ce telegrarnme est conse"cutif a un avis de detresse envoy par un hydroavion oblig6 d'amerrir; 
reQU par une station cdtiere, il est retransmis ensuite jusqu'au destinataire indique" par 1'hydroavion. 

(d) SVH Bruxelles de Prague^ Informez avion FABDQ qu'il a perdu roue droite au depart et 
qu r il atterrisse avec precaution. 

Ce tele"gramme est destine a tre communique a 1'avion par la station de Bruxelles, pour 1'avertir 
du danger que presente 1'atterrissage et manceuvrer de fagon a eviter un accident. 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



225 



(b) Government telegrams; 

(c) Meteorological telegrams; 

(d) Telegrams and service advices re- 
lating to the interruption of the channels 
of communication; 

(e) Urgent service telegrams, urgent 
service advices and paid service messages; 

(f) Urgent private telegrams and ur- 
gent press telegrams; 

(g) Non-urgent service telegrams and 
advices; 

(h) Government telegrams for which 
the sender has renounced priority of trans- 
mission, ordinary private telegrams and 
ordinary press telegrams; 

(i) Deferred telegrams and other kinds 
of reduced rate telegrams. 
[ 238 ] 2. Every office which receives, by 
an international channel of communica- 
tion, a telegram presented as a telegram 
relating to the safety of life at sea or in the 
air, as a Government telegram, as a serv- 
ice telegram, or as a meteorological tele- 
gram, reforwards it as such. 



t 239 ] 3- Telegrams of the same rank are 
transmitted ^by the sending office in the 
order of their time of handing-in and by 
intermediate offices in the order of their 
time of receipt. 

[ a40 ] 4- At intermediate offices, origi- 
nating telegrams and transit telegrams 
which are to be transmitted over the same 
routes are placed together and trans- 
mitted according to the time of handing-in 
or receipt, subject to the order laid down 
in the present Article. 

[Articles 37-46 omitted. General trans- 
mission rules. Alternate transmission by 
telegrams. Alternate transmission by 
series, and continuous transmission by 
series. Transmission with running series 
of numbers, Transmission of the pre- 
amble. Transmission of other parts of the 
telegram, Checking the number of words 
transmitted. Routine repetition; Collation. 
Acknowledgment of receipt. Procedure re- 
garding altered telegrams.] 



CHAPTER XI 

ROUTING OF TELEGRAMS 

[Article 47 omitted. Route to be fol* 
lowed by telegrams.} 



(b) Telegrammes d'Etat; 

(c) Telegrammes m6t6orologiques; 

(d) Telegrammes et avis de service se 
rapportant aux derangements des voies 
de communication; 

(e) Telegrammes et avis de service 
urgents et avis de service taxes; 

(/) Telegrammes prives urgents et 
telegrammes de presse urgents; 

(g) Telegrammes et avis de service non 
urgents; 

(h) Telegrammes d'Etat pour lesquels 
Texpediteur a renonce & la priorite de 
transmission, telegrammes prives ordi- 
naires et telegrammes de presse ordi- 
naires; 

(i) Telegrammes diff6res et autres 
categories de t616grammes & tarif r6duit. 
pas] j 2 . Tout bureau qui recoit par une 
voie de communication Internationale un 
telegramme present^ comme telegramme 
relatif Ma securite de la vie humaine dans 
la navigation maritime ou a&ienne, 
comme telegramme d'Etat, comme te!6- 
gramme de service, ou comme te!6- 
gramme m6t6orologique, le r6expedie 
comme tel. 

[ 239 ] 3. Les telegrammes de mme rang 
sont transmis par les bureaux de depart 
dans 1'prdre de leur dep6t et par les bu- 
reaux intermediaires dans 1'ordre de leur 
reception. 

[ 24 ] 4. Dans les bureaux interme- 
diaires, les telegrammes de depart et les 
telegrammes de passage qui doivent em- 
prunter les m6mes voies de communica- 
tion sont confondus et transmis en suivant 
1'heure de depdt ou de reception et en 
tenant compte de Tordre etabli par le 
present article. 

[Articles 37-46 omis. Regies generates 
de transmission. Transmission a I'alter- 
nat, par telegramme. Transmission a 
I 'alternat, par series, et transmission con- 
tinue^ par series. Transmission avec 
numerotage continu. Transmission du 
preambule. Transmission des autres par- 
ties du telegramme. Contrdle du nombre 
des mots transmis. Repetition d 1 office; 
Collationnement. Accuse de reception. 
Procedure concernant les telegrammes al- 
teres} 

CHAPITRE XI 

ACHEMINEMENT 



[Article 47 omis.- 
telegrammes.] 



-Voie a suivre par les 



226 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



CHAPTER XII 

INTERRUPTION OF TELEGRAPHIC 
COMMUNICATION 

ARTICLE 48. Diversion. General provi- 
sions 

[ 353 ] I. (l) When an interruption in 
the ordinary telegraphic communications 
occurs during the transmission of a tele- 
gram, the office beyond which the inter- 
ruption occurs or an office situated further 
back having at its disposal a circuitous 
telegraph route forwards the telegram 
immediately by that route (Art. 86, 5 
(3) and 6) or failing that, by post (when- 
ever practicable by registered letter) or by 
special messenger. The cost of forward- 
ing, other than that of telegraphic trans- 
mission, is borne by the office which 
makes use of this method of forwarding. 
The letter forwarded by post must bear 
the inscription "Express Telegram." 

[ 354 ] (2) In exceptional cases the trans- 
mission of telegrams by telephone is also 
admitted. It may only be adopted, how- 
ever, by previous arrangement between 
the Administrations concerned. 

I 365 ] (3) Telegrams forwarded by tele- 
graph under the conditions provided in 
the present paragraph are marked with the 
information "devi6," accompanied by 
the name of the office which effects the 
diversion. This indication is transmitted 
at the end of the preamble following the 
route indication if there is one. 
[s56j 1 2 . (i) Telegrams are not, how- 
ever, retransmitted by a more costly route 
unless they have been handed in at or 
reach the office responsible for redirecting 
them within a maximum period of 24 
hours following the notification of the 
interruption. 

[ 367 ] (2) The transmission of the first 
telegram bearing the information "d<vi6" 
(Art. 86, 5) will be considered as taking 
the place of the official notification of the 
interruption. 

[ 3fi8 ] 3- (i) An office which resorts to a 
method of retransmission other than the 
telegraph, addresses the telegram, accord- 
ing to circumstances, either to the nearest 
telegraph office in a position to retrans- 
mit it, or to the office of destination, or to 
the addressee himself when this retrans- 
mission takes place within the country of 
destination. As soon as communication 



CHAPITRE XII 

INTERRUPTION DBS COMMUNICATIONS 
T&LtGRAPHIQUES 

ARTICLE 48. Deviation. Generalites 

[353] i. (i) Lorsqu'il se produit, au 
cours de la transmission d'un t616grarnme, 
une interruption dans les communications 
te'le'graphiques regulieres, le bureau & 
partir duquel Finterruption s'est produite 
ou un bureau situ6 plus en arriere et 
disposant d'une voie te!6graphique de- 
tournee exp6die immediatement le t6le- 
gramme par cette voie (art. 86, 5 (3) et 
6) ou, & defaut, par la poste (autant que 
possible par lettre recomrnand^e) ou par 
expres. Les frais de reexpedition autres 
que ceux de la transmission t&egraphique 
sont supported par le bureau qui fait cette 
reexpedition. La lettre expldiee par la 
poste doit porter Tannotation "T616- 
gramme-expres ' ' . 

[ 3M ] (2) Dans des cas exceptionnels, 
la transmission telephonique des t6le- 
grammes est egalement admise. Elle ne 
peut cependant toe utilisee qu'apres 
entente pralable entre les administra- 
tions int&ressees. 

[355] (3) L es t16grammes achemines par 
telgraphe dans les conditions pr6vues au 
present paragraphe doivent 6tre rev^tus 
de la mention "d6vie", accompagnee du 
nom du bureau qui effectue la d6viation. 
Cette mention est transmise a la fin du 
pr6ambule, & la suite de Findication de la 
voie, s'ii en existe une. 
[] 2. (i) Toutefois, les t&6grammes 
ne sont r6exp6dies par une voie plus 
cotiteuse que s'ils ont 6te deposes ou 
parviennent au bureau charge de les 
r6exp6dier dans le delai maximum de 24 
heures qui suit la notification de Tinter- 
ruption. 

[ 357 ] (2) La transmission du premier 
t616gramme portant la mention "d6vi6 n 
(art. 86, 5) sera considered comme ten- 
ant lieu de la notification officielle de 
1'interruption. 

I 358 ] 3 (i) Le bureau qui recourt & un 
mode de reexpedition autre que le tele- 
graphe, adresse le t616gramme, suivant les 
circonstances, soit au premier bureau 
t6l6graphique en rnesure de le reexpedier, 
soit au bureau de destination, soit au des- 
tinataire mme, lorsque cette rexp6di- 
tion se fait dans les Hrnites du pays de 
destination. Des que la communication 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



227 



is restored, the telegram is transmitted 
afresh by telegraph, unless its receipt has 
already been acknowledged, or, by reason 
of exceptional congestion of traffic, the 
retransmission would be obviously preju- 
dicial to the service as a whole (Art. 49, 

7). 

[ 359 ] (2) In the case of a money order 
telegram, the transmission in duplicate is 
effected by a service advice announcing 
that the money order has already been 
once transmitted and indicating the route 
which it followed. 

ARTICLE 49. Diversion by post 

[ 38 ] i. Telegrams which, for any rea- 
son, are forwarded by post to a telegraph 
office are accompanied by a numbered 
abstract. At the same time, if the state 
of telegraphic communication permits, the 
office which makes the despatch notifies 
the office to which it is sent by a service 
advice indicating the number of tele- 
grams forwarded and the time of their 
despatch. 

[ 361 ] 2. On the arrival of the mail, the 
office concerned verifies that the number 
of telegrams received agrees with the num- 
ber of telegrams announced. If so, it 
acknowledges their receipt on the ab- 
stract, which it returns immediately to 
the sending office. After the restoration 
of telegraphic communication the office 
repeats the acknowledgement of receipt 
by a service advice in the following form: 
"Received 63 telegrams as advised in ab- 
stract No. 1 8 of 30 March." 

P 82 ] 3- The provisions of the preceding 
paragraph apply also to the case where a 
telegraph office receives by post a packet 
of telegrams without previous notice. 

t 363 ] 4- When a packet of telegrams of 
which notice has been given does not ar- 
rive by the mail indicated, the sending 
office must at once be advised. Accord- 
ing to circumstances, the latter must 
either transmit the telegrams immedi- 
ately if telegraphic communication has 
been restored, or send the telegrams on 
again by any means of transport available. 
[ 8<J4 ] 5- When a telegram is sent direct 
to the addressee in the case provided for 
in Article 48, 3 (i), it is accompanied by 
an advice notifying the interruption of 
the lines. 

[ 366 ] 6. The office which retransmits, by 
telegraph, telegrams already transmitted 



est retablie, le telegramme est de nouveau 
transmis par la voie telgraphique, moins 
qu'il n'en ait et6 prc6demment accus< 
reception ou que, par suite d'encombre- 
ment exceptionnel, cette r6exp6dition ne 
doive tre manifestement nuisible a 1'en- 
semble du service (art. 49, 7). 
[ 359 ] (2) Lorsqu'il s'agit d'un tele- 
gramme-mandat, la transmission par 
ampliation est effectu6e par un avis de 
service qui annonce que ce mandat a d6j 
et6 expdie une premiere fois et indique la 
voie qu'il a suivie. 

ARTICLE 49. Deviation par poste 

[ 36 ] i. Les t61egrammes qui, pour un 
motif quelconque, sont adresss par la 
poste un bureau tlegraphique, sont 
accompagn6s d'un bordereau num<rot. 
En mme temps, le bureau qui fait cette 
rexpdition en avertit le bureau auquel il 
1'adresse, si les communications t<!<- 
graphiques le permettent, par un avis de 
service indiquant le nombre des t16- 
grammes exp6die"s et 1'heure du courrier. 
[ 361 ] 2. A 1'arrivee du courrier, le 
bureau correspondant v6rifie si le nombre 
des t616grammes recus est conforme au 
nombre des t<16grammes annonces. Dans 
ce cas, il en accuse reception sur le bor- 
dereau, qu'il renvoie immdiatement au 
bureau exp6diteur. Apres le r6tablisse- 
ment des communications t616graphiques, 
le bureau renouvelle cet accus6 de rdcep- 
tion par un avis de service dans la forme 
suivante: "Regu 63 t16grammes con- 
form6ment au bordereau n 18 du 30 
mars." 

[ 362 ] 3- Les dispositions du paragraphe 
precedent s'appliquent 6galement au cas 
ou un bureau t16graphique regoit par la 
poste un envoi de t61egrammes sans en 
Stre averti. 

[ 368 1 4- Lorsqu'un envoi de te!6- 
grammes annonc6 ne parvient pas par le 
courrier indiqu6, le bureau exp6diteur doit 
en 6tre averti imme'diatement. Celui-ci 
doit, selon les circonstances, soit trans- 
mettre imm6diaternent les te!6grammes si 
la communication t61graphique est reta- 
blie, soit eff ectuer un nouvel envoi par un 
mode de transport quelconque. 
[364] 5. Quand un tel6gramme est en- 
voy6 directement au destinataire dans le 
cas prevu 1'article 48, 3 (i), il est ac- 
compagn6 d'un avis indiquant 1 'interrup- 
tion des lignes. 

[ 36S ] 6. Le bureau qui rexp6die par 
tlegraphe des t616grammes dj transmis 



228 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



by post, notifies the office to which they 
have been directed, by a service advice 
in the following form : 

"Berlin Paris 15 1045 (date and time) 
Telegrams Nos retrans- 
mitted in duplicate." 
[368] y. The telegraphic retransmission 
in duplicate contemplated in Article 48, 
3 and by 6 of the present article, must 
be signalled with the service instruction 
"Ampliation" transmitted at the end of 
the preamble. 

[ s67 ] 8. The same service instruction 
is entered in the preamble of telegrams 
telegraphed a second time. 

CHAPTER XIII 

CANCELLATION OF A TELEGRAM 

ARTICLE 50. Cancellation before trans- 
mission or in course of forwarding 

p 88 ] i. The sender of a telegram or his 
authorised representative may, on estab- 
lishing his identity, stop its transmission 
and delivery, if there is still time. 

pw] 2. When a sender cancels his tele- 
gram before its transmission has begun, 
the charge is refunded less a fee of not 
more than one franc (l fr.) retained by 
the Administration of origin. 

[ m l 3- If the telegram has been trans- 
mitted by the office of origin, the sender 
may only request its cancellation by a 
paid service advice, issued under the 
conditions laid down in Article 80 and 
addressed to the office of destination. 
The sender must pay the cost of a reply 
to the cancelling advice, either by tele- 
graph or by post at his choice. So far as 
practicable, this service advice is trans- 
imitted in turn to the offices to which the 
ioriginat telegram was forwarded until it 
^syertakes the latter. In the absence of 
instructions to the contrary in the ST, 
the addressee is informed of the cancella- 
tion off the telegram, if it has been de- 
liverec I to him. 

I 371 ] j4 The office which cancels the 
telegr; a,m or which delivers the cancelling 
advice; to the addressee informs the office 
of ori/gin accordingly. This notification 
indicates by the word "cancelled" or 
"delivered" whether it has been possible 
to jbancel the telegram before delivery, or 
whtether it has already been delivered. It 



par la poste en informe le bureau sur 
lequel les tel6grammes ont 6te diriges, par 
un avis de service rdig6 dans la forme 
suivante: 

"Berlin Paris 15 1045 (date et heure) 
Telegrammes n 08 reexpe"dies 

r ampliation." 
7. La reexpeciition tlgraphique 
par ampliation, vis6e par 1'article 48, 3 
et par le present article, 6, doit tre 
signalee par la mention de service "Am- 
pliation", transmise a la fin du prSambule. 

[ 367 ] 8. La mme mention de service 
est inscrite dans le pr6ambule des te!6~ 
grammes transmis une seconde fois, 

CHAHTRE XIII 

ANNULATION D*UN T&L&GRAMME 

ARTICLE 50. Annuhtion avant transmis- 
sion ou en cours d'acheminement 

p^ 8 ] I. L'expe"diteur d'un t^legramme 
ou son fond6 de pouvoirs peut, en justi- 
fiant de sa quality, en arrester la trans- 
mission et la remise, s'il en est encore 
temps. 

[ 369 ] 2. Lorsqu'un expediteur annule 
son tel6gramme avant que la transmission 
en ait e"te" commence, la taxe est rem- 
boursee, sous deduction d'un droit de un 
franc (i fr.) au maximum, au profit de 
F administration d'origine. 
[ 37 ] 3- Si le tel6gramme a 6t6 transmis 
par le bureau d'origine, 1'expediteur ne 
peut en demander 1'annulation que par un 
avis de service taxe" , 6mis dans les condi- 
tions preVues & Tarticle 80 et adress6 au 
bureau destinataire. L'exp6diteur doit 
acquitter, a son choix, le prix d'une r6- 
ponse t616graphique ou d'une r6ponse 
postale & 1'avis d'annulation, Autant 
que possible, cet avis de service est suc- 
cessivement transmis aux bureaux par 
lesquels le t61gramme primitif a transit^, 
jusqu'a ce qu'il ait rejoint ce dernier. 
Sauf indication contraire dans le ST, si le 
tele 1 gramme a 6t6 remis au destinataire, 
celui-ci est inform^ de 1'annulation du 
tlegramme 

[ sn ] 4. Le bureau qui annule le tle- 
gramme ou qui remet Pavis d'annulation 
au destinataire en informe le bureau 
d'origine. Cette information indique par 
le mot "annul6" ou "remis" que le 
teigramme a pu 6tre annu!6 avant la dis- 
tribution ou bien qu'il a deja it& remis. 
Elle est donn6e par teldgraphe si l'expdi- 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



229 



is given by telegraph if the sender has 
paid for a telegraphic reply to the can- 
celling advice; otherwise it is sent by post 
as a prepaid letter. 

[ 372 ] 5- If the telegram is cancelled 
before reaching the office of destination, 
the office of origin refunds to the sender 
the charge for the original telegram, the 
cancelling service advice and the paid 
telegraphic reply if any, after deducting 
the charge for the distance traversed by 
the original telegram, the cancelling 
service advice, and the telegraphic reply 
if any. 



CHAPTER XIV 

STOPPAGE OF TELEGRAMS 

ARTICLE 51. Offices qualified. Notifica- 
tion of stoppage 

[373] x . xhe control provided by Article 
26 of the Convention is exercised by the 
terminal or intermediate telegraph offices 
subject to reference to the central Ad- 
ministration which decides without ap- 
peal. 

[ m ] 2. Government telegrams, tele- 
grams relating to the safety of life, and 
service telegrams are entitled to trans- 
mission as a right- Telegraph offices 
exercise no control over these telegrams. 

[375] 3. xhe office of delivery must 
stop telegrams addressed to a telegraphic 
reforwarding agency well known to be 
organised with the object of enabling the 
correspondence of third parties to evade 
the full payment of the charges due for 
transmission, without intermediate re- 
forwarding, between the office of origin 
and the office of ultimate destination. 
The office stopping the telegram must at 
once inform the omce of origin. 

[ m ] 4. (l) Administrations and pri- 
vate enterprises undertake to stop, at 
their respective offices, telegrams which 
these offices receive from abroad by any 
means whatever (post, telegraph, tele- 
phone or otherwise), to be reforwarded 
by telegraph with the object of enabling 
these messages to evade the full payment 
of the charge due for the whole distance. 

[ m ] (2) The Administration of the coun- 
try of origin of the telegrams must be 
notified of the stoppage. 



teur a pay< une rponse tel^graphique 
Tavis d'annulation; dans le cas contraire, 
elle est envoye par la poste, comme lettre 
affranchie. 

[ 372 ] 5- Si le telegramme est annule 
avant d'avoir atteint le bureau destina- 
taire, le bureau d'origine rembourse a 
I'exp6diteur les taxes du tel6gramme primi- 
tif, de I'avis de service d'annulation et, 
eventuellement, de la r<ponse telegra- 
phique payee, apr^s deduction des taxes du 
tel6gramme primitif, de Tavis de service 
d'annulation et, ^eventuellement, de la 
r6ponse telgraphique pour le parcours 
effectue*. 

CHAPITRE XIV 

ARRET DES TELEGRAMMES 

ARTICLE 51. Bureaux qualifies. 
Notification des arrets 

[ m ] i. Le contrdle prevu par 1'article 
26 de la Convention est exerc6 par les 



centrale, qui prononce sans appel. 

[ 874 ] 1 2. La transmission des te!6- 
grammes d'Etat, des telgrammes concer- 
nant la security de la vie humaine et des 
tel6grammes de service se fait de droit. 
Les bureaux telegraphiques n'ont aucun 
contr&le & exercer sur ces telegrammes. 
[ m ] 3. Doivent tre arr8t6s par le 
bureau d'arrivee, avec obligation, toute- 
fois, d'en informer immeciiatement le 
bureau d'origine, les tel6grammes a desti- 
nation d'une agence telegraphique de 
r6expdition notoirement organisee dans 
le but de soustraire les correspondances 
des tiers au payement integral des taxes 
dues pour leur transmission, sans reex- 
p&dition interm&iiaire, entre le bureau de 
depart et celui de la destination defini- 
tive. 

[ 378 ] 4. (i) Les administrations et ex- 
ploitations privies s'engagent a arr^ter, 
dans leurs bureaux respectifs, les te!6- 
gramrnes que ces bureaux recoivent de 
l'6tranger, par n'importe quelle voie 
(poste, t616graphe, telephone ou autres), 
pour tre reexpedies par telegraphe, dans 
le but de soustraire ces correspondances 
au payement int6gral des taxes dues pour 
le parcours entier. 

[ 377 j (2) L'arret doit 6tre signal^ a 
{'administration du pays d'origine de ces 
tel6grammes. 



230 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



CHAPTER XV 

DELIVERY AT DESTINATION 

ARTICLE 52. Various cases of delivery 

[ 378 ] I. Telegrams are delivered ac- 
cording to their address, either at a 
domicile (private house, office, business 
house, etc.), or a "poste restante" 
(=:GP=) or a "telegraph restant" 
( = TR = ) . They are also transmitted to 
the addressee by telephone in the cases 
contemplated in Article 15, | 5, or by 
private telegraph wires under conditions 
fixed by Administrations which admit 
this method of transmission. 
I 379 ] 2. They are delivered or for- 
warded to their destination in the order 
of their receipt and priority, except in the 
cases mentioned in 9 of Article 76 and 
in 12 of Article 77. 
[ 38 ] 3- (i) Telegrams addressed to a 
domicile in the locality served by the 
telegraph office are immediately taken to 
their address. Nevertheless telegrams 
bearing the paid service indication 
=Jour= are not delivered during the 
night; and telegrams received during the 
night are delivered forthwith, subject to 
the limitation imposed by the working 
hours of offices, only if they bear the paid 
service indication = Nuit = . 

t 381 ] (2) Administrations are bound to 
deliver telegrams relative to the safety of 
life at sea or in the air and Government 
telegrams at once ; they are also bound to 
deliver immediately, during the hours 
when their offices are open, private tele- 
grams not bearing the indication = Nuit = 
if they are recognised by the office of 
destination to be of an urgent nature. 



[ 382 ] 4. (i) A telegram taken to an 
address may be delivered either to the 
addressee, to an adult member of his 
family, to any person in his service, to his 
lodgers or guests, or to the porter at the 
hotel or the house, unless the addressee 
has designated in writing a special repre- 
sentative, or the sender has requested 
delivery to the addressee in person by 
writing before the address the paid service 
indication "Mains propres" or = MP~. 
In the latter case any other method of 
delivery (post, telephone or private wire) 
is excluded. 



CHAPITRE XV 

REMISE A DESTINATION 

ARTICLE 52. Differ ents cas de remise 

[ 37S ] i. Les tel6grammes sont remis, 
suivant leur adresse, soit & domicile 
(habitation particuliere, bureau, etablisse- 
ment, etc.) , soit poste restante ( = GP ) , 
soit telegraphe restant (TR). Us 
sont aussi transmis au destinataire par 
telephone, dans les cas preVus & 1'article 
15, 5> ou par des fils te!6graphiques 
prives, aux conditions fix6es par les ad- 
ministrations qui admettent ce mode de 
transmission. 

[ 379 ] ^ 2. Us sont remis ou expedi6s 
destination dans 1'ordre de leur reception 
et de leur priorit6, sauf dans les cas 
mentionnes au 9 de 1'article 76 et au 
12 de 1'article 77. 

[ 38 ] 3- W Les t&egrammes adresses & 
domicile dans la Iocalit6 que le bureau 
t61egraphique dessert sont immediate- 
ment portes & leur adresse. Toutefois, 
les t61egrammes portant 1'indication de 
service taxee =Jour = ne sont pas dis- 
tribu6s la nuit; ceux qui sont recus pend- 
ant la nuit ne sont obligatoirement dis- 
tribues immediatement, dans la limite 
des heures d'ouverture des bureaux, que 
lorsqu'ils portent l'indication de service 
taxee Nuit =. 

[ m ] (2) Les administrations sont tenues 
de faire distribuer immediatement les 
t61egrammes relatifs & la securit6 de la 
vie humaine dans la navigation maritime 
ou aerienne ainsi que les telegrarnmes 
d'Etat; elles sont egalement tenues, dans la 
limite des heures d'ouverture des bureaux, 
de faire distribuer immediatement les te!6- 
grammes prives ne portant pas Tindica- 
tion =Nuit=, si le caractere d'urgence 
est reconnu par le bureau d 'arrived. 
[ 382 ] ^ 4. (i) Un telegramme port6 
domicile peut tre remis, soit au destina- 
taire, aux membres adultes de sa famille, 
& toute personne & son service, ses 
locataires ou hdtes, soit au concierge de 
rhdtei ou de la maison, 4 moins que le 
destinataire n'ait ddsigne, par ecrit, un 
delegu6 sp6cial ou que Texpediteur n'ait 
demand^, en inscrivant avant Tadresse 
Tindication de service taxee " Mains 
propres" ou =*MP = , que la remise n'ait 
lieu qu'entre les mains du destinataire 
seul. Dans ce dernier cas, tout autre 
mode de remise (poste, telephone, fil 
prive) est exclu. 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



231 



pas] ( 2 ) The office of destination writes 
the indication "Mains propres" in JFull 
before the address on the cover and gives 
the necessary instructions to the mes- 
senger. 

[ 384 ] 5- The sender may also request 
delivery in an open cover, by writing the 
paid service indication =Ouvert= before 
the address. 

[ 385 ] 6. These methods of delivery "en 
mains propres" and "puvert" are not 
obligatory for Administrations which 
declare that they do not admit them. 
p86] 7. Telegrams which have to be 
placed in the "poste restante" or for- 
warded by post are immediately handed 
to the postal service by the telegraph 
office of destination, under the conditions 
fixed by Article 62. 

[ 387 ] 8. Telegrams addressed "poste 
restante'* or delivered by post are, from 
the point of view of delivery and period of 
retention, subject to the same rules as 
postal correspondence. 
[ 388 ] 9- The Administration to which 
the delivery office is subject has the right 
to collect from the addressee a special 
delivery surcharge for telegrams placed 
in the "poste restante" or "telegraph 
restant". If the addressee refuses to pay 
the surcharge, the post office informs the 
telegraph office, and the latter informs the 
office of origin with a view to the collection 
of the surcharge from the sender. 

[389] jo. When a telegram is addressed 
"telegraph restant", it is delivered at the 
telegraph counter to the addressee or his 
duly authorised representative, who are 
bound, if required, to prove their identity. 

[ 39 ] II. Telegrams to be delivered to 
passengers in a ship on its arrival in port 
are delivered, so far as possible, before 
disembarkation. If that is not prac- 
ticable or if such delivery would entail ex- 
pense (for boat hire, for example), they 
are delivered to the ship's agents. 

[Article 53 omitted. Non-delivery and 
delayed delivery.] 

CHAPTER XVI 

SPECIAL TELEGRAMS 

ARTICLE 54. General provisions 

[ 408 ] I. The provisions which form the 
subject of the other chapters apply in 



[ 383 ] (2) Vindication "Mains propres" 
est reproduite en toutes lettres sur la 
suscription, par le bureau d'arrivee, qui 
donne au porteur les indications nces~ 
saires. 

[ 384 ] 5- L'expediteur peut demander 
aussi que le tellgrarnme soit remis puvert, 
en inscrivant avant 1'adresse Tindication 
de service tax6e = Ouvert =. 
[ 385 ] 6. Ces modes de remise "en 
mains propres" et "ouvert" ne sont pas 
obligatoires pour les administrations qui 
declarent ne pas les accepter. 
[ 386 ] 7. Les telegrammes qui doivent 
8tre deposes " poste restante" pu expedi6s 
par poste sont remis immediatement & 
la poste par le bureau te!6graphique 
d'arrivee, dans les conditions fixees par 
1' article 62. 

[ 387 ] 8. Les telegrammes adresses 
"poste restante" ou remis par poste sont, 
au point de vue de la delivrance et des 
delais de conservation, soumis aux mmes 
regies que les correspondances postales. 
[ 388 ] 9. L'administration dont depend 
le bureau d'arriv6e a la facult6 de perce- 
voir sur le destinataire une surtaxe 
speciale de distribution pour les tele- 
grammes remis "poste restante" pu 
"telegraphe restant". Si le destinataire 
refuse de payer la surtaxe, le bureau de 
poste en avise le bureau tel^graphique et 
ce dernier informe le bureau d'origine, en 
vue de la perception de la surtaxe sur 
1'expediteur. 

[ 389 ] 10. Lorsqu'un tdlegramme est 
adress6 "te!6graphe restant", il est remis, 
au guichet telegraphique, au destinataire 
ou ci son representant dument autoris6, 
lesquels sont tenus d'etablir leur identite, 
s'ils en sont requis. 

[390] j lls Les telegrammes a remettre 
aux passagers d'un navire des son arrivee 
dans le port sont d61ivr6s, autant que 
possible, avant le debarquemenL Si cela 
n'est pas possible, ou si cette remise donne 
lieu & des frais (d'embarquement, par 
exemple), ils sont d61iyres au representant 
de Tarmateur du navire. 

[Article 53 onus. Non remise et remise 
differee.] 

CHAPITRE XVI 
TLGRAMMES SP&CIAUX 

ARTICLE 54. Dispositions generates 
[ 408 ] i. Les dispositions qui font Tpbjet 
des autres chapitres s'appliquent inte- 



232 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



their entirety to special telegrams, subject 
to the modifications prescribed in this 
chapter. 

[ 40a ] 2. In the application of the articles 
of this chapter, the facilities given to the 
public for urgent telegrams, prepaid re- 
plies, collated telegrams, notifications of 
delivery, telegrams to follow the ad- 
dressee, multiple telegrams and telegrams 
for delivery beyond the telegraph limits, 
may be combined. 

[Articles 55-63 omitted. Urgent pri^ 
vate telegrams. Telegrams with prepaid 
reply; Use or reimbursement of vouchers. 
Collated telegrams. Telegrams with noti- 
fication of delivery. Telegrams to follow 
the addressee by order of the sender. Re~ 
direction of telegrams by order of the ad- 
dressee. Multiple telegrams. Telegrams 
to be delivered by express or by post. De 
luxe telegrams.] 



CHAPTER XVII 

PHOTOTELEGRAMS 

ARTICLE 64. Phototelegrams 

[ 58 ] I. An optional service of photo- 
telegrams is admitted betweeii Adminis- 
trations which have declared their willing- 
ness to organise it. 

[ m ] 2. The charges and conditions 
applicable to phototelegrams are fixed by 
direct agreement between the Adminis- 
trations concerned. 

CHAPTER XVIII 

SEMAPHORE TELEGRAMS 



gralement aux telegrammes speciaux, sous 
reserve des modifications qui sont preVues 
dans le present chapitre. 
[ 409 ] 2. Dans 1'application des articles 
du present chapitre, on peut combiner les 
facilit^s donnes au public pour les tel- 
grammes urgents, les reponses payees, les 
te!6grammes avec collationnement, les ac- 
cuses de reception, les telegrammes faire 
suivre, les te!6grammes multiples et les 
telegrammes & remettre au deli des lignes. 

[Articles 55-63 omis. TeUgrammes pri- 
ves urgents. TeUgrammes avec reponse 
payee; Utilisation ou remboursement des 
bons. Telegrammes avec collationnement. 
TeUgrammes avec accuse de reception. 
TeUgrammes d> faire suivre sur Vordre de 
l'expditeur. TeUgrammes & reexpedier 
sur Vordre du destinataire. Telegrammes 
multiples. TeUgrammes d remettre par 
expres ou par poste. TeUgrammes de 
luxe.] 

CHAPITRE XVII 

PHOTOT&L&GRAMMES 

ARTICLE 64. Phototelegrammes 

[ 68 ] i . Un service facultatif de phpto- 
telegrammes est admis entre les adminis* 
trations qui ont declar6 vouloir 1'organiser. 

[ 531 ] 2. Les taxes et les dispositions af- 
frentes aux photot616grammes sont fixe'es 
par entente directe entre les administra- 
tions interessees. 

CHAPITRE XVIII 

T&L&GRAMMES S&MAPHORIQUES 



ARTICLE 65. Semaphore telegrams ARTICLE 65. TeUgrammes semaphoriqnes 

[532] x< Telegrams exchanged by means 
of semaphores are called semaphore tele- 
grams. 

[ 5M ] 2. Semaphore telegrams must bear 
before the address the paid service indi- 
cation =SEM = . 

[ 634 ] 3 The address of semaphore tele- 
grams destined for ships at sea must 
contain: 

[ 53S ] (a) the name of the addressee with 
further particulars, if necessary; 
[5 3 ] (5) t he name of the ship, supple- 
mented, where there are several ships of 
the same name, by its nationality, and, if 
necessary, its distinctive signal in the 
International Code of Signals; 



[ 532 ] i. Les telegrammes 6chang6s au 
moyen des semaphores portent le nom de 
telegrammes semaphoriques. 
[ 633 ] 2. Les te!6grammes s6mapho- 
riques doivent porter avant 1'adresse Pin- 
dication de service tax6e =SEM = . 
[ 534 ] 3- L'adresse des tele"grammes 
semaphoriques destines & des navires en 
mer doit contenir: 

pa B] ( a ) [ e nom Q! U destinataire avec in- 
dication complementaire, s'il y a lieu ; 
[536] (&) ig nom d u n avire, complete par 
la nationalit6 et, au besoin, par le signal 
distinctif du code international de sig- 
naux, en cas d'homonymie; 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



233 



[537] (c) the name of the semaphore sta- 
tion, as it appears in the International List 
of Telegraph Offices. 

[ 538 ] 4. Semaphore telegrams must be 
expressed either in the language of the 
country in which the semaphore station 
which has to signal them is situated, or 
by means of groups of letters in the Inter- 
national Code of Signals. 
[ 539 ] 5. In the case of Government 
semaphore telegrams transmitted from a 
ship at sea, the seal is replaced by the dis- 
tinctive sign of the commander. 
[6-12 omitted,] 

CHAPTER XIX 

RADIOTELEGRAMS 

ARTICLE 66. Radiotelegrams 

[ 55 ] The service of radiotelegrams is per- 
formed in accordance with the provisions 
of the Radiocommunication Regulations. 

CHAPTER XX 

MONEY ORDER TELEGRAMS 

ARTICLE 67. Money order telegrams 

[ 581 ] I. The issue, the wording of the 
text, and the payment of money order 
telegrams are regulated by special inter- 
national agreements. 

[ 882 ] 2. If the locality in which the post 
office of payment is situated has not a tele- 
graph office, the money order telegram 
must bear the indication of the post office 
of payment and that of the telegraph of- 
fice which serves it. 

[ 553 ] 3- (i) Money order telegrams are 
admitted at the rate of charge for de- 
ferred telegrams subject to the appli- 
cation of the provisions of Article 75. 
They bear the paid service indication 

[ 654 ] (2) In deferred money order tele- 
grams the conditions regarding the word- 
ing of deferred telegrams must be observed 
only in so far as they concern messages 
intended for the payee of the order. 

[ 555 ] 4. The transmission of money 
order telegrams between Administrations 
admitting them is subject to the same 
rules as other kinds of telegrams, subject 
to the provisions which form the subject 
of Articles 40, 8, 44, 1,2 and 3, and 
45) 3(2). 



[ 637 ] (c) le nom du poste semaphorique, 
tel qu'il figure a la nomenclature officielle 
des bureaux. 

[ 538 ] 4. Les t61grammes s6mapho- 
riques doivent toe rdig6s soit dans la 
langue du pays ou est situ6 le semaphore 
charg6 de les signaler, soit au moyen de 
groupes de lettres du code international 
de signaux. 

M 5- Pour les t16grammes d'Etat 
s6maphoriques exp6di6s d'un navire en 
mer, le sceau est remplace par le signe 
distinctif du commandement. 
[ 6-12 omis.] 

CHAPITRE XIX 

RADIOT^L^GRAMMES 

ARTICLE 66. RadioteUgrammes 

[ 55 ] Le service des radiote!6grammes 
s'effectue conform6ment aux dispositions 
des Rglements des radiocommunications. 

CHAPITRE XX 
T&UEGRAMMES-MANDATS 

ARTICLE 67. Telegrammes-mandats 

[ 661 ] I. L'mission, la redaction du 
texte et le payement des t616grammes- 
mandats sont regies par des conventions 
sp6ciales inter nationales. 
[ 55a ] 2. Si la locality ou se trouve le 
bureau postal payeur n'est pas pourvue 
d'un bureau te!6graphique, le t61gramme- 
mandat doit porter Findication du bureau 
postal payeur et celle du bureau t616- 
graphique qui le dessert. 
[ 65S ] 3 C 1 ) Les t616grammes-mandats 
sont admis a la taxe des t&grammes dif- 
f6res, sous reserve de Tapplication des 
dispositions de Particle 75. Us portent 
Tindication de Service taxee =LC = . 

[ S54 ] (2) Les conditions fixeesj pour la 
redaction des t616grammes diff&res ne 
doivent tre observers dans les tele- 
grammes-mandats difif6r6s, que pour ce 
qui concerne les communications des- 
tindes au b^n^ficiaire du mandat. 
[ 5fi5 ] 4. La transmission des tele- 
grammes-mandats, lorsque cette trans- 
mission est admise entre les administra- 
tions en correspondance, est soumise aux 
mimes regies que les autres cat^goties de 
t^!6grammes, sous reserve des prescrip- 
tions qui font Tobjet des articles 40, 8, 
44, i, 2et3,et45, 3 (2). 



234 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



CHAPTER XXI 

PRESS TELEGRAMS 

ARTICLE 68. Conditions of admission 

[ 666 ] I. Telegrams of which the text 
consists of information and news relating 
to politics, commerce, etc., intended for 
publication in newspapers and other 
periodical publications, are admitted as 
press telegrams at reduced rates. These 
telegrams must bear, at the beginning of 
the address, the paid service indication 
= Presse = written by the sender. 

[ 6B7 ] 2. Press telegrams are only ac- 
cepted on presentation of special cards 
which the Administration of the country 
where the cards are used prepares and de- 
livers to the correspondents of newspapers, 
periodical publications or authorised 
agencies. The presentation of cards is 
not obligatory, however, if the Adminis- 
tration of origin decides otherwise. 

[ B88 ] 3- Press telegrams must be ad- 
dressed to newspapers, periodical publica- 
tions or news agencies and solely in the 
name of the newspaper, publication, or 
agency and not in the name of a person 
connected in any capacity whatever with 
the management of the newspaper, pub- 
lication or agency. They must only con- 
tain matter intended for publication and 
instructions relative to the publication of 
the telegram. Any passage of the latter 
kind must be written between brackets 
either at the beginning or the end of the 
text. The number of words contained in 
the whole of the instructions relating to a 
single telegram may not be more than 5 
per cent, of the number of chargeable 
words in the text or exceed ten words in 
all. The brackets are charged for. A.d- 
ministrations which have prepared a list 
of newspapers, publications or agencies 
authorised to receive press telegrams, on 
undertaking to conform with all the con- 
ditions laid down in the Regulations, must 
communicate such list to the other Ad- 
ministrations through the medium of the 
Bureau of the Union. 



[] 4. The use of abbreviated and 
registered addresses is authorised. 
[ 6GO ] 5. Apart from the paid service in- 
dication = Presse =, press telegrams may 
not bear any paid service indication other 



CHAPITRE XXI 

T&L&GRAMMES DE PRESSE 

ARTICLE 68. Conditions d j admission 

[sac] i. Sont admis comme^ t616- 
grammes de presse a tarif reeluit ceux 
dont le texte est constitu6 par des in- 
formations et nouvelles politiques, com- 
merciales, etc., destinies a. tre publi6es 
dans les journaux et autres publications 
periodiques. Ces telgrammes compor- 
tent obligatoirement, en t6te de Tadresse, 
Tindication de service taxee = Presse =, 
inscrite par Texp6diteur. 
[ 5B7 ] 2. Les te!6grammes de presse ne 
sont accepted au depart que sur la presen- 
tation de cartes spciales que F adminis- 
tration du pays ou ces cartes sont utilises 
fait etablir et deliyrer aux correspondants 
de journaux, publications periodiques ou 
agences autorisees. Toutefois, la presen- 
tation de cartes n'est pas obligatoire si 
1'administration de depart en decide 
autrement. 

[ BB8 ] 3- Les teiegrammes de presse 
doivent 8tre adress6s a des journaux, 
publications periodiques ou agences de 
publicity et seulement au nom du journal, 
de la publication ou de Tagence, et non 
pas au nom d'une personne attached a un 
titre quelconque a la direction du journal, 
de la publication ou de 1'agence. Us 
doivent contenir seulement des matieres 
destinies a tre publie'es et des instruc- 
tions relatives a la publication du tele- 
gramme. Tout passage de cette derniere 
categorie doit tre mis entre parentheses 
et ecrit soit au commencement, soit a la 
fin du texte. Le nombre de mots con- 
tenus dans la totalite des instructions rela- 
tives a un seul t616gramme peut s'elever 
jusqu'a 5 p. 100 du nombre des mots tax6s 
du texte, sous condition qu'il ne depasse 
pas dix mots. Les parentheses sont a 
taxer. Les administrations qui ont dress6 
une liste des journaux, publications ou 
agences autoris6s a recevoir des te!6- 
grammes de presse, apres s'6tre engagees 
a se conformer a toutes les conditions 
fix6es par le R^glement, doivent cpm- 
muniquer cette liste aux autres adminis- 
trations, par rinterm6diaire du Bureau de 
1'Union. 

[ 559 ] 4. L'usage- d'adresses abre"g6es et 
enregistr^es est autoris. 
[ 6GO ] 5- En dehors de 1'indication de 
service tax6e = Presse = , les tei6grammes 
de presse ne peuvent porter d 'autres indi- 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



235 



than those relating to urgent telegrams 
and multiple telegrams. 

[ S81 ] 6. The terminal and transit rates 
applicable to ordinary press telegrams ex- 
changed between Administrations of the 
Union are those of ordinary private tele- 
grams, reduced by 50 per cent, in the 
European system and by at least 50 per 
cent, in all other cases, 
pea] j t The charge per word for an 
urgent press telegram is the same as for 
an ordinary private telegram over the 
same route. 

[ 563 ] 8. The copying fee for multiple 
press telegrams is the same as for ordi- 
nary private multiple telegrams. 

[ 564 ] 9- Administrations which collect 
a minimum charge for ordinary telegrams 
[Art. 26, 3 (&)] collect the same minimum 
for press messages. 

[ 56S ] 10. (i) Administrations which 
do not admit press telegrams (either ordi- 
nary or urgent) at the reduced rate, must 
accept them in transit. 

[566] (2) The transit rate which these 
Administrations receive is that which re- 
sults from the application of the provisions 
of 6 or of 7 of this article, according to 
whether ordinary or urgent press tele- 
grams are concerned, 

ARTICLE 69. Drawing up of press 
telegrams 

[ B67 ] i. (i) Press telegrams must be 
expressed in plain language in one of the 
languages admitted for international tele- 
graph correspondence in plain language, 
chosen from among the following lan- 
guages: 

[BBS] ( ) the French language; 
[sea] (&) the language in which the receiv- 
ing newspaper is printed ; 
[ 67 ] (G) the national language or lan- 
guages of the country of origin or the 
country of destination, designated by the 
Administrations concerned; 
[ 671 ] (<0 o ne r more additional lan- 
guages which may be designated by the 
Administration of origin or the Adminis- 
tration of destination as being used in the 
territory of the country to which they 
belong. 

[ 572 ] (2) The sender of a press telegram 
drawn up in accordance with sub-para- 
graph (6) above may be required to fur- 



cations de service taxdes que celles rela- 
tives aux te!6grammes urgents et aux 
telegrammes multiples. 
[ 6G1 ] 6. Les taxes terminales et de 
transit applicables aux telegrammes de 
presse ordinaires echanges entre les ad- 
ministrations de P Union sont celles des 
telegrammes prives ordinaires, reduites 
de 50 p. i oo dans le regime europeen et d'au 
moins 50 p. 100 dans les autres relations. 
[ 662 ] 7. La taxe par mot a percevoir 
pour un telegramme de presse urgent est 
celle aff&rente a un telegramme priv6 
ordinaire pour le mme parcours. 
[ 663 ] 8. Le droit de copie des tele- 
grammes de presse multiples est celui 
afferent aux telegrammes prives ordi- 
naires multiples. 

[ 664 ] 9. Les administrations qui per- 
coivent un minimum de taxe pour les 
telegrammes ordinaires [art. 26, 3 (b)] 
percpivent le mme minimum pour les 
correspondances de presse. 
[BBS] Ia (j) Les administrations qui 
n'admettent pas les tel6grammes de 
presse (soit ordinaires, soit urgents), au 
tarif reduit, doivent les accepter en 
transit. 

[ 566 ] (2) La taxe de transit qui revient & 
ces administrations est, selon qu'il s'agit 
de telegrammes de presse ordinaires ou de 
t61egrammes de presse urgents, celle qui 
decoule de Papplication des dispositions 
du 6 ou du 7 du pr6sent article. 

ARTICLE 69. Redaction des telegrammes 
de presse 

[ 587 ] i. (i) Les telegrammes de presse 
doivent tre rediges en langage clair, dans 
une des langues admises pour la cor- 
respondance te!6graphique internationale, 
et choisie parmi les langues suivantes: 



(#) lalangue franchise; 
(&) 



[ 5 9 ] (&) lalangue dans laquelle est redig6 

le journal destinataire; 

[ 57 ] (c) la ou les langues nationales du 

pays d'origine ou du pays de destination, 

designees par les administrations in- 

teressees; 

[ fi71 ] (d) une ou plusieurs langues sup- 

plementaires designees 6ventuellenient 

par Padministration d'origine ou par Pad- 

ministration de destination comme etant 

usit6es sur le territoire du pays auquel 

elles appartiennent. 

[] (2) L'expediteur d'un telegramme 

de presse redig6 conformement au littera 

(&) ci-dessus peut ^tre tenu de fournir la 



236 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



nish proof that there is a newspaper in the 
country of destination of the telegram, 

Published in the language chosen. 
i7? ] 2. The languages mentioned in i 
above may be used for quotations con- 
jointly with that in which the telegram is 
expressed. 

[ 574 ] 3- Apart from the exception pro- 
vided for in Article 68, 3, press tele- 
grams must not contain any passage, ad- 
vertisement or communication having the 
character of private correspondence nor 
any advertisement or communication for 
the insertion of which a charge is made. 
Further they must not contain any ad- 
vertisement which is inserted free of 
charge. 

[ 575 ] 4. Exchange and market quota- 
tions, and results of sporting events, with 
or without explanatory text, are admitted 
in press telegrams at reduced rates. In 
case of doubt, the office of origin must 
satisfy itself that the groups of figures ap- 
pearing in the telegrams really represent 
exchange and market quotations or results 
of sporting events, by enquiry of the 
sender, who is bound to establish the fact. 

ARTICLE 70. Application of the normal 
tariff to press telegrams 

[ 576 ] i, When telegrams presented as 
press telegrams do not fulfil the conditions 
set oiit in the previous article, the indica- 
tion = Presse =* is deleted and the tele- 
grams are charged at the rate for the cate- 
gory (ordinary or urgent) to which they 
belong. 

[5"] 2. The normal tariff for private 
correspondence (ordinary or urgent) is 
also to be applied to any press telegram of 
which use is made for a purpose other than 
that of insertion in the columns of the 
newspaper or periodical publication to 
which it is addressed, that is: 
[ m ] (a) to telegrams which are not pub- 
lished by the newspaper or periodical 
publication to which they are addressed 
(failing a satisfactory explanation) or 
which the addressee has communicated 
before publication either to private indi- 
viduals or to establishments such as clubs, 
cafs, hotels, exchanges, etc. ; 
[579] () to telegrams not yet published 
which the newspaper or periodical publi- 
cation to which they are addressed has, 
before publishing them, sold, distributed 
or communicated to other newspapers, 
with a view to insertion in their columns; 



preuve qu'il existe, dans le pays de desti- 
nation du t616gramme, un journal publi6 
dans la langue qu'il a choisie. 
[ 57S ] 2, Les langues mentionn6es au i 
ci-dessus peuvent tre employees & titre de 
citations conjointement avec celle dans 
laquelle est redige le telegramme. 
[ 574 ] 3* Sous reserve de 1'exception 
prvue par 1'article 68, 3, les t&6- 
grammes de presse ne doivent contenir 
aucun passage, annonce ou communica- 
tion ayant le caractere de correspondance 
privee ni aucune annonce ou communica- 
tion dont Finsertipn est faite & titre 
onreux; de mSme, ils ne doivent contenir 
aucune annonce dont 1'insertion est faite 
titre gratuit. 

[ 57B ] 4. Les cours de bourse et de 
marche, les resultats sportifs, avec ou sans 
texte explicatif , sont admis dans les tele- 
grammes de presse & tarif reduit. Les 
bureaux d'origine doivent, en cas de 
doute, s'assurer aupr&s de Texp6diteur, 
qui est tenu d'en justifier, si les groupes 
de chiffres figurant dans ces t&egrammes 
reprsentent bien des cours de bourse et 
de march6 ou des resultats sportifs. 

ARTICLE 70. Application du tarif normal 
aux telegrammes de presse 

[ S7e ] i. Lorsque les t616grammes pre*- 
sente"s comme tel6grammes de presse ne 
remplissent pas les conditions indi- 
quees par 1'article precedent, 1'indication 
= Presse = est biffee et ces telegrammes 
sont taxes d'apres le tarif de la cat6gorie 
(ordinaire ou urgente) & laquelle ils 
appartiennent* 

[$ 77 ] 2. Le tarif normal des correspon- 
dances privies (prdinaires ou urgentes) est 
egalement applicable & tout telegramme 
de presse dont il est fait usage dans un but 
autre que celui de son insertion dans les 
colonnes du journal ou de la publication 
p&riodique destinataire, c'est-&~dire: 
[ 678 ] (a) aux t616grammes qui ne sont 
pas publics par le journal ou la publication 
p6ripdique destinataire (& moins d j une 
explication satisfaisante) ou que le desti- 
nataire a communiques ayant publication, 
soit des particuliers, soit IL des 6tablisse- 
ments telsque clubs, cafs, h6tels, bourses, 
etc.; 

[ 57 ] (&) aux telegrammes non encore 
publics que le journal ou la publication 
periodique destinataire a vendus, dis- 
tribuSs ou communiques, avant de les 
publier, & d'autres journaux, en vue 4e 
leur insertion dans leur$ propres colonnes ; 



Dec. 10. 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



237 



press telegrams may, however, be sold, 
distributed or communicated for simul- 
taneous publication; 

[ 58 ] (c) to telegrams, addressed to agen- 
cies, which are not published in a news- 
paper (failing a satisfactory explanation) 
or which are communicated to third per- 
sons before being published by the press. 
t 581 ] 3- I n the cases contemplated in 
2, the balance of charge is collected from 
the addressee and retained by the Ad- 
ministration of destination. 

ARTICLE 71. Transmission and delivery 
of press telegrams 

[ 582 ] According to the category to which 
they belong (ordinary or urgent), press 
telegrams rank for transmission and 
delivery, with ordinary or urgent private 
telegrams. 

ARTICLE 72. General provisions 

[ 583 ] I. In regard to anything not pro- 
vided for in Articles 68 to 71 and in this 
article, press telegrams are subject to the 
provisions of these Regulations and of 
special agreements concluded between 
Administrations. 

[ 584 ] 2 . The provisions concerning press 
telegrams are not obligatory, for Ad- 
ministrations which declare their inability 
to apply them, except in regard to the ac- 
ceptance of press telegrams in transit. 
The conditions of transmission may be 
modified by mutual agreement between 
the Administrations concerned. 



CHAPTER XXII 

METEOROLOGICAL TELEGRAMS 

ARTICLE 73. Meteorological telegrams 

[ 585 ] i. (i) The term "meteorological 
telegram" denotes a telegram sent by an 
official meteorological service or by a sta- 
tion in official relation with such a service, 
and addressed to such a service or to such 
a station, which consists solely of mete* 
orological observations or meteorological 
forecasts, 

[ 688 1 (2) Such telegrams must bear the 
paid service indication =50BS= before 
the address. 

[ 587 ] 2. The terminal and transit rates 
applicable to the meteorological telegrams 
contemplated in the previous paragraph 



les telgrammes de presse peuvent, toute- 
fois, 6tre vendus, distribues ou com- 
muniques pour publication simultanee; 
[ 58 ] (c) aux teJegrammes, adresses aux 
agences, qui ne sont pas publics dans un 
journal (& moins d'une explication satis- 
faisante) ou qui sont communiques & 
des tiers avant d'etre publics par la presse. 
[ 681 1 3- Dans les cas prevus au 2, le 
compliment de taxe est percu sur le des- 
tinataire, au profit de radministration 
d'arrivde. 

ARTICLE 71- 'Transmission et remise des 
telegrammes de presse 

[ fiaa ] Selon la categoric a laquelle ils ap- 
partiennent (ordinaires ou urgents), les 
telegrammes de presse prennent rang, 
tant pour la transmission que pour la 
remise, parmi les telegrammes prives 
ordinaires ou urgents. 

ARTICLE 72. Dispositions diver ses 

[ m ] i . Pour tout ce qui n'est pas pr6vu 
dans les articles 68 a 71 et dans le present 
article, les telegrammes de presse sont 
sounds aux dispositions du present R&gle- 
ment et des conventions particulieres 
conclues entre administrations. 
[ B84 ] 2. Les dispositions visant les t616- 
grammes de presse ne sont obligatoires, 
pour les administrations qui declarent ne 
pas pouvoir les appliquer, qu'en ce qui 
concerne 1' acceptation des te!6grammes 
de presse en transit. Les conditions de 
transmission peuvent tre modifie'es d'un 
commun accord par les administrations 
int6ressees. 

CHAPITRE XXII 

TLGRAMMES MTOROLOGIQUES 
ARTICLE 73. Telegrammes meteorologiques 

[ fi86 ] i. (j) Leterme"tel6grarnmeme- 
teorologique" d6signe un telegramme en- 
vqy par un service mteorologique officiel 
QU par une station en relation officielle 
avec un tel service, et adress6 4 un tel 
service ou fr une telle station, et qui con- 
tient exclusivement des observations 
meteorologiques ou des provisions m^te- 
orologiques. 

[ 68S ] (2) Ces telegrammes comportent 
obligatoirement, en tSte de Tadresse, Vin- 
dication de service tax6e =pBS=. 
[s* 7 ] 2. Les taxes terminales et de 
transit applicables aux telegrammes mte- 
orologiques considered au paragraphe 



238 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



are reduced by at least 50 per cent, in all 
relations. 

[ B88 ] 3- On request by the counter offi- 
cer, the sender must affirm that the text 
of his telegram fulfils the conditions set 
out in i (i). 

CHAPTER XXIII 

RADIOCOMMUNICATIONS TO SEVERAL 
DESTINATIONS 

ARTICLE 74. Radiocommunications to 
several destinations 

[ B89 ] I- (i) The Administrations re- 
serve to themselves the right to organise 
services for the transmission of radio- 
communications to several destinations 
by wireless telegraphy or wireless teleph- 
ony. 

[ 59 ] (2) Only those senders and ad- 
dressees who satisfy the provisions and 
conditions laid down specially by the re- 
spective Administrations are allowed to 
participate in these services. 
I 591 ] (3) These radiocommunications 
must consist only of information and 
news relating to politics, commerce, etc., 
and must not contain any passage, ad- 
vertisement or communication having a 
private character. 

[ Sfl2 ] 2. (i) The sender is bound to com- 
municate to the Administration of the 
country of emission the addresses of the 
intended recipients. This Administra- 
tion communicates to the other Adminis- 
trations the address of the persons resid- 
ing in their territory for whom the 
radiocommunications are intended. It 
notifies, in addition, in respect of each 
addressee, the date fixed for the first re- 
ception, the name of the emitting station 
and the address of the sender. The Ad- 
ministrations notify to one another any 
changes which occur in the number and 
the addresses of the senders and recipients. 
[e&3] ( 2 ) The Administration of the coun- 
try of reception decides whether or not to 
authorise the addressees designated by 
the sender to receive the radiocommunica- 
tions, and makes the necessary notifica- 
tion to the Administration of the country 
of emission. 

[ 694 ] (3) Each Administration takes, so 
far as practicable, suitable measures to 
ensure that only the stations authorised 
for this special service of communication 
make use of the radiocommunications in 
question and then only of those intended 



prec6dent sont reduites d'au moins 50 p. 
100 dans toutes les relations. 
[ fi88 ] 3- Sur demande de 1'agent du 
guichet, Texpediteur doit declarer que le 
texte de son t61egramme correspond aux 
conditions fixees au I (i). 

CHAPITRE XXIII 

RADIOCOMMUNICATIONS A MULTIPLES 
DESTINATIONS 

ARTICLE 74. Radiocommunications d 
multiples destinations 

[ 589 ] i. (i) Les administrations se r6- 
servent la faculte d'organiser des services 
de transmission par telegraphic sans fil ou 
par t61ephonie sans fil de radiocommuni- 
cations a multiples destinations. 

[ 69 ] (2) Seuls les expediteurs et destina- 
taires qui satisfont aux prescriptions et 
conditions sp6cialement etablies par les 
administrations respectives sont admis & 
participer auxdits services, 
[59i] QJ) Ces radiocommunications doi- 
vent tre constitutes par des informations 
et nouvelles politiques, commerciales, 
etc., et ne doivent contenir aucun passage, 
annonce ou communication ayant un 
caractere prive. 

[ fi92 ] 2, (i) L'expediteur est tenu de 
communiquer les adresses des destina- 
taires a Fadministration du pays d'emis- 
sion. Celle-ci communique aux autres 
administrations Tadresse des destinataires 
qui sont etablis sur leur territoire. Elle 
notifie, en outre, pour chacun de ces 
destinataires, la date fixee pour la pre- 
miere r6ception, ainsi que le nom de la sta- 
tion d'emission et 1'adresse de 1'expediteur. 
Les administrations se notifient mutuelle- 
ment les changements intervenus dans le 
nombre et les adresses des expediteurs et 
des destinataires. 

[693] ( 2 ) ii appartient & I'administration 
du pays de reception d'autoriser ou non 
les destinataires d6sign6s par 1'expediteur 
a recevoir les radiocommunications, en 
faisant les communications n6cessaires a 
Tadministration du pays d' emission. 

[594] (3) Chaque administration prend, 
autant que possible, les mesures appro- 
priees en vue de s'assurer que seules les 
stations autorisees pour ce service special 
de communication font usage des radio- 
communications en question et unique- 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



239 



for them. The provisions of Article 24 
of the Convention relating to the secrecy 
of telecommunication apply to these 
radiocommunications. 

[ 595 ] 3* (i) These radiocommunica- 
tions are transmitted at fixed times and 
bear, as the address, an arbitrary word 
placed immediately before the text. 

[ m ] (2) They may be expressed either in 
plain language or in secret language, in 
accordance with the decision of the Ad- 
ministrations of the countries of emission 
and of reception. In the absence of spe- 
cial arrangements between the Adminis- 
trations concerned, the only languages 
authorised for plain language are French, 
one of the languages designated by the 
country of emission or one of the languages 
of one of the countries of reception. The 
Administrations of the countries of emis- 
sion and of reception reserve to them- 
selves the right to require the deposit of 
the codes used. 

[ 89T ] 4. (i) The charge to be collected 
from the sender is fixed by the Adminis- 
tration of the country of emission, 
[ B9S ] (2) The addressees of these radio- 
communications may be subjected by the 
Administration of their country, apart 
from any charges levied for the establish- 
ment and working of private receiving 
stations, to the payment of a telegraph 
or telephone charge of which the amount 
and the method of assessment are fixed by 
that Administration. 

[ m ] (3) The charges for these radio- 
communications do not enter into the 
international accounts. 

CHAPTER XXIV 

REDUCED RATE TELEGRAMS 

[Articles 75-77 omitted. Deferred tele- 
grams. Letter telegrams. Greetings tele- 
grams.] 

CHAPTER XXV 

GOVERNMENT TELEGRAMS 

ARTICLE 78. Provisions peculiar to Gov- 
ernment telegrams 

[ 66 ] i. Government telegrams must 
bear the seal or stamp of the authority 
which sends them. This procedure is not 
required when the genuineness of the 
telegram cannot give rise to doubt. 



ment^de celles qui leur sont destinies. 
Les dispositions de 1'article 24 de la Con- 
vention, ^ relatives au secret des t616- 
communications, s'appliquent a ces radio- 
communications. 

t 595 ] 3* W Ces radiocommunications 
sont transmises a heures fixes et com- 
portent comme adresse un mot conven- 
tionnel plac6 imm6diatement avant le 
texte. 

[596] ( 2 ) Elles peuvent Stre r6dig6es soit 
en langage clair, soit en langage secret, 
d'apr&s la decision des administrations des 
pays d'emission et de reception. Sauf 
arrangements speciaux entre les adminis- 
trations inte'resse'es, les seules langues 
autorisees pour le langage clair sont le 
frangais, Tune des langues d6signees par 
le pays d'origine, ou Tune des langues d'un 
des pays de destination. Les administra- 
tions des pays demission et de reception 
se rservent le droit de demander le depdt 
des codes utilises. 



[ 597 ] 4- (i) La taxe perceyoir sur 
1'expediteur est fixee par radministration 
du pays demission. 

[ 598 ] (2) Les destinataires de ces radio- 
communications peuvent 6tre greve~s par 
radministration de leur pays, en dehors 
des charges preVues pour l'6tablissement 
et 1' exploitation eVentuels des stations 
privies receptrices, d'une taxe tele*- 
graphique ou t616phoniquedontlemontant 
et les modalit6s sont de" termin6s par cette 
administration. 

[ 599 j (3) Les taxes de ces radiocommuni- 
cations n'entrent pas dans les comptes 
i nternationaux. 

CHAPITRE XXIV 

T&L&GRAMMES A TARIF R&DTJIT 

[Articles 75-77 omis. Telegrammes dif- 
feres. Lettres-telegrammes. Telegrammes 
de felicitations.] 

CHAPITRE XXV 

T&UEGRAMMES D'ETAT 

ARTICLE 78. Dispositions particulilres 
aux telegrammes d'Etat 

[ 66 ] i. Les telegrammes d'Etat doivent 
tre revtus du sceau ou du cachet de 
1 'au torit6 qui les expMie. Cette formalite 
n'est pas exigible lorsque 1'authenticit^ du 
t61e"gramme ne peut soulever aucun doute. 



240 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No. 320 



[ 661 ] 2. The right to send a reply as a 
Government telegram Is established by 
the production of the original Government 
telegram. 

[ m ] 3- The telegrams of consular 
agents carrying on private business are 
only regarded as Government telegrams 
when they are addressed to an official 
person, and relate to official matters. 
Telegrams which do not fulfil these latter 
conditions are, however, accepted by 
telegraph offices and transmitted as Gov- 
ernment telegrams; but these offices at 
once report the matter to the Adminis- 
tration to which they are subject. 

[ 66S ] 4. Exceptionally, telegrams re- 
lating to the application of Articles 15 
and 1 6 of the Covenant of the League of 
Nations, exchanged in case of danger of 
war, between the President of the Coun- 
cil of the League of Nations or the Secre- 
tary General on the one hand, and a 
minister who is a member of a Govern- 
ment, a member of the Council of the 
League of Nations, or a member of a 
mission despatched by the Council, on 
the other hand, are entitled to a priority 
superior to that given to Government 
telegrams with priority. These telegrams 
bear in the preamble the instruction 
"S Priority Nations", and the sender 
must write before the address the indica- 
tion " = Priority Nations =< " which is 
chargeable as two words. They are only 
accepted if they bear the personal au- 
thorisation of one of the official persons 
mentioned above. 

[ 664 ] 5- The sender of a Government 
telegram may renounce the priority of 
transmission conferred by Article 30 of 
the Convention* in that case the original 
telegram must bear the instruction "sans 
priority" (not priority) written by the 
sender, and the telegrarn is treated, as 
regards order of transmission, like an 
ordinary private telegram. 
[ 665 ] 6. Government telegrams which 
do not fulfil the conditions stated in 
Articles 9, 10 and n are not refused, but 
they are reported by the office which 
observes the irregularities to the Admin- 
istration to which it is subject, 
[eee] g y (j) Government telegrams bear 
the service instruction "Etat ; this in- 
struction is officially inserted by the office 
of origin at the end of the preamble. 
[ 667 ] (2) Government telegrams bearing 
the instruction "CDE" are admitted at 



[ 661 ] 2. Le droit d'emettre une reponse 
comme telegramme d'Etat est etabli par 
la production du telegramme d'Etat 
primitif. 

t 682 ] 3- L GS telegrammes des agents 
consulaires qui exercent le commerce 
ne sont consid6res comrne telegrammes 
d'Etat que lorsqu'ils sont adress^s a 
un personnage officiel et qu'ils traitent 
d'affaires de service. Toutefois, les tele- 
grammes qui ne remplissent pas ces 
dernieres conditions sont acceptes par les 
bureaux et transmis comme telegrammes 
d'Etat; mais ces bureaux les signalent 
immediatement 1'administration dont 
ils relevent. 

[ 6fi3 ] 4. A titre exceptionnel, les t616- 
grammes relatifs & 1' application des arti- 
cles 15 et 1 6 du pacte de la Societ6 des 
Nations echanges en cas de danger de 
guerre, entre le president du conseil de la 
Societe des Nations ou le secretaire 
general, d'une part, et un ministre mem- 
bre d'un gouvernement, un membre du 
conseil de la Societe des Nations ou un 
membre d'une mission envoy 6e par le 
conseil, d'autre part, jouissent d'une 
priorite superieure a celle accorde aux 
telegrammes d'Etat avec priorite. Ces 
telegrammes portent en preambule 1'indi- 
cation "S Priorite Nations", et 1'expedi- 
teur doit inscrire avant I'adresse: " = Pri- 
orite Nations = ", indication qui est taxee 
pour deux mots. Ils ne sont acceptes que 
s'ils sont reve"tus de I'autorisation person- 
nelle d'une des personnalites indiquees 
ci-dessus. 

[ 684 ] 5. L'expediteur d'un telegramme 
d'Etat peut renoncer la priorite de 
transmission etablie par 1'article 30 de la 
Convention; dans ce cas, la minute du 
telegramme doit porter la mention "sans 
priorite" inscrite par 1'expediteur, et ce 
telegramme est traite, dans 1'ordre de 
transmission, comme un telegramme 
prive ordinaire. 

f 666 ] 6. Les telegrammes d'Etat qui ne 
remplissent pas les conditions visees aux 
articles 9, 10 et n ne sont pas refuses, 
mais ils sont signals par le bureau qui 
constate les irregularites & 1'administra- 
tion dont ce bureau releve. 
[ 666 ] 7- (i) Les telegrammes d'Etat 
portent la mention de service "Etat"; 
cette mention est inseree d'office par le 
bureau d'origine & la fin du preambule. 
[ 667 ] (2) Les telegrammes d'Etat portant 
la mention "CDE" sont admis au tarif 



Dec. 10, 1932 



TELEGRAPH REGULATIONS 



241 



the reduced rate and retain the benefit of 
priority in transmission. 
[ 668 ] 8. For Government telegrams ex- 
pressed in plain language, partial repeti- 
tion is compulsory; those expressed 
wholly or partially in secret language 
(Art. 31 of the Convention) must be re- 
peated in full as a matter of course by the 
receiving office or by the sending office, 
according to the system of transmission 
used (Art. 44). 

CHAPTER XXVI 

SERVICE TELEGRAMS AND SERVICE ADVICES 

[Articles 79-80 omitted. Service tele- 
grams and service advices. Paid service 
advices.] 

CHAPTER XXVII 

PARTIAL AND TOTAL REIMBURSEMENTS 

[Articles 81-84 omitted. Cases of re- 
imbursement of charges. Procedure for 
reimbursements. A dministration which, in 
each case, must bear the cost of reimburse- 
ment. Administration which bears the 
cost of reimbursement in the case of stoppage 
of telegrams.] 

CHAPTER XXVIII 

ACCOUNTING 

ARTICLE 85. Administrations which es- 
tablish the accounts 

[ 772 ] i. The gold franc, as defined by 
Article 32 of the Convention, is used as 
the monetary unit in the establishment 
of the international accounts. 
[ 773 ] 2. (i) Unless otherwise arranged, 
each Administration carries the share of 
the charges accruing to it to the debk of 
the Administration with which it is in 
direct contact and, when necessary, the 
share of the charges proper to the sections 
of the route to be covered beyond its 
territory, in respect of all telegrams which 
have been received from that Adminis- 
tration, without regard to reductions 
accorded to Government telegrams over 
certain lines; such reductions are the sub- 
ject of a special settlement between the 
Administrations concerned. 
[ 774 ] (2) As regards communications by 
direct wires between two non-Hmitrophic 
countries, the Administration which has 
received the telegrams prepares the ac- 



rduit tout en conservant le benefice de la 
priorite de transmission. 
[ 668 ] 8. Les telegrammes d'Etat redigs 
en langage clair donnent lieu a une repeti- 
tion partielle obligatoire; ceux qui sont 
redig6s totalement ou partiellement en 
langage secret (art, 31 de la Convention) 
doivent 6tre r6p6ts intgralement et 
d'office par le bureau recepteur ou par le 
bureau transmetteur, suivant le systeme 
de transmission employ 6 (art. 44). 

CHAPITRE XXVI 



DE SERVICE ET AVIS DE 
SERVICE 

[Articles 79-80 omis. Telegrammes de 
service et avis de service. Avis de service 
taxes.] 

CHAPITRE XXVII 

D&TAXES ET REMBOURSEMENTS 

[Articles 81-84 omis. Cas de rem- 
boursement de taxes. Procedure applicable 
aux remboursements. Administration qui, 
dans chaque cas, doit supporter le rem- 
boursement. Administration qui doit sup- 
porter le remboursement en cas d'arrtt des 
telegrammes.] 

CHAPITRE XXVIII 

COMPT ABILIT& 

ARTICLE 85. Administrations qui eta- 
Uissent les comptes 

[ 772 ] i. Le franc-or, tel qu'il est deftni 
a Tarticle 32 de la Convention, sert d'unite 
mon6taire dans Tetablissement des 
comptes internationaux. 
[ 773 ] 2. (i) Sauf entente contraire, 
chaque administration porte les parts de 
taxes qui lui reviennent au d6bit de 
radministration avec laquelle elle corre- 
spond directement et, le cas echdant, les 
parts de taxes afferentes aux parcours & 
effectuer au dela de son territoire, pour 
tous les telegrammes qu'elle a reus de 
cette administration, sans tenir compte 
des reductions accordees aux telegrammes 
d'Etat sur certaines lignes; ces reductions 
font 1'objet d'un reglement special entre 
les administrations interesses. 

[ 77 *] (2) En ce qui concerne les com- 
munications par fils directs entre deux 
pays non limitrophes, 1 'administration 
qui a regu les telegrammes dresse le 



242 



INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION 



No, 320 



count of the charges due in respect of all 
sections of the route to the destination, 
indicating separately the share which 
accrues to each Administration concerned. 
After acceptance of the account by the 
Administration which has transmitted 
the telegrams, the Administration which 
has prepared the account forwards one 
copy to each of the intermediate Ad- 
ministrations. 

[ m ] (3) Each Administration debits the 
preceding Administration with the share 
of the charges accruing to itself and the 
share of the charges proper to the sections 
of the route beyond its territory. 
[ m ] 3- Terminal charges may be set- 
tled directly between the extreme Ad- 
ministrations, after agreement between 
the latter and the intermediate Admin- 
istrations. 

[ m ] 4. In cases where Article 97 ap- 
plies, the contracting Administration in 
direct relation with the non-acceding 
Administration settles the accounts be- 
tween the latter and the other con- 
tracting Administrations to which it has 
been intermediary in transmission. 

ARTICLE 86. Establishment of accounts 

[ 778 1 i. (i) The accounts are based on 
the number of words transmitted during 
the month, distinction being made be- 
tween the various categories of telegrams, 
and account being taken : 
[ 779 1 (#) when necessary, of certain ac- 
cessory charges; 

[TSO] () o f the minimum charge applied 
to CDE telegrams of the extra-European 
system; 

[ 781 ] fc) of the minimum charge applied 
to letter telegrams and to greetings tele- 
grams of both systems. 

[ 78 *1 (2) In the case of CDE telegrams, 
the coefficients fixed in Article 10, 4, are 
applied to the full rate charges after these 
have been multiplied by the total number 
of words. 

[ 78S ] 2. The charge which serves as 
basis for the division between the Ad- 
ministrations is that which results from 
the ordinary application of the tariffs ar- 
ranged between the Administrations con- 
cerned, without regard to errors in charge 
which may have occurred. 
[ 784 ] 3- The number of words an- 
nounced by the office of origin serves as 
basis for the application of the charge, ex- 
cept in cases where, following an error in 



compte des taxes dues, pour tout le par- 
cours jusqu'a destination, en indiquant 
separement la part qui revient & chaque 
administration intressee. Apres accep- 
tation de son compte par I'administration 
qui a transmis les telegrammes, Tad mi- 
nistration qui Pa 6tabli en envoie une 
copie a chacune des administrations 
intermediates. 

[775] (3) Chaque administration debite 
celle qui la precede des parts de taxes qui 
lui reviennent a elle-mme et des parts 
de taxes affrentes au parcours au delct 
de son territoire. 

[ m ] 3- Les taxes terminal es peuvent 
toe liquidees directement entre les 
administrations extremes, apres entente 
entre ces dernieres et les administrations 
interm&iiaires. 

[ m ] 4. Dans le cas d'application de 
1'article 97, 1 'administration contractante 
en relation directe avec radministration 
non adh&rente est charged de r6gler les 
comptes entre celle-ci et les autres con- 
tractants auxquels elle a servi d'inter- 
mdiaire pour la transmission. 

ARTICLE 86. Etablissement des comptes 

[ m ] i. (i) Les comptes sont 6tablis 
d'apres le nombre de mots transmis 
pendant le mois, distinction faite des 
diverses categories de t616grammes et 
compte tenu : 

[ 779 ] (a) 6ventuellenient, de certaines 
taxes accessoires ; 

[ 78 ] (&) du minimum de perception 
appliqu6 aux t616grammes CDE du 
regime extra-europeen ; 
[ 781 ] (c) du minim